CL 2000i 2200i

CL-2000i/CL-2200i
Chemiluminescence Immunoassay
Analyzer
Service Manual
Volume I
2014 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All rights Reserved.
For this Service Manual, the issued Date is 2014-07 (Version: 1.0).
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer i

Service Manual Version: 1.0
Intellectual Property Statement
SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual.
This manual may refer to information protected by copyrights or patents and does not
convey any license under the patent rights of Mindray, nor the rights of others. Mindray
does not assume any liability arising out of any infringements of patents or other rights
of third parties.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the
written permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rent, adaption and translation of this
manual in any manner whatsoever without the written permission of Mindray is strictly
forbidden.
, , , , , are the registered

trademarks or trademarks owned by Mindray in China and other countries. All other
trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for editorial purposes without the
intention of improperly using them. They are the property of their respective owners.
ii CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to changes without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be
liable for errors contained herein nor for incidental or consequential damages in
connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for safety, reliability and performance of this product only in the
condition that:
all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable national
and local requirements;
the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Upon request, Mindray may provide, with compensation, necessary circuit diagrams,
calibration illustration list and other information to help qualified technician to maintain
and repair some parts, which Mindray may define as user serviceable.
Note
This equipment is to be operated only by medical professionals trained and authorized by
Mindray or Mindray-authorized distributors.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a
reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown
or injury of human health.
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer iii

Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation
or other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay
resulting from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or
accessories not approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray
authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:

any Mindray product which has been subjected to misuse, negligence or accident;
any Mindray product from which Mindray's original serial number tag or product
identification markings have been altered or removed;
any product of any other manufacturer.
iv CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Return Policy
Return Procedure
In the event that it becomes necessary to return this product or part of this product to
Mindray, the following procedure should be followed:
1 Obtain return authorization: Contact the Mindray Service Department and obtain a
Customer Service Authorization (Mindray) number. The Mindray number must
appear on the outside of the shipping container. Returned shipments will not be
accepted if the Mindray number is not clearly visible. Please provide the model
number, serial number, and a brief description of the reason for return.
2 Freight policy: The customer is responsible for freight charges when this product is
shipped to Mindray for service (this includes customs charges).
3 Return address: Please send the part(s) or equipment to the address offered by
Customer Service department
Company Contact
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.
Address: Mindray Building, Keji 12th Road South, Hi-tech Industrial
Park, Nanshan, ShenZhen 518057, P.R.China,
Tel: +86 755 26582479 26582888
Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer v

vi CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer
Preface
Please read and understand this manual thoroughly before repairing the product.
After reading this manual, keep it properly in a place easy to get when you need it.
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Preface-1

Safety Information
Safety Information
This chapter introduces safety symbols used in this manual and their indications,
summarizes safety hazards, cautions as well as labels and silkscreen and their
indications. A summary of toxic and harmful substances or elements, volume and
relevant parts is also provided in this chapter.
Safety Information-2 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Safety Information
Safety Symbols
Safety symbols are used in this manual in order to remind you of the instructions
necessary to operate the product safely and in accordance with its function and intended
use. A safety symbol and text constitute a notice as shown in the table below:
When you Text Then

see ...
WARNING Read the statement following the symbol. The
statement is alerting you to an operating hazard
that can cause personal injury.
BIOHAZARD Read the statement following the symbol. The
statement is alerting you to a potentially
biohazardous condition.
CAUTION Read the statement following the symbol. The
statement is alerting you to a possibility of system
damage or unreliable results.
NOTE Read the statement following the symbol. The
statement is alerting you to information that
requires your attention.
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-3

Safety Information
Summary of Hazards
Introduction
Observe the following safety precautions when using the product. Ignoring any of these
safety precautions may lead to personal injury or equipment damage.
Warning
If the product is used in a manner not specified by our company, the protection provided
by the product may be impaired.
Electric Shock Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent electric shock.
Warning
When the MAIN POWER is turned on, users other than the servicing personnel
authorized by our company must not open the rear cover or side cover.
Spillage of reagent or sample on the product may cause equipment failure and even
electric shock. Do not place sample and reagent on the product. In case of spillage,
switch off the power immediately, remove the spillage and contact our Customer
Service Department or your local distributor.
Moving Parts Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by moving parts.
Warning
Do not touch moving parts when the system is in operation. These moving parts
include sample probe, reagent probe, gripper, reagent carousel, cuvette loader,
aspirate station, supply push-in part and storage push-in part.
Do not put your finger or hand into any open part when the system is in operation.
Do not load racks when supply push-in part is moving forward; do not unload racks
when retrieval push-in part is moving.
Laser Hazards
Observe the following instructions to prevent personal injury caused by laser emitted by
the bar code reader.
Warning
Light sent by the bar code reader may hurt your eyes. Do not stare into the bar code
reader when the system is in operation.

Safety Information
Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards

Observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection by
samples, calibrators and control samples.
BIOHAZARD
Inappropriate handling of specimens may lead to biohazardous infection. Do not
touch the samples, control samples, calibrators, substrate, wash buffer, mixtures or
waste with your hands. Wear gloves and lab coat, if necessary, goggles.
In case your skin contacts the sample, control or calibrator, follow the standard
laboratory safety procedure and consult a doctor.
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards

Observe the following instructions to protect against the biohazardous infection by
reagents and wash solution.
Warning
Reagents and concentrated wash solutions are corrosive to human skins. Exercise
caution when using reagents and concentrated wash solution. In case your skin or clothes
contact them, wash them off with soap and clean water. If reagents or wash solution
spills into your eyes, rinse them with much water and consult an oculist.
Environmental Biohazards -- Liquid Waste Disposal

Observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and personal
injury caused by liquid waste.
BIOHAZARD
Some substances contained in reagent, control , calibrator, substrate, wash buffer,
and waste are subject to regulations of contamination and disposal. Dispose of the
waste in accordance with your local or national rule for biohazard waste disposal and
consult the manufacturer or distributor of the reagents for details.
Wear gloves and lab coat and, if necessary, goggles.
Environmental Biohazards -- Instrument Disposal

Observe the following instructions to prevent environmental pollution and personal
injury caused by waste instrument.
Warning
Materials of the analyzer are subject to contamination regulations. Dispose of the waste
analyzer in accordance with your local or national rule for waste disposal.
Fire and Explosion Hazards

Observe the following instructions to prevent fire and explosion.

Safety Information
Warning
Alcohol is flammable. Use alcohol with caution near the analyzer to avoid fire or
explosion.
Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal

To minimize or eliminate the hazards involved in repair, transportation, disposal process,
please observe
the following instructions.
Warning
When the analyzer is not in use, for example, in repair, transportation or disposal process,
please clean and sterilize the parts (sample probe, reagent probe, solid waste container,
etc.)
or surfaces that may cause biohazards and remind the person who handles the device of
the related hazards.

Safety Information
Precautions on Use
Introduction
To use the product safely and efficiently, pay attention to the following operating
precautions.
Environment Precautions
CAUTION
Evaluate the electromagnetic environment prior to operating the system.
Please install and operate the system in an environment specified by this manual.
Installing and operating the system in other environment may lead to unreliable results
and even equipment damage.
To relocate the system, please contact our Customer Service Department or your local
distributor.
Installation Precautions
Warning
The product is switched on and off via a switch or breaker. Before installing the system,
ensure that the building in which the system will be located has been equipped with a
switch or breaker that complies with GB 4793.1-2007 and is marked for special use of the
system.
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions
CAUTION
Do not install devices generating excessive noises around the system. Do not use such
devices as radio transmitters generating electromagnetic waves in the room housing the
system. Do not use other display monitors around the system. Noises and
electromagnetic waves may interfere with the operation of the system.
Do not use other medical instruments around the system. Electromagnetic waves
generated by the system may interfere with the operations of other medical
instruments.

Safety Information
Operating Precautions
CAUTION
The test results should only be used for reference and not for determination of
patient disease. Take the clinical symptoms or other test results of the patient into
considerations when making a diagnosis based on the measuring results produced by
the system.
Operate the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate use of the
system may lead to unreliable test results or even equipment damage or personal
injury.
When using the system for the first time, first run calibrations, and then QC tests to
make sure the system is in proper state.
Be sure to run QC tests every time when you use the system, otherwise the result may
be unreliable.
Do not uncover the reagent carousel during analysis.
The RS-232 port on the analyzing unit is used for connection with the RS-232 port
on operation unit. Do not use it for other connections. Use the cables provided by our
company or your local distributor for the connection.
The operation unit is a personal computer with the operating software installed.
Installing other software or hardware on the computer may interfere with the system
operation. Do not run other software when the system is working.
Computer virus may destroy the operating software or test data. Do not use the
computer for other purposes or connect it to the Internet. If the computer is infected
by virus, please install anti-virus software to check for and clear virus.
Do not touch the display monitor, mouse or keyboard with wet hands or hands with
chemicals.
Do not place the power of analyzing unit to ON again within 10 seconds since placing
it to OFF; otherwise the system may enter the protection status. If it does so, place
the power to OFF and place it to ON again.
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions
CAUTION
Maintain the system strictly as instructed by this manual. Inappropriate maintenance
may lead to unreliable results, equipment damage or personal injury.
When the instrument is stored for a long time, dust may accumulate on the surface.
To wipe off dust from the system surface, use a soft, clean and wet (not too wet)
cloth soaked with soap water if necessary. Do not use such organic solvents as ethanol
for cleaning. After cleaning, wipe the surface dry with dry cloth.
Switch off all the powers and disconnect the power plug before cleaning. Take
necessary measures to prevent water ingression, otherwise equipment damage or
personal injury may be caused.
Replacement of such major parts as sample probe, reagent probes and syringe
plunger assembly must be followed by a calibration.
The tubing of peristaltic pump may fail after a long period of work, which will lead to
dispersion overflow. Replace the pump tubing regularly.
If the system fails and needs servicing, contact our Customer Service Department or
your local distributor. The system may need to be stopped or transported during

Safety Information
servicing, which will probably cause biohazards, electric shock hazards and moving
part hazards. Exercise caution when prepare the system for servicing.
Sample Precautions
CAUTION
Use serum sample that has been completely separated. If samples contain insoluble
substances like fibrin, the sample probe may be blocked.
Medicines, anticoagulants or preservative in the samples may lead to unreliable
results.
Store the samples properly. Improper storage may change the compositions of
samples and lead to unreliable results.
Do not leave the sample open for a long period. Sample volatilization may lead to
unreliable results.
The system has a specific requirement on the sample volume. Refer to this manual for
proper sample volume.
Load samples to correct positions on the sample carousel before the analysis begins;
otherwise reliable results may not be obtained.
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions
CAUTION
Use proper reagent, calibrator and controls on the system.
Select appropriate reagents according to the performance characteristics of the
system. Consult the reagent suppliers, our company or our authorized distributor for
details, if you are not sure about your reagent choice.
Store and use the reagents, calibrators and controls strictly as instructed by the
suppliers.
Improper storage of reagents, calibrators and controls may lead to unreliable
results and bad performance of the system even in validity period.
Perform calibration and QC after changing the reagents. Otherwise reliable results
may not be obtained.
Sample Handling System
BIOHAZARD
Do not take away the sample rack from track feeder system during test running to
prevent skin damage or infection due to contact with the moving parts.
CAUTION
Do not push sample rack in rack buffer unit and rack supply unit during test running.
Beware of pinching.
Attention
Pay close attention to rack storage unit during test running. When rack storage unit is
detected full, take out sample racks to prevent rack damage.

Safety Information
When programming samples in non-bar code mode, please confirm that the program
information matches the sample ID, so as to avoid result error due to sample being
omitted or too many samples being placed on the rack.
Data Archiving Precautions
Attention
The system automatically stores the data to the built-in hard disk. Data loss, however, is
still possible due to mis-deletion or physical damage of the hard disk. You are
recommended to regularly upload the data to LIS or archive them to such medium as
CDs.
To prevent data loss due to unexpected power interruption, you are recommended to use
UPS (Uninterrupted Power Supply).
External Equipment Precautions
Warning
For operating instructions and precautions of the computer and printer, please refer to
their operation manuals. External equipment connected to the analogue and digital
interfaces must be complied with relevant safety and EMC standards (e.g., IEC 60950
Safety of Information Technology Equipment Standard and CISPR 22 EMC of Information
Technology Equipment Standard (CLASS B)). Any person, who connects additional
equipment to the signal input or output ports and configures an IVD system, is
responsible for ensuring that the system works normally and complies with the safety
and EMC requirements. If you have any questions, consult the technical services
department of your local representative.
External vacuum pump Module Precautions
Warning
Make sure the air pump tubing is connected properly without any twists or sharp angles
so that it can work normally.
Tubing and cables connected to the air pump must be protected to prevent damage and
breaks due to human or other causes.
Set the air pump on a solid flat platform or ground.
Tube and Liquid Container Precautions
Warning
When the tube or the part that contain liquid become aged or damaged, please stop its
use immediately and contact our customer service department or your local distributor
to check and replace it.

Safety Information
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

Introduction
The following warning labels and silkscreen are used on the product for system
identification and operating instruction.
Check the labels regularly for cleanliness and integrity. If any of the labels becomes
vague or peels off, contact our Customer Service Department or your local distributor for
replacement.
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen

Serial Number
This symbol, contained in the product label which is attached to the rear cover of the
system, indicates the production serial number of the product.
Date of Manufacture
system, indicates the manufacture date of the product.
In Vitro Diagnostic Equipment

system, indicates that the product is in vitro diagnostic equipment.
Environment-friendly use period

system, indicates that the period limit for the product to be friendly to environment,
personal and property safety is 20 years under normal conditions.

Safety Information
Main Power Switch

The main power switch label "MAIN" is on the right side of instrument main power
switch. The main power switch controls the entire SDM and analyzing unit. Place the
switch to upper position to turn the power on, and lower position to turn the power off.
Power Switch of Analyzing Unit

The power switch label of analyzing unit "ANL" is on the right side of analyzing unit
power switch, indicating the power switch of analyzing unit. When the switch is placed
to upper position, the power is on and the instrument is started. When the switch is
placed to lower position, the power is off, and all modules including reagent
refrigerating system are shut down.
SDM Power Switch

The power switch label of SDM assembly "SDM" is on the right side of SDM power
switch. Place the switch to upper position to turn the power on, and SDM is started.
Place the switch to lower position to turn the power off.
Network Interface
This symbol located on the network interface indicates the connection between the
analyzer and the operation unit.
Electrical Ground
This symbol indicates an electrical ground.

Safety Information
Dispersion Aspiration Tubing Collecting Block

This symbol is located at dispersion aspiration tubing collecting block, indicating 4 lines
of dispersion aspirating tubing.
Dispersion Dispensing Tubing Collecting Block

This symbol is located at dispersion dispensing tubing collecting block, indicating 4 lines
of dispersion dispensing tubing.
Substrate Load
This symbol is located at the panel between substrate cover plate and tray zone,
indicating substrate loading position.
Interfaces for fluid connection

This symbol located on the fluid connection interfaces indicates the connection of fluid
tubing.
The fluidic interfaces for standard configuration are shown as follows:

Safety Information
The fluidic interfaces for optional configuration are shown as follows:

Safety Information
Warning Labels
BIOHAZARD
This label indicating the risk of biohazardous infection is located in the following
positions:
Sample Probe Wash Well
Analyzing Unit Waste Outlet
Cuvette Waste Container
Moving Parts Warning

This symbol and text "Warning - Moving Parts - Do not touch during operation." is
located on work station panel and following positions. Do not touch the specified moving
parts during operation.
Reagent probe
Sample probe
First Gripper
Second Gripper
Laser Warning
This symbol and text located near the sample bar code reader and the reagent bar code
reader reminds you of not staring into the laser beam. Do not stare into the laser beam
directly.

Safety Information
Probe Collision Warning

This symbol and text reminds you of not opening the cover to prevent from damaging
the reagent probe. It is located on the lower left corner of reagent carousel. Do not open
the reagent carousel cover and panel to prevent from damaging the reagent probe.
External Air Pump Connection

This symbol and text located near the external air pump and the built-in air pump. It
reminds you of connecting the inlet and outlet tubing correctly
Shielding Cover Warning

This symbol and text located on inner middle part of the shielding cover. It reminds you
of keeping the shielding cover closed while the system is running tests to prevent injury
caused by probes and various liquids.

Volume 1 -- Contents
Intellectual Property Statement............................................................................................................................................ ii

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ...................................................................................................................... iii
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................................................................ iv
Exemptions..................................................................................................................................................................... iv
Return Policy ................................................................................................................................................................................. v
Return Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................... v
Company Contact.......................................................................................................................................................... v
Preface 1
Safety Information 2
Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Summary of Hazards.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Electric Shock Hazards ............................................................................................................................................... 4
Moving Parts Hazards ................................................................................................................................................. 4
Laser Hazards................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards ............................................................................................................ 5
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards.................................................................................................................... 5
Environmental Biohazards -- Liquid Waste Disposal.................................................................................... 5
Environmental Biohazards -- Instrument Disposal ....................................................................................... 5
Fire and Explosion Hazards ..................................................................................................................................... 5
Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal.................................................................................. 6
Precautions on Use ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Environment Precautions ......................................................................................................................................... 7
Installation Precautions ............................................................................................................................................. 7
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 7
Operating Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions............................................................................................................. 8
Sample Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions ............................................................................................... 9
Sample Handling System ........................................................................................................................................... 9
Data Archiving Precautions ....................................................................................................................................10
External Equipment Precautions .........................................................................................................................10
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer I

External vacuum pump Module Precautions ..............................................................................................10

Tube and Liquid Container Precautions ...........................................................................................................10
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen ......................................................................................................................................11
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................11
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen ..................................................................................................................11
Volume 1 -- Contents I
1 System Description 1-1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

1.2 Principles of Measurement .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 One-step Method ........................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 Two-step Method........................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Components of Analyzer............................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 Functions of the System .............................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.4 Components of Rack Feeder System ..................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5 Functions of Rack Feeder System .......................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.6 Requirements on External Devices ....................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.6.1 Operation Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.6.2 Display Monitor........................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.6.3 Printer ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.6.4 Power Supply Equipment ....................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.7 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.7.1 Common Specifications............................................................................................................................ 1-14
1.7.2 Sample Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.7.3 Reagent Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 1-16
1.7.4 Specifications of Reaction System ....................................................................................................... 1-17
1.7.5 Specifications of Operation Unit .......................................................................................................... 1-18
1.8 System Structure ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.1 System Structure......................................................................................................................................... 1-19
2 Test Procedure 2-1
2.1 Test Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2 Working Mode ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Startup Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Shutdown Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5 Abnormity Handling Procedure ................................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.6 Emergency Stop Procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.7 Before Test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.8 After Test .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.9 Mechanical Reset .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.10 System Reset ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-13
3 Installation Guide 3-1
3.1 Installation Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 3-2
II CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

3.1.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Unpacking ................................................................... 3-2

3.1.2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation ................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 Power Supply and Noise ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.4 Drainage Check (if draining water through a sewer) ..................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Configuration Check ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Tools ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.2 Interconnection ........................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.3 Installing Peristaltic Pump Tube.......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.4 Removing Retaining Screws on the Reagent Carousel ............................................................... 3-23
3.4.5 Installing Probes ......................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.4.6 Installing Handle of the Wash Buffer Drawer ................................................................................. 3-27
3.4.7 Fluidic Connection ..................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.8 Connection of PC ......................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.5 Preparation...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.6 First Startup .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7 Fluidic Prime................................................................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.1 Check before Fluidic Prime .................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.2 Fluidic Prime ................................................................................................................................................ 3-39
3.8 Position Confirmation and Alignment ................................................................................................................. 3-49
3.9 Setup................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.9.1 Initialize Maintenance Logs ................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.9.2 Loading Special Reagents........................................................................................................................ 3-52
3.9.3 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters ..................................................................... 3-53
3.10 DCF Check...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.11 System Check ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.12 Other Tests .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.12.1 Repeatability Test .................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.13 Result Records ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-63
3.14 Returning Logs ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-64
4 Emptying and Packing4-1
4.1 Emptying Procedure ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Emptying the Analyzer ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Data Clearing ................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Emptying the Analyzer .................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.2 Turning off Refrigeration ........................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.3 Auto Cuvette Discarding ............................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.4 Cleaning and Emptying Wash buffer Aspirate Tubes ..................................................................... 4-4
4.2.5 Cleaning and Emptying Wash Buffer Tubes ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.6 Cleaning and Emptying Dispersion Aspirate Tubes ....................................................................... 4-6
4.2.7 Cleaning and Emptying Substrate Tubes............................................................................................. 4-7
4.2.8 Emptying Waste Tubes ............................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.9 Clear Trays........................................................................................................................................................ 4-9
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer III

4.2.10 Removing and Fixing Peristaltic Pump Tubes ................................................................................ 4-9

4.2.11 Check and Restoring after Whole Unit Emptying ...................................................................... 4-10
4.3 Clearing the Computer ............................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 Data Clearing ................................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.4 Packing the Whole Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.4.1 Fixing Connection Cables ........................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.4.2 Fixing Wash Buffer Tubes and Tank Cover ...................................................................................... 4-13
4.4.3 Packing the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe .............................................................................. 4-13
4.4.4 Fixing Auto Loader Bracket .................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.5 Fixing the Probe Arm ................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.6 Fixing the Desk Panel................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.7 Fixing the Analyzer .................................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.4.8 Blocking the Waste Outlet....................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.4.9 Fixing the Wash Buffer Drawer ............................................................................................................ 4-20
4.4.10 Protecting the Left and Right Doors ................................................................................................ 4-21
4.4.11 Protecting the Drawer Door ................................................................................................................ 4-22
4.4.12 Packing the Analyzer .............................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.4.13 Closing the Package ................................................................................................................................ 4-23
5 Shells Assembly 5-1
5.1 Shells Assembly ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-2

5.1.1 Module Functions and Composition...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ................................................................................................ 5-3
5.1.3 Removing Front Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges .................................. 5-5
5.1.4 Removing Back Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges ................................... 5-5
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Panels ......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.6 Replacement of Air Spring ......................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.7 Removing and Reinstalling Arm Covers .............................................................................................. 5-9
5.1.8 Replacing Decorating Silicone Strip on the Back Shielding Cover ......................................... 5-10
5.1.9 Replacing Sealing Strip and Dust-Proof Silicone Strip of the Front Shielding Cover ..... 5-10
5.1.10 Replacing Left/Right Front Doors and Hinges ............................................................................ 5-12
5.1.11 Replacing the Lock Catch...................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.12 Replacing the Spikes ............................................................................................................................... 5-12
6 Rack Feeder System 6-1
6.1 System Composition and Description ..................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2 Sample Delivery Module ............................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Rack Supply Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.3 Rack Storage Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.4 Rack Buffer Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.5 Retrieval Push-In Part .............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.2.6 Scanning Push-In Part .............................................................................................................................. 6-19
6.2.7 Scanning Push-Out Part ........................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.8 Channel Bracket Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.3 Rack Transfer Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 6-27
IV CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

6.3.1 Module Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 6-27

6.3.2 Module Profile and FRU ........................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.3.3 Replacement of Track Motor Assembly and Tensioning Mechanism Spring .................... 6-28
6.3.4 Replacing Reflective Optical Coupler ................................................................................................. 6-29
6.3.5 Replacing Lane Change Stopper Station ........................................................................................... 6-30
6.3.6 Replacing Lane Change Part .................................................................................................................. 6-31
6.3.7 Replacing Post-Aspiration Stopper Station ..................................................................................... 6-33
6.3.8 Replacing Aspirate Buffer Stopper Station ...................................................................................... 6-34
6.3.9 Replacing STAT Aspirate Positioning Station ................................................................................. 6-35
6.3.10 Replacing Routine Aspirate Positioning Station ......................................................................... 6-38
6.3.11 Replacing Return Push-out Part ........................................................................................................ 6-40
7 Sampling System 7-1
7.1 Syringe Assembly............................................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.1 Module Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.1.3 Replacing 1ml Syringe ................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.4 Replacing Reagent Syringe Drive Module ........................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.5 Replacing Sample Syringe Assembly..................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.6 Replacing Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly....................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.7 Replacing Clog Detection T-Piece Assembly ...................................................................................... 7-9
7.1.8 Replacing Syringe Optical Coupler ...................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2 Sample Probe Assembly............................................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.2.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ............................................................................................. 7-13
7.2.3 Replacing Short Arm Cover .................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.2.4 Replacing Guide Rod and Anti-Collision Spring ............................................................................ 7-15
7.2.5 Replacing Negative Offset Level Sense Board................................................................................. 7-16
7.2.6 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly.............................................................................................. 7-17
7.2.7 Replacing Probe Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.2.8 Replacing Vertical Motor Pulley Assembly ...................................................................................... 7-19
7.2.9 Replacing Sample Probe Drive Assembly ......................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.10 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler (S)..................................................................................... 7-23
7.3 Reagent probe assembly ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.3.3 Replacing Long Arm Cover ..................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.4 Replacing Reagent Probe Drive Assembly ....................................................................................... 7-26
8 Reagent Handling System 8-1
8.1 Reagent Carousel Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.1.3 Replacing Reagent Carousel High-speed Drive Assembly............................................................ 8-4
8.1.4 Replacing Bar Code Reader ....................................................................................................................... 8-7
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer V

8.1.5 Replacing Reagent Antifogging Heating Assembly ......................................................................... 8-8

8.1.6 Replacing Antifogging Temperature Protection Switch and Heater ........................................ 8-9
8.1.7 Replacing Water-proof Optical Coupler ............................................................................................ 8-11
8.1.8 Replacing Dust Screen .............................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.2 Reagent Refrigeration Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.3 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration Module......................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.4 Replacing Radiating Fan of the Air Duct Assembly ...................................................................... 8-17
8.2.5 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor .............................................................. 8-18
8.2.6 Replacing Radiating Fan of the Refrigeration Module ................................................................ 8-20
8.2.7 Replacing Cooling Fan of the Refrigeration Module .................................................................... 8-21
8.2.8 Replacing Peltiers ....................................................................................................................................... 8-23
9 Cuvette Load and Transport System 9-1
9.1 Cuvette loader assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.1.3 Replacing the Electromagnet ................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.4 Replacing Feeding Motor Pulley Assembly in the Feeding Position ........................................ 9-5
9.1.5 Replacing Feeding Motor Pulley Assembly in the Unloading Position ................................... 9-7
9.1.6 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler in the Unloading Position ............................................ 9-9
9.1.7 Replacing the Conversion Line of Correlative and Reflective Optical Couplers ............... 9-10
9.1.8 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler on the Feeding Arm .............................. 9-11
9.1.9 Replacing Feeder Fingers ........................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.1.10 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler(S) on the Feeding Arm ............................................ 9-13
9.1.11 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler in the Pusher Waiting Position ..... 9-15
9.1.12 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler in the Unloading Area ...................... 9-16
9.1.13 Replacing Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly of the Open-Close assembly..... 9-17
9.1.14 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective or Correlative Optical Coupler (L) in the Working
Position ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.1.15 Replacing X-axis Correlative Optical Coupler(L) ........................................................................ 9-21
9.1.16 Replacing X-axis Motor Pulley Assembly....................................................................................... 9-22
9.1.17 Replacing BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board with Socket in the Pushing Position9-23
9.1.18 Replacing Pushing Motor Assembly ................................................................................................ 9-25
9.1.19 Replacing BM10 Gripper X-FPC Board ........................................................................................... 9-26
9.1.20 Replacing BM10 Gripper Y-FPC Board ........................................................................................... 9-28
9.1.21 Replacing Y-axis Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly ................................................. 9-29
9.1.22 Replacing Y-axis Correlative Optical Coupler(S) ........................................................................ 9-31
9.1.23 Replacing BM10 Gripper Z-FPC Board ........................................................................................... 9-33
9.1.24 Replacing Z-axis Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly ................................................. 9-35
9.1.25 Replacing BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board with Socket of the Z Axis............. 9-37
9.1.26 Replacing Z-axis Relieving Spring..................................................................................................... 9-39
9.2 First Gripper Assembly .............................................................................................................................................. 9-41
VI CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer


9.2.3 Replacing Finger Assembly, Cover and Spring ............................................................................... 9-41
9.3 Second Gripper Assembly ......................................................................................................................................... 9-44
10 Dispersion System 10-1
10.1 Module Functions....................................................................................................................................................... 10-2

10.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.3 Replacing Substrate Mixing Presser Assembly.............................................................................................. 10-5
10.4 Replacing Dispersion Mixing Motor Pulley Assembly ................................................................................ 10-7
10.5 Replacing Synchronous Belt. 290MXL025 Polyurethane.......................................................................... 10-9
10.6 Replacing Mixing Presser Assembly ................................................................................................................10-11
10.7 Replacing Dispersion Dispense Probes ..........................................................................................................10-13
10.8 Replacing Dispersion Aspirate Probes ............................................................................................................10-15
10.9 Replacing Dispersion Aspirate Drive Assembly ..........................................................................................10-17
10.10 Replacing Dispersion Motor Pulley Assembly ..........................................................................................10-19
10.11 Replacing Dispersion Assembly ......................................................................................................................10-21
10.12 Replacing Substrate Preheating Assembly .................................................................................................10-24
10.13 Replacing Dispersion Carousel Heater .........................................................................................................10-26
10.14 Replacing Dispersion Overheat Protection Switch and Temperature Sensor .............................10-27
10.15 Replacing Dispersion Optical Couplers ........................................................................................................10-31
10.16 Replacing Air Bubble Detection Optical Coupler .....................................................................................10-33
11 Optical Measurement Reaction system 11-1
11.1 Reaction Carousel Mechanics Module ............................................................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Module Functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 Locations and FRU details .................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Replacing Reaction Carousel Assembly and Motor Pulley Assembly ................................ 11-3
11.1.4 Replace the wire of home position sensor and coder sensor of reaction carousel .. 11-4
11.1.5 Replace Discarding tube A and Discarding tube B..................................................................... 11-6
11.1.6 Replacement of Wash Well .................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.1.7 Replacement of reaction liquid mixing assembly ...................................................................... 11-8
11.1.8 Replacement of the correlation optical coupler wire of the mixing assembly .............. 11-9
11.2 Pyrology module of the reaction carousel .....................................................................................................11-11
11.2.1 Module Functions ..................................................................................................................................11-11
11.2.2 Locations and FRU details ..................................................................................................................11-11
11.2.3 Replacement of temperature sensor of the reaction carousel............................................11-11
11.2.4 Replacement of reaction carousel overheat protection switch..........................................11-13
11.3 Photometric measurement module .................................................................................................................11-15
11.3.3 Replacing photometer assembly .....................................................................................................11-16
11.3.4 Replacing LED assembly .....................................................................................................................11-19
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer VII

12 Software 12-1
12.1 Software Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 12-2

12.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package ............................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.2 System check before the complete installation........................................................................... 12-3
12.1.3 Steps for installation of operating software ................................................................................. 12-6
12.2 Software Upgrading ................................................................................................................................................12-12
12.2.1 Operating software upgrading .........................................................................................................12-12
12.2.2 Upgrading Control Software of Analyzer .....................................................................................12-15
12.2.3 Upgrading Control Software of SDM ..............................................................................................12-20
12.3 Software description ..............................................................................................................................................12-26
12.3.1 Folder Structure .....................................................................................................................................12-26
12.3.2 Log Files .....................................................................................................................................................12-27
12.3.3 Software Running ..................................................................................................................................12-29
12.3.4 Auto Startup .............................................................................................................................................12-29
12.3.5 Software Running Parameters .........................................................................................................12-30
12.3.6 Normal Startup Procedure.................................................................................................................12-31
12.4 Software Uninstallation .........................................................................................................................................12-33
12.4.1 Removing CL-2000i software ...........................................................................................................12-33
12.4.2 Uninstalling SQL Database .................................................................................................................12-33
12.5 Comparison of User Permissions ......................................................................................................................12-34
13 Hardware System 13-1
13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 13-2

13.2 Summary of Hazards ................................................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.3 Summary of PCBAs .................................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.4 Locations of PCBA ...................................................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.5 Removing PCBA .......................................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.6 Functions of PCBA....................................................................................................................................................13-10
13.6.1 Main control board................................................................................................................................13-10
13.6.2 Fluidics Temperature Control Board .........................................................................................13-15
13.6.3 BM10 Control Drive Board (RA) ..................................................................................................13-21
13.6.4 BM10 Control Drive Board (MS)..................................................................................................13-28
13.6.5 BM10 Control Drive Board (LD) ..................................................................................................13-33
13.6.6 BM10 Control Drive Board (CP) ..................................................................................................13-38
13.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board ............................................................................................................13-43
13.6.8 Temperature collection board ..........................................................................................................13-48
13.6.9 Photon Counting Board .......................................................................................................................13-51
13.6.10 PD pre-amplification board ............................................................................................................13-55
13.6.11 High pressure board ..........................................................................................................................13-57
13.6.12 Pressure detection board ................................................................................................................13-60
13.6.13 Weight detection board ....................................................................................................................13-62
13.6.14 Substrate air bubble detection board .........................................................................................13-67
13.6.15 Wash buffer air bubble detection board ...................................................................................13-70
VIII CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

13.6.16 Clog detection board ..........................................................................................................................13-72

13.6.17 Level sense board................................................................................................................................13-76
13.6.18 Probe/Mixer conversion board .....................................................................................................13-79
13.6.19 External vacuum pump drive board ...........................................................................................13-81
13.6.20 Communication conversion board ..............................................................................................13-83
13.6.21 FPC conversion board .......................................................................................................................13-84
13.6.22 BM10 optical coupler conversion board ...................................................................................13-92
13.6.23 Network interface conversion board ..........................................................................................13-96
13.6.24 Main Control Board (SDM)..............................................................................................................13-96
13.6.25 Control drive board (SDM)..............................................................................................................13-99
13.6.26 Track Control Drive Board ........................................................................................................... 13-103
13.6.27 On-line Conversion Board (SDM) .............................................................................................. 13-107
13.6.28 On-line conversion board(rack transfer unit) ..................................................................... 13-109
13.7 Power Supply System .......................................................................................................................................... 13-111
13.7.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit .......................................................................................... 13-111
13.7.2 Analyzer's power supply system.................................................................................................. 13-112
13.7.3 DC power supply conversion board ............................................................................................ 13-121
13.7.4 Analog power supply conversion board ................................................................................... 13-125
13.7.5 AC drive board...................................................................................................................................... 13-126
13.8 Whole unit wiring Diagram .............................................................................................................................. 13-130
14 Hydropneumatic System 14-1
14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14-2

14.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System .............................................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.1 Probe wash module ................................................................................................................................ 14-3
14.2.2 Dispersion fluidic module .................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2.3 Substrate Dispensing Module ............................................................................................................. 14-4
14.2.4 Inlet/outlet module ................................................................................................................................ 14-5
14.3 Introduction of Fluidic Actions ............................................................................................................................ 14-8
14.3.1 Wash buffer aspirating control .......................................................................................................... 14-8
14.3.2 Dispersion Wash Control ...................................................................................................................... 14-8
14.3.3 Substrate Dispensing control ............................................................................................................. 14-8
14.3.4 Establish Vacuum ..................................................................................................................................... 14-9
14.3.5 Release Vacuum ........................................................................................................................................ 14-9
14.3.6 Drain Primary Vacuum Container .................................................................................................... 14-9
14.3.7 Fluidic Initialization................................................................................................................................ 14-9
14.4 Removing and Installing Hydropneumatic Components ........................................................................14-11
14.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................14-11
14.4.2 Removing and re-installing Probe wash module .....................................................................14-11
14.4.3 Installation and dismantlement of dispersion wash module..............................................14-21
14.4.4 Replacement of the Substrate Dispensing Module ..................................................................14-29
14.4.5 Replacement of Inlet/outlet module .............................................................................................14-32
14.5 Material list of Hydropneumatic subsystem.................................................................................................14-39
14.5.1 Pump list....................................................................................................................................................14-39
14.5.2 Valve list .....................................................................................................................................................14-41
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer IX

14.5.3 Sensor list..................................................................................................................................................14-44
15 Alignment 15-1
15.1 List of tools.................................................................................................................................................................... 15-2

15.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................................. 15-2
15.1.2 List of tools ................................................................................................................................................. 15-2
15.2 Alignment procedure diagram ............................................................................................................................. 15-4
15.3 Preparations:................................................................................................................................................................ 15-5
15.3.1 Precautions: ............................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3.2 Power on the analyzer ........................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3.3 Installing operating software(optional) ........................................................................................ 15-6
15.3.4 Screen description ................................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.4 Dispersion unit alignment...................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.4.2 Dispersion Carousel Position Offset ................................................................................................ 15-9
15.4.3 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation ..........................................................................15-10
15.4.4 Dispense Station Mechanism Vertical ...........................................................................................15-10
15.4.5 Aspirate Station Vertical Position Adjustment ..........................................................................15-11
15.4.6 Dispersion Mixing Speed ....................................................................................................................15-12
15.5 Reaction Carousel Unit alignment ....................................................................................................................15-14
15.5.2 Photometer Configuration .................................................................................................................15-14
15.5.3 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment ..........................................................................................15-15
15.5.4 Photometer Home .................................................................................................................................15-16
15.5.5 Mechanical Home Position Alignment ..........................................................................................15-17
15.5.6 Reaction Carousel Middle Ring Position Offset.........................................................................15-25
15.5.7 Reaction Carousel Inner Ring Position Offset ............................................................................15-26
15.6 Reagent Carousel Unit alignment ......................................................................................................................15-27
15.6.2 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 1st Injection Port - Stop Position(Ra)...............15-27
15.6.3 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 2nd Injection Port - Stop Position(Rb).............15-28
15.6.4 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 3rd Injection Port - Stop Position(Rc) ..............15-28
15.6.5 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 4th Injection Port - Stop Position(Rd) ..............15-28
15.7 Reagent probe unit ..................................................................................................................................................15-29
15.7.2 Horizontal Position for Aspirating Ra/Rb/Rc/Rd ...................................................................15-29
15.7.3 Reagent Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations.........................................15-30
15.7.4 Reagent Probe Horizontal Wash Position ...................................................................................15-30
15.7.5 Horizontal Reagent Dispense Position on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer rings15-31
15.7.6 Reagent Probe Vertical Wash Position..........................................................................................15-32
15.7.7 Reagent Carousel Vertical Extreme Position (Ra) ....................................................................15-32
15.7.8 Reagent Dispense Position Vertical Extreme on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer
Rings..........................................................................................................................................................................15-33
15.8 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation and bar code unit .......................................................15-34
15.8.1 Carousel Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation.......................................................15-34
15.8.2 Reagent Carousel Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation .....................................15-34
15.8.3 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Scanning Position..........................................................................15-34
15.8.4 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Stability .............................................................................................15-36
15.9 Sample Probe Unit ...................................................................................................................................................15-38
X CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

15.9.2 Sample Probe Wash Position Horizontal .....................................................................................15-38

15.9.3 Sample Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations ..........................................15-39
15.9.4 Sample Probe Horizontal Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Positions ..................................15-39
15.9.5 Sample Probe Wash Position Vertical ...........................................................................................15-39
15.9.6 Sample Probe Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Vertical Extreme Positions ......................15-40
15.10 Second Gripper Unit .............................................................................................................................................15-42
15.10.2 2nd Gripper Home Position Alignment .....................................................................................15-42
15.10.3 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel Horizontal ......................................15-43
15.10.4 Second Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations ........................................................15-44
15.10.5 Gripper Mixing Position Horizontal ............................................................................................15-45
15.10.6 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal...................................................................................15-45
15.10.7 Reaction Carousel Vertical Gripping Position Alignment ..................................................15-46
15.10.8 Gripper Mixing Position Vertical ..................................................................................................15-47
15.10.9 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Vertical .........................................................................................15-47
15.10.10 Vertical Middle Monitoring Position Alignment..................................................................15-47
15.11 Tray Loader ..............................................................................................................................................................15-48
15.11.1 Tray loader alignment screen ........................................................................................................15-48
15.11.2 Feeding Position ..................................................................................................................................15-48
15.11.3 Unloading Home Position ................................................................................................................15-49
15.11.4 Pushing Position ..................................................................................................................................15-50
15.11.5 Guide Rail Positions ...........................................................................................................................15-51
15.11.6 Tray drawer check ..............................................................................................................................15-52
15.12 First Gripper Unit ..................................................................................................................................................15-54
15.12.1 First Gripper Unit screen .................................................................................................................15-54
15.12.2 First Gripper Mechanical Reset .....................................................................................................15-55
15.12.3 First Gripper Home Position Alignment....................................................................................15-58
15.12.4 First Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations .............................................................15-58
15.12.5 Gripper Tray Horizontal ...................................................................................................................15-58
15.12.6 Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment .15-59
15.12.7 Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal .............................................................15-60
15.12.8 Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2 Alignment................................................................15-60
15.12.9 Gripper Reaction Carousel Vertical .............................................................................................15-61
15.12.10 Gripper Dispense Position Vertical ...........................................................................................15-62
15.12.11 Gripper Tray Vertical ......................................................................................................................15-62
15.13 Hydropneumatic Unit ..........................................................................................................................................15-64
15.13.1 Preparations before Alignment.....................................................................................................15-64
15.13.2 Fluidic Connection ..............................................................................................................................15-64
15.13.3 Floater Check ........................................................................................................................................15-65
15.13.4 Check Wash Buffer Tubes and Related Components ...........................................................15-66
15.13.5 Vacuum Pressure Check ...................................................................................................................15-67
15.13.6 Syringe Check .......................................................................................................................................15-68
15.13.7 Check Drain Tubes and Related Components .........................................................................15-69
15.13.8 Wash Buffer Aspirating Tube Check and Prime .....................................................................15-70
15.13.9 Wash Buffer Prime..............................................................................................................................15-72
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer XI

15.13.10 Clean Substrate Tubes ....................................................................................................................15-73

15.13.11 Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration ............................................................................15-74
15.13.12 Sample Probe Wash Pressure Test ............................................................................................15-76
15.13.13 Substrate Prime.................................................................................................................................15-76
15.13.14 Back Aspirate Air for Substrate ..................................................................................................15-77
15.14 Sensor Calibration .................................................................................................................................................15-80
15.14.2 Weighing sensor calibration ...........................................................................................................15-80
15.14.3 Substrate Aspirating/dispensing Coupler Calibration ........................................................15-81
15.14.4 Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler Calibration .............................................................15-82
15.15 Temperature Control Unit..................................................................................................................................15-83
15.15.1 The alignment screen of the temperature control unit.......................................................15-83
15.15.2 Carousel Temperature Test .............................................................................................................15-83
15.15.3 Substrate Preheat Temperature Curve ......................................................................................15-83
15.15.4 Reagent refrigeration ........................................................................................................................15-84
15.15.5 Fan Status Query .................................................................................................................................15-85
15.16 Special Wash Sample Probe position ............................................................................................................15-87
15.16.1 Sample Probe Special Wash Horizontal Position...................................................................15-87
15.16.2 Sample Probe Special Wash Vertical Extreme Position ......................................................15-87
15.17 Rack supply unit alignment screen ................................................................................................................15-89
15.17.2 Offset of Position Switch for Rack Supply Push-In Part ......................................................15-89
15.17.3 Sample Center and Scanning Position ........................................................................................15-90
15.17.4 Half Protrusion of STAT Push-Back Part ...................................................................................15-91
15.17.5 Scanning Push-In Part Moving to Utmost End........................................................................15-92
15.17.6 Scanning Push-Out Part Target Pos Adjustment....................................................................15-93
15.18 The rack retrieval unit. ........................................................................................................................................15-94
15.18.1 Rack supply unit alignment screen .............................................................................................15-94
15.18.2 Grid Aligning with Scanning Channel .........................................................................................15-94
15.18.3 Grid Aligning with Return Lane ....................................................................................................15-95
15.18.4 Grid Aligning with Retrieval Channel .........................................................................................15-95
15.18.5 Offset of Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Rack Storage Unit .........................................15-96
15.18.6 Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Rack Supply Unit .............................................................15-97
15.19 The normal lane .....................................................................................................................................................15-99
15.19.1 the alignment screen of the normal lane ..................................................................................15-99
15.19.2 Stop Position of Stopper Part at Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 2......................................15-99
15.19.3 Positioning Station Moving to Aspirate Point ...................................................................... 15-100
15.19.4 Sample Probe Rotary to Normal Lane ..................................................................................... 15-101
15.20 Passing_return unit alignment...................................................................................................................... 15-102
15.20.1 the alignment screen of the normal lane ............................................................................... 15-102
15.20.2 Positioning Station Moving to passing-return lane ........................................................... 15-102
15.20.3 Sample Probe Rotary to Passing Lane ..................................................................................... 15-103
15.20.4 Offset of Lane Change Stopper Station Moving to End Position................................... 15-103
15.20.5 Offset of Return Push-Out Part Moving to End Position .................................................. 15-104
15.20.6 Lane change part aligning with transfer lane ...................................................................... 15-105
15.20.7 Lane change part aligning with normal lane ........................................................................ 15-106
XII CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

15.20.8 Lane Change from Return Lane to Normal Lane ................................................................ 15-107
15.20.9 Lane Change Part Aligning with Return Lane ...................................................................... 15-107
16 Maintenance16-1
16.1 Material and tools ...................................................................................................................................................... 16-2

16.2 Maintenance items .................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.3 Maintenance order .................................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.4 Steps ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-8
16.4.1 Clean wash buffer drawer .................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.4.2 Clean the cap of the wash buffer tank ............................................................................................. 16-8
16.4.3 Check the sample/reagent probe...................................................................................................... 16-9
16.4.4 Change the spring of the gripper ....................................................................................................16-10
16.4.5 Clean the finger of the gripper .........................................................................................................16-12
16.4.6 X axis linear guide rail lubrication..................................................................................................16-13
16.4.7 Check sample/reagent syringes ......................................................................................................16-13
16.4.8 Clean Dust Screens ................................................................................................................................16-14
16.4.9 Dispersion aspirate pump tubes maintenance .........................................................................16-15
16.4.10 Inlet Pump Tubing maintenance ..................................................................................................16-17
16.4.11 Inlet Pump check .................................................................................................................................16-20
16.4.12 Clean Cooling Fans and Radiators ................................................................................................16-20
16.4.13 Air pump check ....................................................................................................................................16-22
16.4.14 Check overflowing of the dispersion carousel ........................................................................16-23
16.4.15 Replace Substrate Spike ...................................................................................................................16-23
16.4.16 Check consumable status ................................................................................................................16-28
16.4.17 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes Exterior ....................................................................................16-29
16.4.18 Check Sample/Reagent Probes .....................................................................................................16-30
16.4.19 Probe interior and exterior flow test ..........................................................................................16-31
16.4.20 Clean Vortexer Hole............................................................................................................................16-33
16.4.21 Replace/Clean Aspirate Probes.....................................................................................................16-33
16.4.22 Wipe Dispense Probes/Tubes .......................................................................................................16-34
16.4.23 Sensor Calibration ..............................................................................................................................16-36
16.4.24 Daily Clean .............................................................................................................................................16-37
16.4.25 Run System Diagnosis .......................................................................................................................16-38
16.4.26 Check Waste ..........................................................................................................................................16-39
16.4.27 Statistics of Component Service Life...........................................................................................16-39
16.4.28 Effect Check ...........................................................................................................................................16-41
17 Alarms and Troubleshooting 17-1
17.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 17-2

17.2 Flag ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.3 Error Code ...................................................................................................................................................................17-10
18 Changeable Parts at the User End 18-1
18.1 Changeable parts for main unit............................................................................................................................ 18-2

18.2 Changeable parts for SDM ....................................................................................................................................18-14
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer XIII

A Hardware system wiring diagram A-1
B Fluidic DiagramB-1
XIV CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

1 System Description
This chapter introduces the instrument from the following aspects:

System Structure
System Specifications
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer 1-1

1.1 Overview
1.1 Overview
The CL-2000i/CL-2200i is a fully automated and computer-controlled
chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer designed for the in vitro determination of
clinical chemistries in serum, plasma and other human body fluids. It is composed of the
Analyzer, Sample Delivery Module (SDM), and Operation Unit.
Figure 1.1 Whole system
SDM
Analyzing
unit
1-2 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

1.2 Principles of Measurement

1.2.1 Introduction
The system performs measurement mainly with one-step method and two-step method.
The major difference lies in steps necessary for the measurement. One-step method
includes one time of incubation and one time of dispersion, while two-step method
includes two times of incubation and one or two times of dispersion.
1.2.2 One-step Method

One-step method proceeds as follows: adding specimen, adding labeled antibody
(antigen), incubating for reaction, dispersion, adding substrate and optical measurement.
Generally speaking, competitive method belongs to one-step method, while some
double-antibody sandwich methods also belong to one-step method. One-step method is
illustrated in following figure:
Figure 1.2 One-step method procedure
Sample Labeled antibody or

antigen
Cuvettes
Incubating
Remove unbound reactant via

dispersion
Incubating
Substrate
Instrument
measurement
1.2.3 Two-step Method

According to counts of dispersion, two-step method is divided into two-step with one
dispersion and two-step with two dispersions. Generally sandwich method belongs to
two-step method.
Two-step method with one dispersion proceeds as follows: adding sample, labeling
antibody (antigen), incubating, adding labeled antibody (antigen), dispersion, adding
substrate and optical measurement. Two-step with one dispersion procedure is
illustrated in following figure:

Figure 1.3 Two-step with one dispersion
Specimen Labeled antibody or

antigen
Cuvettes
Incubating
Labeled antibody or
antigen
Incubating

dispersion
Incubating
Substrate
measurement
Two-step method with two dispersions proceeds as follows: adding specimen, labeling
antibody (antigen), incubating, dispersion, adding labeled antibody (antigen), incubating,
dispersion, adding substrate, and optical measurement. Two-step with two dispersions
procedure is illustrated in following figure:

Figure 1.4 Two-step with two dispersions
Specimen Labeled antibody or

antigen
Cuvettes
Incubating
Remove unbound analyte via

dispersion
Labeled antibody or
antigen
Incubating

dispersion
Incubating
Substrate
measurement

1.3 Components of Analyzer

The CL-2000i/CL-2200i has the throughput of 240 tests/hour, and working period of 15
seconds. It consists of the sample handling system, reagent handling system, substrate
system, sampling system, dispersion system, optical measurement reaction system,
cuvette load and transport system, and reaction liquid mixing system.
It has employed the "3 carousels + 2 probes + 2 grippers" solution, which means a
reaction carousel, a dispersion carousel, a reagent carousel, a reagent probe, a sample
probe, and two grippers.
Figure 1.5 System structure

1.3.2 Functions of the System

The working procedure of the system is described as follows.
Preparations before Test

The system resets to initialize all mechanical units and wash the exterior and
interior of the sample probe and reagent probe.
The SDM delivers the sample to the aspirate position.
One-Step Method
1 A new cuvette is provided for the sample aspirate position.
2 Sample is added to the cuvette.
3 After sample addition, reagent is added to the cuvette on the reaction carousel outer
ring.
4 After reagent addition, the cuvette is mixed on the mixing position.
5 After mixing, the cuvette is incubated on the reaction carousel for 1 to 30 minutes.
6 After incubation, the cuvette goes to the dispersion carousel for magnetic
dispersion.
7 After dispersion, substrate is added to the cuvette.
8 After substrate addition, the cuvette is incubated on the reaction carousel for a fixed
period (5 minutes) and then starts optical measurement.
9 When the reaction is complete, the cuvette is discarded from the front operating
position of the reaction carousel by the first gripper.
Two-Step with One Dispersion


3 After sample addition, the reagent for first-step reaction is added to the cuvette on
the reaction carousel outer ring.
6 After incubation, the cuvette returns to the reagent aspirate position, receives the
reagent for second-step reaction and then mixed.
dispersion.
Two-Step with Two Dispersions

3 After sample addition, the reagent for first-step reaction is added to the cuvette on
the reaction carousel outer ring.
dispersion.
7 After first dispersion, the reagent for second-step reaction is added to the cuvette
on the reaction carousel outer ring.
dispersion.
Table 1.1 Functions of system units
Unit Name Descriptions
Sample probe Aspirates and dispenses sample, and features level detection,
unit horizontal/vertical obstruction detection, and clog detection.
Reagent probe Aspirates and dispenses reagent for all chemistries, and features
unit level detection and horizontal/vertical obstruction detection.
Cuvette load and The cuvette load and transport system, composed of auto loader
transport system unit, second gripper unit and solid waste disposal unit, completes
the procedure of loading, transporting and disposing the disposable
cuvettes.

Unit Name Descriptions

Reagent Carousel It holds reagent bottles and carries each of them to the reagent
Unit aspirate position for aspirating.
The reagent carousel provides 36 reagent positions, all of which
support bar code scanning and rotational mixing of magnetic bead
reagent.
It provides a refrigerating environment which is constant within 2
-8 for 24 hours a day. The reagents stored in such environment
can be kept stable with little volatilization.
Reaction The reaction carousel is composed of 3 rings (inner, middle and
carousel unit outer), with each ring providing 50 cuvette positions, and 150
positions in total. The inner and middle rings are used for sample
and reagent incubation, and the outer ring is used for reagent
dispensing, substrate incubation and optical measurement.
The reaction carousel is capable of temperature control and
provides a constant environment at 370.3 with fluctuation of
0.1.
Mixing unit It is a vortexer designed to mix the mixtures in each test procedure.
It is capable of detecting the rotation speed.
Photometer It is composed of the photon counting module and the reference
module.
The photon counting module detects light intensity of the liquid to
be measure, and calculates the analyte concentration by
calculation curve.
The reference module provides steady light output through an LED
for calibration of the photon counting module.
Dispersion unit It utilizes wash buffer solution for reaction mixture 4-phase
dispersion, in order to separate the magnet-bound complexes from
the reaction mixture. Cuvettes pass through the aspirating and
dispensing units of each dispersion phase to complete dispensing,
dispersion and aspirating actions.
Substrate unit It is composed of the substrate bottles, substrate dispensing
module and substrate preheat module. It dispenses preheated
substrate into dispersed cuvette via the dispensing port on the
dispersion carousel.

1.4 Components of Rack Feeder System
1.4 Components of Rack Feeder System

The rack feeder system consists of the sample delivery module (SDM) and rack transfer
unit. The SDM is an independent module attached to the right side of the analyzer. No
matter how many analyzers are interconnected, only one SDM is configured. The rack
transfer unit is installed in front of the analyzer, and the quantity of rack transfer unit
depends on that of the analyzer. The SDM is composed of the rack supply unit, rack
storage unit, rack buffer unit, bar code scanning channel, and retrieval channel. The rack
transfer unit consists of the passing lane, normal lane, return lane, and lane change part.
Figure 1.6 FRU material position
1 - Rack buffer unit; 2 - Retrieval channel; 3 - Rack storage unit; 4 - Rack supply unit; 5 -
Bar code scanning channel

1.5 Functions of Rack Feeder System

The rack feeder system delivers sample to the aspirate position through sample racks
and retrieves samples that have finished sampling. The table below describes the
functions of each function area:
Table 1.2 Functions of Rack Feeder System
Function unit Function descriptions
Rack supply unit Used to load samples and supports the
insertion of STAT samples. It comprises the
push-in part and STAT push-back part. The
push-in part of the rack supply unit feeds
samples into the bar code scanning channel,
while the STAT push-back part responds to
pressing of the STAT key and pushes back the
sample racks for a distance in order to
facilitate the insertion of STAT samples.
Rack storage unit Provides area for retrieving the samples that
have finished testing. A push-in part is
designed to push sample rack into the storage
unit. Sensors are employed to detect the
almost full or the completely full status of the
sample retrieval area.
Rack buffer unit Receives sample racks that return from the
rack transfer unit and wait until test results
are worked out. Whether the samples need to
be rerun is determined while they wait here.
In addition, this unit provides the function for
transferring sample rack to the rack transfer
unit.
Bar code scanning channel Scans the bar code on sample racks and
sample tubes and detects whether samples
have been placed. In addition, it transfers
sample rack to the rack transfer unit. It
comprises the scanning push-in part and
push-out part.
Retrieval channel It is the passage to transfer sample rack to
the storage unit or the supply unit. It has a
push-in part used to carry sample rack to the
storage unit or back to the supply unit.
Passing lane Transfers sample rack directly to the quick
lane (or passing lane) of the next analyzer. It
also provides the function of STAT sample
aspiration.
Normal lane Provides the function of aspirating sample on
routine sample racks.
Return lane Used to return sample tracks to the SDM that
have finished measurement.

Function unit Function descriptions

Lane change part Used to switch the lanes, and provide the
function of switching between passing lane
and normal lane, passing lane and return
lane, normal lane and return lane.

1.6 Requirements on External Devices
1.6 Requirements on External Devices

1.6.1 Operation Unit
The operation unit (computer) is installed with the operating software to control the
running and operation of the analyzer and to process test data. The computer should at
least meet the following requirements:
CPU: Intel Core 2 Duo, 3.0GHz, dual-core.
Main board: BIOS, supporting network remote boot.
Hard disk: 320GB, with SATA interface.
Memory: 4GB.
Network adapter: Gigabit network card.
USB interface: 2.0, 2 or more.
Parallel port: 1.
Serial port: 3 or more.
Other: built-in speaker.
Operating system: Windows 7, 32 bits.
1.6.2 Display Monitor

17 touchscreen monitor, with resolution of 12801024.
1.6.3 Printer
Inkjet printer, laser printer and stylus printer are supported.
1.6.4 Power Supply Equipment

An online UPS with power output no less than 5000VA should be employed. The power
cord of the analyzer should be connected to an air switch (>16A) fixed on wall. The
ground voltage should be <5V.

1.7 Technical Specifications

1.7.1 Common Specifications
System
Fully-automated, discrete, and random selection.
System structure
Composed of analyzing unit (analyzer and SDM), operation unit (computer system),
output unit (printer), vacuum pump module, and consumables.
Sample type
Serum, plasma and other human body fluids.
Maximum number of tests run simultaneously
36.
Throughput
240 tests/hour.
Analysis mode
One-step method, two-step with one dispersion, and two-step with two dispersion. Auto
sample dilution is supported.
Reaction time
One-step method: 1~30 minutes.
First step of two-step method: 1~20 minutes.
Second step of two-step method: 1~20 minutes.
Reaction carousel temperature
370.3C.
Test type
Thyroid function, tumor, hormone, infectious disease, etc.
Predilution
Dilution is conducted in reaction cuvette at the ratio of 2~40.
Operation mode
Tests are defined one by one via the operating software; panels and calculation tests are
supported.
Calibration math model
The system provides following two calibration math models:
Quantitative (4PLC): The system utilizes 1-3 point calibration, to adjust reagent
calibration master curve to obtain calibration results. According to the calibration
results, sample RLU is converted to the value of concentration.
Qualitative (COI): The system utilizes 1-2 point calibration, to convert calibrator RLU to
Cutoff value according to the formula configured in advance. Determine if sample is
positive or negative by comparing sample RLU and Cutoff value.
QC

Westgard multi rules, cumulative sum check, and twin-plot.

Data processing
Capable of storing and outputting various types of data and charts, and calculating
among different chemistries.
Dimensions
Whole system: 1707 mm(length) 1191mm(width) 1400mm(height).
Analyzer: 1445mm(length) 1016 mm(width) 1145mm(height).
SDM: 1016mm(length) 705mm(width) 920mm(height).
Weight
Analyzer with rack transfer unit: 550kg.
SDM: 139kg.
Rack transfer unit: 150kg.
STAT sample
STAT samples can be inserted at any time and analyzed on the sample carousel or STAT
sample racks.
Networking
Allowed to connect with a LIS (Laboratory Information Management System).
1.7.2 Sample Specifications

Sample loading
Sample racks.
Sample containers
Microtube: 1425mm, 0.5ml (Beckman); 1425mm, 2ml (Beckman);
1237mm, 2ml (Hitachi).
Primary tube: 1268.5mm, 1299mm, 12.775mm, 12.775mm,
12.7100mm, 1375mm, 1395mm, and 13100mm.
Plastic tube: 1268.5mm, 1299mm, 12.775mm, 12.775mm,
12.7100mm, 1375mm, 1395mm, and 13100mm.
Some sample positions (more than 25) support 16.592mm, 1675mm and
16100mm.
The sample racks support sample tubes with diameter of 13mm-16mm.
Table 1.3 Dead volume of sample containers
Sample Container Specification Dead Volume
Sample container 1425mm, 0.5ml (Beckman) 210l
Sample container 1425mm, 2ml (Beckman) 150l
Sample container 1237mm, 2ml (Hitachi) 120l
Primary tube or 1268.5 mm 8mm more over the
plastic tube unacceptable sample level
height
Primary tube or 1299 mm 8mm more over the
height

Sample Container Specification Dead Volume

Primary tube or 12.775 mm 8mm more over the
height
height
height
height
Sample rack
10 sample positions are available on each rack. Maximum of 30 sample racks can be held
simultaneously in the supply unit.
STAT sample
STAT samples can be inserted at any time and analyzed on the STAT sample rack.
Sample volume
10l ~ 200l, with an increment of 1l.
Sample probe
Featuring level detection, horizontal/vertical obstruction detection, clog detection, and
level tracking.
Sample probe cleaning
Both interior and exterior of the sample probe are washed.
Sample input mode (e.g. bar code)
Table 1.4 Sample bar code specifications
Name Value
Symbology Codabar, ITF, code128, code39, UPC/EAN, Code93
Minimum bar code 0.19mm
density
Data bits 3-27
Format and content Codabar, ITF, Code128, Code39, UPC/EAN, and Code93.
Settings are not needed.
Maximum width 55mm
Minimum height 10mm
Maximum inclination 5
angle
Print quality No less than Class C according to the ANSI MH10.8M Print
Quality Specification.
Width and narrowness 2.5:1 to 3.0:1
1.7.3 Reagent Specifications

Reagent bar code

Fixed reagent bar code scanning is supported.

Encrypted bar code is employed on Mindray reagents. The bar code contains the
following reagent information: chemistry code (reagent chemistry name), lot number,
serial number, expiration date, number of tests, etc.
Print quality: Class A according to the ANSI MH10.8M standard.
Reagent refrigeration
Refrigeration temperature: 2-8C.
Reagent addition approach
Reagent is aspirated and dispensed precisely by syringe, which is capable of detecting
fluid level and checking reagent volume.
Supported reagent types
Maximum of 4 reagents are held in each reagent pack.
Reagent volume
20l-135L, with an increment of 1l.
Reagent carousel and reagent position
36 reagent positions are provided with the capability of mixing magnetic bead reagents.
Reagent pack capacity
100 tests/pack and 50 tests/pack.
Reagent probe
One reagent probe is available, featuring level detection, and horizontal/vertical
obstruction detection.
Reagent probe cleaning
Both interior and exterior of the reagent probe are washed. Between the aspirating of
two reagents, only the probe exterior is washed.
Prevention of reagent cross contamination
Users are allowed to perform carryover settings, e.g. washing interior and exterior of
reagent probes and inserting special wash between tests.
1.7.4 Specifications of Reaction System

Material of reaction cuvette
Disposable plastic cuvettes.
Mixing mode
An untouchable vortexer is employed to mix the mixture of sample and diluent, sample
and reagent, magnetic beads and reagent.
Reaction volume
Maximum of 350l.
Magnetic dispersion
4-phase dispersion with wash buffer solution in the dispersion unit.
Substrate addition
Substrate is preheated before addition, and the addition volume is 200l.

Optical measurement method

A photomultiplier photon counter is employed to conduct optical measurement through
photon counting. The LED reference module is used as the calibration light source.
1.7.5 Specifications of Operation Unit

Display Monitor
17" LCD touchscreen monitor.
Operating system
Windows 7.
Communication interface
RS232.
Printer
Supports inkjet printer, laser printer and stylus printer.
Data input
Keyboard, mouse, 17" touchscreen monitor, bar code reader, Remote Management
System (RMS, communicating through TCP/IP interface of static IP address), and LIS
(HL7 and ASTM1394, communicating through TCP/IP of static IP address or serial port).
Data output
Display monitor, printer, RMS (communicating through TCP/IP interface of static IP
address), and LIS.
Data storage
Hard disk and USB interface.

1.8 System Structure

1.8.1 System Structure
The chemiluminescence immunoassay analyzer consists of the analyzing unit (analyzer
and SDM), operation unit, output unit (printer, optional), and vacuum pump module
(for use in places above 2000m).
The analyzer determines various clinical chemistries in samples and displays the test
results. It is composed of the following components:
Sample probe
Reagent probe
First gripper
Second gripper
Reagent carousel
Built-in reagent bar code reader
Reaction carousel
Auto loader
Photometer
Dispersion module
Sample delivery module:
It is equipped with a built-in sample bar code reader and provides 20 routine sample
racks; for CL-2200i,10 routine sample racks are provided .
Operation unit:
The operation unit, a computer configured with the operating software, controls the
analyzing unit to finish the following operations: test requisition, analysis, reaction
process monitoring, result calculation, and data inputting/storage/query. It includes the
computer, display monitor (touchscreen displayer), hand-held bar code reader, and
operating software.
The output unit is a printer used to print out test results and other data.
Consumables include reaction cuvette, special wash solution, wash buffer, etc.


2 Test Procedure
This chapter includes the following contents:

Test procedure
Working mode
Startup and shutdown procedure

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer
Discard the cuvette after reaction
Photon counting
Incubation
Dispense substrate
Dispersion
Incubation

Dispense second-step
reagent and sample
and mix
with one dispersion
ns
Two-step method
sio d
er wo tho
sp t e
di ith p m
w te
s
o-
Tw
Dispersion
Incubation
pretreatment
Sample
2.1 Test Procedure
Dispense first-step reagent and

sample and mix
dilution
Sample
2.1 Test Procedure
2 Test Procedure
Initialization
Power on
2-2
2 Test Procedure
2.2 Working Mode
2.2 Working Mode

One SR DispersionA Incubation
step Incubation carousel Photometric
method Dispersion measurement
Two steps S First step Second
R step R Dispersion A Incubation
method
First incubation Second incubation carousel Photometric
with one measurement
dispersion Dispersion
Two steps Second Second
S step R Dispersion A Incubation
method step R Dispersion
with two First incubation Second incubation carousel Photometric
measurement
dispersion Dispersion
Sample
S diluent
Sample
dilution SR A Incubation Photometric

Incubation measurement
Four reaction modes are supported, and the first three are defined as normal modes.
1. One-step method
Sample is added before reagent, and maximum of 3 reagents can be added. After
addition, the sample and reagents are mixed, incubated on the reaction carousel, and
then dispersed. After dispersion, substrate is added to the mixture, which is then mixed
so that the magnetic beads bound to the reaction analyte evenly hang in the substrate.
After incubation with substrate, the reaction mixture is measured to get the
RLU(Relative Light Unit).
2. Two-step with one dispersion
addition, the sample and reagents are mixed, and then incubated for the first time on the
reaction carousel. After first incubation, reagent for the second step is added. Maximum
of 3 reagents can be added in the second step, and the total reagents for two steps
should be no more than 4. The sample-reagent mixture is incubated for the second
time, and then experiences the following operations: magnetic dispersion, substrate
addition, substrate mixing, incubation with substrate, and optical measurement.
3. Two-step with two dispersions
addition, the sample and reagents are mixed, incubated for the first time on the reaction
carousel, and then dispersed for the first time. After first dispersion, reagent for the
second step is added. Maximum of 2 reagents can be added in the second step, and the
total reagents for two steps should be no more than 4. After reagent addition for the
second step, the sample-reagent mixture experiences the following operations: second
incubation, second dispersion, substrate addition, substrate mixing, and optical
measurement, similar to the procedure of two-step with one dispersion.
4. Auto sample dilution
Sample is added before sample diluent. After addition, the sample and diluent are mixed,
and partial of the mixture is aspirated and dispensed into a new cuvette. A test
procedure is performed as needed.

2 Test Procedure
2.3 Startup Procedure

In the startup procedure, the analyzer completes a series of initialization actions under
the control of the operating software, and then enters the Standby status. The operation
procedure is as follows:
1 The system shakes hands with each lower-level unit.
2 System parameters are downloaded.
3 Special parameters are queried:
Alignment parameters: If fluidic alignment has not been performed, the
procedure ends.
Fluidic prime parameters: If fluidic prime has not been performed, the
procedure ends.
4 The operating software reminds the user to clear the solid waste container
according to the last shutdown record.
If there is no solid waste container, the procedure ends.
When there is only 1 solid waste container, if it is full, the procedure ends;
otherwise, the user is reminded to load the other one, and the procedure
continues.
When there are 2 solid waste containers, if both of them are full, the procedure
ends; if only one of them is full, the user is reminded to load the other one, and
the procedure continues; if both of them are not full, the procedure continues.
5 Reagent refrigeration, reaction carousel temperature control, dispersion carousel
temperature control, and substrate preheating, are turned on.
6 The PMT(Photomultiplier Tube) is powered on, and the LED is turned off. (This step
is executed only during the startup home procedure and failure home procedure
with failed photometer.)
7 The hydropneumatic unit is initialized in the following process:
Auto aspiration is turned on.

Pumps and valves are powered off for resetting (through combination
instructions) in the following order: (P08, P07, SV03, P04, SV11, SV12, P05,
SV14, SV15), (SV10, SV16, SV17, SV18), (SV20~SV27, without order limitation),
and then (SV30, SV31, SV32).
The diluted wash solution tank is queried. In the event of logic error
(FS01OFF and FS02ON), the procedure ends; if the container is empty
(FS01OFF and FS02OFF), the action of aspirating wash solution is executed.
Notes: The floater status check meets the following requirements: The query is
performed for 3 times in 3 seconds. If the 3 query results are identical, the
floater status is determined. For example, the empty floater of water tank is
queried for 3 times in 3 seconds. If the 3 query results are empty, the water
blank is deemed empty; otherwise, it is not empty.
The liquid waste container is queried. (The FS07 floater should not be ON for
continuously 3s; otherwise, the procedure ends.)
Liquid waste of the primary vacuum container is discharged (through
combination instructions).
Vacuum is established (through combination instructions).

2 Test Procedure
Waste pump P07 is turned on.

8 The whole unit resets systematically.
9 Vacuum is released (through combination instructions), and the waste pump P07 is
turned off.
10 The bar code reader is turned on, and then starts scanning after 5s delay. After
scanning, the scanning motor and laser are switched off.
11 The sample position, dilute position, mixing position, reaction carousel, and
dispersion carousel are cleared of cuvettes. (If the solid waste containers become
full during this process, the procedure ends.) (This step is neglected when logging
on the system with the R&D user account.)
12 The current gripping position on cuvette tray is determined:
Judgment of new tray: The first gripper checks the tray from the first position.
If the continuous 3 positions from the first one are occupied, the current tray is
deemed a new one and the current gripping position deemed the first position;
otherwise, the current tray is not a new one.
After determining a non-new tray, the first gripper starts from the recorded
current gripping position (suppose n). If n<126-3, and n, n+1 and n+2 are
occupied, the current gripping position would be n; if n is idle, and n+1, n+2
and n+3 are occupied, the current gripping position would be n+1. (The
gripping of each cuvette is recorded in relevant file and the database.) If
n>=126-3, the following positions are judged; if they are occupied, the current
gripping position would be n; otherwise, the cuvette positions are deemed
incorrect and the judgment ends. In this case, the current tray would be
unloaded and a new one loaded.
If the current gripping position record is lost due to software failure, the first
gripper starts from the first position. If the 3 continuous positions are occupied,
the gripper deems the first position the current gripping position; otherwise,
it continues until finds the current position. If no positions on the current tray
are occupied, a new tray is loaded. When less than 3 positions are left in the
end, if 2 continuous positions (when only 2 are left) or 1 position (when only 1
is left) is occupied, the first gripper deems the current position the current
gripping position.
13 The whole unit resets mechanically (and the two grippers do not grip cuvettes).
14 PMT self-test is performed.
(This step is executed only during the startup home procedure and failure home
procedure with failed photometer.)
15 Photometer calibration is performed. If the calibration fails, the procedure ends.

(This step is executed only during the startup home procedure and failure home
procedure with failed photometer.)
16 The PMT is powered off. (This step is executed only during the startup home
procedure and failure home procedure with failed photometer.)
If an error occurs in any of the steps stated above, the system directly enters the
Failure status without executing the remaining steps, and performs the abnormity
handling procedure.
Notes:

2 Test Procedure
When the substrate preheating temperature reaches 370.3 and lasts for 10 minutes,
the temperature control requirement is met; if the temperature is beyond 35~39
for 10s, the timing starts again; if the requirement is not met within 15 minutes, the
prompt "Substrate preheating temperature is out of range." is given.
Within the Temperature Control Steady Time t3 since the temperature control of
reaction carousel and dispersion carousel is turned on, if the temperature reaches 37
0.3, the temperature control requirement is met; if the temperature is beyond 35
~39 for 10s, the timing starts again; if the requirement is not met within t3, the
prompts "Reaction carousel temperature is out of range." and "Dispersion carousel
temperature is out of range. " are given.
In the case of a non-startup Home procedure, if the temperature control of substrate
preheating, reaction carousel and dispersion carousel is turned on, it would not be
judged again and tests can be started after the Home procedure is finished.

2 Test Procedure
2.4 Shutdown Procedure
2.4 Shutdown Procedure

The shutdown procedure is as follows:
1 The PMT is powered off.
2 The LED is turned off.
3 The bar code reader is turned off.
4 The temperature control of reaction carousel and dispersion carousel, substrate
preheating, and reagent refrigeration are turned off.
5 Liquid waste of the primary vacuum container is discharged (through combination
instructions).
6 Pumps and valves are powered off for resetting (through combination instructions).
7 The whole unit resets mechanically. (Most complicated)
When user selects Exit on the main screen, the shutdown procedure is executed
automatically. If it fails, user will be prompted to skip the shutdown procedure and exit
in emergency.

2 Test Procedure
2.5 Abnormity Handling Procedure
2.5 Abnormity Handling Procedure

Abnormities are handled in the following procedure:
instructions).
5 The whole unit resets mechanically. (Most complicated)

2 Test Procedure
2.6 Emergency Stop Procedure
2.6 Emergency Stop Procedure

This procedure is performed as follows for emergency stop in special conditions:
instructions).
Note: This procedure differs from the abnormity handling procedure in no mechanical
reset.

2 Test Procedure
2.7 Before Test
2.7 Before Test

The following actions are executed before every batch of tests is started:
1 Liquid waste of the primary vacuum container is discharged.
2 Waste pump P07 is turned on.
3 Vacuum is established.
4 The PMT is powered on.
5 The whole unit (including analyzer and SDM) resets systematically.
6 PMT self-test is performed.
7 The photometer is calibrated.
8 The LED is turned on.
9 Whether a long mixing of the reagent carousel is needed is checked according to the
Long Mixing Time Limit before Test. If the time limit is not exceeded since the last
long mixing time, tests are started directly; otherwise, a long mixing is executed.

2 Test Procedure
2.8 After Test
2.8 After Test

The following actions are executed after every batch of tests is finished:
1 After finishing sample addition in the final period, the sample probe is specially
washed for continuously 3 periods.
2 When all test actions are finished, an effect check is performed according to the
settings.
3 After the test, liquid waste of the primary vacuum container is discharged (through
combination instructions).

2 Test Procedure
2.9 Mechanical Reset
2.9 Mechanical Reset

The following actions are completed during resetting of the whole unit:
Reaction carousel resetting: The reaction carousel is reset after the vertical
resetting of the reagent probe and second gripper.
Reagent carousel resetting: The reagent carousel is reset after the vertical resetting
of the reagent probe.
Dispersion carousel resetting: The dispersion carousel is reset after the vertical
resetting of the second gripper, aspirate station and dispense station.
Second gripper resetting: Vertical resetting Horizontal resetting (After
gripping a cuvette,) the second gripper puts it on the outer ring of the prepared
reaction carousel. The fingers of the second gripper are reset. (While the
second gripper grips a cuvette,) the reaction carousel rotates. (While the second
gripper grips a cuvette,) the first gripper grips a cuvette from the reaction carousel
outer ring and then discards it.
First gripper resetting: Vertical resetting Find home position in X direction
Stop until the sample probe and reagent probe reach the home position Quickly
move to sampling position Calibrate and move to home position (While
gripping a cuvette,) move to discarding position, discard the cuvette, and move to
the home position Finger resetting.
Reagent probe resetting: Vertical resetting Stop until the first gripper reaches the
home position Find horizontal zero position and move to wash well Calibrate
and move to home position Stop above the wash well.
home position Find horizontal zero position and move to sampling position
Calibrate and move to home position Stop above the wash well.
Dispense station resetting: Reset vertically after resetting of the aspirate station
3.6s vortex dispersion.
Aspirate station resetting: vertical resetting.
Vortexer resetting: After vertical resetting of the second gripper, the vortexer rotates
for 5s and then stops.

2 Test Procedure
2.10 System Reset
2.10 System Reset

The following actions are completed during resetting of the whole unit:
Reaction carousel resetting: The reaction carousel is reset after the vertical
resetting of the reagent probe and second gripper.
Reagent carousel resetting: The reagent carousel is reset after the vertical resetting
of the reagent probe.
Dispersion carousel resetting: The dispersion carousel is reset after the vertical
resetting of the second gripper, aspirate station and dispense station.
Second gripper resetting: Vertical resetting Horizontal resetting (After
gripping a cuvette,) the second gripper puts it on the outer ring of the prepared
reaction carousel. The fingers of the second gripper are reset. (While the
second gripper grips a cuvette,) the reaction carousel rotates. (While the second
gripper grips a cuvette,) the first gripper grips a cuvette from the reaction carousel
outer ring and then discards it.
First gripper resetting: Vertical resetting Find home position in X direction
Stop until the sample probe and reagent probe reach the home position Quickly
move to sampling position Calibrate and move to home position (While
gripping a cuvette,) move to discarding position, discard the cuvette, and move to
the home position Finger resetting.
home position Find horizontal zero position and move to wash well Calibrate
and move to home position Interior and exterior washing Stop above the wash
well.
Reagent syringe resetting: reset aspirate full discharge.
home position Find horizontal zero position and move to sampling position
Calibrate and move to home position Stop when reaching the wash well
Interior and exterior washing Stop above the wash well.
Sample syringe resetting: reset aspirate full discharge.
Dispense station resetting: Reset vertically after resetting of the aspirate station
3.6s vortex dispersion.
Aspirate station resetting: vertical resetting.
Vortexer resetting: After vertical resetting of the second gripper, the vortexer rotates
for 5s and then stops.
Wash buffer syringe resetting.
Substrate syringe resetting: reset, aspirate 500l, and discharge 70l.
Valve action: The following valves are turned on/off: sample probe interior wash
valve, reagent probe interior wash valve, sample probe exterior wash valve, reagent
probe exterior wash valve, sample probe wash vacuum valve, reagent probe wash
vacuum valve, probe wash waste valve, dispersion 4-phase inlet valve, substrate
switch valve, and substrate inlet valve.

2 Test Procedure
2.10 System Reset

3 Installation Guide

Installation environment
Installation
System Performance Test

3.1 Installation Environment

Altitude: -400-4,000m. (106kPa-63.2kPa. An external vacuum pump is required
when the instrument is used at an altitude between 2000m and 4000m)
The system is for indoor use only.
The bearing platform (or ground) should be level (with gradient less than 1/200).
The bearing platform (or ground) should be able to support at least 750Kg weight.
The installation site should be well ventilated, but not under an air conditioner.
The installation site should be free of dust.
The installation side should not be in direct sun.
The installation site should be kept away from a heat or draft source.
The installation site should be kept away from high-power electromagnetic
equipment or base station.
The installation site should be free of corrosive gas and flammable gas.
The bearing platform (of ground) should be free of vibration.
Operating temperature: 15 C-30 C with fluctuation <2 C/H. Provide air
conditioning equipment if the room temperature does not meet the requirements.
Relative humidity: 35%-85%, without condensation.
3.1.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Unpacking

Dimensions of analyzer after packing: 1707 mm(length) 1191mm(width)
1400mm(height).
The space for unpacking the instrument should be over 2m wide and over 5m long.
Figure 3.1 Space and accessibility requirements for unpacking CL-2000i/CL-2200i
CL-
2000iChemiluminescence
Immunoassay Analyzer
2 3
1707mm 1100mm 1600mm
3.1.2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation

Dimensions of whole unit before packing: 1445mm(length)1016 mm(depth)
1145mm(height)
Dimensions of SDM before packing: 1016mm(length) 705mm(depth)
920mm(height)
The installation space should be over 5.6m2.2m.

Figure 3.2 Space and accessibility requirements for installation of CL-2000i/CL-2200i

5625mm
Air switch
Power cord
Data cable
800mm
Waste tube
Waste tank
LIS server
PC
2467mm
UPS
CL-2000i SDM
1445mm 705mm
3.1.3 Power Supply and Noise

Power supply: 110/115V~ 60Hz. Voltage fluctuation: +/-10%. Line frequency: +/-3Hz.
Three-wire power cord with good grounding performance.
WARNING
Make sure the power socket is grounded correctly. Improper grounding may lead to
electric shock or equipment damage. Check if the power socket outputs voltage meeting
the specified requirements and has a proper fuse installed.
Rated input power of analyzer: 3200VA; rated input power of SDM: 800VA. The SDM
should be connected to a power socket with load no less than 16A.
If the user is going to use a UPS to power the instrument, make sure that the UPS can
provide power supply greater than or equal to 5000VA (analyzer + computer + printer).
The installation site should be kept away from big noise and power supply interference.
Keep the system away from brush-type motors and electrical contact devices that are
frequently switched on and off.
Do not use such devices as mobile phones and radio transmitters near the system.
3.1.4 Drainage Check (if draining water through a sewer)

The instrument is able to directly discharge waste through a sewer, and the waste tube
should be between 2m~10m.
The waste outlet should be no less than 50mm wide.
The waste outlet should be no higher than 1.2m.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of liquid waste according to local regulations.

3.2 Configuration Check
3.2 Configuration Check

Table 3.1 Configuration list
Configuration Quantity
CL-2000i/CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer 1
(standard)
Sample Delivery Module (SDM) (optional) 1
Accessory kit (standard) 1
Computer (standard) 1
Display monitor (standard) 1
Hand-held bar code reader (standard) 1
Wash buffer (standard) 1
Printer (optional) 1
External vacuum pump (optional) 1

3.3 Tools
3.3 Tools
Hexagon wrenches (M3~M6), 13# box spanner, tape measure, 200mm spanner, cross
screwdriver, sharp nose pliers
Figure 3.3 Tools

3.4 Installation Procedure

3.4.1 Unpacking
1 Check against packing list: Check the instrument configuration against the packing
list according to section 3.2 Configuration Check.
2 Unloading: Unload the analyzer and SDM from the truck with a forklift over 1.5m. (A
short forklift may fail to lift the analyzer and hinder the transportation.)
Note: There is a tilt warning label on the instrument package, which can change in
color for tilting. When the center of the label turns red, it means the package has
been seriously tilted and instrument damage may be caused. Contact the logistics
company immediately to prevent unexpected results.
Figure 3.4 Tilt warning label in normal conditions
3 Unpacking analyzer: Use a 13# box spanner (or an adjustable wrench) to loosen the
retaining screws on the upper cover of the package, and remove the upper cover.
Loosen the retaining screws on the side covers, lay down the slope cover and keep
3.0m space in front of it (1.5m for the slope cover and 1.45m for the instrument).
Note
After unpacking, remind the user to store the packaging materials for 3 months for
use in returning/replacing the instrument.

Figure 3.5 No screws on top of slope cover
Figure 3.6 Slope cover
Slope cover
4 Removing mounting plates: There are 6 mounting plates, 3 in the front and 3 in the
back. Follow this procedure:
Remove the retaining screws that have been vertically fixed on the 6 mounting
plates.

Note: Before removing the 3 mounting plates in the front, open the front door
assembly for convenient operation.
Figure 3.7 Open the front door
Screw down the 4 anchors to loosen the retaining screws that have been
horizontally fixed.
Note: Before removing the 3 mounting plates in the front, open the front door
assembly for convenient operation.
Figure 3.8 Screw down anchors before loosening horizontal screws
Remove the retaining screws that have been horizontally fixed on the 6
mounting plates.
Remove the 6 mounting plates.
5 Pushing out analyzer: Restore the anchors and push out the analyzer from the
bottom plate. Operate carefully to prevent scratches.
CAUTION
Since the instrument is heavy with great inertia, 3~4 persons are recommended and
at least 2 persons should slow down the instrument in front of the slope cover.

Figure 3.9 Lift anchors
6 Unpacking SDM: Untie the belts on the SDM package, and remove the upper cover
and side covers.
Figure 3.10 Unpack SDM
7 Removing mounting plates of SDM: Refer to Step 4 to remove the mounting plates of
the SDM:
8 Pushing out SDM: Restore the anchors and push out the SDM. Two persons are
required to finish this step.

Note: The gravity of the SDM is not in its center. Attention your force during
transportation.
Figure 3.11 Pushing direction of SDM
9 Placing analyzer and SDM in clinical laboratory department: Push the analyzer and
SDM to the specified position along the planned path. 2~3 persons are required to
prevent scratches.
Note: If the transportation channel is narrow, please remove the rack transfer unit
and front door assembly of the analyzer before transport. Removing wrapping film
and locating analyzer and SDM: Remove the wrapping film, tapes and sponge on the
analyzer and SDM, and remove the power cords from the empty chambers of the
SDM. Locate the analyzer and SDM, and screw down the anchors to prevent the
analyzer and SDM from moving. (One person is required to screw down all anchors
manually so that they can be lifted to the same height.)
Check: Check if the following packaging materials have been removed:
Foam for fixing the drawer
Folded foam for preventing the wash buffer tank from falling
Foam on the dispersion carousel

Foam to protect the cuvette loader assembly
Foam for fixing the tray bracket assembly
Plugs of inlet and outlet
Sealing tape on wash wells

Tape for fixing the tube on probe arm
Fixing tape on scanning push-in and push-out parts

Protective tapes on panels

Figure 3.12 Remove wrapping film
3.4.2 Interconnection
1 Preparation for interconnection: After getting the analyzer and SDM ready, remove
the front, right and rear panels of the SDM.

Figure 3.13 Rear panel of the analyzer
Figure 3.14 Remove the front/right/rear panels of the SDM
Figure 3.15 Before removing
Figure 3.16 After removing

2 Fixing analyzer: Confirm the analyzer's position and lift the anchors. Use a spanner,
if necessary, to spin the anchors for 5-10 circles to fix the analyzer. Ensure all of the
4 anchors are span for the same circles.
Note: Prior to interconnection, protect the connection cable on the right of the front
track to prevent it from being damaged.
Figure 3.17 Interconnection cable
Cable
3 Interconnection cable: Lead the interconnection cable through the hole below the
scanning channel and connect it to the SDM conversion board (1# conversion board
on the top), and then fix the cable with the clamps in the accessory kit.

Note: The two hanging connectors are reserved for M2 and should be left aside.
Figure 3.18 Lead the cable
Figure 3.19 Fix the cable with clamps
Figure 3.20 Connect cables of the front track (on upper board)
Figure 3.21 Hanging connectors

4 Fixing SDM: Align the SDM with the analyzer and screw down the anchors. Adjust
the anchors to keep the SDM level.
Note: Use the following two methods to check if the SDM is level: 1) sliding a track
alignment tool (or 2 sample racks) on the track; and 2) check if the gap between the
frameworks is even.
Figure 3.22 Apply a track alignment tool
Figure 3.23 Check interconnection
Even gap
between
frameworks
5 Installing connection screws: Take out 4 connection screws from the accessory kit
and install them between the analyzer and the SDM from either of the two
directions. If you fail to install the screws, adjust the analyzer and SDM and retry.
Check the analyzer and SDM according to Step 3 and then tighten the screws.

Note: Do not forget the flat and spring washers of the screws to ensure
interconnection effects. The holes marked in red circle are IN holes and those on the
top are OUT holes.
Figure 3.24 Connection screws for analyzer and SDM
Figure 3.25 Install the connection screws
Connecting serial cable: The serial port for connection with the analyzer is located
on the SDM. Use a serial cable to connect the analyzer with the SDM (the second
port from the bottom of the SDM network interface conversion board).
Figure 3.26 Serial cable for connecting the analyzer

Figure 3.27 Connect the serial cable
6 Connecting network cable: Connect the analyzer with the SDM through the network
interface in order to support the auto awake function.
Note: The network interface conversion board of the SDM has limited space due to
mechanical reasons. Push back the cables to leave enough space for the network
cable.
Figure 3.28 Connect the network cable
7 Connecting power cords: Connect the analyzer with the distributor in the back of
the SDM, through witch external AC power supply is distributed to the analyzer.

Note: Install the power cord properly, and check it by pulling outwards.
Figure 3.29 Connect power cords
8 Connecting UPS (provided by the distributor): If configured, the UPS should be

connected to the analyzer by its supplier.
3.4.3 Installing Peristaltic Pump Tube

Installing Single-Tube Pump (for sucking wash buffer) Tube
1 Open the left back panel (bigger one) of the analyzer to expose the single-tube
pump and tube. The tube has not been installed on the pump head (as shown in the
figure below), in order to avoid pressing during transportation and storage.

2 Put the tube in the pump head, and check the installation according to the figure
below.

Installing Dispersion Pump Tube

Like the single-tube pump, the dispersion pump also needs to be installed. Remove the
right back panel (smaller one) of the analyzer to expose the dispersion pump assembly.
1 Peel off the protective tape.

2 Remove the limit cover of the dispersion pump by loosening the two hexagon socket
screws.
3 Click the 4-phase pump tubes in place, and adjust the limit buckles in order to be
easily locked in the limit plate.

4 Check the dispersion pump after installation.
3.4.4 Removing Retaining Screws on the Reagent Carousel

There are two retaining screws applied to the reagent carousel. Open the reagent
carousel cover and remove the two retaining screws.

Figure 3.30 Remove the retaining screws
Figure 3.31 After the retaining screws are removed
3.4.5 Installing Probes

Installing Sample Probe
1 Removing arm cover: Loosen the two M3 cross pan head screws on two sides of the
arm cover without removing them.

Figure 3.32 Retaining screws on the arm cover
2 Installing probe: Remove the guide rod and spring, and insert the probe downwards
into the hole on the probe arm while aligning the screw hole on the probe plate to
the rod inside the arm. The probe plate is located in the middle of the optical sensor.
Figure 3.33 Two spring guide posts
3 Connecting tube: Align the tube connector to the probe connector according to the
figure below, and screw them clockwise. Insert the plug on the end of the probe into
the jack on the liquid level detection board.
Figure 3.34 Fluidic tube
4 Installing spring: Sleeve the spring on the rod and tighten the retaining screw.
After installation, pinch the probe by the part near the probe arm, push the probe
upwards and then release it to check if the spring works well. If it does, proceed to
the next step. If not, check if the spring is clamped or fixed too tightly.
5 Connecting power supply: After installation, power on the analyzer, check if the
No.D2 LED indicator (orange) on the circuit board inside the sample probe arm is lit.
If it is, it indicates that the liquid level detection system is powered normally. Use a
water-dipped cotton swab to touch the probe tip and check if the No.D5 LED
indicator (green) is lit. If it is, it indicates that the liquid level detection board can
function normally.

Figure 3.35 Sample level detection indicators
6 Priming: During fluidic prime, check the tube connectors for leaks.
7 Installing arm cover: After ensuring the tubes are correct, install the arm cover and
tighten the screws.
Note: Excessive force may scrape the white paint off the arm cover and damage the
plastic arm cover. Do not try too hard when tightening the screws.
Installing Reagent Probes

Refer to the previous section to install the reagent probe.
Checking Retaining Screws on the Sample/Reagent Syringes

Check if the retaining screws on the sample and reagent syringes are loose. If yes, tighten
them.
Plunger
retaining screw

3.4.6 Installing Handle of the Wash Buffer Drawer

For the purpose of convenient packaging and transportation, the handle of the wash
buffer drawer has been removed and the drawer mounting plate installed. (The drawer
handle and screws are sealed in a bag of the accessory kit.) To remove the drawer
mounting plate and restore the handle, perform the following steps:
1 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the four M410 screws on the mounting plate and
then remove the mounting plate.
2 Take out the handle and the two M510 screws from the accessory kit, and fix the
handle on the drawer's bottom plate.
Figure 3.36 Remove four screws on the drawer mounting plate
Four
M4X10hexagon
drawer
socket screw
mounting
plate

Figure 3.37 Install drawer handle
2 M5X10 hexagon
socket screw with handle
spring washer
3.4.7 Fluidic Connection

Connecting Waste Tubes
The waste tube provided with the instrument is ID12mmOD18mm PVC tube. The
service engineer should connect the waste tube and waste sensor with the analyzer, and
connect the other end of the waste tube to the waste tank.

To drain waste to a sewer:

Figure 3.38 Connecting Waste Tubes
CL-2000i Analyzer
External
pump sensor
2 3
Sewer
Requirements for connecting waste tubes:

Insert the waste tube into the sewer, and make sure that the tube is about 2m~10m
long.
Make sure that the waste outlet is no less than 50mm wide and less than 1.2m high.
Ensure that the waste tube outlet is higher than the liquid level in the sewer in
order to prevent bubbles overflow.
Cover the waste outlet to eliminate noise and prevent bubbles overflow.
To prevent leaks, fix all tubes and connectors properly with the tube clamps in the
accessory kit.
When installing the tubes, prevent them from being bent, twisted, or pressed, and
keep them away from any sharp-edged objects or others that may scratch the tubes.
Ensure that all electric connectors are higher than and away from fluidic parts and
prevent fluidic connectors from facing electric components.
BIOHAZARD
Dispose of liquid waste according to local regulations.

Connecting Wash Buffer

Pull out the wash buffer drawer in the front cabinet of the analyzer, load the new wash
buffer solution tanks to the drawer, and connect the tube connectors. Do not
contaminate the part of the tank cap assembly that contacts the wash buffer; otherwise,
test results may be affected.

Figure 3.39 Pull out the drawer
Figure 3.40 Take out two tank cap assemblies from the accessory kit
Figure 3.41 Put the tank cap assembly into the wash buffer tank and tighten the cap

Figure 3.42 Load wash buffer tank and connect the fluidic connector
Final Connection Effects

Figure 3.43 Connect wash solution (from left to right: 1 - Wash buffer solution tank (
2); 2 - Wash buffer tank)

3.4.8 Connection of PC
Installing Display Monitor
1 Remove the package of the display monitor and check if the following accessories
are available.
2 Ensure the power switches of the computer and display monitor have been turned
off. Connect power cords to the computer and display monitor.
3 Connect one end of the adapter to the display monitor and the other end to the
power cord.
4 Connect one end of the USB cable of the touchscreen to COM2 of the computer and
the other end to the display monitor.
5 Connect one end of the video cable to the computer and the other end to the display
monitor. Tighten the two thumbscrews clockwise.
6 Press the power key on the rear panel of the display monitor to switch on the
power.
Note
If the serial cable is not connected, connection between the computer and display
monitor may fail accidentally.
Installing Serial Port Card (aimed for international distributor)

Connecting Data Cable
Connect one end of the data cable to the analyzer and the other end to serial port 1 of the
computer.

Note: The data cable has two rows of pins on one end and three rows of pins on the other
end. Do not insert it by excessive force.
Figure 3.44 Connect serial cable (connect the connector marked in red circle to the
analyzer)
Complete the software installation according to the SetupGuide.

3.5 Preparation
3.5 Preparation
Switch on the power supply of the drainage module (optional).
Turn on the main power switch of the analyzer.
See the figure below. The instrument automatically fills wash buffer into the wash
buffer tank, and the tank can be filled full in 10~15 minutes in normal conditions.
Figure 3.45 Auto filling of wash buffer
Load at least 3 cuvette-installed trays (no more than 9).

Figure 3.46 Load cuvette trays
Pull out the

drawer and
place the
cuvette trays

3.6 First Startup
3.6 First Startup

1 Start up the computer. The CL-2000i/CL-2200i Operating Software is run
automatically. See the following figure.
Figure 3.47 Start up CL-2000i/CL-2200i operating software
The system skips the initialization procedure when detecting that the fluidic prime
is not performed. Enter the username ServiceUser and password #BS8A#SEU
in the login window.
Figure 3.48 Login window
2 Set up the local atmospheric pressure. (If the altitude is high, set up the atmospheric
pressure by checking the altitude of the installation site of the analyzer and finding
the corresponding atmospheric pressure in Appendix A.) Select Utility ->
Maintenance -> Alignment -> M1 -> Hydro Unit, select the Vacuum Pressure Check
button, enter the atmospheric pressure as indicated in the figure below, and then
select Config to save the input.

3.6 First Startup
Note: Configure parameters in the order of "inquiring parameters -> modifying

parameters -> confirming configuration" and exit the current window. Access the
configuration window again and inquire the parameters to ensure they have been
configured successfully.
Figure 3.49 Select Vacuum Pressure Check
Figure 3.50 Configure atmospheric pressure
3 Proceed to fluidic prime after finishing the configuration.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
3.7 Fluidic Prime

3.7.1 Check before Fluidic Prime
Perform the following checks prior to fluidic prime:
The wash buffer floater cables have been connected (as shown in the figure below).
The auto priming of wash buffer is normal, and buzzing sound of the pump can be
heard during the priming process. After priming, the buzzing sound disappears and
the wash buffer tank (2L) is full.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
Figure 3.51 Check floater sensor cable
Tighten the
connectors of the
liquid level floater
sensor
3.7.2 Fluidic Prime

Start the fluidic prime after finishing the preparation.
Wash Buffer Aspirating Tube Check and Prime

1 Select 6 Wash Buffer Aspirating Tube Check and Prime, and select Continue.
2 Select Continue, and check the floater status according to the screen prompts.
Wash Buffer Prime

1 Select 7 Wash Buffer Prime, and select Continue.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
2 Select Continue, and select Start to wash and prime the probes for 20 times. Probe
interior: The cleaning water should spray out straightly and continuously from the
sample probe and reagent probe. Probe exterior: The cleaning water should spray
out straightly and continuously from the four small holes on the wash wells of the
sample probe and reagent probe.
3 Select OK to continue after the priming is finished.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
4 Remove the dispersion dispense probes and put them in a proper container, and
then select Continue. (Pay attention to the markers D12, D2, D3, and D4, and do not
confuse them with those of the aspirate probes; otherwise, overflow may be
caused.)
5 Make sure the dispersion dispense probes have been removed and put in a proper
container, and then select Continue.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
6 Select Start to prime the dispense probes for 20 times, and observe the 4-phase
dispense probes till they continuously dispense wash solution without air bubbles.
7 After the priming is finished, select OK.
8 Wipe the dispense probes with clean fiber cloth dipped with deionized water and
install them properly.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
9 Check that the dispense probes are installed properly, and select Continue to exit.
(Pay attention to the markers D12, D2, D3, and D4, and do not mistaken the probe
order; otherwise, overflow may be caused.)
Clean Substrate Tubes

1 Select 8 Substrate Subsystem Component Check and Tube Wash.
2 Remove the substrate spikes and hang them over a waste container, (Prevent the
substrate spikes from contacting other objects or liquid; otherwise, wash them with
acidic organic solvents and ultra-pure water.) and select Continue.
3 Load acid wash solution (no less than 50ml for each bottle) in the positions of
substrate 1 and 2, and select Continue.
4 Select Start to prime for over 10 times (with substrate 1).
5 Select Turn ON below SV30 Substrate Switch to switch to substrate 2, select Start to
prime for over 10 times till liquid is discharged from the substrate spike, remove
the substrate wash solution, and wait for 5 minutes to soak the tubes.
6 Substitute empty bottles (or no bottles) for the substrate bottles, repeat steps 3~5,
and remove the empty bottles after discharging.
7 Substitute ultra-pure water for the substrate bottles, and repeat steps 3~5.
8 Select Continue to finish the substrate tube wash.
Substrate Prime
Load substrates prior to priming:

3.7 Fluidic Prime
Use the 2-dimension bar code reader (provided with the instrument) to scan the bar
code on the substrate bottle and then load the substrate bottle: On the Reagent ->
Special Reagent screen, select Substrate 1 and then select Load. After bar code
scanning, the software gets the substrate volume automatically. Load Substrate 2 in
the same way.
Figure 3.52 Hand-held bar code reader
If the scanning fails, the bar code reader cannot read the bar code. Please perform
"Add and Enter Key" on the operation manual of the bar code reader, and check after
scanning 3 bar codes.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
Figure 3.53 Scan the substrates
Figure 3.54 Load the substrates
1 Select 5 Substrate Prime.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
2 Select OK. (The two steps on the figure have been completed by the manufacturing
personnel.)
3 Select Continue.
4 Select OK.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
5 Select Continue to skip the deionized water prime, which has been finished in the
previous steps.
6 Select Continue to skip the deionized water discharging, which has been finished in
the previous steps.
7 Load the two substrate bottles and perform substrate prime according to the steps
above.

3.7 Fluidic Prime
8 The fluidic prime procedure is complete.

3.8 Position Confirmation and Alignment

Perform the Home procedure, which takes about 20m till the temperature gets steady. If
the system status becomes Standby and no alarms occur, confirm and alignment key
positions according to the Alignment Guide; otherwise, troubleshoot the errors.
Figure 3.55 Homing System
Positions that need confirmation include:

Positions of sample probe: horizontal wash position, sample aspirate position and
dispense position, and 1#/2# horizontal diluting positions.
Positions of reagent probe: aspirate position, dispense position, and wash position.
Position of dispersion carousel: dispersion carousel position offset.
Positions of gripper.
Bar code scanning positions: including sample bar code (optional) scanning
position. After alignment, perform the bar code repeatability test. Use the bar code
labels on the accompanying reagents and borrow sample bar code labels from the
user.
Offset of position switch for rack supply unit.
Offset between sample center and scanning position (using racks without adapters).

Note: When the third bar code is being scanned, observe the final sample rack on
the white transition plate of the supply unit. When the supply push-in part pushes
the rack to the scanning channel, the rack should not tilt or be blocked.
Figure 3.56 Alignment of sample bar code scanning
Positions of aspirate positioning station (in STAT lane and normal lane).
Buffer unit grid aligned with the lanes and channels. (The retrieval channel needs
no confirmation.)
The table below lists the alignment contents required during installation:
Table 3.2 List of alignments for installation
Module Unit Alignment Required
during
Installation
Analyzer Dispersion Dispersion Carousel Position Offset Yes
unit
Gripper Gripper Outside/Middle/Inside of Reaction Yes
Carousel Horizontal
Gripper Mixing Position Horizontal Yes
Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal Yes
Gripper Tray Horizontal Yes
Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Yes
Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment
Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Yes
Horizontal
Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2 Yes
Alignment
Reagent Horizontal Position for Aspirating Yes
probe unit Ra/Rb/Rc/Rd
Reagent Probe Horizontal Wash Position Yes
Horizontal Reagent Dispense Position on Yes
Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer rings
Sample Sample Probe Wash Position Horizontal Yes

Module Unit Alignment Required

during
Installation
probe unit Sample Probe Horizontal Dispense and Yes
1#/2# Diluting Positions
SDM Connection SDM and horizontal position of front track Yes
between SDM and vertical position of front track Yes
SDM and
front track
Rack supply Position switch offset Yes
unit Sample container position Yes
Bar code scanning alignment Yes
Scanning Push-In Part Moving to Utmost End Yes
Alignment of scanning push-out part Yes
Rack Grid aligning with scanning channel Yes
retrieval The grid aligning with return lane Yes
unit
Grid aligning with retrieval channel Yes
Offset of Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Yes
Rack Storage Unit
No.1 sample position offset of aspirate Yes
positioning station
Sample Probe Rotary to Normal Lane Yes
Non-normal No.1 sample position offset of aspirate Yes
unit positioning station
Sample Probe Rotary to Passing Lane Yes
Offset of Return Push-Out Part Moving to Yes
End Position
Lane change part aligning with transfer lane Yes
Lane change part aligning with normal lane Yes
Lane Change from Return Lane to Normal Yes
Lane
Lane Change Part Aligning with Return Lane Yes

3.9 Setup
3.9 Setup
3.9.1 Initialize Maintenance Logs
Perform the Home command to put the system into Standby status. Select Utility ->
Maintenance -> Maintenance, confirm all scheduled maintenance procedures and set up
start time for them. The maintenance frequencies include Daily, Weekly, Monthly,
Three-Month, Six-Month, and Other. Select the Select All button on each scheduled
maintenance tab page, and then select OK. The current date and time appears in the Date
Performed column of each maintenance procedure.
Figure 3.57 Initial maintenance record
3.9.2 Loading Special Reagents

Loading wash buffer:
Load wash buffer on the Reagent -> Special Reagent screen as shown in the figure below.
Prompt: Select W Buffer 1 and select Load F1. Ensure the reagent volume is 100%, and
then select Load F3. Select Exit F5 to close the window. Select W Buffer 2 and load it in
the same way. After all operations, check that the two buffers have been loaded.
Substrates and cuvettes have been loaded in the early operations.
Load wash solution D3 (CD80) in the same way as wash buffer after finishing the
system performance test.
Load the sample diluent during clinical test. Once it is loaded to the reagent carousel,
the reagent bar code reader scans its bar code to calculate the volume. On the Reagent
Overview screen, the details of sample diluent positions are different from those of other
reagent positions.

3.9 Setup
Figure 3.58 Load wash buffer
Figure 3.59 Reagent carousel status (sample diluent position)
3.9.3 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters

Select Utility -> Chemistries -> Config F3.

3.9 Setup
Figure 3.60 Chemistry Configuration
1 Select Options to display the Options window.

Figure 3.61 Chemistry Configuration
2 Select Import to display the Import window. Select Load Default to display all
Mindray reagent chemistries in the left column. Select Add All to add all chemistries
to the right column. Select Exit to close the window.

3.9 Setup
Figure 3.62 Import default chemistry parameters
3 Select Import and then select Exit. The default chemistry parameters are imported.
Figure 3.63 Select Import and Exit
4 Check the imported chemistries on the Chemistries screen.

3.9 Setup
Figure 3.64 Check the imported chemistries

3.10 DCF Check
3.10 DCF Check

1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Diagnostics -> Photometer Diagnosis -> DCF
Diagnosis.
2 Parameter settings: Set the Test Cycle as 50 and select Start to start the test.
3 Record the Relative Extreme Difference, which should be less than 1.5%.
Figure 3.65 DCF stability test

3.11 System Check
3.11 System Check

1 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Diagnostics -> System Diagnosis.
The system check should satisfy the following indices:
Table 3.3 Test index
Item Index
Substrate background SD200
Sample probe CV2%
Reagent probe CV2%

3.11 System Check
Figure 3.66 System Check
2 Only select Background Test, Reagent Probe Test, and Sample Probe Test.

3.11 System Check
Figure 3.67 Background Test, Reagent Probe Test, and Sample Probe Test
3 Prepare a sample rack and load a microcup with 1ml system check solution (AP
enzyme) in 1# position of the rack, select Execute and wait for results.

3.11 System Check
Figure 3.68 Wait for results
Figure 3.69 Check results
4 Check the results. In this case, substrate background SD=74<200, reagent probe
repeatability 1%<2%, and sample probe repeatability 0.5%<2%, all of which meet
the requirements.

3.12 Other Tests
3.12 Other Tests

3.12.1 Repeatability Test
While referring to the requirements in CL-2000i/CL-2200i Installation Acceptance
Report, perform a repeatability test for all chemistries listed in the report, fill the test
results in the result record table. In the event of failed items, troubleshoot them
immediately.

3.13 Result Records
3.13 Result Records

Fill in the CL-2000i/CL-2200i Installation Acceptance Report in the accessory kit, submit
it to the clinical engineer for signing and then upload it to the CRM system.

3.14 Returning Logs
3.14 Returning Logs

After instrument installation, find the daily logs in folders Arithmetic ,
ArithmeticData and FlowSrvPerf and return them to TS.
The path is: D:\Mindray\CL2000i\OperationSoft\BS800LOG

4 Emptying and Packing
This chapter introduces the methods of emptying and packing the whole unit, in order to
instruct the service engineers to empty and pack the whole unit on the customer end.

4.1 Emptying Procedure
4.1 Emptying Procedure

4.1.1 Emptying the Analyzer
Empty the analyzer according to the following procedure:
Primary
Secondary procedure
procedure
Auto
Turning off cooler
drain
Auto Wash wash buffer Wash dispersion

Wash substrate
discarding aspiration tube and aspirating tube and
tube and drain
cuvette drain drain
Clean wash buffer tube

and drain
Wash waste tube and

drain
Pump tube
Drain
Clear trays replacement Drain check
manually
and fix
4.1.2 Data Clearing

Clear the files on the PC, and ensure that only the operating system, operating software
and its backup are left.

4.2 Emptying the Analyzer

The CL-2000i/CL-2200i operating software provides the whole unit emptying function.
Prior to using this function, select Utility -> Maintenance -> Empty Whole Unit. The
screen is displayed as follows:
Figure 4.1 Empty Whole Unit
4.2.2 Turning off Refrigeration

Index:
Turn off the four Peltiers.
Methods and steps:
1 Click 1 Refrigeration Off.
2 Check that the indicators on the reagent refrigeration board are off (extinguished).

Figure 4.2 Indicators on the refrigeration board
4.2.3 Auto Cuvette Discarding

Index:
Clear cuvettes from the dispersion carousel, mixing position, reaction carousel,
sample/reagent dispensing position, 1# diluting position, and 2# diluting position.
Methods and steps:
1 Click 2 Discard Cuvettes. The system starts discarding cuvettes.
2 After cuvette discarding, check for cuvettes in the mixing position, sample/reagent
dispensing position, 1# diluting position, and 2# diluting position. If any, remove
them manually.
3 After removing all cuvettes, clear the solid waste container.
4.2.4 Cleaning and Emptying Wash buffer Aspirate Tubes

Index:
Use deionized water to wash the wash buffer aspirate tubes 1 and 2, and the 2L wash
buffer tank, and then empty the tubes. Ensure that there is no liquid in the tubes after
emptying; otherwise, check the tube connection or extend the emptying time.
Methods and steps:
1 Click Clean and Empty Wash buffer Aspirate Tubes.
2 Preparations:
Replace wash buffer tanks 1 and 2 with two clean containers filled with no less
than 5L deionized water.
Empty the wash buffer tank and install it properly.
3 Select Continue to proceed to the next step.

4 Clean and empty the tubes according to the following instructions, and prevent the
buffer tank from overflowing:
Turn on SV02 for no less than 3 minutes, and then empty the buffer tank. (Note
to avoid overflowing.)
Turn off SV02 for no less than 3 minutes, and then empty the buffer tank. (Note
to avoid overflowing.)
Empty the wash buffer solution tanks 1 and 2, and turn on the wash buffer inlet
pump (peristaltic pump) for no less than 2 minutes.
Turn on SV02 for no less than 2 minutes.
Note: There should be no liquid in the tubes after emptying. Otherwise, check the
tube connection or extend the emptying time.
5 Empty the 2L buffer tank and clean it.
6 After cleaning and emptying the wash buffer aspirate tubes, select Continue to exit.
4.2.5 Cleaning and Emptying Wash Buffer Tubes

Index:
Clean and empty the probe wash tubes, sampling tubes, and dispersion dispense tubes.
Ensure that there is no liquid in the tubes after emptying; otherwise, check the tube
connection or increase the emptying times.
Methods and steps:
1 Click Clean and Empty Wash Buffer Tubes.
2 Preparations:
Empty the 2L buffer tank, clean it and fill it with deionized water (without
overflowing), and then install it.
Remove all dispersion dispense probes and hang them over a liquid waste
container, and then click Continue.
Note: Be sure to hang the dispense probes, and prevent them from contacting
other objects or liquid.
3 Click Continue to display the following dialog box:

Figure 4.3 Clean Probe Wash Tubes
Input "30" in the two edit boxes, and click Start to prime the probe wash tubes,
dispersion dispense probes, and wash buffer tubes.
Empty the wash buffer tank.
Repeat the first step to empty the wash buffer tubes.
4 Wipe the dispersion dispense probes with clean fiber cloth and install them
properly. After the wash buffer tubes are cleaned and emptied, select Continue to
exit.
4.2.6 Cleaning and Emptying Dispersion Aspirate Tubes

Index:
Clean and empty the dispersion aspirate tubes. Ensure that there is no liquid in the tubes
after emptying; otherwise, check the tube connection or extend the emptying time.
Methods and steps:
1 Click Clean and Empty Dispersion Aspirate Tubes.
2 Preparation: Remove all dispersion aspirate probes and insert them into a container
filled with proper amount of deionized water(no less than 0.5L). Select Continue to
proceed to the next step.
3 Click Continue to display the following dialog box:

Figure 4.4 Clean and Empty Dispersion Aspirate Tubes
Input "1" in the edit box, and click Start to clean the dispersion aspirate tubes.
Take out aspirate probes from the container and hang them. Repeat the first
step to empty the aspirate tubes.
4 Wipe the dispersion aspirate probes with clean fiber cloth and install them properly.
After the dispersion aspirate tubes are cleaned and emptied, select Continue to exit.
4.2.7 Cleaning and Emptying Substrate Tubes

Index:
Clean and empty the substrate tubes. Ensure that there is no liquid in the transparent
tubes after emptying; otherwise, check the tube connection or increase the emptying
times.
Methods and steps:
1 Preparation: Remove the substrate spikes and hang them over a liquid waste
container, and then click Continue.
Note: Prevent the substrate spikes from contacting other objects or liquid.
2 Select Continue. The following dialog box pops up:

Figure 4.5 Substrate Prime
Wash tubes with ultra-pure water: Connect two bottles(each no less than 60ml)
of ultra-pure water instead of substrate to tubes of substrate 1 and 2.
Click Turn On below SV30 Substrate Switch, set the substrate prime cycle as 20,
and click Start to clean substrate tube 2.
Click Close below SV30 Substrate Switch, set the substrate prime cycle as 100,
and click Start to clean substrate tube 1.
Select Continue to proceed to the next step.
3 Sleeve rubber hose on the substrate spikes, clean the substrate seats with
ultra-pure water, remove the rubber hose, and connect two empty bottles to
substrate tubes 1 and 2 in order to empty the tubes as in step (2). Note to pour little
ultra-pure water slowly and prevent it from flowing to the X-FPC.
Click Turn On below SV30 Substrate Switch, set the substrate prime cycle as 5,
and click Start to empty substrate tube 2.
Click Close below SV30 Substrate Switch, set the substrate prime cycle as 20,
and click Start to empty substrate tube 1.
Select Continue to proceed to the next step.
4 Wipe the substrate spikes with clean fiber cloth and install them properly. After the
substrate tubes are cleaned and emptied, select Continue to exit.
4.2.8 Emptying Waste Tubes

Index:
Empty the waste tubes.
Methods and steps:
1 Click Continue to display the Empty Waste Tubes dialog box. Input "30" in the two
edit boxes, and click Start.

Figure 4.6 Empty Waste Tubes
2 After emptying, select Continue to exit.
4.2.9 Clear Trays

Open the auto loader drawer, and remove all trays from the feeder, pusher and unloader.
4.2.10 Removing and Fixing Peristaltic Pump Tubes

Dispersion aspirate pump tubes
Remove the stopper plate from the dispersion aspirate pump, toggle all buckles to the
right side (while ensuring that the cartridge can move freely without pressing the tubes),
and then fix the stopper plate.
As shown in the figure below, use TESA4298 tape(095-000039-00) to fix the cartridge to
prevent it from falling off.

cartridge Stopper plate buckle
Fix with Tape

095-000039-00
Wash buffer aspirate pump tubes

Open the wash buffer single-tube peristaltic pump cover, remove the tube, and restore
the cover.
4.2.11 Check and Restoring after Whole Unit Emptying

1 Access the Parameter Configuration window, select Hydro Unit, click Search, and
check if the Fluidic Prime Complete parameter is 0.
2 Clear the water and wash buffer on the water tank bracket, and check that each
floater sensor is restored to normal status.
3 Open the reagent carousel cover and check for condensate water in the carousel. If
any, restart the instrument after turning off the Peltiers till no condensate water
appears.

4.3 Clearing the Computer
4.3 Clearing the Computer

4.3.1 Data Clearing
Perform the following operations to delete the history data:
1 Exit the CL-2000i/CL-2200i operating software and return to the desktop. Exit the
SQL Server manager, select Start -> Control Panels, and unload the
CL-2000i/CL-2200i operating software and Microsoft SQL Server 2008.
2 Delete all irrelevant files in the installation path of the operating software.
3 Reinstall the CL-2000i/CL-2200i operating software, and back up the installation
files on the D drive.
4 Delete all irrelevant shortcuts and documents on the desktop, and then clear the
Recycle Bin.

4.4 Packing the Whole Unit

4.4.1 Fixing Connection Cables
1 Remove the two rear panels of the analyzer and SDM as shown in the figure.
2 Remove the cable slot cover above and to the right of the connector as shown in the
figure, take out the AC power cord, and restore the slot cover.
3 Disconnect the serial port conversion line from the SDM and leave it on the analyzer
side.
4 Remove the front track conversion line from the SDM and leave it on the front track
side.
5 Remove the four M820 hexagon socket cap head screws connecting the frames of
the SDM and analyzer, and the two M48 combination screws connecting the two
panels.
6 Separate the SDM and analyzer, and fix the power cord and serial port conversion
line of the analyzer to the wire clip using a cable tie.
7 Install the rear panels of the SDM and analyzer.
Note: Before separating the SDM and analyzer, leave the front track conversion line
on the front track side, the communication cable and power cord on the analyzer
side.
Figure 4.7 Fixing Connection Cables
AC power input
serial port cable
cable

4.4.2 Fixing Wash Buffer Tubes and Tank Cover

1 Fix the level detection sensor assembly on the wash buffer tank with 2 tapes to
prevent falling off, and then fix the cables with tape.
2 Put the two connectors of the two drawers in clean bags and seal them with tapes,
and then fix them on the side of the drawer each with 2 tapes.
Note: Protect the hoses from rubbing against the panel and scratched or broken by
the sheet metals during the drawers' movement.
Figure 4.8 Fixing Wash Buffer Tubes and Tank Cover
The tube does not rub Sensor assembly in the

against the drawer during dilution position
movement.
4.4.3 Packing the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe

1 Remove the sample probe and reagent probe from the analyzer, and check that the
probe cable is intact. Note to wear anti-static gloves during the operation.
2 Sleeve a 70mm 2.0 heat-shrinkable tube on the tip end of the two probes to cover
the metallic part. Do not exceed the metallic part or contact the sleeve on the probe.
3 Put the two probes in the grooves of the lower lining in the package, and cover them
with the upper lining.
4 Put the probe package in the accessory kit, and install the anti-collision spring and
retaining screw on the probe arm. (Tighten the spring and screw to prevent
loosing.)

probe
Lower foam
Upper foam
4.4.4 Fixing Auto Loader Bracket

1 Loosen the two screws on the transparent cover, and then remove the transparent
cover.
2 Lift the tray bracket assembly to the highest point, and use tape to wrap it on the
loader frame. (When fixing the tray bracket, exercise caution to prevent it from
being deformed but slightly apply the tape on it; otherwise, the reliability of cuvette
feeding may be affected.)
3 Push the Y-axis part to the leftmost and the Z-axis part to the most inside, and put
the protective foam on the auto loader assembly to block the two axis parts. (Locate
the protective foam properly to stop the two axis parts, and prevent it from pressing
the Z-axis part; otherwise, a deformed Z-axis part may affect cuvette gripping.)
4 Install the transparent cover and fix it with two M410 decorating screws.

Fix with tape
Protection foam of
cuvette loader unit
4.4.5 Fixing the Probe Arm Transparent cover
1 Use tape to fix the interior wash tubes of the sample probe and reagent probe on
the arm.
2 Install the arm cover, and tighten the power screws on its two sides.
3 Apply a cushion under the probe arm, press the probe drive assembly, and use tape
to fix the arm on the panel.
4 Apply a cushion under the gripper arm, press the gripper drive assembly with the
gripping fingers over the cuvette port, and use tape to fix the arm on the panel.
5 Apply a cushion under the dispersion aspirate assembly near the substrate
preheating assembly, and then press the aspirate assembly to the end.

Interior tube
Reagent probe arm sample probe arm
Aspiration
assembly
Gripper arm
4.4.6 Fixing the Desk Panel

1 Remove the reagent carousel cover, sleeve a square spring(SWF22-25) on each of
the two retaining screws, rotate the reagent carousel to expose the two screws, and
tighten them to the chamber plate. (Note to tighten the two retaining screws
alternately.)
2 Close the front cover of the reagent carousel to lock the buckle, fix the cover with
tape, and seal the four ports on the cover with tape.

3 Use tape to seal all sample/reagent ports, mixing port, cuvette gripping ports, and
washing ports, in order to prevent the ingression of foreign matters and dust.
4 Take out the adapter from the sample probe wash solution position, clean it, and
reinstall it.
5 Put two unused substrate bottles in the slots to prevent the spikes from being
contaminated, and properly store the original substrate bottles.
6 Connect the two track covers with the desk panel each with two tapes, and ensure
that the substrate holder cover is under the tape.
Retaining screw+ square spring.SWF22-25
Reagent carousel cover Special wash position

4.4 Packing the Whole Unit Change the substrate and protect the spike
from contamination
Use the tape to fix the substrate bracket cover and

the transparent cover
4.4.7 Fixing the Analyzer

1 Lay down the slope cover, push the analyzer on the package board with the front
side facing the letter "F" printed on the board, align the four anchors with the four
black points, and then screw down the anchors.
2 Connect three Z-shape brackets to the supports on the front side of the analyzer,
each with two M820 screw bolts with spring and flat washers.
3 Connect six Z-shape brackets to the supports on the front side and back side of the
analyzer, each with two M820 screw bolts with spring and flat washers, and then
use two M830 screw bolts with spring and flat washers to connect each Z-shape
bracket to the package board. Tighten the screw bolts only after all of them are
installed.
4 Screw up the four anchors, and tighten them.

Slope
cover
align the four anchors

with the four black
points
Front
side
Z-shape bracket
M8X20
M8X30
4.4.8 Blocking the Waste Outlet

Use a plug(041-003419-00) to block the waste outlet.

Block the waste

outlet
4.4.9 Fixing the Wash Buffer Drawer

1 Remove the handle from the bottom plate of the wash buffer drawer, mark with
material code on the handle and the two M510 hexagon socket cap head screws
with spring washer, and put them in the accessory kit.
2 Use four M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers to
fix the drawer mounting plate on the guide rail bracket and bottom plate, in order to
prevent the drawer from sliding out during transportation.

Four M4X10 hexagon socket

cap head screw
4.4.10 Protecting the Left and Right Doors

1 Push the wash buffer drawer in place, and put a protective foam below the left and
right doors right on the bottom plate. (When pressed during transportation, the
protective foam can block the doors outwards, to prevent the lock catch from being
damaged due to the doors' vibration.)
2 Before closing the left and right doors, insert 0.5m bubble film into the door slot on
the two sides, with equal length inside and outside the doors, and then stick the
ends of the bubble film on the door to avoid falling off. Exercise caution when
applying the bubble film.
3 Apply two tapes at the bottom of the left and right doors, to prevent them from
warping.
Left and Right Doors

protection foam

bubble film
4.4.11 Protecting the Drawer Door
1 Open the drawer door, take out all cuvette trays from the drawer, use tape to stick
the unloading tray with the tray support, push the drawer to the end, and block it
with the mounting foam.
2 Close the drawer door, and apply two tapes at the bottom.
Foam for fixing the Tray drawer

drawer

Use tape to stick the

unloading tray with the tray
support,
4.4.12 Packing the Analyzer

Tightly wrap the analyzer with wrapping film from bottom to top, and ensure that the
whole body, including the shielding cover, is wrapped.
Tightly wrap the analyzer

with 2 or 3 layers wrapping
film from bottom to top
4.4.13 Closing the Package

1 Erect the slop cover, and install the front, back, side, and top covers.

2 Use M8110 screw bolts with spring and flat washers to connect the front, back
and side covers with the bottom board; use M880 screw bolts with spring and flat
washers to connect the slope cover with the front and back covers; use M8110
screw bolts with spring and flat washers to connect the side cover with the front
and back covers; use M880 screw bolts with spring and flat washers to connect
the top cover with other covers. (Lead the screw bolt with flat washer through the
board, then apply the spring washer, and then screw the nut.)
3 Tighten the screw bolts only after installing all of them, to prevent interference with
the package.
Slope cover
Top
cover
End plank
Side
cover
Bottom
cover

5 Shells Assembly

Structure of the shells assembly
Removing and installation of the shells assembly

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly

5.1.1 Module Functions and Composition
The shells assembly is the external structure of the whole analyzer and intended for
protecting the components inside the analyzer. It provides interfaces for relevant
modules and bears the industrial design of the analyzer.
The shells assembly of the Cl-2000i/CL-2200i consists of the analyzer shell assembly
and SDM shell assembly.
Figure 5.1 CL-2000i/CL-2200i shells assembly
Analyzer shells SDM shells assembly

assembly

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
5.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details

Figure 5.2 FRU location 1
Figure 5.3 FRU location 2

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
Table 5.1 List of FRU materials

No. FRU code and material Material name Remark
code
1 115-014451-00 Front shielding cover assembly
2 082-001667-00 Dust-proof silicone strip
3 043-002601-00 Long arm cover (for reagent probe)
4 043-001781-00 Reaction carousel panel
5 043-001778-00 Middle upper panel
6 043-002209-00 Short arm cover (for sample probe)
7 043-002134-00 Gripper arm cover
8 033-000209-00 Air spring.YQ8/18-60-206B-B250N
9 043-001788-00 Dispersion carousel cover 2
10 042-004976-00 Left rear panel
11 043-001779-00 Upper right panel
12 Decorating silicone strip
13 033-000090-00 Air
spring.YQ6/15-84-235(B-B)-80N(10N)
14 042-004977-00 Right rear panel
15 042-004971-00 Right shielding cover
16 043-001776-00 Shielding cover
18 043-001780-00 Right desk panel
19 043-001771-00 Substrate holder cover
20 115-021420-00 Substrate holder assembly
21 043-001768-00 Transparent shield on drawer door
22 042-005023-00 Right front door
23 043-001773-00 Lower right panel
24 043-001783-00 Lower left desk panel 2
25 042-004999-00 Front panel of CL-2000i
26 042-008817-00 Front panel of CL-2200i
27 042-005019-00 Left front door
28 M6P-020001--- Lock catch, MC-37, white (lock catch
head)
29 042-005936-00 Track cover
31 042-005929-00 Left panel
32 115-014452-00 Reagent carousel cover assembly
33 043-001777-00 Upper left desk panel
34 042-004961-00 Left shielding cover
35 115-021418-00 Shielding cover hinge assembly
(BM10)
36 082-001667-00 Sealing strip (white)

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly

code
37 033-000287-00 Torsion spring
38 043-001772-00 Substrate holder
39 082-000186-00 Sealing ring, O-shape
40 043-002158-00 Spike
41 010-000114-00 Button indicator
42 BA31-20-56817 Anti-collision spring
43 049-000273-00 Rubber cover
44 BA31-20-41662 Buffer cushion
5.1.3 Removing Front Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges
When to do
Replace the front shielding cover assembly when it is damaged.
Replace the hinges when they are working improperly or cannot work.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, small flathead screwdriver, M8 solid wrench or adjustable wrench
Removing/Reinstallation procedure
1 Switch off the main power of the analyzer and ensure all moving assemblies are not
in working status.
2 Open the front shielding cover, and remove the three screws on each of the two
hinge assemblies.
3 Use a small flathead screwdriver to push outwards the circlip on the air spring head
as much as possible to a position where it would not drop.
4 Hold the shielding cover and remove the two air springs. (Note: The shielding cover
is so big that two people are needed to cooperate. )
5 Raise the shielding cover to separate the hinges from the supporters and then
remove the front shielding cover assembly.
6 To replace the hinges, remove the retaining screws on the rod after removing the
shielding cover assembly, and then replace the hinges.
7 To restore the shielding cover, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.
Alignment and confirmation
After restoring the front shielding cover assembly, check the gap with the panels, and if
the gap is uneven or the shielding cover interferes with the panels, adjust the hinges.
5.1.4 Removing Back Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges
When to do
Replace the back shielding cover assembly when it is damaged.
Replace the hinges when they are working improperly or cannot work.
Tools
Cross screwdriver, small flathead screwdriver, M8 solid wrench or adjustable wrench

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
1 Switch off the main power of the analyzer and ensure all moving assemblies are not
in working status.
2 Open the back shielding cover, and remove the three screws on each of the two
hinge assemblies.
3 Use a small flathead screwdriver to push outwards the circlip on the air spring head
as much as possible to a position where it would not drop.
4 Hold the shielding cover and remove the two air springs. (Note: The shielding cover
may drop and should be held by two people.)
5 Raise the shielding cover to separate the hinges from the supporters and then
remove the shielding cover assembly.
6 Remove the left and right shielding covers.
7 To replace the hinges, remove the retaining screws after removing the shielding
cover assembly, and then replace the hinges.
8 To restore the shielding cover, follow the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.
After restoring the back shielding cover assembly, check the gap with the panels, and if
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Panels

When to do
Remove panels when they need to be replaced or the parts below them need to be
maintained or repaired.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
Illustration figure for removing and reinstallation
Figure 5.4 Removing and reinstalling panels

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly

No. FRU code and Material name Remark
material code
1 043-001777-00 Upper left desk panel
3 115-014452-00 Reagent carousel cover
assembly
4 042-004961-00 Left shielding cover
5 043-001781-00 Reaction carousel panel
6 043-001778-00 Middle upper desk panel
10 043-001779-00 Upper right desk panel
11 043-001773-00 Lower right desk panel
12 043-001776-00 Shielding cover
13 043-001771-00 Substrate holder cover
14 043-001780-00 Right desk panel
15 115-021420-00 Substrate holder assembly
Removing/Reinstallation order:
1 Remove part No.13 freely.
2 Before removing parts No.5, No.11 and No.15, remove part No.12. (The following
instructions are based on the condition that part 12 has been removed.)
3 Remove parts No.1, No.6, No.7, No.10, No.11, No.14, and No.15 separately.
(Remove parts No.11 and No.15 after removing part No.13. Remove part No.7
after opening the front cover of part No.3.
4 Remove part No.2 after removing part No.1.
5 Remove part No.5 after removing parts No.6 and No.7.
6 Remove part No.8 after removing part No.6.
7 Remove part No.9 after removing parts No.5, No.6, No.7, and No.8.
8 Remove part No.3 after removing parts No.1, No.4, No.5, No.6, and No.7.
8 Restore the parts by performing the steps mentioned above in a reversed order.
Adjust the panels till the gap between them is even. After installing part No.3, check it
based on the reagent probe in order to prevent collision. Visually check that the screws
are installed in the middle of the holes, and then tighten the screws.
Alignment index:
Fix the reagent carousel cover and align the Ra and Rd ports with the reagent
probe.
Check that the adjusting screws of the damping hinges are tightened properly,
and the front part of the reagent carousel cover can be lowered smoothly.

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
Adjust the buckle on the reagent carousel cover according to the lock bolt
position, and then fix the reagent carousel cover.
Stick sponge to the carousel cover around the buckle.
Alignment methods and steps:
1 Install the reagent carousel cover assembly on the chamber, and then fix it with four
M412 cross pan head screws with flat washer.
2 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Reagent Probe Unit, and click Reagent
Probe's Ordinary Functions.
Figure 5.5 Reagent Probe's Ordinary Functions
3 Click Above Reagent Carousel Rc to move the reagent probe to the Rc port, type in
"100" microsteps, and click Reagent Probe Vertical Movement repeatedly. When the
reagent probe lowers to the Rc port, move the carousel cover and visually check
that the reagent probe is in the middle of the Rc port.
Figure 5.6 Rc hole on reagent carousel cover
4 Change the steps into "-100", and click Reagent Probe Vertical Movement repeatedly
to raise the reagent probe.

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
5 Click Above Reagent Carousel Ra to move the reagent probe to the Ra port, change
the steps into "100", and click Reagent Probe Vertical Movement repeatedly. When
the reagent probe lowers to the Ra port, move the carousel cover and visually check
that the reagent probe is in the middle of the Ra port.
Figure 5.7 Ra hole on reagent carousel cover
6 As instructed in steps 3~5, check and align the reagent carousel cover repeatedly, so
that the Ra and Rd holes are aligned with the reagent probe. Tighten the four M4
12 screws on the reagent carousel cover during the alignment procedure.
5.1.6 Replacement of Air Spring

When to do
Replace the air springs of the front or back shielding cover if they lose elasticity or fail.
Tools
Small flathead screwdriver
1 Open the shielding cover, use a flathead screwdriver to push outwards the cir clip
on two ends of the air spring to a position where it would not drop.
2 Hold the air spring and pull it out.
3 Install a new air spring.
4 If the two air springs need to be replaced, replace them one by one.
5 Exercise caution to prevent dropping the shielding cover.
N/A
5.1.7 Removing and Reinstalling Arm Covers

When to do
Remove the arm cover when the reagent probe, sample probe or cuvette gripper, or the
parts inside them need to be replaced.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
1 Loosen the powder screws on two sides of the arm cover and remove the arm cover.
(You may leave the screws on the arm cover without removing them.)

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
2 Installation: Install the arm cover and tighten the screws.

N/A
5.1.8 Replacing Decorating Silicone Strip on the Back Shielding Cover

When to do
Replace the decorating silicone strip on the back shielding cover when it is heavily worn
or damaged.
Tools
Rubber hammer (or rubber stick, screwdriver handle, etc.)
silicone strip
1 Open the back shielding cover and remove the old decorating silicone strip.
2 Press one end of the new silicone strip on the thin rib on the shielding cover, and
use a rubber hammer to slightly strike the strip in place. Repeat this action until
the whole strip is installed properly.
N/A
5.1.9 Replacing Sealing Strip and Dust-Proof Silicone Strip of the Front
Shielding Cover
When to do
Replace the sealing strip or dust-proof silicone strip on the front shielding cover when
they are heavily worn or damaged.

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
Tools
Cross screwdriver and flathead screwdriver
Dust-proof
silicone strip
joint
Daub glue on Seal

this side strip(white
)
joint
To remove and reinstall the dust-proof silicone strip:
1 Open the front shielding cover.
2 Remove the old dust-proof silicone strip.
3 Use PITE-LOCK AC78 Primer(095-002772-00) to clean the strip slot, stick 3M9119
double-sided tape(6mm wide, 095-002770-00) along the edge of the shielding
cover, and evenly apply glue(PITE-LOCK PR1500, 095-002771-00) on the
end(thickness direction) of the shielding cover. Stick one end of the silicone strip to
the shielding cover, and then press the whole strip.
Note: Leave the joints of the dust-proof silicone strip and sealing strip on two sides
of the shielding cover, level to the sheet metal, as shown in the figure above.
To remove and reinstall the sealing strip:
1 Remove the air springs and the front shielding cover.
2 Remove the old sealing strip.
3 Use PITE-LOCK AC78 Primer(095-002772-00) to clean the sticking surface on the
sheet metal, evenly apply glue(PITE-LOCK PR1500, 095-002771-00) on it, and
install the sealing strip from the joint.
Note: Leave the end of the decorating silicone strip at the joint of the sheet metal
and the small end of the shielding cover.
4 Install the shielding cover.

5 Exercise caution to prevent dropping the shielding cover.
After restoring the front shielding cover assembly, check the gap with the panels, and if

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
5.1.10 Replacing Left/Right Front Doors and Hinges

When to do
Replace the left and right front doors and hinges when they are seriously deformed
under abnormal external force.
Tools
Hexagon wrench
1 Open the left and right front doors, remove the three M516 hexagon socket cap
head screws on the upper hinges, and then remove the upper hinges.
2 Lift the doors to remove them, loosen the two M516 hexagon socket cap head
screws on the lower hinge, and then remove the lower hinge.
3 Replace the desired parts, and install the new front doors and hinges in the
reversed order.
After installation:
Check if the vertical gap between the left and right front doors is even. If not, adjust the
upper hinges till the gap is even. (The lower hinges are used for accurate positioning
rather than adjustment.)
5.1.11 Replacing the Lock Catch

When to do
Replace the lock catch when it is damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver
1 To replace the lock catch head, remove the two M38 cross pan head screws on it,
and then replace it.
2 To replace the lock catch, remove the four M38 cross pan head screws on it, and
then replace it.
Adjust the lock catch heads of the three doors to the four extreme positions (up, down,
left, and right), open and close the doors repeatedly, and check that the doors can be
locked normally and no bump is heard during the door closing.
5.1.12 Replacing the Spikes

When to do
Replace the spikes when they are damaged.
Tools
Cross screwdriver

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
1 Remove the substrate holder cover(043-001771-00).
2 Loosen the two countersunk head screws on the substrate holder(043-001772-00),
and then remove the substrate holder assembly.
Note: Exercise caution to avoid breaking the tubes.
3 Rotate the spikes to remove them, and then unplug the tube connectors.
Note: Exercise caution to avoid contaminating the tube connectors and dropping the
sealing rings.
4 Connect the clean spikes with the tube connectors, and then screw the spikes
counterclockwise onto the substrate holder.
5 Install the substrate holder assembly and cover in the reversed order.

5 Shells Assembly
5.1 Shells Assembly
Note: During installation, arrange the tubes to prevent them from being pressed or
damaged.

Replacing the spikes may contaminate the substrate tubes, and therefore, a tube cleaning
and background test are required after the replacement. Procedure: Clean with acid
wash solution for 20 times -> Rinse with water for 20 times -> Drain for 20 times ->
Substrate background prime for 10 times -> Substrate background test. Check that the
background SD is less than 200.

6 Rack Feeder System

Structure of the rack feeder system
Functions of the rack feeder system
Removing and reinstallation of the rack feeder system

6.1 System Composition and Description
6.1 System Composition and Description

The rack feeder system consists of the sample delivery module(SDM) and rack transfer
unit. The former has a separate frame and anchors and is attached to the right of
analyzer 1; and the latter is hang in front of the connected analyzers. The desk panel of
the rack feeder system is level to that of the analyzer.
Figure 6.1 Rack feeder system
Analyzing Analyzing
unit 2 unit1 SDM
Retrieval channel
Rack Rack
rack storage supply
buffer unit unit.
unit
Sampling Bar code

Sampling Sampling Transfer lane
scanning lane
position Routine lane
buffer position
Return lane
Front transfer Front transfer

line line
The sample delivery module, from right to left, is divided into rack supply unit, rack
storage unit and rack buffer unit.
The rack transfer unit is composed of three lanes: passing lane, normal lane and return
lane. The broken part between the lanes is a lane change part.
The sample probe can aspirate sample on the sample carousel, passing lane and normal
lane.
On the desk panel of the SDM are two keys: STAT and Run. The STAT key is pressed to
insert emergent samples into the current test, and the Run key is pressed to return the
rack supply push-in part to the home position and push the added sample racks to the
existing ones.

6.2 Sample Delivery Module

The sample delivery module is located on the rightmost of the whole unit. It holds
sample racks to be analyzed and those to be retrieved, scans the bar code on racks and
sample containers, and delivers racks to the rack transfer unit for later processing.
The SDM consists of the shell assembly, frame assembly, rack supply unit, rack storage
unit, rack buffer unit, scanning push-in part, scanning push-out part, lane bracket
assembly, and retrieval push-in part.
Figure 6.2 Structure of sample delivery module
Rack Transfer
Unit
SDM

Rack buffer unit Rack storage unit
Scanning push- Retrieval

in part Push-In Part
Rack supply
Scanning push-out
unit
part
Channel bracket
assembly
SDM shell assembly
6.2.2 Rack Supply Unit

Module Functions
The rack supply unit, situated on the right of the SDM, consists of the support assembly,
rack supply push-in part and STAT push-back part. It holds sample racks to be analyzed,
pushes them successively to the entrance of the scanning channel, and pushes back
normal sample racks to make room for STAT sample racks.
Component Locations and FRU Details

Figure 6.3 Exploded view of rack supply unit
Transition plate at M3X4Stainless
the outlet of the steel countersunk
rack supply unit head screw(7X)
Magnetic Sensor
Stroke switch Assembly
801-BA80-00233-00 801-BA80-00232-00
bracket assembly
of the rack supply
unit. Replacing Short Stroke
Reflective Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
STAT Push- M4X8 pan head
Back Part screws (4X)
Short Stroke Reflective

Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00 Rack Supply Push-
In Part

Rack Supply Motor M4X10hexagon socket head

Assembly screws with spring washer
M4X8 hexagon
socket 801-BA80-00249-00 2X Pusher
M3X6 pan head screws(2X) screw
screw Damping
Cable of wash syringe washer Left
sensor 801-BA38-00040- Motor pusher
00 bracket
Pusher
M3X6 pan head Left pusher spring
screw
screw 801-BA30-00129-00
Cable of wash syringe Support plate of

sensor the push-in part
801-BA38-00040-00
M4X10 hexagon socket

Right pusher spring Right
screw
801-BA30-00128-00 pusher
(3x)
M3X6 pan head

screw
M4X10hexagon socket
head screws with spring
washer (3X)
Cable of wash syringe

sensor
801-BA38-00040-00
Motor
bracket
M4X10 hexagon
socket head screws
with spring washer
Shock pad
(2X)
Motor assembly of rack supply unit M4X8 hexagon socket

801-BA80-00249-00 head screws(2X)
Table 6.1 FRU materials of rack supply unit

material code
1 801-BA80-00233-00 Stroke switch
2 801-BA80-00241-00 Short stroke
reflective optical
coupler
3 801-BA38-00040-00 Wash syringe sensor
4 801-BA80-00232-00 Magnetic sensor
assembly

5 801-BA80-00249-00 Rack supply motor

assembly
6 801-BA80-00128-00 Right pusher spring
7 801-BA80-00129-00 Left pusher spring
Replacing Magnetic Sensor Assembly

When to do
If the magnetic sensor fails, replace the entire magnetic sensor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cross screwdriver / 1
Exploded view for installation

Refer to the overall view and exploded view of the assembly.
Replacing steps
1 Switch off the main power of the whole unit.
2 Loosen the five M34 stainless steel screws on the transition plate at the entrance
of the rack supply unit.
3 Remove the transition plate vertically from the support plate of the rack supply unit.
Note: The magnetic sensor assembly is connected to the transition plate. Pay
attention not to pull the cable of the magnetic sensor.
4 Unplug the connectors of the three magnetic sensors.
5 Place the transition plate as well as the magnetic sensor assembly in a safe place.
6 Loosen the two M34 stainless steel hexagon socket cap head screws connecting
the transition plate and the magnetic sensor assembly.
7 After replacing the magnetic sensor assembly, restore the instrument in the
reversed order.
After replacing the magnetic sensor assembly, align and check it to see if it works
normally.
Note
Install the sensors according to the identifications on the cables.
When removing the assembly, do not pull it violently to avoid breaking the sensor cables.
Replacing Rack Supply Motor Assembly

When to do
If the rack supply motor fails, replace the entire motor assembly of the rack supply unit.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1


Replacing steps
2 Remove the relevant shell parts.
3 Loosen the four M48 pan head combination screws on the support assembly of
the rack supply unit.
4 Unplug the sensors connected to the support assembly of the rack supply unit.
5 Carefully remove the support assembly of the rack supply unit. Note: Do not collide
with the left and right pushers.
6 Remove the nine M48 pan head combination screws connecting the push-in part
and frame of the rack supply unit.
7 Disconnect the sensors and motor on the push-in part that are connected to the
frame.
8 Carefully remove the push-in part from the frame and place it in a safe area.
9 Remove the three M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the motor bracket to
separate the motor assembly from the synchronous belt.
10 Remove the two M48 hexagon socket cap head screws on the motor assembly,
and then install a new motor assembly. Note: After replacing the motor assembly,
use the tension fixture BA80-J58 to recalibrate the tension of the synchronous belt.
11 Restore the instrument in the reversed order.
After replacing the motor assembly of the rack supply unit, use the tension fixture
BA80-J58 to adjust and confirm the tension of the synchronous belt.
Note
When removing the assembly, unplug the relevant cables to prevent damage.
Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt by using fixture BA80-J56.
Replacing Pusher Springs

When to do
Replace the pusher springs when they fail.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Flathead screwdriver / 1

Replacing steps
1 Use a flathead screwdriver to remove the screws on the pushers. Pay attention not
to drop the pusher springs.
2 Remove the pushers and springs.

3 Install the new springs and restore the instrument.

After replacing the pusher springs, align and check them to see if they work normally.
Note
Note: Identify the left and right torsion springs to avoiding mis-installation.
Replacing Stroke Switch

When to do
Replace the stroke switch when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
3 Remove the cover of the rack supply unit.
4 Loosen the two M28 pan head screws on the stroke switch.
5 Remove the failed stroke switch and install a new one. Note: After replacement,
adjust and verify the position of the new stroke switch.
6 Restore the instrument.
After replacing the stroke switch, adjust and verify its position.
Note
When removing the shells and rack supply unit cover, exercise caution to avoid scratching
the paint.
Replacing Wash Syringe Sensor

When to do
Replace the wash syringe sensor when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps


3 Loosen the four M48 pan head combination screws on the support assembly of
the rack supply unit.
4 Unplug the sensors connected to the support assembly of the rack supply unit.
5 Carefully remove the support assembly of the rack supply unit. Note: Do not collide
with the left and right pushers.
6 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the sensor.
7 Remove the failed sensor and install a new one.
After replacing the sensor, readjust and confirm its position.
Note
When removing the shells, exercise caution to avoid scratching the paint.
Replacing Short Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler

When to do
Replace the short stroke reflective optical coupler when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity


Replacement of optical coupler close to the retrieval push-in part
3 Remove the retrieval push-in part.
4 Loosen the two M36 pan head combination screws on the sensor bracket.
5 Remove the failed optical coupler together with the sensor bracket.
Replacement of optical coupler close to the scanning push-in part


After replacing the sensor, readjust and confirm its position.
Note
6.2.3 Rack Storage Unit

Module Functions
The rack storage unit, located in the middle of the SDM, consists of the support assembly
and push-in part. It holds sample racks that have finished analysis and are waiting for
retrieval, and pushes them into the support plate of the storage unit.
Figure 6.4 Exploded view of rack storage unit
Button M4X8 Pan head

box screw(6X)
Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Push-In Part of
Rack Storage unit
Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Support plate of
rack storage unit
Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
M4X8 pan head
screw(4X)

Cable of Wash Syringe Sensor

Reset spring 801-BA38-00040-00
M3X6 pan head
801-BA80-00231-00
screw
Cable of Wash Syringe
Guide Sensor
post 801-BA38-00040-00
Guide
plate 2
Support M3X6 pan head

plate of screw
drive
assembly
M3X6 pan head Rack Storage Push-in
screw(2X) Motor Assembly 801-
BA80-00250-00
M3X8 hexagon
M4X8 pan head socket head screws
screw(4X) M4X10 hexagon socket head with flat washer
screws with spring washer (2X)
Table 6.2 FRU materials of rack storage unit

material code
1 801-BA80-00231-00 Reset spring
reflective optical
coupler
4 801-BA38-00250-00 Rack storage push-in
motor assembly

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
4 Remove the six M48 pan head combination screws that connect the support plate
and the button box.
5 Lift vertically the support plate of the rack storage unit. Pay attention not to pull the
sensor cable.
6 Unplug the failed reflective optical coupler.

7 Remove the M314 pan head screw on the failed reflective optical coupler and
install a new one.
After replacing the short stroke reflective optical coupler, readjust and confirm its
position.
Note
When removing the support plate of the storage unit, pay attention not to pull the sensor
cable.
Replacing Reset Spring

When to do
Replace the reset spring when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1

Replacing steps
4 Loosen the two M36 pan head combination screws and one M38 hexagon
socket cap head screw on the guide plate 2. Remove the guide plate 2 and the failed
reset spring.
5 Install the new reset spring and restore the instrument.
After replacing the reset spring, align and confirm it to see if it works.
Note
Keep the reset spring level after installation.

When to do
Tools

Name Code Quantity


Replacing steps
4 Remove the four M48 pan head combination screws that connect the push-in part
and the frame.
5 Unplug the relevant motor and sensor cables, and move the push-in part to a safe
place.
6 Remove the M36 pan head screw on the failed sensor, install a new sensor, and
restore the instrument.
After replacing the wash syringe sensor, readjust and confirm its position.
Note
When moving the push-in part, unplug the relevant cables to avoid breaking them off.
Install the sensor in the upright position, and make sure the light shield plate is in the
middle of the sensor when moving.
Replacing Rack Storage Push-in Motor Assembly

When to do
If the push-in motor fails, replace the entire push-in motor assembly of the rack storage
unit.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Replacing steps
4 Remove the four M48 pan head combination screws that connect the push-in part
and the frame.

5 Unplug the relevant motor and sensor cables, and move the push-in part to a safe
place.
6 Loosen the two M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the motor assembly,
and then remove the failed push-in motor assembly.
7 Install a new motor assembly and restore the instrument.
After replacing the rack storage push-in motor, readjust and confirm its position.
Note
Make sure that the leading out direction of the motor is the same as the original one.
6.2.4 Rack Buffer Unit

Module Functions
The rack buffer unit, located on the leftmost of the SDM, consists of the base assembly
and caterpillar assembly. It is mainly used to hold sample racks that have finished bar
code scanning, or have finished analysis and need repeated analysis.

Figure 6.5 Exploded view of rack buffer unit
Short Stroke Reflective M3X6 pan head M3X6 pan head Short Stroke Reflective M3X6 pan head
Optical Coupler screw(2X) Chain screw(2X) Optical Coupler screw(2X)
801-BA80-00241-00 801-BA80-00241-00
M3X10 pan
head screw
M3X10 pan
head screw
Short Stroke Reflective Optical
Coupler M3X14 pan
801-BA80-00241-00 head screw

M4X8 pan head screw

(4X)
Upper bracket Cable of wash syringe

sensor
801-BA38-00040-00
M3X6 pan head screw(2X)

screw
M4X10 hexagon
socket screw
(2X)
Motor mounting M4X10 hexagon
plate socket screws with
M3X6 pan head Shock pad
spring pad(2X)
screw Cable of wash syringe sensor
Sample motor
(2X) 801-BA38-00040-00
assembly
Motor mounting M4X10 hexagon socket 801-BA80-00066-00
plate screws with spring pad(2X)
M4X10 hexagon
Shock socket screws Sample motor assembly
pad (2X) 801-BA80-00066-00
Table 6.3 FRU materials of rack buffer unit

material code
1 801-BA80-00066-00 Sample motor
assembly
reflective optical
coupler

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
3 Remove the two M36 pan head combination screws on the sensor bracket.
4 Remove the failed optical coupler together with the sensor bracket.
5 Unplug the failed reflective optical coupler.
6 Loosen the M314 (or M310 ) pan head screw on the failed optical coupler,
remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one.


After replacing the short stroke reflective optical coupler, readjust and confirm its
position.
Note
When removing the shells, exercise caution to avoid scratching the paint. s
When removing the optical coupler, you must not pull the sensor cable.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
3 Disconnect the closed caterpillar carefully and do not damage it.
4 Remove the four M48 pan head combination screws on the upper bracket of the
caterpillar.
5 Remove the upper bracket carefully, and unplug the sensor cable.
6 Put the upper bracket upside down and remove the two M36 pan head screws on
the failed sensor.
7 Remove the failed sensor and install a new one, and then restore the instrument.
Note
Disconnect the caterpillar with proper force to avoid damage.
When removing the upper bracket of the caterpillar, do not pull the sensor cable.
Replacing Sample Motor Assembly

When to do
If the sample motor fails, replace the whole sample motor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1

Replacing steps
3 Loosen the four M512 hexagon socket cap head screws around the lower bracket
of the caterpillar. Remove carefully the whole rack buffer unit and place it in a safe
area. Unplug the relevant sensor and motor cables when removing the rack buffer
unit.
4 Disconnect the closed caterpillar carefully and do not damage it.
5 Remove the four M48 pan head combination screws on the upper bracket of the
caterpillar.
6 Remove the upper bracket carefully, and unplug the sensor cable.
7 Loosen the two M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the damping cushion,
and then remove the sample motor assembly together with the damping cushion.
8 Loosen the two M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the sample motor
assembly, and then remove the failed sample motor assembly.
9 Install a new sample motor assembly. Note: After replacing the motor assembly, use
the tension fixture BA80-TF19 to recalibrate the tension of the synchronous belt.
After replacing the sample motor assembly, readjust and confirm the tension of the
synchronous belt.
Note
Disconnect the caterpillar with proper force to avoid damage.
When removing the upper bracket of the caterpillar, do not pull the sensor cable.
After replacing the motor assembly, use a tension fixture to recalibrate the tension of
the synchronous belt.
6.2.5 Retrieval Push-In Part

Module Functions
The retrieval push-in part is in the back of the SDM and driven by a single stage
synchronous belt wheel. It pushes sample racks from the buffer unit to the storage unit
for retrieval or to the supply unit for repeated analysis.


Figure 6.6 Exploded view of retrieval push-in part
M3X6 pan Cable of wash syringe sensor Cable of wash syringe sensor
head screw 801-BA38-00040-00 801-BA38-00040-00
M3X6 pan
head screw
M3X6 pan
head screw
sensor
801-BA38-00040-00
Retrieval Push-in
Motor Assembly
801-BA80-00251-00
M3X10 hexagon
socket screw(3X)
Table 6.4 FRU materials of retrieval push-in part

material code
1 801-BA80-00251-00 Rack retrieval
push-in motor
assembly
Replacing Retrieval Push-in Motor Assembly

When to do
If the retrieval push-in motor fails, replace the entire retrieval push-in motor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Refer to the overall view.
Replacing steps
3 Unplug the motor cable.
4 Loosen the three M310 hexagon socket cap head screws on the motor assembly.
5 Remove the failed motor and install a new one, and then restore the instrument.
After replacement, recalibrate the tension of the synchronous belt by using the
fixture BA80-J49.

After replacing the retrieval push-in motor assembly, adjust with a fixture the tension of
Note
When removing the M310 hexagon socket cap head screws, hold the motor assembly to
After replacement, recalibrate the tension of the synchronous belt by using the fixture
BA80-J49.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
3 Unplug the failed sensor cable.
4 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the failed sensor, and then remove the failed
sensor.
5 Install a new sensor and restore the instrument.
Note
Install the new sensor in the upright position, and make sure the light shield plate is in
the middle of the sensor when moving.
6.2.6 Scanning Push-In Part

Module Functions
The scanning push-in part is in the upper front side of the SDM and driven by a single
stage synchronous belt wheel. It pushes sample racks from the supply unit to the
scanning channel, and then to the buffer unit.


Figure 6.7 Exploded view of scanning push-in part
M3X6 pan
head screw
M3X6 pan head

Cable of wash syringe sensor screw with washer
801-BA38-00040-00
M3X10 hexagon
M3X6 pan socket screw
head screw
Cable of wash syringe sensor

801-BA38-00040-00
M3X10 hexagon
Rack retrieval push-in motor assembly socket screw
801-BA80-00251-00
Table 6.5 FRU materials of scanning push-in part

material code
1 801-BA80-00251-00 Rack retrieval
push-in motor
assembly
Replacing Retrieval Push-in Motor Assembly

When to do
If the retrieval push-in motor fails, replace the entire retrieval push-in motor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1

Replacing steps
3 Unplug the motor cable.
4 Loosen the two M310 hexagon socket cap head screws and one M36 pan head
screw with washer on the motor assembly.

After replacement, recalibrate the tension of the synchronous belt by using the
fixture BA80-J49.
After replacing the retrieval push-in motor assembly, adjust with a fixture the tension of
Note
When removing the M310 hexagon socket cap head screws, hold the motor assembly to
After replacement, recalibrate the tension of the synchronous belt by using the fixture
BA80-J49.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
sensor.
Note
6.2.7 Scanning Push-Out Part

Module Functions
The scanning push-out part is in front of the SDM and below the scanning push-in part. It
pushes sample racks from the buffer unit to the normal lane or passing lane.


Figure 6.8 Exploded view of scanning push-out part
Replacing Reset Spring Cable of wash syringe sensor
M3X6 pan head of the Retraction Part 801-BA38-00040-00
screw(4X) 801-BA80-00229-00

sensor
801-BA38-00040-00
M3X8 hexagon
socket screw(4X)
M3X6 pan M3X6 pan 42 motor assembly

head screw head screw 801-BA80-00246-00
Table 6.6 FRU materials of scanning push-out part

material code
1 801-BA80-00246-00 42 motor assembly
3 801-BA38-00229-00 Reset spring of
retraction part
Replacing 42 Motor Assembly

When to do
If the 42 motor fails, change the entire 42 motor assembly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Refer to the overall exploded view.
Replacing steps
3 Remove the scanning push-in part. Do not pull the motor cable and the sensor
cable.
4 Unplug the 42 motor cable.
5 Loosen the two M38 hexagon socket cap head screws on the motor assembly.
After replacement, readjust and confirm the tension of the synchronous belt by
using the fixture BA80-J50.

After replacing the 42 motor assembly, readjust and confirm the tension of the
synchronous belt.
Note
When removing the screws, hold the motor assembly to prevent it from falling off.
After replacement, readjust the tension of the synchronous belt by using the fixture
BA80-J50.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
sensor.
Note
Replacing Reset Spring of the Retraction Part

When to do
Replace the reset spring of the retraction part when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity


Replacing steps


3 Remove the scanning push-in part. Do not pull the motor cable and the sensor
cable.
4 Loosen the four M36 pan head combination screws on the slide block, and
remove the failed reset spring and relevant parts on the retraction part. Record
the position of each part to prevent mis-installation.
5 Install a new reset spring and restore the instrument.
After replacing the reset spring, readjust it and check to see if it works.
Note
When removing the parts, pay attention to the corresponding positions to prevent
mis-installation.
6.2.8 Channel Bracket Assembly

Module Functions
The channel bracket assembly is located in front of the SDM and in the lower front of the
scanning push-in part. It scans the sample racks delivered from the supply unit.

Figure 6.9 Exploded view of channel bracket assembly
M3X8 pan head screw
(2X)
Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
M3X10 pan head

screw M3X14 pan head
screw
Long Stroke Reflective M3X14 pan head

Optical Coupler screw
801-BA80-00242-00
Short Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler

801-BA80-00241-00
Table 6.7 FRU materials of channel bracket assembly

material code


reflective optical
coupler
2 801-BA38-00242-00 Long stroke
reflective optical
coupler
Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler

When to do
Replace the long stroke reflective optical coupler when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Replacing steps
3 Remove the cover of the bar code scanning area.
4 Remove the M314 pan head screw on the long stroke reflective optical coupler.
5 Remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one. Pay attention not to pull the
sensor cable.
After replacing the long stroke reflective optical coupler, readjust and verify its position
and effectiveness.
Note
Do not pull the optical coupler cable.

When to do
Tools
Name Code Quantity


Replacement of short stroke optical coupler close to the long stroke optical
coupler


4 Remove the two M38 pan head combination screws on the sensor bracket.
5 Remove vertically the sensor bracket together with the optical coupler. Pay
attention not to pull the optical coupler cable.
7 Remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one.
Replacement of short stroke optical coupler away from the long stroke optical
coupler
4 Remove the button box and pay attention not to pull the button cables.
6 Remove the failed optical coupler and install a new one.
After replacing the short stroke reflective optical coupler, readjust and verify its position
and effectiveness.
Note
Do not pull the optical coupler cable.

6.3 Rack Transfer Unit

6.3.1 Module Functions
The rack transfer unit, located in front of the whole unit, consists of the left track
assembly, right track assembly, lane change part, return push-out part, and hardware
circuit boards. It has the following functions:
Transferring correctly and orderly STAT sample and routine sample to the specified
sample aspirate position.
Realizing delivery of samples between analyzers and between analyzer and SDM.
6.3.2 Module Profile and FRU

Figure 6.10 Location of rack transfer unit
Left track Lane Change M4X8 Screws

assembly Part
Right track
assembly
M4X10 hexagon
socket screws

Table 6.8 FRU materials of rack transfer unit

material code
1 801-BA80-00229-00 Reset spring of
retraction part
2 801-BA80-00230-00 Spring of track
tensioning
mechanism
3 801-BA80-00231-00 Reset spring
reflective optical
coupler
5 801-BA80-00244-00 Track motor
assembly
6 801-BA80-00245-00 Stopper motor
assembly
7 801-BA80-00246-00 42 motor assembly
8 801-BA80-00247-00 Oriental motor
PK244M-01B
assembly
9 801-BA80-00252-00 Conversion line of
aspirate positioning
reflective optical
coupler
11 801-BA30-00129-00 Left pusher spring
12 801-BA30-00128-00 Right pusher spring
13 801-BA80-00258-00 Stopper motor
assembly 2
6.3.3 Replacement of Track Motor Assembly and Tensioning Mechanism

Spring
When to do
If the track motor assembly or the spring of the track tensioning mechanism is
damaged, then replace it.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Tension fixture for BA80-J100 1
circular flat belt
Track alignment BA80-J65 1
tool of rack
transfer unit

Figure 6.11 Exploded view of rack transfer unit
M4X10 hexagon
socket screws
Track motor assembly

801-BA80-00244-00
Tension nut
Track tension device spirng
801-BA80-00230-00 M4X8 retaining
screw
Replacing steps (Take the left track as an example, which is similar with the right
track)
2 Remove the relevant shells. Loosen the three M410 hexagon socket cap head
screws at the bottom of the lane change part and the four M410 hexagon socket
cap head screws at the bottom of the left track assembly. Unplug the relevant cables
and remove the left track assembly.
3 Loosen the M48 retaining screw on the tension nut, and loosen the nut to
remove the flat belt from the driving pulley.
4 Loosen the three M410 hexagon socket cap head screws on the track motor
assembly, and remove the linear guide rail for the track motor on the inner side.
Install a new motor assembly and tighten the screws.
5 Install the flat belt on the driving pulley and install the new tensioning spring.
Tighten the tension nut with the fixture BA80-J100 and then tighten the retaining
screw on it.
Note: Pay attention not to lose the washer on the tension nut and note the direction
(D-shape hole) of the tension rod.
6 Install the left track assembly and lane change part, use the fixture BA80-J65 to
align and fix them, and then connect and arrange the cables that have been
unplugged.
7 Restore the removed shells.
N/A
6.3.4 Replacing Reflective Optical Coupler

When to do
Replace the short stroke reflective optical coupler when it is damaged.
Tools

Name Code Quantity

Figure 6.12 Exploded view for installation of reflective optical coupler
Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Bracket of
the optical
coupler Short Stroke Reflective
Optical Coupler
801-BA80-00241-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the relevant shells.
3 Loosen the two M36 pan head combination screws on the optical coupler bracket.
Unplug the optical coupler connector and remove the optical coupler assembly.
Loosen the M314 pan head screw (or M310) and install a new optical coupler.
Connect the cable and fix the optical coupler assembly to the original position.
Note: Pay attention not to mistaken the direction of the optical coupler.

N/A
6.3.5 Replacing Lane Change Stopper Station

When to do
Replace the lane change stopper motor assembly or the wash syringe senor when they
are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Alignment tool of BA80-J64 1
stop lever stretching
length

Figure 6.13 Exploded view for installation of lane change stopper motor
Stopper motor M3X8 pan head
assembly combination screws
801-BA80-00245-00
Wash syringe sensor

cable
801-BA38-00040-00
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the four M38 pan head combination screws on the lane change stopper
station. Unplug the cable and remove the stopper station.
4 Loosen the M36 pan head combination screw on the wash syringe sensor, install a
new sensor and fix it.
5 Loosen the two M310 hexagon socket cap head screws between the stop lever
and stopper motor assembly. Loosen the four M36 pan head combination screws
on the stopper motor assembly, replace the stopper motor assembly with a new one
and fix it to the stop lever.
6 Fix the lane change stopper station onto the left track and connect the cables.
Readjust the stop lever movement parameters by using the fixture BA80-J64. For more
information refer to sections "Lane Change Part Aligning with Passing Lane" and "Lane
Change Part Aligning with Normal Lane" in Chapter 15 Alignment.
6.3.6 Replacing Lane Change Part

When to do
Replace the oriental motor PK244M-01B assembly, reset spring or wash syringe sensor
when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Track alignment tool of rack BA80-J65 1
transfer unit
MXL tension alignment tool BA2K-TF14 1
for transmission belt of lane
change part
Figure 6.14 Exploded view of lane change stopper station
Fixing block 42 Motor assembly
weld 2(Oriental motor)
801-BA80-00247-00
M3X6 pan head

screw
M3X8
combination
screw
Cable of wash syringe sensor Stopper Reset spring

801-BA38-00040-00 801-BA80-00231-00
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the three M48 combination screws on the lane change part, unplug the
cable connectors, and remove the lane change part.
5 Loosen the three M310 hexagon socket cap head screws on the oriental motor
PK244M-01B assembly, replace it with a new one and adjust the tension of the
synchronous belt with alignment tool BA2K-TF14.
6 Loosen the M38 combination screw on the reset spring guide rod, loosen the
four M36 hexagon socket cap head screws on the fixing block, remove the reset
spring, and fix the new spring and guide rod to the fixing block.
Note: Do not forget the stop plate, and install the spring guide rod at the center of
the guide hole without interfering with the stop plate.
7 Install the lane change part, use fixture BA80-J65 to adjust its position and make
sure it aligns with the left track and right track, and then connect the cables.


After replacing the sensor or spring, readjust the movement parameters of the lane
change part. For more information refer to Chapter 15 Alignment.
6.3.7 Replacing Post-Aspiration Stopper Station

When to do
Replace the stopper motor assembly 2 or the wash syringe senor when they are
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
tool of rack
transfer unit
circular flat belt
stop lever
stretching length
Figure 6.15 Exploded view of post-aspiration stopper station
Transition wheel
assembly
Stopper motor 2
801-BA80-00258-00
M3X10 hexagon
socket screw
M3X6 pan head

screw
M3X6 pan head M4X20 hexagon
screw socket screw

sensor
801-BA38-00040-00
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the six M410 hexagon socket cap head screws at the bottom of the right
track assembly, unplug the cables, and remove the right track assembly.

4 Loosen the M48 retaining screw on the three flat belts, unscrew the tension nut
to release the flat belts, and then remove the four M420 hexagon socket cap head
screws on the transition wheel assembly.
5 Loosen the M36 pan head combination screw on the wash syringe sensor,
unplug the cable, and install the new sensor.
6 Loosen the two M310 hexagon socket cap head screws to remove the stop lever
from the stopper motor 2, loosen the four M36 pan head combination screws on
the motor assembly 2, unplug the cable, install the new motor assembly 2, and fix
the stop lever.
7 Connect and arrange the cables inside the assembly, fix the transition wheel
assembly, and tighten the three flat belts (by using the tension fixture BA80-J100).
8 Install the right track assembly and use the fixture BA80-J65 to adjust its position.
Connect and arrange the cables and install the shells.
Readjust the movement parameters of the post-aspiration stopper station and aspirate
positioning assembly. For more information refer to Chapter 15 Alignment.
6.3.8 Replacing Aspirate Buffer Stopper Station

When to do
Replace the stopper motor assembly 2 or the wash syringe senor when they are
damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
stop lever
stretching length
Figure 6.16 Exploded view of aspirate buffer stopper station
Buffer Stopper
Structure

Stopper motor M3X10 hexagon socket

assembly 2 screws2x
801-BA80-00258-00
Wash syringe senor cable
801-BA38-00040-00
M3X6 pan head screws

2x
M3X6 pan head combination
screws2x
Replacing steps
3 Remove the M38 and two M36 pan head combination screws on the aspirate
buffer stopper station, unplug relevant cables, and remove the stopper station.
4 Loosen the M36 pan head combination screw on the wash syringe sensor and
install a new sensor.
5 Loosen the two M310 hexagon socket cap head screws to remove the stop lever
from the stopper motor assembly 2, loosen the four M36 pan head combination
screws on the motor assembly 2, install the new motor assembly 2, and fix the stop
lever.
6 Install the aspirate buffer stopper station, connect and arrange the cables, and
install the removed shells.
Note: Do not mistake the screws on the aspirate buffer stopper station, one M38
on one side and two M36 on the other side.
Readjust the movement parameters of the aspirate buffer stopper assembly. For more
information refer to Chapter 15 Alignment.
6.3.9 Replacing STAT Aspirate Positioning Station

When to do
Replace the 42 motor assembly, left pusher spring, conversion line of aspirate
positioning reflective optical coupler, short stroke reflective optical coupler, or wash
syringe sensor, when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Flathead / 1
screwdriver

Name Code Quantity

tool of rack
transfer unit
circular flat belt
Tension fixture for BA80-TF28 1
synchronous belt
Figure 6.17 Exploded view of STAT aspirate positioning station
STAT aspirate
positioning station
M3X6 hexagon STAT stopper Short Stroke Reflective pushers

socket screws assembly Optical Coupler screws
801-BA80-00241-00
42 Motor assembly caterpillar Conversion line of aspirate Left pusher spring

801-BA80-00246-00 M3X6 Pan head positioning reflective optical coupler 801-BA30-00129-00
screw 801-BA80-00252-00

Wash syringe sensor M3X6 pan head

cable screw
801-BA38-00040-00
Replacing steps
5 Loosen the M48 screw on the tension nut of the STAT flat belt assembly, unscrew
the tension nut to release the flat belt, and then remove the six M36 countersunk
head screws on the STAT lane track.
install a new sensor.
7 Loosen the screw on the left pusher, remove the left pusher spring and install a new
one. When replacing the left pusher spring, you need not to remove the right
track assembly.
Note: After installing the left pusher spring, check if the pusher assembly works
smoothly.
8 Remove the two M36 pan head combination screws on the short stroke reflective
optical coupler bracket, loosen the M310 pan head screw on the reflective optical
coupler, replace the optical coupler with a new one, and then arrange the cables.
When replacing the short stroke reflective optical coupler, you need not to remove
the right track assembly.
9 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the conversion line of the aspirate positioning
reflective optical coupler, install a new sensor and fix it, and then arrange the cables.
(The caterpillar should be removed. )
10 Loosen the M4 8 screw on the aspirate positioning assembly, loosen the
conversion board and caterpillar retaining screw, and remove the aspirate
positioning station. Loosen the two M36 hexagon socket cap head screws on the
42 motor assembly, replace the 42 motor assembly with a new one, and adjust it
using the tension fixture BA80-TF28. Install the aspirate positioning station on the
right track and arrange the cables inside the assembly.

11 Install the STAT lane track and adjust it using the tension fixture BA80-J100. Install
the right track and adjust it using the fixture BA80-J65. Connect and arrange the
cables and install the shells.
Readjust the movement parameters of the STAT aspirate positioning station. For more
information refer to section "Aspirate Positioning Station Offset Alignment of
Non-Normal Unit" in Chapter 15 Alignment.
6.3.10 Replacing Routine Aspirate Positioning Station

When to do
Replace the 42 motor assembly, right pusher spring, conversion line of aspirate
positioning reflective optical coupler, short stroke reflective optical coupler, or the wash
syringe sensor, when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
tool of rack
transfer unit
circular flat belt
Tension fixture for BA80-TF28 1
synchronous belt
Figure 6.18 Exploded view of routine aspirate positioning station
Routine Aspirate Positioning Station

Ordinary Short Stroke Reflective Pusher

stopper Optical Coupler screw
assembly 801-BA80-00241-00
M3X6 hexagon
socket screws
M3X6 pan head screw
Cable of aspirate positioning reflective 42 motor assembly Right pusher spring

optical coupler 801-BA80-00252-00 801-BA80-00246-00 801-BA30-00128-00
Wash syringe senor cable M3X6 pan head

801-BA38-00040-00 screw
Replacing steps
install a new sensor. (When replacing the wash syringe sensor, you need not to
remove the right track assembly.)
5 Loosen the screw on the left pusher, remove the left pusher spring and install a new
one. When replacing the left pusher spring, you need not to remove the right
track assembly.

Note: After installing the left pusher spring, check if the pusher assembly works
smoothly.
6 Remove the four M36 pan head combination screws on the short stroke reflective
optical coupler bracket, loosen the M310 pan head screw on the reflective optical
coupler, replace the optical coupler with a new one, and then arrange the cables.
(When replacing the short stroke reflective optical coupler, you need not to remove
the right track assembly, but loosen the circuit board assembly in the front.)
7 Loosen the M36 pan head screw on the conversion line of the aspirate positioning
reflective optical coupler, install a new sensor and fix it, and then arrange the cables.
(The caterpillar should be removed. )
8 Loosen the M4 8 screw on the aspirate positioning assembly, loosen the
conversion board and caterpillar retaining screw, and remove the aspirate
positioning station. Loosen the two M36 hexagon socket cap head screws on the
42 motor assembly, replace the 42 motor assembly with a new one, and adjust it
using the tension fixture BA80-TF28. Install the aspirate positioning station on the
right track and arrange the cables inside the assembly.
9 Install the right track assembly and adjust it using the alignment tool BA80-J65.
Connect and arrange the cables and install the shells.
Readjust the movement parameters of the routine aspirate positioning station. For more
information refer to section "Aspirate Positioning Station Offset Alignment of Normal
Unit" in Chapter 15 Alignment.
6.3.11 Replacing Return Push-out Part

When to do
Replace the 42 motor assembly or the wash syringe senor when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Sample rack side clearance BA80-J98 1
alignment tool
Synchronous belt tension fixture 2 BA80-J50 1

Figure 6.19 Exploded view of return push-out part

42 Motor assembly Pusher
801-BA80-00246-00 screw
Right pusher spring

801-BA30-00128-00
M3X6 pan head screw Cable of wash syringe senosr

M3X6 hexagon socket screw 801-BA38-00040-00
Replacing steps
4 Remove the entire return push-out part, loosen the three M36 hexagon socket cap
head screws on the 42 motor assembly, replace the 42 motor assembly with a new
one, use the tension fixture BA80-TF28 to adjust the synchronous belt, and then
install the return push-out part.
5 Connect and arrange the cables, and install the removed shells.
After replacing the sensor or motor assembly, readjust the movement parameters. For
more information refer to section "Half Protrusion of STAT Push-Back Part" in Chapter
15 Alignment.


7 Sampling System

Structure of the sampling system
Functions of the sampling system
Removing and reinstallation of the sampling system

7 Sampling System
7.1 Syringe Assembly

The syringe assembly, situated in the right front side of the analyzer, is composed of the
sample syringe drive module, reagent syringe drive module and clog detection T-piece
assembly. It provides driving force for aspirating and dispensing of sample/reagent
through precise pulling and pushing actions of the syringe plunger.

Figure 7.1 Component location
6
5

material code
1 801-BA80-00075-00 Reagent syringe drive
module
2 115-017460-00 BM10 sample syringe
assembly
3 801-BA80-00076-00 Syringe 42 step
motor assembly
4 801-BA10-00029-00 Syringe optical
coupler
5 801-BA80-00047-00 Syringe 1ml
6 115-015130-00 Clog detection
T-piece assembly
7.1.3 Replacing 1ml Syringe

When to do
Replace the sample syringe or reagent syringe when they have leaks or cracks or reach
the scheduled maintenance time.

7 Sampling System
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Figure 7.2 Exploded view of syringes
Fixing blocks
Retaining
screws
Syringe 1ml
801-BA80-
00047-00
Retaining
screw
Replacing steps
1 Open the right front door of the analyzer, unscrew the six M48 cross pan head
combination screws on the right front panel, and then remove the right front panel.
2 Loosen the plunger screw on the sample (or reagent) syringe, and leave it on the
syringe.
3 Loosen the retaining screws on the fixing block of the sample (or reagent) syringe,
remove the fixing block and retaining screws, and store them properly.
4 Unscrew the sample (or reagent) syringe from the T piece, and pay attention not to
drop the plastic washer between the T piece and the syringe.
5 Screw the new sample (or reagent) syringe into the T piece.
6 Install the sample (or reagent) syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it using
two fixing blocks and four retaining screws. During installation, make sure the scale
15 of the sample syringe and reagent syringe is level to the top of the V-shape
bracket.

7 Sampling System
7 Rotate the motor pulley of the syringe assembly to move the syringe plunger to the
uppermost end, and then rotate the motor pulley counterclockwise to move the
syringe plunger downwards to scale 1 to 2. Gently tighten the plunger screw to fix
the front end of the plunger on the driver. Exercise caution to prevent the syringe
plunger rod from deviating while tightening the retaining screw.
8 Fix the right front panel on the frame using six M48 cross pan head combination
screws.
Note:
The replacement methods of the sample syringe and reagent syringe are the
same.
Tighten the four retaining screws alternately with equal force.
N/A
7.1.4 Replacing Reagent Syringe Drive Module

When to do
Replace the reagent syringe drive module when it fails or is degraded in performance.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 7.3 Exploded view for installation of reagent syringe drive module
Syringe
bracket weld
T piece
Fixing block
Retaining
screw
Syringe 1ml
Reagent
syringe drive
module
801-BA80-
00075-00
Plunger
retaining screw
M4 screw
Replacing steps

7 Sampling System
2 Loosen the plunger screw on the reagent syringe and remove the plunger screw.
3 Loosen the retaining screws on the fixing block of the reagent syringe, remove the
fixing block and retaining screws, and store them properly.
4 Remove the reagent syringe together with the T piece.
5 Disconnect the motor cable on the reagent syringe drive module.
6 Loosen the four M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on the
reagent syringe drive module.
7 Remove the reagent syringe drive module.
8 Fix the new reagent syringe drive module on the syringe bracket using four M410
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
9 Connect the motor cable to the reagent syringe drive module.
10 Install the reagent syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it using two fixing
blocks and four retaining screws. During installation, make sure the scale 15 of the
reagent syringe is level to the top of the V-shape bracket.
screws.
Note:
The replacement methods of the sample and reagent syringe drive modules are
the same.
N/A
7.1.5 Replacing Sample Syringe Assembly

When to do
Replace the sample syringe assembly when it fails or is degraded in performance.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

7 Sampling System
Figure 7.4 Exploded view of sample syringe assembly
Syringe bracket
weld
T-piece
Fixing block
Retaining
screw
BM10 sample
syringe
assembly
115-017460-00
Syringe 1ml
Sample syringe
drive module
Plunger
retaining screw
M4 screw
Replacing steps
2 Loosen the plunger screw on the sample syringe and remove the plunger screw.
3 Loosen the retaining screws on the fixing block of the sample syringe, remove the
fixing block and retaining screws, and store them properly.
4 Remove the sample syringe together with the T piece.
5 Disconnect the motor cable on the sample syringe drive module.
6 Loosen the four M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on the
sample syringe drive module.
7 Remove the sample syringe drive module.
8 Fix the new sample syringe drive module on the syringe bracket using four M410
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
9 Connect the motor cable to the sample syringe drive module.
10 Install the new sample syringe on the V-shape bracket and tighten it using two
fixing blocks and four retaining screws. During installation, make sure the scale 15
of the sample syringe and reagent syringe is level to the top of the V-shape bracket.

7 Sampling System
screws.
Note:
The replacement methods of the sample syringe assembly and reagent syringe
assembly are the same.
N/A
7.1.6 Replacing Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly

When to do
Replace the syringe 42 step motor assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Synchronous belt tension alignment tool BA31-K01 1

7 Sampling System
Figure 7.5 Exploded view of syringe 42 step motor assembly

Synchronous Synchronous
Hexagon socket cap
belt belt wheel
head M3X8
Syringe 42 step motor

assembly 801-BA80-
00076-00
Replacing steps
2 Loosen the plunger screw on the sample (or reagent) syringe and remove the
plunger screw.
4 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe together with the T piece.
5 Disconnect the motor cable from the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
6 Unscrew the four M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on
the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
7 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
8 Loosen the four M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the syringe 42 step motor assembly.
9 Remove the syringe 42 step motor assembly.
10 Fix the new syringe 42 step motor assembly on the syringe base using four M38
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers.

7 Sampling System
11 Fix the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module on the syringe bracket using four
M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
12 Connect the motor cable to the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
bracket.
14 Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the plunger screw of the sample (or reagent)
syringe on the upper end of the syringe plunger (1~2 scales from the top of the
syringe plunger).
screws.
Note:
The syringe 42 step motor is used on both sample and reagent syringe drive
modules, and the replacement methods for them are the same.
N/A
7.1.7 Replacing Clog Detection T-Piece Assembly

When to do
Replace the clog detection T-piece assembly when it has leaks or cracks or cannot work
properly.
Tools
Name Code Quantity


7 Sampling System
Figure 7.6 Exploded view for installation of clog detection T-piece assembly
Syringe bracket
weld
Clog detection
T-piece
assembly
115-015130-00
M3 screw
Replacing steps
2 Disconnect the clog detection sensor.
3 Loosen the two connectors and unplug the tube.
4 Unscrew the two M38 cross pan head screws with washer on the clog detection
T-piece assembly, and remove the T-piece assembly.
5 Install the new clog detection T-piece assembly on the syringe bracket using two
M38 cross pan head screws with washer.
6 Connect the sensor and tube.
screws.
Note: Do not splash water on the clog detection board.
N/A
7.1.8 Replacing Syringe Optical Coupler

When to do

7 Sampling System
Replace the syringe optical coupler when it fails or is damaged.

Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 7.7 Exploded view for installation of the syringe optical coupler
Syringe
optical
coupler
801-BA10-
00029-00
M2.5 screw
Syringe base
small
pressing
plate
Replacing steps of syringe optical coupler
2 Loosen the plunger screw on the sample (or reagent) syringe and remove the
plunger screw.
4 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe together with the T piece.
5 Disconnect the motor cable from the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
6 Unscrew the four M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer on
the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
7 Remove the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
8 Loosen the M2.5 screw and take out the syringe optical coupler.
9 Loosen the small pressing plate and remove the optical coupler cable.

7 Sampling System
10 Install the new optical coupler and fix it on the syringe base using the M2.5 screw.
11 Place the optical coupler cable in the slot of the syringe base and fix it with the
small pressing plate.
12 Fix the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module on the syringe bracket using four
M410 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer.
13 Connect the motor cable to the sample (or reagent) syringe drive module.
bracket.
15 Rotate the syringe motor and tighten the plunger screw of the sample (or reagent)
syringe on the upper end of the syringe plunger (1~2 scales from the top of the
syringe plunger).
screws.
Note:
The optical coupler is used on both sample and reagent syringe drive modules,
and the replacement methods for them are the same.
N/A

7 Sampling System
7.2 Sample Probe Assembly

The sample probe assembly, located in the middle front of the analyzer, consists of the
probe drive assembly, arm assembly, and probe assembly. It completes sample
aspiration/dispensing and probe cleaning according to the timing of the whole unit.

8 2
3

7 Sampling System

material code
1 043-002209-00 Short arm cover
2 041-004625-00 Spring guide rod
3 033-000108-00 Anti-collision spring
4 115-012013-00 Probe assembly
5 115-017927-00 Horizontal motor
assembly
6 115-014445-00 Vertical motor pulley
assembly
7 801-BA80-00051-00 Correlative optical
coupler (S)
8 051-001092-00 Negative offset level
sense board
9 115-012014-00 Sample probe drive
assembly
7.2.3 Replacing Short Arm Cover

When to do
Replace the short arm cover when it is broken.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Figure 7.9 Exploded view for installation of the short arm cover
Arm cover
043-002209-00
170mm arm
base
M3 screw
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the two M3 screws on the arm base of the sample probe assembly and leave
them on the arm base.

7 Sampling System
4 Remove the short arm cover.

5 Install a new short arm cover with its installation holes sleeved on the two M3
screws, and then tighten the screws.
6 Close the front shielding cover.
N/A
7.2.4 Replacing Guide Rod and Anti-Collision Spring

When to do
Replace the anti-collision spring when it fails or gets rusty, and replace the guide rod
when it gets rusty.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Figure 7.10 Exploded view for installation of the guide rod and anti-collision spring
Arm cover
170mm arm Spring post

base 041-004625-00
Anti
M3 screw bumping
spring
033-000108-00
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the two M3 screws on the arm base and leave them on the arm base.
4 Remove the short arm cover (or long arm cover).
5 Unscrew the guide rod, and remove the guide rod and anti-collision spring.
6 Install a new guide rod, sleeve a new spring, and screw the guide rod on the guide
base.
7 Install the short arm cover (or long arm cover), and tighten the two M3 screws.
Note: The guide rod and anti-collision spring are used on both sample and reagent
probe assemblies, and the replacement methods for them are the same.

7 Sampling System
N/A
7.2.5 Replacing Negative Offset Level Sense Board

When to do
Replace the negative offset level sense board when it fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Figure 7.11 Exploded view for installation of the negative offset level sense board
Arm cover
Negative
170mm arm offset level
base sense board
051-001092-00
M3 screw
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the two M3 screws on the arm base and leave them on the arm base.
5 Unplug the cable from the negative offset level sense board.
6 Loosen the two M3 screws on the back of the negative offset level sense board.
7 Remove the negative offset level sense board.
8 Install a new negative offset level sense board and lock it with the two M3 screws.
9 Replug the electric cable.
Note:
Note: The negative offset level sense board is used on both sample and reagent probe
assemblies, and the replacement methods for them are the same.
N/A

7 Sampling System
7.2.6 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly

When to do
Replace the horizontal motor assembly when it is damaged or fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 7.12 Exploded view for installation of the horizontal motor assembly
Horizontal
synchronous
belt
M4X16
screw
Horizontal
motor
assembly
115-017927-00
Replacing steps
2 Open the shielding cover.
3 Remove the desk panel and the related panels around the sample probe assembly
(or the reagent probe assembly).
4 Unplug the horizontal motor cable.
washers on the horizontal motor assembly, and then remove the horizontal motor
assembly.
6 Install the new horizontal motor assembly on the bracket using the four M416
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers, and tighten the
screws.

7 Sampling System
7 Connect the motor cable and install the desk panel and the panels around the
sample probe assembly (or the reagent probe assembly), according to the steps
above in reversed order.
Note:
The horizontal motor assembly is used on both sample and reagent probe assemblies,
and the replacement methods for them are the same.
N/A
7.2.7 Replacing Probe Assembly

When to do
Replace the probe assembly if the probe is bent or rusted.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Figure 7.13 Exploded view for installation of the probe assembly
Arm cover
Fluidic
connector Spring post
Anti
bumping
spring
Probe
assembly
115-012013-00
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the two M3 screws on the arm base of the sample probe assembly (or the
reagent probe assembly) and leave them on the arm base.
6 Disconnect the tube from the fluidic connector on the probe assembly.
6 Remove the probe assembly and exercise caution to prevent the probe liquid from
touching the interior of the guide sleeve.
7 Place the new probe assembly in the guide sleeve.

7 Sampling System
8 Sleeve the anti-collision spring on the guide rod and screw the guide rod on the
guide base.
9 Connect the fluidic tube with its connector closely attached to the counterpart on
the probe assembly, and then tighten the nut.
10 Lift the sample probe to check if it can spring back smoothly.
Note:
The probe assembly is used on both sample and reagent probe assemblies, and the
replacement methods for them are the same.
N/A
7.2.8 Replacing Vertical Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
Replace the vertical motor pulley assembly when it is damaged or fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

7 Sampling System
Figure 7.14 Exploded view for installation of the vertical motor pulley assembly
Arm
assembly
M4X16
screw
Probe drive
assembly
Vertical
motor pulley
assembly
115-014445-00
M6X25 Motor Fixing

screw plate
Positioning
sleeve
Replacing steps
2 Open the shielding cover.
4 Open the right front door of the analyzer, loosen the six M48 cross pan head
5 Remove the probe assembly according to section 7.2.7 Replacing Probe Assembly
and keep it properly.
6 Unplug the horizontal motor cable, vertical motor cable and optical coupler cable.
7 Loosen the three M625 hexagon socket cap head screws under the big bottom
plate.
8 Take out the probe drive assembly and put it in a proper position. Pay attention not
to pull the electric cable.

7 Sampling System
9 Loosen the four M3 screws on the shell of the probe drive assembly and then
remove the shell.
10 Loosen the four M4 screws on the vertical motor pulley assembly, and then remove
the vertical motor pulley assembly from the synchronous belt.
11 Sleeve the new vertical motor pulley assembly on the synchronous belt, and fix it on
the two mounting plates and drive base using the four M4 screws. Do not lock the
screws in this step.
12 Adjust the tension of the synchronous belt to the specified value, and then tighten
the four M4 screws.
13 Fix the shell of the probe drive assembly with four M3 screws.
14 Put the positioning sleeve in the installation hole, and then put the probe drive
assembly in the positioning sleeve.
15 Tighten the three M625 hexagon socket cap head screws from the bottom of the
analyzer to fix the probe drive assembly.
16 Connect the horizontal motor cable, vertical motor cable and optical coupler cable.
17 Install the probe assembly according to section 7.2.7 Replacing Probe Assembly.
18 Install the right front panel assembly and close the right front door.
19 Install the desk panel and the related panels around the sample probe assembly (or
the reagent probe assembly).
20 Close the shielding cover.
Note:
The vertical motor pulley assembly is used on the sample probe assembly, reagent
probe assembly and second gripper drive assembly, and the replacement methods
for them are the same.
N/A
7.2.9 Replacing Sample Probe Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the sample probe drive assembly when it is damaged or fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

7 Sampling System
Arm
assembly
M4X16
screw
Sample
probe drive
assembly
115-012014-00
M6X25
screw Positioning
sleeve
Replacing steps
3 Remove the desk panel and the related panels around the sample probe assembly.
5 Remove the probe assembly according to section 7.2.7 Replacing Probe Assembly,
and unplug the electric cables from the level sense board.
6 Unplug the horizontal motor cable, vertical motor cable, fluidic tube, and optical
coupler cable.
7 Loosen the two M416 hexagon socket cap head screws on the arm assembly and
then remove the arm assembly.
plate.
9 Take out the probe drive assembly.

7 Sampling System
10 Fix the new probe drive assembly on the big bottom plate using three M625
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure to lead the
fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the installation.
11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to connect the motor cable,
sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the sample probe arm assembly, probe
assembly, right front panel assembly, and desk panel.
Note:
To remove the level sense cables from the spline shaft: unplug the cables from the
level sense board, use pliers to remove the connectors from the cables, and then pull
out the cables from the spline shaft. Before removing the cable connectors,
remember the connection order of the cables. To remove the fluidic tube from the
spline shaft: unscrew the tube connector on the sample syringe and the other one
on the probe assembly, and then pull out the fluidic tube from the spline shaft.
Installation of the level sense cables and fluidic tube: lead the tube connector on the
sample syringe downwards through the spline shaft, lead the level sense cables
upwards through the spline shaft, connect the cable connectors in the correct order,
and then tighten the connectors and connect them to the level sense board.
Refer to section "Sample Probe Unit" in Chapter 15 Alignment to complete all alignment
of the sample probe unit.
7.2.10 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler (S)

When to do
Replace the correlative optical coupler when it is damaged or fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

7 Sampling System
Figure 7.15 Exploded view for installation of correlative optical couplers

Correlative
optical coupler
S
801-BA80-
00051-00 Correlative
optical coupler
Correlative
S
optical coupler
801-BA80-
S
00051-00
801-BA80-
Correlative
00051-00
optical coupler
S
801-BA80-
00051-00
Replacing steps
4 Unplug the relevant optical coupler cable.
5 To remove the two correlative optical couplers in the horizontal direction:
Loosen the M3 screw on the optical coupler bracket from the front, and then
remove the bracket and optical coupler.
Loosen the M3 screw on the optical coupler and then remove the optical
coupler.
Fix the new optical coupler on the bracket using an M3 screw.
Fix the bracket with an M3 screw.
6 To remove the two correlative optical couplers in the vertical direction:
Loosen the M3 screw on the optical coupler from the side and then remove the
optical coupler.
Fix the new optical coupler on the bracket using an M3 screw.
7 Connect the optical coupler cable.
8 Install the desk panel and the related panels around the sample probe assembly (or
the reagent probe assembly).
Note:
The correlative optical coupler (s) is used on both sample and reagent probe
assemblies, and the replacement methods for them are the same.
Check that the blocking plate does not interfere with the optical coupler.

7 Sampling System
7.3 Reagent probe assembly

The reagent probe assembly, located in the middle of the analyzer, consists of the probe
drive assembly, arm assembly, and probe assembly. It completes reagent
aspiration/dispensing and probe cleaning according to the timing of the whole unit.

Figure 7.16 Location of reagent probe assembly

material code
1 043-002601-00 Long arm cover
2 115-012011-00 Reagent probe drive
assembly

7 Sampling System
7.3.3 Replacing Long Arm Cover

When to do
Replace the long arm cover when it is broken.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Figure 7.17 Exploded view for installation of the long arm cover
Long arm
cover
043-002601-00
Arm base
M3 screw
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the two M3 screws on the arm base of the reagent probe assembly and leave
them on the arm base.
4 Remove the long arm cover.
5 Install a new long arm cover with its installation holes sleeved on the two M3
screws, and then tighten the screws.
N/A
7.3.4 Replacing Reagent Probe Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the reagent probe drive assembly when it is damaged or fails.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1

7 Sampling System
Figure 7.18 Exploded view for installation of the reagent probe drive assembly
Arm base
assembly
M4X16
screw
Reagent
probe drive
assembly
115-012011-00
M6X25
screw Positioning
sleeve
Replacing steps
3 Remove the desk panel and the related panels around the reagent probe assembly.
4 Open the right front door of the analyzer, loosen the six M48 cross pan head
5 Remove the probe assembly according to section 7.2.7 Replacing Probe Assembly,
and unplug the electric cables from the level sense board.
6 Unplug the horizontal motor cable, vertical motor cable, fluidic tube, and optical
coupler cable.
7 Loosen the two M416 hexagon socket cap head screws on the arm assembly and
then remove the arm assembly.
plate.
9 Take out the reagent probe drive assembly.
10 Fix the new probe drive assembly on the big bottom plate using three M625
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers. Make sure to lead the
fluidic tube and sensor cable through the spline shaft prior to the installation.

7 Sampling System
11 Refer to the above-mentioned steps in reversed order to connect the motor cable,
sensor cable and fluidic tube, and install the reagent probe arm assembly, probe
assembly, right front panel assembly, and desk panel.
Note:
To remove the level sense cables from the spline shaft: unplug the cables from the
level sense board, use pliers to remove the connectors from the cables, and then pull
out the cables from the spline shaft. Before removing the cable connectors,
remember the connection order of the cables. To remove the fluidic tube from the
spline shaft: unscrew the tube connector on the reagent syringe and the other one
on the probe assembly, and then pull out the fluidic tube from the spline shaft.
Installation of the level sense cables and fluidic tube: lead the tube connector on the
reagent syringe downwards through the spline shaft, lead the level sense cables
upwards through the spline shaft, connect the cable connectors in the correct order,
and then tighten the connectors and connect them to the level sense board.
Refer to section "Reagent Probe Unit" in Chapter 15 Alignment to complete all alignment
of the reagent probe unit.

8 Reagent Handling System

Structure of the reagent handling system
Functions of the reagent handling system
Removing and reinstallation of the reagent handling system

8.1 Reagent Carousel Unit

Figure 8.1 Location of reagent carousel unit
Reaction
Dispersion
carousel
assembly
assembly
Reagent
Auto loader
carousel
assembly
assembly
The reagent carousel unit, situated on the left of the analyzer, consists of the reagent
carousel body assembly, reagent chamber, reagent carousel drive assembly, and reagent
bar code reader. It completes various actions, such as carrying and rotating the reagent
bottle to the specified position, adding reagents together with the sampling system. It
provides a refrigerating environment to keep the reagents stable with little volatilization.
It has the following features:
1 Holding reagent: Holding specified number of reagent bottles of certain
specification, and cooperating with the dispenser to aspirate reagent from the
bottles and dispense it into reaction cuvettes.
2 Refrigerating reagent: Providing 24-hour refrigeration and constant temperature
environment(2-8C) to keep the reagents stable with little volatilization.
3 Sequential feeding: The drive assembly drives the reagent carousel to carry certain
reagent bottle in the given order to the aspirate position for aspiration.
4 Auto input of reagent information: Reagent information can be input automatically
through bar code scanning by the reagent bar code reader.


1 2
No. FRU code and material code Material name Remark

1 115-011992-00 Reagent carousel high-speed
drive assembly
2 801-BA20-00001-00 Built-in bar code reader
(featuring laser diversion)
3 115-012270-00 Reagent antifogging heating
assembly
4 BA40-21-61643 Bar code scanning antifogging Note 1
heater
5 BA40-21-61645 Bar code scanning antifogging Note 1
temperature protection switch
6 801-BA30-00088-00 Sensor temperature 5Kohm Note 2
B3470K with threads
7 012-000015-00 Water-proof optical coupler Note 3
8 034-000195-00 Dust screen

Note:
1. For locations of the bar code scanning antifogging heater(No.4) and antifogging
temperature protection switch(No.5), see section "8.1.6 Replacing Antifogging
Temperature Protection Switch and Heater".
2. For the location of the reagent refrigeration temperature sensor(No.6), see section
"8.2.5 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor".
3. For the location of the water-proof optical coupler(No.7), see section "8.1.7 Replacing
Water-proof Optical Coupler".
8.1.3 Replacing Reagent Carousel High-speed Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the reagent carousel high-speed drive assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Gear positioning BM10-J07-02 1
fixture
Insulating / 1 roll
adhesive tape
Horizontal BM10-J09 1
position
alignment tool
for reagent probe

Figure 8.3 Exploded view for installation of the reagent carousel high-speed drive
assembly
Stainless steel hexagon screws

Big gear M5X10+2 stainless steel
wheel washer+M6stainless steel flat
shim
Bearing
washer bearing and horizontal
rotation ring
Stainless steel hexagon

Reagent screws
carousel M5X20+Stainless steel
spring washer+ flat
M6X16 shim
stainless steel
hexagon screws
Limit
block
Bearing
adjusting
block
High speed
drive
assembly
115-011992-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the relevant panels and the reagent carousel cover assembly.
3 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the five screws on the big gear wheel, put away the
spring washers and flat washers, and remove the big gear wheel.
4 Remove in order the bearing washer and the bearing and horizontal rotation ring.
(Remove the bearing and horizontal rotation ring as a whole rather than separating
them.)
5 Loosen the two screws on the stop block, separate the stop block and bearing
adjusting block, pull the bearing adjusting block with one hand, and raise the
reagent carousel body assembly with the other hand. Release the bearing adjusting
block and remove the reagent carousel body assembly. (Note to raise the reagent
carousel body assembly upright and avoid scratching the sensor. If the sensor is
scratched, replace the optical coupler according to section "8.1.8 ".)
6 Peel off the insulating sponge on the motor assembly from under the reagent
chamber, loosen the four screws on the high-speed drive assembly, and then remove
it from the bottom of the reagent chamber.
7 Install a new high-speed drive assembly without tightening the four screws
temporarily. Note to protect the gear wheel to avoid damage.

8 Put the reagent carousel body assembly in the chamber, engage the gear wheel of
the carousel body with that of the drive assembly, toggle the bearing adjusting block
to lay down the carousel body, and ensure that the top of the guide wheel is level to
the top of the gear wheel.
9 Sleeve the small end of the horizontal rotation rings on the four stop bolts, and use
the four long bearing washers with their small ends facing downwards to press the
deep groove ball bearings to the end. Check if the horizontal rotation rings in the 11
o' clock, 3 o' clock and 7 o'clock directions rotate with the reagent carousel body
assembly, and other two have one piece of A4 paper space with it. If the
requirements are not satisfied, remove the screws to adjust the space. Put the stop
block close to the bearing adjusting block and tighten the screws.
10 Sleeve the big gear wheel on the supporting rods and two horizontal stop bolts,
with its counterbore facing upwards, adjust its position with the fixture
BM10-J07-02, and then tighten the screws.
11 Slowly rotate the reagent carousel until the four holes between positions No.9 and
No.13 reach the top of the four retaining screws on the drive assembly. Check that
no abnormal blocking or sound appears during the rotation.
12 Push in radial direction the high-speed drive assembly to the center of the reagent
chamber so that the gear wheels mesh well, and then tighten the four M6 screws on
the drive assembly.
13 Stick the insulating sponge peeled off in step 6, or apply new insulating sponge.
14 Rotate the reagent carousel until the observation holes on the boss of positions 3#,
12# and 21# stop over the optical coupler sensor assembly, and check visually if the
coder teeth gear into the slot of the optical coupler without interference. If the
coder teeth interfere, rotate the reagent carousel until the observation hole of
position 30# reaches the top of the optical coupler, loosen the three screws on the
sensor assembly, adjust the sensor assembly till the coder teeth gear into the middle
of the slot without interference, and then tighten the three M3 screws.
15 Rotate the reagent carousel back and forth and check that the rotation is smooth
without vibration or abnormal sound, and no interval is felt between rotations of
the opposite directions.
16 Install the relevant panels and the reagent carousel cover assembly.
Precautions:
In step 8, handle the reagent carousel carefully to prevent colliding with the gear
wheel and damaging the zero position stopper and the sensor inside the chamber.
After laying down the reagent carousel, do not rotate it immediately until the zero
position stopper lies between positions No.27 and No.28.
The screws on the big gear wheel have stainless steel spring washer 5 and flat
washer 6. Be sure to use the correct washers.
After installation, check that the zero position stopper and coder teeth gear into
the slot of the optical coupler without interference.
When installing the motor, do not push the motor directly, but use force on the
motor bracket, belt wheel or stop plate.

Check the bar code scanning position and reagent aspirate horizontal position, according
to sections "Bar Code Scanning Position" and "Ra, Rb, Rc, and Rd Horizontal Positions" in
Chapter 15 Alignment.

8.1.4 Replacing Bar Code Reader

When to do
Replace the bar code reader when it is damaged or the bar code scanning face is
contaminated.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Horizontal BM10-J09 1
position
alignment tool
for reagent probe
Ethanol / 1 bottles
Figure 8.4 Exploded view for installation of bar code reader
M3X8 hexagon
Scanner socket + spring
Reagent adjusting plate washer+ flat
carousel
shim(stainless
assembly
steel)
Bar code reader

801-BA20-00001-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the desk panel above the bar code reader assembly and other related
panels.
3 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the two M310 hexagon socket cap head screws
on the bar code reader, install a new one and fix it with the two M310 screws. Do
not the tighten the screws temporarily.
4 After alignment, restore the desk panels.
Precautions:
When installing the bar code reader, do not touch the scanning face. If you touch it
unintentionally, clean it with ethanol.

Check the bar code scanning position according to section "Bar Code Scanning Position"
in Chapter 15 Alignment.

8.1.5 Replacing Reagent Antifogging Heating Assembly

When to do
Replace the reagent antifogging heating assembly when it is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Horizontal position alignment tool for BM10-J09 1
reagent probe
Figure 8.5 Exploded view for installation of the reagent antifogging heating assembly
Stainless steel hexagon screws
M5X10+spring washer+M6flat
Bearing
shim(stainless steel)
washer
Big gear
wheel
Bearing+horizontal
rotation ring
Reagent
Bar code
carousel
reader
assembly
bracket
Sponge
adjusting pad
048-001705-
00
Reagent
antifogging
heating assembly
115-012270-00
Replacing steps
them.)

6 Unplug the bar code reader cable, loosen the three stainless steel screws on the
bracket, and store them properly. Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the four screws
on the antifogging heating assembly, and then install a new one.
7 Stick the sponge cushion (or apply a new one), tighten the four screws on the
antifogging heating assembly, and install the three screws on the bar code reader
bracket. Do not tighten the three screws temporarily.
the top of the gear wheel.
11 After alignment, restore the panels that have been removed.
Precautions:
When installing the bar code reader or replacing the reagent antifogging heating
assembly, do not touch the scanning face or the glass wool. If you touch them
unintentionally, clean them with ethanol.
Pay attention not to invert the sponge cushion.
8.1.6 Replacing Antifogging Temperature Protection Switch and Heater

When to do
Replace the temperature protection switch or heater of the reagent antifogging heating
assembly when they are damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Conductive silicone A01-000018--- 1 bottle

Figure 8.6 Exploded view for installation of the antifogging temperature protection
switch and heater
anti fogging
device plate
Shield of the bar Glass
code reader Cables of window
antifogging
heater wire
Overheat
switch plate
Cable of the
antifogging
temperature Heat Cusion
switch conductive Antifogging
aluminum device sponge
plate
Replacing steps
2 Remove the reagent carousel cover, upper-left desk panel, left panel, front pressing
plate and other panels around the reagent carousel.
3 Remove the antifogging heating assembly according to section "8.1.5 ".
4 Loosen the four M2.56 cross pan head screws on the dust shield of the bar code
reader, and then remove the dust shield.
5 Loosen the M312 hexagon socket cap head screw, and remove the overheat
switch plate, antifogging temperature switch and antifogging heater.
6 Place the new antifogging heater in the groove of the heat conductive aluminum
plate, daub little silicone (A01-000018---) on one side of the temperature switch
and attach it to the heater, and then fix the overheat switch plate with the M312
hexagon socket cap head screw. (Pay attention not to invert the antifogging
temperature switch.)
7 Use four M2.56 cross pan head screws to fix the dust shield of the bar code reader
to the antifogging mounting plate.
8 Install the antifogging heating assembly on the reagent chamber and restore other
components. See section "8.1.5 " for details.
9 Restore the panels that have been removed.
Precautions:
Pay attention not to contaminate the bar code scanning window and the antifogging glass
window.

Prevent the sponge cushion from covering the square hole on the dust shield.
8.1.7 Replacing Water-proof Optical Coupler

When to do
Replace the water-proof optical coupler when it is impaired.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Knife / 1
Figure 8.7 Exploded view for installation of the water-proof optical coupler
Big gear screws M5X10+spring
wheel washer+M6flat
Bearing shim(stainless steel)
long Bearing+horizon
washer tal rotation ring

Reagent
screws M5X20+spring
carousel
washer+flat
assembly
shim(stainless steel)
M6X16Stainles
s steel hexagon Water proof
screws optical coupler
012-000015-00
Bearing
adjusting
block
Limit
block
High speed
drive
assembly
Replacing steps
them.)

6 Loosen the screws on the sensor assembly, unplug the sensor cable, remove the
sensor assembly, loosen the screws on the optical coupler, replace it with a new one,
tighten the screws, and install the sensor assembly in the chamber. Make sure that
the retaining screws are installed in the middle of the holes.
the top of the gear wheel. Pay attention not to collide with the sensor and ensure
that the stopper can move in the slot of the optical coupler.
9 Sleeve the big gear wheel on the supporting rods and two horizontal stop bolts, with
its counterbore facing upwards, adjust its position with the fixture BM10-J07-02,
and then tighten the screws.
10 Rotate the reagent carousel and check the stopper. If it deviates to one side, rotate
the reagent carousel to a convenient position, loosen the screws on the sensor
assembly, adjust the sensor assembly till the stopper is in the middle of the optical
coupler, and then tighten the screws.
11 Insert a windproof sponge into the sensor cable hole on the chamber wall sponge,
cut off at least 50mm50mm insulating adhesive tape to stick on the sponge.
12 Restore the lower left desk panel and other components.
Precautions:
Tighten the screws on the waterproof optical coupler with proper force to avoid
damage.
Protect the two nodes of the optical coupler from touching, do not pull the cable by
force, and be sure to leave the cable part outside the chamber.
When installing the reagent carousel, prevent the coder from touching the optical
coupler; otherwise, the optical coupler may be damaged.

Check the bar code scanning position and reagent aspirate horizontal position, according
to sections "Bar Code Scanning Position" and "Ra, Rb, Rc, and Rd Horizontal Positions" in
Chapter 15 Alignment.
8.1.8 Replacing Dust Screen

When to do
Replace the dust screen when it fails or exceeds the life span.
Tools

Name Code Quantity

/ / /
Figure 8.8 Exploded view for installation of the dust screen
Dust
screen
Dust screen
connecting
port
Replacing steps
2 Open the lower left door of the analyzer.
3 Pull out the dust screen, and if you feel blocking, shake it slightly.
4 Insert a new dust screen.
5 Close the lower left door of the analyzer.
Precautions:
When pulling out the dust screen, prevent the dust from dropping in the analyzer
and do not pull the dust screen by force. A deformed dust screen may be blocked
and inconvenient for replacement.

Alignment and confirmation are not required.

8.2 Reagent Refrigeration Unit

Figure 8.9 Location of reagent carousel unit
Reaction
Dispersion
carousel
assembly
assembly
Reagent
Auto loader
carousel
assembly
assembly
The reagent refrigeration unit consists of the reagent carousel air duct, refrigeration
module, and temperature sensor. It provides the refrigeration function to keep
reagents stable in a low temperature environment for 24 hours a day. It features:
24-hour refrigeration and heat preservation, even refrigeration at constant temperature
2~8C, and keeping reagents stable.


Figure 8.10 Location of reagent refrigeration assembly
1 2 3 4 5
No. FRU code and material code Material name Remark

1 115-011990-00 Reagent carousel
refrigeration module
2 024-000412-00 Fan, 4V 119*119*25.5mm
100CFM 38.5dB, anti-jam
3 BX50-21-101112 Semi-conductive Peltier
cable
4 024-000411-00 Fan, 24V 226CFM 58dB

172*450*50mm, 480mm
cable
5 801-BA30-00088-00 Sensor temperature 5Kohm
B3470K with threads
6 M90-000179--- Fan, 24V 91.8CFM
120*120*38mm 300mm, with
alarm
8.2.3 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration Module

When to do
Replace the reagent refrigeration module when the alarm "Reagent refrigeration
temperature is out of range." is given and the Peltier current is beyond 2~6.5A.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 8.11 Exploded view for installation of the reagent refrigeration module
M6X16
Stainless steel
hexagon screws
M4X12 Stainless
Big gear steel cross screw
wheel
module115-011990-00
Replacing steps
2 Take out the dust screen at the air inlet of the refrigeration module, and remove the
panel on the wash buffer side.
3 Disconnect the four Peltiers and the two radiating fans.
4 Remove the relevant panels and the reagent carousel cover.
6 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the four M412 stainless steel combination
screws that connect the refrigeration module and the reagent chamber, and store
them properly.
7 Take out the refrigeration module from the reagent chamber. Mind the horizontal
rotation ring and ensure that the sealing ring between the two is in the sealing
groove.
8 Install a new refrigeration module in the reagent chamber and mind the horizontal
rotation ring. Use the cross screwdriver to tighten the four M412 screws.
9 Connect the four Peltiers and the two radiating fans.

11 Install the reagent carousel cover, the panel on the wash buffer side and other
related desk panels.
12 Clean the dust screen and install it at the air inlet of the refrigeration module.
Precautions:
When installing the refrigeration module, put it slowly in the reagent chamber, and
pay attention not to block the Peltier and fan cables but leaving them coming down
freely and putting them into the groove of the dust screen mounting board.
When installing the reagent carousel, prevent the coder from touching the optical
coupler; otherwise, the optical coupler may be damaged.

1 Switch on the main power of the whole unit.
2 Log on the operating software with the service user account, and then access the
Alignment screen.
3 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Parameters -> Reagent Refrigeration Unit, and set to
"1" the status of the four Peltiers.
4 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Temperature Control Unit -> Fan
Status Query, and check that the cooling fan of the refrigeration module is normal.
5 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Refrigeration Unit, and check that the
status of the four Peltiers is 1, and the Peltier current on the Reagent Refrigeration
Temperature Curve window is between 2~6.5A.
6 Switch the user, and log on with a user account.
8.2.4 Replacing Radiating Fan of the Air Duct Assembly

When to do
Check and replace the radiating fans on the air ducts when the alarm "Reagent
refrigerating fan 1 is abnormal" or "Reagent refrigerating fan 2 is abnormal" is given.
Tools
Name Code Quantity


Figure 8.12 Exploded view for installation of refrigeration radiating fan
Refrigeration
radiating fanM90-
000179---
Replacing steps
2 Loosen the four screws to remove the fan.
3 Lay the new fan in the original position and arrange the cables. Check for wind
coming out from the fan according to the wind direction marked on the fan cover.
4 Tighten the four screws to fix the fan on the air duct.
Precautions:
Ensure that the fan is installed correctly with the wind outlet facing outwards.

Switch on the main power of the whole unit, select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment ->
Temperature Control Unit, and select Fan Status Query to check if refrigeration fans 1
and 2 are normal.
8.2.5 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor

When to do
Replace the refrigeration temperature sensor in the reagent compartment when the
alarm "Reagent refrigeration temperature is out of range" is given and the sensor
temperature is obviously abnormal.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Sharp nose pliers / 1
Knife / 1

Figure 8.13 Exploded view for installation of the refrigeration temperature sensor
Cut a split small

with a knife
Temperature
sensor 801-
BA30-00088-
00
Reagent
carousel
assembly
M6X25
hexagon screws
+spring washer
Replacing steps
3 Loosen the three screws on the reagent chamber and disconnect the refrigeration
assembly cable, and then remove the reagent carousel assembly.
4 Use a blade to slash a breach on the insulating sponge to expose the refrigeration
temperature sensor. Clamp the cable with sharp nose pliers and unscrew it out from
the M5 thread.
5 Remove the nut of the temperature sensor 5Kohm B3470K and keep the spring
washer, daub some thermal paste KP-97 on the sensor, and use the thermistor
fixture BA40-J09 to fix it on the bottom plate of the reagent chamber.
6 Apply some glue on the split of the sponge for adhering and wrap it with adhesive
tapes to avoid leaks.
7 Install the reagent carousel assembly in the chamber, tighten the screws and
connect the refrigeration assembly cable.
8 Restore the desk panels that have been removed.
Precautions:
Tighten the nut properly to press the spring washer and avoid damaging the
temperature sensor.
Do not pull the sensor cable by force.

Switch on the main power of the whole unit to turn on refrigeration, and check that the
refrigeration temperature is between -5~30C.

8.2.6 Replacing Radiating Fan of the Refrigeration Module

When to do
Check and replace the radiating fan of the refrigeration module when the alarm
"Refrigeration Module's Radiating Fan is abnormal." is given.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 8.14 Exploded view for installing the radiating fan of the refrigeration module
Radiating
fan of the
refrigeration Hexagon
module024- socket cap
000411-00 head screws
M4X20
Replacing steps
2 Remove the reagent refrigeration module according to the instructions in the
previous section.
3 Loosen the snap ring on the fan cable.
4 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the two M420 hexagon socket cap head screws
on the screen and the fan, and put away the spring and flat washers.
5 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the four M420 hexagon socket cap head screws
on the fan and the bracket, remove the fan, and put away the spring and flat
washers.
6 Install a new fan, use the two M420 screws to fix the screen on the fan, and then
use the four M420 screws to fix the fan on the bracket.

7 Fix the fan cable in the clamp.

8 Install the refrigeration module according to the replacement methods stated in
previous section.
Precautions:

Alignment screen.
Status Query, and check that the radiating fan of the refrigeration module is normal.
8.2.7 Replacing Cooling Fan of the Refrigeration Module

When to do
Check and replace the cooling fan of the refrigeration module when the alarm
"Refrigeration Module's Cooling Fan is abnormal." is given.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Electric iron / 1
Scissors / 1

Figure 8.15 Exploded view for installing the cooling fan of the refrigeration module
M435 cross
countersunk head
screws
Radiating fan
of the
refrigeration
module
024-000412-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the reagent refrigeration module according to the instructions in the
previous section.
3 Loosen the snap ring on the fan cable and cut off the welding part on it.
4 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the four M435 cross countersunk head screws
fixing the screen and fan on the bracket, and then remove the fan and screen.
Install a new cooling fan and use the four screws to fix the fan and screen on the
bracket.

5 Clear the waterproof glue from the fan cable hole on the refrigeration plate, lead the
fan cable through the hole, and then apply some TSE382-W waterproof glue.
6 Sleeve heat-shrinkable tubes on the three fan cables, connect the three fan cables
with the conversion lines by welding, and then heat-shrink the heat-shrinkable
tubes.
7 Fix the fan cable in the clamp.
previous section.
Precautions:
Ensure that the fan is installed in the direction that wind comes out from the
reagent carousel cover.

Alignment screen.
8.2.8 Replacing Peltiers

When to do
Replace the reagent refrigeration module when the alarm "Reagent refrigeration
temperature is out of range." is given and the Peltier current is beyond 2~6.5A.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Flathead / 1
screwdriver
Scissors / 1
Waterproof glue / 1
gun
Torque driver / 1
AC impedance / 1
meter

Figure 8.16 Exploded view for installation of Peltiers
Cross pan head M3X8

stainless steel screw
Cross pan head

M4X12 stainless
steel screw
Cooling radiator
Square seal ring
Cross pan head

M4X12 stainless
steel screw
Insulating plate
Pressing block
Cooler
BX50-21-101112
Square seal ring
Radiating radiator
Cross countersunk
head screw
Replacing steps
Remove the reagent refrigeration module according to the instructions in the
previous section.
2 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the four M38 cross pan head combination
screws on the cooling fan bracket, put away the screws and remove the cooling end
(fan and bracket).
3 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the 12 M412 cross pan head combination
screws fixing the refrigeration plate and insulating plate, put away the screws, and
remove the cooling radiator and refrigeration plate.
4 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the 12 M412 cross pan head combination
screws fixing the insulating plate and radiating radiator, put away the screws, and
remove the insulating plate.
5 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the four M48 cross countersunk head screws
on the radiating fan bracket, put away the screws and remove the radiating end (fan
and bracket).
6 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the screws on the pressing block, remove the
pressing block and store it properly. Cut off the cables of the four Peltiers and
remove the four Peltiers.
7 Use a flathead screwdriver to clear the waterproof glue from the radiator cable hole
on the Peltiers, and then use clean cloth dipped with ethanol to dry the contact
surface on the Peltiers.
8 Number each Peltier with 1#~4#.

9 Evenly daub KP-97 thermal paste on the radiating radiator and Peltiers, install the
Peltier frames, contact the no-text side of the Peltiers with the radiator, lead the
Peltier cables through the holes on the radiator, and apply some TSW382-W
waterproof glue in the holes.
10 Lock the pressing block with screws, and evenly daub KP-97 thermal paste on the
text side of the Peltiers.
11 Replace the square sealing ring in the radiator groove, use the 12 M412 cross pan
head combination screws removed in step 5 to fix the insulating plate on the
radiator, and tighten the screws alternately by using a torque driver with 4Kgf.cm
and 10Kgf.cm torque.
12 Replace the square sealing ring in the groove of the refrigeration plate, tighten
alternately the 12 M412 cross pan head combination screws removed in step 4,
by using a torque driver with 4Kgf.cm, 8Kgf.cm and 10Kgf.cm torque.
13 Use an AC impedance meter to measure the AC impedance of the four Peltiers. If the
impedance change is less than 5/1000 based on the value obtained in step 9, the
Peltiers are deemed qualified.
14 Use TSW382-W waterproof glue to fill the Peltier cable holes on the fin side of the
radiator, and ensure that each Peltier cable is applied with glue for better sealing
effects.
15 Install the cooling end and radiating end removed in step 3 and 6.
16 Fix the Peltier cables and fan cables in the clamp.
previous section.
Precautions:
When replacing the Peltiers, store the removed screws properly.
When applying the TSW382-W waterproof glue, completely fill the space between
the cable hole and Peltier cable.
Evenly daub KP-97 thermal paste on the contact surface of the Peltiers or on the
Peltiers, and ensure that they are evenly coated with thermal paste.

Alignment screen.


9 Cuvette Load and Transport System

Structure of the cuvette load and transport system
Functions of the cuvette load and transport system
Removing and reinstallation of the cuvette load and transport system

9.1 Cuvette loader assembly

The cuvette loader assembly, located in the middle right of the analyzer, is designed to
transport cuvette trays automatically. The user is allowed to open the drawer door, pull
out the drawer to remove old cuvette trays and add new ones, and then restore the
drawer. The cuvette loader assembly performs the following actions automatically:
gripping and feeding cuvettes, pushing cuvette trays, gripping and locating cuvettes, and
unloading empty cuvette trays.
The loader assembly has a box structure with a drawer on its open side, which can
move back and force. The drawer is designed with two parts separated by a plate. The
left part is feeding area, where new cuvette trays are loaded; and the right part is
unloading area, where old cuvette trays are unloaded. The feeder, pusher, open-close
assembly, unloader, and other related parts are installed on the box frame. When new
cuvette trays are loaded in the drawer and old ones are removed, the system transports
the new cuvette trays automatically to ensure reliable running of the analyzer. When
the unloading area is full or the feeding area is empty, the system gives an alarm to
remind the user to add new cuvette trays or to remove the old ones.

Figure 9.1 Location of the cuvette loader assembly
Shield
Reaction
carousel Dispersion
Reagent carosuel
carousel
Cuvette loader assembly
Track feeder
system Panel
SDM
Drawer
door
The figure below shows the structure of the cuvette loader assembly:

232425 Pawl Gripper Y

26 Retaining axis
structure 10
plate
18
202122 Gripper Z axis
Pusher 17
9 1314
16
19
78 Open-close
15 structure
12
Gripper X
axis Tray bracket
Case
assembly
56 11
Transmission
Drag chain Unload
case
assembly
Drawer
Loader
motor Unload
motor
1 2
34

material code
1. 024-000342-00 Electromagnet 25kgf
2. 115-011985-00 Feeding motor pulley assembly Feeding position
3. 115-011985-00 Feeding motor pulley assembly Unloading position
4. 009-002206-00 Correlative optical coupler (L) Unloading position
5. 009-001848-00 Conversion line of correlative
optical coupler
6. 009-001869-00 Conversion line of reflective
optical coupler
7. 011-000054-00 Long stroke reflective optical Feeding arm
coupler position
8. Feeder finger
9. 009-002204-00 Correlative optical coupler (S) Feeding arm
position
10. 011-000054-00 Long stroke reflective optical Pusher waiting
coupler position
11. 011-000054-00 Long stroke reflective optical Cuvette tray
coupler unloading area
12. 115-011981-00 Track open-close motor pulley Open-close
assembly assembly
13. 011-000054-00 Long stroke reflective optical Working position
coupler
14. 009-002206-00 Correlative optical coupler (L) Working position
15. 009-002206-00 Correlative optical coupler (L) X axis
16. 115-014449-00 X-axis motor pulley assembly
17. 051-001034-00 BM10 optical coupler Pushing position
conversion board with socket
18. 115-014450-00 Pushing motor assembly


material code
19. 051-000860-00 BM10 gripper X-FPC board
20. 051-000859-00 BM10 gripper Y-FPC board
21. 115-011981-00 Track open-close motor pulley Y axis
assembly
22. 009-002204-00 Correlative optical coupler (S) Y axis
23. 051-000858-00 BM10 gripper Z-FPC board
24. 115-011981-00 Track open-close motor pulley Z axis
assembly
25. 051-001034-00 BM10 optical coupler Z axis
conversion board with socket
26. 033-000161-00 Z-axis relieving spring
Note:
1. The unloading motor pulley assembly borrows the feeding motor pulley
assembly(115-011985-00); therefore, No.2 and No.3 materials in the table are identical.
2. The Y-axis motor pulley assembly and Z-axis motor pulley assembly borrow the track
open-close motor pulley assembly(115-011981-00); therefore, No.12, No.21 and No.24
materials in the table are identical.
9.1.3 Replacing the Electromagnet

When to do
Replace the electromagnet when it fails to attract ironic parts.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Medical rubber gloves / 1 pair

Figure 9.2 Installation of electromagnet
Cable tie M5X12 hexagon

socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washers
Left shield
Electromagnet024
M4X8 cross pan -000342-00
head combination Drawer
screw door
Drawer
M4X10 screws on assembly
handle
the suction cup
Replacing steps
2 Open the drawer door.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the two M48 cross pan head combination
screws on the left shield, and then remove the left shield.
4 Pull out the drawer assembly by holding the handle to expose the electromagnet.
5 Use diagonal pliers to cut off the cable tie and unplug the cable connector.
6 Loosen the M512 hexagon socket cap head screw with spring and flat washers on
the electromagnet.
7 Remove the electromagnet and pull out the cable.
8 Install a new electromagnet with the cable facing downwards.
N/A
Note
After installing the electromagnet, switch on the main power and run the operating
software, and then push the drawer till the suction cup is attracted to the electromagnet.
The drawer resets automatically and then the electromagnet is released. Click Tray Unit
Mechanical Home on the Alignment window to check if the electromagnet is attractive.
If it is, the installation is completed;
otherwise, loosen the three M410 screws on the suction cup, adjust the suction cup till
it can be attracted normally by the electromagnet.
9.1.4 Replacing Feeding Motor Pulley Assembly in the Feeding Position

When to do
Replace the feeding motor pulley when it cannot work due to damage.

Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.3 Installation of the feeding motor pulley assembly in the feeding position
SDM
Front panel
Feeding motor
pulley assembly
115-011985-00 Cavity
Synchronous
belt

cap head screws with
spring and flat washers
Feeding motor
pulley assembly
115-011985-00
Feeding arm
Replacing steps
2 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the front cover of the SDM, and check if it is
convenient to replace the feeding motor pulley assembly(115-011985-00) from the
top. If it is not, remove the SDM.
3 Remove all cuvette trays from the drawer and manually move the feeding arm to the
bottom.

washers on the feeding motor pulley assembly(115-011985-00).
5 Move the synchronous belt and take out the feeding motor pulley
assembly(115-011985-00).
6 Install a new motor pulley assembly, sleeve the synchronous belt on the belt wheel
and install the four M410 screws. Tighten the screws after checking that the
synchronous belt can work normally.
7 Connect the SDM, and if the SDM has not been removed, install the front cover.
For removing, installation, alignment, and confirmation steps of the SDM, see Chapter 15
Alignment.
9.1.5 Replacing Feeding Motor Pulley Assembly in the Unloading Position

When to do
Replace the motor pulley in the unloading position when it cannot work due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Long screwdriver, / 1 for each
short screwdriver
Flashlight / 1

Figure 9.4 Installation of the feeding motor pulley assembly in the unloading position
BM10Control drive
board PCBA
AC board shield.
Right rear cove
SDM
Enlarged
illustration
Optical coupler and retaining screw
Feeding motor pulley assembly

115-011985-00
Unloading motor
M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws
with spring and flat washer
Replacing steps
2 Remove the right rear panel.
3 Unplug the connectors on the BM10 reagent control drive board and then remove
the board.
4 Remove the AC board shield.
5 Use diagonal pliers to cut off the cable tie of the unloading motor bracket.
6 Use a short screwdriver to loosen the screw on the optical coupler, and then remove
the optical coupler.
7 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the four M410 hexagon socket cap head screws
with spring and flat washers on the unloading motor bracket, remove the motor
bracket and motor pulley assembly(115-011985-00) as a whole, and then remove
8 Use the hexagon wrench to remove and replace the motor pulley
assembly(115-011985-00).
9 Install the new motor pulley assembly and bracket, sleeve the synchronous belt on
the belt wheel, tighten the screws, and restore other parts that have been removed.
N/A
Note
Ensure that the cables are bundled.

9.1.6 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler in the Unloading Position

When to do
Replace the correlative optical coupler in the unloading position when it cannot work
due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
short screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.5 Installation of the correlative optical coupler in the unloading position
BM10 Control
drive board
PCBA (Reagent)
Unplug the AC board shield

connector from
here
Right rear
cover
Cut the cable tie
from here
Enla
rged
illust
ratio
n
M3X6 cross pan

head screw
Correlative optical couple(L)
009-002206-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the SDM.
4 Disconnect the BM10 reagent control drive board and remove it.
5 Remove the AC board shield.
6 Use diagonal pliers to cut off the relevant cable tie, and remove the optical coupler
(from the space indicated on the figure).
7 Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 cross pane head screws on
the optical coupler.
8 Remove the optical coupler and install a new one(009-002206-00), restore the
relevant parts, bundle the cables, and connect the optical coupler.


Alignment.
9.1.7 Replacing the Conversion Line of Correlative and Reflective Optical

Couplers
When to do
Replace the conversion line if the home position optical coupler on the feeding arm or
the cuvette counting optical coupler has no signals due to cable damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Flashlight / 1
Figure 9.6 Installation of the conversion line of correlative and reflective optical
couplers
M3X6 cross pan head

screw
Enlarged
Enlarged
M3X6 cross pan head

Feeding arm Drag
Cuvette load assembly screw
chain
Replacing steps
2 Remove the SDM.
3 Cut off the relevant cable tie, and unplug the connectors of the two cables.

4 Move the feeding arm to a convenient position, use a cross screwdriver to loosen the
two M36 cross pan head screws on two ends of the cable carrier, and then remove
the cable carrier.
5 Replace the damaged cable in the cable carrier: conversion line of correlative optical
coupler(009-001848-00) or conversion line of reflective optical
coupler(009-001869-00).
6 Arrange the cable carrier and reinstall it.
7 Connect the cable connectors and bundle the cables.
8 Connect the SDM to restore the whole unit.
For removing, installation, alignment, and confirmation steps of the SDM, see the
instructions in the Installation Manual.
9.1.8 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler on the Feeding

Arm
When to do
Replace the cuvette counting reflective optical coupler on the feeding arm if no signals
are detected due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.7 Installation of long stroke reflective optical coupler on the feeding arm
SDM
M3X6 Cross pan

Enlarged
head screw
Front cover
Optical coupler bracket

Long stroke reflective M3X10 cross pan head
optical coupler screw
011-000054-00
Replacing steps

2 Use a cross screwdriver to remove the front cover of the SDM.

3 Cut off the relevant cable tie and unplug the optical coupler.
4 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 cross pan head combination
screws on the reflective optical coupler bracket, and then remove the bracket.
5 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the M310 cross pan head screw on the
reflective optical coupler(011-000054-00), and then remove the optical coupler.
6 Install a new long stroke reflective optical coupler(011-000054-00), reinstall the
removed parts, bundle the cables, and restore the whole unit.
N/A
9.1.9 Replacing Feeder Fingers

When to do
Replace the feeder fingers if they cannot grip cuvette trays due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Short screwdriver / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.8 Installation of the right feeder finger
SDM
Feeding finger
Enla
rged
Front cover
M3X8 cross pan head

combination screw

Figure 9.9 Installation of the left feeder finger
Front shield
assembly
Transparent cover
Enlarged
M3X8 cross pan head
combination screw
Feeding finger
Replacing steps
2 To replace the right feeder finger, use a cross screwdriver to remove the front cover
of the SDM; to replace the left feeder finger, open the front shielding cover assembly
and remove it with the cross screwdriver.
3 Move the feeder fingers to a convenient position (move the right finger to the
bottom and the left finger to the top).
4 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the M38 cross pan head combination screw
on the damaged feeder finger, and then remove the feeder finger.
5 Install a new feeder finger and fix it.
6 Restore the whole unit.
N/A
9.1.10 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler(S) on the Feeding Arm

When to do
Replace the correlative optical coupler when it is damaged so that the feeding arm
cannot find its home position.
Tools

Name Code Quantity

Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.10 Installation of the correlative optical coupler(S) on the feeding arm
BM10 Control
drive board
PCBA (Reagent)
Right rear
cover
Enlarged
Correlative
optical coupler
(S)
009-002204-00
M3X6 cross pan
head screw Feeding
arm
Replacing steps
3 Unplug the connectors on the BM10 reagent control drive board and then remove
the board.
4 Move the feeding arm to the window on the reagent control drive board, use
diagonal pliers to cut off the cable tie, arrange the cables, and unplug the optical
coupler.
5 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 cross pan head screws on the
correlative optical coupler(009-002204-00), and then remove the optical coupler.
6 Install a new correlative optical coupler(009-002204-00), reinstall the removed
parts, bundle the cables, and restore the whole unit.
N/A

9.1.11 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler in the Pusher

Waiting Position
When to do
Replace the reflective optical coupler in the pusher waiting position if no signals are
detected due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
short screwdriver
Figure 9.11 Installation of long stroke reflective optical coupler in the pusher waiting
position
Front shield assembly

Substrate panel
Right panel
Substrate bracket cover
Transparent cover
M3X10 cross pan head screw
Enlarged
Long stroke reflective optical coupler Operation

011-000054-00 gap
Replacing steps
2 Open the front shielding cover and remove it with a cross screwdriver.
3 Remove the substrate bracket cover, use the cross screwdriver to loosen the
substrate panel assembly and remove it, and then remove the right desk panel.
4 Unplug the optical coupler from the space between the loader assembly and the
instrument frame.
5 Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the M310 cross pan head screw on the
reflective optical coupler(011-000054-00).
6 Install a new long stroke reflective optical coupler(011-000054-00), reinstall the
removed parts, and restore the whole unit.


N/A
9.1.12 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler in the Unloading

Area
When to do
Replace the reflective optical coupler in the unloading area when it cannot count cuvette
trays correctly due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

short screwdriver
Figure 9.12 Installation of long stroke reflective optical coupler in the unloading area
Long stroke reflective

optical coupler
011-000054-00
M3X10 cross pan head

screw
Service window
Drawer door
Replacing steps
2 Open the drawer door.
3 Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the M310 cross pan head screw on the
reflective optical coupler(011-000054-00) from the maintenance window, and then
unplug the cable connector.
4 Install a new long stroke reflective optical coupler(011-000054-00), and connect
the optical coupler cable.
N/A

9.1.13 Replacing Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly of the

Open-Close assembly
When to do
Replace the track open-close motor pulley assembly of the open-close assembly when it
cannot work due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
short screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.13 Installation of the track open-close motor pulley assembly of the open-close
assembly
Special wash panel Reaction carousel

panel
Front shied assembly
Transparent cover
Right panel
Substrate panel

Temperature collection board

Right rear
cover
Rear shield
Right rear
panel
Operating
position
Support arm
2
Support arm 1
Synchronous
pulley
M3X8 hexagon
socket cap head screw
Track open-close motor pulley assembly
115-011981-00
Replacing steps
2 Open the front shielding cover assembly, and use a cross screwdriver to remove the
front shielding cover, substrate panel assembly, special wash panel assembly,
reaction carousel panel, and right desk panel. During removing, pay attention to the
cables under the substrate panel assembly and special wash panel assembly.
3 Open the back shielding cover, and use the cross screwdriver to remove the left rear
panel and right rear panel.
4 Push arm 1 (or arm 2) to open the open-close assembly to the greatest extent, find
the open-close assembly from the gap between the rear panels (and if necessary,
remove the temperature collection board), unplug the motor connector, feel the
tension of the synchronous belt by squeezing it from two opposite directions, use
the hexagon wrench to loosen the four M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with
spring and flat washers on the open-close motor pulley assembly, and move the
motor to release the synchronous belt while keeping the support arm still.

5 Install a new track open-close motor pulley assembly(115-011981-00), sleeve the

synchronous belt on the belt wheel (while the open-close assembly is opened to the
greatest extent), pre-tighten the motor pulley assembly with the four M38 screws,
push the synchronous belt and squeeze it near the belt wheel. If the tension is same
as before, tighten the screws.
6 Connect the motor cable, install the removed panels and other parts, and restore the
whole unit.
N/A
Note
When removing and reinstalling the motor, ensure that the support arms 1 and 2 are
opened to the greatest extent.
9.1.14 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective or Correlative Optical Coupler (L)

in the Working Position
When to do
Replace the reflective optical coupler in the working position when it cannot detect
cuvette trays due to damage, or replace the correlative optical coupler when it is
damaged so that the open-close assembly fails to open or close.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

short screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1

Figure 9.14 Installation of the long stroke reflective or correlative optical coupler (L) in
the working position
Substrate panel
assemlby
Special wash panel Right panel
Transparent cover
Reaction
carousel panel
enlarged
Bracket of the
open-close optical
case
coupler
M3X6 pan head
screw M3X6 countersunk head
Long stroke reflective optical

Correlative Optical coupler011-000054-00
Coupler(L)
009-002206-00 M3X10 cross pan head screw
Replacing steps
3 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the substrate panel assembly and remove the
special wash panel assembly, reaction carousel panel, and right desk panel. Pay
attention to the cables under the substrate panel assembly and special wash panel
assembly.
4 Before replacing the reflective optical coupler, unplug the cable connector; before
replacing the correlative optical coupler, unplug the cable connector and cut off the
cable tie.
5 Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 countersunk head screws
on the optical coupler bracket in the box structure, and then remove the bracket
together with the two optical couplers.
6 Loosen the M3 10 cross pan head screws on the reflective optical
coupler(011-000054-00) and remove the optical coupler; loosen the two M36
cross pan head screws on the correlative optical coupler(009-002206-00) and
remove the optical coupler.
6 Install a new long stroke reflective optical coupler(011-000054-00) or correlative
optical coupler(009-002206-00) on the bracket, fix the bracket with the two M36
countersunk head screws, connect the cable connectors, bundle the cables, install
the removed parts, and restore the whole unit.
N/A

9.1.15 Replacing X-axis Correlative Optical Coupler(L)

When to do
Replace the X-axis optical coupler of the first gripper if no signals are detected due to
damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
short screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.15 Installation of the X-axis correlative optical coupler(L)

Transparent
cover
Substrate bracket
assembly
Substrate panel
Special wash panel assembly
Substrate enlarged M3X6 pan

bracket head screw
Correlative optical coupler(L)009-002206-00
Replacing steps

3 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the substrate panel assembly and remove the
special wash panel assembly. Pay attention to the cables under the two assemblies,
and if necessary, loosen the substrate assembly bracket.
4 Unplug the optical coupler connector and cut off the cable tie.
5 Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 cross pan head screws on
the correlative optical coupler(009-002206-00), and then replace the optical
coupler.
6 Connect the optical coupler, bundle the cable, install the removed parts, and restore
the whole unit.
N/A
9.1.16 Replacing X-axis Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
Replace the X-axis motor of the first gripper if no signals are detected due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.16 Installation of the X-axis motor pulley assembly
Substrate panel Substrate bracket
assembly
Front shield
Transparent
assembly
Synchronous X axis motor

Pulley bracket
Enlarged
X-axis motor pulley assembly M4X10 hexagon socket

115-014449-00 cap head screws with
spring and flat washer
Replacing steps
2 Remove the SDM.

4 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly. Pay attention to
the cables under it, and if necessary, loosen the substrate assembly bracket.
5 Unplug the motor cable, and use a hexagon wrench to loosen the four M410
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the X-axis motor
bracket.
6 Remove the bracket together with the motor pulley assembly(115-014449-00) from
7 Use the hexagon wrench to remove the motor pulley assembly(115-014449-00)
from the bracket, install a new one, and fix it in the original cable direction.
8 Sleeve the synchronous belt on the belt wheel, and fix the pulley on the bracket
with the four M410 screws.
9 Reinstall the removed parts and restore the whole unit.
Note
Ensure the motor is installed with correct cable direction.
9.1.17 Replacing BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board with Socket in

the Pushing Position
When to do
Replace the optical coupler conversion board if no signals are detected in the pushing
home position due to damage.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Big and small cross screwdrivers / 1 for each
Diagonal pliers / 1

Figure 9.17 Installation of the BM10 optical coupler conversion board with socket in the
pushing position
Substrate panel
assembly Front shield
assembly
Pushing plate
Right panel
Transparent
cover
M2.5X4 pan head screw
Blocking M3X6
plate countersunk
head screw
Enlarged
BM10 optical coupler

Pusher optical coupler conversion board with socket
bracket 051-001034-00
Replacing steps
3 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly and the right
desk panel, and pay attention to the cables under the substrate panel assembly.
4 Move the push plate away from the home position.
5 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 countersunk head screws on the
pusher optical coupler bracket, and then remove the bracket. Use a small cross
screwdriver to loosen the M2.54 pan head screw on the BM10 optical coupler
conversion board(051-001034-00), and then remove the conversion board.
6 Install a new conversion board(051-001034-00), connect the cable, fix the
conversion board on the optical coupler bracket using the two M36 countersunk
head screws, and pre-tighten the screws.
7 Move the pushing plate slowly to the home position, and observe the blocking plate
on the optical coupler. To prevent interference between the two, adjust the bracket
till the blocking plate reaches the middle of the optical coupler, and then tighten the
M36 screws while keeping the bracket still.
N/A
Note
Before tightening the M36 countersunk head screws, check the blocking plate and the
optical coupler to prevent interference.

9.1.18 Replacing Pushing Motor Assembly

When to do
Replace the pushing motor assembly when it executes no action due to damage after
system instructions are sent.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
short screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.18 Installation of the pushing motor assembly
Substrate panel Substrate bracket assembly
Right panel
Transparent cover M3X6
countersunk
Pushing plate head screw Pushing motor
assembly
115-014450-00
Enlarged
illustration
Synchronous belt
Pusher optical coupler bracket and optical coupler

M3X6 cross pan head screw
Replacing steps
2 Remove the SDM, unplug the motor connector, and shift the optical coupler. (Note: If
you can unplug/plug the motor connector from the slot near the motor assembly, do
not remove the SDM.)
4 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly and the right
desk panel, and pay attention to the cables under the substrate panel assembly.
Loosen the screws on the substrate assembly bracket so that the bracket can move.
5 Move the push plate away from the home position.
pusher optical coupler bracket, and then remove the bracket.
7 Use a short cross screwdriver to loosen the four M36 cross pan head combination
screws on the pushing motor assembly(115-014450-00), and move the
synchronous belt to take out the pushing motor assembly(115-014450-00).

8 Install a new pushing motor assembly(115-014450-00), sleeve the synchronous

belt on the belt wheel, and tighten the four M36 screws .
9 Install the pusher optical coupler bracket with the two M36 countersunk head
screws, and pre-tighten the screws.
10 Move the pushing plate slowly to the home position, and observe the blocking plate
on the optical coupler. To prevent interference between the two, adjust the bracket
till the blocking plate reaches the middle of the optical coupler, and then tighten the
M36 screws while keeping the bracket still.
11 Insert the cable connector and connect the SDM.
Alignment.
Note
Before fixing the pusher optical coupler bracket, check the blocking plate and the
optical coupler to prevent interference.
9.1.19 Replacing BM10 Gripper X-FPC Board

When to do
When errors are reported from the Y-axis motor of the first gripper assembly or the
optical couplers of the Y-axis home position and calibrate position, check the
components themselves. If they are excluded, the FPC must go wrong, and the X-FPC is
probably the one that contributes to the error. Use a multimeter to test the X-FPC for its
connectivity, and locate the error. For details of the FPC's connectivity check, see
section "12.6.21 FPC Conversion Board" in the manual.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Long screwdriver, short screwdriver / 1 for each
Diagonal pliers / 1

Figure 9.19 Installation of the BM10 gripper X-FPC board

Substrate panel assembly
Front shield
assembly M3X6 Cross pan head combination screw
BM1 0gripper X-FPC board
Cable 051-000860-00
shield M3X6 cross pan head
Transparent Press
screw
cover plate
Dismantlement
illustration
Press
plate
M3X6 Cross pan X-FPC retaining

M3X6 cross pan head head combination plate
screw screw
Replacing steps
3 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly, and pay attention
to the cables under it.
4 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the M36 cross pan head combination screw
on the cable shield, remove the cable shield, and unplug the cable connectors on the
BM10 gripper X-FPC board(051-000860-00) near the cable shield.
screws on each of the two pressing plates, and then remove the pressing plates.
6 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the four M36 cross pan head combination
screws on the X-FPC mounting plate, move the X-FPC mounting plate and unplug
the connectors on the X-FPC.
7 Loosen the four M36 pan head screws on each end of the BM10 gripper X-FPC
board(051-000860-00), and then remove the board.
8 Install a new BM10 gripper X-FPC board(051-000860-00), use four M36 pan
head screws to fix its one end on the X-FPC mounting plate, use two M36 cross
pan head combination screws to fix the X-FPC on the mounting plate with the
pressing plate, insert the cable connectors on this end, and use the four M36 pan
head combination screws to fix the X-FPC in the original position.
9 Fix the other end of the BM10 gripper X-FPC board(051-000860-00) on the screw
bolt under the cable shield using four M36 pan head screws, and use two M36
cross pan head combination screws to fix the FPC with the pressing plate.
10 Insert the cable connectors on the cable shield end, install the cable shield and fix it
with a M36 cross pan head combination screw.

11 Check that the FPC does not interfere, and then reinstall the removed panels and
restore the whole unit.
N/A
9.1.20 Replacing BM10 Gripper Y-FPC Board

When to do
When errors are reported from the Z-axis motor of the first gripper assembly or the
optical couplers of the Z-axis home position and calibrate position, check the
components themselves. If they are excluded, the FPC must go wrong, and the Y-FPC is
probably the one that contributes to the error. Use a multimeter to test the Y-FPC for its
connectivity, and troubleshoot it layer by layer. For details of the FPC's connectivity
check, see section "12.6.21 FPC Conversion Board" in the manual.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
short screwdriver
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.20 Installation of the BM10 gripper Y-FPC board
Substrate panel assembly Z axis shield right plate M3X6 cross pan head
Front shield assembly screw
M3X6 cross pan head Y-axis cable shield
Transparent cover combination screw
Z axis shield left plate Stud screwM3X14+7-8
BM10 gripper Y-FPC board PCBA
051-000859-00
Dismantlement
illustration
Press
plate
Y axis shield
M3X6 cross pan head
X-FPC retaining
combination screw M3X6 powder screw
plate
Replacing steps
3 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly, and pay attention
to the cables under it.
4 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the five M36 powder screws on the Y-axis
shielding cover, and then remove the Y-axis shielding cover.

5 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the seven M36 powder screws on the left and
right Z-axis shielding covers, and then remove the Z-axis shielding covers.
screws on each of the two pressing plates, and then remove the pressing plates.
7 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the three M36 cross pan head screws on the
Y-axis cable shield, and then remove the Y-axis cable shield.
8 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the four M36 cross pan head combination
screws on the X-FPC mounting plate, move the X-FPC mounting plate, and unplug
the BM10 gripper Y-FPC board(051-000859-00) from the X-FPC socket.
9 Unplug the connector on the BM10 gripper Y-FPC board(051-000859-00) socket,
use diagonal pliers to loosen the three M314+7-8 stud screws on the Y-FPC board,
and then remove the Y-FPC board.
10 Install a new BM10 gripper Y-FPC board(051-000859-00), and reinstall the
removed parts according to the steps stated above.
11 Reinstall the removed panels and restore the whole unit.
N/A
Note
After removing the X-FPC mounting plate, pay attention not to damage the X-FPC.
9.1.21 Replacing Y-axis Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
Replace the Y-axis track open-close motor pulley assembly if the Y-axis executes no
action due to the damaged motor.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Hexagon ratchet / 1
wrench
Diagonal pliers / 1

Figure 9.21 Installation of the Y-axis track open-close motor pulley assembly
Substrate panel Rear shield
assembly M4X8 countersunk head
screw
Auxiliary bearing
Front shield group
assembly
Special wash panel Transparent

cover
Precision shaft
X-FPC mounting plate
Y axis shield
M3X8 hexagon socket

cap head screws with
spring and flat washer
Y-FPC
mounting plate
Synchronous
belt
Track open-close motor

pulley assembly
115-011981-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the SDM.
3 Open the front and back shielding covers, and remove them with a cross
screwdriver.

4 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly and special wash
panel assembly, and pay attention to the cables under them.
5 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the X-FPC mounting plate, and unplug the
connector from the X-FPC socket.
6 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the M48 countersunk head screw on the
auxiliary bearing group of the Y axis, and then remove the auxiliary bearing group.
7 Use a ratchet wrench to loosen the M612 hexagon socket cap head screw with
spring and flat washers(not indicated on the figure) on each end of the precision
shaft, and then remove the precision shaft together with the Y and Z axis
assemblies.
8 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the Y-axis shielding cover.
9 Unplug the motor connector, use a hexagon wrench to loosen the three M38
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the track
open-close motor pulley assembly(115-011981-00), take out the synchronous belt
and remove the motor pulley assembly. If necessary, loosen the Y-FPC mounting
plate.
synchronous belt on the belt wheel, and tighten the three M38 screws.
Note
After removing the X-FPC, protect it from damage.
9.1.22 Replacing Y-axis Correlative Optical Coupler(S)

When to do
Replace the Y-axis correlative optical coupler when it is damaged so that the Y axis
cannot find its home position.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Hexagon ratchet wrench / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1

Figure 9.22 Installation of the Y-axis correlative optical coupler(S)

Substrate panel Rear shield
assembly M4X8 countersunk head
screw
Auxiliary bearing
Front shield group
assembly
Special wash panel Transparent

cover
Precision shaft
X-FPC mounting plate
M3X6 cross pan

head screw
Correlative optical coupler(S)

009-002204-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the SDM.
3 Open the front and back shielding covers, and remove them with a cross
screwdriver.

4 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly and special wash
panel assembly, and pay attention to the cables under them.
5 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the X-FPC mounting plate, and unplug the
connector from the X-FPC socket.
6 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the M48 countersunk head screw on the
auxiliary bearing group of the Y axis, and then remove the auxiliary bearing group.
7 Use a ratchet wrench to loosen the M612 hexagon socket cap head screw with
spring and flat washers(not indicated on the figure) on each end of the precision
shaft, and then remove the precision shaft together with the Y and Z axis
assemblies.
8 Unplug the optical coupler, use the cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 cross
pan head screws on the correlative optical coupler(009-002204-00), and then
remove the optical coupler.
9 Install a new correlative optical coupler (009-002204-00), insert its connector, and
bundle the cables.
Note
After removing the X-FPC, protect it from damage.
9.1.23 Replacing BM10 Gripper Z-FPC Board

When to do
When errors are reported from the finger motor of the first gripper assembly or the
optical couplers of finger opening, cuvette gripping and obstruction detection, check the
components themselves. If they are excluded, the FPC must go wrong, and the Z-FPC is
probably the one that contributes to the error. Use a multimeter to test the Z-FPC for its
connectivity, and troubleshoot the Y-FPC and X-FPC layer by layer. For details of the
FPC's connectivity check, see section "12.6.21 FPC Conversion Board" in the manual.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Big and small cross / 1 for each
screwdrivers

Figure 9.23 Installation of the BM10 gripper Z-FPC board
Front shield
assembly
Z axis shield right
plate
Z axis shield left

plate Transpa
rent
cover
Z-axis relieving spring and hanging sleeve Y-axis cable shield M3X6 cross pan head screw
BM10 gripper Z-FPC board Y-FPC
051-000858-00 Y axis shield
Z-FPC mounting
plate
Upper shield of
the Z-axis belt
Lower shield of
the Z-axis belt
Z-FPC press plate

M3X6Z-FPC M3X6 powder
M3X6 pan head combination
press plate screw
Replacing steps

6 Use a small cross screwdriver to loosen the two M2.58 cross pan head screws on
the Z-axis relieving spring, remove the relieving spring and hanging sleeves. Pay
attention not to drop the hanging sleeves.
7 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the five M36 countersunk head screws on the
upper and lower shields of the Z-axis belt, and then remove the upper and lower
shields.
Z-FPC mounting plate, and then remove the Z-FPC mounting plate.
9 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 pan head combination screws
on the Z-FPC pressing plate, and then remove the Z-FPC pressing plate.
10 Unplug the BM10 gripper Z-FPC board(051-000858-00) from the Y-FPC socket, use
the cross screwdriver to loosen the two M36 pan head combination screws on the
Z-FPC board, and then remove the Z-FPC board.
11 Install a new Z-FPC board(051-000858-00), fix it in the original position with the
two M36 pan head combination screws, and bend it to the Y-FPC socket. Fix the
Z-FPC mounting plate with the two M36 countersunk head screws, and adjust the
Z-FPC board before pressing it in order to prevent interference by the screws, and
then insert the Z-FPC board into the Y-FPC socket.
12 Reinstall other removed parts and restore the whole unit.
N/A
Note
When installing the Z-FPC, bend it in the correct direction to prevent scratches and
damage by the screws.
9.1.24 Replacing Z-axis Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
Replace the Z-axis track open-close motor pulley assembly if the Z-axis executes no
action due to the damaged motor.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 9.24 Installation of the Z-axis track open-close motor pulley assembly
Right Z-axis shielding

cover
Left Z-axis shielding
cover
Transparent
cover
Track open-close motor

pulley assembly
Enlarged
Relieving spring and 115-011981-00
hanging sleeve
Upper shield of
M3X8 hexagon
the Z-axis belt
socket cap head
screws with spring
and flat washer
M3X6 powder
screw
M3X6 countersunk head screw
Replacing steps
5 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the three M36 countersunk head screws on
the upper shield of the Z-axis belt, and then remove the upper shield.

6 Unplug the motor connector, use a hexagon wrench to loosen the three M38
hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers on the track
open-close motor pulley assembly(115-011981-00), take out the synchronous belt
and remove the motor pulley assembly.
synchronous belt on the belt wheel, and tighten the three M38 screws.
8 Install the upper shield of the Z-axis belt, and then install the Z-axis relieving spring
and hanging sleeve.
N/A
9.1.25 Replacing BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board with Socket of

the Z Axis
When to do
Replace the optical coupler conversion board if it is damaged so that no signals are
detected in the home position or middle position of the Z axis.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Hexagon wrench / 1
screwdrivers
Figure 9.25 Installation of the BM10 optical coupler conversion board with socket of the
Z axis
M3X6 cross pan head Y-axis cable
screw shield Front shield
assembly
Right Z-axis shielding
cover
cover
Z-axis relieving spring Y axis shield

and hanging sleeve
Upper shield of the Transpa
Z-axis belt rent
cover
M3X8 hexagon socket cap M3X6 powder screw

Lpwer shield of the
head screws with spring M3X6 countersunk head screw
Z-axis belt and flat washer

Y-FPC
Stop plate of gripping

finger
M2X4 countersunk head BM10 Optical coupler
screw conversion board with socket
M2.5X4 pan head screw
051-001034-00
Replacing steps
7 Use the cross screwdriver to loosen the five M36 countersunk head screws on the
upper and lower shields of the Z-axis belt, and then remove the upper and lower
shields.
8 Loosen the three M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat
washers on the Z-axis frame, and remove the Z-axis assembly.
9 Use the small cross screwdriver to loosen the two M24 cross countersunk head
screws on the stop plate of gripping finger, and then remove the stop plate.
10 Unplug the BM10 optical coupler conversion board with socket(051-001034-00)
from the Y-FPC socket, use the small cross screwdriver to loosen the M2.54 pan
head screw, and then remove the conversion board.
11 Install a new BM10 optical coupler conversion board with socket(051-001034-00),
fix it in the original position with the M2.54 pan head screw, insert its cable
connector into the Y-FPC socket, arrange the cables, and use the two M24 cross
countersunk head screws to fix the stop plate on the cables.
12 Fix the Z-axis assembly on the relevant part of the Y axis.

After replacement, adjust the verticality of the Z axis and calibrate the gripping position
with a fixture. For more information of alignment, see Chapter 15 Alignment.
Note
After replacement, calibrate the home position of the cuvette gripper.
9.1.26 Replacing Z-axis Relieving Spring

When to do
Replace the Z-axis relieving spring when it is impaired.
Tools
Name Code Quantity

screwdrivers
Figure 9.26 Installation of the Z-axis relieving spring
Front shield
assembly
Z-axis relieving spring
Right Z-axis shielding cover from the two hanging
sleeve Z-axis relieving spring
cover
Transpar
ent cover
Enlarged
Replacing steps

5 Remove the Z-axis relieving spring from the two hanging sleeves and install a new
one.
6 Use the small cross screwdriver to fix two ends of the hanging sleeves with two
M2.58 cross pan head screws.
N/A

9.2 First Gripper Assembly

The first gripper assembly, located in the right front of the analyzer, is installed on the
Z-axis drive assembly. It transports reaction cuvettes among the following positions
during the test procedure: tray position, sample/reagent dispensing position, diluting
position, reaction carousel, and discarding position.

material code
1 033-000151-00 Finger clamping spring
9.2.3 Replacing Finger Assembly, Cover and Spring

When to do
Replace the finger spring if the proactive maintenance time is due or the spring falls off
or is broken; replace the entire gripper assembly if the gripper fails to grip cuvettes.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Tweezers / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1

Figure 9.27 Exploded view for installation
axis drive
assembly
Finger
bracket
M3X8
combination
screw
Finger assembly of
Cable of empty the first gripper
gripping sensor
Finger clamping
spring
033-000151-00
Steps

2 Open the front shielding cover, and remove it by loosening the two screws.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the seven screws on the Z-axis shielding cover,
and remove the Z-axis shielding cover.
5 Spin the gripper cam with tweezers to close the finger, remove the spring from the
poles, and pay attention not to drop the spring and other parts into the analyzer
(reaction carousel hole or shell).
6 Install a new finger clamping spring by hanging it to the groove of the poles.
7 To replace the entire first gripper assembly, loosen the three M3 8 cross
combination screws on the mounting bracket, cut off the cable tie, unplug the cable
connectors, and remove the first gripper assembly.
8 Install a new first gripper assembly according to step 7 in the reversed order.
9 Install and tighten the screws according to steps 1~3 in the reversed order.
Refer to section "First Gripper Unit" in Chapter 15 Alignment to complete all alignment
of the first gripper unit.
Note
Protect the sensor cables when replacing the first gripper assembly.

9.3 Second Gripper Assembly

The second gripper assembly, located in the right back of the analyzer, is installed on the
second gripper drive assembly. It transports reaction cuvettes among the following
positions during the test procedure: reaction carousel, vortexer and dispersion carousel.

material code
1 043-002134-00 Gripper arm cover
2 033-000151-00 Finger clamping spring
9.3.3 Replacing Finger Assembly, Cover and Spring

When to do
Replace the shielding cover when it is cracked or damaged; replace the finger spring if
the proactive maintenance time is due or the spring falls off or is broken; replace the
entire gripper assembly if the gripper fails to grip cuvettes.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Tweezers / 1
Diagonal pliers / 1
Figure 9.28 Exploded view for installation
Arm cover
M3X8 powder
screw
M4X16 hexagon
socket screw
Tension spring
033-000151-00
Steps


3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the two screws on the gripper arm cover, and
remove the arm cover.
4 Install a new arm cover and fix it with the screws.
poles, and pay attention not to drop the spring and other parts into the analyzer
(reaction carousel hole or shell).
7 To replace the entire second gripper assembly, loosen the two M416 hexagon
socket cap head screws on the end of the gripper arm, cut off the cable tie, unplug
the cable connectors, remove the gripper arm from the precision shaft, and lead the
cable connectors through the slot on the arm (pay attention not to damage the
insulation cover of the cables).
8 Install a new second gripper assembly according to step 7 in the reversed order.
9 Install the gripper arm cover and tighten the screws.
Refer to section "Second Gripper Unit" in Chapter 15 Alignment to complete all
alignment of the second gripper unit.
Note
Protect the sensor cables when replacing the second gripper assembly.


10 Dispersion System

Structure of the dispersion system
Functions of the dispersion system
Removing and reinstallation of the dispersion system

10.1 Module Functions
10.1 Module Functions

The dispersion system is functionally divided into three layers: dispersion carousel,
dispense plate and aspirate plate. The dispersion carousel transports and heats the
reaction cuvettes. The dispense plate carries the 4-phase dispense probes to move
vertically and rotates at high speed to mix the reaction liquid in the cuvettes. The mixing
device is located on the dispense plate and driven to mix the reaction liquid, and they
two are installed on the dispersion carousel cover. The aspirate plate is driven by a
high-speed linear motor to move vertically for aspirating reaction liquid, and it is
installed on a Bakelite board.
After transporting to the gripping position on the dispersion carousel, each cuvette is
rotated counterclockwise to the first phase dispense position for wash buffer addition,
and then without mixing rotated for three cuvette positions to reach the first phase
aspirate position, in which the aspirate probe aspirates the liquid waste left from the
substances bound to the cuvette wall by the 4-phase magnets, and "purified" through
multiple "dispense->dispersion->aspirate" operations, and finally taken away by the
gripper from the gripping position after the last phase dispense-mixing is finished.

10.2 Component Locations and FRU Details

Figure 10.1 Location of dispersion assembly
Dispersion
assembly
1 2 3 4 5 6


material code
1 115-014446-00 Substrate mixing presser assembly
2 115-012009-00 Magnetic separation mixing motor

and belt wheel assembly
3 031-000230-00 Synchronous belt. 290MXL025
polyurethane
4 115-012010-00 Mixing presser assembly
5 041-004693-00 Dispersion Dispense probe
6 041-004693-00 Dispersion Aspirate
7 115-012006-00 Magnetic separation aspirating

drive assembly
8 115-012004-00 Magnetic separation motor and belt
wheel assembly
9 115-012002-00 Dispersion Assembly
10 115-014447-00 Substrate preheating assembly See 1.1.12.

11 BA10-21-78143 Dispersion carousel heater See 1.1.13.
12 801-BA30-00089-00 Overheat protection switch See 1.1.14.
13 009-001882-00 Temperature sensor See 1.1.14.
14 801-BA80-00051-00 Dispersion optical coupler See 1.1.15.
15 801-BA80-00252-00 Rotation speed detection optical See 1.1.15.
coupler for dispersion dispensing
and mixing
16 115-012051-00 Substrate heating module See 1.1.16.
17 009-002842-00 Substrate air bubble detection See 1.1.16.
optical coupler

10.3 Replacing Substrate Mixing Presser Assembly

When to do
Replace the substrate mixing presser assembly when it is damaged or cannot meet the
operation requirements.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.2 Exploded view for installation of the substrate mixing presser assembly
Stainless steel hexagon socket
screw Dispersion aspirating
M4X16 probe
Dispersion aspiration assembly

Cross pan head
combination screw
Dispersion dispensing motor cover

motor
Stainless steel hexagon Synchronous belt.

socket screw 290MXL025 Polyurethane
M4X12
Mixing belt wheel in the Tension Device of the

substrate mixing position synchronous belt
Hexagon socket cap head

screw
M3X5
Synchronous belt tension

measuring position
Substrate mixing presser

assembly
115-014446-00
Replacing steps
2 Remove the dispense probes and aspirate probes, and put them in a clean bag to
prevent contamination.
3 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the four M416 hexagon socket cap head screws on
the aspirate assembly, and the remove the aspirate assembly.

4 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the three cross pan head combination screws on
the dispersion motor cover, and then remove the dispersion motor cover.
5 Cut off the cable tie of the dispense motor, unplug the motor cable, use the hexagon
wrench to loosen the four M412 hexagon socket cap head screws on the dispense
motor, remove the dispense motor, and then lift the dispense assembly to remove it.
6 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the M412 hexagon socket cap head screw on the
synchronous belt, so that the synchronous belt becomes loose.
7 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the two M35 retaining screws on the substrate
mixing presser assembly, and then remove the substrate mixing presser assembly.
8 Install a new substrate mixing presser assembly on the dispense assembly, tighten
the two M35 retaining screws (with glue) and ensure that one of them is aligned
with the flat part of the presser assembly, and then rotate the presser assembly to
check if it can move smoothly.
9 Install the synchronous belt.
10 Install the dispense assembly, dispense motor, motor cover, and aspirate assembly,
and insert the dispense probes and aspirate probes correctly according to the
indications.
N/A

10.4 Replacing Dispersion Mixing Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
Replace the dispersion mixing motor pulley assembly when it is damaged or cannot
meet the operation requirements.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.3 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion mixing motor pulley
assembly
Stainless steel hexagon screw
Dispersion aspirating
M4X16 probe

Cross pan head
combination screw
Dispersion dispensing Motor cover

motor
Stainless steel hexagon Synchronous belt.

socket screw 290MXL025 Polyurethane
M4X12
Tension Device of the
synchronous belt
Dispersion mixing motor
115-012009-00
Motor mounting base
Synchronous belt tension measuring
position
Replacing steps
3 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the four M416 hexagon socket cap head screws on
the aspirate assembly, and the remove the aspirate assembly.

6 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the M412 hexagon socket cap head screw on the
synchronous belt, so that the synchronous belt becomes loose.
7 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the two M416 hexagon socket cap head screws
on the mounting base of the dispersion mixing motor, and then remove the
mounting base and the mixing motor pulley assembly.
on the mixing motor pulley assembly, and then remove the mixing motor pulley
assembly from the motor mounting base.
9 Install a new mixing motor pulley assembly on the motor mounting base, and pay
attention to the installation direction. Sleeve the synchronous belt on the belt
wheel, and fix the mounting base and motor pulley assembly on the dispense plate.
11 Install the dispense motor, motor cover, and aspirate assembly, and insert the
dispense probes and aspirate probes correctly according to the indications.
Precautions:
Pay attention not to bend the synchronous belt(290MXL025 polyurethane).
Tighten the screws to prevent them from getting loose.

See section "Dispersion Mixing Speed" in Chapter 15 Alignment.

10.5 Replacing Synchronous Belt. 290MXL025 Polyurethane

When to do
Replace the synchronous belt. 290MXL025 polyurethane when it is damaged or cannot
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.4 Exploded view for installation of the synchronous belt. 290MXL025
polyurethane
Stainless steel hexagon socket
screw Dispersion aspirating
M4X16 probe

Cross pan head
combination screw

motor
Synchronous belt.
Stainless steel hexagon 290MXL025 Polyurethane
socket screw
031-000230-00
M4X12
Substrate nut synchronous belt
substrate probe sleeve

Motor mounting base

position
Dispersion mixing motor

Replacing steps
on the aspirate assembly, and the remove the aspirate assembly.

6 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the M412 hexagon socket cap head screw on
the synchronous belt, so that the synchronous belt becomes loose.
on the mounting base of the dispersion mixing motor, and then remove the
mounting base and the mixing motor pulley assembly.
8 Loosen the substrate nut and remove the substrate probe sleeves. Exercise caution
not to contaminate the substrate probe.
9 Install a new synchronous belt on the belt wheel and idle wheel, install the motor
mounting base and the dispersion mixing motor pulley assembly on the dispense
plate, and then tighten the two M416 hexagon socket cap head screws. Fix the
substrate probe sleeve with the nut.
10 Install the synchronous belt. 290MXL025 polyurethane.
11 Install the dispense motor, motor cover, and aspirate assembly, and insert the
dispense probes and aspirate probes correctly according to the indications.
Precautions:
Protect the substrate probe from contaminants.
Tighten the screws to prevent them from getting loose.

See section "Dispersion Mixing Speed" in Chapter 15 Alignment.

10.6 Replacing Mixing Presser Assembly

When to do
Replace the mixing presser assembly when it is damaged or cannot meet the operation
requirements.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.5 Exploded view for installation of the mixing presser assembly
Stainless steel hexagon screw
M4X16 probe

Cross pan head
combination screw

motor
Synchronous belt.
290MXL025 Polyurethane
socket screw
031-000230-00
M4X12
synchronous belt
Dispersion dispensing assembly Hexagon socket set

screw
M3X5
position Tension Device of the
synchronous belt
Mixing presser
assembly
115-012010-00
Replacing steps
on the aspirate assembly, and the remove the aspirate assembly.

6 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the M412 hexagon socket cap head screw on
the synchronous belt, so that the synchronous belt becomes loose.
7 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the two M35 retaining screws on the mixing
presser assembly, and then remove the mixing presser assembly.
8 Install a new mixing presser assembly on the dispense assembly, tighten the two
M35 retaining screws (with glue) and ensure that one of them is aligned with the
flat part of the presser assembly, and then rotate the presser assembly to check if it
can move smoothly.
10 Install the dispense assembly, dispense motor, motor cover, and aspirate assembly,
and insert the dispense probes and aspirate probes correctly according to the
indications.
N/A

10.7 Replacing Dispersion Dispense Probes

When to do
Replace the dispersion dispense probes when they are rusted or bent.
Tools
Not involved
Figure 10.6 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion dispense probes
Dispersion
aspirating probe
041-004693-00
Dispersion
dispensing probe
041-004686-00
Replacing steps
1 Loose the nut on the desired dispersion dispense probe and remove the probe.
The dispense probe is connected with the dispense tube through a barb, and the
dispense tube is fixed under the tube plate. Loosen the screws on the tube plate,
take out the dispense tube from the groove of the tube plate, and put the probe tip
on a tissue.
Disconnect the dispense tube from the multi-way connector and pay attention to
wash buffer flowing out.
Connect a new dispense probe and tube with the multi-way connector, fix the tube
in the corresponding groove of the tube plate, and then tighten the screws.
Insert the new dispense probe into the corresponding hole on the dispense plate,
and tighten the nut.

Precautions:
Clean the new dispense probe before use.
During installation, prevent the dispense probe from being damaged and note the
probe order that should be D1/D2/D3/D4.
Perform fluidic prime after finishing the installation.

Check that the dispense probe can spring back smoothly.

10.8 Replacing Dispersion Aspirate Probes

When to do
Replace the dispersion aspirate probes when they are rusted or bent.
Tools
Not involved
Figure 10.7 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion aspirate probes
Dispersion
aspirating probe
041-004693-00
Dispersion
dispensing probe
041-004686-00
Replacing steps
1 Access the Maintenance Command screen, click Clean Dispersion Probes/Tubes ,
and then replace the desired dispersion aspirate probe according to the screen
prompts.
2 Unscrew counterclockwise the yellow round nut on the aspirate plate, (the
dispersion carousel includes the upper and lower plates, and the aspirate plate is
the upper one), pull the aspirate probe upwards from the dispersion carousel. Pay
attention not to bend or bump the probe.
3 Connect one end of the aspirate tube to the probe barb, and the other end to the
multi-way connector. Take out the aspirate tube from the groove of the tube plate,
and disconnect the probe from the multi-way connector.

Note: Do not attempt to disconnect the tube from the aspirate probe.
4 Install a new aspirate probe and tube back onto the aspirate plate. While moving the
bottom of the aspirate probe slowly, press it gently to insert its bottom into the
hole on the dispersion carousel cover, and then push the aspirate probe vertically
into the aspirate plate by force.
5 Screw the round nut clockwise to tighten the aspirate probe.
6 Lock the aspirate tube into the groove of the tube plate, and connect it with the
multi-way connector.
Precautions:
Clean the new aspirate probe before use.
Prevent the aspirate probe from being damaged during installation.
Pay attention not to mistaken the order of the aspirate probes during installation.
Perform fluidic prime after finishing the installation.

Check that the aspirate probe can spring back smoothly.

10.9 Replacing Dispersion Aspirate Drive Assembly

When to do
Replace the dispersion aspirate drive assembly when it is damaged or cannot meet the
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.8 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion aspirate drive assembly
Aspirating probe
plate
Dispersion
Dispensing probe
aspiration
sleeve
assembly
Stainless steel
hexagon
screwM4X16 Dispersion
dispensing
assembly
Adjusting plate
Aspirating probe
guide holder
Dispersion Aspirating
Drive Assembly Dispersion
115-012006-00 carousel cover
Connecting pin of
the linear motor
BA38-20-88085 Dispersion
mounting plate
Motor nut plate
042-005072-00
Linear slide rail
mounting base
Aspiration motor.
024-000374-00
Replacing steps
1 Remove the dispersion aspirate assembly and dispense assembly according to steps
1~5 in sections 10.7 and 10.8.
2 Use diagonal pliers to remove the stop collar fixing the connecting pin of the linear
motor, unplug the connecting pin, and unscrew the lead screw of the aspirate motor.
3 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the four screws on the nut plate, and remove the
aspirate motor.

4 Use the hexagon wrench to loosen the four screws on the mounting base of the
linear slide rail, and remove the entire dispersion aspirate drive assembly.
5 Install a new dispersion aspirate drive assembly on the mounting plate with the
pins inserted into the corresponding holes, and then fix the assembly with four
hexagon socket cap head screws.
6 Fix the aspirate motor on the mounting plate through the nut plate, and ensure that
the cable side of the aspirate motor is facing outwards.
7 Screw the lead screw into the aspirate motor, through the connecting pin and the
stop collar to connect with the aspirate driver assembly.
8 Remove the probe sleeve on the aspirate plate, use four M416 hexagon socket cap
head screws to fix the aspirate plate on the adjusting plate, insert two alignment
tools(BM10-J01-004) into the holes on the aspirate plate, and lock them with the
accompanying M8 nuts. Push the aspirate plate up and down and adjust the
adjusting plate. If the two alignment tools can go in and out of the aspirate holes on
the dispersion carousel cover, tighten the screws on the adjusting plate. Note:
After tighten the screws, check again if the alignment tools can go in and out of the
aspirate holes smoothly. See the figure below:
9 Install the dispense assembly and aspirate assembly.
Precautions:
During operation, exercise caution to avoid dropping something into the dispersion
carousel.
Pay attention to the installation direction of the aspirate motor.

See step 8 for the alignment and confirmation methods.

10.10 Replacing Dispersion Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
Replace the dispersion motor pulley assembly if the motor or the belt wheel is damaged
or both of them get loose.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.9 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion motor pulley assembly
Stainless steel
hexagon screw
M4X10
Dispersion motor and
belt wheel assembly
115-012004-00
Stainless steel
hexagon screw
M4X20
Motor adjusting
plate
Dispersion
mounting plate
Synchronous belt
Motor nut plate
Replacing steps
2 Remove the desk panel above the dispersion motor pulley assembly.
3 Loosen the four M420 stainless steel hexagon screws on the motor adjusting
plate, and then remove the dispersion motor pulley assembly and motor adjusting
plate as a whole. Store the motor nut plate properly to avoid missing.
4 Loosen the four M410 stainless steel hexagon screws on the dispersion motor
pulley assembly, and then remove the assembly.

5 Install a new dispersion motor pulley assembly on the motor adjusting plate, use
four M420 screws to fix the adjusting plate on the mounting plate with the cable
side of the motor aligned with the slot on the mounting plate, and fix the nut plate
in the back. Do not tighten the screws until the tension alignment of the
synchronous belt is finished.
6 Sleeve the synchronous belt on the dispersion motor belt wheel.
7 Connect the motor cable and install the relevant panel.
Precautions:
Pay attention to the cable direction of the motor.
Prevent dropping screws and washers into the instrument during removing and
installation processes.
Avoid damaging the coder teeth during operation.
Tighten the screws properly to avoid getting loose.

See Dispersion Carousel Position Offset and Reversed Rotary Stop Position
Compensation of the dispersion unit in Chapter 15 Alignment.

10.11 Replacing Dispersion Assembly

When to do
Replace the dispersion assembly when it is damaged or cannot meet the operation
requirements.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.10 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion assembly
Stainless steel
hexagon screw
M5X25
Washer
Dispersion assembly
115-012002-00
Dispersion mounting
plate

Replacing steps
2 Remove the desk panel and side panel shielding the dispersion assembly.
3 Use diagonal pliers to cut off the cable tie on the dispersion assembly cables.
Unplug the motor cable connector and optical coupler cable connector, and
disconnect the waste tube at the bottom of the dispersion assembly. Mark the
cable connectors before removing.
4 Use a hexagon wrench to loosen the three stainless steel hexagon screws on the
dispersion assembly, and remove the dispersion assembly from the support posts.
5 Use the three stain steel hexagon screws and washers to fix a new dispersion
assembly on the support posts, and do not tighten the screws until the dispersion
assembly is aligned.
6 Insert all cables and tubes according to the marking, and fix them with a cable tie.
7 Click Dispersion Carousel Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment on the Alignment
screen, and adjust the dispersion assembly using the finger fixture BM10-J08-007
and gripping hole alignment tool BM10-J01-002 according to the screen prompts.
Acceptance criteria: The finger fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the center of
the gripping hole alignment tool BM10-J01-002.
8 Restore the relevant desk panel and side panel.
Precautions:

Perform the alignment of Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal of the second
gripper unit in Chapter 15 Alignment.

Perform all alignment items of the dispersion unit in Chapter 15 Alignment, which
include: Dispersion Carousel Position Offset, Reversed Rotary Stop Position
Compensation, Dispense Station Mechanism Vertical, Aspirate Station Vertical Position
Adjustment, and Dispersion Mixing Speed.
Perform the alignment of "Back Aspirate Air for Substrate" and "Air Bubble Detection
Coupler and Weighing Sensor Calibration" of the hydropneumatic unit in Chapter 15
Alignment.
Perform the alignment of "Auto Adjustment of Substrate Aspirating and Dispensing
Coupler Calibration" in Chapter 15 Alignment.

10.12 Replacing Substrate Preheating Assembly

When to do
Replace the substrate preheating assembly when it is damaged or cannot meet the
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.11 Exploded view for installation of the substrate preheating assembly
Substrate
preheating
assembly
115-014447-00
Stainless steel
hexagon screw
M4X16
Dispersion
dispensing plate
Replacing steps
2 Remove the desk panel and side panel shielding the substrate preheating assembly.
3 Use diagonal pliers to cut off the cable tie on the substrate preheating assembly
cables, and unplug the cable connectors from the PCBA.
4 Loosen the two M416 stainless steel hexagon screws on the substrate preheating
assembly, and remove the assembly.

5 Use the two M416 screws to install a new substrate preheating assembly on the
dispersion dispense plate, fix the cables with a cable tie, and insert the cable
connectors.
6 Restore the relevant desk panel and side panel.
Precautions:
Prevent the substrate preheating cable and tube from being damaged.

Perform the alignment of "Back Aspirate Air for Substrate", "Auto Adjustment of Wash
Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler Calibration" and "Auto Adjustment of Substrate
Aspirating and Dispensing Coupler Calibration" of the hydropneumatic unit in Chapter
15 Alignment.
Perform the alignment of "Auto Adjustment of Substrate Aspirating and Dispensing
Coupler Calibration" in Chapter 15 Alignment.
Perform the alignment of "Substrate Preheat Temperature Alignment" of the
temperature control unit in Chapter 15 Alignment.

10.13 Replacing Dispersion Carousel Heater
10.13 Replacing Dispersion Carousel Heater

When to do
Replace the dispersion carousel heater assembly when it fails. The heater resistance in
normal condition is as follows:
Heater type Resistance
220V heater 161.3~178.2
110V heater 40.4~44.6
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
If the dispersion carousel heater is damaged, replace the entire dispersion assembly.
Adjust the position of the dispersion assembly according to the instructions in section
"10.11 Replacing Dispersion Assembly".

10.14 Replacing Dispersion Overheat Protection Switch and Temperature Sensor
10.14 Replacing Dispersion Overheat Protection Switch and

Temperature Sensor
When to do
When to replace the dispersion temperature sensor:
Comparison between temperature and resistance of the dispersion carousel
temperature sensor
Temperature () Resistance () Temperature () Resistance ()

0 1000 25 1095
5 1019 30 1114
10 1038 35 1133
15 1057 37 1140
20 1076 40 1151
When the alarm "Dispersion carousel temperature is out of range." is given and the
sensor resistance is apparently abnormal, replace the
dispersion carousel temperature sensor.
When to replace the dispersion overheat protection switch:
The normal resistance of the temperature protection switch is as follows:
Temperature Resistance
protection switch
KSD301 <1.0
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1

Figure 10.12 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion overheat protection switch
and temperature sensor
Dispersion carousel
cover
Dispersion carousel
body
Dispersion main shaft

Temperature
sensor
009-001882-00
Temperature sensor
press plate
Overheat protection switch
801-BA30-00089-00
Dispersion carousel heater

BA10-21-78143
Holding device of
dispersion carousel heater
Mounting plate
2-carousel coder sensor
assembly
Heat insulation device
84-tooth S5M belt

wheel
28-tooth coder weld
Replacing steps
2 Remove the side panel shielding the overheat protection switch and temperature
sensor.
3 Loosen the two screws on the sensor plate and remove the temperature sensor.
Daub proper thermal paste on the end of the new temperature sensor, insert the
sensor into the dispersion chamber until it cannot proceed, screw it for three circles
to make the thermal paste even, and then use two M38 pan head screws to fix the
sensor plate on the dispersion chamber so as to fix the temperature sensor.
4 Loosen the two screws on the overheat protection switch and remove the overheat
protection switch. Daub proper thermal paste on the new overheat protection
switch, and use two M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring washer to
fix it on the side wall of the dispersion chamber. Connect the reaction carousel
temperature switch cable009-000742-00 to the temperature protection switch,
apply hot melt glue on the joint of the switch and cable to seal the bare connectors.
5 Connect the new overheat protection switch and temperature sensor. Restore the
removed side panel.

Precautions:

Alignment of the dispersion temperature sensor after replacement:
Alignment screen.
3 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment -> Temperature Control Unit -> Sensor
Configuration.
4 Observe the code and number of the dispersion carousel cables, find the dispersion
carousel temperature sensor, and input the rated value R0, R37 and R100 on the left
of the window. (If the value is of K, convert it into .)
5 Select Calculate. If the sensor is qualified, the R0, A and B values are displayed to the
left of the buttons. Click Configure.

6 Click Search to inquire the value of R0, A and B, and check that they are consistent
with the rated values.
7 Open the Carousel Temp Curve window, turn on dispersion carousel temperature
control, and observe if the temperature curve is steady at 37.
8 If not, troubleshoot the error; otherwise, the replacement procedure is complete.
Alignment of the dispersion overheat protection switch after replacement:

Alignment screen.
13 Open the Carousel Temp Curve window, turn on dispersion carousel temperature
control, and observe if the temperature curve is steady at 37.

10.15 Replacing Dispersion Optical Couplers

When to do
Replace the dispersion optical couplers when they are damaged or cannot meet the
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.13 Exploded view for installation of the dispersion optical couplers
Dispense elevating
optical coupler
801-BA80-00051-00
Aspirate elevating
optical coupler
801-BA80-00051-00
Dispersion carousel
cuvette position optical
coupler
801-BA80-00051-00
Zero position optical

coupler
801-BA80-00051-00
Vortex speed
optical coupler
Replacing steps

2 Replacement of the dispense elevating optical coupler: Use a cross screwdriver to

loosen the two combination screws on the dispense elevating optical coupler, fix a
new optical coupler with the two screws, and insert the connector.
Alignment of the dispense elevating optical coupler after replacement: Select
Dispense Station Mechanism Vertical on the Alignment window, and click Continue.
When all components of the dispersion unit finish mechanical resetting, go to the
next step. While referring to the screen prompts, use the up and down arrows to
adjust the dispense station, use a clearance gauge to measure the gap between the
two linear bearings and the stopper on the dispense plate, and ensure that the
minimum gap is between 0~0.1mm. And then finish the following steps of the
alignment procedure.
3 Replacement of the aspirate elevating optical coupler: Remove the panel shielding
the aspirate elevating optical coupler, use the cross screwdriver to loosen the screw
on the optical coupler, install a new one, and insert the connector.
Alignment of the aspirate elevating optical coupler after replacement: Prepare four
clean immunoassay cuvettes. Select Aspirate Station Vertical Position Adjustment
on the Alignment window and click Continue. When all components of the
dispersion unit finish mechanical resetting and a message box pops up reminding
you to place cuvettes, use a mark pen to draw a line on the four aspirate probes
while aligning them with the top of the golden retaining nut. Place the four cuvettes
on the dispersion carousel and click OK. The aspirate station descends, and lifts the
aspirate probes after they contact the bottom of the cuvettes. Place the clearance
gauge against the top of the golden retaining nut, measure the distance between the
lower edge of the marking line on the probes and the top of the clearance gauge,
and check that the A1 probe lifts at least 1mm and the A2/A3 probes lift no less
than 0.5mm. If the requirements are not met, adjust the aspirate station using the
up and down arrows. Take out the four cuvettes according to the screen prompts
and finish the alignment procedure.
4 Replacement of the dispersion carousel cuvette position optical coupler and zero
position optical coupler: Remove the panels shielding the two optical couplers.
Use the cross screwdriver to remove the 2-carousel coder sensor assembly, loosen
the screws on the two optical couplers, install the new optical couplers and the
2-carousel coder sensor assembly. Rotate the coder until the teeth reach the
middle of the sensor, pull the synchronous belt and check if the zero position
stopper interferes with the sensor.
Alignment of the dispersion carousel cuvette position optical coupler and zero
position optical coupler after replacement: Perform the alignment of Dispersion
Carousel Position Offset according to the instructions in Chapter 15 Alignment.
5 Replacement of the rotation speed detection optical coupler: Loosen the two screws
on the rotation speed detection optical coupler, install a new one, and insert its
connector into the relevant groove on the PCBA.
Precautions:

After replacement, check that the optical coupler stopper is in the middle of the sensor.

10.16 Replacing Air Bubble Detection Optical Coupler

When to do
Replace the substrate air bubble detection optical coupler when it is damaged or cannot
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon wrench / 1
Figure 10.14 Exploded view for installation of the air bubble detection optical coupler
Preheating shield Cross countersunk

head screw
M3X6
Substrate
Cross countersunk
preheating module
head screw
115-012051-00
M3X6
Bubble Detection
Optical Coupler
009-002842-00
Substrate preheating
module mounting base
Stainless steel
hexagon screw
M4X16
Replacing steps
2 Remove the entire substrate preheating assembly according to steps 1~4 in section
"10.12 Replacing Substrate Preheating Assembly".
3 Loosen the four M36 cross countersunk head screws on the preheating module
cover, and remove the cover.
4 Loosen the two M36 cross pan head screws on the substrate air bubble detection
optical coupler, and remove the optical coupler.
5 Fix the new optical coupler on the mounting base using the two M36 screws.
6 Lead the preheating module cable and optical coupler cable through the groove on
the mounting base, and press them with the preheating module cover. Arrange the
tubes on the inlet and outlet of the substrate preheating assembly.
7 Install the entire substrate preheating assembly.

Precautions:

Alignment of the substrate preheating module after replacement:
Alignment screen.
Configuration.
4 Observe the code and number of the substrate preheating sensor cables, find the
substrate preheating sensor, and input the rated value R0, R37 and R100 on the left
of the window. (If the value is of K, convert it into .)
5 Perform the alignment of "Back Aspirate Air for Substrate" and "Air Bubble
Detection Coupler and Weighing Sensor Calibration".

8 Open the Substrate Preheat Temperature Curve window, turn on substrate
preheating temperature control, and observe if the temperature curve is steady at
37.


11 Optical Measurement Reaction system
This chapter introduces the optical measurement reaction system from the following
aspects:
Precautions on Use
Measurement principles of the optical measurement reaction system
Parameter setup of the optical measurement reaction system

11.1 Reaction Carousel Mechanics Module

The reaction carousel assembly is situated in the middle of the analyzer, and it consists
of the reaction carousel body assembly, reaction carousel drive assembly, reaction
carousel chamber, reaction carousel sensor assembly, cuvette discarding assembly,
photometer assembly, mixing assembly, and wash well assembly. It holds reaction
cuvettes and rotates to carry them to the specified position for sample/reagent addition,
mixing and washing, in combination with the first gripper, second gripper, sample probe,
and reagent probe. It also provides a constant temperature environment for the reaction
cuvettes, in which sample and reagent react for photometric measurement.
11.1.2 Locations and FRU details

Figure 11.1 Location of reaction carousel assembly
6
1

code
1 115-012000-00 Reaction liquid
mixing assembly
2 041-005842-00 Discarding tube A
3 041-005843-00 Discarding tube B
4 115-011997-00 Reaction carousel
motor pulley
assembly
5 115-011999-00 Wash well assembly


code
6 115-011996-00 Reaction carousel
assembly(220V)
7 801-BA80-00051-00 Correlative optical
coupler (S)
8 801-BA30-00089-00 Overheat protection
switch
9 009-001882-00 Temperature sensor
11.1.3 Replacing Reaction Carousel Assembly and Motor Pulley Assembly

When to do
Replace the reaction carousel assembly or motor pulley assembly when the reaction
carousel cannot move normally or the motor goes wrong.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrench / 1
Screwdriver / 1
Figure 11.2 Exploded view for installation of the reaction carousel assembly and motor
pulley assembly
M5 hexagon
screw
Motor retaining
plate
Motor base
M4 hexagon
screw
Motor pulley
Reaction assembly
carousel support 115-011997-00
post
Replacing steps of reaction carousel assembly

2 Open the back shielding cover and remove the panel over the reaction carousel
assembly.
3 Disconnect all electric cables below the two wash wells, which include fluidic tube,
motor cable, earthing wire, photometer cable, etc.

4 Loosen the four hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers that
fix the reaction carousel assembly to the supporting rods.
5 Remove the reaction carousel assembly.
6 Install a new reaction carousel assembly on the four supporting rods, and fix it with
the four hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers.
7 Connect all electric cables below the two wash wells, which include fluidic tube,
8 Install the removed panel.
Replacing Reaction Carousel Motor Pulley Assembly
assembly.
3 Disconnect all electric cables below the two wash wells, which include fluidic tube,
4 Loosen the four hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers that
fix the reaction carousel assembly to the supporting rods.
5 Remove the reaction carousel assembly.
6 Gently lay down the reaction carousel assembly and avoid contacting the
photometer assembly.
7 Loosen the four M5 screws with spring and flat washers on the motor plate.
8 Take out the motor base assembly, and loosen the four M4 screws with spring and
flat washers on it.
9 Remove the motor assembly and install a new one.
10 Install the motor base assembly, reaction carousel assembly and other parts
according to the steps above in the reversed order.
The following alignment is required: Reaction carousel unit alignment, Reaction
Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment for first gripper,
horizontal position on reaction carousel's outer/middle/inner rings alignment for
second gripper, Reagent Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home alignment, Horizontal and
vertical Reagent Dispense Position on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer rings
alignment, Sample Probe Dispense,Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal,
Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal, Sample Probe Wash Position
Horizontal and vertical alignment and Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2 Alignment.
11.1.4 Replace the wire of home position sensor and coder sensor of
reaction carousel
When to do
If the sensor of the reaction carousel failed, replace the wire of home position sensor
or coder sensor
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Hexagon wrenches / 1
Screwdriver / 1

Rubber gloves for / 1 pair

medical use
Figure 11.3 Exploded view of Wire Replacement of Home Position Sensor and Coder
Sensor of Reaction Carousel
Cable of the reaction carousel code disk sensor Sensor bracket
801-BA80-00051-00
Hexagon socket cap

head M3X8
Cross pan head screw

M3X6
Cable of home position sensor

801-BA10-00097-00
Replacing steps
2 Unscrew the 10M4X8cross pan head combination screws on the right rear panel
and remove the right rear panel.
3 Unscrew the 3 M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with spring and flat washers
on the reaction carousel sensor assembly, remove the sensor assembly and avoid
dropping the screws into the analyzer.
4 Unscrew the 2 M36 cross pan head screws retaining the home position sensor and
coder sensor, and then remove the sensors.
5 Fix the new sensors on the sensor bracket using 2 M36 cross pan head screws.
6 Fix the sensor assembly on the chassis using 3 M38 hexagon socket cap head
screws with spring and flat washers.
7 After alignment and confirmation of the sensor assembly, fix the right rear panel to
the framework using 10 M48 cross pan head combination screws.
The following alignment is required: Reaction carousel unit alignment, Reaction
Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment for first gripper,
horizontal position on reaction carousel's outer/middle/inner rings alignment for
second gripper, Reagent Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home alignment, Horizontal and
vertical Reagent Dispense Position on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer rings
alignment, Sample Probe Dispense,Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal,
Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal, Sample Probe Wash Position
Horizontal and vertical alignment and Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2 Alignment.

11.1.5 Replace Discarding tube A and Discarding tube B

When to do
When the cuvette is stuck in the discarding tube and cannot be removed, replace the
discarding tube.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Screwdriver / 1
Figure 11.4 Exploded view of the Discarding tube A and Discarding tube B
Sampling
fixing plate
Tube connector
Discarding tube
A
041-005842-00
Discarding tube
B
041-005843-00
M4 screw
Lower plastic
tube
Replacing steps
2 Remove the cover in the discarding cuvette position and the cover in front of the
waste container.
3 Unscrew the two M3 screws on the fixing board for sample dispensing and remove
the board.
4 Unscrew M4 screw of the lower plastic tube and remove the cuvette discarding tube
assembly.
5 Unscrew 2 M3 screws of the plastic tube and remove the cuvette discarding tube.

6 Replace the cuvette discarding tube and connect it to the connector. Use 2 M3
screws to tighten it.
7 Install the cuvette discarding tube assembly into the connector and use M4 screw to
tighten it.
8 Sleeve the fixing board for sample dispensing onto the discarding tube and use
two M3 screw to fix it onto the support post.
9 Install the cover in the discarding cuvette position and the cover in front of the
waste container.
Sample Probe Test#1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal, Horizontal Discarding Position
#1/#2 Alignment. Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal.
11.1.6 Replacement of Wash Well

When to do
When the wash well is clogged and cannot be unclogged or the wash well is broken.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Knife / 1
Screwdriver / 1
Figure 11.5 Exploded view for installation of Wash Well
Wash well
assembly
115-011999-00
M4 screw
Reaction carousel
bottom plate
Replacing steps
2 Loosen the cover above the wash well.
3 Unscrew the 3 M4 screws used to fix the wash well assembly onto the bottom plate
of the reaction carousel.
4 Use knife to cut the tube on the connector of the wash well assembly. Take caution
not to hurt your hand.
5 Remove the wash well assembly and replace it.

6 Connect the tube onto the connector of the wash well assembly and the tube should
be inserted to the bottom of the connector.
7 Use 3 M4 screws to fix the wash well assembly onto the bottom plate of the
reaction carousel.
8 Install the cover above the wash well.
Sample Probe or Reagent Probe Rotary to Wash Well and Home
11.1.7 Replacement of reaction liquid mixing assembly

When to do
When the reaction liquid mixing assembly failed or is damaged.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Cutting pliers / 1
Screwdriver / 1
Figure 11.6 Exploded view of the installation of liquid mixing assembly
M4X12 screw
Reaction liquid
mixing motor and Cable of
belt wheel correlative optical
assembly coupler
115-012009-00 009-002204-00
Sensor bracket
M3X8screw
Replacement steps for reaction liquid mixing assembly

assembly.
3 Unplug the wire of reaction liquid mixing motor and the optical coupler.
4 Use the cutting pliers to cut the strap on the bracket of the substrate tube. Take
caution not to cut the wire.
5 Unscrew the 4 M4 screws to remove the reaction liquid mixing assembly. Take
caution not to drop the screws into the analyzer.
6 Replace the reaction liquid mixing assembly and tighten the 4 M4 screws.

7 Reconnect the wire of the motor and the optical coupler.

Second gripper moving to mixing position
11.1.8 Replacement of the correlation optical coupler wire of the mixing

assembly
When to do
When the sensor of reaction liquid mixing assembly failed.
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Screwdriver / 1
Figure 11.7 Exploded view of the correlation optical coupler wire of the mixing
assembly
Sensor bracket
Cable of correlative
optical coupler
801-BA80-00051-00
Replacement steps for the correlation optical coupler wire

assembly.
3 Unplug the wire of the optical coupler of reaction liquid mixing assembly.
4 Unscrew the M3 screw used to fix the sensor bracket onto the bottom plate of the
mixing assembly and remove the sensor bracket.
5 Unscrew the M3 screw on the optical coupler and remove it.
6 Replace the optical coupler with a new one and use 1 M3 screw to fix it onto the
sensor bracket.

7 Use 1 M3 screw to fix the sensor bracket onto the bottom plate of the mixing
assembly.
8 Reconnect the wire of the optical coupler.
N/A

11.2 Pyrology module of the reaction carousel

The module includes reaction carousel heater, temperature sensor and overheat
protection switch. When heater failed, the whole reaction carousel needs to be replaced.

Figure 11.8 Location of reaction carousel pyrology assembly
Temperature
sensor
009-001882-00
Sensor plate
Overheat
protection switch
801-BA30-
00089-00

No. FRU code and Material name
material code
1 009-001882-00 Temperature
sensor
2 801-BA30-00089-00 Overheat
protection
switch
11.2.3 Replacement of temperature sensor of the reaction carousel

When to do
The reaction carousel temperature sensor should be replaced if an alarm is given
indicating that the reaction temperature is beyond range and the sensor resistance is
obviously abnormal.
Table 11.3 Comparison between temperature and resistance of reaction carousel
temperature sensor

0 1000 25 1095
5 1019 30 1114


10 1038 35 1133
15 1057 37 1140
20 1076 40 1151
Tools
Name Code Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon / 1
wrenches
Replacing steps
2 Remove the side panel shielding the overheat protection
switch(801-BA30-00089-00) and temperature sensor(009-001882-00).
3 Loosen the two screws on the sensor plate and remove the temperature
sensor(009-001882-00). Daub proper thermal paste on the end of the new
temperature sensor, insert the sensor into the reaction chamber until it cannot
proceed, screw it for three circles to make the thermal paste even, and then use two
M38 pan head screws to fix the sensor plate on the reaction chamber so as to fix
the temperature sensor. Moment of force:4~5kgf.cm.
4 Connect the wire of new temperature sensor (009-001882-00).
5 Restore the removed side panel.
Alignment screen.
Configuration.
4 Observe the code and number of the reaction carousel cables, find the reaction
carousel temperature sensor(in the accessory bag), and input the rated value R0,
R37 and R100 on the left of the window. (If the value is of K, convert it into .)

7 Open the Reaction Carousel Temp Curve window, turn on temperature control, and
observe if the temperature curve is steady at 37.
11.2.4 Replacement of reaction carousel overheat protection switch

When to do
When the overheat protection switch of the reaction carousel failed. The normal
resistance of the temperature protection switch is as follows:
Temperature Resistance
protection switch
KSD301 <1.0
Tools
Name Code Quantity

Diagonal pliers / 1
Hexagon / 1
wrenches
Replacing steps


2 Remove the side panel shielding the overheat protection
switch(801-BA30-00089-00) and temperature sensor(009-001882-00).
3 Loosen the two screws on the overheat protection switch (801-BA30-00089-00)and
remove the overheat protection switch(801-BA30-00089-00). Daub proper
amount of thermal paste on the new overheat protection switch
(801-BA30-00089-00).Use t two M38 hexagon socket cap head screws with
spring washer to fix it on the side wall of the reaction chamber. Moment of force:
8~11kgf.cm.
4 Connect the new overheat protection switch (801-BA30-00089-00).
5 Restore the removed side panel.
Alignment screen.
3 Open the Reaction Carousel Temp Curve window, turn on temperature control, and
observe if the temperature curve is steady at 37.

11.3 Photometric measurement module

In chemiluminescence analysis, the light intensity of the reaction liquid of the sample
is tested to measure the content in the sample.
The photometric measurement module is used to measure the light intensity of the
reaction liquid. The photometric measurement module mainly consists of photon
counting module and reference module. Its principle of work as shown in the following
figure.
Figure 11.9 The principle of work of the photon counting photometer
Photon counting cuvette

module Parallel flat
plate
PMT assembly Lense
Reference LED
module
Parallel flat
plate Photodiode.
The photon counting module detects light intensity of the liquid to be measure, and
calculates the analyte concentration by calculation curve.
The reference module provides steady light output for calibration of the photon counting
module.


Figure 11.10 Component location picture
Photometer
assembly

No. FRU code and Material name
material code
1 115-012018-00 Photometer
assembly
2 115-012025-00 LED assembly
11.3.3 Replacing photometer assembly

When to do
If the system gives the following error messages and after check, it is found that the
photometer assembly failed or has low performance, the photometer needs replacing.
Dark current count is out of range.
Photometer fluctuates too much.
The photometer cannot be turned on.
Tools
M4 hexagon wrench, cross screwdriver, new photometer assembly

Figure 11.11 Exploded view for installation of the photometer assembly
Photometer
assembly
115-012018-00
Reaction carousel
assembly M4X16
115-011996-00
Replacing steps
assembly.
3 Remove the three M4*16 hexagon socket screws used to fix the photometer.
4 Remove the photometer cautiously from the side wall the heat chamber.
5 Install the new photometer in the reverse order of the above steps.
Precautions:
After removing the photometer assembly, place it in a package, and then bring the
package back or mail it to our company for repairing.
After removing the photometer, do not touch the lens with your hands. In case of
touching ,use dust free cloth to wipe the lens clean.
Protect the lens of the photometer from facing strong light; when the device is powered
on, avoid exposing the lens outside.
1 Enter the alignment -reaction carousel and select 1 Photometer Configuration and
the following window pops up. Input the alignment parameters (accompanied
with the PMT module). Select OK and close the window. Note: the assembly data are
matched in pair, do not input wrongly.

Figure 11.12 Photometer configuration window
2 Select Utility-Maintenance-Parameters to enter parameter configuration window.

Select Reaction carousel unit and click search. Check if the PMT high voltage DA,
photon counting linear calibration factor and LED initial DA are correct.
3 Enter alignment screen. Select reaction carousel unit and then select Photometer
Home. The following window pops up.

Figure 11.13 Photometer initialization window
4 All chemistries need recalibration.
11.3.4 Replacing LED assembly

When to do
If the power supply is normal but LED cannot be turned on, the LED assembly needs
replacement.
If the LED wire is broken, change the LED assembly.
Tools
cross screwdriver, new LED light assembly
Replacing steps
1 Remove the photometer assembly.
2 Remove the two M3X8 screws used to fix the LED.
3 Remove the four M3X6screws on the upper cover of the photon counting board.
4 Remove the LED assembly and remove the other end from the slot of the photon
counting board.
5 Install the new LED assembly in the reverse order of the above steps.
6 Install the LED assembly and tighten the screws.

Figure 11.14 Replacing LED assembly
Photometer assembly
115-012018-00
LED assembly
115-012025-00
M3X6
M3X8
Photon counting
board.042-004672-0
0
Precautions:
After removing the photometer assembly, place it in a package, and then bring the
package back or mail it to our company for repairing.
After removing the photometer, do not touch the lens with your hands. In case of
touching ,use dust free cloth to wipe the lens clean.
Protect the lens of the photometer from facing strong light; when the device is
powered on, avoid exposing the lens outside.
After removing the LED assembly, do not touch the lens with your hands. In case
of touching ,use dust free cloth to wipe the lens clean.
After installation, fix the wire with the wire clip.
Enter alignment screen. Select reaction carousel unit and then select Photometer Home.
Select Initialize, the alignment starts automatically and the alignment results are
displayed.

Figure 11.15 Photometer initialization window
All chemistries need recalibration.


12 Software
This chapter provides instructions of installing, upgrading and removing of the

CL-2000i/CL-2200i operating software. The operating instructions are excluded here
and can be found in the Operator's Manual.

12 Software
12.1 Software Installation

12.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package
The installation package of the operating software contains three folders: Setup,
SetupGuide, and Thirdparty.
Figure 12.1 Folders in operating software installation package
Setup folder: includes the operating software installation file setup.exe and the KillBsLog
tool that can end the Bslog service.
Figure 12.2 Setup folder
SetupGuide folder: includes software installation guide and upgrading guide.

12 Software
Thirdparty folder: includes dotnetfx and SQLExp installation packages. The former
contains the installation program of Microsoft .net Framework and is the running
environment assembly of SQL; while the latter is database software.
12.1.2 System check before the complete installation

Step 1: Check PCs serial port
The serial ports used for the analyzer and SDM are COM4 and COM3. Make sure the
correct serial ports are used.
Step 2: Check the user accounts
Make sure the Administrator account is not disabled.
Operating procedure: Desktop Right click Computer and choose Manage System
Tools Local Users and Groups Users choose Administrator and right click to
view properties. See Figure 12.3 .
Figure 12.3 View properties of Administrator account
Check whether there is a password set up for the administrator account .

There should be no password set up for the administrator account by default. If there
has been a password, clear it as the following steps:
Click the Start icon of the task bar > Control Panel > Family Safety > Manage
another account > Administrator > Create a password. See Figure 12.4 .

12 Software
Figure 12.4 Figure Change password of Administrator account
Shift to Administrator account

Ensure that all accounts except for Administrator are disabled, as shown in Figure 12.5 .
Figure 12.5 Disable other accounts
Step 3 Set the screen resolution as 1280*1024

Procedure:
Select Start > Control Panel > Appearance and Personalization > Display >
Adjust resolution > 1280*1024 > OK. See Figure 12.6 .

12 Software
Figure 12.6 Change screen resolution
Step 4: Close Desktop Window Manager Session Manager

Procedure:
Desktop> Select Computer and right click > Manage> Services and Applications
> Services> Desktop Window Manager Session Manager>Right click>Stop
Desktop> Select Computer and right click > Manage> Services and Applications
> Services> Desktop Window Manager Session Manager>right click and select
Properties>Select Disabled for Startup type, as shown in Figure 12.7 .
Figure 12.7 Close Desktop Window Manager Session Manager

12 Software
Step 5 Make sure no SQL2005 and SQL2008 have been installed in the system.
Procedure:
Select Start > Control Panel > Programs> Programs and Features.
The database that the operating software supports is SQL2008 R2. If other versions like
SQL2005 and SQL2008 have been installed, please reinstall them.
Step 7: Reboot the computer
To avoid the above mentioned configuration affecting the installation process, you must
reboot your computer and then perform the following procedures.
12.1.3 Steps for installation of operating software

Step 1: Run setup.exe in the Setup folder.
Step 2: Click next to enter the installation screen. Click next in figure Figure 12.8 to
move to the next step.
Figure 12.8 Installation screen
Step3 :The screen shows as Figure 12.9 . Wait until the third party application is
installed. The computer will be rebooted automatically after the installation.

12 Software
Figure 12.9 Wait for installation of third party software
Step 4: Select operating software installation directory

Specify the installation directory as shown in Figure 12.10 , and select Next.
Figure 12.10 Select operating software installation directory
Step 4: Choose a language, and then select Next.

As shown in Figure 12.11 , choose a language and select Next.

12 Software
Figure 12.11 Choose a language
Step 5: Select Finish.

Select Finish on the screen as shown in Figure 12.12 .
Figure 12.12 Installation is complete
Note: After the installation is complete, the operating software runs automatically. The
default serial port connecting the analyzer is COM2. If the software can not be run due
to the serial port configuration, please refer to Step 7 to change the serial port.
Step 6: Check the installation.
On the Customize Regional Options window, ensure that the decimal point "." has been
chosen in the Decimal symbol pull-down list box. See Figure 12.13 and Figure 12.14 .

12 Software
Note: Customize Regional Options should be configured according to the actual

conditions of the country in which the analyzer is used. For example, the decimal point in
Spain is "," so "," should be set as the decimal point in this country.
Figure 12.13 Special character setting 1

12 Software
Figure 12.14 Special character setting 2
Step 7: Confirm the configuration file.

Note:
1. The configuration file is located in the installation directory by default. If the path has
been changed during software installation, find the configuration file in the new
directory.
2. The serial port in the configuration file should be set as the one used by the
instrument. The default serial port is COM3 for SDM and COM4 for instrument.
Step 1: Open the configuration file COMMUNICATION_USE.INI in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\CL2000i\OperationSoft\COMMUNICATION_USE.INI
Step 2: Check if the configurations in the COMMUNICATION_USE.INI file are the same
with the following examples. If they are different, change them according to relevant
instructions.
[INSTRUMENTS]
HasTestInstrumentsNum=1

12 Software
HasSDM=1
IsUseInstrument1=1
IsUseInstrument2=1
IsUseInstrument3=1
IsUseInstrument4=1
NameOfInstrument1 = CL2000
NameOfInstrument2 = BS2000
[SAMPRACK_COMM_USE]
SAMPRACK_COMM_TYPE=SERIALPORT
SAMPRACK_COMM_NAME=COM3
[BAUDRATE_SEC]
Baudrate=115200
[Demo]
ComPort=COM3
Step 3: Open the configuration file InstrServerConfig.ini in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\CL2000i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\ InstrServerConfig.ini
Step 4: Check if the configurations in the InstrServerConfig.ini file are the same with the
following examples. If they are different, change them according to relevant instructions.
[INSTR]
INSTRNO=1
SERVER_IP=127.0.0.1
SERVER_PORT=7001
CLIENT_IP=127.0.0.1
CLIENT_PORT=8001
[SERIALPORT]
COMPORT=COM4
BAUDRATE=115200

12 Software
12.2 Software Upgrading

12.2.1 Operating software upgrading
Step 1: Check that relevant processes have been ended.
Open task manager. Right click the blank area of the task bar, select Task Manager, and
select the Processes tab. See Figure 12.15 .
Figure 12.15 Access the Windows Task Manager window.
Check relevant processes of the CL-2000i have been ended. If not, select the process
and click End Task. See Figure 12.16 and Figure 12.17 .
The processes include:
BS800.exe,BsLog.exe,BsLog_1.exe,Instrument.exe .
Figure 12.16 View processes in task manager

12 Software
Figure 12.17 End processes in task manager
Step 2: Install the new operating software.

In the operating software installation package, select setup.exe to display the screen in
Figure 12.18 , and then select Next.
Figure 12.18 Installation screen
When the installation is complete, select Finish as in Figure 12.19 .

12 Software
Figure 12.19 Installation is complete
Note: When the upgrade is complete, a Program Compatibility Assistant window pops
up.Just ignore the dialog box.
Step 3: Confirm the configuration file.
Note:
1. The configuration file is located in the installation directory by default. If the path has
been changed during software installation, find the configuration file in the new
directory.
2. The serial port in the configuration file should be set as the one used by the
instrument. The default serial port is COM3 for SDM and COM4 for instrument.
Step 1: Open the configuration file COMMUNICATION_USE.INI in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\CL2000i\OperationSoft\COMMUNICATION_USE.INI
Step 2: Check if the configurations in the COMMUNICATION_USE.INI file are the same
with the following examples. If they are different, change them according to relevant
instructions.
[INSTRUMENTS]
HasTestInstrumentsNum=1
HasSDM=1
IsUseInstrument1=1
IsUseInstrument2=1
IsUseInstrument3=1
IsUseInstrument4=1
NameOfInstrument1 = CL2000

12 Software
[SAMPRACK_COMM_USE]
SAMPRACK_COMM_TYPE=SERIALPORT
SAMPRACK_COMM_NAME=COM3
[BAUDRATE_SEC]
Baudrate=115200
[Demo]
ComPort=COM3
Step 3: Open the configuration file InstrServerConfig.ini in the default directory:
D:\Mindray\CL2000i\OperationSoft\Instrument_1\ InstrServerConfig.ini
Step 4: Check if the configurations in the InstrServerConfig.ini file are the same with the
following examples. If they are different, change them according to relevant instructions.
[INSTR]
INSTRNO=1
SERVER_IP=127.0.0.1
SERVER_PORT=7001
CLIENT_IP=127.0.0.1
CLIENT_PORT=8001
[SERIALPORT]
COMPORT=COM4
BAUDRATE=115200
12.2.2 Upgrading Control Software of Analyzer

Step 1: Back up system parameters
Run the operating software. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Parameters , select a unit
from the drop down list of "Non-Motion Para" to inquire parameters, and then click Save.
Repeat this step for other units. as shown in figure Figure 12.20 (Note: You can
perform this operation only after logging on the system with the R&D, manufacturing or
service user account.)

12 Software
Figure 12.20 Inquire and save unit parameters of the control software
Step 2: Upgrade the operating software

Refer to 12.1 Installation to install or upgrade the operating software. If the operating
software has been installed or upgraded, go to step 3.
Step 3: Open upgrading tool, set up serial port, and select upgrading package
Open the upgrading tool and select CL-2000i Analysis as shown in the following figure.
On the upgrading screen, select COM4 and select the upgrading package as shown in
Figure 12.22 .
Figure 12.21 Select Upgrade Control Software of Analyzer

12 Software
Figure 12.22 Select serial port and software installation package
Notes:
The upgrading tool is in the UpgradeTool folder of the software installation directory.
The default directory is:
D:\Mindray\CL2000i\UpgradeTool\UpgradeEntry.exe. Please find the upgrading tool
according to the actual installation condition.
The default serial port for analyzer is COM4. Choose one according to the actual
connection.
The control software upgrading package is in the UpgradePackage folder under
UpgradeTool. The default directory
is:D:\Mindray\CL2000i\UpgradeTool\UpgradePackage\CL2000i
Step 4: Power off the instrument and power on it again
Turn off the main power switch on the rear panel of the SDM, which is marked with
"MAIN". After 10 seconds, turn on the main power switch, and the analyzing unit power
switch labeled as ANL.
Step 5: Start upgrading the control software
After step 4, the instrument starts connecting with the console. When connection
succeeds, the Download button is enlightened.
Select Download to start upgrading the control software as shown in Figure 12.23 .

12 Software
Figure 12.23 Select Download to start upgrading
During the upgrading process, the upgrading progress of the main control unit,
lower-layer unit, control drive board, and lower lower-layer unit as shown in Figure
12.24 .

12 Software
Figure 12.24 Upgrading progress of analyzer
When the upgrading is complete, select Exit. See Figure 12.25 .

12 Software
Figure 12.25 Upgrading Control Software of Analyzer is completed.

Power off the instrument, and power on it again after 10 seconds.
Step 7: Reboot the computer to run the operating software
If you want to upgrade the SDM control software, refer to section 2.3. If the upgrading
has been done, reboot the computer. The operating software runs automatically.
12.2.3 Upgrading Control Software of SDM

Step 1: Back up system parameters of SDM
Run the operating software. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Parameters , inquire SDM
parameters; select a unit from the drop down list of "Non-Motion Para" to inquire
parameters, and then click Save. Repeat this step for other units. as shown in figure
Figure 12.26 (Note: You can perform this operation only after logging on the system
with the R&D, manufacturing or service user account.)

12 Software
Figure 12.26 Inquire and save unit parameters of SDM
Step 2: Upgrade the operating software

Refer to 12.1 Installation to install or upgrade the operating software.
Step 3: Open upgrading tool, set up serial port, and select upgrading package. Open the
upgrading tool and select CL-2000i Analysis as shown inFigure 12.27 On the upgrading
screen, select COM3 and select the upgrading package as shown in Figure 12.28 . Select
M1 according to Figure 12.29 .
Figure 12.27 Select CL2000i-SDM

12 Software
Figure 12.28 Select serial port and SDM control installation package
Figure 12.29 Select SDM
Notes:
The upgrading tool is in the UpgradeTool folder of the software installation directory.
The default directory is:
D:\Mindray\CL2000i\UpgradeTool\UpgradeEntry.exe. Please find the upgrading tool
according to the actual installation condition.
The default serial port for SDM is COM3. Choose one according to the actual connection.
The control software upgrading package is in the UpgradePackage folder under
UpgradeTool. The default directory
is:D:\Mindray\CL2000i\UpgradeTool\UpgradePackage\SDM

12 Software
Turn off the main power switch on the rear panel of the SDM, which is marked with
"MAIN". After 10 seconds, turn on the main power switch, and the analyzing unit power
switch labeled as SDM.
Step 5: Start upgrading the control software
After step 4, the instrument starts connecting with the console. When connection
succeeds, the Download button is enlightened. Select Download to start upgrading the
control software as shown in Figure
Figure 12.30 Select Download to start upgrading
During the upgrading process, the upgrading progress of the main control unit,
lower-layer unit, control drive board, and lower lower-layer unit as shown in Figure
12.31 .

12 Software
Figure 12.31 Upgrading progress of SDM
When the upgrading is complete, select Exit. See Figure 12.32 .

Figure 12.32 Upgrading Control Software of SDM is completed.

12 Software

Power off the instrument, and power on it again after 10 seconds.
Step 7: Reboot the computer to run the operating software
If the upgrading has been done, reboot the computer. The operating software runs
automatically.

12 Software
12.3 Software description

12.3.1 Folder Structure
The default installation path of the operating software is: D:\mindray\CL2000.
After installation, the folder structure is like the following:
Figure 12.33 Folder structure after installation
The OperationSoft folder is relatively important and expanded as follows:

12 Software
Figure 12.34 OperationSoft folder
The following folders should be paid much attention to:

AlarmFile: stores alarm log messages.
BS-800LOG: contains SDM logs.
Database: database file, which contains all parameters, test results, calibration and QC
data, etc.
ExceptionLog: records address segment for error analysis when the software collapses
abnormally. (Note: There are two ExceptLog files, and the other one is in Instrument_1
folder.)
HELP: online help .chm file.
Instrument_1Analyzer program and log file.
Item: Mindray's chemistry parameter file.
LOG: records software upgrading information. (last upgrading information record)
Logs: RMS (Remote Management System) logs. Not used temporarily.
BS-800.exeCL2000i program file
12.3.2 Log Files

The BsLog process records in real-time mode the communication and action information
of the software and analyzer, which includes but not limited to the following:
Keyboard input
Error log, operation log and maintenance log of the software
Communication instructions between the PC and analyzer
Communication instructions between the PC and analyzer

12 Software
Floater and optical coupler statuses of the analyzer (real-time)

Pump and valve powering statuses of the analyzer (real-time)

Separate log files are produced every day and stored in the following addresses:
BS800LOG folder in D:\mindray\CL2000\OperationSoft
Instrument LOG folder in D:\mindray\CL2000\OperationSoft\Instrument_1
InstrumentLOG folder structure is shown below:
Figure 12.35 InstrumentLOG log file
The following folders should be paid much attention to:

CtrlSysLog:Control software log
Lislog: LIS communication data.

12 Software
12.3.3 Software Running

12.3.4 Auto Startup
Normally, the operating software runs automatically once the Windows system is started
up. If you need to disable this function for special purpose, you may change the startup
settings of the computer.
Switch to the desktop using the service user account, click the Windows button on the
lower-left corner, and enter "msconfig" in the Running field. The screen is shown as
follows:
Press Enter. The System Configuration Utility dialog box pops up. Select Startup.
Figure 12.36 System configuration window
Deselect the checkbox to the left of "CL2000i" to disable auto startup of the operating
software.

12 Software
Figure 12.37 Configure startup options
To restore auto startup, repeat steps 1 to 3 and select the "CL2000i" checkbox.
BsLog: a service run automatically when the operating software is started up, and used
to record the logs of the software. When started up, the software checks if the service is
started, and if it is not started, gives an alarm and fails in startup. When logging on the
software, you are allowed to end this process, and this action will not be recorded in the
logs.
12.3.5 Software Running Parameters

Select Start. You can see CL-2000i program, right click CL2000i icon and select property.
Figure 12.38 Modify shortcut property

12 Software
The Properties dialog box pops up. Change the properties in the Target field by adding
"space + running parameters" behind ".exe". See the figure below:
Figure 12.39 Configure software running parameters
The frequently-used parameters include:

-demo: running the software in demo mode. In this mode, the software can enter
Standby status without connecting the analyzer, and can finish all operations when
logged on with the R&D user account and analog tool. The R&D user account is dynamic
and can be retrieved from TS when needed.
-option: whether to execute Home (initialization) command during startup process.
Select nohome to quickly skip the startup process and enter the Stopped status.
-force login: logging on compulsively. It can be used in event that the computer has
memory less than 1.5G.
-1280: canceling the screen resolution limit of 1280X1024. The software can be run with
the resolution of 1024X768.
-no shutdown: not performing the Windows shutdown procedure when exiting the
software.
12.3.6 Normal Startup Procedure

The normal startup procedure of the operating software is as follows:
1. The system checks if the Bslog process has been started automatically. If not, the
Bslog.exe program is run.
2. Sqlserver is started, and it will exit if an error indicating database initialization failed
occurs.

12 Software
3. The software process is started.

4. User enters the username and password: "ServiceUser" and "#BS8A#SEU".
5. The software shakes hands with the middle-/lower-layer units. If handshake fails, an
alarm is given prompting the unit is abnormal.
6. The Home procedure is performed.

12 Software
12.4 Software Uninstallation
12.4 Software Uninstallation

12.4.1 Removing CL-2000i software
End the BSlog process by using the KillBslog tool in the installation package.
Find the BS-2000 program in Control Panel and perform the uninstallation procedure.
12.4.2 Uninstalling SQL Database

1. Uninstall SQL Server.
2.Delete the Microsoft SQL Server folder produced during installation, run the "Regedit",
and delete theHKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server and
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Microsoft SQL Server.
3. Click Start -> Run, and enter "regedit". Find the "PendingFileRenameOperations"
folder in "HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\Session
Manager" and delete all data in the folder.
Figure 12.40 delete a database

12 Software
12.5 Comparison of User Permissions

There are five user groups, which are from low to high: operator, administrator, service
engineer, product line and R&D. Administrator and operator belong to outside account
and the permissions of the operator can be set by the administrator. Engineer, product
personnel and R&D account belong to inside account.
The permissions of each user group are listed in the table below:
Table 12.1 Comparison of user permissions
Permissions User Administrator Superstar
Sample test
Calibration and QC
Permission
adjustment
Edit results
Edit chemistry configurable
parameters
Import/export data configurable
Customize configurable
maintenance items
Change parts configurable
Delete log configurable
Analyzer configurable
configuration
Factory setup
Parameter query
Parameter
configuration
Note:
Administrator cannot view the current of the coolers while the engineer account or
above can.

12 Software
Figure 12.41 The comparison of the permissions of the administrator and the engineer
Figure 12.42 The comparison of the permissions of the administrator and the engineer

12 Software

CL-2000i/CL-2200i Chemiluminescence
Immunoassay Analyzer
Service Manual
Volume II
Intellectual Property Statement............................................................................................................................................ ii

Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ...................................................................................................................... iii
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................................................................ iv
Exemptions..................................................................................................................................................................... iv
Return Policy ................................................................................................................................................................................. v
Return Procedure ......................................................................................................................................................... v
Company Contact.......................................................................................................................................................... v
Preface 1
Safety Information 2
Safety Symbols.............................................................................................................................................................................. 3
Summary of Hazards.................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................... 4
Electric Shock Hazards ............................................................................................................................................... 4
Moving Parts Hazards ................................................................................................................................................. 4
Laser Hazards................................................................................................................................................................. 4
Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards ............................................................................................................ 5
Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards.................................................................................................................... 5
Environmental Biohazards -- Liquid Waste Disposal.................................................................................... 5
Environmental Biohazards -- Instrument Disposal ....................................................................................... 5
Fire and Explosion Hazards ..................................................................................................................................... 5
Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal.................................................................................. 6
Precautions on Use ..................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Introduction .................................................................................................................................................................... 7
Environment Precautions ......................................................................................................................................... 7
Installation Precautions ............................................................................................................................................. 7
Electromagnetic Noise Precautions ...................................................................................................................... 7
Operating Precautions ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Maintenance and Servicing Precautions............................................................................................................. 8
Sample Precautions ..................................................................................................................................................... 9
Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions ............................................................................................... 9
Sample Handling System ........................................................................................................................................... 9
Data Archiving Precautions ....................................................................................................................................10
External Equipment Precautions .........................................................................................................................10
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer I

External vacuum pump Module Precautions ..............................................................................................10

Tube and Liquid Container Precautions ...........................................................................................................10
Instrument Labels and Silkscreen ......................................................................................................................................11
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................11
Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen ..................................................................................................................11
1 System Description 1-1
1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

1.2 Principles of Measurement .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.2 One-step Method ........................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.3 Two-step Method........................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Components of Analyzer............................................................................................................................................... 1-6
1.3.2 Functions of the System .............................................................................................................................. 1-7
1.4 Components of Rack Feeder System ..................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.5 Functions of Rack Feeder System .......................................................................................................................... 1-11
1.6 Requirements on External Devices ....................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.6.1 Operation Unit ............................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.6.2 Display Monitor........................................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.6.3 Printer ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-13
1.6.4 Power Supply Equipment ....................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.7 Technical Specifications ............................................................................................................................................. 1-14
1.7.1 Common Specifications............................................................................................................................ 1-14
1.7.2 Sample Specifications ............................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.7.3 Reagent Specifications ............................................................................................................................. 1-16
1.7.4 Specifications of Reaction System ....................................................................................................... 1-17
1.7.5 Specifications of Operation Unit .......................................................................................................... 1-18
1.8 System Structure ........................................................................................................................................................... 1-19
1.8.1 System Structure......................................................................................................................................... 1-19
2 Test Procedure 2-1
2.1 Test Procedure .................................................................................................................................................................. 2-2

2.2 Working Mode ................................................................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.3 Startup Procedure ........................................................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.4 Shutdown Procedure ...................................................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.5 Abnormity Handling Procedure ................................................................................................................................ 2-8
2.6 Emergency Stop Procedure ......................................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.7 Before Test ....................................................................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.8 After Test .......................................................................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.9 Mechanical Reset .......................................................................................................................................................... 2-12
2.10 System Reset ................................................................................................................................................................ 2-13
3 Installation Guide 3-1
3.1 Installation Environment ............................................................................................................................................. 3-2
II CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

3.1.1 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Unpacking ................................................................... 3-2

3.1.2 Space and Accessibility Requirements for Installation ................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 Power Supply and Noise ............................................................................................................................. 3-3
3.1.4 Drainage Check (if draining water through a sewer) ..................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Configuration Check ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Tools ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Installation Procedure ................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.1 Unpacking ......................................................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.4.2 Interconnection ........................................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.4.3 Installing Peristaltic Pump Tube.......................................................................................................... 3-19
3.4.4 Removing Retaining Screws on the Reagent Carousel ............................................................... 3-23
3.4.5 Installing Probes ......................................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.4.6 Installing Handle of the Wash Buffer Drawer ................................................................................. 3-27
3.4.7 Fluidic Connection ..................................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.4.8 Connection of PC ......................................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.5 Preparation...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-35
3.6 First Startup .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-36
3.7 Fluidic Prime................................................................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.1 Check before Fluidic Prime .................................................................................................................... 3-38
3.7.2 Fluidic Prime ................................................................................................................................................ 3-39
3.8 Position Confirmation and Alignment ................................................................................................................. 3-49
3.9 Setup................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.9.1 Initialize Maintenance Logs ................................................................................................................... 3-52
3.9.2 Loading Special Reagents........................................................................................................................ 3-52
3.9.3 Importing and Configuring Chemistry Parameters ..................................................................... 3-53
3.10 DCF Check...................................................................................................................................................................... 3-57
3.11 System Check ............................................................................................................................................................... 3-58
3.12 Other Tests .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.12.1 Repeatability Test .................................................................................................................................... 3-62
3.13 Result Records ............................................................................................................................................................. 3-63
3.14 Returning Logs ............................................................................................................................................................ 3-64
4 Emptying and Packing4-1
4.1 Emptying Procedure ....................................................................................................................................................... 4-2

4.1.1 Emptying the Analyzer ................................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.2 Data Clearing ................................................................................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Emptying the Analyzer .................................................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2.2 Turning off Refrigeration ........................................................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.3 Auto Cuvette Discarding ............................................................................................................................. 4-4
4.2.4 Cleaning and Emptying Wash buffer Aspirate Tubes ..................................................................... 4-4
4.2.5 Cleaning and Emptying Wash Buffer Tubes ....................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.6 Cleaning and Emptying Dispersion Aspirate Tubes ....................................................................... 4-6
4.2.7 Cleaning and Emptying Substrate Tubes............................................................................................. 4-7
4.2.8 Emptying Waste Tubes ............................................................................................................................... 4-8
4.2.9 Clear Trays........................................................................................................................................................ 4-9
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer III

4.2.10 Removing and Fixing Peristaltic Pump Tubes ................................................................................ 4-9

4.2.11 Check and Restoring after Whole Unit Emptying ...................................................................... 4-10
4.3 Clearing the Computer ............................................................................................................................................... 4-11
4.3.1 Data Clearing ................................................................................................................................................ 4-11
4.4 Packing the Whole Unit .............................................................................................................................................. 4-12
4.4.1 Fixing Connection Cables ........................................................................................................................ 4-12
4.4.2 Fixing Wash Buffer Tubes and Tank Cover ...................................................................................... 4-13
4.4.3 Packing the Sample Probe and Reagent Probe .............................................................................. 4-13
4.4.4 Fixing Auto Loader Bracket .................................................................................................................... 4-14
4.4.5 Fixing the Probe Arm ................................................................................................................................ 4-15
4.4.6 Fixing the Desk Panel................................................................................................................................ 4-16
4.4.7 Fixing the Analyzer .................................................................................................................................... 4-18
4.4.8 Blocking the Waste Outlet....................................................................................................................... 4-19
4.4.9 Fixing the Wash Buffer Drawer ............................................................................................................ 4-20
4.4.10 Protecting the Left and Right Doors ................................................................................................ 4-21
4.4.11 Protecting the Drawer Door ................................................................................................................ 4-22
4.4.12 Packing the Analyzer .............................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.4.13 Closing the Package ................................................................................................................................ 4-23
5 Shells Assembly 5-1
5.1 Shells Assembly ................................................................................................................................................................ 5-2

5.1.1 Module Functions and Composition...................................................................................................... 5-2
5.1.3 Removing Front Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges .................................. 5-5
5.1.4 Removing Back Shielding Cover Assembly and Replacing the Hinges ................................... 5-5
5.1.5 Removing and Reinstalling Panels ......................................................................................................... 5-6
5.1.6 Replacement of Air Spring ......................................................................................................................... 5-9
5.1.7 Removing and Reinstalling Arm Covers .............................................................................................. 5-9
5.1.8 Replacing Decorating Silicone Strip on the Back Shielding Cover ......................................... 5-10
5.1.9 Replacing Sealing Strip and Dust-Proof Silicone Strip of the Front Shielding Cover ..... 5-10
5.1.10 Replacing Left/Right Front Doors and Hinges ............................................................................ 5-12
5.1.11 Replacing the Lock Catch...................................................................................................................... 5-12
5.1.12 Replacing the Spikes ............................................................................................................................... 5-12
6 Rack Feeder System 6-1
6.1 System Composition and Description ..................................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2 Sample Delivery Module ............................................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2 Rack Supply Unit ............................................................................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.3 Rack Storage Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 6-10
6.2.4 Rack Buffer Unit .......................................................................................................................................... 6-14
6.2.5 Retrieval Push-In Part .............................................................................................................................. 6-17
6.2.6 Scanning Push-In Part .............................................................................................................................. 6-19
6.2.7 Scanning Push-Out Part ........................................................................................................................... 6-21
6.2.8 Channel Bracket Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 6-24
6.3 Rack Transfer Unit........................................................................................................................................................ 6-27
IV CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer


6.3.2 Module Profile and FRU ........................................................................................................................... 6-27
6.3.3 Replacement of Track Motor Assembly and Tensioning Mechanism Spring .................... 6-28
6.3.4 Replacing Reflective Optical Coupler ................................................................................................. 6-29
6.3.5 Replacing Lane Change Stopper Station ........................................................................................... 6-30
6.3.6 Replacing Lane Change Part .................................................................................................................. 6-31
6.3.7 Replacing Post-Aspiration Stopper Station ..................................................................................... 6-33
6.3.8 Replacing Aspirate Buffer Stopper Station ...................................................................................... 6-34
6.3.9 Replacing STAT Aspirate Positioning Station ................................................................................. 6-35
6.3.10 Replacing Routine Aspirate Positioning Station ......................................................................... 6-38
6.3.11 Replacing Return Push-out Part ........................................................................................................ 6-40
7 Sampling System 7-1
7.1 Syringe Assembly............................................................................................................................................................. 7-2

7.1.3 Replacing 1ml Syringe ................................................................................................................................. 7-2
7.1.4 Replacing Reagent Syringe Drive Module ........................................................................................... 7-4
7.1.5 Replacing Sample Syringe Assembly..................................................................................................... 7-5
7.1.6 Replacing Syringe 42 Step Motor Assembly....................................................................................... 7-7
7.1.7 Replacing Clog Detection T-Piece Assembly ...................................................................................... 7-9
7.1.8 Replacing Syringe Optical Coupler ...................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2 Sample Probe Assembly............................................................................................................................................. 7-13
7.2.3 Replacing Short Arm Cover .................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.2.4 Replacing Guide Rod and Anti-Collision Spring ............................................................................ 7-15
7.2.5 Replacing Negative Offset Level Sense Board................................................................................. 7-16
7.2.6 Replacing Horizontal Motor Assembly.............................................................................................. 7-17
7.2.7 Replacing Probe Assembly ..................................................................................................................... 7-18
7.2.8 Replacing Vertical Motor Pulley Assembly ...................................................................................... 7-19
7.2.9 Replacing Sample Probe Drive Assembly ......................................................................................... 7-21
7.2.10 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler (S)..................................................................................... 7-23
7.3 Reagent probe assembly ............................................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.3.3 Replacing Long Arm Cover ..................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.3.4 Replacing Reagent Probe Drive Assembly ....................................................................................... 7-26
8 Reagent Handling System 8-1
8.1 Reagent Carousel Unit ................................................................................................................................................... 8-2

8.1.3 Replacing Reagent Carousel High-speed Drive Assembly............................................................ 8-4
8.1.4 Replacing Bar Code Reader ....................................................................................................................... 8-7
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer V

8.1.5 Replacing Reagent Antifogging Heating Assembly ......................................................................... 8-8

8.1.6 Replacing Antifogging Temperature Protection Switch and Heater ........................................ 8-9
8.1.7 Replacing Water-proof Optical Coupler ............................................................................................ 8-11
8.1.8 Replacing Dust Screen .............................................................................................................................. 8-12
8.2 Reagent Refrigeration Unit ....................................................................................................................................... 8-14
8.2.3 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration Module......................................................................................... 8-15
8.2.4 Replacing Radiating Fan of the Air Duct Assembly ...................................................................... 8-17
8.2.5 Replacing Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Sensor .............................................................. 8-18
8.2.6 Replacing Radiating Fan of the Refrigeration Module ................................................................ 8-20
8.2.7 Replacing Cooling Fan of the Refrigeration Module .................................................................... 8-21
8.2.8 Replacing Peltiers ....................................................................................................................................... 8-23
9 Cuvette Load and Transport System 9-1
9.1 Cuvette loader assembly ............................................................................................................................................... 9-2

9.1.2 Component Locations and FRU Details................................................................................................ 9-2
9.1.3 Replacing the Electromagnet ................................................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.4 Replacing Feeding Motor Pulley Assembly in the Feeding Position ........................................ 9-5
9.1.5 Replacing Feeding Motor Pulley Assembly in the Unloading Position ................................... 9-7
9.1.6 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler in the Unloading Position ............................................ 9-9
9.1.7 Replacing the Conversion Line of Correlative and Reflective Optical Couplers ............... 9-10
9.1.8 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler on the Feeding Arm.............................. 9-11
9.1.9 Replacing Feeder Fingers ........................................................................................................................ 9-12
9.1.10 Replacing Correlative Optical Coupler(S) on the Feeding Arm ............................................ 9-13
9.1.11 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler in the Pusher Waiting Position ..... 9-15
9.1.12 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective Optical Coupler in the Unloading Area ...................... 9-16
9.1.13 Replacing Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly of the Open-Close assembly..... 9-17
9.1.14 Replacing Long Stroke Reflective or Correlative Optical Coupler (L) in the Working
Position ...................................................................................................................................................................... 9-19
9.1.15 Replacing X-axis Correlative Optical Coupler(L) ........................................................................ 9-21
9.1.16 Replacing X-axis Motor Pulley Assembly....................................................................................... 9-22
9.1.17 Replacing BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board with Socket in the Pushing Position9-23
9.1.18 Replacing Pushing Motor Assembly ................................................................................................ 9-25
9.1.19 Replacing BM10 Gripper X-FPC Board ........................................................................................... 9-26
9.1.20 Replacing BM10 Gripper Y-FPC Board ........................................................................................... 9-28
9.1.21 Replacing Y-axis Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly ................................................. 9-29
9.1.22 Replacing Y-axis Correlative Optical Coupler(S) ........................................................................ 9-31
9.1.23 Replacing BM10 Gripper Z-FPC Board ........................................................................................... 9-33
9.1.24 Replacing Z-axis Track Open-Close Motor Pulley Assembly ................................................. 9-35
9.1.25 Replacing BM10 Optical Coupler Conversion Board with Socket of the Z Axis............. 9-37
9.1.26 Replacing Z-axis Relieving Spring..................................................................................................... 9-39
9.2 First Gripper Assembly .............................................................................................................................................. 9-41
VI CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer


9.3 Second Gripper Assembly ......................................................................................................................................... 9-44
10 Dispersion System 10-1
10.1 Module Functions....................................................................................................................................................... 10-2

10.2 Component Locations and FRU Details ............................................................................................................ 10-3
10.3 Replacing Substrate Mixing Presser Assembly.............................................................................................. 10-5
10.4 Replacing Dispersion Mixing Motor Pulley Assembly ................................................................................ 10-7
10.5 Replacing Synchronous Belt. 290MXL025 Polyurethane.......................................................................... 10-9
10.6 Replacing Mixing Presser Assembly ................................................................................................................10-11
10.7 Replacing Dispersion Dispense Probes ..........................................................................................................10-13
10.8 Replacing Dispersion Aspirate Probes ............................................................................................................10-15
10.9 Replacing Dispersion Aspirate Drive Assembly ..........................................................................................10-17
10.10 Replacing Dispersion Motor Pulley Assembly ..........................................................................................10-19
10.11 Replacing Dispersion Assembly ......................................................................................................................10-21
10.12 Replacing Substrate Preheating Assembly .................................................................................................10-24
10.13 Replacing Dispersion Carousel Heater .........................................................................................................10-26
10.14 Replacing Dispersion Overheat Protection Switch and Temperature Sensor .............................10-27
10.15 Replacing Dispersion Optical Couplers ........................................................................................................10-31
10.16 Replacing Air Bubble Detection Optical Coupler .....................................................................................10-33
11 Optical Measurement Reaction system 11-1
11.1 Reaction Carousel Mechanics Module ............................................................................................................... 11-2

11.1.1 Module Functions .................................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.2 Locations and FRU details .................................................................................................................... 11-2
11.1.3 Replacing Reaction Carousel Assembly and Motor Pulley Assembly ................................ 11-3
11.1.4 Replace the wire of home position sensor and coder sensor of reaction carousel .. 11-4
11.1.5 Replace Discarding tube A and Discarding tube B..................................................................... 11-6
11.1.6 Replacement of Wash Well .................................................................................................................. 11-7
11.1.7 Replacement of reaction liquid mixing assembly ...................................................................... 11-8
11.1.8 Replacement of the correlation optical coupler wire of the mixing assembly .............. 11-9
11.2 Pyrology module of the reaction carousel .....................................................................................................11-11
11.2.3 Replacement of temperature sensor of the reaction carousel............................................11-11
11.2.4 Replacement of reaction carousel overheat protection switch ..........................................11-13
11.3 Photometric measurement module .................................................................................................................11-15
11.3.3 Replacing photometer assembly .....................................................................................................11-16
11.3.4 Replacing LED assembly .....................................................................................................................11-19
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer VII

12 Software 12-1
12.1 Software Installation ................................................................................................................................................ 12-2

12.1.1 Introduction of Installation Package ............................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.2 System check before the complete installation........................................................................... 12-3
12.1.3 Steps for installation of operating software ................................................................................. 12-6
12.2 Software Upgrading ................................................................................................................................................12-12
12.2.1 Operating software upgrading .........................................................................................................12-12
12.2.2 Upgrading Control Software of Analyzer .....................................................................................12-15
12.2.3 Upgrading Control Software of SDM ..............................................................................................12-20
12.3 Software description ..............................................................................................................................................12-26
12.3.1 Folder Structure .....................................................................................................................................12-26
12.3.2 Log Files .....................................................................................................................................................12-27
12.3.3 Software Running ..................................................................................................................................12-29
12.3.4 Auto Startup .............................................................................................................................................12-29
12.3.5 Software Running Parameters .........................................................................................................12-30
12.3.6 Normal Startup Procedure.................................................................................................................12-31
12.4 Software Uninstallation .........................................................................................................................................12-33
12.4.1 Removing CL-2000i software ...........................................................................................................12-33
12.4.2 Uninstalling SQL Database .................................................................................................................12-33
12.5 Comparison of User Permissions ......................................................................................................................12-34
13 Hardware System 13-1
13.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 13-2

13.2 Summary of Hazards ................................................................................................................................................ 13-3
13.3 Summary of PCBAs .................................................................................................................................................... 13-4
13.4 Locations of PCBA ...................................................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.5 Removing PCBA .......................................................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.6 Functions of PCBA....................................................................................................................................................13-10
13.6.1 Main control board................................................................................................................................13-10
13.6.2 Fluidics Temperature Control Board .........................................................................................13-15
13.6.3 BM10 Control Drive Board (RA) ..................................................................................................13-21
13.6.4 BM10 Control Drive Board (MS)..................................................................................................13-28
13.6.5 BM10 Control Drive Board (LD) ..................................................................................................13-33
13.6.6 BM10 Control Drive Board (CP) ..................................................................................................13-38
13.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board ............................................................................................................13-43
13.6.8 Temperature collection board ..........................................................................................................13-48
13.6.9 Photon Counting Board .......................................................................................................................13-51
13.6.10 PD pre-amplification board ............................................................................................................13-55
13.6.11 High pressure board ..........................................................................................................................13-57
13.6.12 Pressure detection board ................................................................................................................13-60
13.6.13 Weight detection board ....................................................................................................................13-62
13.6.14 Substrate air bubble detection board .........................................................................................13-67
13.6.15 Wash buffer air bubble detection board ...................................................................................13-70
VIII CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

13.6.16 Clog detection board ..........................................................................................................................13-72

13.6.17 Level sense board................................................................................................................................13-76
13.6.18 Probe/Mixer conversion board .....................................................................................................13-79
13.6.19 External vacuum pump drive board ...........................................................................................13-81
13.6.20 Communication conversion board ..............................................................................................13-83
13.6.21 FPC conversion board .......................................................................................................................13-84
13.6.22 BM10 optical coupler conversion board ...................................................................................13-92
13.6.23 Network interface conversion board ..........................................................................................13-96
13.6.24 Main Control Board (SDM)..............................................................................................................13-96
13.6.25 Control drive board (SDM)..............................................................................................................13-99
13.6.26 Track Control Drive Board ........................................................................................................... 13-103
13.6.27 On-line Conversion Board (SDM) .............................................................................................. 13-107
13.6.28 On-line conversion board(rack transfer unit) ..................................................................... 13-109
13.7 Power Supply System .......................................................................................................................................... 13-111
13.7.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit .......................................................................................... 13-111
13.7.2 Analyzer's power supply system.................................................................................................. 13-112
13.7.3 DC power supply conversion board ............................................................................................ 13-121
13.7.4 Analog power supply conversion board ................................................................................... 13-125
13.7.5 AC drive board...................................................................................................................................... 13-126
13.8 Whole unit wiring Diagram .............................................................................................................................. 13-130
14 Hydropneumatic System 14-1
14.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 14-2

14.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System .............................................................................................................. 14-3
14.2.1 Probe wash module ................................................................................................................................ 14-3
14.2.2 Dispersion fluidic module .................................................................................................................... 14-3
14.2.3 Substrate Dispensing Module ............................................................................................................. 14-4
14.2.4 Inlet/outlet module ................................................................................................................................ 14-5
14.3 Introduction of Fluidic Actions ............................................................................................................................ 14-8
14.3.1 Wash buffer aspirating control .......................................................................................................... 14-8
14.3.2 Dispersion Wash Control ...................................................................................................................... 14-8
14.3.3 Substrate Dispensing control ............................................................................................................. 14-8
14.3.4 Establish Vacuum ..................................................................................................................................... 14-9
14.3.5 Release Vacuum ........................................................................................................................................ 14-9
14.3.6 Drain Primary Vacuum Container .................................................................................................... 14-9
14.3.7 Fluidic Initialization................................................................................................................................ 14-9
14.4 Removing and Installing Hydropneumatic Components ........................................................................14-11
14.4.1 Overview ...................................................................................................................................................14-11
14.4.2 Removing and re-installing Probe wash module .....................................................................14-11
14.4.3 Installation and dismantlement of dispersion wash module..............................................14-21
14.4.4 Replacement of the Substrate Dispensing Module ..................................................................14-29
14.4.5 Replacement of Inlet/outlet module .............................................................................................14-32
14.5 Material list of Hydropneumatic subsystem.................................................................................................14-39
14.5.1 Pump list....................................................................................................................................................14-39
14.5.2 Valve list .....................................................................................................................................................14-41
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer IX

14.5.3 Sensor list..................................................................................................................................................14-44
15 Alignment 15-1
15.1 List of tools.................................................................................................................................................................... 15-2

15.1.1 Scope ............................................................................................................................................................. 15-2
15.1.2 List of tools ................................................................................................................................................. 15-2
15.2 Alignment procedure diagram ............................................................................................................................. 15-4
15.3 Preparations:................................................................................................................................................................ 15-5
15.3.1 Precautions: ............................................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3.2 Power on the analyzer ........................................................................................................................... 15-5
15.3.3 Installing operating software(optional) ........................................................................................ 15-6
15.3.4 Screen description ................................................................................................................................... 15-6
15.4 Dispersion unit alignment...................................................................................................................................... 15-9
15.4.2 Dispersion Carousel Position Offset ................................................................................................ 15-9
15.4.3 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation ..........................................................................15-10
15.4.4 Dispense Station Mechanism Vertical ...........................................................................................15-10
15.4.5 Aspirate Station Vertical Position Adjustment ..........................................................................15-11
15.4.6 Dispersion Mixing Speed ....................................................................................................................15-12
15.5 Reaction Carousel Unit alignment ....................................................................................................................15-14
15.5.2 Photometer Configuration .................................................................................................................15-14
15.5.3 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment ..........................................................................................15-15
15.5.4 Photometer Home .................................................................................................................................15-16
15.5.5 Mechanical Home Position Alignment ..........................................................................................15-17
15.5.6 Reaction Carousel Middle Ring Position Offset.........................................................................15-25
15.5.7 Reaction Carousel Inner Ring Position Offset ............................................................................15-26
15.6 Reagent Carousel Unit alignment ......................................................................................................................15-27
15.6.2 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 1st Injection Port - Stop Position(Ra)...............15-27
15.6.3 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 2nd Injection Port - Stop Position(Rb).............15-28
15.6.4 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 3rd Injection Port - Stop Position(Rc) ..............15-28
15.6.5 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 4th Injection Port - Stop Position(Rd) ..............15-28
15.7 Reagent probe unit ..................................................................................................................................................15-29
15.7.2 Horizontal Position for Aspirating Ra/Rb/Rc/Rd ...................................................................15-29
15.7.3 Reagent Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations.........................................15-30
15.7.4 Reagent Probe Horizontal Wash Position ...................................................................................15-30
15.7.5 Horizontal Reagent Dispense Position on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer rings15-31
15.7.6 Reagent Probe Vertical Wash Position..........................................................................................15-32
15.7.7 Reagent Carousel Vertical Extreme Position (Ra) ....................................................................15-32
15.7.8 Reagent Dispense Position Vertical Extreme on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer
Rings..........................................................................................................................................................................15-33
15.8 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation and bar code unit .......................................................15-34
15.8.1 Carousel Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation.......................................................15-34
15.8.2 Reagent Carousel Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation .....................................15-34
15.8.3 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Scanning Position..........................................................................15-34
15.8.4 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Stability .............................................................................................15-36
15.9 Sample Probe Unit ...................................................................................................................................................15-38
X CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

15.9.2 Sample Probe Wash Position Horizontal .....................................................................................15-38

15.9.3 Sample Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations ..........................................15-39
15.9.4 Sample Probe Horizontal Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Positions ..................................15-39
15.9.5 Sample Probe Wash Position Vertical ...........................................................................................15-39
15.9.6 Sample Probe Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Vertical Extreme Positions ......................15-40
15.10 Second Gripper Unit .............................................................................................................................................15-42
15.10.2 2nd Gripper Home Position Alignment .....................................................................................15-42
15.10.3 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel Horizontal ......................................15-43
15.10.4 Second Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations ........................................................15-44
15.10.5 Gripper Mixing Position Horizontal ............................................................................................15-45
15.10.6 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal...................................................................................15-45
15.10.7 Reaction Carousel Vertical Gripping Position Alignment ..................................................15-46
15.10.8 Gripper Mixing Position Vertical ..................................................................................................15-47
15.10.9 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Vertical .........................................................................................15-47
15.11 Tray Loader ..............................................................................................................................................................15-48
15.11.1 Tray loader alignment screen ........................................................................................................15-48
15.11.2 Feeding Position ..................................................................................................................................15-48
15.11.3 Unloading Home Position ................................................................................................................15-49
15.11.4 Pushing Position ..................................................................................................................................15-50
15.11.5 Guide Rail Positions ...........................................................................................................................15-51
15.11.6 Tray drawer check ..............................................................................................................................15-52
15.12 First Gripper Unit ..................................................................................................................................................15-54
15.12.1 First Gripper Unit screen .................................................................................................................15-54
15.12.2 First Gripper Mechanical Reset .....................................................................................................15-55
15.12.3 First Gripper Home Position Alignment....................................................................................15-58
15.12.4 First Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations .............................................................15-58
15.12.5 Gripper Tray Horizontal ...................................................................................................................15-58
15.12.6 Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment .15-59
15.12.7 Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal .............................................................15-60
15.12.8 Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2 Alignment................................................................15-60
15.12.9 Gripper Reaction Carousel Vertical .............................................................................................15-61
15.12.10 Gripper Dispense Position Vertical ...........................................................................................15-62
15.12.11 Gripper Tray Vertical ......................................................................................................................15-62
15.13 Hydropneumatic Unit ..........................................................................................................................................15-64
15.13.1 Preparations before Alignment.....................................................................................................15-64
15.13.2 Fluidic Connection ..............................................................................................................................15-64
15.13.3 Floater Check ........................................................................................................................................15-65
15.13.4 Check Wash Buffer Tubes and Related Components ...........................................................15-66
15.13.5 Vacuum Pressure Check ...................................................................................................................15-67
15.13.6 Syringe Check .......................................................................................................................................15-68
15.13.7 Check Drain Tubes and Related Components .........................................................................15-69
15.13.8 Wash Buffer Aspirating Tube Check and Prime .....................................................................15-70
15.13.9 Wash Buffer Prime..............................................................................................................................15-72
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer XI

15.13.10 Clean Substrate Tubes ....................................................................................................................15-73

15.13.11 Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration ............................................................................15-74
15.13.12 Sample Probe Wash Pressure Test ............................................................................................15-76
15.13.13 Substrate Prime.................................................................................................................................15-76
15.13.14 Back Aspirate Air for Substrate ..................................................................................................15-77
15.14 Sensor Calibration .................................................................................................................................................15-80
15.14.3 Substrate Aspirating/dispensing Coupler Calibration ........................................................15-81
15.14.4 Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler Calibration .............................................................15-82
15.15 Temperature Control Unit..................................................................................................................................15-83
15.15.1 The alignment screen of the temperature control unit.......................................................15-83
15.15.2 Carousel Temperature Test .............................................................................................................15-83
15.15.3 Substrate Preheat Temperature Curve ......................................................................................15-83
15.15.4 Reagent refrigeration ........................................................................................................................15-84
15.15.5 Fan Status Query .................................................................................................................................15-85
15.16 Special Wash Sample Probe position ............................................................................................................15-87
15.16.1 Sample Probe Special Wash Horizontal Position...................................................................15-87
15.16.2 Sample Probe Special Wash Vertical Extreme Position ......................................................15-87
15.17 Rack supply unit alignment screen ................................................................................................................15-89
15.17.2 Offset of Position Switch for Rack Supply Push-In Part ......................................................15-89
15.17.3 Sample Center and Scanning Position ........................................................................................15-90
15.17.4 Half Protrusion of STAT Push-Back Part ...................................................................................15-91
15.17.5 Scanning Push-In Part Moving to Utmost End........................................................................15-92
15.17.6 Scanning Push-Out Part Target Pos Adjustment....................................................................15-93
15.18 The rack retrieval unit. ........................................................................................................................................15-94
15.18.1 Rack supply unit alignment screen .............................................................................................15-94
15.18.2 Grid Aligning with Scanning Channel .........................................................................................15-94
15.18.3 Grid Aligning with Return Lane ....................................................................................................15-95
15.18.4 Grid Aligning with Retrieval Channel .........................................................................................15-95
15.18.5 Offset of Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Rack Storage Unit .........................................15-96
15.18.6 Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Rack Supply Unit .............................................................15-97
15.19 The normal lane .....................................................................................................................................................15-99
15.19.1 the alignment screen of the normal lane ..................................................................................15-99
15.19.2 Stop Position of Stopper Part at Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 2......................................15-99
15.19.3 Positioning Station Moving to Aspirate Point ...................................................................... 15-100
15.19.4 Sample Probe Rotary to Normal Lane ..................................................................................... 15-101
15.20 Passing_return unit alignment...................................................................................................................... 15-102
15.20.1 the alignment screen of the normal lane ............................................................................... 15-102
15.20.2 Positioning Station Moving to passing-return lane ........................................................... 15-102
15.20.3 Sample Probe Rotary to Passing Lane ..................................................................................... 15-103
15.20.4 Offset of Lane Change Stopper Station Moving to End Position................................... 15-103
15.20.5 Offset of Return Push-Out Part Moving to End Position .................................................. 15-104
15.20.6 Lane change part aligning with transfer lane ...................................................................... 15-105
15.20.7 Lane change part aligning with normal lane ........................................................................ 15-106
XII CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

15.20.8 Lane Change from Return Lane to Normal Lane ................................................................ 15-107
15.20.9 Lane Change Part Aligning with Return Lane ...................................................................... 15-107
16 Maintenance16-1
16.1 Material and tools ...................................................................................................................................................... 16-2

16.2 Maintenance items .................................................................................................................................................... 16-4
16.3 Maintenance order .................................................................................................................................................... 16-6
16.4 Steps ................................................................................................................................................................................ 16-8
16.4.1 Clean wash buffer drawer .................................................................................................................... 16-8
16.4.2 Clean the cap of the wash buffer tank ............................................................................................. 16-8
16.4.3 Check the sample/reagent probe...................................................................................................... 16-9
16.4.4 Change the spring of the gripper ....................................................................................................16-10
16.4.5 Clean the finger of the gripper .........................................................................................................16-12
16.4.6 X axis linear guide rail lubrication..................................................................................................16-13
16.4.7 Check sample/reagent syringes ......................................................................................................16-13
16.4.8 Clean Dust Screens ................................................................................................................................16-14
16.4.9 Dispersion aspirate pump tubes maintenance .........................................................................16-15
16.4.10 Inlet Pump Tubing maintenance ..................................................................................................16-17
16.4.11 Inlet Pump check .................................................................................................................................16-20
16.4.12 Clean Cooling Fans and Radiators ................................................................................................16-20
16.4.13 Air pump check ....................................................................................................................................16-22
16.4.14 Check overflowing of the dispersion carousel ........................................................................16-23
16.4.15 Replace Substrate Spike ...................................................................................................................16-23
16.4.16 Check consumable status ................................................................................................................16-28
16.4.17 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes Exterior ....................................................................................16-29
16.4.18 Check Sample/Reagent Probes .....................................................................................................16-30
16.4.19 Probe interior and exterior flow test ..........................................................................................16-31
16.4.20 Clean Vortexer Hole............................................................................................................................16-33
16.4.21 Replace/Clean Aspirate Probes.....................................................................................................16-33
16.4.22 Wipe Dispense Probes/Tubes .......................................................................................................16-34
16.4.23 Sensor Calibration ..............................................................................................................................16-36
16.4.24 Daily Clean .............................................................................................................................................16-37
16.4.25 Run System Diagnosis .......................................................................................................................16-38
16.4.26 Check Waste ..........................................................................................................................................16-39
16.4.27 Statistics of Component Service Life...........................................................................................16-39
16.4.28 Effect Check ...........................................................................................................................................16-41
17 Alarms and Troubleshooting 17-1
17.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................ 17-2

17.2 Flag ................................................................................................................................................................................... 17-3
17.3 Error Code ...................................................................................................................................................................17-10
18 Changeable Parts at the User End 18-1
18.1 Changeable parts for main unit............................................................................................................................ 18-2

18.2 Changeable parts for SDM ....................................................................................................................................18-14
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer XIII

A Hardware system wiring diagram A-1
B Fluidic DiagramB-1
XIV CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

13 Hardware System

13 Hardware System
13.1 Overview
13.1 Overview
This chapter describes the functions of the printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs)
used on the CL-2000i/CL-2200i Chemistry Analyzer.

13 Hardware System
13.2 Summary of Hazards
13.2 Summary of Hazards

While the instrument is working, do not touch the hardware circuit boards with your
hands or other objects.
To remove a circuit board, you should first disconnect the instrument from the (AC)
power supply. Please wear a pair of anti-static gloves or take other measures to prevent
static electricity prior to removing a circuit board.

13 Hardware System
13.3 Summary of PCBAs

Sequence number and function description of PCBAs
The table bellows provides a summary of the PCBAs used on the CL-2000i/CL-2200i
Chemistry Analyzer and briefly describes their functions.
Summary of PCBAs
PCBA (PCB) Functions Remark
BM10 Main control The main control board is the control
boardPCBA(Analyzer) center of the instrument. It
051-000742-00 communicates with a computer through
the RS232 serial port to transmit data
and instructions, and communicates
with smart modules of the rack feeder
system to transmit data and
instructions.
BM10 Control drive board It drives and controls the reagent
PCBA (Reagent) carousel, reagent probe unit and sample
051-001413-00 probe unit.
BM10 Control drive board It is in charge of drive and control of
PCBA (Load) auto load and second gripper unit.
051-001413-00
BM10 Control drive board It is in charge of the drive and control of
PCBA (Dispersion). dispersion carousel and dispersion
051-001413-00 dispensing unit.
BM10 Control drive board It is in charge of drive and control of
PCBA (Mixing) reaction carousel and first gripper unit.
051-001413-00
BM10 Fluidics Control It is in charge of the drive and control of
Board PCBA temperature control, hydro Unit and
051-000747-00 dispersion aspirating unit.
Temperature collection It processes the signal of the reaction Borrowed from
board PCBA carousel, dispersion carousel and BS-800
051-000817-00 substrate preheat sensor and performs
the AD conversion; it provides the
expansion serial port to connect with
the temperature control board of hydro
unit.
BM10 High voltage board It provides the high voltage for
PCBA Photomultiplier
051-000744-00
PD pre-amplification It converts the small analog signal to big
board PCBA signal for the signal input of the photon
051-001269-00 counting board.
BM10 Photon counting It converts the photoelectric analog
board PCBA signal to digital signal.
051-000743-00

13 Hardware System

BA 80 Reagent The reagent refrigeration board is used Borrowed from
Refrigeration Board PCBA to drive the reagent refrigeration circuit BS-800
051-000207-00 (including radiators, refrigeration
temperature display), fans, and
demisting circuit of the reagent bar
code reader.
Clog detection board It detects the pressure in the tube and Borrowed from
051-000218-00 clogging during sample aspiration. BS-800
Probe/Mixer conversion It provides the conversion of the two Borrowed from
board PCBA level sense boards and second gripper BS-800
051-000210-00 motor and optical coupler.
BA80 Pressure detection It detects the primary vacuum pressure. Borrowed from
board PCBA It provides a serial port for data BS-800
051-000216-00 transmission.
Negative voltage level Senses sample/reagent level and

sense board PCBA detects vertical obstruction of the
051-001092-00 sample/reagent probe.
BM 10 DC power supply It distributes the DC power to the
conversion board PCBA control boards.
051-000755-00
Substrate air bubble It detects the substrate bubble through
detection board bubble detection sensor and sends the
051-001403-00 detection results to the temperature
control board of the hydro unit.
Wash buffer air bubble It detects the air bubble of wash buffer,
detection board converting the detection results into
051-001500-00 digital signals, and then sending them to
the temperature control board via the
serial port.
Weight detection board It detects the weight of weighing
051-001500-00 sensor , converting the detection results
into digital signals, and then sending
them to the temperature control board
via the serial port.
BM10 gripper Z-FPC board Converting the signal between the first
PCBA gripper's motor and the optical
051-000858-00 couplers.
BM10 gripper Y-FPC board Converting the signal between the first
PCBA gripper's Z axis motor and the optical
051-000859-00 coupler in the Z axis Home position, the
calibration position and Z-FPC signal
wire.
BM10 gripper X-FPC board Converting the signal between the first
PCBA gripper's Y axis motor and the optical
051-000860-00 coupler in the Y axis Home position, the
calibration position and Y-FPC signal
wire.

13 Hardware System

BM10 front panel Providing three 24V indicator lights.
indicator board PCBA
051-000857-00
BM10 double optical used for first gripper's anti-bumping,
coupler conversion board turning on the encoding of the optical
PCBA coupler. Small end 009-0001794-00.
051-001001-00 Horizontally away from the outlet of
the screw.
BM10 double optical used for second gripper's anti-bumping,

coupler butt joint turning on the encoding of the optical
conversion board PCBA coupler. Big end 009-0001795-00.
051-001035-00 Horizontally away from the outlet of
the screw.
BM10 empty gripping Used to encode the empty gripping
optical coupler conversion optical coupler of the first gripper.
board of the first gripper Small end 009-0001794-00, horizontal.
051-001373-00
BM10 empty gripping Used to encode the empty gripping
optical coupler conversion optical coupler of the second gripper.
board of the second big end 009-0001795-00, horizontal
gripper outlet.
051-001374-00
BM10 optical coupler Used for the conversion of the optical
conversion board with coupler in Z axis home position, middle
socket position and pushing home position.
051-001034-00
Communication The analyzer wakes up the PC at the set
conversion board PCBA time.
BA40-30-61377
BA40 power supply Providing 5V/12V/24V power for the
assembly analyzer.
BA40-30-61943
BA80 AC drive board Receiving the AC input from the AC Borrowed from
801-BA80-00108-00 filter and transferring the AC power to BS-800
BA40 power supply assembly.
BA2K Analog power supply The analog power supply conversion
conversion board PCBA board converts the C12V power into2
051-001023-00 analog +/-12V. One is photoelectric
analog +/-12V,providing analog power
for the photon counting board, high
voltage board and preamplifier board;
and the other powers the control drive
boards and wash temperature board
through the DC power supply conversion
board. The digital A5V passes by on this
board.A5V.
Network interface Used to extend the serial port and Borrowed from
conversion board network port on the analyzer or on the BS-800
801-BA80-00236-00 SDM main control board for cable
connection.

13 Hardware System

Interconnection Converts power supply and Borrowed from
conversion board(SDM) communication signal (including TTL BS-2000
801-BA80-00241-00 signal converted into RS422) for the rack
transfer unit.
On-line conversion Converting the 24V power to 5V in SDM. Borrowed from
board(rack transfer unit) BS-2000
801-BA80-00237-00
Main control board (SDM) Control center of track control. It Borrowed from
801-BA80-00098-00 communicates with a computer through BS-800
the RS232 serial port to transmit data
and instructions, and communicates
with smart modules of the rack feeder
system to transmit data and
instructions.
Control drive board (SDM) Drives and controls motors, optical Borrowed from
051-001000-00 couplers and bar code scanning of the BS-2000
SDM.

13 Hardware System
13.4 Locations of PCBA
13.4 Locations of PCBA

Negative voltage probe
level sense board (sample) Negative voltage Reagent probe level
sense board (reagent ) PD pre-amplification
board
High voltage
board
Photon Counting
Board
Temperature
collection board
BM10control drive board

(mixing)
Reagent
refrigeration
board
Pressure
detection
board
BM10Control drive board Probe/mixer

(reagent) conversion board
AC drive
board

13 Hardware System
13.5 Removing PCBA
13.5 Removing PCBA

To remove a PCBA, unplug the connectors on it and then loosen the retaining screws. The
whole unit alignment parameters are stored on the main control board. Before replacing
the main control board, access the Parameters screen and back up all parameters to the
computer. After replacement, import the parameters to the new main control board.
Backing up parameters is not required before replacing other boards.

13 Hardware System
13.6 Functions of PCBA

13.6.1 Main control board
Functions and principles
The main control board (051-000742-00) is used to fulfill the following functions:
Communicating with a computer through the serial port to transmit data and
instructions and to update the application programs of the PCBA.
Communicating with the smart modules, through the extended serial ports to
transmit data and instructions.
Providing a network interface for the auto startup function, by which the computer
can be woken up automatically.
Monitoring and indicating voltage of the 5V, 3.3V and 12V power supply boards.
The figure below shows the relation between the main control board and other PCBAs.
Analog Drive Control
Control Control Reagent Communic
power control drive Fluidic
drive drive refrigera ation
supply board board control
board board tion conversion
conversi RA MS board
LD CP board board
on board
Main control board
Photon
counting PC
board
The functional diagram of the main control board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.1 Functional diagram of main control board

Power BDM / JTAG PC
supply Connectors for
debugging
BDM UART
I2C
SPI
RTC EEPROM
SDRAMC
CPU
FEC
SDRAM
PHY
Flex Bus
FLASH
Control drive board

Voltage RA
monitoring
Control drive board
MS
Control drive board
LD
Control drive board
FPGA
Main CP
control Fluidic temperature
control board
board Reagent refrigeration
board
Communication
conversion board
Photon counting board
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the main control board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.2 PCB layout of main control board
Connectors
The main control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 6-pin, providing +/-12V analog and +5V digital for PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference Value

1 +12V 11.4 12.6V

13 Hardware System

2 -12V -11.4 -12.6V
3 +5V 4.75 5.25V
4 12VGND /
5 12VGND /
6 GND /
Connectors for sending/receiving communication signals:

Connector (J2) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
1# connector (J3) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for communication with
the BM10(CP) control drive board.
the BM10(LD) control drive board.
the BM10(MS) control drive board.
the temperature control board.
the BM10(LD) control drive board.
Connector (J5) for reagent refrigeration board: 8-pin, RS422, used for
communication with the reagent refrigeration board.
Connector (J7) for photon counting board: DB25. Used to power the photon
counting board and send the pass-through signal to the reaction carousel
unit.
Ethernet connector (J12): 6-pin, used for communication with communication
conversion board.
Connectors for debugging:
BDM connector (J13): 26-pin, used for debugging the CPU software.
JTAG connector (J14): 14-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
Switches and jumpers

The main control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA.
Indicators
The main control board contains the following indicators.
Power supply:
+12V power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the +12V power supply has been connected.
-12V power supply indicator (D17): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch
is turned on, indicating that the -12V power supply has been connected.
+5V power supply indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the +5V power supply has been connected.
+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the analyzer power switch is
turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been connected.

13 Hardware System
Indicators to indicate PCBA functions:

FPGA configuration indicator (D29): orange. It is lit in normal conditions, which
means that the FPGA has been configured successfully.
FPGA function indicator 1 (D25): green. It flashes continuously in normal conditions,
which means that the FPGA is working.
FPGA function indicator 2 (D18): green. It flashes in normal conditions when the
PCBA communicates with a smart module.
PCBA collects AD signals.
FPGA function indicator 4 (D12): green. This indicator has not been defined.
CPU function indicator 1 (D27): green. This indicator has not been defined.
Indicators to indicate network interface:
Network interface Link indicator (D10): green. When it is lit, it indicates the
Ethernet has been connected; when it flashes, it means that the PCBA is
communicating with the Ethernet.
Network interface Full-duplex indicator (D7): green. When it is lit, it indicates that
the Ethernet is working in full-duplex mode.
Network interface 10-T indicator (D11): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
connection rate of the Ethernet is 10Mbps.
Network interface Collision indicator (D8): green. When it is lit, it indicates that a
conflict is detected on Ethernet communication.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
J1.1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 11.4 - 12.6V.
J1.2: -12V power supply input. Normal range: -11.4 - -12.6V.
C304.1: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major
digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.
C37.1: +2.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the DDR
memory. Normal range: 2.25 - 2.75V.
C78.1: +1.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the CPU
core. Normal range: 1.35 - 1.65V.
U65.4: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the FPGA
Installation methods and precautions

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply and
wear a pair of anti-static gloves or wrist straps.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA.

13 Hardware System
Check the connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked
properly.
Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the slots.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J3, J4, J6, J10 and J11.
Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it
from being deformed or damaged.
After connecting J7 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides of
it.
13.6.2 Fluidics Temperature Control Board

The Fluidics temperature control board (051-000747-00) receives commands from the
main control board and then analyzes them; detects execution signals of the temperature
control unit, Dispersion aspirating unit and fluidics unit and drives these units; detects
the temperature of the temperature sensors and controls the heaters. The major
functions of the PCBA include:
Communicating with the main control unit via serial ports to receive/analyze
instructions, execute relevant operations and return the execution results.
Outputting control signals for relevant execution units.
Receiving position sensor signals of relevant execution units and other status
signals.
Detecting the temperature of reaction carousel heating, dispersion preheating,
substrate heating and the environment, and controlling the heaters.
Receiving fluid level sensor signals from the hydropneumatic system and pressure
signals from the pressure detection board, and controlling/driving fluidic pumps
and valves.
Checking the PCBAs voltage and giving an alarm in certain conditions.
The figure below shows the relation between the fluidics temperature control board and
other PCBAs.

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.3 Relation between fluidics temperature control board and other PCBAs
BA80 network
Power
PC interface
supply
conversion board
24V/12V/5V
/+/-12V
DC power
Main control
supply
board
conversion board
Wash temperature control board
External
Pressure
Ac drive Temperatur vacuum
detection
board e collection pump drive
boar
board board
The functional diagram of the fluidics temperature control board is as shown below.
Figure 13.4 Functional diagram of fluidics temperature control board
Cuvette inforserial port RS422 difference

collecting photoelectric signal Inlet pump motor
Liquid level sensor (10)
Reaction
Serial portRS422 carousel
temperature Sensor PT1000(1)
Hydro bus collection
Unit board
Pump jamming sensor
Home position sensor of the aspiration unit
Pump motor
Main Serial port RS422
Aspiration unit elevating motor
control
Dispersio FPGA
board n Pump valve
bus
aspiration
AC control
unit
AC drive AC pump
board AC heater
Serial port RS422 Pressure detection serial port

difference
Temperat
Voltage ure
detection
bus
control
unit

13 Hardware System
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the fluidics temperature control board is as shown below.
Figure 13.5 PCB layout of fluidics temperature control board
J17 J18 J19 J21
J16
Temp Temp Reac J23

Clean
LED Unit Tray
Unit
Unit
J15 Unit
LED
J25
6 12
FPGA Reag 5
4
11
10
LED Mixer 3
2
9
8
1 7
Unit
J1
J31
J13
Power
LED
J12
J3
Pump J4
&
Valve
LED
J11
J10 J8 J6 J5
Connectors

13 Hardware System
The fluidics temperature control board includes the following connectors.

Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 12-pin, providing +24V(B24V) power, +12V(C12V) power,
+5V(A5V) digital, +12V(D12V) analog, and -12V(E12V) analog for PCBAs.
Pin No. Signal Reference
Value
1 +24V 23.5 - 26V
2 +24V 23.5 - 26V
3 +12V 11.4 12.6V
4 +12V 11.4 12.6V
5 +5V 4.85 - 5.25V
6 D12V 11.4 - 12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /
11 GND /
12 E12V -11.4 - -12.6V

Connector (J17) for main control board: 20*2-pin RS422, used for serial port
communication with the main control board.
Connector (J18) for reaction carousel temperature collection board: 6*2-pin, TTL,
used for collecting the reaction carousel temperature.
Connector (J22) for pressure detection board: 8*1-pin, TTL, used for serial port
communication with the pressure detection board.
Connectors for detecting sensor signals:
Floater signal detection connector (J15): 13*2-pin, TTL, used for checking the fluid
level status.
Moving position signal detection connector (J16): 20*2-pin, TTL, used for checking
moving positions.
Control connectors:
Lamp control connector (J25): 6*1-pin, used for controlling and detecting the
lamp voltage and hibernation of the whole unit.
AC load control connector (J10): 10*2-pin, used to control the AC load relay.
Vacuum pump control connector (J8): 2*1-pin, used for controlling the external
vacuum pump.
Drive connectors:
Valve drive connector (J12): 25*2-pin, used for driving the wash valve.
Pump drive connector (J11): 7*2-pin, used for driving the DC pump.
Motor drive(J2-J5), J3 Aspirating step motor drive;J4 peristaltic pump motor drive;
J5 auto dilution motor drive.


13 Hardware System

The fluidics temperature control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPUs of the four units of the PCBA.
Jumper cap j32: used for four units of the PCBA to switch between the JTAG mode and
DEBUG mode.
Indicators
The fluidics temperature control board contains the following indicators.
Power supply indicators:
It is normal that all of the power supply indicators are lit when the analyzing unit
power switch is turned on,
and they should indicate correctly when the system is hibernating.
After the software is shut down , the indicators of +24V(B24V), +12V(C12V), analog
+12V(D12V), analog -12V(-12V), analog
5V are all off. +5V(A5V), +3.3V indicators work normally.
+24V(B24V) indicator (D58): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +24V
power supply works normally.
+12V(C12V) indicator (D62): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V
+5V(A5V) indicator (D63): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
+3.3V indicator (D64): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +3.3V power
supply works normally.
+12V(D12V) analog indicator (D59): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that
the +12V analog power supply works normally.
-12V(E12V) analog indicator (D60): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
-12V analog power supply works normally.
+5V(D12V) analog indicator (D61): yellow-green. When it is lit, it indicates that the
+5V analog power supply works normally.
FPGA configuration indicator (D105): yellow-green. It is lit when FPGA
configuration is complete.
FPGA working indicator (D3): yellow-green. When it is lit and distinguished once
every second, it indicates that the FPGA is working normally.
Temperature control unit working indicator (D107): yellow-green. When it is lit and
distinguished once every second, it indicates that the temperature control unit is
working normally.
Dispersion aspirating unit working indicator (D108): yellow-green. It is not used
and lit all the time.
Fluidics unit working indicator (D109): yellow-green. It is not used and lit all the
time.
Temperature range indicator (D78): red. It is neither used nor defined, and it is
extinguished all the time.
Temperature range indicator (D79): yellow. It is neither used nor defined, and it is
Temperature range indicator (D77): green. It is neither used nor defined, and it is

13 Hardware System
Inlet valve (SV01) working indicator (D83): yellow-green. When it is lit, it means
that the inlet valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Concentrated wash solution pump SV02 working indicator (D82): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the concentrated wash solution pump is turned on; and
vice versa.
Vacuum container waste discharge valve (SV03) working indicator (D81):
yellow-green. When it is lit, it means that the vacuum container waste discharge
valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Deionized water circulating pump P01 working indicator (D87): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the deionized water circulating pump is turned on; and
vice versa.
Concentrated wash solution pump P02 working indicator (D86): yellow-green.
vice versa.
Wash solution aspirating pump P03 working indicator (D85): yellow-green. When it
is lit, it means that the pump is turned on; and vice versa.
Wash solution aspirating pump working indicator (D84): yellow-green. When it is
lit, it means that the pump is turned on; and vice versa.
Deionized water circulating pump SV04 working indicator (D91): yellow-green.
When it is lit, it means that the deionized water circulating pump is turned on; and
vice versa.
Concentrated wash solution pump SV05 working indicator (D90): yellow-green.
vice versa.
Wash buffer front panel indicator J1(D101), yellow-green. When it is lit, it means
that it is turned on; and vice versa.
Wash buffer 1 front panel indicator (D102), yellow-green. When it is lit, it means
Wash buffer 2 front panel indicator (D103), yellow-green. When it is lit, it means
Substrate switching valve SV30 working indicator (D98): yellow-green. When it is lit,
it means that the valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Substrate inlet valve SV31 working indicator (D99): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
means that the valve is turned on; and vice versa.
Substrate outlet valve SV32 working indicator (D100): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
Probe washing valve SV18 working indicator (D95): yellow-green. When it is lit, it
Test points
In the following positions of the fluidics temperature control board can signal tests be
performed.
+24V test point (TP72): input from J1.1 and J1.2. Normal range: 23.5 26V.
+12V test point (TP71): input from J1.3 and J1.4. Normal range: 11.4 12.6V.
+5V test point (TP70): input from J1.5. Normal range: 4.85 5.25V.
+12V analog test point (TP73): input from J1.6. Normal range: 11.4 12.6V.
-12V analog test point (TP74): input from J1.12. Normal range: -11.4 -12.6V.
+3.3V test point (TP69): secondary power supply. Normal range: 2.97 3.63V.
A2.5V test point (TP83): secondary power supply. Normal range: 2.37 2.63V.

13 Hardware System
+1.2V test point (TP68): secondary power supply. Normal range: 1.08 1.32V.
+5V analog test point (TP75): secondary power supply. Normal range: 4.85
5.25V.
Grounding test point(TP29,TP39,TP48TP58,TP76- TP82),J1.7-J11 input.
Running voltage and sustaining voltage of the test points
Description of the Test points Running Sustaining Voltage
test point Voltage
Reference voltage TP12 1.44 ~ 1.76V 0.90 1.10V
for the Dispersion
aspirating motor
Reference voltage TP39 1.52 ~ 1.88V 0.90 1.10V
for the Dispersion
Peristaltic pump
motor
Reference voltage TP9 1.66 2.00 V 0.54 0.66V
for the Dispersion
inlet peristaltic
pump motor

wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps.
properly.
There are gaps beside connectors J10, J11, J12 and J16.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J12, J15, J16, and J17.
Motor connectors J3, J4, J5 and J6 have no mistake-proof measures. Make sure that
the cable number corresponds to the connector number.
13.6.3 BM10 Control Drive Board (RA)

The BM10 control drive board (RA,) (051-001413-00) drives and controls the reagent
carousel, and sample/reagent probes ..
Receiving position sensor signals and obstruction signals from various execution
mechanisms.
Connecting with the sample/reagent level sense board to detect the fluid level.
Connecting with the clog detection board to detect clogs in the sample probe and
give an alarm in certain conditions.

13 Hardware System
Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves of the sample probe unit and reagent
probe unit.
Connected with the fluidics temperature board ;sending control signal to fluidics
temperature control to control the on-off of the probe washing valve.
The figure below shows the relation between the BM10 control drive board (RA) and
other PCBAs and control objects.

13 Hardware System
Reagent carousel home

position sensor
Reagent carousel coder
sensor,
Reagent motor Reagent

carousel
Reagent bar code scanning
Reagent carousel panel
Sample probe horizontal

home optical coupler
Sample probe horizontal anti
bumping optical coupler
Sample probe vertical
optical coupler 1
Main Sample probe vertical
control optical coupler2
board Sample syringe optical
coupler
Sample probe horizontal
motor
Sample probe vertical
Sample
motor probe
Sample syringe motor
Sample level sense
Sample probe clogging sense
BM10 Control drive board Sample probe interior wash

(RA) valve.SV11
Sample probe exterior wash
valve.SV14
Sample probe wash vacuum
valve.SV16
DC
power
supply Reagent Probe Horizontal Home
conversi Position Optical Coupler
on board Reagent Probe Horizontal Anti-
collision Optical Coupler
Reagent probe vertical optical
coupler 1
Reagent probe vertical
optical coupler2
Reagent syringe optical
coupler
optical coupler
Reagent
motor probe
Reagent syringe motor
Reagent level sense
Reagent probe clogging

sense
Reagent probe interior wash
valve SV12
Reagent probe exterior wash
valve SV15
Reagent probe wash
vacuum valve SV17

13 Hardware System
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the BM10 control drive board is as shown below.
Figure 13.6 PCB layout of BM10 control drive board RA
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
J18
J9
Unit LED J19
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 Clot LED
Liquit LED Pump & Valve
LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6 6 7 8 9 10
J5 J4 J3 J2 J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 J22
Connectors
The BM10 control drive board RA contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
DC power supply input connector (J1)

Value
1 A+12V 11.4 12.6V
2 +5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 +12V 11.4 12.6V
4 +24V 23.5 - 26V
5 +24V 23.5 - 26V
6 A-12V -11.4 - -12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

13 Hardware System
Main control board connector (J10): 40-pin, used for three MCUs (reagent carousel
unit, sample probe unit and reagent probe unit) to communicate with the
middle-layer unit.
Communicating with the lower lower-layer unit
Reagent bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for the reagent carousel unit
to communicate with the reagent bar code reader.
Sample probe clog detection board connector (J4): 14-pin, used for communication
between the sample probe unit and the probe clog detection board.
Level sense board connector (J2): 10-pin, used for communication between the
sample probe and the sample probe level sense board.
Level sense board connector (J3): 10-pin, used for communication between the
reagent probe and the reagent probe level sense board.
Detection and control connectors:
Optical coupler detection connector (J12): 50-pin, used to detect the position and
coder signals of the 3 units (reagent carousel unit, sample probe unit and reagent
probe unit).
Motor drive connectors (J13-J20, J17 excluded): 4-pin, used for driving seven step
motors, J13 for the reagent carousel motor, J14 for the reagent probe vertical motor,
J15 for the reagent probe horizontal motor, J16 for the reagent probe syringe motor,
J18 for the sample probe syringe motor, J19 for the sample probe horizontal motor,
and J20 for the sample probe vertical motor.
Valve drive connector (J21):8 pin, used for the controlling of reagent probe
interior wash valve, reagent probe exterior wash valve, reagent probe wash vacuum
valve and sample probe interior wash valve.
Valve drive connector (J22): 8-pin, used for controlling the exterior wash valve and
wash vacuum valve of the sample probe.
Reagent load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the
reagent load button and driving/controlling the indicator.
Sample mixer drive board power connector (J25): 6-pin, used to provide 24V power
supply for the sample mixer drive board.
The BM10 control drive board (RA) contains the following switches and jumpers.
Key S7: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA. When the
instrument is powered on, parameters need to be configured and key S7 cannot be used.
Indicators
The BM10 control drive board (RA) contains the following indicators.
They are lit when the analyzer power switch is turned off, which indicates that the
analyzer power switch works normally;
When the instrument is hibernating, all of the indicators are lit.
5V (A5V) power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is
powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.
3.3V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on
and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.
A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green. It is lit when the instrument is
powered on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating.

13 Hardware System
A-12V (E12V) power supply indicator (D6): green. It is lit when the instrument is
+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green. It is lit when the instrument is
+24V (B24V) power supply indicator (D2): green. It is lit when the instrument is
Function indicators:
Probe vertical obstruction indicator (D33): green. It is lit when the reagent probe
is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it is
extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working normally.
Reagent probe level sense indicator (D32): green. It is lit when the instrument
works normally and the reagent probe detects the fluid level; and it is
extinguished when the instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the
reagent probe fails to detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not
installed.
Sample probe vertical obstruction indicator (D34): green. It is lit when the sample
probe is collided with an obstacle or disconnected from the level sense board; and it
is extinguished when the instrument is powered off, hibernating or working
normally.
Sample probe level sense indicator (D35): green. It is lit when the instrument works
normally and the sample probe detects the fluid level; and it is extinguished when
the instrument is powered off or hibernating, or when the sample probe fails to
detect the fluid level, or the level sense board is not installed.
Reagent probe interior wash valve SV12 indicator (D51): green. It is lit when SV12
is turned on, and vice versa.
Reagent probe exterior wash valve SV15 indicator (D50): green. It is lit when SV15
Reagent probe wash vacuum valve SV17 indicator (D49): green. It is lit when SV17
Sample probe interior wash valve SV11 indicator (D48): green. It is lit when
SV11 is turned on, and vice versa.
Sample probe exterior wash valve SV14 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when
SV14 is turned on, and vice versa.
Sample probe wash vacuum valve SV16 indicator (D44): green. It is lit when SV17
Reagent inner carousel indicator (D25): green. When the reagent carousel cover is
closed, it is lit, and vice versa.
Reagent outer carousel indicator(D24): green. When the reagent carousel button is
pressed down, it is lit, and vice versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the control drive board can signal tests be performed.
+24V(B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6 26.4V
DC.
+12V(C12V) power supply: test point of +12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4 12.6V
DC.
A+12V(D12V) power supply: test point of A+12V. Normal voltage range: 11.4
12.6V DC.

13 Hardware System
A-12V(E12V) power supply: test point of A-12V. Normal voltage range: -11.4
-12.6V DC.
3.3V power supply: test point of +3V3. Normal voltage range: 3.24V 3.47V DC.
Table 13.1 Running voltage and sustaining voltage of the test points
Description of Test points Running Voltage Sustaining
the test point Voltage
Reagent carousel MVREF1 0.72 0.88V 0.45 0.55V
motor reference
voltage
Reagent probe MVREF2 1.80 2.20V 1.12 1.38V
vertical motor
reference voltage
Reagent probe MVREF3 1.44 1.76V 0.9 1.1V
horizontal motor
reference voltage
Reagent syringe MVREF4 1.3 1.59V 0.81 0.99V
motor reference
voltage
Sample syringe MVREF6 1.3 1.59V 0.81 0.99V
motor reference
voltage
Sample probe MVREF7 1.44 1.76V 0.9 1.1V
horizontal motor
reference voltage
Sample probe MVREF8 1.80 2.20V 1.12 1.38V
vertical motor
reference voltage

Prior to removing the PCBA, disconnect the instrument from the power supply to
prevent arcing and component damage due to hot swapping.
Before removing the PCBA, wear a pair of antistatic gloves or wrist straps to prevent
antistatic damage on it.
Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA, especially when
the PCBAs bracket is restored.
properly.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J10 and J12. Hold the
PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging these connectors to prevent it from
being deformed or damaged.
When plugging/unplugging motor cables, exercise caution to prevent damaging the
aluminum electrolytic capacitor near the connectors.

13 Hardware System
13.6.4 BM10 Control Drive Board (MS)

The BM10 control drive board (MS,) (051-001413-00) drives and controls the
dispersion dispensing unit, and dispersion carousel ..
Receiving position sensor signals and coder signals from various execution
mechanisms.
Controlling the interior/exterior wash valves of the sample probe unit and reagent
probe unit.
Connected with the fluidics temperature board ;sending control signal to fluidics
temperature control to control the on-off of the probe washing valve.
The figure below shows the relation between the BM10 control drive board (MS) and

13 Hardware System
Dispensing elevating home

position sensor
Dispensing syringe home
position sensor
substrate syringe home
position senor
Dispensing elevating motor
Substrate dispensing motor
Dispensing syringe motor
Dispersion mixing
Substrate panel button 1
Substrate panel button 2
Substrate status indicator 1
Substrate status indicator 2 Dispersion

Substrate switching dispensing
Main valve.SV30 syringe
control
Substrate inlet valve .SV31
unit
BM10 control drive Substrate outlet valveSV32
board(MS) Dispersion phase 1 outlet
valve .SV24
Dispersion phase 2 outlet
valve .SV25
valveSV26
valve SV27
valve.SV20
valve.SV21
valve.SV22
DC power valve.SV23
suuply
conversion Dispersion carousel home
board position sensor Dispersion
Dispersion Code disk carousel
Sensor
unit
Dispersion carousel motor
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the BM10 control drive board (MS)is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.7 PCB layout of BM10 control drive board MS
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
J18
J9
Unit LED J19
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 Clot LED
LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6 6 7 8 9 10
J5 J4 J3 J2 J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 J22
Connectors
The BM10 control drive board (MS) contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Value
1 A+12V 11.4 12.6V
2 +5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 +12V 11.4 12.6V
4 +24V 23.5 - 26V
5 +24V 23.5 - 26V
6 A-12V -11.4 - -12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

Main control connector(J10): 40 pin. Used for 2 MCU units(dispersion dispensing
unit and dispersion carousel unit.)
Air bubble detection board connector(J3): 10Pin. Used for the communication of
dispersion dispensing unit with air bubble detection board.

13 Hardware System
coder signals of the two units (Dispersion dispensing unit and dispersion carousel
unit).
Motor connector(J13-J17):4 pin. Used for the drive of the four step motors. J13 is for
dispensing motor, J14 for dispensing syringe motor,J15 for substrate dispensing
pump and J17 for dispersion carousel motor.
Brushless DC motor connector (J2/J24):8 pin, used for the controlling of reagent
probe interior wash valve, reagent probe exterior wash valve, reagent probe wash
vacuum valve and sample probe interior wash valve.
Valve control connector(J5):8 pin. Used for the controlling of substrate switching
valve SV30 substrate inlet valve SV31 and substrate outlet valve SV32.
Valve drive connector(J22):8 pin. Used for the controlling and drive of the
dispersion outlet valve of phase 1-4 SV20-23.
The BM10 control drive board (MS) contains the following switches and jumpers.
Indicators
The BM10 control drive board (MS) contains the following indicators.
Dispersion phase 1 outlet valve SV24 indicator (D51): green. It is lit when SV12 is
turned on, and vice versa.

13 Hardware System
Dispersion phase 1 dispensing valve SV20 indicator (D45): green. It is lit when SV20
Test points
DC.
DC.
12.6V DC.
-12.6V DC.
Reference MVREF1 0.95 1.17V 0.36 0.44V
voltage for the
Dispersion
dispensing motor
voltage for the
Dispersion
dispensing
syringe motor
Substrate pump MVREF3 1.72 2.11V 0.72 0.88V
motor reference
voltage
Dispersion MVREF5 1.44 1.76V 0.9 1.1V
carousel motor
reference voltage


13 Hardware System
properly.
13.6.5 BM10 Control Drive Board (LD)

The BM10 control drive board (LD) (051-001413-00) drives and controls the auto load
unit and second gripper .
mechanisms.
Electromagnet for the auto load drawer
Control of the DC motor of reaction liquid mixing
The figure below shows the relation between the BM10 control drive board (LD) and

13 Hardware System
Auto load drawer indicator
Drawer open-close
electromagnetic lock
Home position sensor in
feeding position
Drawer open-close sensor
Home position sensor of
substrate syringe
Working position sensor
Tray counting sensor

Guide Rail Open/Close home
position sensor Auto
Pusher home position
sensor
loader
unit
Feeding position sensor
Unloading home position
sensor
Waste full sensor
Main Tray feeding motor

control
Tray pusher motor
board
BM10 Control drive Guide rail clip motor
board(MS)
Tray unloading motor
Vortexer motor
Vortexer home position Vortexer
motor
Second gripper vertical

motor
Second gripper vertical
motor
Second gripper finger motor
DC Second gripper vertical middle
position sensor
power
Second gripper vertical home
supply position sensor Second
convers Second gripper horizontal home gripper
ion position sensor
unit
board
Second gripper coder sensor
Second gripper empty gripping

sensor
Second gripper finger open-close
sensor
Second gripper finger anti bumping
sensor
Description
PCB layout
The PCB layout of the BM10 control drive board (LD)is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.8 PCB layout of BM10 control drive board LD
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
J18
J9
Unit LED J19
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 Clot LED
LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6 6 7 8 9 10
J5 J4 J3 J2 J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 J22
Connectors
The BM10 control drive board (LD) contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Value
1 A+12V 11.4 12.6V
2 +5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 +12V 11.4 12.6V
4 +24V 23.5 - 26V
5 +24V 23.5 - 26V
6 A-12V -11.4 - -12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

Main control connector(J10): 40 pin. Used for 2 MCU units(auto load unit and
second gripper unit.)
Brushless DC motor of reaction liquid mixing connector(J2) :10 pin. Used for the
controlling of PWM,BRAKE and DIR of DC motor of reaction liquid mixing connector
and receiving SPEED signal.

13 Hardware System
coder signals of the two units (auto load unit and second gripper unit).
Motor connector(J13-17): 4 pin. Used to drive 8 step motors. J13 is for the tray load
motor, J14 for tray push motor, J15 for guide track clip motor, J16 for tray unload
motor, J17 for reaction liquid mixing motor, J19 for second gripper horizontal motor
and J20 for second gripper finger motor.
Electromagnetic lock connector(J24):8 pin used for controlling of the
electromagnet of drawer.
Panel LED connector(J23):8 pin used for the controlling of the panel LED.

The BM10 control drive board (LD) contains the following switches and jumpers.
Indicators
The BM10 control drive board (LD) contains the following indicators.
Front panel of the auto load drawer J3 indicator(D16): green. When J3 is turned on,
it is lit and vice versa.
Electromagnet drive indicator of the drawer (D18): green. When the electromagnet
is opened, it is lit. and vice versa.
Test points
DC.
DC.

13 Hardware System
12.6V DC.
-12.6V DC.
Tray load motor MVREF1 0.47 0.59V 0.36 0.44V
reference voltage
Tray push motor MVREF2 1.44 1.76V 0.9 1.1V
reference voltage
voltage of guide
track clip motor
Tray unload MVREF4 1.44 1.76V 0.9 1.1V
motor reference
voltage
voltage of
reaction liquid
mixing
voltage of second
gripper vertical
motor
voltage of second
gripper
horizontal motor
voltage of second
gripper finger
motor

properly.

13 Hardware System
13.6.6 BM10 Control Drive Board (CP)

The BM10 control drive board (CP) (051-001413-00) drives and controls the reaction
carousel unit and first gripper .
mechanisms.
Controlling the indicators
Controlling the buttons
The figure below shows the relation between the BM10 control drive board (CP) and

13 Hardware System
Reaction carousel home

position sensor
Coder Sensor of Reaction
Carousel Reaction
carousel
Reaction motor
Waste container indicator on

the front panel
Waste container indicator 1
Waste container indicator 2
Waste container button 1
Waste container button 2
First gripper X axis motor
Main First gripper Y axis motor

control BM10 control drive First gripper Z axis motor
board board(CP)
First gripper finger motor
X axis calibration position First
sensor
gripper
X axis home position sensor unit
Y axis calibration position
sensor
Z axis calibration position
sensor
Z axis home position sensor
Z axis vertical anti bumping
DC sensor
First gripper finger open-
conversion close sensor
board First gripper empty gripping sensor
Waste container 1 sensor
Waste container 2 sensor
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the BM10 control drive board (CP)is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.9 PCB layout of BM10 control drive board CP
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
J18
J9
Unit LED J19
J8
Power Key J20
Lid Press
LED Sensor
J7 Clot LED
LED
LED LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6 6 7 8 9 10
J5 J4 J3 J2 J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 J22
Connectors
The BM10 control drive board (CP) contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
Value
1 A+12V 11.4 12.6V
2 +5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 +12V 11.4 12.6V
4 +24V 23.5 - 26V
5 +24V 23.5 - 26V
6 A-12V -11.4 - -12.6V
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

Main control connector(J10): 40 pin. Used for 2 MCU units(reaction carousel unit
and first gripper unit.)
Air bubble detection board connector(J3): 10Pin. Used for the communication of
dispersion dispensing unit with air bubble detection board.

13 Hardware System
coder signals of the two units (reaction carousel unit and first gripper unit).
Optical coupler detection connector (J28):20 pin, used for the signal detection of
first gripper.
Motor connector(J13-J17): used to drive the four step motors. J13 is for reaction
carousel motor, J15 for X axis motor of first gripper, J16 for Y axis motor of first
gripper, J17 for Z axis motor of first gripper, J18 for finger motor of first gripper.
Electromagnetic lock connector(J24):8 pin used for controlling of indicator J2 on
the panel in front of the cuvette waste container.
Panel button/LED indicator(J23): 8 pin used for the controlling of indicator 1 and 2
and button 1 and 2 of the waste containers.

The BM10 control drive board (CP) contains the following switches and jumpers.
Indicators
The BM10 control drive board (CP) contains the following indicators.
Drive indicator of waste container indicator 1(D16): green. It is lit when SV12 is
Drive indicator of waste container indicator 2(D17): green. It is lit when SV15 is
Drive indicator (D19) of panel indicator in front of the waste container : green. It
is lit when SV17 is turned on, and vice versa.
Test points

13 Hardware System
DC.
DC.
12.6V DC.
-12.6V DC.
Reagent carousel MVREF1 0.71 0.87V 0.45 0.55V
motor reference
voltage
voltage of X axis
motor of first
gripper
Reference MVREF4 1.72V-2.12V 0.9 1.1V
voltage of Y axis
motor of first
gripper
voltage of Z axis
motor of first
gripper
voltage of first
gripper finger
motor

properly.

13 Hardware System
13.6.7 Reagent Refrigeration Board

The reagent refrigeration board is relatively independent in the entire hardware system
and has the following major functions:
Refrigeration control and drive: controlling the switch of the radiators and
refrigerating the reagent compartment to keep the temperature within certain
range.
Control of the refrigeration temperature indicator.
Control of cooling fans and demisting.
Monitoring working voltage of the PCBA.
The functional diagram of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.
Temperature sensor 1 Temperature sensor 3
Reagent
chamber Ambient Refrigeration
Refrigeration
temperature temperature temperature PC
drive monitoring monitoring
display
4 coolers Main
Serial
control
poprt
Cooler board
Reagent
current
refrigeration
monotorin
MCU
g
Demisting
circuit Bar code
port demisting
Fan
Condensate fan monitor Voltage
convers Voltage
Refrigeration ing
Fan ion monitoring
chamber duct fan
port
Vacuum pump fan
Cooling fan Power
supply
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the reagent refrigeration board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
J17 J18 J19 J20 J21 J22

J16 D9 D8
D93 D81 D91 D92
D83 D82 0 9

J14 S1

J1

J2
J9
D7 D7 D5 D5
5 4 4 5
J7 J6 J5 J4
Connectors
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input connectors (J1, J2, J22): providing refrigeration, B12V
refrigeration and B24V fan for the PCBAs.
Connector Pin No. Signal Reference Description
Value
J1 1, 2 B12V 11.4 Refrigeration power
12.6V supply input:
3, 4 GND 0 used for loading the
corresponding radiators
J1/J2.
J2 1, 2 B12V 11.4 Refrigeration power
12.6V supply input: used for
loading the corresponding
3, 4 GND 0
radiators J3/J4 and the
PCBA.
J22 1 NC NC /
5 NC NC
4 B24V 23.8 24V power supply input
25.2V for cooling fans.
8 GND 0
Radiator connectors (J4-J7): providing power supply for the radiators.
Connector Pin Signal Reference Value
No.

13 Hardware System

No.
J4~J7 1 1 cooler 0V for ON and 12V for
OFF.
3 12V
2 NC /
4 /
Demisting circuit connector (J9): providing power supply for the demisting heater.
No.
J9 1 1 demisting 12V
2 heaters /
3 /
4 0
Temperature sensor connectors (J14, J16): checking temperature of the
refrigeration compartment and refrigeration board.
Connector Pin Signal Reference
No. Value
J14 1 Shielding ground 0V
2 GND 0V
3 Ambient temperature /
sensor signal
J16 1 Shielding ground 0V
2 GND 0V
3 Temperature sensor signal /
of the refrigeration
compartment
Fan connector (J18): providing 24V power supply for the radiating fan and checking
the fan status.
No. Value
J18 1 B24V 24V
2 Feedback signal of Below 0.5V
radiating fan 1
3 GND 0V
4 B24V 24V
5 Feedback signal of Below 0.5V
radiating fan 2
6 GND 0V
Fan connector (J19): providing 24V power supply for the radiating fan and vacuum
pump and checking the fan status.
No.
J19 1 B24V 24V

13 Hardware System

No.
2 Feedback signal of below 0.5V
radiating fan 3
3 GND 0V
4 B24V 24V
5 Vacuum pump fan s below 0.5V
feedback signal
6 GND 0V
Fan connector (J20): providing 24V power supply for the cooling fans and checking
the fan status.
No.
J20 1 B24V 24V
refrigeration module's
cooling fan
3 GND 0V
4 B24V 24V
refrigeration chamber
duct fan 1
6 GND 0V
Fan connector (J21): providing 24V power supply for the cooling fans and checking
the fan status.
No.
J21 1 B24V 24V
2 Feedback signal of reagent below 0.5V
compartment condensate
fan
3 GND 0V
4 B24V 24V
refrigeration chamber
duct fan 2
6 GND 0V

Main control board serial port (J17): 8-pin, used for communicating with the main
control board.
Switches
The reagent refrigeration board contains the following switches.
RST key (S1): used to reset the CPU of the PCBA.
Indicators

13 Hardware System
The reagent refrigeration board includes the following indicators.

Power supply:
No. Description Color Description
D45 B24V Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
D48 VCC Green When it is lit, it indicates that the
D49 VDD Green When it is lit, it indicates that the

D55 Indicating status of Green When it is lit, it indicates that
the cooler the cooler is working.
D83 Status of radiating Red When it is lit, it indicates that
fan 1 the fan goes wrong.
D81 Status of vacuum Red When it is lit, it indicates that
pump fan the fan goes wrong.
D92 Status of the Red When it is lit, it indicates that
radiating fan of the the fan goes wrong.
refrigeration
module
D91 Status of Red When it is lit, it indicates that
refrigeration the fan goes wrong.
chamber duct fan 1
D89 Status of reagent Red When it is lit, it indicates that
compartment the fan goes wrong.
condensate fan
D90 Status of Red When it is lit, it indicates that
refrigeration the fan goes wrong.
chamber duct fan 2

13 Hardware System

properly.
Check other connectors and ensure that they are inserted into the end of the
slots.
13.6.8 Temperature collection board

The CL-2000i has one temperature collection board, which collects the sensor signals of
the reaction carouse temperature, substrate heating and outputs them to the fluidics
temperature control board.
The functional diagram of the temperature collection board is as shown below.
Temperature
Fluidics Temperature sensor 1
temperature Temperature
control
collection sensor 2
board Temperature
board
sensor 3
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the temperature collection board is as shown below.
Connectors
The temperature collection board contains the following connectors.

13 Hardware System
Connectors (J1) for reaction carousel temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to connect the
reaction carousel temperature sensor with the temperature detection circuit.
Pin No. Signal I/O Description Valid Level and
Name Type
1 SHIELD / Shielded wire of /
sensor
2 REF I Signal cable of /
sensor
3 PT1000 I Signal cable of /
sensor
Connectors (J2) for dispersion temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to connect the
dispersion temperature sensor with the temperature detection circuit.
Name Type
sensor
sensor
sensor
Connectors (J2) for substrate heating temperature sensor: 3-pin. Used to connect the
substrate temperature sensor with the temperature detection circuit.

Name Type
sensor
sensor
sensor
Power supply and communication connector for temperature collection board (J9):
20-pin. Used to connect the reaction carousel temperature collection board and the wash
temperature control board.
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level
and Type
1 +24V (reserved) / Positive pole of /
heater
heater
heater
heater
5 HEATER(Reserved) / Negative pole of /
heater

13 Hardware System
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level

and Type
heater
heater
heater
9 RST I Reset control 5V TTL
10 RXD I Received 5V TTL
through serial
port
11 ISP I Download 5V TTL
control
12 TXD O Sent through 5V TTL
serial port
13 AGND O Analog ground /
14 NC / / /
15 NC / / /
16 NC / / /
17 NC / / /
18 VPP / 12V power /
supply input
19 AGND / Analog ground /
20 SHIELD / Shielding ground /
Indicators
The temperature collection board contains the following indicators.
+12V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +12V
power supply has been connected.
+5V power supply indicator (D2): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +5V
+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the +3.3V
PCB status (D5): orange. When the PCB is normal, the indicator will flash shortly for
4 times and then go out for a relatively long time, with the flashing and going out
repeated.
Test points
In the following positions of the temperature collection board can signal tests be
performed.
TP1: +12V power supply input. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP2: +5V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 5V5%, that is,
4.75 - 5.25V.
TP4: +3.3V power supply, secondary power supply. Normal range: 3.3V5%, that is,
3.14 - 3.47V.
TP5: reaction carousel temperature collection board ground.

13 Hardware System

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the end of the slots on the
PCBA. Check if the PCBA has been locked tightly.
It requires great force to plug/unplug the connectors. Hold the PCBA by its edge
while plugging/unplugging the connectors to prevent it from being deformed or
damaged.
13.6.9 Photon Counting Board

The photon counting board has the following major functions:
Controlling the light intensity of LED and monitoring of the LED light signal.
Counting the PMT high frequency pulse signal and sending the results to main
control board.
Adjusting the output voltage of the PMT high voltage power supply module.
The functional diagram of the photon counting board is as shown below.
Photometric
measurement module
FPGA counting
Voltage
LED drive adjustme
nt
connector
Light signal feedback
LED
light PMT
PD
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the photon counting board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.10 Top layer layout
J2
D9
D12
J3
D8
J5 D6
D10 J4
D7
Figure 13.11 Bottom layer layout
J7
Connectors
The photon counting board includes the following connectors.
LED light output connector(J3): used to supply the drive voltage to LED.
No.
J3 1 LED negative pin When LED is turned

13 Hardware System

No.
2 LED positive pin off, it is 0;when it is
turned on, the
voltage is below 3.8V.
3 Shielding ground /
LED light intensity input connector(J4): Collect the voltage signal of LED.
No.
J4 1 Signal 0~5V
2 +12V power supply 11.4 12.6V
3 Ground below 0.4V
4 Ground below 0.4V
5 Ground below 0.4V
6 -12V power supply -11.4~-12.6V
Communication control connector(J5), used to supply 12V voltage to the PCBS

and communicate with the main control board.
No.
J5 1 analog+12V power supply 11.4 12.6V
2 analog-12V power supply -11.4~-12.6V
3 analog+5V power supply 4.75 5.25V
4 Analog ground below 0.4V
5 Digital ground below 0.4V
6 Main control board interface serial /
port TX signal.
7 FPGA On-line download the data /
output signal
9 FPGA On-line download the clock /
signal
10 Low level asynchronous reset FPGA /
internal logic signal
11 Reserved input signal4 /
12 Reserved input signal5 /
15 analog-12V power supply -11.4~-12.6V
17 Analog below 0.4V
18 Photon counting start signal /
19 Photon counting finish signal /

13 Hardware System

No.
20 Main control board interface serial /
port RX signal
21 FPGA On-line download the clock /
signal
22 FPGA On-line download chip select /
signal
23 FPGA configure flash data write lock /
control signal
24 FPGA On-line download the enable /
buffer signal
PMT connector (J7): used to receive the high frequency pulse signal of PMT and
supply the high voltage control signal to high pressure board.
No.
J7 1 Ground below 0.4V
2 Ground below 0.4V
3 PMT input signal 0 5V
4 Ground below 0.4V
5 Ground below 0.4V
6 Ground below 0.4V
7 Ground below 0.4V
8 Ground below 0.4V
9 Ground below 0.4V
11 Ground below 0.4V
13 -12V power supply -11.4~-12.6V
14 High voltage control signal 0~5V
15 -12V power supply -11.4~-12.6V
18 Reserved signal /
Switches
The photon counting board includes the following switches.
RST key (S1): used to reset the FPGA of the PCBA.
Indicators
Power supply:

13 Hardware System

D6 +12V Red When it is lit, it indicates that the
D7 -12V Red When it is lit, it indicates that the
D8 VCC Red When it is lit, it indicates that the
D9 1.2V Red When it is lit, it indicates that the
D10 3.3V Red When it is lit, it indicates that the

D12 FPGA configuration Yellow When it is lit, it indicates FPGA
completed. configuration is completed.

properly.
slots.
After connecting J5 connector (DB25), tighten the retaining screws on two sides
of it.
13.6.10 PD pre-amplification board

The PD preamplifier board is intended to implement the following functions:
Converting optical signals into electric signals via a photodiode.
With the help of the back circuit, filtering signals and transmitting them to the
photon counting board after amplification.
The functional diagram of the PD preamplifier board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Light signal
PD
Signal
filtering and
amplifiying
PD pre-
amplification
board
Photon Counting Board
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the light source monitoring preamplifier board is as shown below.
Connectors
The light source monitoring preamplifier board only contains one connector (welded on
the PCBA), which is used to provide +12V and -12V power supplies for the preamplifier
board and transmits signal to the AD collection board.
Pin Signal Reference

number Value
1 Signal 0V-5V
2 +12V 11.4-12.6V
3 AGND /

13 Hardware System
4 AGND /
5 SGND /
6 -12V -11.4 ~-12.6V

The PD preamplifier board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators
The PD preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and has no
indicators.
Test points
The PD preamplifier board is encapsulated inside the photometer module and does not
need maintenance, and it therefore, has no test points.

Replace the PMT assembly.
13.6.11 High pressure board

The high pressure board is intended to implement the following functions:
Detecting pressure of the gas circuits, converting the detection results into digital
signals, and then sending them to the fluidics temperature control board via the
serial port.
Converting the PMT light signal to electric signal and outputting it after adjusting.
Supplying the drive voltage to PMT and adjusting the sensitivity of PMT through
adjusting the voltage.
Providing the proper working voltage to the dynodes of PMT probe.
The figure below shows the location of the high pressure board in the hardware system.
BM10 high Photon counting

PMT voltage board board
Functional diagram of high voltage board:

13 Hardware System
PMT high
voltage board
Shaping
Prime and High
Level
amplifier frequency frequency PMT
identification
board dividing pulse signal counting
PMT probe circuit board
Power supply
Voltage grading High voltage adjusting Control signal
circuit circuit
Feedback signal
Description
PCB layout
Figure 13.12 Top layer layout
J1
Figure 13.13 Bottom layer layout
J2
Connectors

13 Hardware System
Power supply and communication connector (J1): used for connecting with photon
counting board and supplying +12V/-12V voltage to PCBs ,outputting PMT signal and
receiving high pressure control signal.

No. Value
J1 1 Ground below 0.4V
2 Ground below 0.4V
3 PMT output signal 0~5V
4 Ground below 0.4V
5 Ground below 0.4V
6 Ground below 0.4V
7 Ground below 0.4V
8 Ground below 0.4V
9 Ground below 0.4V
10 +12V power supply 11.4 ~12.6V
12 +12V power supply 11.4 ~12.6V
13 -12V power supply -11.4 ~-12.6V
14 High voltage control signal 0 ~5V
15 -12V power supply -11.4 ~-12.6V
18 Reserved signal /
PMT high voltage control connector(J2): connecting with PMT and providing high
voltage drive for PMT and receiving the current signal from PMT.

No. Value
J2 1 Phase 2 voltage-dividing output /
2 Phase 4 voltage-dividing output /
6 NC /
7 NC /
8 PMT signal input /
14 High voltage control signal 0 ~5V

13 Hardware System

The board has no switches or jumpers.
Indicators and test points
Indicator: the board has no indicators.
Test points:
+12V power supply (+12V): with normal range of 11.4 - 12.6V.
-12V power supply (-12V): with normal range of -12.6 ~ -11.4V.
+5V power supply (VDD/+5V): with normal range of 4.8 ~ 5.2V.
-5V power supply (-5V): with normal range of --5.2V~-4.8.
Reference voltage(TP2): Normal range 4.8~5.2V.

Replace the PMT assembly.
13.6.12 Pressure detection board

The pressure detection board is intended to implement the following functions:
Detecting pressure of the gas circuits, converting the detection results into digital
signals, and then sending them to the fluidics temperature control board via the
serial port.
The figure below shows the location of the pressure detection board in the hardware
system.
Pressure
detection board
To be Fluidics
tested Pressure temperature
pressure sensor control board
channel
The functional diagram of the pressure detection board is as shown below.

Pressure detection board
MCU
Pressure Signal
senor processing AD Serial port Hydropneu
conversi
matics unit
on circuit
Description
PCB layout

13 Hardware System
J1
U1
Connectors
Power supply and communication connector (J1): DB9 connector, used for connecting
the wash temperature control board, providing +12V and -12V power supplies for the
PCBA, and serial port communication with the upper-level PCBA.
Pin No. Description Applicable Test Methods

1 +12V power supply The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 -
12.6V when the PCBA is working normally.
2 Serial port input The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
signal when the system status is Standby.
3 Serial port output The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
4 Online-downloading The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
enable signal when the system status is Standby.
5 Ground /
6 -12V power supply The voltage at this point lies between -12.6 -
-11.4V when the PCBA is working normally.

13 Hardware System
7 Reset signal The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V

when the system status is Standby.
8 Ground /
9 Ground /

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that the
MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the PCBA is
working normally.

Indicators:
+12V power supply indicator (VPP): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply is
working normally.
-12V power supply indicator (VEE): green. It is lit when the -12V power supply is
working normally.
+5V digital power supply indicator (VDD): green. It is lit when the +5V digital power
supply is working normally.
+5V analog power supply indicator (AVDD): green. It is lit when the +5V analog
power supply is working normally.
Test points:
+12V power supply (VPP): with normal range of 11.4 - 12.6V.
-12V power supply (VEE): with normal range of -12.6 - -11.4V.
+5V digital power supply (VDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.
+5V analog power supply (AVDD): with normal range of 4.8 - 5.2V.
Vacuum pressure test point (PRESSURE03): The voltage at this point lies between
0.1-0.3V when the pressure sensor is connected to the air.

Tighten the two retaining screws on two sides of connector J1, and insert connector
J2 properly into the PCBA.
When connecting the pressure sensors (U1) to the gas circuit, press them slightly
and connect them with proper force to avoid breaking the connectors.
Install the shielded cover after installing or repairing the PCBA.
13.6.13 Weight detection board

The weight detection board is intended to implement the following functions:
It detects the weight of weighing sensor , converting the detection results into
digital signals, and then sending them to the temperature control board via the
serial port.
The figure below shows the location of the weight detection board in the hardware
system.

13 Hardware System
Fluidics
6 weighing Weight detection temperature
sensors board control board
The functional diagram of the weight detection board is as shown below.
Voltage Power DC-

Power
monitoring DC input
conversion
TXD1
RXD1
ISP_EN Fluidics
RST
temperature
control board
MCU Signal
AD adjusti . 6 weighing

C ng . sensors

.
module
Weight
detection board
Description
PCB layout

13 Hardware System
J9 D3 D2 D1
TP10
D9
TP8
TP9
D8
J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6
Connectors
1 Digital ground The voltage at this point is below 0.4V when
the PCBA is working normally.
4 Reset signal The voltage at this point is above 2.4V when
5 Downloading The voltage at this point is below 4V when
enable signal the PCBA is working normally.
6 / /
7 / /
8 +12V The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 -
9 NC /
10 NC /
Weighing sensor connector 1(J1):6pin used to power the weighing sensor 1 and
receive the analog signal of weighing sensor 1.
Pin Description Test Methods
No.

13 Hardware System

No.
1 NC The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 - 12.6V
when the PCBA is working normally.
2 Digital ground The voltage at this point is below 0.4V when the
PCBA is working normally.
3 Weighing sensor The voltage at this point lies between 0 - 5V when
input signal the PCBA is working normally.
4 +5V power supply The voltage at this point lies between 4.75 - 5.25V

No.
1 NC The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 - 12.6V when
2 Digital ground The voltage at this point is below 0.4V when the PCBA is
working normally.
3 Weighing sensor The voltage at this point lies between 0 - 5V when the
input signal 2 PCBA is working normally.
4 +5V power supply The voltage at this point lies between 4.75 - 5.25V when

No.
working normally.

No.

13 Hardware System
2 Digital ground The voltage at this point is below 0.4V when the PCBA
is working normally.

No.

No.

Indicators:
+12V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply is
working normally.
working normally.
+3.3V power supply indicator (D1): green. It is lit when the +12V power supply is
working normally.
Software running indicator (D9): Yellow-green. When the software works normally,
it is flashing.
LED control indicator(D8): Red. When LED works normally, it is lit.

13 Hardware System
Test points:
+12V power supply (TP9): with normal range of 11.4 - 12.6V.
+3.3V power supply (TP10): with normal range of 3.14 - 3.46V.

13.6.14 Substrate air bubble detection board

The substrate air bubble detection board is intended to implement the following
functions:
It detects the substrate bubble through bubble detection sensor and sends the
detection results to the temperature control board of the hydro unit.
The figure below shows the location of the substrate air bubble detection board in the
hardware system.
2 substrate Fluidics
bubble Substrate bubble temperature
detection detection board control board
sensors
The functional diagram of the substrate air bubble detection board is as shown below.
Voltage
Power DC-DC
monitoring Power input
conversion
Dispensing bubble alarm
signal
Aspirating bubble alarm
signal
TXD1
RXD1
ISP_EN Fluidics
RST
temperature
control board
MCU Signal Substrate
adjusti dispensing bubble
ADC detection sensor
ng
Substrate
module aspirating bubble
detection sensor
Weight
detection
board

13 Hardware System
Description
PCB layout
J9 D3 D2 D1
TP10
D9
TP8
TP9
D8
J1 J2
Connectors
1 Digital ground The voltage at this point is below 0.4V when
4 Reset signal The voltage at this point is above 2.4V when
5 Downloading The voltage at this point is below 4V when
enable signal the PCBA is working normally.
6 Dispensing air The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
bubble alarm when the system status is Standby(no air
signal bubble alarm is given).
7 Aspirating air The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
bubble alarm when the system status is Standby(no air
signal bubble alarm is given).
8 +12V The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 -
9 NC /
10 NC /

13 Hardware System
Substrate air bubble sensor connector 1(J1):6pin used to power the substrate air
bubble sensor 1 and receive the analog signal of substrate air bubble sensor 1.

No.
1 NC The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 -
3 Substrate air The voltage at this point lies between 0 - 5V
bubble sensor when the PCBA is working normally.
input signal
Substrate air bubble sensor connector 2(J2):6pin used to power the substrate air
bubble sensor 2 and receive the analog signal of substrate air bubble sensor 2.

No.
1 NC The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 -
3 Substrate The voltage at this point lies between 0 - 5V
aspirating air when the PCBA is working normally.
bubble sensor
input signal

Indicators:
working normally.
working normally.
working normally.
it is flashing.
Test points:

13 Hardware System

13.6.15 Wash buffer air bubble detection board

The wash buffer air bubble detection board is intended to implement the following
functions:
It detects the air bubble of wash buffer, converting the detection results into digital
signals, and then sending them to the temperature control board via the serial port.
The figure below shows the location of the wash buffer air bubble detection board in the
hardware system.
Bubble Wash buffer

Fluidics temperature
detection bubble detection control board
sensor board
The functional diagram of the wash buffer air bubble detection board is as shown below.
Voltage Power DC-

Power
monitoring DC input
conversion
TXD1
RXD1
ISP_EN Fluidics
RST
temperature
control board
MCU Signal
AD adjusti Bubble
detection
C ng sensor
module
Wash buffer
bubble detection
board
Description
PCB layout

13 Hardware System
J9 D3 D2 D1
TP10
D9
TP8
TP9
D8
J7
Connectors
2 Serial port input The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the
signal system status is Standby.
3 Serial port output The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V when the
signal system status is Standby.
4 Reset signal The voltage at this point is above 2.4V when the PCBA
5 Downloading The voltage at this point is below 4V when the PCBA is
enable signal working normally.
6 / /
7 / /
8 +12V The voltage at this point lies between 11.4 - 12.6V
9 / /
10 / /
Wash buffer air bubble sensor connector(J7):6 pin used to power the wash buffer air
bubble sensor and receive its analog signal.
No.

13 Hardware System

No.
working normally.
3 Wash buffer air The voltage at this point lies between 0 - 5V when the
bubble sensor PCBA is working normally.
input signal

Indicators:
working normally.
working normally.
working normally.
it is flashing.
Test points:

13.6.16 Clog detection board

CL-2000i has 1 probe clog detection board used to detect the clogging of sample probe.
The clog detection board possesses the following functions:
Collecting pressure by connecting with the pressure sensor.
Checking for clogs under the control of the reagent control drive board.
Sending debugging information to the debugging computer.
The figure below shows the location of the clog detection board in the hardware system.

13 Hardware System
Sample control
Sensor Clog detection board
drive board
PC(for debugging
only)
The circuit diagram of the clog detection board is as shown below.
Voltage drive Power supply

Clogging Sample control
detection board drive board
Compensation ADC IO
Difference Single end and Serial port
and primary Difference
analog signal Secondaryanalog signal MCU
Sensor amplifying analog signal
amplifying PC
Serial port
Description
PCB layout
Connectors
Pressure sensor connector (J1): connected with the pressure sensor.
Pin No. Description Test Methods

13 Hardware System

1 Positive end input of /
pressure sensor
2 Positive end of power /
supply
3 Negative end of power /
supply
4 Negative end input of /
pressure sensor
5 NC /
6 NC
Clog detection board communication connector (J2): connected with the sample control
drive board and used for serial port communication between the clog detection board
and the sample probe unit.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V when
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
3 Serial port input signal The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
4 Serial port output signal The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
5 On-line downloading The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V
enable signal when the system status is Standby.
6 Reset signal The voltage at this point is greater than 2.4V
7 Ground /
8 Ground /
Clog detection board control connector (J3): connected with the reagent control drive
board and used for communicating control signals during clog detection process.
1 +12V power supply The voltage lies between 11.4-12.6V when the
2 -12V power supply /
(reserved)
3 Confirmed clog signal The voltage at this point is less than 0.4V when
no clog signal is detected.
4 Possible clog signal /
(reserved)
5 Empty aspirate signal /
(reserved)
6 Interruption control /
signal

13 Hardware System
7 Interruption enable /
signal
8 Ground /
9 Reserved input /
10 Reserved output /
Clog detection board debugging connector (J4): connected with the serial port of a
computer and used for debugging the clog detection system. This connector is
temporarily not used.

1 +12V power supply /
2 -12V power supply (reserved) /
3 Serial port input signal /
4 Serial port output signal /
5 Ground /

MCU downloading enable jumper (S2): When it is short-circuited, it indicates that the
MCU is downloading something. The jumper must be disconnected when the PCBA is
working normally.
Indicators
Clog signal indicator (D3): red. It is lit when the PCBA outputs a clog signal.
Empty aspirate signal indicator (D4): It is lit when the PCBA outputs an empty
aspirate signal.
Possible clog signal indicator (D5): It is lit when the PCBA outputs a possible clog
signal.
working normally.
working normally.
Test points
+12V power supply (VPP): The voltage at this point lies between 11.4-12.6V when
-12V power supply (VEE): reserved test point.
Ground (GND): This test point is connected with the grounding terminal of the
PCBA.
Pressure sensor output signal (ANALOG): It is an analog signal amplified by the
pressure sensor. When the pressure sensor is connected to the air, the voltage at this
point lies between 0.8-1.3V.
Clog signal (CLOG_Y): It is a test point of clog signal output. When the PCBA outputs
a clog signal, indicator D3 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V;
when the PCBA outputs no clog signal, indicator D3 will be extinguished and the
voltage at this point less than 0.4V.

13 Hardware System
Empty aspirate signal (NO_SAM):When the PCBA outputs an empty aspirate signal,
indicator D4 will be lit and the voltage at this point greater than 2.4V; when the
PCBA outputs no empty aspirate signal, indicator D4 will be extinguished and the
voltage at this point less than 0.4V.
Possible clog signal (CLOG_M): reserved test point.
Debugging test point (TEST): used for test during debugging.
Insert connectors J2 and J3 tightly into the PCBA. When inserting connector J1, you
will hear a click, which means that the connector is inserted in place into its slot.
13.6.17 Level sense board

CL-2000i has two liquid level sense boards: sample liquid level sense board and reagent
liquid level sense board. Their functions as follows :
Detecting the liquid level of sample and reagent. The circuit structure and interfaces
are same and can detect the liquid level stably.
Outputting level sense signals to the control drive board through the probe/mixer
conversion board when the probe contacts the fluid level. The probe is controlled to
insert into the fluid for about 2mm depth.
Providing vertical obstruction detection and outputting the detection signals to the
control drive board through the probe/mixer conversion board.
The functional diagram of the level sense board is as shown below.
Oscillator Level Vertical

dividing detection bumping
circuit circuit
board
Bumping signal
Phase Probe/ Control
Amplifying A/ Level signal Interface
Probe lock CPU mixer drive
filter circuit D Serial port circuit
loop board board
communication
signal
Description
PCB layout
The top layer of the level sense board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
J2 J3 D5 S1 J1
D2
D4
D6
The bottom view of the level sense board is as shown below.
TP1 TP6
TP5 TP11
TP2 TP7
TP4 TP10 TP8 TP3
TP9
S2
Connectors
The level sense board contains the following connectors.
Probe connector (J1): 2-pin, used for connecting the reagent probes with related circuit.
Pin No. Signal
1 GND
2 Probe capacitor
signal input
Power supply and signal output connector (J2): 4-pin, used to provide power supply for
the level sense board and output the level sense signal and vertical obstruction signal.
1 GND /
2 Vertical High level (about 4V) is output when no vertical obstruction
obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is output when vertical
signal obstruction happens.
output
3 Level sense Low level (about 0V) is output when the probe fails to
signal detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is output
output when the probe detects the fluid level.
4 +12V 11.4 ~12.6V
Serial port communication cable connector (J3): 3-pin, used for communication between
the level sense board and the control drive board.
Pin No. Signal
1 RXD
2 RST
3 TXD

13 Hardware System

The level sense board contains the following switches and jumpers.
PSEN enable jumper (S1): used for downloading application programs.
Calibrate key (S2): used for manual self-calibration of fluid level detection.
Jumper S1 must be disconnected in normal conditions.
Indicators
The level sense board contains the following indicators.
Level sense system calibration indicator (D2): yellow. It is extinguished when the
self-calibration of the level sense system fails, and vice versa. If it is lit, it indicates
that the calibration is complete and the level sense system is ready for
measurement. When the calibration is complete, the indicator will be lit all the time.
Sensitivity switch indicator (D4): red. It is extinguished when the default sensitivity
is being used, and vice versa, which means level sensing is performed in special
positions.
Level sense indicator (D5): green. It is extinguished when the probe fails to detect
the fluid level, and vice versa.
Vertical obstruction indicator (D6): green. It is extinguished when no vertical
obstruction occurs, and vice versa.
Test points
In the following positions of the level sense board can signal tests be performed.
TP1 (LEVEL): level sense signal output. Normal condition: Low level (about 0V) is
output when the probe fails to detect the fluid level, and high level (about 4V) is
output when the probe detects the fluid level.
TP2 (PLL): working point voltage of the level sense system. Normal range: 3.8
0.5V.
TP3ALEVEL analog fluid level Analog level sense signal, based on which
whether the fluid level is detected or not is determined.
TP4 (GND): grounding terminal of the level sense board.
TP5 (VCO): reserved.
TP6 (RAM): vertical obstruction signal output. Normal condition: High level (about
4V) is output when no vertical obstruction occurs, and low level (about 0V) is
output when vertical obstruction happens.
TP7 (PLL1): reserved.
TP8: voltage monitoring signal for self-calibration of the level sense system.
TP9 (CLK): reserved.
TP10: +9V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the internal
phase-locked loop and some operational amplifiers of the PCBA. Normal range: 9V
5%, that is, 8.55 - 9.45V.
TP11: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power most
components inside the PCBA, such as micro control unit (MCU). Normal range: 5V
5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.


13 Hardware System
PCBA.
damaged.
13.6.18 Probe/Mixer conversion board

The five-probe/mixer conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Shifting signals between the reagent control drive board and the reagent probe
level sense board.
Shifting signals between the reagent control drive board and the sample probe
level sense board.
Shifting signals between the auto load control drive board and empty gripping
optical coupler signal of the second gripper.
Shifting signals between the auto load control drive board and turning on optical
coupler signal of the second gripper.
Shifting signals between the auto load control drive board and vertical
anti-bumping optical coupler signal of the second gripper.
Shifting signals between the auto load control drive board and finger motor signal of
the second gripper.
Description
The PCB layout of the probe/mixer conversion board is as shown below.
Connectors
J2: sample probe level sense connector for the reagent control drive board.
J3: reagent probe level sense connector for the reagent control drive board.
The signals of connectors J2 and J3 are shown in the table below.
Pin No. Signal Name I/O Description Valid Level and

Type
2 RAMn O Vertical obstruction signal TTL
3 LLSn O Level sense signal TTL
4 DVPP / Power supply D12V /
5 EVPP / Power supply E12V /
6 TXD-Ln I Serial port sending signal TTL
7 RST-Ln I Reset signal (reserved) TTL

13 Hardware System
8 RXD-Ln O Serial port received signal TTL

9 PSEN-Ln I Downloading enable signal TTL
(reserved)
10 / Shielding ground /
J4: Connector of the second gripper empty gripping sensor of reagent control drive
board
J5: Connector of the second gripper turn-on sensor of reagent control drive board.
J6: Connector of the second gripper vertical anti bumping sensor of reagent control
drive board.
The signals of connectors J4, J5 and J6 are shown in the table below.

Type
1 VCC / Power supply A5V /
2 PHO I Sensor TTL
3 GND / Ground /
4 GND / Ground /
J7: Connector of the second gripper finger motor of reagent control drive board.
The signals of connectors J7 is shown in the table below.

Type
1 A+ I Winding A+ 0/24V
2 A- I Winding A- 0/24V
3 B+ I Winding B+ 0/24V
4 B- I Winding B- 0/24V
J8: Second gripper finger motor and vertical anti-bumping sensor connector:

Type
2 PHO I Second gripper vertical TTL
anti-bumping sensor
3 GND / Ground /
4 GND / Ground /
6 A+ I Winding A+ 0/24V
7 A- I Winding A- 0/24V
8 B+ I Winding B+ 0/24V
9 B- I Winding B- 0/24V
J9: Connector for the second gripper finger opening and empty gripping sensor

13 Hardware System

Type
2 PHO I Empty gripping sensor of TTL
the second gripper finger
3 GND / Ground /
4 GND / Ground /
7 PHO I Finger opening sensor of the TTL
second gripper
8 GND / Ground /
9 GND / Ground /
J10: connector for the sample probe level sense board.
J11: connector for the reagent probe level sense board.
The signals of connectors J10 and J 11 is shown in the table below.
Type
2 RAMn O Vertical obstruction signal TTL
3 LLSn O Level sense signal TTL
4 DVPP / Power supply D12V /
5 EVPP / Power supply E12V /
6 TXD-Ln I Serial port sending signal TTL
7 RXD-Ln O Serial port received signal TTL
8 NC NC NC NC

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA. The PCBA is narrow
and fragile. Hold the PCBA by its edge while plugging/unplugging the connectors to
prevent it from being deformed or damaged.
13.6.19 External vacuum pump drive board

The external vacuum pump drive board is located inside the external vacuum pump
module and intended to:
Receive the vacuum pump control signals and drive/control the external AC vacuum
pump.
Provide drive connectors for two AC fans.
Description
The schematic diagram of the external vacuum pump drive board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
External vacuum
pump drive board
Switch with indicator Relay
Protective tube Analyzing unit
+12V
AC input Protective tube
Wash
CONTROL Temperature
Control Board
Vacuum
Fan 1 Fan 1
pump
The PCB layout of the vacuum pump drive board is as shown below.
Connectors
J1: connector for external AC 220V/110V input.
No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L
J2/J3: connectors for AC fan power supply output.
No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L
J4: connectors for AC air pump power supply output.

No. Description
1 220V/110V AC N
2 NC
3 220V/110V AC L

13 Hardware System
J5: connector for AC air pump control signal input.

No. Description
1 OUT_PUMP_CTRL
2 NC
3 +12V
Indicators
Indicators for sending/receiving communication signals:
AC air pump control signal indicator (D2): red. When it is lit, it indicates that the AC air
pump control signal is valid and the air pump is working normally.
13.6.20 Communication conversion board

The communication conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Providing connectors for the main control board: serial port, network interface, and
USB interface.
Providing connectors for the control console (computer): standard DB9 serial port,
RJ45 network interface, and standard USB interface.
Shifting, isolating and protecting the signals received at the connectors connecting the
main control board and the control console.
Description
The communication adapter board is intended for the following functions:
Providing connectors for the main control board: serial port, network interface, and
USB interface.
Providing connectors for the control console (computer): standard DB9 serial port,
RJ45 network interface, and standard USB interface.
Shifting, isolating and protecting the signals received at the connectors connecting
the main control board and the control console.
Description
The PCB layout of the communication conversion board is as shown below.
Top view:
Bottom view:
Connectors
J1: USB interface to connect a computer. (Reserved)
J2: DB9 serial port to connect a computer.
J3: serial port communication interface to connect the main control board.
J4: USB interface to connect the main control board.
J5: standard RJ45 network interface to connect a computer.
J6: Ethernet interface to connect the main control board.

13 Hardware System
Description
The PCB layout of the communication conversion board is as shown below.
Figure 13.14 Top view:
Figure 13.15 Bottom view:
Connectors
J1: USB interface to connect a computer. (Reserved)
J2: DB9 serial port to connect a computer.
J3: serial port communication interface to connect the main control board.
J4: USB interface to connect the main control board.
J5: standard RJ45 network interface to connect a computer.
J6: Ethernet interface to connect the main control board.
Indicators
N/A
13.6.21 FPC conversion board

FPC is used to transfer the optical coupler and motor on the first gripper assembly to
Mixed Control Driver Board. FPC includes Z-FPC, Y-FPC and X-FPC. Z-FPC transfers the
signal of first gripper's empty gripping, anti-bumping opening optical coupler and
finger motor to Y-FPC via golden finger; Y-FPC transfers the signal of Z-FPC plus the
signal of Z axis home and calibration position optical couplers and Z axis motor to X-FPC
through the connector; The B end of X-FPC transfers the Y-FPC signal plus the signal of Y
axis home and calibration position optical couplers to the A end of X-FPC. The A end of
X-FPC collects the signal of Y axis motor, Z axis motor and finger motor and the signal of
two optical couplers of Y and Z axis, and three optical couplers of the gripper finger.
These signals are transferred to the mixed control board three the wires.

13 Hardware System
Optical
coupler1
Motor 1
Optical
coupler2
Z-FPC
VCC
GND
Optical
SR1
coupler3
SR2
A1+
B1+
A1-
B1-
GND
VCC
GND
SR3
Gold finger
SR3
GND
VCC
GND
SR2
SR1
GND
VCC
Y-FPC B-
B+
A-
A+
J10
J10 J9
J8
Optical Optical Motor 2
coupler 5 coupler4
Optical
coupler J1
Optical
coupler J2 6
Motor 3
7
VCC
GND
GND
SR5
SR4
X-FPC-B
VCC
GND
GND
SR7
SR6
Motor 1 Motor 2 Motor3

5 4 3 2 1
J5 J6 J7
SR5\SR4\SR3
SR6\SR7\SR1\SR2
X-FPC-A

13 Hardware System
Description
PCB layout
Figure 13.16 PCB of Z-FPC
Figure 13.17 PCB reinforcing board 1 of Y-FPC

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.18 PCB reinforcing board 2 of Y-FPC
Figure 13.19 PCB reinforcing board 1 of X-FPC

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.20 PCB reinforcing board 2 of X-FPC
Connectors
Connectors of X-FPC
Connectors Pin No. Signal Connectors Pin No.

J1 1 A3+ J7 1
2 A3- 2
3 B3+ 3
4 B3- 4
J8 1,2, 3,4, 5,6, 7and 8 B2- J6: 4
9,10, 11,12, 13,14, B2+ 3
and 15,16
17,18, 19,20, 21,22, A2- 2
and 23,24
25,26, 27,28, 29,30, A2+ 1
and 31,32
33,34 /
35,36, 37,38, 39,40, A1+ J5 1
and 41,42
43,44, 45,46, 47,48, A1- 2
and 49,50
51,52, 53,54, 55,56, B1+ 3
and 57,58
59,60, 61,62, 63,64, B1- 4
and 65,66

13 Hardware System

67,68, 69,70, 71,72, /
and 73,74
75,76 VCCG J4 9
77,78 GND 7
79,80 SR_PHO1 5
81,82 SR_PHO2 3
83,84 GND 1
85,86 VCCG 4
87,88 GND 6
89,90 SR_PHO3 8
91,92 SR_PHO4 10
93,94 GND 12
95,96 VCCZ 14
97,98 GND 16
99,100 SR_PHO5 18
101,102 / 2
J2 4 SR_PHO6 19
2,3 GND 17
1 VCCY 15
J3 1
2,3 GND 13
4 SR_PHO7 11
Connectors of Y-FPC

J5 1,2, 3,4, 5,6, and B2- J1 4
7,8
9,10, 11,12, B2+ 3
13,14, and 15,16
17,18, 19,20, A2- 2
21,22, and 23,24
25,26, 27,28, A2+ 1
29,30, and 31,32
33,34 /
35,36, 37,38, A1+ J4 1,23,45
39,40, and 41,42
43,44, 45,46, A1- 6,78,910
47,48, and 49,50
51,52, 53,54, B1+ 11,1213,1415
55,56, and 57,58
59,60, 61,62, B1- 16,17,8,19,20
63,64, and 65,66

13 Hardware System

67,68, 69,70, / 21,22, 23,24,
71,72, and 73,74 25,26, and 27,28
75,76 VCCG 29
77,78 GND 30
79,80 SR_PHO1 31
81,82 SR_PHO2 32
83,84 GND 33
85,86 VCCG 34
87,88 GND 35
89,90 SR_PHO3 36
91,92 SR_PHO4 J3 4
93,94 GND 2,3
95,96 VCCZ 1
1
97,98 GND 2,3
99,100 SR_PHO5 4
Connectors of Z-FPC
Golden finger 1,2,3,4,5 A1+ J1 1
6,7,8,9,10 A1- 2
11,12,13,14,15 B1+ 3
16,17,18,19,20 B1- 4
21,22, 23,24, 25,26, /
and 27,28
29 VCCG J2 1
30 GND 2,3
31 SR_PHO1 4
32 SR_PHO2 J3 4
33 GND 2,3
34 VCCG 1
J4 1
35 GND 2,3
36 SR_PHO3 4
FPC connectivity test

Connect the three sections and test their connectivity as a whole unit.
Signal Name Test points Test resistance value()
A1+ J5.1 of X-FPC to <10
J1.1 of Z-FPC
A1- J5.2 of X-FPC to <10
J1.2 of Z-FPC

13 Hardware System
Signal Name Test points Test resistance value()

B1+ J5.3 of X-FPC to <10
J1.3 of Z-FPC
B1- J5.4 of X-FPC to <10
J1.4 of Z-FPC
J1.1 of Y-FPC
J1.1 of Y-FPC
J1.2 of Y-FPC
J1.3 of Y-FPC
J1.4 of X-FPC
J1.2 of Y-FPC
J1.3 of X-FPC
J1.4 of X-FPC
SR1 J4.5 of X-FPC to <10
J2.4 of Z-FPC
J3.4 of Z-FPC
J4.4 of Z-FPC
J3.4 of Y-FPC
J2.4 of Y-FPC
J2.4 of X-FPC
J3.4 of X-FPC
VCC J4.4 of X-FPC to <10
J4.1 of Z-FPC
GND J4.1 of X-FPC to <10
J4.2 of Z-FPC

13 Hardware System

During installation and replacement, take caution not to damage it with sharp object or
erosive liquid. Place it horizontally and do not twist it. During transportation, use special
device for protection. The connectors on the FPC are mainly surface mounting parts.
Plug or unplug the connectors gently, and take caution not to damage them. Z-FPC has a
compulsive turn angle. Do not pull it with force otherwise it will be torn. If screw is used
to fix this part, the screw should not be too long to pierce the FPC. X-FPC has a lot of
optical coupler wires connecting with the control board. Plug or unplug them gently,
and take caution not to damage the connectors. When install or replace the parts, power
off the analyzer.
13.6.22 BM10 optical coupler conversion board

Optical coupler conversion board is used to fix the optical coupler to PCB with screws.
The figure shows one optical coupler U1, four pins: K (diode cathode), A(diode anode),
E(triode emitter ) and C(the collector of triode )
Figure 13.21 Schematic diagram of conversion board of optical coupler1 and 2
Figure 13.22 Schematic diagram of optical coupler conversion board with socket
Description
PCB layout

13 Hardware System
Figure 13.23 PCB layout of optical coupler 1 conversion board
Figure 13.24 PCB layout of optical coupler 2 conversion board

13 Hardware System
PCBA PCBA PCBA PCB name PCB No. PCB Quant Remark
name No. Version Version ity
BM10 051-00 1.0 BM10 050-000826-0 1.0 1 Optical coupler for
optical 1373-0 optical 0 first gripper empty
coupler 0 coupler gripping. Small end
conversion conversion wire
board PCBA board PCB 009-0001794-00,hori
zontal
BM10 air 051-00 1.0 BM10 050-000826-0 1.0 1 Optical coupler for
butt joint 1374-0 optical 0 second gripper
optical 0 coupler empty gripping. Big
coupler conversion end wire
conversion board PCB 009-0001795-00,hori
board PCBA zontal
BM10 051-00 1.0 BM10 050-000723-0 1.0 2 Anti-bumping and
double 1001-0 optical 0 open optical coupler
optical 0 coupler for first gripper,
coupler conversion small end
conversion board PCB 009-0001794-00,
board PCBA horizontally away
from the screw.
BM10 air 051-00 1.0 BM10 050-000723-0 1.0 2 Anti-bumping and
butt joint 1035-0 optical 0 open optical coupler
double 0 coupler for second gripper,
optical conversion big end
coupler board PCB 009-0001795-0 ,
conversion horizontally away
board PCBA from the screw.
BM10 051-00 1.0 BM10 050-000843-0 1.0 3 Z Optical coupler for
optical 1034-0 optical 0 the axis home,
coupler 0 coupler middle and pushing
conversion conversion home position
board PCBA board PCB
with with
connectors connectors
PCB layout of optical coupler conversion board with socket

13 Hardware System
Wire design
Table 13.5 Electric requirements for the optical coupler wire
Name Pin no. Pin no. Name Color
A 2 1 VCC Red
K 1 2 GND Black
E 4 3 GND Green
C 3 4 SR_PHO White or blue
Corresponding relation between PCBA and PCB

Table 13.6 Table of corresponding relation between PCBA and PCB(Optical coupler
conversion board)

During the installation of the optical coupler conversion board, the wires should not
interfere with other parts. The wires that contact with PCBs should be fixed properly. If
the wires are not fixed properly and move, they will fall off the soldering pad. Adjust the
position of the optical coupler and the retaining plate properly to avoid the rubbing of
the two parts otherwise the optical coupler will be damaged. Reflective optical coupler s
voltage is 1.2V or so when the diode is powered on. The feedback signal is 5V or so when
the optical coupler is blocked and it is 0V when it is unblocked.
Pay attention to the outlet of the wires of the optical coupler conversion board. The
wires should not interfere with other parts or the panel in case the wires are worn.

13 Hardware System
13.6.23 Network interface conversion board

The network interface conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Providing serial port connection (at most 5 ports) between the computer and
analyzers or SDM main control board.
Providing conversion of PC and internal network interface of the whole unit or the
RJ45 of a switch.
Description
The PCB layout of the network interface conversion board is as shown below.
Top view:
Bottom view:
Connectors
P1: DB25 serial port for connecting a computer, including 5 serial ports.
J1-J5: serial ports for connecting analyzer or SDM main control board.
J6: RJ45 network interface for connecting a computer.
J7: used to connect the internal network interface of the whole unit or the RJ45 of a
switch.
Indicators
N/A
13.6.24 Main Control Board (SDM)

The main control board of the SDM is basically the same with that of the analyzer (refer
to 13.6.1 Main control board), except that:

13 Hardware System
The main control board of the SDM is connected with low-layer units of the rack
feeder system and redefined for its interfaces.
The main control board of the SDM does not use the AD collection interface.
Description
PCBlayout
The main control board of the SDM uses the same PCB with that of the analyzer. Refer to
13.6.1 Main control board for details.
Connectors
The main control board includes the following connectors.
Power supply:
Power supply input (J1): 6-pin, providing +/-12V analog (reserved) and +5V digital for
the PCBA.
Value
1 +12V(Reserved) /
2 -12V(Reserved) /
3 +5V 4.75 ~5.25V
4 12VGND /
5 12VGND /
6 GND /

Connector (J2) for PC: 10-pin, RS232, used for communication with a computer.
the No.1 and No.2 track control drive board.
the No.3 and No.4 track control drive board.
3# connector (J10) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for reservation.
the SDM control drive board.
5# connector (J6) for smart module: 40-pin, RS422, used for reservation.
Reagent refrigeration board connector(J5) : 8-pin, RS422, used for reservation.
AD collection board connector(J7):DB25 reserved
Connector (J8): 8-pin, reserved
Connector (J9): 8-pin, reserved
Ethernet connector (J12): 6-pin, used for reservation.
Connectors for debugging:
BDM connector (J13): 26-pin, used for debugging the CPU software.
JTAG connector (J14): 14-pin, used for debugging the FPGA.
The main control board contains the following switches and jumpers.
RST key (S1): used for resetting the CPU of the board. It is only used for debugging the
board before the instrument's delivery.

13 Hardware System
Indicators
Power supply:
+12V power supply indicator (D4): green. It is the reserved indicator.
-12V power supply indicator (D17): green. It is the reserved indicator.
+5V power supply indicator (D16): green. It is lit when the rack feeder system
power switch is turned on, indicating that the +5V power supply has been
connected.
+3.3V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the rack feeder system
power switch is turned on, indicating that the +3.3V power supply has been
connected.
FPGA configuration indicator (D29): orange. It is lit in normal conditions, which
means that the FPGA has been configured successfully.
FPGA function indicator 1 (D25): green. It flashes continuously in normal conditions,
which means that the FPGA is working.
PCBA communicates with a smart module.
Indicators to indicate network interface:
Network interface Link indicator (D10): green. When it is lit, it indicates the
Ethernet has been connected; when it flashes, it means that the PCBA is
communicating with the Ethernet.
Network interface Full-duplex indicator (D7): green. When it is lit, it indicates that
the Ethernet is working in full-duplex mode.
Network interface Collision indicator (D8): green. When it is lit, it indicates that a
conflict is detected on Ethernet communication.
Test points
In the following positions of the main control board can signal tests be performed.
J1.1: +12V power supply input. It is the reserved input. No voltage is input in normal
conditions.
J1.2: -12V power supply input. It is the reserved input. No voltage is input in normal
conditions.
C304.1: +3.3V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the major
digital circuits of the PCBA. Normal range: 2.97 - 3.63V.

13 Hardware System
C78.1: +1.5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the CPU
U65.4: +1.2V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the FPGA

properly.
It requires relatively great force to plug/unplug connectors J3, J4, J6, J10 and J11.
13.6.25 Control drive board (SDM)

The SDM control drive board is used to:
communicate with the main control board through 422 serial port;
communicate with FPGA through bus and transmit the data and instructions.
receive the signal from the main board to control the supply, scanning, advance and
retrieval of the sample rack;
provide ISP control connectors for CPUs to update the application software.
The following figure shows the control signal of the SDM control drive board.

13 Hardware System
Rack Supply Push-In

Part motor
34-path optical STAT Push-Back Part

coupler signal motor
Scanning push-out
Serial port bus part motor
RS422 CPU1
SDM Scanning push-in part
Main motor
control FPGA
board Serial port bus Rerun buffer advance
RS422 CPU2 motor
Rerun buffer
retraction motor
Retrieval push-in
motor
Return push-in motor.
Description
PCBlayout
J12 J13 J14 J15 J16 J17

J11
J29 J28
J10
FPGA LED
D66-70
J18
MVREF1~5
J9
Unit LED J19
MVREF6~8
J8
Power Key J20
LED Press
J7 LED
1 2 3 4 5
J6 6 7 8 9 10
J5 J4 J3 J2 J26 J25 J24
J1 J21
J23 J22
D29-31 D26-28 D1-D6 D22-23
Connectors
The SDM control drive board contains the following connectors.
Power supply:

13 Hardware System

Value
1 A+12V Reserved and
unused
2 +5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 +12V Reserved and
unused
4 +24V 23.5 - 26V
5 +24V 23.5 - 26V
6 A-12V Reserved and
unused
7 GND /
8 GND /
9 GND /
10 GND /

SDM control drive board connector (J10): 40-PIN, used for the 2 MCUs to
communicate with the middle-layer unit and to download parameters online.
Sample bar code reader connector (J7): 10-pin, used for communication with the
bar code reader.
Optical coupler detection connector 1 (J12): 50-PIN, used to detect the optical
coupler signals of the sample rack scanning push-in part, scanning push-out part,
scanning unit and rack supply unit.
optical coupler detection connector (J11): 40-PIN, used to detect the optical coupler
signals of the sample rack passing lane, return lane, retrieval lane, normal lane and
rerun lane.
optical coupler detection connector 3 (J28): 20-PIN used to detect the optical
coupler signals of the return push-in part and retrieval push-in part.
optical coupler detection connector 4 (J29): 30-PIN used to detect the signal of
retrieval sample rack sensor and the optical coupler signals of push-in part of the
rack supply unit and STAT push-back part.
Motor connectors (J13-J20): 4-PIN, used to drive the 8 motors. J13 connects push-in
part of the rack supply unit, J14 STAT push-back motor, J15 scanning push-in motor,
J16 scanning push-out motor, J17 rerun buffer advance motor and J18 rerun buffer
retraction motor, J19 retrieval push-in motor and J20 return push-in motor.
Probe wash valve drive connector (J24): 8-PIN, used to control the stroke switch
signal.
Sample load button and indicator connector (J23): 8-pin, used for detecting the two
sample load buttons and driving/controlling the two indicators.
Rack type sensor connector(J4): 14-PIN, used to detect the signal of the rack type
sensor.
The control drive board (SDM) contains the following switches and jumpers.

13 Hardware System
Indicators
The control drive board (SDM) contains the following indicators.
A+12V (D12V) power supply indicator (D5): green, reserved.
A-12V (E12V) power supply indicator(D6): green, reserved.
+12V (C12V) power supply indicator (D4): green, reserved.
Panel lamp indicator 1 (D16): green. It is lit when the panel lamp is lit, and
extinguished in other conditions.
Panel lamp indicator 2 (D17): green. It is lit when the panel lamp is lit, and
extinguished in other conditions.
Panel key indicator 1 (D22): green. It is lit when the key is pressed, and
extinguished when the key is released.
Panel key indicator 2 (D23): green. It is lit when the key is pressed, and
extinguished when the key is released.
Stroke switch indicator (D25): green. It is lit when the stroke switch is turned on,
and extinguished when the stroke switch is turned off.
FPGA indicator(D66): yellow. When FPGA works normally, it is lit. When the FPGA
program is being burnt or initialized, it is extinguished.
Test points
In the following positions of the SDM control drive board can signal tests be performed.
+24V (B24V) power supply: test point of +24V. Normal voltage range: 21.6
26.4V DC.
+12V (C12V)power supply: test point of +12V, reserved.
A+12V (D12V)power supply: test point of A+12V, reserved.
A-12V (E12V)power supply: test point of A-12V, reserved.
Test points Running Voltage Sustaining Remark
Voltage
MVREF1 1.67V 0.45V Rack supply
push-in motor
MVREF2 1.67V 1.67V STAT push-back
motor
MVREF3 1.14V 0.28V Scanning push-in
motor
MVREF4 1.14V 0.28V Scanning
push-out motor

13 Hardware System
MVREF5 2.00V 0.50V Rerun buffer

motor 1
MVREF6 2.00V 0.50V Rerun buffer
motor 2
MVREF7 1.14V 0.28V Rack retrieval
push-in motor
MVREF8 1.67V 0.45V Rack return
push-in motor
To measure the motor voltage, use a digital multimeter by connecting the red probe with
the measuring point and the black probe with the GND. For the measuring points, refer
to the PCB layout of the SDM control drive board.

properly.
13.6.26 Track Control Drive Board

The track control drive board is used to:
communicate with the main control board through 422 serial port;
communicate with FPGA through bus and transmit the data and instructions.
receive instructions from the main control board to transfer sample racks on the
normal lane and non-normal lanes.
provide ISP control connectors for the 2 CPUs to update the application software.
The functional diagram of the track control drive board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Right caterpillar
motor of normal lane
Aspirate positioning
Buffer 2 stopper
Buffer 1 stopper
Post-aspiration
30-path optical stopper motor of
coupler signal normal lane
Left caterpillar motor

of normal lane
Serial port bus
RS422 CPU1
Right caterpillar
SDM motor of passing lane
Main FPGA
control Aspirate positioning
board Serial port bus motor of passing lane
RS422 CPU2
Right caterpillar
motor of return lane
Lane change part

motor
Return push-out motor

of passing lane

of return lane
Lane change stopper

motor
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the track control drive board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
MVREF9 MVREF7 MVREF8 MVREF10 MVREF11 MVREF12 MVREF13 MVREF14
J5 J6 J7 J8 J9 J10 J12
J21
J22 J23
J20 J26 J27
J28
J11
J19 D3
J25 D6 J3
D5
J24 S1
J1
J4
J18 J17 J16 J15 J14 J13 J2
MVREF6 MVREF5 MVREF4 MVREF3 MVREF2 MVREF1
Connectors
The track control drive board contains the following connectors.
Mixed connector:
On-line connector(J1):22PIN used to switch to 24V power supply and the RS422
signal.
Optical coupler detection connectors 1, 2, 3 and 4 (J11: 40-PIN; J12: 50-PIN; J21:
20-PIN; J22: 30-PIN): used for the input of the optical couplers of the normal lane.
Motor connectors (J13-J20, J5-J10): 4-PIN used to drive the 6 step motors of the
normal lane, among which J13 is intended for the right caterpillar motor, J14 for the
aspirate positioning motor, J15 for the buffer 2 stopper motor, J16 for the buffer 1
stopper motor, J17 for the post-aspiration stopper motor, and J18 for the caterpillar
belt motor. J19 is intended for the right caterpillar motor of the passing lane, J20 for
the aspirate positioning motor of the passing lane, J5 for the right belt motor of the
return lane, J6 for the lane change motor, J7 for the return push-out motor, J8 for the
left belt motor of the passing lane, J9 for the left caterpillar motor of the return lane,
and J10 for the lane change stopper motor.
The track control drive board contains the following switches and jumpers.
Key S1: used to reset the smart modules during debugging of the PCBA. Parameters
need to be configured when the instrument is powered on. No debugging is needed
after the instrument's delivery.
Indicators
The track control drive board contains the following indicators.

13 Hardware System
24V power supply indicator (D3): yellow. It is lit when the instrument is powered on
5V power supply indicator (D6): yellow. It is lit when the instrument is powered on
3.3V power supply indicator (D5): yellow. It is lit when the instrument is powered
on and extinguished when the instrument is powered off.
Test points
In the following positions of the track control drive board can signal tests be performed.
+24V (VBB) power supply: test point of TP13. Normal voltage range: 21.6 26.4V
DC.
5V (VCC) power supply: test point of VCC. Normal voltage range: 4.95V 5.05V
DC.
3.3V (VDD) power supply: test point of VDD. Normal voltage range: 3.24V 3.47V
DC.
1.2V (VDD12) power supply: test point of VDD12. Normal voltage range: 1.17 V
1.23V DC.
Test Running Sustaining Remark
points Voltage Voltage
MVREF1 1.14V 0.28V MCG1
Right caterpillar motor of normal
lane
Aspirate positioning motor of
normal lane
Buffer 2 stopper motor of normal
lane
Buffer 1 stopper motor of normal
lane
Post-aspiration stopper motor of
normal lane
Left caterpillar motor of normal
lane
MVREF7 1.14V 0.28V MCS1
Right caterpillar motor of passing
lane
Aspirate positioning motor of
passing lane
MVREF9 1.14V 0.28V MFH1
Right caterpillar motor of return
lane

13 Hardware System
Test Running Sustaining Remark

points Voltage Voltage
MVREF10 0.82V 0.53V MBG1
Lane change motor
Return push-out motor
Left caterpillar motor of passing
lane
Left caterpillar motor of return
lane
MVREF14 2.37V 1.55V MBG2
Lane change stopper motor
To measure the motor voltage, use a digital multimeter by connecting the red probe with
the measuring point and the black probe with the GND. For the measuring points, refer
to the PCB layout of the track control drive board.

properly.
13.6.27 On-line Conversion Board (SDM)

The on-line conversion board (SDM) is used to switch to 24V power supply and convert
the communication electric level from TTL to RS422.
The following figure shows the control signal of the SDM on-line conversion board.
24V power 24V Online

Online 24V
supply board conversion
conversion
Main control board(front
TTL board(SDM)
board RS422 track)
Description
PCBlayout

13 Hardware System
Connectors
On-line conversion board(SDM) contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
DC 5V input connector (J2)

Value
1 24V 23.5 - 26V
3 GND /
DC 5V input connector (J6)

Value
1 5V 4.85 - 5.25V
2 GND /
DC power supply output connector (J3)

Value
1 24V 23.5 - 26V
2 5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 GND /
4 GND /

TLL electric level input connectors (J4-J5): 8-PIN, used to input the TTL electric
level signal for the main control unit.
Connectors for sending/receiving mixed signal

13 Hardware System
On-line connector (J1): 22-PIN, used to switch to 24V power supply and the RS422
signal.
Indicators
On-line conversion board(SDM) contains the following indicators.
5V power supply indicator (D3): green. It is lit when the instrument is powered on

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA. Check the
connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.
13.6.28 On-line conversion board(rack transfer unit)

The on-line conversion board (rack transfer unit) converts 24V into 5V on the SDM.
Description
PCBlayout
Connectors
On-line conversion board (rack transfer unit) contains the following connectors.
Power supply:
DC power supply connector (J2): converts 24V into 5V and outputs it to the SDM on-line
conversion board.

13 Hardware System

Value
1 24V 23.5 - 26V
2 5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 GND /
4 GND /
DC 5V connector (J6): outputs 5V to the main control board.

Value
1 5V 4.85 - 5.25V
2 GND /
DC power supply connector (J3): outputs 24V and 5V to the SDM control drive board.
Value
1 24V 23.5 - 26V
2 5V 4.85 - 5.25V
3 GND /
4 GND /
Indicators
The on-line conversion board (rack transfer unit) contains the following indicators.

Make sure that the connectors are inserted properly into the PCBA. Check the
connectors with clamps and ensure that the clamps have been locked properly.

13 Hardware System
13.7 Power Supply System

13.7.1 Power Supply System of Whole Unit
The power supply system of the whole unit is shown in the figure below. L/N phase is
represented by the same line.
terminal
terminal
24V6A board 0
exhange
r 24V6A board1
(reserve
24V6A board 2
d)
Air terminal Main 24V6A board 3
switc rack feeder
switch
h on system switch 24V6A board 4
the
wall Analyzing unit
switchx4 Analyzing unit
1
Analyzing unit
2
Analyzing unit
3
Analyzing unit
4
terminal
The figure below shows the DC power supply of the rack feeder system.
J1Main control board

5V
Control drive board
J1
SDM
24/5V
Including 24V to
5V circuit
J3 Online conversion
24V6A board board
0# J2 J6
24V (front track)
J2
0#
5V
24V6A board J6 Online conversion Track control drive
board 24V
1# J2 24V J2 J1 J1 board
SDM
J3 1#
5V 1#
board 24V
2# J2 24V J2 J1 J1 board
SDM
J3 2#
5V 2#
24V
3# J2 24V J2 boardSDM J1 J1 board
J3 3# 3#
5V Online conversion
24V6A board J6 Track control drive
24V board 24V
4# J2 J2 J1 J1 board
SDM
J3 4#
4#

13 Hardware System
13.7.2 Analyzer's power supply system

The power supply system is shown as follows. AC power is distributed on the AC drive
board via main switch and provides the power supply to BA40 power supply assembly.
The 110V/220V transformer circuit is only used on instruments powered by 110V
power supply. In this circuit, the 110V AC power supply is transformed to 220V and then
used to power the AC pumps on the instrument.
Conne
cted to
E the Analyzing
yellow- Main power shell unit switch
green switch
L brown L brown L
Power BA40 power
socket N light N light AC drive board
blue N supply
blue
assembly
L N L N
Note: 110V/220V
transformer circuit is only
used for 110V model to 110V/220V
convert the 110v power to transformer
220V for the AC pump.
The power supply assembly consists of three boards: 24V power supply board, 12V
power supply board and power supply conversion board. Their part number and
functions are shown in the following table.
PCB No. Description Function
051-000509-00 12V power supply AC/DC module, providing AC/DC
board conversion
051-000510-00 24V power supply AC/DC module, providing AC/DC
board conversion
051-000511-00 Power supply AC overall input end, DC/DC DC
conversion board output conversion
The functional diagram of the power supply assembly is as follows:

13 Hardware System
Power
supply
assemlby
12V power supply board 24Vpower supply board
B12V contro contro
DC/
DC l l
24VLMP +14V -14V A24V 24VFAN
AC A5V 5VCRL AC B24V 24VCRL
Control
AC switch
Time
sequence
CTL-VMP
control B12V
A5V Light CTL-LMP
C12V C12V source AC 1
control AC1
control voltage
+12V -12V DC/DC CTL-WTP
CTL-SLP AC 2
Power conversion board
24VFAN
C12V A5V D12V -12V A12V A24V B24V AC2
Description;
CTL-SLP: sleep signal
CTL-LMP: light source control
signal
CTL-WTP:AC1 control signal
CTL-VMP:AC2 control signal
5VCRL5V control signal
24VCRLB24V control signal
Function description:
AC voltage range:100~240Vac. Frequency range:503Hz, 603Hz
The 12V power supply board converts the AC input into B12V, A5V, 14V, and
24VLAMP. The 24VLAMP power supply is transformed to A12V through the power
supply conversion board.
The 24V power supply board converts the AC input into A24V, B24V and 24VFAN.
The power supply conversion board is used to shift the AC voltage, control C
voltage, convert the 14V power into 12V, control the C12V power, and shift
various output voltages.
The power supply assembly outputs 8 path DC, 2 path AC. BM analyzer only uses 4
path DC voltage.
5V
B12V Used for
BM10
C12V
A24V
Power supply 24VFAN

assembly A12V
Not used
D12V for BM10
-12V
AC1
AC2
The external switch in the diagram is used to control the 5V, C12V and B24V output
voltage. After short circuit of this position, the power supply assembly outputs all
DC voltage and their corresponding indicator is lit except A12V.

13 Hardware System
12V power supply board

The functional diagram of the board is as shown below.
Forward
conversion B12V
DC/DC
EMC PFC A5V
AC conversion
filtering commut Booster 390V
ation conversion 5VCRL
Flyback 24VLMP
conversion +14V
-14V
The input/ output of this board is realized via power supply conversion board except
that B12 V is output through metal terminal.
The 24V board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
B12V: used for powering the radiators.
A5V: power the PCB.
24VLMP: outputs constant 24V, which is then converted into A12V voltage in the
way of DC/DC through the power supply conversion board. The voltage is not used
on BM analyzer.
14V: The two outputs are converted into 12V (D12V and -12V) through the
voltage stabilizer on the power supply conversion board. They are not used
temporarily.
The PCB layout of the 12V power supply board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
The 12V power supply board is located inside the power supply box. Indicators D20, D21
and D34 indicate voltage output during debugging and repairing of the PCBA and cannot
be seen from the outside of the instrument.
Indication of voltage outputs:
LED Output Voltage Indication Status Remark
D20 A5V When it is lit, it indicates that /
the PCBA outputs an A5V
power.
D21 B12V When it is lit, it indicates that /
the PCBA outputs a B12V
power.
D34 A24V When it is lit, it indicates that /
the PCBA outputs an A24V
power.


13 Hardware System
Forward
conversion B24V
24VCRL
EMC PFC
AC
filtering commut Booster 390V
ation conversion
Flyback A24V
conversion
24VFAN
The 24V board converts the AC input into the following outputs:
24VFAN: This voltage is not used.
B24V: power the moving parts, motors, heaters and fans.
The PCB layout of the 24V power supply board is as shown below.
LED1, LED2 and LED3 in the figure above are indicators of the A24V, 24VFAN and B24V
outputs. Since located inside the power supply box, the three indicators cannot be seen
from the outside of the instrument. They are used to indicate the voltage output during
debugging and repairing of the PCBA.
Indication of voltage outputs on the 24V board:

13 Hardware System
LED Output Voltage Indication Status Remark

LED1 A24V When it is lit, it indicates /
that the PCBA outputs an
A24V power.
LED2 24VFAN When it is lit, it indicates /
that the PCBA outputs a
24VFAN power.
LED3 B24V When it is lit, it indicates /
that the PCBA outputs a B24V
power.
Power supply conversion board

AC1 AC12V board A5V A24V 24VFAN B24V
CTL-WTP
AC1
14V -14V 24VLMP

B12V A5V(control)
AC
CTL-VMP
CTL-LMP
AC2 Voltage
Switch C12V DC/DC
adjustment
AC2 AC24VB12V C12V D12V -12V A12V
This board is used for:

Providing AC input for the 12V board and 24V board, and dividing it into AC1 and
AC2, which are reserved now and not used for the instrument.
Converting the 14V output from 12V board to D12V and -12V, which is not used
for this instrument.
Converting the 24VLMP from the 12V board to the light source voltage A12V, which
is not used for this instrument and its corresponding indicator is constantly off.
Dividing and shifting other DC inputs, and providing power supply interfaces for
other PCBAs.
The PCB layout of the power supply conversion board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
Indicators
There are 9 voltage indicators on the power supply conversion board indicated by a
dotted frame. They are from left to right: D20, D11, D14, D10, D15, D12, D13, D9, and
D21, which are used to indicate the following voltage outputs.
LED Output Indication Status Remark
Voltage
D20 D12V When it is lit, it indicates Not used for this
that the PCBA outputs a instrument but its indicator
D12V power. is lit.
D11 B12V When it is lit, it indicates
B12V power.
D14 -12V When it is lit, it indicates Not used for this
-12V power. is lit.
D10 A12V When it is lit, it indicates Its indicator is constantly
that the PCBA outputs an off.
A12V power.
D15 A24V When it is lit, it indicates
A24V power.
D12 C12V When it is lit, it indicates
C12V power.
D13 A5V When it is lit, it indicates
A5V power.

13 Hardware System
D9 B24V When it is lit, it indicates

B24V power.
D21 24VFAN When it is lit, it indicates Not used for this
24VFAN power. is lit.
Troubleshooting BA40 power supply assembly

All input/output except B12V output is realized via connectors on the power supply
conversion board as shown in the following table.
No. Pins Symbol Output Description Remark
J3 Pin1 ISE A24V+ Connect the

Pin2 A24V- refrigerating fan
J2 Pin1 ANALYSE SW B12V Short circuit the Pin 1

Pin2 GND and 2 by jumper
Pin3 STCRL
J4 Pin1, 3, 5, 7 VALVE DRV C12V positive output connect with DC
power supply
Pin9, 11, 12 B24V positive output
conversion board
Pin2, 4, 6, 8, 10 B24V and C12V output GND
J7 / N AC input N Connect with AC
drive board
J8 / L AC input L
J9 Pin1 24VFAN+ 24VFAN positive output Not used for the
Pin2 24VFAN- 24VFAN negative output instrument
Pin3 C12VOUT C12V positive output
Pin4 / C12V output GND

J12 Pin1 D12V D12V output Not used for the
Pin2 -12V -12V output instrument
Pin4, 5 / D12V and -12V output GND

Pin3 5VOUT A5V positive output
Pin6 / A5V output GND
J13 Pin1 AC PUMP AC1 output Not used for the

Pin3 AC2 output instrument
Pin6, 8 AC input
J14 Pin1 5VOUT A5V output connect with DC

Pin2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output power supply
conversion board
Pin4 C12VOUT C12V output
Pin5 -12V -12V output
Pin9 D12V D12V output
Pin6, 7, 8 / A5V, B24V and C12V output
GND

13 Hardware System
No. Pins Symbol Output Description Remark
Pin10 / D12V and -12V output GND

J15 Pin1, 2, 3 B24VOUT B24V output connect with DC
Pin4 5VOUT A5V output power supply
conversion board
Pin5 D12V D12V output
Pin6 -12V -12V output
Pin7, 8, 9, 10 GND2 A5V and B24V output GND
Pin11, 12 DGND D12V and -12V output GND
J16/J20 Pin1 LAMP A12V output for lamp Not used for the
Pin2 A12V output GND for lamp instrument
Prompt:
When the main switch is turned on, observe the LED indicators. In normal condition, all
indicators except A12 indicator(D10) are lit. The corresponding descriptions of the
indicators are shown in the following table.
Voltage D12V B12V -12V A12V A24V C12V 5V B24V 24VFAN Description
Indicators D20 D11 D14 D10 D15 D12 D13 D9 D21
Status 1 Normal Status
Status 2 12V power

supply board
failure
Status 3 24V power
supply board
failure
Status 4 24V power
supply board
failure
Status 5 AC power supply
is abnormal or
12V and 24V
power supply
boards go wrong
at the same
time.
If the B24V indicator is not lit, replug the load line; if the error remains, replace the 24V
board and then check if the B24V indicator is lit. If the 5V indicator is not lit, perhaps it is
short-circuited or the 12V board goes wrong. If the 5V indicator is lit but C12V or
D12V/-12V indicator is extinguished, replug the C12V load line; if the error remains,
check the conversion board or replace the power supply board; if the error disappears
when a new power supply board is installed, it indicates that the original power supply
board needs to be repaired.

13 Hardware System
13.7.3 DC power supply conversion board

The DC power supply conversion board is intended for the following functions:
Inputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V power
for the BA40 power supply assembly.
Outputting A5V/C12V digital to the analog power supply conversion board.
Outputting A5V digital, +/-12V (D12V/E12V) analog, C12V power, and B24V power
to the auto load control drive board(LD).
to the mixed control drive board(CP).
to the dispersion control drive board(MS).
to the reagent control drive board(RA).
to the fluidics temperature control drive board.
Main control
14A board
Power 24V:
conversion 7A
3A(reserved)
board J14 7A 12V:
5V:
Analog+/-12V:
7A 2A 1A 5A 1A 1A 2A
Analog
power
Reagent control Loader control supply
drive board drive board. conversion
board
Power conversion 21A
board
J15 2A(reserved)
7A
2A
5A 7A
4A
Reagent
1A 1A 1A
refrigerati
on board
Auto load Fluidics
Dispersion
control and temperatur
control drive
mixing drive e control
board.
board. board
2A 1A 6A
Power
conversion 12A
boardJ4
Description
PCBlayout

13 Hardware System
Connectors
Table 13.9 Power input connector J2
No. Signal Description
1, 3 AGND Analog ground
2 +12V +12V analog
4 -12V -12V analog

1, 2 +24V +24V power
3, 8 +5V +5V digital
4, 9 +12V +12V power
5, 6, 7, and 10 GND Digital ground

5, 6, 7 +24V +24V power
1, 2, 3 GND Digital ground

1, 2, 5, and 6 +12V +12V power

13 Hardware System
Table 13.13 J1: power supply output connector for auto load control drive board.
1, 2 +24V +24V power
4, 11 +12V +12V digital
7 A+12V +12V analog
14 A-12V -12V analog
Table 13.14 J4: connector for power supply output of the reagent control drive board
1, 2 +24V +24V power
4, 11 +12V +12V digital
7 A+12V +12V analog
Table 13.15 J9: power supply output connector for dispersion control drive board.
1, 2 +24V +24V power
4, 11 +12V +12V digital
7 A+12V +12V analog
Table 13.16 J10: connector for power supply output of the mixed control drive board
1, 2 +24V +24V power
4, 11 +12V +12V digital

13 Hardware System
7 A+12V +12V analog
Table 13.17 J8: connector for power supply output of the fluidics temperature control
drive board
7, 8 +24V +24V power
11 +5V +5V digital
9, 10 +12V +12V digital
12 A+12V +12V analog
5 AGND Analog ground
Table 13.18 J5: connector for power supply output of the analog power supply
conversion board.
1 +5V +5V digital
2 GND Digital ground
Table 13.19 J11: connector for reserved main control board power supply output.
1 A+12V +12V analog
2 A-12V -12V analog
3 +5V +5V digital
4,5 AGND Analog ground
Table 13.20 J8: connector for reserved reagent refrigeration board power supply
output.
1 +24V +24V power

13 Hardware System

When installing DC power supply conversion board, place it close to power supply
assembly. Fool proofing design is used for the board. Pay attention to the corresponding
relations of the connectors on the control boards.
13.7.4 Analog power supply conversion board

The instrument has one analog power supply conversion board (051-001023-00), which
is mainly used to:
Convert the C12V digital into two +/-12V analog. One is provided for the main control
board to power the AD collection board and preamplifier board; and the other powers
the control drive boards through the DC power supply conversion board. The digital +5V
only passes by on this board.
Description
The PCB layout of the analog power supply conversion board is as shown below.
Connectors
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following connectors:
J3: digital power supply input connector for the DC power supply conversion board.
Pin No. Signal
1 C12V
2 A5V
3 GND
4 GND
J1: analog power supply output connector 1.

Pin No. Label Signal
1 VPP +12V analog

13 Hardware System
2 VSS -12V analog

3 A5V +5V digital
4, 5 AGND Analog GND
6 GND Digital GND
J2: analog power supply output connector 2.

Pin No. Label Signal
1 VPP1 +12V analog
2 VSS1 -12V analog
3 A5V +5V digital
4, 5 AGND1 Analog GND
6 GND Digital GND
Indicators
The analog power supply conversion board contains the following indicators:
C12V power supply indicator (D1): green. When it is lit, it indicates that the C12V
Test points
In the following positions of the analog power supply conversion board can signal tests
be performed.
TP9--VPP1: +12V. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP8--VSS1: -12V. Normal range: -12V5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
TP1--VPP: +12V. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP2--VSS: -12V. Normal range: -12V5%, that is, -11.4 - -12.6V.
TP3--C12V: 12V digital. Normal range: 12V5%, that is, 11.4 - 12.6V.
TP7--A5V: +5V power supply. It is secondary power supply used to power the digital
parts of the PCBA. Normal range: 5V5%, that is, 4.75 - 5.25V.
TP6--GND: digital ground of the board.
TP5--AGND, TP4--AGND1: analog ground of the board.

PCBA.
damaged.
13.7.5 AC drive board

The major functions of the PCBA include:

13 Hardware System
Receiving the AC input from the AC filter and transferring the AC power to BA40
power supply assembly.
Receiving the control signal from the fluidics temperature board and driving two AC
pump(P07 and P08) and two heaters(reaction carousel heater HEA02 and
dispersion carousel heater HEA03.)
Converting the 110V AC into 220V AC, which is used to power AC pumps.
The figure below shows the relation between the AC drive board and other PCBAs and
control objects.
Wash Temperature
Control Board
HEA02
HEA03
P08
P07
110V AC
AC 220V/110
AC drive board AC transformer
filter V AC
220V AC
220V/110
220V/110V
220V/110V HEA02 reaction carousel
220V/110V
220VAC
V AC
AC
AC
AC
carousel heater
HEA03 dispersion
heater
P08. AC vacuum pump
P07. AC waste pump

BA40 power
assembly
supply
Description
PCBlayout
The PCB layout of the AC drive board is as shown below.

13 Hardware System
D19
D10 D9
D16 D7
J3
Connectors
The AC drive board contains the following connectors. Refer to the whole unit wiring
diagram for definition of the connector pins.
Power supply:
AC input (J2): alternating current input to J2.
AC output (J1): alternating current output from J1 to power supply assembly.
AC output (J3): alternating current output from J3 to two heaters.
AC output (J10): alternating current output from J10 to two AC pumps.
AC output (J8): AC 110V output from J8 to a linear transformer on instruments
powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by
220V AC.
AC input (J9): AC 220V input through J9 to a linear transformer on instruments
powered by 110V AC. This function is not applicable to instruments powered by
220V AC.
Reagent refrigeration circulating pump control connector (J7): in 110V AC power
supply system, 3-pin, 12V DC, used for controlling current-limiting delay.
BM10 fluidics temperature control board connector (J6): 14-pin, 12V DC, used for
controlling the switches of the AC heaters and AC pumps.
The AC drive board contains the following switches.

13 Hardware System
Voltage selection switch (S1): A transformer is used on instruments powered by

110V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the 110V AC position; no transformer is
used on instruments powered by 220V AC, and the S1 switch is placed to the 220V
AC position.
Indicators
The AC drive board contains the following indicators.
Reaction carousel heater HEA02 (D16): green. It is lit during heating, and it is
extinguished in other statuses.
Dispersion carousel heater HEA03 (D7): green. It is lit during heating, and it is
extinguished in other statuses.
AC vacuum pump P08(D9): green It is lit when cuvette wash vacuum is turned on,
and it is extinguished when cuvette wash vacuum is turned off.
AC waste pump P07 (D10): green. It is lit when the waste pump is turned on, and it
is extinguished when the waste pump is turned off.
Current-limiting indicator (D19): green. It is lit when instruments powered by 110V
AC are powered on, and it is extinguished when instruments powered by 220V AC
are powered off.
Test points
In the following positions of the AC drive board can signal tests be performed.
N/A

Please note that most parts of the PCBA are connected to an AC power supply. Do
not operate on the PCBA until disconnecting it from the power supply.
When fixing the AC input connector with a screw, make sure that the connector is
tightened properly in order to prevent it from dropping off during operation, which
may cause electric shock.
properly.
slots.
Pay attention to the position of switch S1. Do not move the switch randomly to
ensure that the AC pump can work normally.

13 Hardware System
13.8 Whole unit wiring Diagram

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BM10 high voltage

Serial port BM10 Photon counting board PMT
051-000744-00
cable J5 boardPCBA PD pre-
LED amplification
D COM3 SDM 051-000743-00 board
D
Serial port Ethernet Communicati
051-001269-00
24V Motor
cable Ethernet BM10Control drive board X-FPC Y-FPC Z-FPC Optical
cable on conversion J1 5V
cable coupler
PC BA80 port
Exchanger Ether board J7 PCBA(mix control drive board)
conversion board Ethernet J10 Second gripper step in motor
net Communicat 051-001413-00
Ethernet cable 051-000376-00 cable J3 Second gripper optical
cable ion Ethernet 24V BA80 coupler Conversion board
Ethernet J12 J4 BM10 control drive board Indicator Negative voltage
conversion cable BM10 main controlJ6 24V Electromag probe/mixer J2
cable
board
J1 PCBA(auto loader control drive netic lock conversion Reagent probe level
board J10 board051 J3 sense board(sample)
J2 board) 051-001092-00
Serial port J5 J10 -000210-
Negative voltage Reagent
cableCOM4 J11 051-001413-00 00 J2 probe level sense
BA2K analog power supply J2 5V/D12/E12 J1 BM10 control drive board PCBA J3 board(reagent) 051-
D12/E12 001092-00
conversion board J1 J1 (Reagent control drive board) Clog detection board PCBA
5V/C12 J3 051-000218-00
051-001023-00 J3
051-001413-00 J7
J10 Reagent bar
Main power BA40 power J14 J3
J2 code
switch supply J15 BM10 DC conversion boardPCBA J10 BM10ontrol drive board
J7
J4 051-000755-00 J1 J1 PCBA(Dispersion control drive Substrate bubble
SDM assembly J6 J3 detection board
C P P J3 C12V:control board) 051-001403-00 C
power J8 J7 1 2
board 12V
J4 J10 24V
switch 051-001413-00 J5 Fan
A24V
Bus - D12:analog+12V J9
L/N/PE BM10 L N E12Vanalog-
BA80 Reagent 12V cooler
bar 12V J8 J17 refrigeration board
power B12V 24V
PCBA valve
switch J1 A24V J22(A24V)
Power B12Vconncected to reagent 12V Pump/indi
refrigeration board F12V/B12V B12V
J2 051-000207-00
A24V:fan cator
L/N B12:cooler
J2 F12V
J1 External
F12Vcooler and board 24 220V
components V Air vacuum
connector
pump BA80 pressure
J1
AC drive BM10 Fluidics detection board
board
J17 temperature control 24V
J1
051-000216-00
board PCBA Temperatur Heater(substrate)
PE Temperature e sensor
earthing J23
051-000747-00
J24 J30 J5 collection Temperature Heater(reaction carousel and
AC/DC board sensor
seperati dispersion carousel
Weight Wash buffer
on
device
J9 detection J9bubble detection 220V B
B board board
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE:
File Bytes
DWG NO. REV
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET OF SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Main
AC input breaker70A
220/110VAC Bus-bar PE 010-000096-00
1A 1B
Terminal jumper connection

J1 2A 2B
SDM 1 1
24V6A power 2 SDM
supply board 3 breaker13A
3
051-000530-00 M07-00100S---
C 1A 1B C
J1
SDM 1 1 2A 2B
24V6A power 2
supply board 3
Main unit
3
051-000530-00 breaker 30A
010-000067-00
1A 1B
J2 2A 2B
BA80 AC drive 1
1
051-000208-00 2 2
B B
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Analyzer AC input

File Bytes
DWG NO. REV
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Serial port BA80 port conversion J1 Serial port cable 1 J2 SDM main
1(DB9) board PCBA control board
Serial port Serial port cable2 BM10 main control
2(DB9) 051-000376-00 J2 J2
Serial port board
J3 Serial port cable3 J2
Serial port
PC 3(DB9)
cable P1(DB25) BA80/BM10
Serial port main control
4(DB9)
Hand J4
Serial port held bar board
C
5(DB9)
J5 C
code
reader
USB Communication
conversion
BA80port conversion board*3
SDM main
board PCBA
Ethernet J5 J6 Ethernet J12
cable cable control board
PC 051-000376-00 Exc BM10 main
Serial port Ethernet Ethernet Ethernet J12
(RJ45) cable
J6(RJ45) J7 cable hag Ethernet J5 J6 cable control board
cable
er
Ethernet Ethernet
BA80 main
cable
J5 J6 J12 control board
cable
B B
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Communication input

File Bytes
DWG NO. REV
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
J5
Power input cable1
009-000452-00
1 B24V red 2
1 6 2 B24V red 3
AC input cable J1
2 7 3 A5V blue 1 1 6
009-000374-00
D 4 C12V yellow 4 1 1
J3 3 8
6 GND black 6
2 7 J8
2
3
1 L 1 Brown AC drive board D
4
4 9
7 GND black 7
3 8 J14
2 051-000208-00
5 10 10 GND black 8 1 1 N 3 Blue
J7 3
3
BM10DC power conversion

4 9 2 4
5 10 Analyzing unit switch

cable
051-000755-00
009-000371-00
boardPCBA
Power input cable 2 1
009-000453-00 J2 2
1
J7
J15
Power supply assembly 3 3
8 A5V blue 4 1 7
1 5 5 B24V red 1
2 8
BA40-30-61943 4 1
6 B24V red 2
2 6 7 B24V red 3 3 9 PSCB J12 5 2
3 7 1 GND black 7 6 3
4 8
2 GND black 8
4 10
3 GND black 9 5 11
C 6 12
PCBA: C
Power input cable3 J4 051-000509-00 J16

009-000454-00
J6
1 C12V red 1
1 2 24VPower supply board 1
1 5 2 C12V red 3 3 4 2
2 6
3
4
GND black
GND black
2
4 5 6
PCBA:
5 C12V red 5
3 7 6 C12V red 7 7 8 051-000510-00 24V power supply cable
7 GND black 6 9 J22
4 8
8 GND black 8
11
10
12
Power conversion PCBA: J3
1
009-000477-00
A24V red 4
5 1
051-000511-00 1
6 2
2 24VGND black 8
2
051-000207-00
7 3
8 4
board
P1
1 F12V red 1
1
B 2 F12V red 2 2 B
3 GND black 1 3
J2/J1
4
4 GND black 2
Refrigeration 12V power supply
P2 cable
009-000468-00
J6
1 GND
1 Power supply fan 3
J5 2 12VOUT
GND 1 2
1
Power supply fan 1 12VOUT 2 3
3 GND
2
4
4 12VOUT Power supply fan 4
Power supply fan
GND 3 3 cable
Power supply fan 2 12VOUT 4 4 BA33-20-55752
A
Power supply
fan cable MINDRAY
Power supply board wiring
A
BA33-20-55752
TITLE: diagram
File Bytes
DWG NO. BM10 REV 1.0
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET 2 OF 17 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reagent drive control board power cord
009-000423-00
1 D12V yellow 7 J14
8
Reagent control
1
2 A5V red 3 Power supply input cable
1
1 1 6
drive board 3 C12V blue 4
9
J3
2
009-000452-00
2
4 B24V orange 1 1 B24V red 2
1 6
10
2 7
J4
3
5 B24V orange 2 2 B24V red 3
3
2 7
11
D 6 -12V (E) white 14 3 A5V blue 1
4
3 8 D
Power supply assembly
4
7 GND black 5 3 8 4 C12V yellow 4
12 13
5
J1 6 GND black 6
BA40-30-61943
10
4 9
5
8 GND black 6 4 9
6
7 GND black 7
9 GND black 8 5 10 10 GND black 8 5 10 PSCB
14
7
10 GND black 9
Auto load control drive board power cord Power supply input cable Power supply conversion board
009-000415-00 2 J15
1 D12V yellow 7 J7 009-000453-00
PCBA( 051-000511-00)
Auto load 8 A5V blue 4 1 7 Power supply conversion board
1
2 A5V red 3 5 B24V red 1
6
control drive
1
1 5
3 C12V blue 4 2 8 PCB(050-000388-00)
2
6 B24V red 2
board
2
2 6
4 B24V orange 1 7 B24V red 3 3 9 12V power supply board
10
J1
3
5 B24V orange 2
8
1 GND black 7
3
3 7 PCBA(051-000509-00)
4 10
11
6 -12V(E) white 14
4
2 GND black 8
9
8 12Vpower supply board PCB(050-
4
4
7 GND black 5 3 GND black 9 5 11
12 13
5
J1 000386-00)
10
5
8 GND black 6
6 12
6
9 GND black 8 Power supply input cable 24Vpower supply board
14
7
10 GND black 9 3 J4
009-000454-00
PCBA(051-000510-00)
Vortexer control drive board power cord J6
C 1 C12V red 1
1 2 24Vpower supply board PCB(050- C
009-000415-00 1 2 C12V red 3
5 3 4 000387-00)
1 D12V yellow 7 3 GND black 2
Vortexer 2 4 GND black 4
8
6
1
2 A5V red 3 5 6
6
control drive 5 C12V red 5

1
3 C12V blue 4 3 7
2
6 C12V red 7 7 8
board
7
4 B24Vorange 1 7 GND black 6 9

4 8
10
10
J10
3
5 B24Vorange 2 8 GND black 8
8
11 12
11
6 -12V(E) white 14
4
9
7 GND black 5
12 13
5
J1
10
8 GND black 6
6
9 GND black 8
14
7
10 GND black 9 1 AGND black 5
Dispersion control drive board power J2 J1
3 AGND black 4
cord 1 3 1 3
2 D12V green 1
009-000415-00
2 4 4 E12V white 2
Dispersion 1 D12V yellow 7 2 4
BA2K Analog
8
1
2 A5V red 3
6
control drive
1
board
3 C12V blue 4
9
2
J10 3 A5V red 2 J3 power supply
7
4 B24Vorange 1 4 C12V red 1

10
conversion
2
4
J9
3
B
2
B 5 B24Vorange 2
8
11
5 GND black 3
1
3
6 -12V(E) white 14
4
1
board
9
7 GND black 5 6 GND black 4

12 13
J1
10
8 GND black 6
4
5
6
051-001023-00
J2
6
9 GND black 8
1
2
3
14
10 GND black 9
1 B24V yellow 7
3
Fluidics
2 yellow
blue
blue
GND black
-12V white
2 B24V yellow 8
temperature 3 B24V yellow 9
12VGND
12VGND
1
+5V red
7
control board BM10DC power supply

1
7
+12V
4 C12V blue 10 Main control board
power supply cable
5
6
1
2
8
5 A5V red 11 conversion board PCBA

2
8
009-000387-00
6 D12V green 12
9
3
051-000755-00
3
J1 7 GND black 1
J8
2
6
4
5
1
10
4
10
4
8 GND black 2
3
11 9 GND black 3
5
11
5
12
10 GND black 4 1 4
MINDRAY
6
12
6
11 GND black 5 2 5
A A
12 -12V(E) white 6 Main control board
3 6
Fluidics temperature control board TITLE: DC power supply conversion board
power cord
File Bytes 009-000456-00
J1
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
AC drive board Power supply

Bus - main power input assembly AC power
D
bar
J1 BA40 power D
cable009-000373-00 input cable
J8
supply
L brown
009-000374-00
1 3 1
1 1 L 1 Brown assembly
1 4 2
N light J2 BA40-30-61943
2 Power
blue 2 2 J7
3 3 N 1 Blue 1
conversion
3
board
4 2
1 051-000511-00
2 J11
220VAC pump
3 J10 AC power supply cable
1 2 8 L brown
009-000380-00
Air butt- AC waste pump
3 4 13 N light blue joint P07
10 L brown
5 6 Air butt-joint
AC vacuum pump
1 14 N light blue
7 8 p08
2 J12 9 10
3 11 12
13 14
C Transformer110VAC C
power supply input cable
009-000382-00
1 L brown 1 Heater
2 N light blue 2 AC power cord
1 3
2109-20-76214
3
4
L brown
N light blue
Air
3
4
2 4 J8 AC drive board J3
2
blue
N light 009-000379-00
Air butt-
joint Dispersion carousel heater
butt-
Insulating
2 L brown joint 2 1 4
ACDB 1
3
2
4
7
brown
L Air butt-
joint
Temperature protection
switch
transformer R800 5 6
4 N light
4 N light blue 4 2 5 J9 blue Air butt-
Reaction carousel heater
3 7 8 joint
3 6
6 9 10 9 L Air butt- Temperature protection
Transformer 220V AC 11 12
brown joint switch
power output cable
009-000383-00
J10 Wash Temperature Control B

B
1 2 Board to AC control board J6
cable 009-000457-00
3 4 11 12V red 1
12 P07.AC vacuum pump 2 1 2
5 6 J7
Fluidics
13 12V red 3 3 4
7 8 14 P08.AC waste pump 4
temperature
15 12Vred 5 5 6 1
9 10 16 reserved AC pump 6 7 8
control 11 12 1 12V red 9 2
2 HEA01.reserved heater 10 9 10
13 14
board 3 12V red 11 3
11 12
15 16 4 HEA02.reaction carousel heater 12
5 12V red 13 13 14
17 18 6 HEA03.dispersion carousel heater 14
19 20
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: AC drive board

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

1
GND
21
B
A
C
D
control board
communication cable
File
Date
009-000390-00
1 TXD1- 1
2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3
1
1
J17
4 RXD1- 4
J5
13
5 RST1 5
1
2
1
1
2
25 25
25
6 GND 6
14
3
4
7 CTL1 7
12
3
4
2
8 GND 8
24
5
6
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
15
11
7
8
7
8
10 TXD2+ 10
3
23
11 RXD2+ 11
9
10
16
9
10
10
12 RXD2- 12
4
22
13 RST2 13
11
12
11
12
9
14 GND 14
17
13
13
5
15 CTL2 15
21
Time
Bytes
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003

16 GND 16
14 16
15
8
14 16
15
18
17 TXD3- 17
6
18
17
20
18
17
18 TXD3+ 18
19
19 RXD3+ 19
20
19
20
19
7
20 RXD3- 20
19
22
21
22
21
21 RST3 21
20
22 GND 22
8
24
23
2
2
24
23
18
23 CTL3 23
051-000743-00
5
21
24 GND 24
9
power communication cable
17
25 TXD4- 25
25 27
26 28
051-000747-00
25 27
26 28
control board

4
22
26 TXD4+ 26
30
29
30
29
27 RXD4+ 27
10
16
28 RXD4- 28
32
3
31
23
32
31
29 RST4 29
11
15
34
33
34
30 GND 30
33
2 2
24
31 CTL4 31
35
36
35
36
12
32 GND 32
14
1 1
37
38
1
33 TXD5- 33
25
37
38
34 TXD5+ 34
13
39
40
39
40
35 RXD5+ 35
36 RXD5- 36
J7
37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
J11
39 IN12 39
40 GND 40
3
3
Dispersion control drive Reagent control drive board

board communication cable communication cable
009-000389-00 009-000389-00
1 TXD1- 1 1 TXD1- 1
J10
J10
2 TXD1+ 2 2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3 3 RXD1+ 3
4 RXD1- 4 4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5 5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
1
2
1
2
1
2
6 GND 6
1
2
7 CTL1 7 7 CTL1 7
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
8 GND 8 8 GND 8
5
6
5
6
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
10 TXD2+ 10 10 TXD2+ 10
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
11 RXD2+ 11 11 RXD2+ 11
9
9
12 RXD2- 12
10
10
9
10
12 RXD2- 12
9
10
13 RST2 13
4
4
13 RST2 13
11
12
11
12
11
12
14 GND 14
11
12
14 GND 14
15 CTL2 15
13
13
13
15 CTL2 15
13
16 GND 16 16 GND 16
14 16
14 16
15
15
14 16
15
17 TXD3- 17
14 16
15
17 TXD3- 17
18 TXD3+ 18
18
18
17
17
18
17
18 18 TXD3+ 18
17 19 RXD3+ 19 19 RXD3+ 19
20
20
19
19
20
19
20 RXD3- 20
20
19
20 RXD3- 20
21 RST3 21
22
22
21
21
21 RST3 21
22
21
22
21
22 GND 22 22 GND 22
24
24
23
23
24
23
23 CTL3 23
24
23
23 CTL3 23
24 GND 24 24 GND 24
25 TXD4- 25 25 TXD4- 25
051-001413-00
25 27
26 28
25 27
26 28
25 27
26 28
26 TXD4+ 26
25 27
26 28
26 TXD4+ 26
27 RXD4+ 27 27 RXD4+ 27
30
30
29
29
30
29
30
29
28 RXD4- 28 28 RXD4- 28
051-001413-00
32
32
31
31
32
29 RST4 29
31
32
29 RST4 29
31
30 GND 30 30 GND 30
34
34
33
33
34
33
34
33
31 CTL4 31 31 CTL4 31
Dispersion control drive board
32 GND 32
35
35
36
36
35
051-000742-00
36
5
5
32 GND 32
35
36
33 TXD5- 33 33 TXD5- 33
37
37
38
38
37
38
34 TXD5+ 34
37
38
Reagent control drive board
34 TXD5+ 34
35 RXD5+ 35
39
39
40
40
39
40
35 RXD5+ 35
39
40
36 RXD5- 36 36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37 37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
J4
38 GND 38
J10
39 IN12 39 39 IN12 39
BM10 main control board
40 GND 40 40 GND 40
Vortexer control drive

Auto load control drive board board communication
communication cable cable
009-000389-00
009-000388-00
1 TXD1- 1 1 TXD1- 1
J10
2 TXD1+ 2 2 TXD1+ 2
J10
6
6
3 RXD1+ 3 3 RXD1+ 3
4 RXD1- 4 4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5 5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
1
2
1
2
1
2
6 GND 6
7 CTL1 7
1
2
7 CTL1 7
3
4
3
4
3
4
8 GND 8 8 GND 8
3
4
5
6
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
5
6
10 TXD2+ 10 10 TXD2+ 10
7
8
7
8
7
8
11 RXD2+ 11 11 RXD2+ 11
7
8
9
12 RXD2- 12
10
9
10
9
10
12 RXD2- 12
9
10
13 RST2 13 13 RST2 13
11
12
11
12
11
12
14 GND 14 14 GND 14
11
12
15 CTL2 15
13
15 CTL2 15
13
13
16 GND 16
13
16 GND 16
14 16
15
14 16
15
14 16
15
17 TXD3- 17 17 TXD3- 17
14 16
15
18 TXD3+ 18 18 TXD3+ 18
18
17
18
17
18
17
19 RXD3+ 19
18
19 RXD3+ 19
17
20
19
20
19
20
19
20 RXD3- 20 20 RXD3- 20
20
19
board
21 RST3 21 21 RST3 21
22
21
22
21
22
21
SHEET
7
7
22 GND 22 22 GND 22
22
21
24
23
24
23
24
23
23 CTL3 23
051-001413-00
23 CTL3 23
DWG NO.
24
23
24 GND 24 24 GND 24
25 TXD4- 25 25 TXD4- 25
25 27
26 28
25 27
26 28
25 27
26 28
26 TXD4+ 26 26 TXD4+ 26
OF
051-001413-00
25 27
26 28
27 RXD4+ 27 27 RXD4+ 27
30
29
30
29
30
29
28 RXD4- 28 28 RXD4- 28
30
29
32
31
32
29 RST4 29
31
32
31
29 RST4 29
32
31
30 GND 30 30 GND 30
34
33
34
33
34
33
31 CTL4 31 31 CTL4 31
34
33
BM10
32 GND 32
35
36
35
36
35
32 GND 32
36
Auto load control drive board

35
36
33 TXD5- 33 33 TXD5- 33
37
38
37
38
37
38
34 TXD5+ 34 34 TXD5+ 34
37
38
35 RXD5+ 35
39
40
39
40
35 RXD5+ 35
39
40
36 RXD5- 36
39
40
36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37 37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
J3
38 GND 38
J6
39 IN12 39 39 IN12 39
40 GND 40 40 GND 40
8
MINDRAY
TITLE: Main board wiring dirgram_1/2
REV1.0
SIZE A3
B
A
C
D
13 Hardware System
13-137
21
GND
21
13-138
B
A
C
D
Fluidics temperature control
board communication cable
File
Date
009-000390-00
13 Hardware System
1 TXD1- 1
2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3
1
1
J17
4 RXD1- 4
J5
13
5 RST1 5
1
2
1
1
2
25 25
25
6 GND 6
14
3
4
7 CTL1 7
12
3
4
2
8 GND 8
24
5
6
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
15
11
7
8
7
8
10 TXD2+ 10
3
23
11 RXD2+ 11
9
10
16
9
10
10
12 RXD2- 12
4
22
13 RST2 13
9
14 GND 14
17
5
15 CTL2 15
21
Time
Bytes

16 GND 16
18
17 TXD3- 17
6
20
18 TXD3+ 18
19
19 RXD3+ 19
7
20 RXD3- 20
19
21 RST3 21
20
22 GND 22
00X-000XXX-00
2
2
18
23 CTL3 23
051-000743-00
5
21
24 GND 24
9
power communication cable
17
25 TXD4- 25
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
control board

4
22
26 TXD4+ 26
27 RXD4+ 27
10
16
28 RXD4- 28
23
29 RST4 29
11
15
30 32 34
29 31 33
30 32 34
30 GND 30
29 31 33
2 2
24
31 CTL4 31
12
32 GND 32
14
1 1
1
33 TXD5- 33
25
34 TXD5+ 34
13
35 37 39
36 38 40
35 37 39
36 38 40
35 RXD5+ 35
36 RXD5- 36
J7
37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
J11
39 IN12 39
40 GND 40
3
3
Dispersion control drive Reagent control drive

board communication cable board communication cable
009-000389-00 009-000389-00
1 TXD1- 1 1 TXD1- 1
J10
J10
2 TXD1+ 2 2 TXD1+ 2
3 RXD1+ 3 3 RXD1+ 3
4 RXD1- 4 4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5 5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
1
2
1
2
1
2
6 GND 6
1
2
7 CTL1 7 7 CTL1 7
3
4
3
4
3
4
3
4
8 GND 8 8 GND 8
5
6
5
6
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
10 TXD2+ 10 10 TXD2+ 10
7
8
7
8
7
8
7
8
11 RXD2+ 11 11 RXD2+ 11
9
9
12 RXD2- 12
10
10
9
10
12 RXD2- 12
9
10 13 RST2 13
4
4
13 RST2 13
14 GND 14 14 GND 14
15 CTL2 15 15 CTL2 15
16 GND 16 16 GND 16
17 TXD3- 17 17 TXD3- 17
18 TXD3+ 18 18 TXD3+ 18
19 RXD3+ 19 19 RXD3+ 19
20 RXD3- 20 20 RXD3- 20
21 RST3 21 21 RST3 21
22 GND 22 22 GND 22
board
board
23 CTL3 23 23 CTL3 23
24 GND 24 24 GND 24
051-001413-00
25 TXD4- 25
051-001413-00
25 TXD4- 25
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
26 TXD4+ 26
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
26 TXD4+ 26
27 RXD4+ 27 27 RXD4+ 27
28 RXD4- 28
Reagent control drive
28 RXD4- 28
Dispersion control drive
29 RST4 29 29 RST4 29
30 GND 30 30 GND 30
30 32 34
30 32 34
29 31 33
29 31 33
30 32 34
29 31 33
30 32 34
29 31 33
31 CTL4 31 31 CTL4 31
32 GND 32
051-000742-00
5
5
32 GND 32
33 TXD5- 33 33 TXD5- 33
34 TXD5+ 34 34 TXD5+ 34
35 RXD5+ 35
35 37 39
35 37 39
36 38 40
36 38 40
35 37 39
36 38 40
35 RXD5+ 35
35 37 39
36 38 40
36 RXD5- 36 36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37 37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
J4
38 GND 38
J10
39 IN12 39 39 IN12 39
40 GND 40 40 GND 40

Auto load control drive
board communication
board communication cable cable
009-000389-00 009-000388-00
1 TXD1- 1 1 TXD1- 1
J10
2 TXD1+ 2 2 TXD1+ 2
J10
6
6
3 RXD1+ 3 3 RXD1+ 3
4 RXD1- 4 4 RXD1- 4
5 RST1 5 5 RST1 5
6 GND 6
1
2
1
2
1
2
6 GND 6
7 CTL1 7
1
2
7 CTL1 7
3
4
3
4
3
4
8 GND 8 8 GND 8
3
4
5
6
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
5
6
9 TXD2- 9
5
6
10 TXD2+ 10 10 TXD2+ 10
7
8
7
8
7
8
11 RXD2+ 11 11 RXD2+ 11
7
8
9
12 RXD2- 12
10
9
10
9
10
12 RXD2- 12
9
10
13 RST2 13 13 RST2 13
14 GND 14 14 GND 14
15 CTL2 15 15 CTL2 15
16 GND 16 16 GND 16
17 TXD3- 17 17 TXD3- 17
18 TXD3+ 18 18 TXD3+ 18
19 RXD3+ 19 19 RXD3+ 19
20 RXD3- 20
20 RXD3- 20
board
21 RST3 21 21 RST3 21
SHEET
TITLE:
board
7
7
22 GND 22 22 GND 22
23 CTL3 23
051-001413-00
23 CTL3 23
DWG NO.
24 GND 24 24 GND 24
051-001413-00
25 TXD4- 25 25 TXD4- 25
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
26 TXD4+ 26 26 TXD4+ 26
OF
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27
12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28
27 RXD4+ 27 27 RXD4+ 27
28 RXD4- 28 28 RXD4- 28
29 RST4 29 29 RST4 29
30 GND 30 30 GND 30
30 32 34
29 31 33
30 32 34
29 31 33
30 32 34
29 31 33
31 CTL4 31 31 CTL4 31
30 32 34
29 31 33
BM10
32 GND 32 32 GND 32
33 TXD5- 33 33 TXD5- 33
34 TXD5+ 34 34 TXD5+ 34
35 RXD5+ 35
35 37 39
36 38 40
35 37 39
36 38 40
35 RXD5+ 35
35 37 39
36 38 40
36 RXD5- 36
35 37 39
36 38 40
36 RXD5- 36
37 IN1 37 37 IN1 37
38 GND 38
J3
38 GND 38
J6
39 IN12 39 39 IN12 39
40 GND 40 40 GND 40
8
Main board wiring dirgram_1/2

MINDRAY
REV1.0
SIZE A3
B
A
C
D

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Reagent cooler cables

Cooler
Cooler 1 Cooler 3 Cooler 4
Reagent chamber 2
Ambient
Thermistor
temperature sensor
3001-21-07100
D D
2
2
shield
shield
Reagent temperature sensor

GND white
Ambient temperature
009-000473-00
009-000473-00
sensor cable
black
black
SEN_RT red
black
black
red
SEN_RT red
GND white
red
red
red
cable
1
black
black
3
3
3
3
1
1
2
3
1
1
3
2
4 3 4 3
4 3 4 3
J14 1 2 3 J15 1 2 3 1 2 3 J16
F12V power cord 2 1
P1 2 1 2 1 2 1
009-000468-00
1 F12V red 1
J7 J5 J4
1
J6
conversion board
BA40-30-61627
control heater
Temperature
2
C 3 J1 1 1 F12V C
Power
3 GND black
4 2
3
J10 3 3 GND
P2 B12V power cord 4
009-000468-00
1 F12Vred 1
1
3 GND black
2
3 J2 Reagent
4
3
refrigeration
conversion board
5 1
board
BA40-30-61627
1 B24V red 4 6 2
J22
Power
J3
1
2 B24VGND black
8
Fan 24V power cord
7 3 051-000207-00
2 8 4
B B
1 TXD- 1
1
1
Main control
2 TXD + 2
2
1
1
2
2 3 RXD+ 3
3
4
board
3
4
4 RXD- 4
3 J24 J9
5
6
5 RST 5
5
J19
6
4 J20 J21 6 GND 6
7
8
4
7
7 CTL 7
8
5 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 GND 8
J17 Refrigeration board J5
Demisting heater cable

communication cable
Refrigeration fan cable
009-000391-00
GND black
009-000471-00
12V red
5
2
5
5
3
3
6
6
009-000476-00
4
009-000476-00
009-000476-00
1
1
4
4
DATA yellow
DATA yellow
DATA yellow
GND black
DATA yellow
DATA yellow
4
C24V red
GND black
GND black
GND black
GND black
C24V red
C24V red
C24V red
C24V red
3
MINDRAY
2
2
1
A
1
A
1
1
1
Reagent refrigerating Board

3
2
Air butt- Air butt-

3
3
3
3
2
2
2
joint joint TITLE:

wiring diagram
File Bytes Radiating fan of Radiating fan of
Vacuum pump fan the refrigeration
Reagent
refrigerating fan 1
the refrigeration
Reagent
refrigerating fan 2 DWG NO. BM10 REV 1.0
module module Reagent
Date Time barcode Temperature
Air butt- Air butt- Air butt- Air butt- Air butt- demisting protection
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 joint joint joint joint joint heater switch SHEET 15OF 17 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BM10 photometer preamplifier board

051-000746-00
J2 J1
D 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 D
2
1
2
1
3
LED photometer
LED light intensity

00X-000XXX-00
adjusting input
4
5
3
adjusting output
00X-000XXX-00
shield ground
SIGNAL
cable
LED-
LED+
-12V
+12V
GND
GND
GND
cable
4
5
3
3
1
2
6
2
1
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
J4 J3
C C
M32-063006-01 M32-033000-00

051-000743-00
J5 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
M33-251047-00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Photon counting
board communication
25
1
2
cable
C-009-001902-00
B B
1
25
J7 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
M33-251047-00 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13

051-000742-00
A
MINDRAY A
Preamplifier photon
TITLE: counting wiring diagram
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board

D D
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
J11
Fluidics temperature control

board communication cable
26
12
10
11
20
13
19
21
28
27
25
18
15
23
29
17
31
2
9
4
3
5
1
39
34
22
24
37
40
36
35
32
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
009-000390-00
REAC_TXD3+
WASH_CTL2
WASH_TXD2+
WASH_RXD2-
TEMP_RXD1-
REAC_RXD3-
WASH_RST2
RMIX_RXD4-
RMIX_CTL4
TEMP_TXD1+
WASH_TXD2-
TEMP_CTL1
REAC_CTL3
RMIX_TXD4+
RMIX_RST4
WASH_RXD2+
TEMP_RXD1+
REAC_RXD3+
TEMP_RST1
REAC_RST3
TEMP_TXD1-
REAC_TXD3-
RMIX_RXD4+
RMIX_TXD4-
RXD5-
TXD5+
RXD5+
GND
TXD5-
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
32
35
36
37
34
22
24
39
31
17
29
18
7
23
15
5
21
13
10
25
27
1
28
3
19
4
20
11
12
26
2
9
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
Dispersion motor cable 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
J17 1 2
009-000413-00
3 4
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
1 5 6
2 A- yellow 2
2
Dispersion 4 B+ orange 3 J3 7 8 Fluidics temperature control board position
aspirating motor 4 sensor cable
C 5 B- brown 4 9 10 009-000460-00 C
5
11 12 1 VCC red 1
2 REAC_PHO white 4 +
Dispersion syringe motor 1 13 14 C
- Aspiration home position sensor
cable 009-000410-00 3 GND black 2
15 16 4 GND green 3 E
1 A+ red 1
1
3 A- yellow 2 4 3 2 1 17 18 5 VCC red 1
3
Dispersion Peristaltic 4 B+ orange 3 J4 19 20 6 REACCPHO white 4
+
C
pump motor 4 7 GND black 2 P01 pump jamming sensor
6 B- brown 4 21 22 -
6 8 GND green 3 E
23 24
Dispersion syringe motor 2
cable 25 26
009-000411-00
1 A+ red 1
Fluidics temperature control board 27 28
4 3 2 1
1
3 A- yellow 2 29 30
Dispersion Peristaltic 3
4 B+ orange 3 J5 31 32
pump P01 motor 4
6
6 B- brown 4 051-000747-00 33 34
13
14
15
VCC red
RMR_PHO white
GND black
1
2
4
+
C
- Pump jamming detection sensor
37 38
39 40
B B
J16
A
MINDRAY A
Temperature control board
TITLE:
wiring diagram _1/4
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Liquid level floater sensor cable 2

D 009-000459-00
D
1 GND 1
Wash buffer empty .FL01 2 FL01 2
1 GND 3
Wash buffer full .FL02 2 FL02 4 DC pump/valve cable 2
009-000458-00
1 red V01
2 +12V Inlet valve 1.SV01
1 2
3 red V06
2 1 3 4 Wash solution switching
4 +12V
4 3 valve .SV02
1 GND 9 5 6
Waste tank liquid level 6 5 5 red V06
FL05 2 FL05 10 7 8
8 7 6 +12V Vacuum waste valve.SV03
10 9 9 10
12 11 11 12
15 red V18
14 13 13 14 Wash buffer aspirating pump P03
1 FL07 13 16 +24V
16 15 indicator
Waste tank full .FL07 2 GND 14 15 16
18 17 19 red V20
1 FL08 15 20 19 17 18 Concentrated wash solution
C Primary vacuum container 20 +12V C
22 21 19 20 valve.SV05
2 GND 16
full .FL08
24 23
Wash solution aspirating pump 1 FL09 17 21 22 25 red V23
26 25
1 2
P03 2 GND 18 23 24 26 +24V J1 front panel LED
button
J15 25 26 27 red V24
Wash buffer 1 indicator
Fluidics temperature control board 27 28
29 30
28
29 red
+24V
V25
Wash buffer 2 indicator
30 +24V
31 32
1 GND black 1
051-000747-00 33 34 37 red V29
1
Substrate switching valve.SV30

1
35 36 38 +12V
6 RAM blue 3
2
39 red P12
2
7 LLS green 2 37 38
12V red Substrate inlet valve.SV31
3 4 5 6 7
8 4 40 +12V
3 4 5 6 7
39 40
41 red V31
41 42 Substrate outlet valve.SV32
2 TXD red 6 42 +12V
4 RST brown 7 43 44
Weight detection board 3 RXD white 8 47 red V13
45 46 Probe wash waste valve.SV18
48 +12V
5 PSEN black 9 47 48
8 9
8 9
B 49 50 B
J9
10
J12
10
J23
8 +12Vred 1
1
7
1
6 YES blue 3
2
2
7 MAY green 4
3 4 5 6 7
9
3
1 GND black 9 J8
10
4
2 TXD green 10 1 red SIGN

1
Wash buffer air bubble detection 3 RXD white 11
11 External pump connectorBNC)
5
2 black GND
4 RST brown 12 2
board 12
External pump cable
6
5 PSEN black 13 009-000466-00

8 9
J9
J24 MINDRAY
10
A A
TITLE:
wiring diagram_2/4
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Pressure detection board

D D
communication cable
Pressure
1 +12V red 1
1
detection board
2 RXD purple
2
3 white
1
3 TXD
6
3
4 2 green
PSEN
2
7
4 black
4
5 GND
J22
3
6 5 yellow
-12V
8
4
6
6
2
9
7 RST blue 7
5
7
8 Shield
4
Reagent J1
8
6
control J30
8
12 GND black 7
7
drive board 13 SV18 6

10 12 14 16 18
2 1
9
14 RESV1 2 4 3
11 13 15 17
15 RESV2 4 6 5
8 7
17 RESV3 8
1
10 9
18 RESV4 10
2
C 12 11 C
14 13
Fluidics temperature control board
3
16 15
4
18 17
051-000747-00
5
20 19
22 21 J25
6
2
Dispersion
1
24 23
26 25
4
control drive
7 SV30 18
9 GND black 19
J14
6
board 8 SV31 20
8
J5
7
10 SV32 22
1 B24V yellow 7
10 12 14
12 RESV1 14
9
conversion board
DC power supply
2 B24V yellow 8
1
7
13 RESV2 16
11 13
3 C12V yellow 9
1
7
2
8
4 C12V blue 10
2
8
5 A5V red 11
9
3
6 D12V green 12
9
3
10
4
J1 7 GND black 1
10
4
8 GND black 2 11
5
B B
11 9 GND black 3
5
12
6
10 GND black 4
12
6
11 GND black 5
12 -12V(E) white 6
J8
Wash Temperature Control
Board Power cord
009-000456-00
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: wiring diagram_3/4
File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
14 13
L brown 13
12 11
AC waste pump P07 N light blue 8
D 10 9 D
8 7
L brown 14 6 5 J10
AC vacuum pump p08 N light blue 10 4 3
2 1
AC drive control cable 1 2
J6 14 HEA03 dispersion carousel heating 6 3 4
13 12V red 5
1 2 12 HEA02. reaction carousel heating 4 5 6
Temperature Air butt- L brown 7
11 12V red 3 7 8
protection switch joint 12 11 3 4
10 HEA01.reserved heater 2
Dispersion carousel Air butt- 10 9 5 6 9 12V red 1 9 10
heater joint
N light blue
2
AC drive 7 8 6 reserved AC pump 16 11 12
J10
8 7
Temperature Air butt-
L brown
9 6 5 J3
board 9 10 4
5 12V red
P07.AC waste pump
15
14 13 14
protection switch joint 3 12V red 13 15 16
4 3 11 12
Reaction carousel Air butt- N light blue
2 P08.AC vacuum pump 12
4 2 1 13 14 1 12V red 11 17 18
heater joint
19 20
C C
Dispersion Temp Sensor signal 3 3 19 20

sensor Sensor signal
carosuel 2 2 J1 17 18 20..Shiled 11..Shiled
shield 1 1 15 16 18..VPP 9..VPP 1 2
Sensor signal Temperature
Reaction Temp
3 3
13 14 13..AGND 10..AGND 3 4
sensor Sensor signal collection board
carousel 2 2 J2 11 12 19..AGND 6..AGND
5 6
(new)ADS1247 J11
11..PSEN 5..PSEN J18
shield 1 9 10
1 051-000817-00 7 8
Temp 9..RST 3..RST
control board
Sensor signal 7 8
sensor 10..RXD 4..TXD 9 10
051-000747-00
3 3
Sensor signal 5 6 11 12
J3 12..TXD 7..RXD
2 2
Substrate 3 4
shield 1
1
heating module 1 2
BA30-30-06761
9 10
BA31-30-41551 Temperature 1\3\5\7\9..24V 7 8
B protection switch B
5 6
Heater 2\4\6\8\10..LOC
3 4
1 2
J2
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Temperature collection board

File Bytes
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 SHEET14 OF 17 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
S level sense cable

S level sense cable 009-000436-00
009-000424-00 1 GND black 1
1
1 GND black 1 J3 1 2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2
J3
J2
2
2 RAM blue 3 2
051-001092-00
S level sense board
3 LLS green 2 1 2 3 LEVEL green 3
3
3
1 2 4 12V red 4
3 4 4 4 +12V red 4
4
5 NC 5
Reagent control 3 4
6 RXD white 6 5 6
J10 5
5 6 7 NC 7 6
drive board 8 TXD brown 8 7 8 6 Txd white 1
1
7 8 7 7 Rxd brown 3
9 NC 9 9 10
J3
2
9 10 8
3
10 SGND black 10 9 9 Shield
R level sense cable R level sense cable009-000436-00

009-000424-00
1 GND black 1
J2 J2
1
1 GND black 1 1 2 RAM_V_PHO blue 2
J2
2 RAM blue 3
2
2
051-001092-00
Rlevel sense board
1 2 3 LLS green 2 1 2 3 LEVEL green 3
3
3
4 12V red 4
3 4 5 NC 5 3 4 4 4 +12V red 4
4
C
5 6 6 RXD white 6 5 6 J11 5
C
7 NC 7
7 8 7 8 6
8 TXD brown 8 6 Txd white 1
1
9 10 9 NC 9 9 10 Probe /Mixer 7 7 Rxd brown 3
J3
2
8
10 SGND black 10
3
9 Shield
conversion board 9
29 VCC red 1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
30 SS_PHOwhite 4
29 30 31 GND black 2 J4
31 32 32 GND green 3 1 VCC red 1
+
9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1
4 SOD_PHO white 4 CSecond
J11 33 34 33 VCC red 1
gripper empty gripping
2 GND black 2 -
34 SMR_PHO white 4 E
optical coupler
3 GND green 3
35 36 J5
35 GND black 2
J9 6 VCC red 1
37 38 36 GND green 3 +
9 SOD_PHO white 4 C second gripper finger opening
39 40 37 VCC red 1 7 GND black 2 -
4 3 2 1 E
optical coupler
38 SMR_PHO white 4 J6 8 GND green 3
Auto load 39 GND black 2

40 GND green 3
drive control 1 VCC red 1
+
9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1
4 SOD_PHO white 4 C Second gripper vertical anti-
B board 1 A+ red 1 2 GND black 2 -
bumping optical coupler
B
1 2 3 4
3 GND green 3 E
4 3 2 1
2 A- yellow 2 J7
J8 6 A+ red 1
J20 3 B+ orange 4
7 A- yellow 2
+
C
4 B- brown 5 -
8 B+ orange 4 Second gripper finger motor
Second gripper E
9 B- brown 5
finger motor
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Probe /Mixer conversion board

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Input cable of external

Power switch input cable
vacuum pump AC switch
ba40-20-61666 Connecte
E 009-000868-00
d to shell
yellow- AC switch
green
1 L brown 3
Power 1(Y) L brown 1a 1 blue N
1 3 1
socket N light
2a J1
2(X) blue 2
N light
blue
1 2 4 2 4 brown L Fan 2
3
Fan drive cable
J2 009-000866-00
C C
1 blue N
3 1
External vacuum 4 brown L Fan 1
4 2
pump drive board J3

Connecting cable of external
External vacuum input control
vacuum and analyzer
cable009-000439-00 Pump drive cable
009-000870-00
009-000867-00
BS-800 back Inner inner inner red GND 1 1 1 blue N
2 1
panel BNC shell 2
connector outer outer
shell red SIGN 3
J5 43 brown L Vacuum pump
3 3
J4
B B
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: External vacuum pump drive board

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 31 33 36 38 40
J6
29
26
12
D
10
11
28
27
25
13
29
15
20
19
21
2
31
18
23
4
3
5
1
17
39
7
communication cable
34
22
24
37
40
36
35
32
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
009-000388-00
ST1_RXD1-
ST2_RXD2-
ST2_TXD2+
ST2_CTL2
SM_RXD4-
ST1_TXD1+
SM_CTL4
ST2_RST2
ST1_CTL1
SP_TXD3+
SM_TXD4+
ST1_RXD1+
ST2_RXD2+
SM_RST4
ST1_RST1
ST1_TXD1-
ST2_TXD2-
SP_RXD3-
SM_RXD4+
SM_TXD4-
SP_CTL3
SP_RXD3+
SP_RST3
SP_TXD3-
RXD5-
TXD5+
RXD5+
GND
TXD5-
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
32
35
36
37
34
22
24
39
17
18
23
31
21
29
19
15
20
13
7
25
27
28
5
10
26
1
9
3
11
4
12
2
Loader motor cable
009-000403-00
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 24 26 28 Position sensor cable auto load drive
2 A- yellow 2 18 22 30 32 34 35 37 39
2 board 009-000427-00
Loader motor 4 B+ orange 3 J13 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40 J10
4 1 VCC red 1
5 B- brown 4 +
5 2 SOD_PHO white 4
Pusher motor cable C
3 GND black 2
- Load home position sensor
009-000404-00 4 GND green 3 E
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
1 5 VCC red 1
+
2 A- yellow 2 6 SOD_PHO_C white 4
C
Pusher motor 2 J14 7 GND black 2 Drawer open-close switch
4 B+ orange 3 -
4 1 2 E
5 5 B- brown 4
C Tray clamp motor cable 3 4 C
009-000405-00 5 6
1 A+ red 1
1
3 A- yellow 2 4 3 2 1 7 8
Guide rail open-close 13 VCC red 1
motor
3
4 B+ orange 3 J15 9 10 14 SID_PHO_C white 4
+
C
Working position optical coupler
4 15 GND black 2 - (reflective)
6 B- brown 4 11 12
6 E
Unload motor cable 13 14 17 VCC red 1
+
009-000406-00 18 SR_PHO white 4
15 16 C Tray counting optical coupler
1 1 A+ red 1
Auto load 19 GND black 2 - (reflective)
4 3 2 1
3 A- yellow 2 17 18 E
Unload motor 3 21 VCC red 1
4 B+ orange 3 J16 19 20 +
4
6
6 B- brown 4
Load clip motor cable
control drive 21 22
22
23
24
SR_PHO_C white
GND black
GND green
2
3
4
C
-Guide
E
rail opening home position sensor
J12 23 24
1
009-000407-00
1 A+ red 1 board 25 26
4 3 2 1
3 A- yellow 2 27 28
3
Vortexer motor 4
6
4 B+ orange 3
6 B- brown 4
J17 051-001413-00 29 30
31 32
29
30
VCC red
SS_PHOwhite
1
4
+
C
Pusher home position sensor (vertical
Gripping cuvette motor cable 31 GND black 2 - optical coupler conversion board )
33 34 32 GND green 3 E Connector M39-000189--- B
B 009-000409-00
1 A+ red 1 35 36
1
4 3 2 1
Second gripper vertical 3 A- yellow 2 37 38

3
motor 4 B+ orange 3
4 J18 39 40
6 B- brown 4 37 VCC red 1
6 41 42 +
Gripping cuvette rotating motor cable 38 SMR_PHO white 4
C
Tray feeding position optical
43 44 39 GND black 2 coupler
009-000408-00 -
1 A+ red 1 45 46 E (reflective)
4 3 2 1
1
3 A- yellow 2
Second gripper 3
4 B+ orange 3
J19 47 48
horizontal motor 4 49 50
6 B- brown 4
6
45 VCC red 1
46 SMU_PHO white 4 +
47 GND black 2
C Vortexer rotation speed
- monitoring optical coupler
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
48 GND green 3
1 E
3 A- yellow 2
Second gripper finger 3
4 B+ orange 3
J20
motor 4
6 B- brown 4
A
6
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Auto load control drive board_1/2

File Bytes
Date Time
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 1 11 17 SIZE A3

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Power cord of auto load control Position sensor cable 2 of auto load
D drive board 009-000423-00 control drive board D
?????
J1 5 VCC red 1
+
7 D12V yellow 1 J1 6 SOD_PHO_C white 4
C Unload home position optical
8
7 GND black 2
1
DC power supply
conversion board 3 A5V red 2 - coupler
8 GND green 3 E
6
1
4 C+12V blue 3
9
2
1 2 9 VCC red 1
1 B+24Vorange 4
Auto control +
7
2
3 4 10 SID_PHOwhite 4
10
C Waste tray full optical coupler
3
2 B+24Vorange 5 11 GND black 2 - (reflective)
5 6
8
3
14 -12V(E) white 6 12 GND green 3
11
E
4
5 GND black 5
drive board 7 8 13 VCC red 1
9
4
+
13 12
14 SID_PHO_C white 4
5
6 GND black 8 9 10 15 GND black 2

CSecond gripper's vertical middle
10
5
- position sensor
6
8 GND black 9 16 GND green 3

9 GND black 10 051-001413-00 11 12
17 VCC red 1
E
14
7
13 14 +
18 SR_PHO white 4
C Second gripper's vertical home
15 16 19 GND black 2 - position sensor
20 GND green 3 E
17 18 21 VCC red 1
6
1
22 SR_PHO_C white 4 +
19 20 C Second gripper's Horizontal
23 GND black 2
7
2
- home position sensor
21 22 24 GND green 3
E
8
J2 J11
3
23 24 25 VCC red 1
+
C 26 SU_PHO white 4 C
C Second gripper's coder sensor
25 26 Double optical coupler
9
4
27 GND black 2 -
conversion board
10
5
29 VCC red 1
29 30 1 VCC red 1
4 3 2 1 4 3 2 1
+
9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1
30 SS_PHOwhite 2
2 SOD_PHO white 4 C Second gripper empty gripper
1
2
31 32 31 GND black 3 J4 3 GND black 2 -
32 GND green 4
E
optical coupler
J25 33 34 4 GND green 3
4
3
35 36 33 VCC red 1 J9 6 VCC red 1
5
6 34 SMR_PHO white 2
+
7 SOD_PHO white 4 C
37 38 35 GND black 3 J5 Finger opening status optical
Front panel indicator 8 GND black 2 -
coupler
36 GND green 4 Probes/ 9 GND green 3 E
39 40
Of auto load drawer Mixer
Optical
1
2
37 VCC red 1 conversion
4 3 2 1
S-OUT-LED black 5 38 SMR_PHO white 2 J6 1 VCC red 1
board
Second gripper vertical anti coupler
4
+
3
9 8 7 6 4 3 2 1
2
Front panel LED board J2 39 GND black 3 2 SOD_PHO white 4 C

24V red 6
J23 40 GND green 4
bumping optical coupler conversion
3 GND black 2 -
1
4 GND green 3 E
board
8
7
1 A+ red 1 J8 6 A+ red 1
+
1 2 3 4
7 A- yellow 2
4 3 2 1
2 A- yellow 2 J7 C
8 B+ orange 4 -
Gripper finger motor
1
2
J20 3 B+ orange 4 E
2 lock1_out black 5 4 B- brown 5 9 B- brown 5
4
3
Drawer close
B electromagnet B
1 24V red 4 J24 Second gripper
5
finger motor
8
7
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Auto load control drive board_2/2

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Main control board

2 4 6 8 10

12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 31 33 38 40
J4
communication cable
29 36
009-000388-00
D
26
12
D
10
11
28
27
25
13
29
15
20
19
21
2
31
18
23
4
3
5
1
17
39
7
34
22
24
37
40
36
35
32
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
ST1_RXD1-
ST2_RXD2-
ST2_TXD2+
ST2_CTL2
SM_RXD4-
ST1_TXD1+
SM_CTL4
ST2_RST2
ST1_CTL1
SP_TXD3+
SM_TXD4+
ST1_RXD1+
ST2_RXD2+
SM_RST4
ST1_RST1
ST1_TXD1-
ST2_TXD2-
SP_RXD3-
SM_RXD4+
SM_TXD4-
SP_CTL3
SP_RXD3+
SP_RST3
SP_TXD3-
RXD5-
TXD5+
RXD5+
GND
TXD5-
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
Reagent carousel
rotation motor cable
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
32
35
36
37
34
22
24
39
17
18
23
31
21
29
19
15
20
13
7
25
27
28
5
10
26
1
9
3
11
4
12
2
009-000403-00
Position sensor cable of reagent control
1A+ red 1 drive board
4 3 2 1
1 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39 009-000427-00
2 A- yellow 2
Reagent carousel 2 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40 J10
rotation motor 4
4 B+ orange 3 J13 2
1 VCC red
SOD_PHO white
1
4 +
5 B- brown 4 CReagent carousel rotation home
5 3 GND black 2
-
Reagent probe elevating motor cable 4 GND green 3 position optical coupler
E
5 VCC red 1
1 009-000404-00
A+ red 1 +
4 3 2 1
6 SOD_PHO_C white 4
1 CReagent carousel rotation coder
Reagent probe 2 A- yellow 2 7 GND black 2 -
2 optical coupler
elevating motor 4 B+ orange 3 J14 1 2 8 GND green 3 E
4 9 VCC red 1
5 5 B- brown 4 3 4 +
10 SID_PHOwhite 4 CReagent
C Reagent probe rotation motor cable probe elevating optical C
5 6 11 GND black 2 - coupler
12 GND green 3 E
1 009-000405-00
A+ red 1 7 8
4 3 2 1
1 13 VCC red 1
+
Reagent probe 3 A- yellow 2 9 10 14 SID_PHO_C white 4
3 J15 C Reagent probe rotation home
rotation motor 4 B+ orange 3 15 GND black 2 -
4 11 12 16 GND green 3 E
position optical coupler
6 B- brown 4
6 13 14 17 VCC red 1
Reagent syringe motor cable 18 SR_PHO white 4
+
15 16 C Reagent probe rotation coder
19 GND black 2
1
009-000406-00
1 A+ red 1 Reagent 17 18 20 GND green 3
-
E
optical coupler
4 3 2 1
21 VCC red 1
3 A- yellow 2 19 20 22 SR_PHO_C white 4 +
Reagent syringe 3
J16 CReagent probe elevating middle
motor 4
6
4 B+ orange 3
6 B- brown 4 control drive J12
21 22
23 24
23
24
GND black
GND green
2
3
-
E
25 VCC red 1
Sample syringe motor
cable
009-000408-00
board 25 26
27 28
26
27
28
SU_PHO white 4
GND black
GND green
2
3
+
C
-
E
Reserved optical coupler
1 A+ red 1
051-001413-00 29 30
4 3 2 1
29 VCC red 1
1 +
3 A- yellow 2 31 32 30 SS_PHOwhite 4 CSample probe elevating middle
Sample syringe
3
4 B+ orange 3
J18 31 GND black 2 -
4 33 34 32 GND green 3 E
motor 6 B- brown 4
B 6 35 36 33 VCC red 1 B
+
Sample probe rotation motor cable 34 SMR_PHO white 4 C Sample probe rotation home
37 38 35 GND black 2
009-000409-00 -
1 A+ red 1 39 40 36 GND green 3 E
1
4 3 2 1
3 A- yellow 2 37 VCC red 1

3 41 42 38 SMR_PHO white 4
+
Sample probe 4 B+ orange 3 C Sample probe rotation coder
rotation motor 4 J19 43 44 39 GND black 2 -
optical coupler
6 B- brown 4 40 GND green 3 E
6 45 46
Sample probe elevating motor cable 41 VCC red 1
+
009-000409-00 47 48 42 SMU_PHO white 4
C Sample probe elevating home
43 GND black 2
1 A+ red 1 49 50 - position optical coupler
4 3 2 1
1 44 GND green 3 E
3 A- yellow 2
J4
Sample probe 3
J20
J8
J23
elevating motor 4 B+ orange 3
4
J6
6 B- brown 4
6 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1 3 5 9 7
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 4 6 10 8
3
6
5
2
1
MINDRAY
2
3 SPEED 11
6 VBB
DA control 4
SPEED
GND
RX
TX
GND
A A
5
Reagent control drive board_1/2
3
2
TITLE:
7
1
File Bytes
REV 1.0
1 3 5 9 7
DWG NO. BM10
J8
2 4 6 10 8
Date Time
Interior wash pump P04
Dispersion control drive board 1 11 17 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
R level sense cable
009-000424-00
1 GND black 1 J1
J3 2 RAM blue 3 Probe/mixer
3 LLS green 2 1 2
Clogging detection board communication
1 2 4 12V red 4 conversion
5 NC 5 3 4
cable 3 4
6 RXD white 6 5 6 board
D 009-000425-00 5 6 7 NC 7
J3 1 VPP red 1 8 TXD brown 8 7 8 D
7 8
2 9 NC 9 9 10
2 VEE blue 3 9 10
Clogging detection board
1
10 SGND black 10
3 CLOT_YES white 2
4
3
4 CLOT_MAY gray 4 S level sense cable009-000424-00
6
051-000218-00
5 CLOT_NOSAM yellow 5
J2 1 GND black 1 J2
1
8 GND black 6
8
2 RAM blue 3
4
6 INT green 7
3
1 2 3 LLS green 2 1 2
10
9
7 INTEN purple 8 4 12V red 4

J5 3 4 3 4
5
5 NC 5
5 6 6 RXD white 6 5 6
7
7 NC 7
7 8 7 8
2
7 GND black 9 8 TXD brown 8
10 12 14
9
3 RXD orange 10 9 10 9 NC 9 9 10
4
11 13
4 TXD brown 11 10 SGND black 10
6
6 RST brown 12
5
5 NC 13
8
shield 14
1 2
J2 3 4
C R-IN-PRESS red 1 5 6 C
Reagent carousel 2 GND black
cover sensor 7 8
1
R-IN-PRESS red 3 9 10
Reagent carousel
2
6 7
GND black 4
button 11 12
3
17 VCC red 1
Reagent carousel R-OUT-PRESS red 7 13 14 +
18 SR_PHO white 4
C Reagent syringe home position
8
4
GND black 8 19 GND black 2

panel indicator 15 16 - optical coupler
Probe wash waste valve.SV18 refer to J24 20 GND green 3 E
Fluidics
temperature J14
the fluidics temperature control
board wiring diagram
J30
J11
17 18
19 20
21 22
control board
Reagent control drive board power cord
009-000415-00
051-001413-00 23 24 25
26
VCC red 1
SU_PHO white 4
+
C Sample syringe home position
25 26 27 GND black 2
DC power supply J4 J1 28 GND green 3
-
E
optical coupler
27 28
conversion board 29 30
31 32
33 34
B 35 36 B
37 38
39 40
Wash valve cable of reagent
control drive board
009-000420-00
1 RI_VALUE_IN black 1 Reagent probe interior

2 +12V red 2
Reagent bar code wash valve SV12
1 2 3 RI_VALUE_OUT black
cable 1 Reagent probe exterior
009-000418-00
10 shield
J21 3 4 4 +12V red 2
wash valvSV15
Reagent bar code module
5 6 5 RI_VALUE_IN black 1 Reagent probe wash vacuum

8 TRIG 9
J7 6 +12V red 2
valve SV17(shared)
2
1
BA40-30-61986
7 RTS 6 7 8 7 RI_VALUE_OUT black

6 CTS 10 1 Sample probe interior
4
3
8 +12V red 2
wash valve SV11
5 GND 4
6
5
Wash valve cable of reagent control

3 TXD 2 drive board
10 8
7
2 RXD 3 009-000420-00
1 RI_VALUE_IN black 1 Sample probe exterior
9
A
1 VCC 1
J22
1
3
2
4
2
4
+12V red
3 RI_VALUE_OUT black
1
+12V red 2
2
wash valveSV14
Sample probe wash vacuum
valve SV16( shared)
MINDRAY A
5 6 TITLE: Reagent control drive board_2/2

File Bytes 7 8

Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Position sensor cable of Vortexer control drive board

009-000427-00
1 VCC red 1
+ Optical coupler for detecting
2 SOD_PHO white 2
C
3 GND black 3 - waste container existence
E (reflective)
5 VCC red 1
Vortexer control drive board + Optical coupler for detecting
D 6 SOD_PHO_C white 2 C
communication cable 7 GND black 3 - waste container non-existence D
009-000388-00 E (reflective)
1 ST1_TXD1- 1 1 2
9 VCC red 1
2 ST1_TXD1+ 2 3 4 +
3 ST1_RXD1+ 3 10 SID_PHOwhite 4 CReaction carousel rotation home
J10 4 ST1_RXD1- 4
J3 5 6 11 GND black 2 - position optical coupler
5 ST1_RST1 5 12 GND green 3 E
1 6 GND 6 7 8 13 VCC red 1
2
7 ST1_CTL1 7 +
2
9 10 14 SID_PHO_C white 4
CReaction carousel rotation coder
3
4 8 GND 8
15 GND black 2
4
9 ST2_TXD2- 9 - optical coupler
11 12
5
16 GND green 3 E
6
10 ST2_TXD2+ 10
7
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
11 ST2_RXD2+ 11 13 14
8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
12 ST2_RXD2- 12
9
15 16 Optical coupler conversion board
9
13 ST2_RST2 13
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
14 GND 14
11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
15 ST2_CTL2 15 17 18
17 VCC red 15
16 GND 16 1 VCC red 1
17 SP_TXD3- 17
19 20 18 SR_PHO_C white 11 +
4 SR_PHO_C white 4 Y axis home position optical coupler
18 SP_TXD3+ 18 19 GND black 13 C
21 22 2 GND black 2
19 SP_RXD3+ 19 20 GND green 13 J3 3 GND green 3
-
E
connector M39-000189---
20
21
SP_RXD3-
SP_RST3
20
21
J12 23 24
21 VCC red 15 1 VCC red 1
+
22 GND 22 25 26 22 SU_PHO white 19 4 SR_PHO_C white 4
23 SP_CTL3 23 23 GND black 17 J2 2 GND black 2
C
-
Connector M39-000189---
24 GND 24 27 28 24 GND green 17 3 GND green 3 E
25 SM_TXD4- 25
C 26 SM_TXD4+ 26
29 30 25 VCC red 14 Optical coupler conversion board C
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
27 SM_RXD4+ 27 26 SS_PHOwhite 18
31 32 1
28 SM_RXD4- 28 27 GND black 16 2 A- yellow 3 Gripper Y axis
29 SM_RST4 29 33 34 28 GND green 16
3
3 B+ orange 4
31
30
32
GND
SM_CTL4
GND
30
32
31 Vortexer 35 36 29
30
VCC red
SMR_PHO white
14
10
4 B- brown 6
4
6
motor
Optical coupler conversion board
37 38 31 GND black 12
33 TXD5- 33 J1
34
35
36
TXD5+
RXD5+
RXD5-
34
35
36
control drive 39 40
41 42
32
33
34
GND green
VCC red
SMR_PHO white
4
12
8
J8 Y J2
4
1
2
VCC red
SR_PHO_C white
GND black
1
2
4
+
C
-
Gripper
Z axis middle position optical coupler
3 GND green 3 E connector M39-000189---
board
37 IN1 37 35 GND black 6
43 44 F
Main control board
38
39
GND
IN12
38
39 45 46
36 GND green 6 X 4
1 VCC red
SR_PHO_C white
1
4
+ Gripper
40 GND 40 37 VCC red 4
F P J3 2 GND black 2
C
Z axis home position optical coupler
051-001413-00 38 SMR_PHO white 3 -
47 48 3 GND green 3 E Connector M39-000189---
49 50
39
40
GND black
GND green
1
1 P C Optical coupler conversion board
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
41 VCC red 9
42 SMR_PHO white 5
C 2 A- yellow 3
1
3
43 GND black 7 J1 3 B+ orange 4 Z axis motor
Reaction carousel rotation 44 GND green 7 4
4 B- brown 6
motor cable 6
009-000403-00 Optical coupler conversion board
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
GripperY axis 1 VCC red 1 +
1 A+ red 1 motor
4 3 2 1
B 1
2 A- yellow 2
J16 J7 4 SR_PHO_C white 4 C
-
Gripper vertical anti bumping B
Reaction carousel 2 J4 2 GND black 2
E optical coupler
rotation motor 4
4 B+ orange 3 J13 3 GND green 3
5 B- brown 4 1 VCC red 1

5 +
4 SR_PHO_C white 4 C Finger opening status optical
Z J3
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
2 GND black 2
J20 -
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
Gripper X axis motor cable Gripper Z axis coupler
009-000405-00 J14 F
3 GND green 3 E
J19 J17
motor 1 VCC red 1
Optical coupler conversion board
1 A+ red 1 J6 +
4 3 2 1
1 4 SR_PHO_C white 4
3 A- yellow 2 P J2 2 GND black 2
C Finger empty gripping optical
Gripper X axis motor 3
4 B+ orange 3 J15 -
coupler
4
6 B- brown 4
C 3 GND green 3 E
6 4 3 2 1 1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
4 3 2 1
Gripper finger 1
2 A- yellow 3
J18 motor 3
J5 J1 3 B+ orange 4 Finger motor
17 18
11 12
19 20
15 16
13 14
4
9 10
7
5
3
1
J28 4 B- brown 6
6
8
6
4
2
2 4
3
1
3
8
2
7
MINDRAY
VCC red
GND2 green
VCC red
SR_PHO white
SR_PHO white
GND
GND
GND green
3
4 black
4 black
A A
TITLE: Vortexer control drive board_1/2

1
File Bytes
E
-
C
+
E
-
C
+

Date Time Gripper X axis Gripper Y axis
home position calibration position
optical coupler optical coupler 1 11 17 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D D
Waste container indicator cable
009-000430-00
Press1_IN 1
Waste container button
1 GND 2
1
Press2_IN 3 1 2
2
Waste container button 1 2
2 GND 4 3 4
5 4 3
3 4 J2
TableLED1 5 J23 J25 5 6
Waste container 5 6 7 8
indicator 1 24V 6
7 8 9 10
TableLED2 7
6
Waste container
24V 8
1
2
indicator 2
3
4
J7
5
6
7
8 10
Waste container front
9
panel indicator
LOCK2 7 1 2
C C
1 2
1
Front panel LED J3 24V 8 3 4 J24
5 Vortexer control drive board
6
3
7 8
6
051-001413-00J4
5
8
7
10 12 14
9
11 13
Vortexer control drive board power cord
009-000415-00
J10 7 D12V yellow 1
DC power conversion
3 A5V red 2
8
1
4 C+12V blue 3
6
1
9
3
1 B+24Vorange 4
board
7
10
2
3
2 B+24Vorange 5
5
14 -12V(E) white 6 J5
11
3
4
J1
7
5 GND black 7
9
4
12 13
10 12 14
6 GND black 8
9
B B
10
6
8 GND black 9
11 13
9 GND black 10
14
A
MINDRAY A
TITLE: Vortexer control drive board _2/2

File Bytes
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D
Main control board D
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
J10

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40
communication cable
009-000388-00
26
12
10
11
28
27
25
13
29
15
20
19
21
2
31
18
23
4
3
5
1
17
39
7
34
22
24
37
40
36
35
32
33
14
16
30
38
6
8
ST1_RXD1-
ST2_RXD2-
ST2_TXD2+
ST2_CTL2
SM_RXD4-
ST1_TXD1+
SM_CTL4
ST2_RST2
ST1_CTL1
SP_TXD3+
SM_TXD4+
ST1_RXD1+
ST2_RXD2+
SM_RST4
ST1_RST1
ST1_TXD1-
ST2_TXD2-
SP_RXD3-
SM_RXD4+
SM_TXD4-
SP_CTL3
SP_RXD3+
SP_RST3
SP_TXD3-
RXD5-
TXD5+
RXD5+
GND
TXD5-
GND
GND
IN12
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
IN1
Dispersion dispense elevating motor
40
8
6
14
16
30
38
33
32
35
36
37
34
22
24
39
cable
17
18
23
31
21
29
19
15
20
13
7
25
27
28
5
10
26
1
9
3
11
4
12
2
009-000403-00
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
1 2 4 6 8 10
2 A- yellow 2 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 35 37 39
Dispersion dispense 2
elevating motor 4 B+ orange 3 J13 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 36 38 40 J10 Dispersion control drive board
4 position sensor cable
5 B- brown 4 009-000427-00
5
Dispersion dispensing syringe motor cable
C 009-000404-00 C
1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
Dispersion dispensing
1
2
2 A- yellow 2
4 B+ orange 3 J14 Dispersion 1
3
2
4
5 VCC red 1
syringe motor 4
5 5 B- brown 4
Dispersion dispensing pump motor cable control drive 5
7
6
8
6
7
8
SOD_PHO white
GND black
GND green
4
2
3
+
C
-
E
Dispense elevating home
position sensor
009-000405-00
9 10
1 A+ red 1
board 9 VCC red 1
4 3 2 1
1 +
Dispersion dispensing 3 A- yellow 2 11 12 10 SOD_PHO_C white 4
C dispensing syringe home
pump motor
3
4 B+ orange 3 J15 11 GND black 2 - position sensor
4 13 14
6
6 B- brown 4
051-001413-00 15 16
12
13
14
GND green
VCC red
SID_PHOwhite
3
1
4
E
+
J11 17 18 15 GND black 2
C
- Vortexer speed sensor
21 VCC red
21 22 +
22 SR_PHO blue
C
23 24 23 GND black - Substrate syringe home position
Dispersion carousel rotation 24 GND green E sensor
6 25 26 25 VCC white
motor cable For pin 25, the serial resistor
27 28
009-000406-00 should be changed to 0 B
B 1 A+ red 1
4 3 2 1
1 29 VCC red 1
+
Dispersion carousel 3 A- yellow 2 30 SOD_PHO_C white 4
C Dispersion carousel rotation
3
rotation motor
4
4 B+ orange 3 J17 31
32
GND black
GND green
2
3
-
E
home position optical coupler
6 B- brown 4
6 33 VCC red 1
+
34 SID_PHOwhite 4 C Dispersion carousel rotation
J4
35 GND black 2 -
J8
coder optical coupler
36 GND green 3
J24
E
J6
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 1 3 5 7 9
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 4 6 10 8
3
6
5
2
1
SPEED
GND
3 SPEED 11
6 VBB
DA control
RX
TX
GND
Pump serial port control port
3
2
7
MINDRAY
1
2
4
A A
1 3 5 7 9 Dispersion control drive
TITLE: board_1/2
J8
2 4 6 10 8
File Bytes Exterior wash pump P05 Reagent control drive
board DWG NO. BM10 REV 1.0
Date Time

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

13 Hardware System
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Substrate panel button and indicator cable

009-000430-00
D PRESS1_IN red 1
D
Substrate panel button 1 GND black 2
1
PRESS2_IN red 3
2
Substrate panel button 2 GND black 4
3 4 5
TABLELED1_OUT black 5
Substrate indicator 1 VBB red 6
6 7
TABLELED2_OUT black 7
Substrate indicator 2 VBB red 8
1
8
6 Brakewhite 6
2
Outlet valve cable J23 7 PWMblue 5
009-000420-00
8
J2
3
8 PULSE yellow 4
PUMP01 1
4
Dispersion Outlet valve 9 DIRorange 3
+12V 2 Brushless DC motor of
10
1.SV24
5
PUMP02 3 reaction liquid mixing
Dispersion Outlet valve
1
2
1 2 6 GND black 2
2.SV25 +12V 4
3 4 J21
4
3
C PUMP03 5 J25 4 24V red 1 C
Dispersion Outlet valve 5 6
5
6
3.SV26 +12V 6
7 8
PUMP04 7
Dispersion Outlet valve
4.SV27
+12V 8
Dispersion dispensing valve cable
009-000420-00
PUMP01 1
051-001413-00
Fluidics temperature control board

valve 1.SV20 +12V 2
PUMP02 3 2 1
Dispersion dispensing 1 2 4 3
valve 2.SV21 +12V 4
1
PUMP03 5
3 4 J22 Dispersion 6 5
8 7
SV30/SV31/SV32
4
5 6
3
+12V 6 10 9
valve 3.SV22 7 8 Control cable 12 11
5
PUMP04 7
14 13
Dispersion dispensing J5 Refer to fluidic
7
valve 4.SV23 +12V 8 16 15
temperature control
10 12 14
18 17
9
Dispersion control drive board power cord 20 19
board wiring
11 13
B 009-000415-00 22 21 B
J9 7 D12V yellow 1
diagram 24 23
26 25
DC power supply
conversion board
3 A5V red 2
8
4 C+12V blue 3
6
J14
1
9
1 B+24Vorange 4
7
10
2
3
2 B+24Vorange 5
14 -12V(E) white 6
J3
11
3
4
5 GND black 7
J1
9
4
12 13
6 GND black 8 1 2 3 4 5
10
6
8 GND black 9 7 8 9
6 10
9 GND black 10
14
39
84
2 7
3cable1
5
27
6
4
2 bubble status
1
bubble
download RXD
download PSEN
download /RST
download TXD
Substrate bubble
6 status cable
GND
12V
detection
MINDRAY
1
8
A A
Dispersion control drive
1 2 3 4 5 TITLE:
board_2/2
6 7 8 9 10
File Bytes
Date Time J9
Substrate bubble
Software & Rev: Microsoft office Visio 2003 detection board SHEET 10 OF 17 SIZE A3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

14 Hydropneumatic System

14.1 Overview
14.1 Overview
CL-2000i hydropneumatic system provides wash solution inlet, waste discharge,
substrate dispensing , controls and monitors the relevant parts and gives alarm so that
the normal work of the analyzer is ensured.
The schematic diagram of the hydropneumatic system is as follows:
Figure 14.1 Schematic diagram of the hydropneumatic system
Hydropneumatic system
Substrate
Probe wash Dispersion fluidic Inlet
dispensing
module module module
module
Sampl Sample Reagent Dispense Dispersion Dispersio Wash Waste

e probe probe substrate dispensing n buffer outlet
probe wash wash aspiration
Where,
Probe wash module: washing the interior and exterior of the reagent/sample probe
and discharging the waste.
Substrate dispensing module: dispensing the substrate and switching the substrate
bottles.
Dispersion module: Wash buffer inlet for the dispersion and discharge the waste.
Wash buffer inlet/outlet module: Wash buffer inlet and discharging waste.

14.2 Principles of Hydropneumatic System

14.2.1 Probe wash module
Probe wash module washes the interior and exterior of the sample/reagent probe,
provides the wash solution and discharges the waste. The fluidic diagram of the
module is as shown below.
Figure 14.2 Schematic diagram of probe wash module
SV11 Clot monitor T517
T515 T516
ZQ11 T511 T512 ZQ12 T513 T514 ZQ13
SR10
SV12 T525
T523 T524
ZQ21 T521 T522 ZQ22 ZQ14
SR11 ZQ23
SV14
ZQ41
T541 T542 ZQ42 T526 T518
Reagent Sample
T506 T507 T536 T537
SV15 probe probe
ZQ51
ZQ52 T543
Probe-wash manifold T551 T552 T553
R Wash S Wash
T505 T535
ZQ03 ZQ40 T555 ZQ53
Cup Cup
T556
SV17 T554 T544
ZQ43
ZQ54 ZQ44 T546 T545 Vacuum
SV16 sensor
P04 P05 T557 T547 Vacuum gauge
ZK05 ZK01
T736 ZK04 T737 T738 T734 T732 T781
ZK03
Vacuum ZK02 T735
T733 T731
Vessel FS08
SV10
T571 ZQ32
ZQ01 F21
F20 Main Vacuum
Wash T573 T741
T574 ZQ34
Buffer F08 T779
T572 T742
Manifold ZQ33
SV03
SV18 T775 T774
T743
T530 QH02 F22
F09 Main P08
T751 Vucuum
W74 F11 T776 T777 ZQ36
T752 Pump
T721 T778
W61 ZQ35
T770 ZQ37
T771
P07
T772 Waste Pump T773

W75 W62
T242 T761
F30
T762
F31
FS02 ZX21 Fluidic Port Panel T782
T763
Control
Waste outlet cable
T241
Wash buffer (2L)

External waste External
tank vacuum pump
P04 and P05 are used to supply the wash solution for interior and exterior wash of the
sample/reagent probe. To enhance the wash effect, vacuum pump is used for wash
solution aspirating. For each probe, interior wash and exterior wash are done
simultaneously. Take reagent probe wash as an example: When reagent probe is being
washed, it lowers to the inside of the wash well; SV12and SV15are turned on and then
P04/05are turned on. Wash solution comes out of the wash well and SV10/17 are
turned on. The vacuum pump is turned on to pump the liquid waste. After the probe
wash is completed, the pump and valve are turned off.
14.2.2 Dispersion fluidic module

The dispersion fluidic module provides the wash buffer for dispersion and discharges
the liquid waste. The dispersion wash is done in the cuvette. The fluidic diagram of the
module is as shown below.

Figure 14.3 Schematic diagram of dispersion wash module

Dispensing Manifold
CZ34 T337 T338 CZ35
4
CZ24 T327 T328 CZ25
SV2
3
T336
7 CZ14 T317 T318 CZ15
2
T307 T308 CZ05
T335 T326 SV26
1
CZ04
T325 T316 SV25
CZ33 T315 T306 SV24 T309 T319 T329 T339

CZ23
CZ13
T305
CZ03
T334 SR20
T324 T314 T304
T333 T323 T313 T303

CX08 T412 T408
4
CX04
CX07 T411 T407
3
CZ32 CX03
CX06 T410 T406
CZ12
2
T332 SV23 CZ22 CX02
CX05 T409 T405
1
CZ02 CX01
T331 T322 SV22 Aspirating Manifold
T413
T321 T312 SV21
T414 T401 T402 T403 T404
T415
CZ31 CZ21 T311 T302 SV20
T416
CZ11
T301 CX09
CZ01 CX09 CX10 T417
CX10 CX13
CX11 T418 CX14
CX11
CX12 T419
CX12 CX15
T420 T421
T500 CX16
P09(Peristaltic T422 CX17
T300 Wash T244

pump) CX18
QH02
T310 Buffer T423
T320 Manifold CX19
T330 T424
T530 CX20
Dispersion wash includes wash buffer dispensing and waste discharge. The syringe is
used to provide the driving force for wash buffer dispensing and the solenoid valve is
installed on the inlet and outlet of the syringe to realize the switching of the dispensing
and aspirating of the wash buffer. Peristaltic pump is used to provide the force for the
waste discharge. The process is as follows: The aspirating probe moves to the inside of
the cuvette and the peristaltic pump is turned on to aspirate the waste in the cuvette.
Then aspirating probe lifts. During wash buffer dispensing, the SV20/21/22/23 valves
are turned on and the syringe lowers down to aspirate proper amount of wash buffer
and then dispensing probe lower to the inside of the cuvette. SV24/25/26/27are turned
on and syringe SR20 moves upward to dispense wash buffer into the cuvette.
14.2.3 Substrate Dispensing Module

Substrate dispensing module dispenses the substrate. The fluidic diagram of the module
is as shown below.

Figure 14.4 Schematic diagram of substrate Dispensing Module

T606
T605
Substrate
Pre-Heater
DZ06
SV32
T609
DZ05
SR30
Syringe
DZ04
Pump
SV31
DZ03
SV30
DZ01 DZ02
Substrate Substrate
Bottle 1 Bottle 2
T601 T602
T603 T604
T710
The substrate dispensing pump provides the force for substrate dispensing. The
solenoid valve is installed on the inlet and outlet of the pump to aspirate and
dispensing the substrate. During substrate dispensing, SV31is turned on; pump
SR30lowers down to aspirate substrate. After aspiration, valve SV32 is turned on and
the pump moves upward to dispense the substrate into the cuvette.
Two bottles of substrate can be installed at the same time and the system can
automatically switch to another when one is used up.
14.2.4 Inlet/outlet module

Inlet/outlet module provides the wash solution and discharge the waste liquid. It
includes the inlet and outlet two parts. The fluidic diagram of the module is as shown
below.

Figure 14.5 Schematic diagram of inlet unit
SV02 SV05
T214
T232 T233
T224 T231 ZX05
ZX06
ZX02 ZX04
T234 P01(Peristaltic
pump)
ZX07
ZX09
T235 T236
T212 T222
T211 T221 T206 T242

ZX08
ZX01 ZX03 ZX10
T237
Tube support Tube support FS02 ZX21
ZX11
T201 T202 FS01
Wash buffer 1 Wash buffer 2 T241
Wash buffer (2L)
Figure 14.6 Schematic diagram of waste discharge unit

Wash Reagent
Carousel Carousel
R Wash S Wash
Cup Cup
T703
T554
T544
T556 T555 ZQ53
F02
SV17
ZQ43 T704
ZQ54 ZQ44 T546 T545
SV16 F03
T557 T547
ZK05
T736 ZK04 T737 T738 T734
Vacuum T735 vent T710 T425
F04 T701
Vessel FS08 FS07
SV10
T571 F01 T702
F21 T706 T709
Main Vacuum Waste F07 F06
F20
T573 T574 T741 tank T708
T572 F08 T705 F05
T742
SV03 T707
SV18
T743 T711
F22 F10
F09
T751
W74 F11
T721 T752
W61
T771 T770
P07
T772 Waste Pump T773

W75 W62
T761
F30
T762
F31
T763
Port for
connecting Waste outlet
waste liquid
level sensor
Mindray standard wash solution is used for the instrument. The wash solution is
loaded manually. Two tanks of wash buffer can be loaded at the same time. The system
can automatically switch to another when one is used up. The wash buffer can be loaded
during the test.

When the wash solution is used up, load more manually. When loading the wash buffer,
open the front door of the analyzer and pull out the drawer. Check the status of the wash
buffer tank and decide on the one that needs to be changed. Press the metal button of the
joint on the cap of the wash buffer tank, gently pull upright the 90straight joint out
and hang it on the bayonet behind the front door. Take out the empty wash buffer tank.
Remove the top of carton to expose the mouth of the tank. Remove the cap of the wash
buffer tank. Loosen the cap assembly of the empty wash buffer tank and put it into the
new tank. When installing the cap assembly, lift the tank mouth with one hand while
tightening the cap with another hand. Use clean tissue to wipe the spilt wash buffer on
the drawer that holds the tanks; then place the new wash buffer tank whose cap has
been installed onto the drawer. Press down the quick joint gently until it connects with
joint on the cap and a clear "click" is heard; meanwhile no gap is found and the joint is
not loose or drops out. Push in the drawer and close the front door of the analyzer.
The waste pump is used to discharge the waste liquid. The dispersion wash waste,
reagent carousel condensate water, substrate leak and the overflowing liquid of the
dispersion carousel are collected in the Waste Collector. These waste combining with
the primary vacuum waste at the outlet of the collector are connected to the one end of
the waste pump; the probe wash waste is connected to the other end.
Two waste collectors are configured with the analyzer.. The waste can be discharged
through the sewer or the waste tank. When the waste tank is used, empty it before and
after the test. The waste tank is configured with the level sensor. When it is full ,the
system will give an alarm. At this time, replace the waste tank with an empty one. Avoid
spilling the waste when replacing the waste tank.

14.3 Introduction of Fluidic Actions

14.3.1 Wash buffer aspirating control
Two tanks of wash buffer can be loaded at the same time. The system can automatically
switch to another when one is used up. The system prompts wash buffer 1 or 2 is empty.
Two indicators are used to indicate the status of the wash buffer. When the indicator is
flashing ,the wash buffer tank is empty. When the indicator is lit, the wash buffer tank is
being used.
As shown in Figure 14.5 the currently used wash buffer is wash buffer 1.
When wash buffer 1is being aspirated, valveSV02performes no action;SV05 is
turned on and P01 is turned on. The wash buffer is aspirated into buffer container.
After aspiration, P01and SV02is turned off.
When wash buffer 1is used up. the system automatically switches to wash
buffer2.At this time SV02 and SV05 are all turned on. P01is turned on. Wash
buffer2is aspirated into the buffer tank. The system prompts wash buffer1is empty
and the wash buffer 1 indicator becomes flashing. The user needs to load new tank
of wash buffer.
When switching to wash buffer2, if the wash buffer 2 is empty, wash buffer
aspiration will be stopped and the system prompts: wash buffer is exhausted. Wash
buffer 1 and 2 indicators are flashing.
After the user reloads the wash buffer , the system starts to re-aspirate the wash
buffer and the indicators return to the original status.
14.3.2 Dispersion Wash Control

Wash buffer dispensing and waste discharge are performed in dispersion dispensing
module. The fluidic diagram of the module is as shown in Figure 14.3 .
The control process of the dispersion wash fluidic system is as follows:
4-phase dispensing includes2groups:Group 1consists of D1.Group 2 consists of
D2/3/4. Four syringes are used to drive the 4-phase dispensing. One set of drive is
used for the four syringes.
Before dispensing, SV20/21/22/23are turned on and the syringe move downward
to aspirate wash buffer. After aspiration, SV20/21/22/23is turned off.
During dispensing, dispersion dispensing unit moves downward to the cuvette
dispensing position.
During phase D2/3/4 dispensing, valve SV25/26/27 are turned on and inlet valve
SV20 is turned on. The syringe moves upward to dispense the wash buffer to the
cuvette.
During phase D1 dispensing valve SV24 is turned on and inlet valve SV21/22/23 are
turned on. The syringe moves upward to dispense the wash buffer to the cuvette.
After dispensing, the aspirating probe unit moves into cuvette, pump P09 is tuned
on and runs a while and then stops.
After dispensing and aspirating, the dispersion aspirating and dispensing units lift
up.
14.3.3 Substrate Dispensing control

The substrate dispensing tube is shown in Figure 14.4 .

Two bottles of substrate can loaded at the same time. When one is used up, the system
will switch to the other one and then the indicator corresponding to the empty bottle
begins flashing and the indicator of the bottle in current use is lit.
The process of substrate dispensing:
Before dispensing,SV31is turned on. When substrate 1 is being used,
valveSV30takes no action.OtherwiseSV30 is turned on at the same time.
When substrate aspirating valve is turned on, pump SR30 lowers down to aspirate
substrate.
During dispensing, substrate dispensing unit lowers down to cuvette. Valve SV30 is
turned on, pumpSR30moves upward to dispense the substrate into the cuvette.
After dispensing, SV30 is turned off.SR30stops and the substrate dispensing unit
lifts up to home position.
The consumption and switching of the substrate is controlled through auto counting.
When one bottle is used up, the system switches to another and prompts "Substrate
x is empty" and its corresponding indicator is flashing. When two bottles are both
used up, the system prompts "substrate is exhausted" and substrate dispensing is
stopped.
Substrate heating and temperature control device is designed to ensure the stability
of the substrate temperature.
14.3.4 Establish Vacuum

The process of establishing vacuum:
The process of releasing vacuum:
If external vacuum pump is configured, then the external vacuum pump P06 is
turned on.
After x seconds delay, primary vacuum pumpP08is turned on.
After P08 is turned on for 20 seconds, vacuum alarm function is enabled.
If establishing vacuum fails, system auto alarm is given.
14.3.5 Release Vacuum

Releasing vacuum as follows(as figure Figure 14.2 shows: )
P08 is turned off.( if external vacuum pump P06 is configured, it is turned off too.)
ValveSV10/16/17is turned on. After x seconds, valve SV10/16/17is turned off.
The system judges if the vacuum is out of range, if so, it gives out an alarm.
14.3.6 Drain Primary Vacuum Container

The process of draining the primary vacuum container as figure Figure 14.2 shows:
The process of releasing vacuum:
ValveSV03/SV16/SV17/SV10 are turned on and waste pump P07is turned on.
After x seconds, P07 is turned off and SV03/16/17/10 are turned off.
14.3.7 Fluidic Initialization

Fluidic Initialization process is as follows:
Wash buffer aspirating control switch is turned on:

The system inquires the status of the liquid level sensor of the buffer tank of the
wash buffer. If the logic is error, the wash buffer aspirating process is stopped. If it is
empty, wash buffer aspirating starts and then the process goes to the next step.
The system inquires the status of the liquid level sensor of the waste tank. If it is
full, the wash buffer aspirating process is stopped.
Emptying primary vacuum container
Establish Vacuum
Waste pump is turned on.

14.4 Removing and Installing Hydropneumatic Components

14.4.1 Overview
When the instrument fails or regular maintenance is performed, the analyzer is
dismantled. During dismantlement of the analyzer, pay attention to the following:
When dismantling the analyzer except on special occasion, the power supply should
be shut down.
You should wear gloves and mask to prevent contamination.
Take caution to avoid damaging other parts.
When plugging out the tubes, take measures to avoid spilling the liquid onto other
parts especially electrical parts, otherwise, they can be damaged.
Wear gloves and avoid contacting with liquid.
Take caution to avoid human injury and bumping and scratching the parts .
After re-installing parts, power on the analyzer and check if it can work normally.
When dismantling the analyzer, the tools include:
Table 14.1 Necessary tools for removing/installing Hydropneumatic components
Name Requirement Quantity
Diagonal pliers / 1
Tube cutter / 1
Strap / Several
cylinder 100ml,resolution1ml 1
Tank Name / /
pipette 1ml 1
test tube Volume no less than Several
3ml
empty substrate bottle new substrate more than 4
bottle
Acid wash solution for 105-004838-00 Volume no less than 100ml
substrate tubing
14.4.2 Removing and re-installing Probe wash module

Component layout
The components of the probe wash module are shown in the following figure mainly
including probe interior and exterior pump, valve and vacuum system components.
Figure 14.7 Component layout of the probe wash module

1 2 3
4 5
(a)back of the analyzer

6 7
8 9 11
10
() front of the analyzer

12 13
14
15
17
16
()top of the analyzer
Components list
Components list of the probe wash module is shown in the following table.

Table 14.2 Components list of the probe wash module

No. Material Name Part No. Remark
1 SV10 Vacuum Aspirating 009-003209-00 /
valve
2 Secondary Vacuum 115-014544-00 /
Container
3 Waste discharge valve 009-002848-00 /
SV18
4 Probe interior wash pump 082-001329-00 After changing the
parts, flow calibration
required
5 Probe exterior wash pump 082-001329-00 After changing the
P05 parts, flow calibration
required.
6 Sample SyringeSR10 082-000328-00 /
7 Reagent syringe SR11 082-000328-00 /
8 Sample probe interior BA30-21-06470 /
wash valveSV11
9 Reagent probe interior BA30-21-06470 /
wash valve SV12
10 Primary vacuum waste 009-003209-00 /
discharge valve SV03
11 Primary Vacuum 115-012464-00 /
Container
12 Reagent probe wash 009-002695-00 /
vacuum valveSV17
13 Sample Probe Wash 009-002695-00 /
Vacuum SV16
14 Reagent probe 082-001170-00 /
15 Sample probe 082-001170-00 /
16 Reagent probe exterior 009-000086-00 /
wash valve SV14
17 Sample probe exterior 009-000086-00 /
wash valve
Changing of probe wash pump

When to do
When the interior and exterior wash pump fail,

NF1.25 pump
bracket
M4X8 Self threading
combination screw PT3X6
screw
Diaphragm
pump
082-001329-00
1 Power off the analyzer. Place paper tissue under the outlet tube of the failed pump
to avoid the liquid spilling .
2 Remove the cable connector and loosen the tube connector.
3 Remove the pump and install a new one. Pay attention to the installation direction.
4 Unscrew the tube connector on the pump head. After installing the pipe hoop and
connector on the guide tube, tighten the connector on the pump head. Discard the
black protection tube in the inlet/outlet position of the new pump. The small end of
the pipe hoop should face the inside of the pump otherwise leakage may occur.

Discard the black

protection tube
Small end of
the pipe
hoop
5 Connect the pump cable and other components. Re-install the analyzer.
6 After changing the interior and exterior pump of the probe wash module, system
flow test should be done. The process is as follows:
7 After the pump is changed, open the upper cover of the analyzer (at the place of
sample probe).
8 Power on the analyzer and enter fluidic alignment screen. Perform Probe Wash
Fluidic Prime 2 times.
9 Enter Flow test screen; select Sample Probe Interior Wash Flow or Sample Probe
Exterior Wash Flow test. Enter flow test screen.

10 For interior wash pump flow test, click Sample Probe Interior Wash Flow to enter
the screen and place an empty container under the sample probe. Click twice
continue button and the Flow Check window pops up. Click Start button and the
sample dispenses sample a while and stops. Pour the liquid in the container into the
cylinder and read the value. Enter the dispensing volume and click OK. Meanwhile,
sample probe dispenses for the second time and follow the same steps to get the
dispensing volume. Click OK to save the data. If the flow measured twice is within
131-139ml/min, then click continue to finish the test. If flow is out of this range,
the software enters adjust pump voltage process. Click continue to adjust the pump
voltage and the flow check window pops up. Follow the above stated steps to
perform the sample probe interior flow test until sample probe flow meets the
requirement. When the test is completed, return to flow test screen.
Figure 14.8 Sample Probe Interior Flow

11 For sample probe exterior flow test, click Sample Probe Exterior Wash Flow to enter
flow check screen. Follow the software steps and prompts and above mentioned
step 4 to finish the sample exterior flow test. During this process, the container is
placed under the bracket of the substrate pump. Unplug the sample well exterior
wash tube and place it into the container (If necessary, fix it with tape.)
Figure 14.9 Sample probe exterior wash flow
12 Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration

When the flow test is completed, return to Fluidics Alignment main screen and then
click Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration to calibrate the pump. The rotation
speed calibration screen is as follows:

Figure 14.10 Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration
13 Prepare an open container with at least 600ml volume. Click Interior Pump P04
Rotation Speed Calibration button to calibrate the pump. The sample probe moves
to above front track. The "Place container" dialog window pops up. Place the open
container under the sample probe and click OK . The sample starts dispensing and
meanwhile the system starts rotation speed calibration, calculate the average speed
and display it. About 400ml liquid is discharge during this process. Pay attention
to prevent overflowing. After the changing the exterior wash pump, exterior pump
rotation speed calibration is required . Place the open container under the bracket
of the substrate pump. Unplug the sample well exterior wash tube and place it into
the container (If necessary, fix it with tape.) About 500ml liquid is discharge during
this process. Pay attention to prevent overflowing. Click Exterior Pump P05
Rotation Speed Calibration button. The sample starts dispensing and meanwhile the
system starts rotation speed calibration, calculate the average speed and display it.
Connect the exterior wash tube with wash well connector tightly and fix it with
tying band.

Figure 14.11 Interior container position
Figure 14.12 Exterior container position
Use tape to fix the tube

and place the container
right under it
14 Click OK and exit the window.

15 Exit the alignment screen and perform the Home procedure.
Replacement/ maintenance of probes

When the probes get dirty or are clogged. Steps:
1 Power off the analyzer. Remove the arm cover of the probes.
2 Place the paper tissue under the probe guide tube connector and the probe tip to
avoid the liquid spilling onto other parts.
3 Unscrew the two spring posts and loosen the guide tube connector to remove it
from the probe. Take caution not to spill the liquid onto other parts.

4 Remove the probe and replace it with new one. After replacement, wipe clean the
probe exterior and the connector to avoid liquid dropping or crystallization. Clean
the inside of the probe connector too.
5 Install properly the probe and tighten the connector. Use diagonal pliers to tighten
at least 1/4 circle in order to prevent leakage.
6 After replacement or maintenance, power on the analyzer and perform the Home
procedure. Make sure no leakage occurs at the connector and no liquid drops from
the probe tip. Install back the arm cover.
7 Follow the alignment process of reagent probe unit and sample probe unit in
chapter 15.
14.4.3 Installation and dismantlement of dispersion wash module

Component layout
The components of the dispersion module are shown in the following figure mainly
including dispensing pump, valve, wash probe and aspirating pump.
Figure 14.13 Component layout of dispersion wash module
7
6
5
4
3
2 1

Components list
Components list of the dispersion module is shown in the following table.
Table 14.3 Components list of dispersion wash module
1 Wash buffer inlet 009-003209-00 /
valveSV20/21/22/23
2 Wash buffer split container 115-014544-00 /
3 Wash buffer dispensing pump 009-002848-00 /
SR20
4 Wash buffer dispensing 082-001329-00 /
valveSV24/25/26/27
5 Dispersion waste pumpP09 082-001329-00 Change the pump tube
every six months
6 Aspirating pin board 082-000328-00 /
7 Dispensing pin board 082-000328-00 /
Changing the dispersion waste pump

When to do
When the dispersion carousel aspirates wash buffer abnormally or peristaltic pump goes
wrong.
Replacing steps
1 Use Philips-head screwdriver to loosen the right rear cover.
2 Unplug the power cord of the motor and use hexagon wrenches to loosen the
screws on the pump stopper plate and remove the stopper plate.
3 Push right the pump head pressure tube and remove the pressure tube.
4 Take out 4 peristaltic pump tubes.
5 Use hexagon wrenches to loosen the 4 M4X12 screws used to connect the pump and
small bottom plate.
6 Lift the pump bracket assembly up and remove the pump assembly from the back.

Limit
Pump
plate
head
screw
Limit
plate
Pump
base
Pump screw
optical
coupler
sleeve
Retaining
Optical screw
coupler
Motor
shield
Precautions:
Take caution to protect the pump tube and avoid scratching them.
Pay attention to the installation direction of the assembly. The stopper plate should face
the back of the frame.
Alignment not required
Changing the guide tube of the dispersion waste pump

The guide tube of the waste pump P09 should be changed every six months. The
changing process of the pump tube:
1 Power off the analyzer. Open the left rear cover and find the waste pumpP09.
2 Place the tissue under the pump head to avoid the liquid from spilling onto other
parts.
3 Disconnect the buckle limit plate, you can see four guide tubes on the pump head
from bottom to top; the top buckle is vacant and there is no need to install the guide
tube for it. See the figure below.

Figure 14.14 Pump head and its structure

Cartridge
Pump tube
Buckle
Buckle limit
plate
Figure 14.15 Buckle with tube
4 Gently push inward the second buckle from top to bottom to remove the limit
plate from the pump body. Remove the buckle together with guide tube and then
disconnect the joints on the two ends of the guide tube. Install new guide tube into
the buckle .The limit device on the guide tube should be inserted into the slot of the
buckle. Install the buckle into the pump head. Gently fasten the buckle towards the
left and align it with other buckles. Connect the joints of the guide tube.
Please pay attention to the connection direction of the tube, otherwise the
dispersion washing may fail
5 Use same method to change other three guide tubes from top to bottom.
6 After changing the guide tube, the flow should be tested:1) Pour 50 ml DI water into
an open container and remove gently the 4 aspirating probes and put them into
the container. Enter the alignment screen-Hydro Unit and select flow test. 2) Select
Pump Aspirate Volume and set the time to 15S. Click Start. The pump starts running
and observe if the liquid flow through the pump guide tube. After 15 seconds, the
pump stops. 3) Use a pipette to add 3ml DI into four clean test tubes. Place the
probe into the bottom of the test tubes. 4) Set the time as 20S and click start. The
pump stops after 20S. The remaining liquid in each test tube should be less than
300ul.(adjust the pipette to 300ul and aspirate the liquid to see if the remaining
liquid can be aspirated dry. )

Figure 14.16 Flow test screen
7 After the flow test, install back the aspirating probe and other components. Install
back the cover.
8 Power on the analyzer and check if it can works normally.
Replacement and maintenance of aspirating probes

When the aspirating probes get dirty or are clogged.
1 Execute Clean Dispersion Probes/Tubes procedure. Open the back cover of the
analyzer.
2 Place paper tissue under the probe tip and probe connector to avoid spilling the
liquid onto other parts.
3 Unscrew counterclockwise the guide tube connector of the aspirating probes to
disconnect the guide tube with the probes and then unscrew counterclockwise
aspirating board (the dispersion carousel includes the upper and lower plates, and
the aspirate plate is the upper one), pull the aspirate probe upwards from the
dispersion carousel. Pay attention not to bend or bump the probe.

4 Install a new aspirate probe back onto the aspirate plate. While moving the bottom
of the aspirate probe slowly, press it gently to insert its bottom into the hole on
the dispersion carousel cover, and then push the aspirate probe vertically into the
aspirate plate by force.
6 Tighten the guide tube connector with the aspirating probe connector screw until a
slight click is heard.
7 Repeat step 3-6 to replace other dispersion aspirating probe.
Clean dispensing probe

Liquid crystallization may occur to dispersion dispensing probe.
1 Execute Clean Dispersion Probes/Tubes procedure.
2 Place paper tissue under the probe tip and probe connector to avoid spilling the
liquid onto other parts.
3 Open the back cover of the analyzer and click Continue.

4 Unscrew the circle nut on the dispensing plate counter-clockwise and lift it upward,
(dispersion carousel includes the upper and lower plates, dispensing plate refers to
the lower plate), pull the aspirate probe from the dispensing plate. The soft tube
and its connector should be connected tightly.
5 Wipe the exterior of the aspirate probe with gauze moistened with deionized water;
6 Install the dispensing probe back to the dispensing plate and tighten the nut, check
if the connection of the tube is loose, tighten the connection if it is loose.
7 Repeat step 3-5 to replace other dispersion dispensing probe.
Replacement of the drive assembly and optical coupler of the 2.5ml

wash syringe
The drive assembly and optical coupler of the 2.5ml wash syringe, located at the back of
the analyzer, is used to dispense the wash buffer .

Motor
shield
Motor
024-000461-00
M3X6 pan head

screw
M4X10 hexagon socket cap

head screw Sensor cable
009-002204-00
M3X8 cross pan head M4X12 hexagon socket
screw screws
No. FRU code and Material Name Remark

material code
1 009-002204-00 Correlative optical
coupler (S)
2 024-000461-00 MOTOR step 24V
1.8bearing axial force
30Kg.
Replacement of optical coupler

When to do
When optical coupler wire or its slot are eroded due to the tube leakage, the optical
coupler may fail. Under this condition, the optical coupler needs replacement.
Steps
2 Open the back shielding cover.
3 Unplug the wire of dispersion drive motor and optical coupler.
4 Unscrew the wash connectors on the syringe (4 inlet connectors and 4 outlet
connectors.)
5 Remove the 4 4 M4X12 screws on the bottom plate of the syringe.
6 Remove the wash syringe assembly.
7 Remove the cross pan head screws on the wash syringe and unplug the wire of the
optical coupler.
8 Install new optical coupler wire and fix it with screws.
9 Follow the above stated steps in reverse order to fix the optical coupler onto the
frame, tighten the connectors, connect the wire of the sensor and motor.
After replacement the drive motor of the wash syringe assembly , home the system.

Replacement of the motor

When to do
When motor or its wire slot are eroded due to the tube leakage, the motor may fail.
Under this condition, the motor needs replacement.
Steps
2 Open the back shielding cover.
3 Unplug the wire of dispersion drive motor and optical coupler.
4 Unscrew the wash connectors on the syringe (4 inlet connectors and 4 outlet
connectors.)
5 Remove the 4 4 M4X12 screws on the bottom plate of the syringe.
6 Remove the wash syringe assembly.
7 Remove the 3 M3X6 cross pan screws on the shield of the wash syringe motor and
remove the shield.
8 Rotate the coupling until the 2 M4X10 hexagon socket cap head screws face
outward. Loosen the screw on the motor shaft and the 2 M4X10 hexagon socket cap
head screws on the motor shock pad. Remove the motor.
9 Install the new motor on the shock pad and ensure the motor shaft passes through
the coupling. Tighten the screws.
11 Follow the above stated steps in reverse order to fix the motor shield, fix the
assembly on the frame, tighten the connectors, connect the wire of the sensor and
motor.
After replacement the drive motor of the wash syringe assembly , home the system.
Note
Do not contaminate the connectors and tubes when installing or dismantling the syringe
assembly and wash tubs. The split fluid should be cleaned in time to avoid eroding other
parts.
14.4.4 Replacement of the Substrate Dispensing Module

Component layout
The components of the substrate dispensing module are shown in the following figure
mainly including dispensing pump, valve, and dispensing tubes.

Figure 14.17 Component layout of the Substrate Dispensing Module
3
Components list 1
2
Components list of the Substrate Dispensing Module is shown in the following table.
Table 14.4 Component list of the Substrate Dispensing Module
1 substrate pumpSR30 082-001193-00 /
2 Substrate SwitchSV30 082-001165-00 /
3 Substrate Inlet valve 082-001164-00 /
SV31
4 Substrate preheating 115-012051-00 After changing the
assembly. parts, flow calibration
required.
5 Substrate dispensing 082-001164-00 After changing the
valve SV32 parts, flow calibration
required.
6 Substrate tubeDZ01 082-001171-00 Corresponding to the
7 Substrate tubeDZ02 082-001172-00 number on the tube
8 Substrate tubeDZ03 082-001173-00

Replacement of the substrate pump

When to do
When the pump works abnormally.

Replacing steps
1 Unplug the tubes and wire on the substrate pump.
2 Loosen the 4 M4X8 screws on the bottom plate with the cross screw driver. Take out
the substrate pump assembly.
3 Unscrew the 2 M3X8 screws on the substrate pump pin board and the substrate
pump.
Substrate pump
082-001193-00
Substrate pump
pin board
Retaining screw
M3X8 screw
M4X8
combination
screw
Precautions:
Ensure the substrate is clean and avoid foreign substances entering tube.
When installing the substrate pump, note the sheet metal on the pump should reach
the inner side of the pin board and be fixed from the inner side of the pin board.
After changing the substrate dispensing module or tube, first perform the background
repeatability test to check if the substrate tubes are contaminated. If so, wash the
substrate tubes. The process is as follows:
1 Use two new substrate bottles to hold 50 ml ultra-pure water each and then place
them in the substrate load position. Do not tighten the cap of the bottle.
2 Remove the substrate dispensing probes and place them in the clean container.
3 Click Cleaning and Emptying Substrate Tubes.

4 Wash order: ultra-pure water wash-drain-acid solution wash and

immersion(above 5 minutes)-drain-ultra pure water wash-drain-substrate prime.
Method:1) Use 50 ml ultra-pure water to replace the substrate and place it in the
substrate 1 position. Turn off SV30 and prime 10 times or more. 2) Place the
ultra-pure water in the substrate 2 position. Turn off SV30 and prime 10 times or
more. (Note: The should be discharged from the substrate spikes, otherwise check
the substrate tube and prime again.) 3)Use empty substrate bottle to replace the
substrate, repeat the above steps to drain the substrate tubes. 4) Use acid wash
solution, ultra-pure water and substrate to replace the ultra-pure water in step 1.
Repeat the above steps to wash and immerse the substrate tubes.(The immersion
time of the acid wash solution should be more than 5 minutes. )
5 After washing, perform background repeatability test and check if the analyzer
works normally.
14.4.5 Replacement of Inlet/outlet module

Component layout
The components of the Inlet/outlet module are shown in the following figure mainly
including pump, valve and waste pump and valve.
Figure 14.18 Component layout of the Inlet/outlet module
1 2
3 7 8
4
5 6
(a)back of the analyzer
9 10 11 12
() front of the analyzer
13
14
(c)Waste pump box
Components list
Components list of the inlet/outlet module is shown in the following table.
Table 14.5 Component list of the Inlet/outlet module
1 Waste Collector 115-021471-00 /
2 Waste outlet connector 042-002313-00 /
3 Level sensor connector of the / When external waste
external waste tank tank is used.
4 single tube pumpP01 082-001527-00 /
5 Inlet valveSV05 009-002695-00 /
6 Inlet switch valve 009-002848-00 /
7 Pump box assembly 115-017448-00 /
8 Inlet air bubble detection 115-020748 /
device
9 Wash buffer tank1 / /


10 Wash buffer tank2 / /
11 Indicator of the wash buffer / Wash buffer tank 1 and
tank wash buffer tank 2
12 Buffer tank 115-014538-00 /
13 Waste Pump 009-000750-00 /
14 Primary vacuum pump 009-000751-00 /
Replacement of single tube pump

When to do
When the single tube pump functions abnormally.
Replacing steps
1 Remove the pump tube.
2 Unplug the power cord of the motor .
Use hexagon wrenches to loosen the two M4 hexagon socket screws used to fix the
single tube pump and the pump bracket.
Motor
Pump base
Optical
coupler
Retainin
g screw
of pump
head
Retaining screw
sleeve
Retaining screw
for the motor
Single channel
pump head
Precautions:
Take caution not to scratching the pump tube.
Replacement of single tube pump guide tube

The guide tube of the pump P01 should be changed every six months. The changing
process of the pump tube:

1 Power off the analyzer and open the back cover of the analyzer.
2 Place the tissue under the pump head to avoid the liquid from spilling onto other
parts.
3 Gently lift the white pump box to expose the guide tube.
4 Remove the used guide tube from the pump head.

5 Install the new guide tube into the pump head and push it until it contacts the
interior of pump shell tightly and the two ends of the guide tube exposed outside
of pump should have the same length. Press the pump box gently until it align with
the top of the pump. After installation, the two ends of the tube is slightly tilting and
the tube should be between the vernier tooth instead of being clamped by the pump
cover.
6 Place tissue under the joints and pull out the old pump tube from the joints. Please
note: when removing the guide tube, do not affect the connection of other tubes and
prevent the liquid from spilling onto other components.
7 Connect the new tubes with the joints and install the joints into the buckle.
8 After changing pump tube, empty the buffer tank of the wash buffer.
9 Power on the analyzer. Liquid enters into the buffer tank of wash buffer
automatically. Check if the inlet works normally during liquid inlet process. No
alarm as "inlet is slow or Buffer tank of wash buffer solution is empty " is given.
Under extreme condition, the inlet process should not exceed 10min. In normal
situation, it takes about 4-6 minutes.(The reference flow is 300-450ml/min. You can
use cylinder to check the flow. But pay attention not to contaminate the buffer tank
of the wash buffer.)
If alarm is given or inlet time exceeds 6 minutes, the guide tube may be installed
improperly. Readjust until the flow is normal.
Clean the cap of the wash buffer tank

When loading or changing the wash buffer tank, you need to disconnect the joint on the
cap and a small amount of wash buffer may spill onto the cap in this process. After
changing the wash buffer, use clean tissue to wipe the spilt wash buffer away on the
cap in case the wash buffer drops onto other parts or causes crystallization which may
clog the air vent on the cap.

When the air vent o the cap is found to be clogged, remove the cap and use clean tip head
to gently strip the blockage; use DI water or ultra-pure water to clean it and wipe it dry
with clean tissue. Reinstall the cap. During the process, any foreign substances are not
allowed to drop into the wash buffer tank or adhere to the cap assembly.
Clean Buffer tank

The buffer tank of the wash buffer may get dirty due to dust accumulation or other
foreign substances. Clean it regularly every 3 months.
1 Power off the analyzer. Place clean paper tissue under the buffer tank to avoid the
liquid spilling onto other parts.

2 Unscrew the cap of the buffer tank and take out the level sensor(drop the liquid into
the buffer tank during this process). Place it in the clean position. Take out the cap
and guide tube gently and hang the guide tube.
3 Remove the buffer tank and empty it. Use DI water to wash it and use brush to clean
its inside. Then use DI water to wash at least another two times.
4 Use wash buffer to wash the buffer tank at least twice. Check if there is no visible
dirt inside of the tank. Use clean paper tissue to dry the exterior of the tank. During
this process, no tissue scraps are allowed to be left.
5 Install back the buffer tank. Ensure no foreign substances adhere to the liquid level
senor and guide tube . Install them back.
6 Power on the analyzer. The system starts to aspirate wash buffer automatically.
Replacement of the wash buffer tank drawer

When to do
When the wash buffer tank drawer works abnormally or the wash buffer weighing is
abnormal.
Replacing steps
A Replacing the whole assembly
1 Unplug the two aspirating tubes on the inlet pump.
2 Unplug the drive wire of the weight detection board
3 Pull out the drawer assembly and unscrew the 6M4hexagon socket screws with
hexagon wrenches. Remove the drawer assembly.
B:Replacement of weighing sensors
1 Pull out the drawer to its extreme.
2 Press the connector on the wash buffer tank and unplug the connectors. Take out
the two tanks.
3 Unscrew the 8 screws on the drawer bottom with the flathead screwdriver and
remove the drawer.;
4 Unplug the weighing sensor wire and unscrew the M3X6 pan head screws with
Philips-head screwdriver. Take out the weighing sensor. .
C:Replacement of the weight detection board
1 Pull out the drawer to its extreme.
2 Press the connector on the wash buffer tank and unplug the connectors. Take out
the two tanks.

3 Unscrew the 8 screws on the drawer bottom with the flathead screwdriver and
remove the drawer.;
4 Unplug the wire on the weight detection board. Unscrew the 4 M4 screws on its
shield and remove the shield.
5 Unscrew the 4M3X6 screws on the weight detection board and remove it.
Wash buffer
Drawer stopper drawer
screw
Weighing Bubble
sensor detection board
shield
Weight
Slide track detection board
Drag chain
Guide track
bracket
Drag chain box
Precautions:
Take caution not to bump the weighing sensors. Pay attention to the installation
direction of the weight detection board.
After installation, pull out and push in the drawer several times to check if interference
or disorbition exists.

14.5 Material list of Hydropneumatic subsystem

14.5.1 Pump list
Table 14.6 Pump list of Hydropneumatic subsystem
No. Name Part No. Graphics
P01 Single tube 082-001527-00
pump
P04 Probes 082-001329-00

Interior
wash pump
P05 Probes 082-001329-00

exterior
wash pump
P06 External 082-000354-00(220V)

vacuum 082-000353-00
pump (110V)
P07 Waste 009-000750-00

Pump


P08 Primary 009-000751-00
vacuum
pump
P09 Dispersion 115-014543-00

Aspiration
waste
pump
SR10 Sample 082-000328-00

syringe
SR11 Reagent 082-000328-00

syringe
SR20 Dispersion 115-011969-00

dispensing
syringe


SR30 Substrate 082-001193-00
dispensing
pump
14.5.2 Valve list

Table 14.7 Valve list of Hydropneumatic subsystem
SV02 Wash Solution 009-002848-00
Switch
valve(three-way)
SV03 Vacuum container 009-003209-00

waste discharge
valve


SV05 Wash solution 009-002695-00
inlet valve(two
way)
SV10 Vacuum 009-003209-00

Aspirating valve
SV11 Sample probe BA30-21-06470

interior wash
valve
SV12 Reagent probe BA30-21-06470

interior wash
valve
SV14 Sample probe 009-000086-00

exterior wash
valve
SV15 Reagent probe 009-000086-00

exterior wash
valve
SV16 Sample Probe 009-002695-00

Wash Vacuum
valve


SV17 Reagent Probe 009-002695-00
Wash Vacuum
valve
SV18 Probe wash waste 009-002848-00
valve(three way)
SV20 Dispersion Phase 009-000086-00

1 Inlet valve
2 Inlet valve
3 Inlet valve
4 Inlet valve
1 outlet valve
2 outlet valve
3 outlet valve
4 outlet valve
SV30 Substrate Switch 082-001165-00
valve(three way)
SV31 Substrate Inlet 082-001164-00

valve (two way)
SV32 substrate outlet 082-001164-00

valve

14.5.3 Sensor list

Table 14.8 Sensor list of Hydropneumatic subsystem
FS01 low level sensor of the 115-020846-00
buffer tank of the
wash buffer
FS02 high level sensor of 115-020846-00

the buffer tank of the
wash buffer
FS05 Full level sensor of the 115-021466-00

external waste tank
FS07 Full level sensor of the BA40-21-61682

waste Collector
FS08 Full level sensor of the BA40-21-61682

primary vacuum
container

15 Alignment
This chapter mainly deals with the alignment of the analyzer. After the service personnel
performs maintenance or installation, the alignment of the analyzer should be done.

15 Alignment
15.1 List of tools
15.1 List of tools

15.1.1 Scope
CL-2000i/CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer
15.1.2 List of tools

Table 15.1 List of tools
No. Code Name Precision Quantity
/ feeler 0.02~1.0mm 1
/ Hexagon wrench , cross / 1
screwdriver and flathead
screwdriver
/ adjustable wrench, sharp nose / 1
pliers and tweezers
/ Sample tube with bar code / 50
/ Sample rack with bar code 1 pcs / 5
for each (routine/STAT/rerun
manually/QC/Calibration) test
/ Empty sample rack(no adaptor / 1
and spring plate)
043-002143-00 Cuvette tray / 5
045-001048-00 Cuvette with tray / 1
/ oil pen / 1
BM10-J05-001 Cuvette fixture from the / 1-2 pcs
reaction carousel.
BM10-J05-002 Cuvette fixture in sampling / 2
position
BM10-J05-003 alignment tool in cuvette / 2
discarding position
BM10-J05-004 Wash well positioning fixture / 1
BM10-J05-005 BM10 pseudo probe / 1
BM10-J08-003 Finger's middle positioning axis / 1
BM10-J08-007 Finger adjustment tool(10) / 1
BM10-J09 Horizontal position alignment / 1
tool for reagent probe
BM10-J01-002 Gripping hole alignment tool / 1
BM10-J13 First gripper vertical adjustment / 1
tool
BM10-J13-03 First gripper Z axis vertical / 1
adjustment tool
BA80-J12 Sample position alignment tool / 1
BA80-J44 Bar Code reader adjustment tool / 1
BA80-J64 Alignment tool of stop lever / 1
stretching length

15 Alignment
15.1 List of tools
No. Code Name Precision Quantity

BA80-J65 Track alignment tool of rack / 1
transfer unit
BA80-J98 Sample rack side clearance / 1
alignment tool
Figure 15.1 Alignment tools
BM10-J09 Horizontal position
alignment tool for reagent probe
BM10-J05-003 BM10-J08-007
alignment tool in Finger
BM10-J08-003
cuvette discarding adjustment
Finger's middle
position tool
positioning axis
BM10-J05-001
cuvette fixture
BM10-J05-002 BM10-J05-004
BM10-J05-005 BM10-J01-002 Cuvette fixture in wash well
BM10 pseudo Gripping hole sampling positioning
probe alignment tool position fixture

15 Alignment
15.2 Alignment procedure diagram
15.2 Alignment procedure diagram

Figure 15.2 Alignment work flow
CL-2000i alignment general procedure

Primary procedure Secondary procedure
Start
Alignment
preparation Upgrade operating
External devices software Power on the Start operating software
Check PC connection/
Check operating
analyzer
Turn on all power
power cord/ external switch Account: ServiceUser
tubes software and update it PW:#BS8A#SEU
Reaction carousel Carousel
Dispersion unit Reagent probe unit Reversed
Reagent Rotary Stop
carousel unit carousel unit 1.Horizontal Position for Aspirating Ra/Rb/
Rc/Rd Position
1.Dispersion carousel 1.Photometer Configuration
position offset 2.Signal Collecting Position
2.Reagent Probe Horizontal Forward/ Compensation
2. reversed position stop Reversed Compensations
Mechanical offset
Adjustment
3.Photometer initialization 1.Ra offset 3.Horizontal Wash Position 1.Reaction Carousel
2.Rb offset 4.Horizontal Reagent Dispense Position on Reversed Rotary Stop
position alignment 3.dispensing vertical 4.Mechanical Home Position
3.Rc offset Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer rings Position Compensation
position Alignment 2.Reagent Carousel
4. Aspirating vertical 4.Rd offset 5.Reagent Probe Vertical Wash Position
5.Reaction Carousel Middle 6.Reagent Carousel Vertical Extreme Position Reversed Rotary Stop
position Ring Position Offset Position Compensation
5. substrate mixing speed (Ra)
6.Reaction Carousel Inner 7.Reagent Dispense Position Vertical Extreme
Ring Position Offset on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer
Rings
Soak Substrate
Tubes Second gripper First gripper Bar code unit
Substrate tube check and
immersion
1.Finger's Home Position 1.First Gripper Home Position Alignment 1.Reagent Carousel Bar Code
2.Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of 2.First Gripper's Forward/Reversed Scanning Position
Auto load Reaction Carousel Horizontal Compensations 2.Reagent Carousel Bar Code
unit Sample probe 3.Second Gripper's Forward/ 3.Gripper Tray Horizontal Stability
3.Sample Bar Code Stability
Reversed Compensations 4.Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer
1.Feeding Position 1.Horizontal Wash Position 4.Gripper Mixing Position Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment
2.Unloading Home 2. Horizontal Forward/Reversed Horizontal 5.Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions
Position Compensations 5.Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal
3.Pushing Position 3.Sample Probe Test#1/#2 Diluting Horizontal 6.Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2
4.Guide Rail Positions Horizontal 6.Finger's Middle Position Alignment
Positions 4.Sample Probe Wash Position 7.Gripper Reaction Carousel 7.Finger's Middle Position
Vertical Vertical 8.Gripper Reaction Carousel Vertical
5.Sample Probe Test#1/#2 Diluting 8.Gripper Mixing Position Vertical 9.Gripper Dispense Position Vertical
Positions vertical 9.Gripper Dispersion Carousel 10.Gripper Tray Vertical
Vertical 11.Vertical Middle Monitoring Position
10.Vertical Middle Monitoring Alignment
Position Alignment
Normal lane Passing_return unit Rack supply unit Rack retrieval

unit
1.Stop Position of Stopper Part at
Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 2 1.Deviation of sample aspirate positioning 1.Grid aligning with scanning
2.Sample Probe Rotary to Passing Lane 1.Position switch offset
2.Stop Position of Stopper Part at 2.Sample Center and channel
Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 1 3.Offset of Lane Change Stopper Station 2.The grid aligning with
Moving to End Position Scanning Position
3.Positioning Station Moving to 3.Half Protrusion of STAT return lane
normal lane 4.Offset of Return Push-Out Part Moving to 3.Grid aligning with retrieval
End Position Push-Back Part
4.Sample Probe Rotary to Normal 4.Scanning Push-In Part channel
Lane 5.Lane change part aligning with transfer 4.Retrieval Push-In Part to
lane Moving to Utmost End
5.Stopper Station to End Position 5.Scanning Push-Out Part Rack Storage Unit
after Aspiration 6.Lane change part aligning with normal 5.Retrieval Push-In Part
lane Target Pos Adjustment
Moving to Rack Supply Unit
7.Lane Change from Return Lane to Normal
Temperature Lane SDM
8.Lane Change Part Aligning with Return
Lane
control alignment Rack
Carousel transfer
Temperature Test unit
1.Carousel temperature
curve
2. Reaction Carousel
Other Temperature test
3. Dispersion Carousel
alignment Temperature test
Sample Probe Special

Wash Position
1.Sample Probe Special Wash
Horizontal Position
2.Sample Probe Special Wash
completed Vertical Extreme Position
Hydro unit alignment and sensor calibration are excluded.

15 Alignment
15.3 Preparations:
15.3 Preparations:
15.3.1 Precautions:
Take caution to prevent biohazards. During alignment process, wear lab coat and
rubber gloves.
If any injury like puncture wound, incised wound or bruise occurs, take off the lab
coat and clean the hands and the injured place; use proper disinfectant and if
necessary, seek medical treatment. Record the injury cause and related microbe
and keep the complete medical record.
When adjusting or unplugging the wires, cables, cut off the power to avoid electric
shock or damaging the PCBs.
When aspirating the substrate with the pipettor, take caution to prevent
contamination; you can pour out small amount of substrate and then aspirate it.
After alignment, take out the alignment tool from the analyzer to avoid collision.
When the axis of the alignment tools(pseudo probe or positioning axis) align with
the center of the hole(pseudo cuvette), let them align with each other automatically
and do not hold them up with your hands.
When checking if the alignment axis aligns with the hole, observe them from
different angles.
When operating with the sample/reagent probe, dispensing/aspirating probes,
wear disposable gloves and handle them gently to avoid the deformation.
The water used for alignment must be fresh ultra-pure water.
Ultra-pure water(purified water ) can replace DI water but DI water cannot replace
ultra-pure water.
15.3.2 Power on the analyzer

1 Connect the power cord and the serial port cable. Check if the serial port cables are
properly connected. .
2 Block the vertical anti bumping senor on the board of the sample/reagent probe
arm with non-transparent paper board and then fix the tube on the probe arm with
high temperature tape. Note: The paper board should not drop off.
3 Turn on the switch of main power, the analyzer and SDM in order.
Figure 15.3 The connection position of the serial port cables.
COM4 connecting to
M1
COM3
connecting
to SDM

15 Alignment
15.3 Preparations:
Figure 15.4 Handling of the probe arm board and the tube
Block the vertical anti bumping senor
Use high
temperature tape to
fix the tube
4 After checking the mechanical parts work normally, move to the next alignment
procedures.
15.3.3 Installing operating software(optional)

Follow the CL-2000isoftware installation guide and upgrade the software to the update
version.
15.3.4 Screen description

Starting the Operating Software
Turn on the analyzer. Double click the short-cut icon to run the CL-2000i software.
Username: ServiceUser Password:#BS8A#SEU
Alignment screen
Figure 15.5 Utility-Maintenance-Alignment

15 Alignment
15.3 Preparations:
Alignment screen of the unit

Figure 15.6 Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>xx Unit.
Note: for the alignment of each unit, follow the steps on the software.
Process Alignment screen

Figure 15.7 Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>xx Unit-xx process.
XXUnit ProcessXX
1 Step 1 Software screen prompt
Step 5 Continue Exit
Screen description
1 The software enters the first step. The current step is highlighted in dark color.
2 The steps are set as 5 by default. Set the range to 1-100. The interval for modifying
should be 2 second.
3 When the operator is facing the analyzer, the indications of the arrows are as
follows:

15 Alignment
15.3 Preparations:
----Vertical up corresponding to key ----Vertical down corresponding

to key.
----clockwise or horizontally left corresponding to key ----counter

clockwise or horizontally right corresponding to key
----horizontally forward or clamp corresponding to Page Down key

----horizontally backward or unclamp corresponding to Page up key.
4 When the alignment of each step is finished, select continue or press return on the
keyboard to move to the next step.
Alignment screen of temperature control unit

1 Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Temperature control unit.
2 Select 3 Observe temperature curve to open the carousel temperature curve screen.
Figure 15.8 Carousel temperature curve
3 Touch the dispersion carousel and the reaction carousel cover and they should be
warm, otherwise select All (the sensors) on the right of the screen and select Turn
On Heater.
4 Select Sensor temp curve and All. Select Start on the lower left of the screen to
start the temperature collection of the reaction carousel, dispersion carousel,
substrate preheating and ambient. Observe the temperature curves of the reaction
carousel, dispersion carousel and substrate preheating, which should be rising
slowly and the ambient temperature curve should be horizontal.
5 Select Exit to enter the alarm screen to see if there are alarms related to
temperature control unit.

15 Alignment
15.4 Dispersion unit alignment

Enter Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Dispersion unit.
Figure 15.9 Dispersion unit alignment screen
Note: when resetting the dispersion carouse, follow the aspirating assembly-dispensing
assembly order to avoid collision.
15.4.2 Dispersion Carousel Position Offset

Alignment tool
Alignment tool no.BM10-J01-002 as shown in the following figure:
Figure 15.10 Dispersion cuvette position offset
Alignment index:

15 Alignment
Align the gripping hole with BM10-J01-002 alignment tool and insert it into gripping
position on the dispersion carousel. Turn the tool gently and it can turn smoothly.
1 Select 1 Dispersion carousel position offset and then select Continue to move to the
next step.
Figure 15.11 Dispersion cuvette position offset
Turn the tool gently

and it can turn
smoothly. When
selecting the left or
right arrow, take out
the alignment tool
2 Follow the software prompts and steps. Use the alignment tool of the gripping hole
to finish the Dispersion carousel position offset alignment.
Note: When selecting the left or right arrow, take out the alignment tool, otherwise
the carousel may be jammed.
15.4.3 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation

Alignment index:
Align the gripping hole with BM10-J01-002 alignment tool and insert it into gripping
position on the dispersion carousel. Turn the tool gently and it can turn smoothly.
1 Select 2 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation and then select Continue. If
the following window pops up, click OK to clear the parameters. Observe the
resetting of the dispersion unit. Move to the next step.
2 Follow the software prompts and steps. Use the alignment tool of the gripping hole
to finish the Dispersion carousel position offset alignment.
Note: When selecting the left or right arrow, take out the alignment tool, otherwise
the carousel may be jammed.
15.4.4 Dispense Station Mechanism Vertical

Alignment index:
Use a clearance gauge to measure the gap between the two linear bearings and the
stopper on the dispense plate, and ensure that the minimum gap is between 0~0.1mm.
1 Select 3 Dispense Station Mechanism Vertical and select Continue to move to the
next step.

15 Alignment
2 While referring to the screen prompts, use the up and down arrows to adjust the
dispense station, use a clearance gauge to measure the gap between the two linear
bearings and the stopper on the dispense plate, and ensure that the minimum gap is
between 0~0.1mm. And then finish the following steps of the alignment procedure.
Figure 15.12 Dispense Station Mechanism Vertical
Use a clearance
gauge to measure
the gap between the
two linear bearings
and the stopper on
the dispense plate,
and ensure that the
minimum gap is
between 0~0.1mm
15.4.5 Aspirate Station Vertical Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
The aspirating probes reaches to the bottom of the cuvette and lift up 0.5-1.5mm.
1 Prepare four clean cuvettes.
2 Select Aspirate Station Vertical Position Adjustment on the Alignment window and
click Continue. When all components of the dispersion unit finish mechanical
resetting and a message box pops up reminding you to place cuvettes, use a mark
pen to draw a line on the four aspirate probes while aligning them with the top of
the golden retaining nut. Place the four cuvettes on the dispersion carousel and
click OK. The aspirate station descends, and lifts the aspirate probes after they
contact the bottom of the cuvettes.
3 Place the clearance gauge against the top of the golden retaining nut, measure the
distance between the lower edge of the marking line on the probes and the top of
the clearance gauge, and check that the A1 probe lifts at least 1mm and the A2/A3
probes lift no less than 0.5mm. If the requirements are not met, adjust the aspirate
station using the up and down arrows.
4 Take out the four cuvettes according to the screen prompts and finish the alignment
procedure.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.13 Aspirate station vertical position adjustment
Before alignment,
align with screws
and mark the line
on the four aspirate
probes.
Distance between the

lower edge of the
marking line on the A1
aspirate probe and the
top of the retaining
screw is at least 1mm
and other probes can
lift up.
15.4.6 Dispersion Mixing Speed

Alignment index:
Dispersion Mixing Speed reaches 425 r/s.
1 Select 5 Dispersion Mixing Speed Alignment and the window pops up prompting
"Dispersion mixing speed is going to be aligned automatically. Continue?" Click
Continue, the software finishes the Dispersion Mixing Speed Alignment
automatically.
2 After the alignment is completed, click Dispersion Carousel Functions on the lower
side to enter the screen. Then select Dispersion mixing to check if the dispersion
mixing speed is 425 r/s . Select Stop and Exit to return to the dispersion unit
alignment screen.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.14 Dispersion Carousel Functions screen

15 Alignment
15.5 Reaction Carousel Unit alignment

Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Reaction Carousel Unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.15 Reaction Carousel Unit alignment
15.5.2 Photometer Configuration

Alignment index:
Configure the high voltage parameter HV and calibration factor .
Figure 15.16 Photometer configuration window
1 select 1 Photometer Configuration and the following window pops up. Input the
alignment parameters (the high voltage parameter HV and calibration factor .).
Select OK

15 Alignment
Note: the assembly data are matched in pair, do not input wrongly.
2 Select Utility-Maintenance-Parameters to enter parameter configuration window.

Select Reaction carousel unit and click search. Check if the PMT high voltage HV,
calibration factor are correct.
15.5.3 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment

Alignment index:
When the reaction carousel stops, the cuvette should face directly toward the
photometric measuring position.
When the reaction carousel is reset, the holes on the reaction carousel cover align
with the holes of the reaction carousel and no obvious dislocation and deviation.
Precautions:
Signal Collecting Position Adjustment is not recommended at the user end. If
adjustment is need, contact the TS headquarter.
Please contact the Mindray service department to get the reaction liquid used for
Signal Collecting Position Adjustment.
For safety, wear disposable gloves when contacting with the reaction liquid.
The reaction liquid should be stored in light shield place at room temperature.
Avoid contaminating the reaction liquid when use it.
In the allowable light intensity range, the reaction liquid can be used repeatedly.
The allowable light intensity range is 1M-30M.
If you want to open the carousel cover, turn off the power supply to avoid exposing
the photometric measurement module in the light.
The reaction liquid should be incubated in 37 environment for at least 30
minutes.
From turning on the heater: It takes about 90 minutes for the reaction carousel to
reach the 37 steady temperature. It takes about 15 minutes for the photometer to
get steady.
Enter Alignment-Temperature Control Unit. Observe the reaction carousel temperature
curve. It should be horizontal and no bias. If obvious bias occurs, wait for the reaction
carousel temperature to get steady and then start alignment.
Enter reaction carousel unit. Select 2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment and then
select Continue. The two grippers, sample/reagent probe and reaction carousel start to
reset. Move to the next step.
Select Continue. Follow the software prompts to check if reaction liquid has been placed
in the 1#, 18# and 35# cuvettes .
Note: If the reaction liquid has been placed in the cuvette in this step, it should be
incubate for 30 minutes.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.17 Figure 5-2-1 Substrate Stability Scanning

The Substrate Stability Scanning pops up and select Start. The software adjusts the light
intensity and light fluctuation. If they satisfy the requirement, the software moves to the
next step. If light intensity does not satisfy the requirement, wait for the reaction
liquid to get steady or change the cuvette to restart alignment. If light fluctuation does
not satisfy the requirement, return to the Substrate Stability Scanning screen and wait
for the substrate to get steady and restart alignment.
Click Continue, the Signal Collecting Position Adjustment screen pops up and Substrate
Stability Scanning starts automatically (It takes about 6 minutes). The scanning curve of
the three cuvettes is displayed in this process. When the scanning is finished, click
configure and move to the next step. If alarm like cuvette offset is great or outer ring
position offset is great pops up, select OK and then follow the software prompts.
The three scanning curves should be low-high-low parabolic curve. The curves cannot be
a straight line, continuously rising or continuously falling. The Y coordinate stands for
light intensity.
Figure 15.18 Figure 5-2-2 Signal Collecting Position Adjustment screen

Select Continue and follow the prompts to take out the three cuvettes with the reaction
liquid and store it in the light shield place. Click OK and Continue to return to reaction
carousel unit screen.
15.5.4 Photometer Home

Index:1) LED initial DA should be within 3300~65535.
2)Saved Count should be within 2.97M~3.03M.
3) Dark count 350CPS.
Note: Power on the photometer and wait for 15 minutes and then start the alignment.

15 Alignment
Select reaction carousel unit and then select 3 Photometer Home. Select Initialize, the
alignment starts automatically and the alignment results are displayed.
Figure 15.19 Figure 5-3-1 Photometer initialization screen
15.5.5 Mechanical Home Position Alignment

Alignment tool:
Figure 15.20 Pseudo probe
Figure 15.21 Gripper alignment tool

15 Alignment
Figure 15.22 Reaction carousel- gripper position alignment tool
Figure 15.23 Reaction carousel- reagent probe position alignment tool
Figure 15.24 Mixing assembly- gripper position alignment tool

15 Alignment
Figure 15.25 Dispersion carousel- gripper position alignment tool
Figure 15.26 Reagent probe on the reagent carousel alignment tool
Alignment index:
When the second gripper is fixed, rotate the gripper and the gripper finger
alignment tool BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole of the pseudo cuvette
fixture(BM10-J05-001) on the reaction carousel's outer ring and inner ring.
When dispersion assembly is fixed, rotate the gripper and the gripper finger
alignment tool BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the Gripping hole
alignment tool BM10-J01-002.
When mixing assembly is fixed, rotate the gripper and the gripper finger alignment
tool BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of Cuvette fixture in sampling
position BM10-J05-002.
When reagent probe arm and radial position are fixed, rotate the arm and pseudo
probe BM10-J05-005 can align with the center of the Cuvette fixture
(BM10-J05-001)on the outer ring of the reaction carousel.
When reagent wash well is fixed, pseudo probe(BM10-J05-005) on the reagent
probe arm can align with wash well positioning fixture(BM10-J05-004).

15 Alignment
When sample probe arm and radial position are fixed, rotate the arm and pseudo
probe BM10-J05-005 can align with the center of the Cuvette
fixture(BM10-J05-001) in 2# dilution position.
When adjusting plate of the dispense position. and adjusting plate in #1 diluting
position are fixed, the pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 on the sample probe arm can
align with the center of and Cuvette fixture(BM10-J05-002) in the dispense
position and 1# dilution position.
When sample wash well is fixed, pseudo probe(BM10-J05-005) on the sample probe
arm can align with wash well positioning fixture(BM10-J05-004).
Precautions:
When the axis of the alignment tool nearly aligns with the hole, sight check the
clearance.
When the screws are tightened, small offset may exist. Check the mechanical
position of the parts according to the alignment index.
Reaction carousel mechanical position overview
Fix reaction Fix reagent probe
Fix second Fix second Fix dispersion liquid mixing arm and radial
gripper arm gripper drive assembly assembly position
Fix reagent wash Fix sample probe Fix adjusting Fix the adjusting Fix sample wash
well arm and radial plate of the plate of the 1# well
position dispense position dilution position

1 Select 4 Mechanical Home Position Alignment and click continue. The first gripper
moves to home position and the reagent /sample probe and the reaction carousel
are reset. The second gripper moves to above the outer ring of the reaction carousel.
2 Fix the arm of the second gripper. Place the cuvette fixture in back operating
position on the outer ring of the reaction carousel. Insert the finger alignment tool
into the gripper. Use the UP and Down arrow to lower the spline, rotate the arm
manually and make the positioning axis insert into the hole of the cuvette fixture.
The clearance should be even. Press the spline of the arm to extreme and tighten the
2 M4 retaining screws. Click Continue to move to the next step.
The spline can only be lifted or lowered can cannot be rotated, otherwise,
re-perform the procedure of this step.
Figure 15.27 Fixing Second gripper
When the
alignment tool When the alignment tool
aligns at the outer aligns at the inner and
ring, tighten the outer ring, tighten the
screw drive and check again

15 Alignment
3 Fix the second gripper drive: Place the cuvette fixture in the back operating position
on the inner ring of the reaction carousel. Press down the spline, rotate the arm and
move gently the drive bottom to make the positioning axis insert into the hole of the
cuvette fixture in the two positions and the clearance should be even. Tighten the
3 M6 screws used to fix the drive assembly on the bottom plate. Check again to see if
the positioning axis can insert into the hole of the cuvette fixture in the two
positions and the clearance is even. Use the tweezers to take out the two cuvette
fixtures and click Continue to move to the next step. If the fixture cannot align
with the hole, unscrew the screws to adjust the position of the drive assembly.
4 Fix the dispersion assembly: Place the gripping hole alignment tool BM10-J01-002
into the dispersion carousel. Rotate the second gripper arm to the gripping position
of the dispersion carousel manually. Move the dispersion assembly to make the
finger adjustment tool insert the hole of the gripping hole alignment tool and the
clearance should be even. Tighten the three M5 hexagon socket screws used to
fix the dispersion assembly. Check the alignment again. Take out the Gripping hole
alignment tool and select Continue to move to the next step.
Figure 15.28 Fix the dispersion assembly
When the alignment tool

aligns, fix the dispersion
assembly and check again.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.29 Fix the mixing assembly
When the alignment tool

aligns, fix the mixing
assembly and check
again.
5 Fix the reaction liquid mixing assembly: Insert the Cuvette fixture in sampling
position into the mixing assembly and select the down arrow to lower the arm of
the second gripper to mixing position. Move the mixing assembly manually to make
the Finger adjustment tool align with the hole of the cuvette fixture and the
clearance should be even. Tighten the four M4 cross screws used to fix the mixing
assembly. Check the alignment again. Take out the two alignment tools and select
Continue to move to the next step.
6 Fix reagent probe arm and radial position: Place the cuvette fixture in the reagent
dispensing position on the outer ring of the reaction carousel. Install the pseudo
probe on the reagent probe arm. Click the down arrow to lower the spline. Rotate
the arm manually and move the guiding post to make the pseudo probe insert to the
hole of pseudo cuvette and the clearance should be even. Press down the arm to its
extreme and tighten the two M4 screws used to fix the arm. Lift the pseudo probe
and then lower down to check if the pseudo probe can align with the hole of pseudo
cuvette. Click Continue to move to the next step. The spline can only be lifted or
lowered can cannot be rotated, otherwise, re-perform the procedure of this step.
7 According to the software prompt and click the down arrow to lower the reagent
probe arm. Check if pseudo probe can align with the hole of pseudo cuvette. If so,
click continue to go to the next step.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.30 Fix reagent probe arm and radial position
When the alignment too aligns,

tighten the guide post screw and
check the alignment again.
When the alignment too

aligns, press the arm to
tighten the screw.
Figure 15.31 Fix reagent wash well
When the
alignment too
aligns, tighten the
wash well screw
and check the
alignment again.
8 Fix reagent wash well: Place the wash well positioning fixture on the reagent wash
well. Click down arrow to lower down reagent probe arm. Move the wash well
manually to make pseudo probe insert into the hole of the wash well fixture and the
clearance should be even. Tighten the 3 M4 hexagon socket screws used to fix the
wash well and then click the up and down arrow to lift or lower down the arm.
Check if the pseudo probe can align with the hole of the wash well fixture. If so,
remove the two fixtures and click Continue to move to the next step.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.32 Fix sample probe arm and radial position
When the alignment too aligns, tighten the

guide post screw and check the alignment
again.
When the alignment

too aligns, press
the arm to tighten
the screw.
Figure 15.33 Fix adjusting plate of the dispense position
When the alignment too

aligns, tighten the wash
well screw and check
the alignment again.
9 Fix sample probe arm and radial position: Place the cuvette fixture in the 2#
dilution position. Install the pseudo probe on the sample probe arm. Click the
down arrow to lower the spline. Rotate the arm manually and move the guiding
post to make the pseudo probe insert to the hole of pseudo cuvette fixture and the
clearance should be even. Press down the arm to its extreme and tighten the two M4
screws used to fix the arm. Lift the pseudo probe and then lower down to check if
the pseudo probe can align with the hole of pseudo cuvette. Click Continue to move
to the next step. The spline can only be lifted or lowered can cannot be rotated,
otherwise, re-perform the procedure of this step.
10 According to the software prompt and click the down arrow to lower the sample
probe arm. Check if pseudo probe can align with the hole of cuvette fixture in
sampling position. If so, click continue to go to the next step.
11 Fix adjusting plate of the dispense position: Place the Cuvette fixture in sampling
position on the sampling position. Click down arrow to lower down sample probe
arm. Move the adjusting plate manually to make pseudo probe insert into the hole
of the cuvette fixture and the clearance should be even. Tighten the two M4 hexagon
socket screws used to fix the adjusting plate and then click the up and down arrow
to lift or lower down the arm. Check if the pseudo probe can align with the hole
of the cuvette fixture. If so, remove the two fixtures and click Continue to move to
the next step. The position the adjusting plate should be proper and the clearance is
even.

15 Alignment
12 Fix adjusting plate of the 1# dilution position: Place the Cuvette fixture in sampling
position in the 1 # dilution position. Click down arrow to lower down sample
probe arm. Move the adjusting plate manually to make pseudo probe insert into the
hole of the cuvette fixture and the clearance should be even. Tighten the two M4
hexagon socket screws used to fix the adjusting plate and then click the up and
down arrow to lift or lower down the arm. Check if the pseudo probe can align
with the hole of the cuvette fixture. If so, remove the two fixtures and click
Continue to move to the next step. The position the adjusting plate should be proper
and the clearance is even.
Figure 15.34 Fix the adjusting plate of the 1# dilution position
When the alignment

too aligns, tighten the
wash well screw and
check the alignment
again.
Figure 15.35 Fix sample wash well
When the alignment

too aligns, tighten the
wash well screw and
check the alignment
again.
13 Fix sample wash well: Place the wash well positioning fixture on the sample wash
well. Click down arrow to lower down sample probe arm. Move the wash well
manually to make pseudo probe insert into the hole of the wash well fixture and the
clearance should be even. Tighten the 3 M4 hexagon socket screws used to fix the
wash well and then click the up and down arrow to lift or lower down the arm.
Check if the pseudo probe can align with the hole of the wash well fixture. If so,
remove the two fixtures and click Continue to move to the next step.
14 Take out all alignment tools and click continue to complete the procedures.
15.5.6 Reaction Carousel Middle Ring Position Offset

Alignment index:

15 Alignment
The pseudo probe BM10-J05-005on the reagent probe arm can be aligned to hole of the
cuvette fixture BM10-J05-001 on the reaction carousel middle ring.(Manually rotate the
reagent arm.)
Click 5 Reaction Carousel Middle Ring Position Offset and follow the software steps and
prompts to complete the alignment until the positions meet the requirements. 51#
cuvette on the middle ring is located at the position between 1# and 50# cuvette on the
inner ring.
Figure 15.36 Reaction Carousel Middle Ring Position Offset
Pseudo cuvette is
placed on the 51#
on the middle ring.
The alignment tool
aligns and the
clearance is even.
Figure 15.37 Reaction Carousel Inner Ring Position Offset
Pseudo cuvette is
placed on the 1# on the
inner ring. The
alignment tool aligns
and the clearance is
even.
15.5.7 Reaction Carousel Inner Ring Position Offset

Alignment index:
cuvette fixture BM10-J05-001 on the reaction carousel inner ring.(Manually rotate the
reagent arm.)
Click 6 Reaction Carousel Inner Ring Position Offset and follow the software steps and
prompts to complete the alignment until the positions meet the requirements. The
pseudo cuvette is placed in the 1# position on the inner ring.

15 Alignment
15.6 Reagent Carousel Unit alignment

Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Reagent Carousel Unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.38 Reagent Carousel Unit alignment screen
Note: 5 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation is performed after Horizontal

Position for Aspirating Ra/Rb/Rc/Rd.
15.6.2 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 1st Injection Port - Stop

Position(Ra)
Alignment index:
Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe BM10-J09R o.(Manually rotate the
reagent arm.)
Precautions:
Place first the Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe close to the small
ring on the inner side of the reagent carousel and let the tool lay horizontally to lock the
bigger ring on the outer side.
1 Install the Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe in the 1# reagent
position and install the pseudo probe on the reagent probe arm. The alignment
tool should be placed in the slot under the printed reagent number.
2 Click 1Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 1st Injection Port - Stop Position(Ra).
Follow the software steps and prompts, rotate the reagent probe arm manually to
Ra position on the tool. Use the left and right arrow to adjust the reagent carousel
position to make pseudo probe align with the Ra hole.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.39 Offset from Aspirate Port on Reagent Carousel
The horizontal position alignment tool is

placed in the 1# reagent position; from
inner to outer is Ra, Rb, Rc and Rd. The
pseudo probe aligns with the hole and
the clearance is even.
15.6.3 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 2nd Injection Port - Stop

Position(Rb)
Alignment index:
Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe BM10-J09Rb.(Manually rotate the
reagent arm.)
Click 2 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 2nd Injection Port - Stop Position(Rb). Refer
to 15.6.2 to finish the alignment.
15.6.4 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 3rd Injection Port - Stop

Position(Rc)
Alignment index:
Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe BM10-J09Rc.(Manually rotate the
reagent arm.)
Click 3 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 3rd Injection Port - Stop Position(Rc) Refer
to 15.6.2 to finish the alignment until all requirements are met otherwise re-perform
the alignment.
15.6.5 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 4th Injection Port - Stop

Position(Rd)
Alignment index:
Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe BM10-J09Rd.(Manually rotate the
reagent arm.)
1 Click 4 Reagent Carousel's Position Offset at 4th Injection Port - Stop Position(Rd)
and refer to 15.6.2 to finish the alignment.
2 Remove the Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe and the pseudo
probe.

15 Alignment
15.7 Reagent probe unit

Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Reagent Probe Unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.40 Reagent Probe Unit alignment screen
15.7.2 Horizontal Position for Aspirating Ra/Rb/Rc/Rd

Alignment index:
The pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 can be aligned to hole of the Horizontal position
alignment tool for reagent probe BM10-J09.
Precautions:
The horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe should be placed into the
slot corresponding to the 1# reagent position.
Place first the Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe close to the
small ring on the inner side of the reagent carousel and let the tool lay horizontally
to lock the bigger ring on the outer side.
Click 1 Horizontal Position for Aspirating Ra/Rb/Rc/Rd. Follow the software steps and
prompts and use the up, down, left and right arrow to adjust the reagent probe arm
position to make the pseudo probe can align with the four holes on the Horizontal
position alignment tool for reagent probe. The clearance should be even.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.41 Reagent aspirate horizontal position
The horizontal position alignment tool is

placed in the 1# reagent position from inner
to outer is Ra, Rb, Rc and Rd. The pseudo
probe aligns with the hole and the clearance
is even.
Figure 15.42 Reagent Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations
Rd
position
15.7.3 Reagent Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations

Alignment index:
The pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 can be aligned to Rd hole of the Horizontal position
alignment tool for reagent probe BM10-J09.
1 Click 2 Reagent Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations. Select
Continue and the reagent probe moves to above Rd. Go to the next step. If the
window the forward/reversed compensations of the reagent probe is too big pops
up, select OK to go to the next step.
2 Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the alignment. Refer to 15.7.2
and use BM10 pseudo probe and wash well positioning fixture. If alarm
Alignment failed! "is given, select OK to exit and restart this procedure. If same
alarm occurs, the probe drive assembly may go wrong. Check the assembly or
change it.
15.7.4 Reagent Probe Horizontal Wash Position

Alignment index:
Pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 can align with the hole of the wash well positioning fixture
BM10-J05-004.

15 Alignment
Click 3 Alignment of reagent probes in horizontal wash position. Follow the software
prompts and steps to complete the alignment. Refer to 15.7.2 and use BM10 pseudo
probe and wash well positioning fixture.
Figure 15.43 Reagent Probe Horizontal Wash Position
The pseudo probe

aligns with the hole
even.
15.7.5 Horizontal Reagent Dispense Position on Reaction Carousel

Inner/Middle/Outer rings
Alignment index:
Pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 can align with the hole of Cuvette fixture for the reaction
carousel BM10-J05-001 on the inner/middle/outer ring of the reaction carousel.
Click 4 Horizontal Reagent Dispense Position on Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer
rings. Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the alignment. Refer to 15.7.2
and use BM10 pseudo probe and cuvette fixture. Pseudo cuvettes are placed in the 1#
and 51# position on the inner ring of the reaction carousel. 51# cuvette on the middle
ring is located at the position between 1# and 50# cuvette on the inner ring.
Figure 15.44 Horizontal Reagent Dispense Position on Reaction Carousel
Inner/Middle/Outer rings
1# position on the inner ring of reaction carousel 51# position on the middle ring of
reaction carousel Reagent position on the outer ring of reaction carousel

15 Alignment
15.7.6 Reagent Probe Vertical Wash Position

Alignment index:
Pseudo probe(BM10-J05-005) is lifted up by the wash well boss. Use the feeler to
measure the clearance between the pseudo probe and the guide holder as 0.15mm.
Click 5 Reagent Probe Vertical Wash Position and select continue. The message "Caution
collision. Do you use a pseudo probe? "pops up. Select OK to go to the next step.
Follow the software prompts and steps and use 0.10mm/0.20mm feeler and pseudo
probe to perform the alignment until the requirements are met.
Figure 15.45 Reagent Probe Vertical Wash Position
Use the feeler to measure

the clearance between
pseudo probe flange and
the guide post and it is
0.1-0.2mm.
The pseudo probe

lifted up by the wash
well boss
Figure 15.46 Reagent Carousel Vertical Extreme Position (Ra)
Use the feeler to measure the

clearance between pseudo
probe flange and the guide
post and it is 0.1-0.2mm.
In the 1#,13# and 25#

reagent position, pseudo
probe is inserted into the
hole bottom and is pushed
up.
15.7.7 Reagent Carousel Vertical Extreme Position (Ra)

Alignment index:
In the reagent carousel 1#,13# and 25# reagent position, when the pseudo probe
BM10-J05-005 reaches the Ra hole of the horizontal aspirating position alignment tool
and is pushed up, use a clearance gauge to measure the gap between the pseudo probe
and arm base and the gap should be 0.15mm.
Precautions:

15 Alignment
When the pseudo probe is inserted into the hole of the fixture, lift the pseudo probe and
drop down manually to check if it reaches the bottom of the hole.
Click 6 Reagent Carousel Vertical Extreme Position (Ra). Follow the software prompts
and steps and use 0.10mm/0.20mm feeler, pseudo probe and horizontal position
alignment tool for reagent probe to perform the alignment until the requirements are
met. Install the horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe to 1#,13# and 25#
reagent position. The alignment tool should be placed in the slot under the printed
reagent number.
15.7.8 Reagent Dispense Position Vertical Extreme on Reaction Carousel

Inner/Middle/Outer Rings
Alignment index:
When pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 is inserted into the hole of the cuvette fixture
BM10-J05-001and is pushed up, use a clearance gauge to measure the gap between the
pseudo probe and arm base, the gap should be 0.15mm.
Precautions:
When the pseudo probe is inserted into the hole of the fixture, lift the pseudo probe
and drop down manually to check if it reaches the bottom of the hole.
After alignment, remove the alignment tools from the reaction carousel otherwise
collision may occur.
Click 7 Reagent Dispense Position Vertical Extreme on Reaction Carousel
Inner/Middle/Outer Rings. Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the
alignment. Use0.1mm/0.2mm feeler, BM10 pseudo probe and cuvette fixture. The
cuvette fixture should be placed in the 1#,18# and 35# positions on the outer ring of the
reaction carousel. Remove the fixture according to the software prompt.
Figure 15.47 Reagent Dispense Position Vertical Extreme on Reaction Carousel
Inner/Middle/Outer Rings

0.1-0.2mm.
In 1#, 18# and 35# position, the

pseudo probe is inserted into the
hole bottom of the alignment tool
and pushed up.

15 Alignment
15.8 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation and bar code unit
15.8.1 Carousel Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation
Alignment index:
cuvette fixture BM10-J05-001 on the reaction carousel outer ring.
1 Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Reaction Carousel Unit.
2 Select 7 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation. Click Continue and the
Prerequisites window pops up. Select OK to confirm the Prerequisites have been
completed. The reagent probe moves to the reagent dispense position of the
reaction carousel's outer ring. Go to the next step. If the window The reversed stop
position compensation of the reaction carouse is too big pops up, select OK to go to
the next step.
and use BM10 pseudo probe and cuvette fixture to complete the alignment. If
alarm Alignment failed! "is given, select OK to exit and restart this procedure. If
same alarm occurs, the reaction carousel assembly may go wrong. Check the
assembly or change it.
15.8.2 Reagent Carousel Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation

Alignment index:
Horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe BM10-J09Ra.
Precautions:
The horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe should be placed into the slot
corresponding to the 1# reagent position.
1 Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Reagent Carousel Unit.
2 Select 5 Reversed Rotary Stop Position Compensation. Click Continue and the
Prerequisites window pops up. Select OK to confirm the Prerequisites have been
completed. The reagent probe moves to the Ra position of the reaction carousel's 1#
reagent position. Go to the next step. If the window The reversed stop position
compensation of the reaction carouse is too big pops up, select OK to go to the next
step.
and use BM10 pseudo probe and horizontal position alignment tool for reagent
probe to complete the alignment. If alarm Alignment failed! "is given, select OK to
exit and restart this procedure. If same alarm occurs, the reagent carousel assembly
may go wrong. Check the assembly or change it.
15.8.3 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Scanning Position

Alignment index:

15 Alignment
The bar code reader's light beam can pass through the slot on the reagent aspirate
position alignment tool, and the scanning is correct.
1 Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Bar Code Unit.
Figure 15.48 Bar Code Unit screen
2 The horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe should be placed into the
slot corresponding to the 1# reagent position.
3 Click Reagent Carousel Barcode Scanning Position Adjustment and select
Continue. Reagent carousel 1# position rotates to the scanning position. The bar
code reader is turned on. Move to the next step.
4 Unscrew the screws to adjust the position of the bar code reader to make the light
go through the hole of the horizontal position alignment tool for reagent probe and
form a straight line on the background. Tighten the screws slightly to make the
reader fixed.
5 Follow the software prompts and steps to ensure the correct position of the bar
code reader. Tighten the screws. The bar code reader and the sponge of the
anti-mist heating assembly of reagent carousel should be well contacted and no
clearance is allowed.
6 Remove the fixture. Place 5 reagent bottles with bar code in the 1~5# position.
Follow the software steps and prompts to finish the alignment. When loading the
reagent bottle, first align the gear with the slot and then lay flat the reagent bottle. A
click will be heard.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.49 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Scanning Position
The scanner light passes

through the hole of the
alignment tool and falls on
the background paper to
form a straight line.
The bar code reader and the

sponge of the anti-mist
Loosen the 4 retaining screws and heating assembly of reagent
adjust the scanner position. carousel should be well
contacted and no clearance
is allowed.
Figure 15.50 Reagent bottle with bar code
15.8.4 Reagent Carousel Bar Code Stability

Alignment index:
Scan 36 reagent bottles with bar code. All the bar code can be correctly read.
1 Place the reagent bottles with bar code in the 36 reagent positions. When loading
the reagent bottle, first align the gear with the slot and then lay flat the reagent
bottle. A click will be heard.
2 Enter the Bar code unit alignment screen. Click the Ordinary Functions.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.51 Bar Code Scanning Functions
3 Use the 1-36 reagent positions. Select Reagent Carousel Bar Code Stability Test.
Scan bar code from 1# reagent position. After scanning, the bar code will be
displayed on the screen. Compare it with the barcode on the bottle to check they
match. Repeat this step twice.

15 Alignment
15.9 Sample Probe Unit

Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Sample Probe Unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.52 Reagent Probe Unit alignment screen
Note: The 6 and 7 alignments related to special wash cannot be done in this chapter.
They can be performed after the special wash assembly is installed.
15.9.2 Sample Probe Wash Position Horizontal

Alignment index:
BM10-J05-004.
Figure 15.53 Sample Probe Wash Position Horizontal
The pseudo probe

aligns with the hole
even.

15 Alignment
Click 1 Sample Probe Wash Position Horizontal. Follow the software steps and prompts
and use the up, down, left and right arrow to adjust the sample probe arm position to
make the pseudo probe can align with the hole of wash well positioning alignment tool.
The clearance should be even.
15.9.3 Sample Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations

Alignment index:
BM10-J05-004.
1 Click 2 Sample Probe Horizontal Forward/Reversed Compensations. Select
Continue and the sample probe starts to reset Go to the next step. If the window
"the forward/reversed compensations of the sample probe is too big" pops up,
select OK to go to the next step.
and use BM10 pseudo probe and wash well positioning fixture. If alarm
Alignment failed! "is given, select OK to exit and restart this procedure. If same
alarm occurs, the probe drive assembly may go wrong. Check the assembly or
change it.
15.9.4 Sample Probe Horizontal Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Positions

Alignment index:
The pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 can align with the cuvette fixture in sampling position,
1# dilution position and 2# dilution position.
Click 3 Sample Probe Horizontal Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Positions. Follow the
software prompts and steps and use pseudo probe and cuvette fixture to complete the
alignment. The positioning axis should align with the hole of the cuvette fixture and
the clearance should be even. Do not mistake 1# dilution position for 2#.
Figure 15.54 Sample Probe Horizontal Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Positions
Sampling position 1# dilution position 2# dilution position
15.9.5 Sample Probe Wash Position Vertical

Alignment index:
Pseudo probe(BM10-J05-005) is lifted up by the wash well boss. Use the feeler to
measure the clearance between the pseudo probe and the guide holder as 0.15mm.

15 Alignment

1 Click 4 Sample Probe Wash Position Vertical and select continue. The message
"Caution collision. Do you use a pseudo probe? "pops up. Select OK to go to the
next step.
2 Follow the software prompts and steps and use 0.10mm/0.20mm feeler and pseudo
probe to perform the alignment until the requirements are met.
Figure 15.55 Sample probe vertical wash position
Use the feeler to measure the

clearance between pseudo probe
flange and the guide post and it is
0.1-0.2mm.
Pseudo probe is
pushed up by the
wash well boss
15.9.6 Sample Probe Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Vertical Extreme

Positions
Alignment index:
When pseudo probe BM10-J05-005 is inserted into the hole of the cuvette fixture in
dispense position BM10-J05-002 and is pushed up, use a clearance gauge to measure the
gap between the pseudo probe and arm base, the gap should be 0.15mm.
Precautions:
When the pseudo probe is inserted into the hole of the fixture, lift the pseudo probe and
drop down manually to check if it reaches the bottom of the hole.
Click 5 Sample Probe Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Vertical Extreme Positions. Follow
the software prompts and steps to complete the alignment with 0.1mm/0.2mm feeler,
BM10 pseudo probe and cuvette fixture until the alignment requirements are met.
Figure 15.56 Sample Probe Dispense and 1#/2# Diluting Vertical Extreme Positions

15 Alignment

0.1-0.2mm
In the three positions,

the pseudo probe is
Sampling position 1# dilution position 2# dilution position inserted into the hole
bottom and pushed
up.

15 Alignment
15.10 Second Gripper Unit

Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Second gripper Unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.57 Second Gripper Unit screen
Note: Procedure 6 Gripper Middle Position Adjustment is not required.
15.10.2 2nd Gripper Home Position Alignment

Alignment index:
When the fingers move to the home position, pinch them with proper force (to prevent
deformation or damage) and check if they are not closed.
1 Select 1 2nd Gripper Home Position Alignment and click Continue. The Figure
Position Configuration window pops up. Click exit and enter the next step after the
second gripper is reset. If parameters are configured, click OK to go to the next
step.
2 Pinch the fingers and check if they close. Pinch the fingers and check if they close. If
they do, check the big and small cams and use the left/right arrow buttons to adjust
them. In case the small cam is in front of the big one, select right arrow button to
increase the opening parameter; otherwise, select left arrow button to decrease it,
till requests are met.
3 Select Continue. Check again if the finger meets the requirement. Click Continue
until the alignment is completed.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.58 Cam
Big cam
Small cam
Pinch the middle

of the finger
15.10.3 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel Horizontal

Alignment index:
The gripper moves to the inner/middle/outer ring of the reaction carousel. The finger
adjusting tool BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the cuvette fixture.
1 Click 2 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel Horizontal and click
Continue. The second gripper moves to above the gripping position on the outer
ring of the reaction carousel.
2 Place the cuvette fixture in the back operating position on the outer ring of the
reaction carousel. Insert the finger adjusting tool into the finger. Use the up, down,
left and right arrow to adjust the gripper position to make its positioning axis align
with the hole of the fixture. The clearance should be even.
Figure 15.59 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel Horizontal
The alignment tool aligns and

the clearance is even in the
alignment positions.
3 Click continue. After checking the outer ring position, click Continue to move to the
next step.
4 Follow the software prompts and steps and use the same method to finish the
alignment of Gripper horizontally moving to Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel.
5 Take out all alignment tools and click continue to complete the procedures.

15 Alignment
15.10.4 Second Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations

Alignment index:
After the gripper rotates clockwise or counter clockwise . The finger adjusting tool
BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the cuvette fixture BM10-J05-001.
1 Click 3 Second Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations. Select Continue and
to go to the next step. If alarm Second Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations
is big pops up, click Continue to go to the next step.
2 Place the cuvette fixture in the back operating position on the outer ring of the
reaction carousel. Insert the finger adjusting tool into the finger. Use the up and
down arrow to lower the positioning axis to the hole of the cuvette fixture. Observe
the alignment of the axis and the hole. Click Continue to go to the next step. If the
axis of the tool deviates from the hole of the cuvette fixture or collision sound is
heard, exit this procedure to perform 15.10.3 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of
Reaction Carousel Horizontal alignment.
3 Refer to15.10.3 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel Horizontal
alignment to finish Second Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations alignment.
Take out all tools after the alignment is completed. If alarm Second Gripper's
Forward/Reversed Compensations is big pops up. Click Continue to exit and
re-perform 15.10.3 Gripper Outer/Middle/Inner of Reaction Carousel Horizontal
alignment.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.60 Second Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations
The alignment tool aligns and

the clearance is even on the
outer ring .
Figure 15.61 Gripper Mixing Position Horizontal
The alignment tool

aligns and the
clearance is even.
15.10.5 Gripper Mixing Position Horizontal

Alignment index:
The gripper finger alignment tool BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of
Cuvette fixture in sampling position BM10-J05-002.
1 Click 4 Gripper Mixing Position Horizontal button and click continue to go to the
next step.
2 Insert the Cuvette fixture in sampling position into the mixing assembly and insert
the finger adjusting tool into the finger. Refer to the alignment method in 15.10.3
to make positioning axis of the finger adjusting tool align with the hole of the fixture.
The clearance should be even.
3 Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the alignment. Take out the
alignment tools when the alignment is completed.
15.10.6 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal

Alignment index:
The finger fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the center of the gripping hole alignment
tool BM10-J01-002.

15 Alignment
1 Click 5Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal button and click continue to go to the
next step.
2 Insert the Gripping hole alignment tool BM10-J01-002 into the dispersion carousel
and insert the finger adjusting tool into the finger. Refer to the alignment method
in 15.10.3 to make positioning axis of the finger adjusting tool align with the hole
of the fixture. The clearance should be even.
Figure 15.62 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Horizontal
The alignment tool

aligns and the
clearance is even.
3 Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the alignment. Take out the
alignment tools when the alignment is completed.
15.10.7 Reaction Carousel Vertical Gripping Position Alignment

Alignment index:
When the gripper grasps the cuvette, the lower end of the gripper should be even with
scale line of the alignment tool and the length from the lower end of the finger to the rim
of the cuvette is 0.90.3mm.
1 Click 7 Reaction Carousel Vertical Gripping Position Alignment and click Continue.
After the gripper is rest, place the cuvette fixture in the back operating position on
the outer ring of the reaction carousel according to the software prompts. Click OK
to go to next step.
2 Follow the software prompts and step and use up and down arrow to adjust the
gripping position of the gripper and make the lower end of the gripper align with
scale line of the alignment tool
3 Click Continue and take out the cuvette according to the prompt. Select OK and
Continue to finish the alignment.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.63 Vertical position gripper moving to different positions.
The lower end of the

gripper aligns with
scale line of the
alignment tool.
15.10.8 Gripper Mixing Position Vertical

Alignment index:
Click 8 Gripper Mixing Position Vertical. Follow the software prompts and steps to
complete the alignment. Refer to 15.10.7 to finish the alignment with the fixtures.
15.10.9 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Vertical

Alignment index:
Click 9 Gripper Dispersion Carousel Vertical. Follow the software prompts and steps to
complete the alignment. Refer to 15.10.7 to finish the alignment with the fixtures.
15.10.10 Vertical Middle Monitoring Position Alignment

Alignment index:
Configure the alignment parameter of second gripper's vertical middle monitoring
position
Click 10 Vertical Middle Monitoring Position Alignment button. The window Alignment
of second gripper's vertical middle monitoring position will begin. Continue? pops up.
Click Continue to finish the alignment.

15 Alignment
15.11 Tray Loader
15.11 Tray Loader

15.11.1 Tray loader alignment screen
Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Tray Loader Unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.64 Tray loader alignment screen
15.11.2 Feeding Position

Alignment index:
When the tray is held up by the tray loader, the trays are 4-5mm over the guide rail.
Figure 15.65 Load the tray
The empty tray

should be placed
horizontally.

15 Alignment
15.11 Tray Loader
Figure 15.66 Feeding Position
Tray bracket
assembly
The clearance between the four angles of the

tray bottom and the two guide rails should be
4-5mm.
1 Place at least 1 empty tray in the feeding area.

2 Click 1 Feeding Position and select Continue. The tray bracket assembly carries the
tray and rises to the working position. Go to the next step.
3 Use feeding position alignment tool or feeler to measure the clearance between the
four angles of the tray bottom and the two guide rails. Use the up and down arrow
to adjust the position of the tray bracket assembly. the trays should be 4-5mm
over the guide rail. Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the
alignment. Do not remove the tray which will be used in the following alignment.
15.11.3 Unloading Home Position

Alignment index:
The space between the unloader and tray bracket is within 0.3-0.5mm. (The narrower
shall prevail.)
1 Click 2 Unloading Home Position button and select Continue to move to the next
step.
2 Use 0.3mm and 0.5mm feeler to measure the clearance between the unloader and
tray bracket. 0.3 mm feeler can insert while 0.5mm cannot. Click Up and Down
arrow to adjust unloader until the clearance meets the requirement. Follow the
software prompts and steps to complete the alignment.

15 Alignment
15.11 Tray Loader
Figure 15.67 Unloading Home Position
unloader
The space between the unloader and tray bracket

is within 0.3-0.5mm.
15.11.4 Pushing Position

Alignment index:
The pusher pushes trays with positioning groove facing the bearing. (Note that the
pusher is close to trays and cannot align them with the bearing.)
1 Place one tray in the middle of the guide rail on the top of the loader.
2 Click 3 Pushing Position and select Continue. The pusher pushes the tray to the
position. Go to the next step.
3 Visually check the tray position. It should satisfy the requirements in the following
figure. Click Left and Right arrow to adjust the pusher until the tray position meets
the requirement. Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the alignment.
Remove the tray. If there is clearance between the tray and the pusher, push the
tray gently to contact with the pusher and then check the position of the tray.

15 Alignment
15.11 Tray Loader
Figure 15.68 Load the tray
The tray is
placed in the
middle of the
guide rail.
Figure 15.69 Pushing Position
Here the
bearing center
aligns with tray Here the side of
positioning the tray contacts
boss with the pusher
Here the bearing

aligns with the
tray trapeze slot.
The bearing
center align
with the tip of
the V shape slot.
15.11.5 Guide Rail Positions

Alignment index:
Home position: Home position: Check if alignment tool's home position No-go
Gauge cannot be placed between guide rails while Go Gauge can. Ensure trays can
adjust automatically after being pushed to 2mm from feeding position.
Open Position: Check if the tool's open position No-go Gauge cannot be placed
between guide rails while its Go Gauge can. Ensure trays can drop automatically
with over 4mm space (2mm on each side).Preparation: Prepare guide rail alignment
tool.
Middle Pos.: Check if the tool's middle position No-go Gauge cannot be placed
between guide rails while its Go Gauge can. Ensure trays can be smoothly pushed in
place without tilting or falling.

15 Alignment
15.11 Tray Loader
Precautions:
If no guide rail alignment tool is available, use the empty tray to adjust. The position
requirements are as follows:
Home position: When the guide rail clamps the tray. Pull the tray to deviate
about 2mm. The tray can return to the original position.
Open position: The tray can be dropped without obstruction. The distance
between the tray and the guide trail is at least 2mm.
Middle position: Place one tray in the middle of the guide rail on the top of the
loader. Push the tray gently and the tray can be pushed to the position without
obvious obstruction. When the tray reaches the position, push forward or backward
the tray, it cannot drop.
1 Prepare two empty tray.
2 Click 4 Guide Rail Positions button and click continue to go to the next step.
3 Use the guide rail alignment tool to measure the clearance of the two pole
brackets of the Open-Close assembly. No-go Gauge cannot be placed between
guide rails while its Go Gauge can.
4 Click Continue to enter the next step. Check the guide rail position according to the
software prompts and remove the alignment tool. Click Continue to go to the next
step.
5 Use the same method and requirements. Follow the software prompts and step to
finish the open position and middle position alignment with the guide rail
alignment tool Take out the alignment tool first and then click continue during
this process.
6 Take out the tray and alignment tool.
Figure 15.70 Guide Rail Positions
The alignment tool is placed in the position as shown in the figure.

Measure the distance between the two bending sides and No-go Gauge
cannot be placed between guide rails while its Go Gauge can.
15.11.6 Tray drawer check

Alignment index:
When the auto load assembly is resetting, the drawer cannot be pulled out while under
other condition, it can.

15 Alignment
15.11 Tray Loader
Click Tray unit mechanical home on the tray loader alignment screen. During reset, pull
the drawer, it cannot be pulled out. When the reset is finished, pull the drawer, it can be
pulled out.
Figure 15.71 Drawer functions
Under other
condition, the
When the auto load drawer can be
assembly is being reset, the pulled out.
drawer cannot be pulled
out.

15 Alignment
15.12 First Gripper Unit

15.12.1 First Gripper Unit screen
Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>First gripper Unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.72 First Gripper Unit screen
NOTE
The alignment of this chapter should be done after finishing the alignment of the
reaction carousel unit and tray load unit.
Note: Procedure 6 Gripper Middle Position Adjustment is not required.

15 Alignment
15.12.2 First Gripper Mechanical Reset

Alignment: First Gripper Mechanical Reset Illustration
Hexagon
BM10-J13 N/A
wrenches Acc
Alignme Cross ess
N/A
nt tool screwdriver ori
Lever es
N/A
indicator
See the following figure:
Fix the bracket of the lever indicator on the first
gripper(remove the screw on the front of the
finger). The bracket should be vertically
downward as shown in the figure.
Use one M3X10 hexagon socket screw to fix the
vertical base to the reaction carousel.
Use 1 M3x10 hexagon socket screw to fix the
gripper Z axis vertical adjustment tool to the
Operati vertical base. The front side of the fixture should
ons parallel with the bracket of the lever indicator.
Insert the spindle of the vertical adjustment tool
into the finger and make the finger grips it.
Perform the verticality alignment at X,Y and Z
axis.
After the alignment is done, remove all the
alignment tools and tighten the screws.
Use 5 M3X8 screws to fix the reaction carousel
cover with the sponge adhered to the retainer
ring. BM10-J13-04 BM10-J13-03 BM10-J13-01 BM10-J13-02v
vertical base gripper Z axis lever indicator erticality
verticality bracket adjustment
adjustment core
alignment tool

15 Alignment
Check
Z axis
frame
X axis verticality alignment

Fix the bracket of the lever indicator below the hole of the bracket and the pointer is
placed as the arrow shows.
Y axis verticality alignment: Move the finger gently and record the max value. The pointer moving distance should be
Fix the bracket of the lever indicator on the hole of the bracket and the pointer is placed less than 0.05mm with the stroke otherwise adjust the four screws of the Z axis guide rail.
as the arrow shows. Daub the threaded glue into the hole of the guide rail mounting plate.
Move the finger gently and record the max value. The pointer moving distance should be Loose the screws slightly and make the finger swing along the Y axis but retaining force
less than 0.05mm with the stroke otherwise adjust the four screws of the Z axis frame. remains. Adjust guide rail to the proper position and measure the verticality again till it
Loose the screws slightly and make the Z axis frame swing along the Y axis but retaining force meets the requirement. Tighten the screws.
remains. Adjust the Z axis frame to the proper position and measure the verticality again till it Use the end with the hook of the BM10-J13-005 Z-axis optical coupler block alignment
meets the requirement. Tighten the screws. tool to measure the clearance between the sensor and sensor block. The alignment tool
After the screws are tightened, check the verticality again cannot be inserted and the sensor block does not contact with the sensor otherwise
readjust the guide rail position.
After the screws are tightened, check the verticality again
15 Alignment
Gripper bracket
Z axis verticality alignment

Remove the lever indicator and rotate the Z axis verticality alignment tool for 180and tighten it.
Move the finger slowly to make the verticality core contact tightly with the fixture side(as the arrow
shows).The cylindrical face of the core should contact tightly with the alignment side and no gap is
found ,otherwise adjust the screws on the gripper bracket. Reaction carousel
Loose the screws slightly and make the bracket swing along the Y axis but slight retaining force cover
remains. Adjust bracket to the proper position and measure the verticality again till it meets the
requirement. Tighten the screws.
After the screws are tightened, check the verticality again.

15 Alignment
15.12.3 First Gripper Home Position Alignment

Alignment index:
When the fingers move to the home position, pinch them with proper force (to prevent
deformation or damage) and check if they are not closed.
Click 1 First Gripper Home Position Alignment. Refer to 15.10.2 2nd Gripper Home
Position Alignment and follow the software prompts and steps to complete the
alignment.
15.12.4 First Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations

Alignment index:
The finger fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the cuvette fixture
BM10-J05-002 in the first column second line.
1 Place at least 1 empty tray in the feeding area.
2 Enter tray load unit alignment screen and click Tray Loader Mechanical Reset. The
tray is moved to the pushing position(see 15.11.4 ), and then place cuvette fixture
into the hole in the first column second line until it reaches its bottom.
3 Enter first gripper alignment screen. Select 2 First Gripper's Forward/Reversed
Compensations and then select Continue to go to the next step.
4 Insert the finger adjusting tool into the finger. Use Up, Down, Left, Right ,Front and
Back arrow to adjust the gripper position to make the positioning axis of the finger
adjusting tool align with the hole of the cuvette fixture. The clearance should be
even. Click Continue. Follow the software prompts and steps to complete the
alignment.
Figure 15.73 First Gripper's Forward/Reversed Compensations
The alignment tool aligns in the

first column, second line of the tray
5 Click Continue. Use the same method and follow the software prompts and steps to
finish the alignment of the horizontal position and Forward/Reversed
Compensations Finally, take out the fixture and do not remove the tray.
15.12.5 Gripper Tray Horizontal

Alignment index:

15 Alignment
The finger fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the cuvette fixture
BM10-J05-002 in three corners of the tray.
1 Click 3 Gripper Tray Horizontal button. Refer to 15.12.4 and follow the software
steps and prompts to finish the alignment.
2 Take out the fixture and do not remove the tray.
Figure 15.74 Place the cuvette fixture into the three corners of the tray.
Figure 15.75 Gripper Tray Horizontal
The alignment tool aligns

in the three corners and
the clearance is even.
15.12.6 Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Horizontal Gripping

Position Alignment
Alignment index:
finger fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole of Cuvette fixture for the reaction
carousel BM10-J05-001 in the front operating position on the inner/middle/outer ring
of the reaction carousel.
Click 4 Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Horizontal Gripping Position Alignment.
Follow the software prompts and steps and use the finger alignment tool and
cuvette fixture to complete the alignment. The positioning axis should align with the
hole of the cuvette fixture and the clearance should be even. Pseudo cuvettes are placed
in the 25# and 75# position on the inner ring of the reaction carousel. 75# cuvette on
the middle ring is located at the position between 24# and 25# cuvette on the inner ring.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.76 Reaction Carousel Inner/Middle/Outer Horizontal Gripping Position

Alignment
25# front operating position on the inner ring of reaction carousel 75# front operating position on the
middle ring of reaction carousel Front operating position on the outer ring of reaction carousel
15.12.7 Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal

Alignment index:
The finger fixture BM10-J08-007 can align with the hole center of the cuvette fixture in
sampling position, 1# dilution position and 2# dilution position.
Click 5 Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal. Follow the software prompts
and steps and use finger alignment tool and cuvette fixture to complete the alignment.
The positioning axis should align with the hole of the cuvette fixture and the clearance
should be even. Do not mistake 1# dilution position for 2#.
Figure 15.77 Dispense and #1/#2 Diluting Positions Horizontal
Sampling position 1# dilution position 2# dilution position
15.12.8 Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2 Alignment

Alignment index:

15 Alignment
1# discarding position: The finger adjustment tool BM10-J08-007 can align with the
hole center of the alignment tool in cuvette discarding position BM10-J05-003.
2# discarding position: The finger adjustment tool BM10-J08-007 can insert into
the hole of the alignment tool in discarding position and no collision occurs.
Click 6 Horizontal Discarding Position #1/#2 Alignment .Follow the software prompts
and steps and use the finger alignment tool and alignment tool in cuvette discarding
position. The finger alignment tool can insert into the hole of the alignment tool in
cuvette discarding position. Do not mistake 1# discarding position for 2#.
Figure 15.78 Horizontal Discarding Position #1 Alignment
The alignment tool aligns in

the 1# discarding position
Figure 15.79 Horizontal Discarding Position #2 Alignment
In the 2# discarding
position, the positioning
shaft is inserted into the
hole of the alignment hole
and no bumping is found.
15.12.9 Gripper Reaction Carousel Vertical

Alignment index:
When the gripper grasps the cuvette in the front operating position on the outer ring of
the reaction carousel, the lower end of the gripper should be even with scale line of the
alignment tool and the length from the lower end of the finger to the rim of the cuvette is
0.90.3mm.

15 Alignment
Click 8 Gripper Reaction Carousel Vertical button. Refer to 15.10.7 Gripper Reaction
Carousel Vertical and follow the software steps and prompts. Use the up and down arrow
to adjust the gripping positions to make the lower end of the gripper align with scale
line of the alignment tool.
Figure 15.80 Vertical position gripper moving to different positions.
The lower end of the

gripper aligns with
scale line of the
alignment tool.
15.12.10 Gripper Dispense Position Vertical

Alignment index:
When the gripper grasps the cuvette in dispense position, the lower end of the gripper
should be even with scale line of the alignment tool and the length from the lower end of
the finger to the rim of the cuvette is 0.90.3mm.
1 Place a cuvette in the dispense position.
2 Click 9 Gripper Dispense Position Vertical. Refer to 15.12.9 and follow the
software steps and prompts to finish the alignment with the alignment tools.
15.12.11 Gripper Tray Vertical

Alignment index:
When the gripper grasps the cuvette in the four corners of the cuvette tray, the lower end
of the gripper should be even with scale line of the alignment tool and the length from
the lower end of the finger to the rim of the cuvette is 0.90.3mm.
1 Place the 4 cuvette fixtures on the four corners of the tray.
2 Click 10 Gripper Tray Vertical. Refer to 15.12.9 and follow the software steps and
prompts to finish the alignment.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.81 Place 4 cuvette fixtures on the corners of the tray
15.12.12 Vertical Middle Monitoring Position Alignment

Alignment index:
Configure the alignment parameter of first gripper's vertical middle monitoring
position
Click 11 Vertical Middle Monitoring Position Alignment. Refer to 15.10.10 and follow
the software steps and prompts to finish the alignment.

15 Alignment
15.13 Hydropneumatic Unit

15.13.1 Preparations before Alignment
Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Hydro Unit.
Figure 15.82 the alignment screen of the Hydro Unit
Before the alignment, the mechanical position alignments of the analyzer have been
completed.
Check the connection of the pipework. If it works normally, start the alignment.
First perform the immersion of the substrate tubes through 8 Substrate Subsystem
Component Check and Tube Wash and then perform the 1~5 alignment items
followed by 6~7 items; finally preform the hydro unit check and calibrate the 1~7
alignments.
After the hydro unit alignment is completed, re-perform the whole procedures. Click
Fluidic Alignment button to perform 1-5 alignments and click Fluidic Prime button
to perform the 6~8 alignments and 1~7 fluidic check.
The water used for alignment must be fresh ultra-pure water.
If wash buffer or substrate is spilt or dropped out, tighten the connectors with your
hands(wear the gloves) and use the paper tissue to clean the spilt liquid.
15.13.2 Fluidic Connection

External pump(Optional): If external pump is configured, it should be connected
through the external pump connector and control cable.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.83 Connection demonstration

Outlet assembly
T763 T782
External vacuum External vacuum

pump port pump control cable
External
vacuum
pump
outlet
15.13.3 Floater Check

Alignment index:
All floater status (on/off)are read and displayed. When the status changes, the status
display will be refreshed.
Precautions:
No not contaminate the floaters. If they get dirty, clean them.
1 Click 1 Floater Check button and the floater check window pops up. When all
containers are empty, the five floater status are OFF
2 Change the position of the two floaters of the buffer tank of the wash buffer. Check if
the floater position matches the status in the following table.
Tank Name Floater Name Floater Displayed
position status
Buffer tank Low Floater of Buffer Tank of Wash Low level OFF
of wash Buffer Solution(FS01)
buffer High Floater of Buffer Tank of Wash
solution Buffer Solution(FS02)
Low Floater of Buffer Tank of Wash High level ON
Buffer Solution(FS01)
High Floater of Buffer Tank of Wash
Buffer Solution(FS02)
Waste Waste Tank Floater(FS07) Low level OFF
Container
Primary Primary vacuum container(FS08) Low level OFF
Vacuum
Container

15 Alignment
15.13.4 Check Wash Buffer Tubes and Related Components

Alignment index:
Alignment index: Liquid supply components and tube connection are normal.
1 Prepare two clean open containers with proper amount of DI water.
2 Loosen the retaining screws of the four dispersion dispensing probes D1~D4 and
put them into the open container. Do not pull out the dispensing probes forcibly. You
may disconnect the connectors and then re-connect them after removing the
probes.
3 Remove the sample probe interior/exterior wash tube and the reagent probe
interior/exterior wash tube from the connectors and wash wells.
4 Click 2 Check Wash Buffer Tubes and Related Components and select Continue.
When the sound of turning on the valve is heard, go to the next step.
5 Click Continue. The valves are turned off and the vacuum is established. The waste
pump is turned. Move to the next step.
6 Click Continue and the window Check Probe Wash Tubes and Related Components
pops up. Select auto cycling and click start. Put the tube displayed in red on the
window and there should be air bubbles popping up. After the four tubes are
checked, select Exit. If no air bubbles pop up, check the connections of the sample
probe interior/exterior wash tube and the reagent probe interior/exterior wash
tube.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.84 Check Probe Wash Tubes and Related Components
Figure 15.85 Check dispersion tube and components
7 Select Continue to proceed to the next step.

8 Click Continue and the window Check dispersion dispense tubes and related
components pops up. Select auto cycling (or selecting the next item manually) and
click start. Put the dispensing probe displayed in red on the window and there
should be air bubbles popping up. After the four tubes are checked, select Exit.
D1~D4 correspond to the dispensing probe from phase 1 to phase 4. Do not confuse
one with the other.
9 Click OK and Continue to exit the window and record the results.
15.13.5 Vacuum Pressure Check

Alignment index:
When external vacuum is not configured, the pressure displayed on the screen is
less than -70KPa(relative pressure)
When external vacuum is configured, the vacuum pump P08 and external
vacuum pump P06 work normally.
1 Select 3 Vacuum Pressure Check and vacuum pressure check window pops up.
Select the search button under Atmospheric to display the current atmospheric
pressure. Click Config to configure the atmospheric pressure.

15 Alignment
2 According to the product configuration, select P08 vacuum pump or P06 external
vacuum pump or P08+P06. Select Turn on and the pump start to work and select
the Start button on the left corner of the window, the vacuum pressure curve will be
drawn automatically.
3 Check if the displayed vacuum pressure is less than -70KPa and the reading on the
vacuum pressure gauge is steadily less than -70KPa. If so, click Stop to release the
vacuum and turn off the pump.
4 Select exit to exit the screen.
Figure 15.86 The displayed vacuum pressure is less than -70KPa
Figure 15.87 The reading on the vacuum pressure gauge is steadily less than -70KPa
15.13.6 Syringe Check

Alignment index:
The syringes can reset normally.

15 Alignment
1 Check the connections of sample syringe S, reagent syringe R, dispersion syringe

and substrate syringe are correct. If necessary, remove the shield of the dispersion
syringe.
2 Click 4Syringe Check and select Continue. The following window pops up. Click the
syringes to reset them and observe the resetting actions. If they reset normally, the
alignment is completed.
3 Install back the shield of the dispersion syringe.
Figure 15.88 Syringe Check
15.13.7 Check Drain Tubes and Related Components

Alignment index:
Drain components and tube connection are normal.
No leakage occurs in the related tubes.
No columnar liquid remains in the waste tube.
1 Prepare one clean open container with proper amount of DI water. Prepare at least
250ml DI water and 250ml ultra-pure water.
2 Loosen the retaining screws of the four dispersion aspirating probes A1~A4 and
put them into the open container. Do not pull out the aspirating probes forcibly. You
may disconnect the connectors and then re-connect them after removing the
probes.
3 Click 5 Check Drain Tubes and Related Components and select Continue. The
vacuum pump and waste pump are turned on. There should be air blowing out at
the outlet of the waste tube. Check the primary vacuum pressure gauge. The reading
should be -70Kpa.
4 Click Continue and the system starts to release the vacuum. The Peristaltic pump is
turned on. Lift the aspirating probes from the water and then immerse them into
the water. The four aspirating probes can aspirate the liquid and there should be
waste discharged from the waste outlet.
5 Click Continue. Follow the software steps and prompts to check the waste
discharge of the two wash wells , reagent compartment and the two substrate
bottles. Use ultra-pure water as waste for the substrate and use DI water for others.
Do not drop the water onto the cooling fan.

15 Alignment
6 After alignment, check and ensure no leakage occurs to the drain tubes.
15.13.8 Wash Buffer Aspirating Tube Check and Prime

Alignment index:
Wash buffer can be aspirated normally.
No leakage or liquid jet occurs to the tubes(If liquid is jetting from the tube, turn off
the power immediately.)
Precautions:
Use the DI water to replace the wash buffer. No not contaminate the floaters. If they get
dirty, clean them.
1 Leave the buffer container of wash buffer empty.
2 When no wash buffer is placed 1# and 2# positions and the high/low level floater
of the wash buffer is ON, the single tube pumps of the analyzer do not work.
3 Prepare two clean plastic tank(15L white BA30-10-06563) or similar container and
hold 3/4 tank of DI water. The square tank used in the alignment needs cleaning
and changing regularly.
Figure 15.89 Wash Buffer Aspirating Tubes Check
Wash buffer
indicator
2# wash buffer
tank
1# wash buffer
tank
2L buffer tank
4 Pull out the wash buffer drawer. Place the square tank in the middle of the wash
buffer position. First place in the 1# wash buffer position and then in the 2#position.
Install the wash buffer cap assembly and at this time, the 1# indicator is on
constantly.
5 Select 6 Wash Buffer Aspirating Tube Check and Prime, and select Continue.
6 Check if 1# wash buffer tank works normally and the tube connection is correct(do
not spill the wash buffer.)
7 When the two floaters of the wash buffer is low(off), the single tube pump is turned
on and aspirates wash buffer from the 1# tank to the 2L buffer tank. Lift the cap
assembly for a while and then put it into the tank. Observe the liquid movement in
the tube.
8 Change the low floater to high level(on) manually. Wash buffer aspiration of the 1#
tank resumes.

15 Alignment
9 Change the high and low floater to high level(on) manually. Wash buffer aspiration
of the 1# tank stops.
10 Check if leakage occurs to the wash buffer aspiration tube in the back of the
analyzer.
11 Press the metal plate on the cap of the tank and unplug the straight connector.
Remove the square tank to leave 1# position vacant. At this time, 1# indicator
should be flashing and 2# is lit constantly.
Figure 15.90 Unplug the straight connector
Press metal button

to remove the
connector
Figure 15.91 2# wash buffer test
1# wash buffer
12 Refer to the method in step 6 to check if 2# wash buffer tank works normally and
the tube connection is correct(do not spill the wash buffer.) The 2# indicator should
be lit constantly.
13 Install back the wash buffer tank in 1# and 2# position.
14 During wash buffer aspiration, swing gently the tubes located at the connectors of
the SV02(2), SV05(2) and air bubble detection optical coupler. Observe if there is
air bubble in the tubes. If so, tighten the connectors.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.92 Check if the connectors are loose
Visually check the

connectors to see if
they are tightened.
15 After alignment, no tube leakage is found.
15.13.9 Wash Buffer Prime

Alignment index:
Prime the probe wash tubes, sample/reagent dispense tubes and dispersion
dispense tubes to remove air bubbles.
No leakage or liquid jet occurs to the tubes(If liquid is jetting from the tube, turn off
the power immediately.)
Precautions:
The liquid flows continuously and no air bubbles are in the related tubes and
syringes; no leakage is found and no overflowing occurs in the wash wells.
If the air bubbles in the syringe is not discharged completely, loosen the compressor
to manually discharge the bubbles. Install back the compressor. Note: the upper
verge of the compressor should be even with scale 15 of the syringes.
Figure 15.93 Syringe air bubbles
The tubes are placed

behind the T piece
No bubbles in
the syringes
1 The volume of buffer tank is at least 2/3 tank and the tubes above the probes are
behind the T piece of the syringe.
2 The dispersion Dispensing D1~D4 are put into the clean open container.
3 Select 7 Wash Buffer Prime and click continue. Follow the software prompts and
steps to complete the alignment until the requirements are met.

15 Alignment
15.13.10 Clean Substrate Tubes

Alignment index:
Clean the substrate tubes to empty air bubbles.
Precautions:
The substrate tube should have been immersed for 4 hours.
If leakage is found at the connector, tighten the connector with your hand(wearing
gloves)and use the sharp nose plier or wrench to tighten 1/4 circle.
Avoid the substrate spikes contacting with other objects or liquid, otherwise use the
acid wash solution or ultra-pure water to clean it.
1 Check the substrate tube, pump and valve connectors. No leakage should be found.
2 Remove the spike and place above the waste container.
3 Tighten the cap and take out the two bottles of acid wash solution. Use clean seal
bag to pack them and avoid contaminating the plug on the bottom. Leave the spike
position vacant.
Figure 15.94 2 spike hangs above the waste container.
4 Click8Substrate Subsystem Component Check and Tube Wash and select Continue
to go to the next step.
5 Click Continue and the substrate prime window pops up. Enter 10 and click start.
The acid wash solution in subtrate1tube is drained.
6 After the acid solution in substrate 1 tube is drained, select turn on and the sound of
turning on SV30 is heard. Enter 10 and select start to drain the substrate 2 tube.
7 Click Turn off to turn off SV30.
8 Use two bottles with ultra-pure water in the 1# and 2# substrate positions. Loosen
the cap. Follow the Step 5~7 and set the substrate Prime Cycle to 30. Use the
ultra-pure water to wash 1# and 2# substrate tube. Check if there are big air
bubbles in the substrate syringes. The small bubbles around the syringe plunger are
as less as possible to avoid affecting the substrate dispensing volume test.
9 Click OK to exit the window and go to the next step.
10 Click Continue to return to the alignment screen.
11 Install back the spike and keep the ultra-pure water bottle on the spike for the
following test.

15 Alignment
15.13.11 Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration

Alignment index:
When the interior/exterior wash flow is completed, the software automatically
calibrates the speed of the pump and records the speed.
Precautions:
Only the probe interior/exterior flow test is passed, can the alignment of this step be
performed.
1 Prepare 2 open container with at least 600ml volume.
2 Click 3 Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration and the following screen pops up.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.95 Interior/Exterior Wash Pump Calibration
Figure 15.96 Interior container position
Figure 15.97 Exterior container position
Fix the tube with

tape and put the
container properly.
3 Click Interior Pump P04 Rotation Speed Calibration button to calibrate the pump.
The sample probe moves to above front track. The "Place container" dialog window
pops up. Place the open container under the sample probe and click OK . The
sample starts dispensing and meanwhile the system starts rotation speed
calibration for 5 times, calculate the average speed and display it. About 400ml
liquid is discharge during this process. Pay attention to prevent overflowing.

15 Alignment
4 Place one open container under the bracket of the substrate pump. Unplug the
sample well exterior wash tube and place it into the container (If necessary, fix it
with tape.) About 500ml liquid is discharge during this process. Pay attention to
prevent overflowing.
5 Click Exterior Pump P05 Rotation Speed Calibration button. The sample starts
dispensing and meanwhile the system starts rotation speed calibration for 5 times,
calculate the average speed and display it.
6 Record the average speed.
7 Click OK and exit the window.
8 Connect the exterior wash tube with wash well connector tightly and fix it with
tying band3X100.
9 Enter the sample probe unit alignment screen and click Sample Probe Mechanical
Reset to move the sample probe above the wash well.
15.13.12 Sample Probe Wash Pressure Test

Alignment index:
The max wash pressure of the sample probe should be within 120~300KPa.
Click 4 Probe Wash Pressure Test and the software performs the test automatically. The
max wash pressure of the sample probe will be displayed, which should meet the
alignment requirement.
15.13.13 Substrate Prime

Alignment index:
Clean tubes with ultra-pure water and prime them with substrate to remove air bubbles.
Precautions:
This alignment should be done after the substrate Dispense Volume test is
completed.
Avoid contaminating the substrate spike and probes ,otherwise use the acid wash
solution or ultra-pure water to clean them.
When no contamination and leakage occur, the substrate bottle can be used
repeatedly. Use the seal bag to pack it when keeping them.
1 Add at least 60 ml ultra-pure water into the two ultra-pure water bottles. Do not
tighten the cap.
2 Prepare two substrate bottles and 1 waste tank.
4 Click 5 substrate prime button and the Warning pops up. Select OK to go to the next
step.
5 Follow the software prompts and steps and refer to 15.13.10 and use the
ultra-pure water to wash substrate tube 1 and 2 and then drain the waste. Finally
use the substrate to prime according to the set cycle. Loosen the substrate bottle
and check if there are air bubbles in the substrate pump.
6 After alignment, install back the substrate probe. Keep the substrate bottles on the
spikes for the next tests.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.98 No air bubbles in the substrate pump
No air bubble in
the substrate
pump
15.13.14 Back Aspirate Air for Substrate

Alignment index:
The substrate is aspirated just to the right edge of the air bubble detection optical
coupler.(For easy observation, 8 is deducted by the software during alignment)
Precautions:
The alignment of this step can only be done after Substrate Prime is completed.
1 Prepare several cuvettes.
2 Check if the substrate dispensing probes and aspirating probes are properly
installed and two bottles of substrate are on the spikes.
3 Place two waste containers. Prepare 20 cuvettes. If there is preheating shield,
remove the shield.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.99 Load waste container
Waste
container
Figure 15.100 Substrate preheating shield
Preheating shield
Figure 15.101 suck-back substrate aligning with the right side of the bubble detection
optical coupler
The liquid level in the tube is even with
cable connector the right side of the bubble detection
position optical coupler.
all cables including The cable is placed under the

connectors and tubes are sensor and should not interfere
placed in the slot and then with the substrate tube.
cover the shield
4 Select 6 Back Aspirate Air for Substrate button. Click Continue and the window "Is
Substrate Prime finished? " pops up. Select OK and the system is reset. Use the
tweezers to place 1 cuvette in the dispersion carousel and select OK. After substrate
prime and air back aspiration has been completed, move to the next step.

15 Alignment
5 Observe the position after the substrate is aspirated back to the transparent tube of
the preheating device. The liquid contacting with the air should be align with the
right side of the bubble detection optical coupler. If the air is aspirated too much,
use the down arrow to adjust the position to the right. If the air is aspirated too
little, use the Up arrow to adjust the position to the left. Follow the software
prompts to perform the test with the cuvette. every three times prime, the system
prompts to discard the cuvette.
6 When the air aspirated back meets the requirement, click Continue to discard the
cuvette and move to the next step.
7 Sort the tubes and cables and insert them into the slot and cover the shield
042-005075-00 and use 4 M3X cross countersunk head screws M04-005005--- to
fix it.
8 Leave the two bottles in the positions for the following test.

15 Alignment
15.14 Sensor Calibration

Enter Utility>Maintenance>1 Maintenance>Maintenance command>Sensor
calibration
Figure 15.102 Sensor Calibration
15.14.2 Weighing sensor calibration

Alignment index:
Leave the wash buffer position vacant. The system automatically calibrate the weighing
sensor.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.103 Weighing sensor calibration
1 Take out the two wash buffer tanks and Leave the wash buffer tank positions
vacant.
2 Select weighing sensor calibration to enter calibration screen. Select Wash buffer 1
weighing sensor calibration or Wash buffer 2 weighing sensor calibration. The
software prompts you to take out the corresponding wash buffer tank. Select
Continue and wait for 30S, the system starts to calibrate the weighing sensors
automatically and displays the calibration results.
3 Record the results in your alignment record.
4 Select Done to return to the sensor calibration screen.
15.14.3 Substrate Aspirating/dispensing Coupler Calibration

Alignment index:
Take out the substrate Aspirating/dispensing probes and the system calibrates the
substrate Aspirating/dispensing couplers automatically.
2 Ensure there is 60 ml substrate in the substrate bottles and loosen the cap of the
bottles.
3 Select Auto Adjustment of Substrate Aspirating and Dispensing Coupler Calibration
button and check if the substrate probes are placed in the waste container. Then
select Continue to enter calibration screen. Select Substrate Dispensing Coupler
Calibration and Substrate Aspirating Coupler Calibration. Click start. The system
starts to calibrate the Substrate Aspirating/dispensing Coupler and displays the
calibration results.

15 Alignment
15.14.4 Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler Calibration

Alignment index:
Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler is automatically calibrated.
1 Make sure the wash buffer inventory in buffer tank is less than2/3 tank.
2 Select Auto Adjustment of Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler Calibration and
make sure wash buffer inventory in buffer tank is less than2/3 tank. Select continue
and select Start. Wait for 15 seconds and the system starts to calibrate the wash
Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler and displays the calibration results.
5 Select exit to return to maintenance command screen. Select exit. The system is
reset and returns to Utility-maintenance screen.
15.14.5 Weighing sensor calibration

Alignment index:
After the calibration, use the empty and full tank to check the empty and full status.
1 Prepare two tanks . One weighs 0.6~0.8kg as the empty tank; the other weighs
3.5~4.0 kg as the full tank.
2 Leave the two wash buffer positions vacant and their corresponding indicators are
flashing.
3 Place the full tank in the wash buffer 2 position and place the empty tank in the
wash buffer 1 position. Wait for 5 seconds, the indicator of wash buffer 1 is flashing
and the indicator of wash buffer 2 is on constantly.
4 Exchange the position of the empty tank and full tank. Wait for 5 seconds. The
indicator of wash buffer 2 is flashing and the indicator of wash buffer 1 is on
constantly.
5 Remove the two tanks and install back the wash buffer 1 and 2.

15 Alignment
15.15 Temperature Control Unit

15.15.1 The alignment screen of the temperature control unit
1 Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Temperature control unit.
Figure 15.104 Temperature Control Unit
15.15.2 Carousel Temperature Test

Alignment index:
When ambient temperature is within 15-30, test the temperature of the reaction
carousel and dispersion carousel.
Precautions:
Before perform this alignment, the heater for the reaction carousel and dispersion
carousel should be turn on for about 90 minutes.
1 Select 3 Carousel temperature curve button.
2 Enter temperature control unit alignment screen. Select observe temperature curve.
Select Start and observe the two temperature curve for at least 1 minute. The curves
should be stably horizontal and have no obvious bias.
3 If the temperature curves have obvious bias, do not move to the next step and wait
for the temperature become stable.
15.15.3 Substrate Preheat Temperature Curve

Alignment index:
The substrate preheating temperature curve is within 370.3.
Precautions:

15 Alignment
Check if there is cuvette in the dispersion carousel before alignment so as to avoid

collision.
At most 28 cuvettes can be placed in the dispersion carousel at the same time.
Figure 15.105 Substrate Preheat Temperature Alignment
1 Enter Utility-maintenance-discard cuvette. The system discard the cuvettes in the

reaction carousel and dispersion carousel automatically, It takes about 6 minutes.
2 Select 5 Substrate Preheat Temperature Alignment to enter the alignment screen.
3 Select substrate preheat heater and select turn on button.
4 Select Sensor Temp Curve and click start on the lower left corner. View the substrate
preheat curve. It should rise steadily to 370.3.
5 After checking the substrate preheat temperature, select stop to stop temperature
collection and click Cancel to exit the screen.
15.15.4 Reagent refrigeration

Alignment index:
The current of the all coolers should be within 2.0A~6.5A.
1 Select 4 Reagent refrigeration to enter the alignment screen.
2 Select refrigeration on the upper left corner to turn on the coolers and view the
current of the four coolers. They should be within2.0A~6.5A.
3 Select the start button on the lower left and temperature curve is drawn. The
refrigeration temperature curve is steadily descending.
4 Check the Refrig on temp and Refrig off temp on the upper right corner of the
screen. The Refrig on temp is 7 and Refrig off temp is 5.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.106 Reagent Refrigeration Temperature Curve
5 After checking the reagent refrigeration temperature, select stop to stop

temperature collection and click Cancel to exit the screen. Leave the coolers turned
on.
15.15.5 Fan Status Query

Alignment index:
The status of all fans is normal.
Select 6 Fan Status Query and the window pops up. The status of all fans are displayed as
normal. If jammed or abnormal is displayed, check the installation of the fan.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.107 Fan Status Query

15 Alignment
15.16 Special Wash Sample Probe position

15.16.1 Sample Probe Special Wash Horizontal Position
Alignment index:
Sample probe can target at the center of the mouth of the reagent bottle for special wash.
1 Select Utility>Maintenance>Alignment>Sample Probe Unit. Select 6 Sample
Probe Special Wash Horizontal Position. Follow the software prompts and steps to
make the sample probe align with the center of the mouth of the reagent bottle for
special wash.
2 Follow the software prompts and steps to finish the alignment and return to sample
probe unit.
Figure 15.108 Sample Probe Special Wash Horizontal Position
Reagent bottle is placed in the

reagent position and the reagent
probe aligns with the center of
the reagent bottle.
15.16.2 Sample Probe Special Wash Vertical Extreme Position

Alignment index:
The sample probe is inserted into the bottom of the reagent bottle and is pushed up. Use
the feeler to measure the clearance between the probe flange and arm base and it is
0.6-0.8mm. The distance from the probe tip to the reagent bottle bottom for special wash
is 2 mm.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.109 Vertical Extreme Special Wash Position
When the probe

reaches the bottle
bottom, use the
feeler to measure
the clearance
between the flange
and the arm base
and it should be
0.6-0.8mm.
Select 7 Sample Probe Special Wash Vertical Extreme Position and follow the software
prompts and steps to make the sample probe contact the reagent bottle bottom and be
pushed up. Use the feeler to measure the clearance between the probe flange and arm
base and it should be 0.6-0.8mm. When the sample probe nearly reaches to the bottom
of the reagent bottle. Adjust the micro steps smaller to avoid bumping the probe.

15 Alignment
15.17 Rack supply unit alignment screen

Select Utility>maintenance>system alignment>rack supply unit. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.110 Rack supply unit alignment screen
Note: Do not place the sample racks in the rack supply unit except for necessary,
otherwise jamming and software alarm may occur. When loading the sample rack, the
sample rack scanning window faces the front of the analyzer. The requirement should be
met when other units of the instrument are aligned.
15.17.2 Offset of Position Switch for Rack Supply Push-In Part

Alignment index:
When the push-in part of the rack supply unit presses the position switch and stops,
the clearance between the sample rack and the support plate of the rack supply unit is
3~3.5mm.
Alignment methods and steps :
1 Select 1 the offset of the push-in part of the rack supply unit pressing the position
switch. Access the alignment process.
2 Place two sample racks(no more or no less) in the rack supply area and select
continue.
3 When the push-in part of the rack supply unit pushes the sample rack in and the
and presses the position switch. Use the thicker end of the fixture(BA80-J98) to
measure the clearance between the rack and two sides of the rack supply unit
supporting plate, and check if the gap is 3-3.5mm. i.e. 3mm can be inserted while
3.5 cannot. If the clearance does not meet the requirements, restart the alignment.
4 Realign and confirm the clearance and then exit from the screen. The alignment is
complete.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.111 Measure the clearance between the sample rack and the supporting
plate.
3mm
alignment tool
can pass while
3.5mm cannot.
15.17.3 Sample Center and Scanning Position

Alignment index:
The screen displays scanning curve of the sample rack breach and can calculate
the center position of the breach. i.e. No.1 sample container has or hasn't Sample
Check Central Value (s)
The scanning light falls completely in the light slot of the bar code scanner position
adjustment fixture BA80-J44.
1 Select 2 Sample Center and Scanning Position to enter the alignment screen.
2 Place an empty rack without adapter in the rack supply unit
Figure 15.112 The sample rack when the system is detecting sample container's
position
No spring plate and

adapter is installed
on the sample rack.
3 Select continue. The unit stats scanning the bar code and draw the waveform. The
software calculates the correct parameters and configure them. Remove the empty
rack.
4 Place three sample racks with adapter on the support plate of the rack supply
unit .Place the bar code scanner position adjustment fixture BA80-J44 on the first
sample rack. Put the light slot of scanner right above the first sample position; do
not place anything on the second sample rack. Place 10 tubes labeled with the bar
code on the third sample rack.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.113 The three sample racks used to test bar code scanning
The light
slot is
located in
the first
sample
position.
Stick the bar code

on all the 10
tubes.
5 Select Continue. After the scanning push-in part pushes the first sample rack to the
bar code scanning position, adjust the position of the sample rack according to the
arrow on the screen and ensure that the scanning light falls into the crevice of the
fixture.(Sample rack should contact closely with push lever of the scanning push-in
part. ) If the scanning light is skew, adjust the four screws on the scanner and
bracket. After the light is readjusted, you must screw up the four screws.
Figure 15.114 Adjust bar code scanning position
The scanning
light falls
completely into
the light slot.
6 Remove the first sample rack. Place the BA80-J44fixture in the same position on the
second sample rack. Check the position of bar code reader. If the scanning light is
not proper, use the arrow on the screen to adjust it. Sample rack should contact
closely with push lever of the scanning push-in part.
7 Remove the second sample rack, the bar code reader scans the bar code of the
sample rack and sample. Compare the displayed results on the screen with the bar
code on the sample rack and tube. Compare one by one to ensure they are correct.
8 The alignment is complete. Select Exit to close the window.
15.17.4 Half Protrusion of STAT Push-Back Part

Alignment index:
After the scanning push-in part pushes away the first sample rack, the space between the
protruding STAT push-back part and the sample rack is0.30.3mm.
1 Select 4 STAT Push-Back Part Half Protrude for Rack Supply Push-In Part and enter
the alignment procedure.

15 Alignment
2 Place more than three sample racks on the support plate of the rack supply unit.
Click continue.
3 When the scanning push-in part pushes away the first sample rack, the STAT
push-back part protrudes. Use a clearance gage of 0.3mm to measure the clearance
between the STAT push-back part and the sample rack. If the clearance is not proper,
use the arrow on the screen to adjust it.
Figure 15.115 Measure the clearance between the sample rack and the STAT push-back
part
0.3mm feeler can

just pass through.
complete.
15.17.5 Scanning Push-In Part Moving to Utmost End

Alignment index:
When the scanning push-in part pusher pushes the sample rack into the rerun buffer
area and the fixture tightly contacts the side wall of the entrance, the fixture of 0.8mm
thickness can pass through while the fixture of 1.3mm cannot.
1 Select 5 scanning push-in part moving to utmost end. Enter the alignment
procedure.
2 Place a sample rack and click continue. When the scanning push-in pushes the
sample rack to the rerun buffer unit, push the sample rack back to contact the push
lever. Put the thin end of the fixture BA80-J98 for aligning the sample rack's side
clearance into the clearance between the sample rack and the side wall of the
entrance of the rerun buffer unit.
Figure 15.116 Test of the Scanning push-in part moving for the maximum distance
Sample rack
contacts with
The pusher
alignment
tool contacts
with the side
wall. 0.8mm
alignment
tool can pass
while1.3mm

15 Alignment
3 When the fixture tightly contacts the side wall of the entrance, the fixture of 0.8mm
thickness can pass through while the fixture of 1.3mm cannot. If the fixture of both
thickness cannot pass through, it indicates that the stroke length of the push lever is
too small. Push forward the push lever by using the arrows on the screen. If the
fixture of both the thickness can pass through, it indicates that the stroke length is
too big. Push back the push lever by using the arrows on the screen, meanwhile
push back the sample rack manually to contact the push lever of the scanning
push-in part and then perform the measurement.
complete.
15.17.6 Scanning Push-Out Part Target Pos Adjustment

Alignment index:
Make sure the push-out part pushes the sample rack to the front track.
Select 6 scanning push-out part target position adjustment. Click continue and complete

15 Alignment
15.18 The rack retrieval unit.

15.18.1 Rack supply unit alignment screen
Select Utility>maintenance>system alignment>rack retrieval unit. The window is
as shown below.
Figure 15.117 Rack supply unit alignment screen
15.18.2 Grid Aligning with Scanning Channel

Alignment index:
The fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track from the scanning lane can be
pushed smoothly into the rerun buffer unit.
Figure 15.118 Grid aligning with the scanning lane test
The alignment tool can

be pushed into the grid
from right to left.

15 Alignment
1 Select 1 the offset of grid aligning with scanning lane. Enter the alignment
procedure.
2 Push the fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track from the scanning
lane into the rerun buffer unit. Visually check whether the clearance between the
front end of the fixture and two sides of the grid is even.
3 If the clearance is not even, use the arrow on the screen to adjust the front and rear
position of the grid. Before the adjustment, remove the fixture. After the adjustment,
install the fixture to confirm the position.
4 Repeat above mentioned operations for four times according to the software
prompts. Each time the fixture must be in the middle of the grid.
5 When going over all the alignment steps, check if the clearance is correct. Exit from
the screen . If not, repeat the alignment steps.
15.18.3 Grid Aligning with Return Lane

Alignment index:
The fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track from the rerun buffer lane can
be pushed smoothly into the return lane.
1 Select 2 Grid Aligning with Return Lane. Enter the alignment procedure.
2 Push the fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track from the return lane
into the rerun buffer unit. Visually check whether the clearance between the front
end of the fixture and two sides of the grid is even.
Figure 15.119 Grid aligning with the return lane test
The alignment tool

can be pushed into
the grid from left to
right and the
clearance on the
two sides is even.
4 Repeat above mentioned operations for four times. Each time the fixture must be in
the middle of the grid.
15.18.4 Grid Aligning with Retrieval Channel

Alignment index:
The fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track from the rerun buffer lane can
be pushed smoothly into the retrieval lane.

15 Alignment

1 Select 4 Grid Aligning with Retrieval Channel. Enter the alignment procedure.
2 Push the fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track from the retrieval
lane into the rerun buffer unit. Visually check whether the clearance between the
front end of the fixture and two sides of the grid is even.
Figure 15.120 Grid aligning with the retrieval lane test
The alignment
tool can be
pushed into the
grid from left to
right and the
clearance on the
two sides is even.
4 Repeat above mentioned operations for four times. Each time the fixture must be in
the middle of the grid.
15.18.5 Offset of Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Rack Storage Unit

Alignment index:
After the retrieval push-in part pushes the sample rack to the entrance of the rack
storage unit, the clearance between the sample rack and the two sides of the support
plate of the rack storage unit is greater than 1.3mm.
1 Select 4 the offset of the retrieval push-in part pushing the sample rack to the
entrance of the rack storage unit.
2 Place a sample rack on the exit of the rerun buffer unit and click continue. When the
retrieval push-in pushes the sample rack to the entrance of the rack storage unit,
push the sample rack back to contact the push lever. Put the thin end of the fixture
BA80-J98 for aligning the sample rack's side clearance into the clearance between
the sample rack and the two sides of the support plate of the rack storage unit.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.121 Measure the clearance between the sample rack and the two sides of the
rack storage unit
Sample rack
contacts with
pusher
3 The fixture of 1.3 mm thickness can pass through the two ends of the clearance
between the sample rack and the two sides of the support plate. If it cannot pass
through one end of the clearance, it indicates that the position of the push lever is
not proper. Use the arrows on the screen to adjust it.
complete.
15.18.6 Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Rack Supply Unit

Alignment index:
After the retrieval push-in part pushes the sample rack to the entrance of the rack supply
unit, the clearance between the sample rack and the support plate of the rack supply
unit is 0.8-1.3mm.
1 Select 5 Retrieval Push-In Part Moving to Rack Supply Unit and enter the alignment
procedure.
2 Place a sample rack on the exit of the rerun buffer unit and click continue. When the
retrieval push-in pushes the sample rack to the entrance of the rack storage unit,
push the sample rack back to contact the push lever. Put the thin end of the fixture
BA80-J98 for aligning the sample rack's side clearance into the clearance between
the sample rack and the right conducting bar of the support plate in the rack supply
unit.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.122 Test of the Retrieval Push-In Part moving for the maximum distance
When the
alignment tool
contacts tightly
with the guide rail,
0.8mm alignment
tool can pass while
1.3mm cannot.
3 The fixture of 0.8mm thickness can pass through while the fixture of 1.3mm cannot.
If the fixture of both thickness can pass through, it indicates that the stroke length
of the push lever is too small. Push forward the push lever by using the arrows on
the screen. If the fixture of both the thickness cannot pass through, it indicates
that the stroke length is too big. Push back the push lever by using the arrows on
the screen.
complete.

15 Alignment
15.19 The normal lane

15.19.1 the alignment screen of the normal lane
Select Utility>maintenance>system alignment>normal lane. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.123 the alignment screen of the normal lane
Note: The alignment method of Stopper Part at Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 2 , Stopper
Part at Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 1 and Post-Aspiration Stopper are same. Here take
the alignment method of Stopper Part at Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 2 as an example.
15.19.2 Stop Position of Stopper Part at Sample Aspirate Buffer Part 2

Alignment index:
The fixture contact closely with the stopper track. The stop lever of the aspirate buffer
stopper assembly can pass through the front face of the fixture and cannot pass the
stage.
1 Select 1 buffer 2 stopper station moving to end position offset test
2 Access the alignment screen and reset the stopper station. Then make the stop lever
protrude and use the fixture BA80-J64 to measure its protruding length. Make sure
the fixture contact closely with the side wall of the lane.
3 The front end of the fixture can pass while the rear end cannot. If both ends can
pass, it indicates that the protruding length of the stop lever is too small. Increase
the parameter and retest the length. If both ends cannot pass through, it means the
protruding length of the stop lever is too big, Reduce the parameter and retest the
length.

15 Alignment
complete.
Figure 15.124 Adjustment of the stop lever's protruding length
The fixture
contact closely
with the
stopper track.
The stop lever
can pass
through the
front face of
the fixture and
cannot pass
the stage.
15.19.3 Positioning Station Moving to Aspirate Point

Alignment index:
When the aspirate positioning station positions the sample rack in the routine lane to
the #1 sample position, rotate the sample probe manually to reach the center hole of the
sample position adjustment fixture BA80-J12.
1 Select 3 Positioning Station Moving to Aspirate Point and enter the alignment
procedure.
2 Install the sample position adjustment fixture in the #1 sample position on the
sample rack and place it on the right of the transfer lane.
3 Select continue. When the sample rack moves to the #1aspirate position in the
routine lane. Rotate the sample probe manually to the position above the routine
lane. Ensure that the sample probe can pass through the center hole of the fixture. If
it cannot, select the adjustment step and click the left and right arrow to adjust
the#1 sample position and make the sample rack contact with the positioning
station until it meets the requirement.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.125 Aspirate positioning test of the routine lane

The sample probe Use the oil pen to mark two spot
passes through the aligning with the two sides of the open
center hole of the slot of the 1# sample rack on the
alignment tool. sheet metal of the lane.
If Positioning Station Moving to

Aspirate Point failed, adjust the
mechanical position of the
aspirate positioning station.
4 Use the oil pen to mark two spot aligning with the two sides of the open slot of the
1# sample rack on the sheet metal of the lane.
5 Readjust the position and recheck whether the sample probe can pass through the
center hole of the fixture of #1 sample position. Complete the alignment and exit
from the screen.
15.19.4 Sample Probe Rotary to Normal Lane

Alignment index:
When the aspirate positioning station positions the sample rack in the routine lane to
the #1 sample position, the tip of the sample probe can enter the center hole of the
1 Select 4 sample probe entering the routine lane aspirate horizontal position test.
Enter the alignment procedure.
2 Install the sample position adjustment fixture BA80-J12 in the #1 position of the
sample rack and place it on the right side of the routine lane. The aspirate
positioning station positions the rack to the #1 sample position.
3 Click continue. The sample probe rotates to the position above the routine lane. Use
the left and right arrow on the screen to adjust the sample probe's circumferential
position. Make sure the probe tip can enter the sample position adjustment fixture.
In order to align with the center hole of the fixture, click the down arrow to lower
the sample probe to the position above the fixture.
from the screen.

15 Alignment
15.20 Passing_return unit alignment

15.20.1 the alignment screen of the normal lane
Select Utility>maintenance>system alignment>passing_return. The window is as
shown below.
Figure 15.126 the alignment screen of the normal lane
15.20.2 Positioning Station Moving to passing-return lane

Alignment index:
When the aspirate positioning station positions the sample rack in the passing lane to
the #1 sample position, rotate the sample probe manually to reach the center hole of the
1 Select 1 Passing&Return Lane Aspirate Positioning Station Offset Alignment and
enter the alignment procedure.
2 Install the sample position adjustment fixture in the #1 sample position on the
sample rack and place it on the right of the transfer lane.
3 Select continue. When the sample rack moves to the #1aspirate position in the
passing lane. Rotate the sample probe manually to the position above the passing
lane. Ensure that the sample probe can pass through the center hole of the fixture. If
it cannot, select the adjustment step and click the left and right arrow to adjust
the#1 sample position and make the sample rack contact with the positioning
station until it meets the requirement.
4 Use the oil pen to mark two spot aligning with the two sides of the open slot of the
1# sample rack on the sheet metal of the lane.

15 Alignment
from the screen.
Figure 15.127 Aspirate positioning test of the passing lane
If Positioning Station The sample probe

Moving to Aspirate Point passes through the
failed, adjust the center hole of the
mechanical position of the alignment tool.
station.
Use the oil pen to mark two spot

aligning with the two sides of the
open slot of the 1# sample rack on
the sheet metal of the lane.
15.20.3 Sample Probe Rotary to Passing Lane

Alignment index:
When the aspirate positioning station positions the sample rack in the passing lane to
the #1 sample position, the tip of the sample probe can enter the center hole of the
1 Select 2 sample probe rotating to aspirate position of the transfer lane test. Enter
2 Install the sample position adjustment fixture BA80-J12 in the #1 position of the
sample rack and place it on the right side of the passing lane. The aspirate
positioning station positions the rack to the #1 sample position.
3 Click continue. The sample probe rotates to the position above the passing lane. Use
the left and right arrow on the screen to adjust the sample probe's circumferential
position. Make sure the probe tip can enter the sample position adjustment fixture.
In order to align with the center hole of the fixture, click the down arrow to lower
the sample probe to the position above the fixture.
from the screen.
15.20.4 Offset of Lane Change Stopper Station Moving to End Position

Alignment index:
The stop lever of the Lane Change Stopper station can pass through the front face of the
fixture BA80-J64 and cannot pass the stage.

15 Alignment
1 Select 3 lane change stopper station moving to end position offset test. Enter the
2 Access the alignment screen and reset the stopper station. Then make the stop lever
protrude and use the fixture BA80-J64 to measure its protruding length. Make sure
the fixture contact closely with the side wall of the lane.
3 The front end of the fixture can pass while the rear end cannot. If both ends can
pass, it indicates that the protruding length of the stop lever is too small. Increase
the parameter and retest the length. If both ends cannot pass through, it means the
protruding length of the stop lever is too big, Reduce the parameter and retest the
length.
Figure 15.128 Lane change stopper station protruding length test
The fixture
contact closely
with the
stopper track.
The stop lever
can pass
through the
front face of
the fixture and
cannot pass
the stage. 4 Realign and confirm the clearance and then exit from the screen. The alignment is
complete.
15.20.5 Offset of Return Push-Out Part Moving to End Position

Alignment index:
When the return push-out part pushes the sample rack to the rerun buffer unit, the
clearance between the sample rack and side wall of the rack buffer unit should be
0.8mm-1.3mm.
Alignment steps
1 Select 4 Return push-out part moving to end position offset test. Enter the
2 Place a sample rack in the entrance of the return lane. Click continue. The return
push-out part pushes the sample rack to the rerun buffer unit. Push the sample rack
back until it contacts the push lever. Place the thin end of the sample rack side
clearance adjustment fixture BA80-J98 into the clearance between the sample rack
and the side of the rerun buffer unit.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.129 Test of the return push-out part moving for the maximum distance
The alignment
tool contacts
with the side
wall. 0.8mm
alignment tool
can pass
while1.3mm
cannot.
3 The fixture of 0.8mm thickness can pass through while the fixture of 1.3mm cannot.
If the fixture of both thickness can pass through, it indicates that the stroke length
of the push lever is too small. Push forward the push lever by using the arrows on
the screen. If the fixture of both the thickness cannot pass through, it indicates
that the stroke length is too big. Push back the push lever by using the arrows on
the screen.
complete.
15.20.6 Lane change part aligning with transfer lane

Alignment index:
When Lane change part aligns with transfer lane, the fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the
front transfer track can pass through the passing lane and the lane change part smoothly.
Alignment steps
1 Select 5 lane change part moving to home position offset test. Enter the alignment
procedure.
2 After the non-normal lane positioning station moves to the dodging position, the
stop plate stops the pusher dog outside of the lane. If the requirement is not
met, adjust the stop plate to make the push dog just outside of the lane. Restart the
alignment procedure and check the position again.
Figure 15.130 aspirate positioning dodging position
In the dodging position, the pusher dog

In the dodging position, the pusher dog should
should not exceed the inner side of the track
not exceed the inner side of the track and
and exceeding just the outer side of the track
exceeding just the outer side of the track is best.
is best.

15 Alignment
3 Visually check if the lane change pull block aligns with the tracks on the two sides of
the transfer lane. If there is obvious deviation, use the arrows on the screen to
adjust the pull block to align with the tracks on the two sides of the transfer lane.
Figure 15.131 Lane change part aligning with transfer lane
4 Place the fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front tracks on the lane change part in
the passing lane. Check if the clearance between the fixture and the pull block is
even. If not, use the arrows on the screen to adjust the front and rear position of the
pull block. Note: before adjusting the position, remove the fixture first. When the
position is readjusted, install the fixture on the track.
5 Readjust and confirm the pull block aligns with the tracks in the passing lane. After
the alignment is complete, exit from the screen.
15.20.7 Lane change part aligning with normal lane

Alignment index:
When Lane change part moves from the home position to the routine lane, the fixture
BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track can pass through the routine lane and the
lane change part smoothly.
Alignment steps
1 Select 6 Lane Change Part Moving from Passing Lane to Normal Lane. Enter the
2 After the lane change pull block moves to the routine lane, visually check if the
lane change pull block aligns with the tracks on the two sides of the routine lane. If
there is obvious deviation, use the arrows on the screen to adjust the pull block to
align with the tracks on the two sides of the normal lane.

15 Alignment
Figure 15.132 Lane change part aligning with normal lane
the routine lane. Check if the clearance between the fixture and the pull block is
4 Readjust and confirm the pull block aligns with the tracks in the routine lane. After
15.20.8 Lane Change from Return Lane to Normal Lane

Alignment index:
When Lane change part moves from the return lane to the routine lane, the fixture
BA80-J65 for aligning the front transfer track can pass through the routine lane and the
lane change part smoothly.
Alignment steps
1 Select 7 lane change part moving from return Lane to normal lane. Enter the
2 The lane change pull block moves from its home position to the return lane and
then move to the routine lane. Visually check if the lane change pull block aligns
with the tracks on the two sides of the routine lane. If there is obvious deviation,
use the arrows on the screen to adjust the pull block to align with the tracks on the
two sides of the routine lane.
the routine lane. Check if the clearance between the fixture and the pull block is
4 Readjust and confirm the pull block aligns with the tracks in the routine lane. After
15.20.9 Lane Change Part Aligning with Return Lane

Alignment index:
When Lane change part is in the return lane, the fixture BA80-J65 for aligning the front
transfer track can pass through the return lane and the lane change part smoothly.
Alignment steps

15 Alignment
1 Select 8 Lane Change Align with Return Lane. Enter the alignment procedure.
2 The lane change pull block moves from its home position to the return lane. Visually
check if the lane change pull block aligns with the tracks on the two sides of the
return lane. If there is obvious deviation, use the arrows on the screen to adjust
the pull block to align with the tracks on the two sides of the return lane.
the return lane. Check if the clearance between the fixture and the pull block is even.
If not, use the arrows on the screen to adjust the front and rear position of the pull
block. Note: before adjusting the position, remove the fixture first. When the
4 Readjust and confirm the pull block aligns with the tracks in the return lane. After
Figure 15.133 Lane Change Part Aligning with Return Lane

16 Maintenance
This chapter introduces the methods of maintenance of the whole unit, in order to
instruct the service engineers to perform maintenance. Please follow the maintenance
schedule and the maintenance order.

16 Maintenance
16.1 Material and tools

Prepare the related material and tools before maintenance.
Material and tools prepared by service personnel
No. Item Maintenance Prepared by
1 Tool Position check and Service personnel
alignment
2 Probe check tool Check the sample/reagent Service personnel
probe
3 cylinder Probe interior and exterior Service personnel
flow test
4 Tool kit Dismantle the analyzer Service personnel
5 6 months/1 year Perform 6 months/1 year View the material list and
maintenance kit maintenance apply according to the part
no.
6 System Check Perform quarter1/ View the material list and
solution quarter3 maintenance apply according to the part
no.
7 High speed grease Perform quarter 2/ Apply according to
lubricant quarter4 maintenance 099-000104-00
8 acid wash solution Change the substrate View the material list and
spike(quarter 4 apply according to the part
maintenance item) no.
Material and tools prepared by the user

No. Item Maintenance Prepared by
1 Clean gauze Check the syringe and wipe the rotor, the user
exterior of the sample/reagent probe
and dispersion dispensing and
aspirating probe
2 Cotton swabs Clean wash well, reagent the user
compartment and vortexer
3 Suction cleaner Cleaning the fans and dust screens the user
4 Hair brush Clean Dust Screens the user
5 Thread syringe Unclogging the sample probe and the user
reagent probes
6 Beaker Cleaning the needle and unclogging the user
device
7 Ethanol Clean probe and dispersion unit the user
8 Fiber-free gloves Wipe the sample/reagent probe and the user
exterior of the dispersion
aspirating/dispensing probes
9 Screen and Cleaning the touchscreen and the user
keyboard wash keyboard
solution

16 Maintenance
10 Round-head Unclogging the probes Accessory kit

needle
11 Unclogging device Unclogging device of the sample Accessory kit
probe/reagent probe

16 Maintenance
16.2 Maintenance items

No Type Requirement Item Frequency When to do
.
1 Check Service Check Daily Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use sample/reagent Maintenanc 4
r syringes e
2 Check Service Check Daily Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use Sample/Reagent Maintenanc 4
r Probes e
3 Check Service Daily Clean Daily Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use Maintenanc 4
r e
4 Check Service Check Waste Daily Quarter1/2/3/
r e
5 Check Service Check consumable Daily Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use status Maintenanc 4
r e
6 Execute Service Effect Check Daily Quarter1/2/3/
r e
7 Clean Service Clean Daily Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use Sample/Reagent Maintenanc 4
r Probes Exterior e
8 Clean Service Clean Vortexer Hole Weekly Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use maintenanc 4
r e
9 Replace Service Replace/Clean Weekly Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use Aspirate Probes maintenanc 4
r e
10 Clean Service Wipe Dispense Monthly Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use Probes/Tubes maintenanc 4
r e
11 Clean Service Clean Dust Screens Monthly Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use maintenanc 4
r e
12 Execute Service Run System Monthly Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use Diagnosis maintenanc 4
r e
13 Execute Service Sensor Calibration Three-mont Quarter1/2/3/
personnel/use h 4
r maintenanc
e
14 Clean Service Clean wash buffer Three-mont Quarter1/2/3/
personnel drawer h 4
maintenanc
e

16 Maintenance
No Type Requirement Item Frequency When to do

.
15 Check Service Check the Three-mont Quarter1/2/3/
personnel sample/reagent h 4
probe maintenanc
e
16 Check Service Inlet Pump check Three-mont Quarter1/3
personnel h
maintenanc
e
17 Clean Service Clean the cap of the Three-mont Quarter1/2/3/
personnel wash buffer tank h 4
maintenanc
e
18 Clean Service Clean the finger of Three-mont Quarter1/2/3/
personnel the gripper h 4
maintenanc
e
19 Check Service Check overflowing of Six-Month Quarter2/4
personnel the dispersion
carousel
20 Execute Service X axis linear guide Six-Month Quarter2/4
personnel rail lubrication
21 Replace Service Inlet Pump Tubing Six-Month Quarter2/4
personnel maintenance
22 Replace Service Dispersion aspirate Six-Month Quarter2/4
personnel pump tubes
maintenance
23 Clean Service Clean Cooling Fans Yearly Quarter 4
personnel and Radiators
24 Execute Service Air pump check Yearly Quarter 4
personnel
25 Check Service Probe interior and Yearly Quarter 4
personnel exterior flow test
26 Replace Service Replace Substrate Yearly Quarter 4
personnel Spike
27 Replace Service Change the spring of Yearly Quarter 4
personnel the gripper
28 Statistics of Yearly Quarter 4
Component Service
Life

16 Maintenance
16.3 Maintenance order

There are 28 maintenance items for CL-2000i performed by service personnel. The
following figure shows the best maintenance order:
If some maintenance items do not belong to the maintenance frequency, skip them.
1 Follow the following order to perform the first 23 items.
Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter4

1.Clean wash 2.Cleanwash buffer 4.Change gripper
3.Check sample probe
buffer drawer tank cap spring
Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter 2/4 Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter1/2/3/4

7.Check
5.clean gripper 6.X axis guide rail sample/reagent 8.Clean dust screen
finger lubrication syringe
Quarter 2/4 Quarter 2/4 Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter4

9.Dispersion 10.Inlet pump 12.Clean fans and
11.Inlet pump check
aspirating pump maintenance radiators
Quarter2//4
Quarter 4 Quarter4 Quarter1/2/3/4
13.Check vacuum 14.Check the 15.Change substrate 16.Check
pump overflow of the spikes consumables
dispersion carousel
Quarter1/2/3/4
Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter4 Quarter1/2/3/4
17.Clean the exterior 18.Check
sample/reagent 19.Probe interior and
of the sample/reagent 20.Clean vortexer hole
probe exterior flow test
probe
Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter1/2/3/4 Quarter1/2/3/4

21.Replace/Clean 22.Wipe Dispense
23.Sensor calibration
Aspirate Probes Probes/Tubes
2 After performing the 23rd item, prime the analyzer with wash buffer. Enter the
alignment screen and execute 7 Wash Buffer Prime.

16 Maintenance
3 Follow the following order to perform the 24-28 items.

Quarter 1/2/3/4
24.Daily clean
Quarter 1/2/3/4 Quarter 1/2/3/4 Quarter 4 Quarter 1/2/3/4

27.Statistics of
Component Service 28.Execute effect
25.System diagnosis 26.Check waste
Life check

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
16.4 Steps
The following introduces the maintenance steps according to the best maintenance
order.
16.4.1 Clean wash buffer drawer

Procedure Clean wash buffer drawer
Object Wash buffer drawer
Frequency Service personnel: 3 months(quarter 1/2/3/4)
Maintenance When the wash buffer tank is frequently changed, the wash buffer drawer may get dirty
cause or rusty, which may affect wash buffer detection.
Scheduled Clean the drawer of the wash buffer tank
Maintenance
Items
Materials Dust free gauze and ethanol
required
Precautions Wear gloves to prevent biohazards
System Power off the analyzer

status
How to do 1. Pull out the drawer to a position convenient for operation.
2. Use dust free gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the drawer until the dust, dirt or
rust are removed and the metal brightness shows.
Check The drawer is wiped clean and metal brightness shows.
Time 5min
required
16.4.2 Clean the cap of the wash buffer tank

Procedure Clean the cap of the wash buffer tank
Object Cap of the Wash buffer tank
Maintenance When loading or changing the wash buffer tank, you need to disconnect the joint on the
cause cap and a small amount of wash buffer may spill onto the cap in this process. To prevent
the wash buffer from dropping onto the cap of the wash buffer tank which may cause
crystallization and clogging of the air vent on the cap.
Scheduled Clean the cap of the Wash buffer tank
Maintenance
Items
Materials N/A
required
System The analyzer is powered off; Incubating or standby

status

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
How to do 1. Pull out the drawer of the wash buffer tank.

2. Remove the cap and use clean tip head to gently strip the blockage.
3. Use DI water or ultra-pure water to clean it .

4. Wipe it dry with clean tissue and install back the cap.
Check check again until the cap is completely clean.
Time 5min
required
16.4.3 Check the sample/reagent probe

Procedure Sample/reagent probe check
Object Sample/reagent probe
Maintenance If the Sample/reagent probe is slightly twisted(cannot be detected with naked eyes), the
cause wash effect of the probe become worse which may affect the clinical test results.
Scheduled Check if the Sample/reagent probe is twisted and the interior of the guide sleeve is clean.
Maintenance
Items
Materials Probe axiality fixture(PN: BM10-J16)
required

status

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
How to do 1 Switch off the main power of the whole unit.

3 Loosen the two M3 screws on the arm base of the sample probe assembly (or the
reagent probe assembly) and leave them on the arm base.
6 Disconnect the tube from the fluidic connector on the probe assembly.
7. Use the alcohol cotton to wipe the liquid on the tip of the probe.
8 Remove the probe assembly and exercise caution to prevent the probe liquid from
touching the interior of the guide sleeve.
9. Lift the press block of the axiality fixture BM10-J16 and put the sleeve of the probe into
the V slot of the fixture. Make the retaining plate of the sleeve align with the fixture and
let down the press block to press the probe assembly.
10. Connect the wire of the fixture to the probe core.
11. Rotate the probe one circle by toggling the retaining plate gently and observe the
movement of the probe tip. Check if the buzzer on the PCB gives out sound. If the buzzer
does not give out sound, the probe assembly meets the requirement. If the buzzer
produces the sound, the probe assembly is unqualified.
12. If the probe assembly does not meet the requirement, Insert the probe core into the
1.8mm hole on the other end of the fixture for alignment.
13. If the probe cannot be aligned, change the probe.
14 Place the calibrated probe assembly in the guide sleeve.
Note, before inserting the probe, use the alcohol cotton to wipe the sleeve interior and
use the dust free gauze to wipe the exterior of the probe.
15 Sleeve the anti-collision spring on the guide rod and screw the guide rod on the guide
base.
16 Connect the fluidic tube with its connector closely attached to the counterpart on
the probe assembly, and then tighten the nut.
17 Lift the probe up manually and check if it can spring back smoothly.
Check Check if the probe is normal according to the method of step 10.
Time 10min
required
16.4.4 Change the spring of the gripper

Procedure Change the spring of the gripper
Object The spring of the gripper
Frequency Service personnel: 12 months(quarter 4)
Maintenance After long time use, the spring of the gripper may fall off or be damaged.
cause
Scheduled Change the spring of the gripper
Maintenance
Items
Materials New spring of the gripper(request according to the material list)
required
Precautions Only performed by service personnel
status

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
How to do Change the spring of the first gripper

2 Open the front shielding cover, and remove it by loosening the two screws.
3 Use a cross screwdriver to loosen the seven screws on the Z-axis shielding cover, and
remove the Z-axis shielding cover.
poles, and pay attention not to drop the spring and other parts into the analyzer (reaction
carousel hole or shell).
Finger clamping
spring
6 Install and tighten the screws according to steps 1~3 in the reversed order.
Change the spring of the second gripper

poles, and pay attention not to drop the spring and other parts into the analyzer (reaction
carousel hole or shell).

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Arm cover
M3X8 powder
screw
M4X16 hexagon
socket screw
Clamping spring
6 Install the gripper arm cover and tighten the screws.
Check The gripper can grip the cuvette normally.

Time 5min
required
16.4.5 Clean the finger of the gripper

Procedure Clean the gripper
Object Gripper
Maintenance The gripper may get dirty after long term use which may result in gripper failure.
cause
Scheduled Clean gripper
Maintenance
Items
Materials Dust free gauze and ethanol
required
System The analzyer is powered off.

status
4. Use dust free gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the gripper until the dust, dirt or
rust are removed and the metal brightness shows.
Check No dust, dirt or rust is on the gripper and the metal brightness shows.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Time 5min
required
16.4.6 X axis linear guide rail lubrication

Procedure X axis linear guide rail lubrication
Object X axis linear guide rail
Frequency Service personnel: 6 months(quarter 2/4)
Maintenance cause After long time use, the lubricant of the X axis linear bearing may get dry and
the motion resistance of the x axis is increased.
Scheduled lubricate X axis linear guide rail
Maintenance Items
Materials required High speed grease lubricant
System status The analzyer is powered off.

3 Use the cross screwdriver to remove the substrate panel assembly, and pay
attention to the cables under it.
4. Smear the lubricant on the axis and push back and forth the Y axis assembly
to ensure the axis is well lubricated.
Check Within the movement range, the axis is well lubricated.
Time required 5min
16.4.7 Check sample/reagent syringes

Procedure Check sample/reagent syringes
Object Sample syringe S and reagent syringe R
Maintenance cause The sample syringe and reagent syringes are precise devices used to
aspirate/dispense small amount of sample and reagent. If the syringes leak,
they cannot aspirate/dispense the correct amount of sample or reagent, and
may even be damaged.
Prior to measurements every day, check the sample/reagent syringes for leak.
Scheduled To check the sample/reagent syringes for leak and air bubbles.
Maintenance Items
Materials required Clean gauze and dry paper tissue
Precautions N/A
System status The system status is Incubation or Standby.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
How to do 1.Open the front door of the analyzer. You will see two syringes of the
analyzer.
2. Check the T piece assembly for leak. Use dry gauze or dry tissue to wipe the T
piece, and then check if the gauze is moistened. Check the syringe interior for
air bubbles.
If no bubbles or leak is found, move to the next step.
If there are leaks, tighten the T piece, and check it again. If the leaks remain,
check if the washer inside the syringe connector is intact. If the washer is
damaged, replace it with a new one; otherwise, replace the syringe.
If there are air bubbles, take actions according to the air bubble removing
procedure.
3. Check the plunger guide cap at the bottom of the syringe for leak. Use dry
gauze or dry tissue to wipe the T piece, and then check if the gauze is
moistened.
If not, proceed to the next step.
If there are leaks, tighten the plunger guide cap, and check it again. If the
leaks remain, replace the syringe according to the syringe replacement
procedure.
4. Check if the retaining screws at the bottom of the syringe are tightened. If
not, tighten them and proceed to the next step. If yes, proceed to the next step.
5. Close the front door of the analyzer.
6. After maintenance, open the logs and record related information.
Check Check the syringe for leak. Use the dry gauze or tissue to wipe the connector or
plunger. Check if the screws are tightened.
Time required 5min
16.4.8 Clean Dust Screens

Procedure Clean Dust Screens
Object Clean Dust Screens
Maintenance cause Dust may accumulate on the dust screens when the instrument is used for a long
time, influencing the ventilation and heat elimination effects.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Scheduled Clean Dust Screens

Maintenance Items
Dust screen
1
Dust screen 2
Dust Screen locations

Materials required Suction cleaner, hair brush and fresh water
Precautions Use a suction cleaner to clean the dust screens while keeping them installed.
Use a hair brush and fresh water to clean the dust screens after removing them
from the analyzer.
Do not reinstall the dust screens until they are dry completely.
Install the dust screens correctly to avoid gaps.
System status No requirements
How to do 1. Open the front door of the analyzer.
2. Remove the dust screens.
3. Tidy and clean the dust screens.
4. Dry the dust screens in air.
5. Restore the dust screens.
Check Visually check the wash effect. Observe if there is dust on the dust screen. No
obvious dust is found.
Time required 10min
16.4.9 Dispersion aspirate pump tubes maintenance

Procedure Dispersion aspirate pump tubes maintenance
Object Dispersion aspirating pump
Maintenance cause The dispersion pump is used for dispersion aspiration. After long time use, the
pump tube may be worn.
To ensure the wash effect, the dispersion pump tube should be changed
regularly.
Scheduled Change the worn pump tube to ensure the wash effect.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Maintenance Items
Materials required Dispersion a set of pump tubes (4 pcs)
System status The analyzer is powered off.

How to do 1 Power off the analyzer. Open the left rear cover and find the waste
pumpP09.
2 Place the tissue under the pump head to avoid the liquid from spilling onto
other parts.
3 Disconnect the buckle limit plate, you can see four guide tubes on the pump
head from bottom to top; the top buckle is vacant and there is no need to install
the guide tube for it. See the figure below.
Pump head
Pump tube
buckle limit
plate
pump head structure

Cartrige
buckle
Buckle with tube
4 Gently push inward the second buckle from top to bottom to remove the
limit plate from the pump body. Remove the buckle together with guide tube

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
and then disconnect the joints on the two ends of the guide tube. Install new
guide tube into the buckle .The limit device on the guide tube should be
inserted into the slot of the buckle. Install the buckle into the pump head.
Gently fasten the buckle towards the left and align it with other buckles.
Connect the joints of the guide tube.
Please pay attention to the connection direction of the tube, otherwise the
dispersion washing may fail.
Check Dispersion wash and aspiration
5 Use same method to change other three guide tubes from top to bottom.
After the guide tube is changed, flow test is performed.
1. Place an open container with 50ml DI water and put 4 aspirating probes into
the container.
2. Enter hydro unit alignment screen and select Flow test.
3. Select Pump Aspirate Volume and set the time to 15 seconds. Click Start. The
pump starts running and observe if the liquid flow through the pump guide tube.
After 15 seconds, the pump stops.
4. Use a pipette to add 3ml DI into four clean test tubes. Place the probe into
the bottom of the test tubes.
5.Set the time as 20S and click start. The pump stops after 20S. The remaining
liquid in each test tube should be less than 300ul.(adjust the pipette to 300ul
and aspirate the liquid to see if the remaining liquid can be aspirated dry. )
Flow test screen

6 After the flow test, install back the aspirating probe and other components.
Install back the cover.
Time required 30min
16.4.10 Inlet Pump Tubing maintenance

Procedure Inlet Pump Tubing maintenance
Object Inlet Pump Tubing
Maintenance cause Peristaltic pump is used for wash buffer inlet. After long
time use, the pump may be worn. To ensure the normal
wash buffer inlet and prevent leak, the dispersion

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
pump tube should be changed regularly.
Scheduled Maintenance Items Change the worn pump tube to ensure the wash effect.
Materials required Wash buffer inlet pump tube 1pcs

1. Before changing it, drain the wash buffer in the pump
tube.
2. Turn on the analyzer and check which wash buffer is
being used. Unplug its cap.
3. Take out the floater in the buffer tank and place it
upside down. Empty the remaining wash buffer in the
buffer tank.
4. Restore the buffer tank and floater and the analyzer
starts to pour the wash buffer into the buffer tank.
5. After the wash buffer is drained in the pump tube.
Turn off the analyzer.
6. Remove the back panel of the analyzer.
7 Place the tissue under the pump head to avoid the
liquid from spilling onto other parts.
8 Gently lift the white pump box to expose the guide
tube.
9 Remove the used guide tube from the pump head.

10 Install the new guide tube into the pump head and
push it until it contacts the interior of pump shell
tightly and the two ends of the guide tube exposed
outside of pump should have the same length. Press the
pump box gently until it align with the top of the pump.
After installation, the two ends of the tube is slightly
tilting and the tube should be between the vernier
tooth instead of being clamped by the pump cover.
11 Place tissue under the joints and pull out the old
pump tube from the joints. Please note: when removing
the guide tube, do not affect the connection of other
Procedure Inlet Pump check tubes and prevent the liquid from spilling onto other
Object Inlet Pump P01 components.
Frequency Service personnel:
3 months(quarter
1/2/3/4)

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Maintenance cause The inlet pump 12 Connect the new tubes with the joints and install
tube is wearing the joints into the buckle.
part. It needs 13 Turn on the analyzer, the wash buffer is poured into
regular check to the buffer tank.
ensure it works 14 When the volume of the buffer tank reaches 1/3
normally. tank, unplug the floater and place it upside down.
Scheduled Maintenance Check the pump 15 Empty the remaining wash buffer in the buffer tank
Items tube and restore the analyzer.
Materials required Cross screwdriver
Precautions Wear gloves to
prevent
biohazards
System status Incubating or
standby
How to do 1. View the
working hour of
the inlet pump on
the software
screen. If it
exceeds 150
hours, check the
pump tube. If it
exceeds 200
hours, change the
pump tube.
2. Remove the
back panel of the
analyzer.
3. Check if there
is leak or
crystallization on
the exterior of the
pump. If leak is
found, change the
pump tube.
4. Remove the
crystallization or
dirt on the pump
body.
Check No leak is found
and no
crystallization is
around the pump.
Time required 5min
How to do
Check Wash buffer can be injected into the buffer tank.
Time required 10min

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
16.4.11 Inlet Pump check

16.4.12 Clean Cooling Fans and Radiators
Procedure Clean Cooling Fans and Radiators
Object Fan
Maintenance cause After long time use, dirt may accumulate on the fans, which may affect the
cooling effect.
Scheduled Remove the dust from the fans
Maintenance Items
Radiating fan
4
Radiating fan
3
Air pump
fan
Maintenance object: refrigerating fan 3 and refrigerating fan 4 and vacuum

pump fan.
Fan locations
Materials required Suction cleaner or Hair brush
System status Shutdown
How to do 1. Turn off the analyzer
2. Remove the panel and the back shield.
3. Find the cooling fan 3 and 4 and the vacuum pump fan.
4. Clean the dust on the fans(If necessary, dismantle the fans).
5.Clean the air outlet and shutter of the fan.
6. Restore the fans.
7. Power on the analyzer and check if the fans work normally.
8. Restore the back shield and panel.
Check 1. Before installing back the back shield and the panel, power on the analyzer to
see if the fans work properly.
2. After installing back the back shield and the panel, enter the software to query
the status of the fans.
Time required 30min

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Procedure Check overflowing of the dispersion carousel

Object Dispersion Carousel
Maintenance cause Overflow occurs to the dispersion carousel due to dispensing/aspirating
probe clogging or misoperation. The dispersion needs regular cleaning.
Otherwise dispersion carousel may fail.
Scheduled Maintenance Check if overflow occurs to dispersion carousel. If it occurs, clean the
Items dispersion carousel.
Materials required Dust free gauze and ethanol
System status Standby Status

How to do 1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Alignment ->Dispersion carousel
unit-Dispersion carousel functions.
2. When each cuvette is rotated to the dispersion carousel, From the

direction designated by the red arrow in the following figure, observe
the 28 holes of the dispersion carousel to see if there is wash buffer
crystallization, solidified substrate. If not, no overflow occurs.
3. If overflow occurs, dismantle the dispersion carousel and clean it.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
4. Cleaning method:
(1) Wash the dispersion carousel with the water and dry it with dust free
gauze and dry it in the air.
(2) Use the gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the interior of the
dispersion chamber. Dry it with dust free gauze.
(3) Use the gauze moistened with ethanol to clean the lower side of the
dispersion carousel cover and the gripping holes. Remove the wash
buffer crystallization and solidified substrate and dry them with clean
gauze.
5. If overflow occurs, clean the substrate tubes: Use gauze moistened
with ethanol to wipe the exterior of the substrate tube until it is clean
and use gauze moistened with DI water to wipe the ethanol. Note: take
caution not to damage the substrate tube.
6. Check the resilience of the presser of cuvette and substrate mixing:
Press the presser of the cuvette and substrate mixing with your finger. If
the presser can slide smoothly in the mixing shaft and no jamming
occurs, the resilience of the pressers is good. If jamming occurs, change
the presser of cuvette and substrate mixing.
7. Dispersion carousel bearing reliability test after overflow: Rotate the
28 cuvette holder on the dispersion with your finger. If the cuvette
holder can rotate smoothly and no jamming occurs, the dispersion
carousel bearing is reliable. If jamming occurs, change the dispersion
carousel bearing.
8. Refer to 16.4.5 Clean the finger of the gripper to clean the gripper
after overflow.
9. Clean the reaction carousel after overflow.
10. After the above procedures are completed, restore the analyzer.
Check After Step 3 is completed, no wash buffer crystallization and solidified
substrate should be found in dispersion chamber, dispersion cover and
dispersion carousel and metal brightness is shown.
Time required 10minutes(no overflow)/60 min (overflow)
16.4.13 Air pump check

Procedure Air pump check
Object The primary vacuum pumps P08 and external vacuum pump (configured above
2000m)
Maintenance cause After long term use, the liquid in the tubes may be accumulated or crystallized
in the pump head ,which affects the performance of the pump.
Scheduled Check if the vacuum pump can establish vacuum.
Maintenance Items
Materials required N/A
Precautions The maintenance procedure must only be done by the service personnel. Wear
gloves to prevent biohazards.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
How to do 1. Enter the Statistics of Component Service Life screen to view the working
hour of the pump. If it exceeds 3000 hours, the pump should be changed.
2. Enter the Hydro unit alignment screen.
3. Select Vacuum Pressure Check.
4. Check if the local atmospheric pressure is correctly set.
5. Select P08(If external vacuum pump is configured, select it.) and click start to
turn on the vacuum pump. Select the start button on the pressure collection
screen.
6. The system starts to check the pressure and if pressure check succeeds, select
Stop button to stop the vacuum pump and pressure collection.
7. If pressure check fails, check the vacuum pump.
8. Exit the screen and home the analyzer.
Check Check if the vacuum is established.
Time required 5min
16.4.14 Check overflowing of the dispersion carousel

16.4.15 Replace Substrate Spike
Procedure Replace Substrate Spike
Object The support plate around the spike and the spikes.
Maintenance After long term use, substrate crystallization may occur to the spikes, which
cause affecting the smooth flow in substrate tube.
Substrate may drop on the plate around the substrate spikes, so the spikes needs
to be cleaned regularly.
Scheduled Replace Substrate Spike
Maintenance
Items
Materials required Two substrate spikes and acid wash solution
Precautions The maintenance procedure must only be done by the service personnel. Wear
gloves to prevent biohazards.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
How to do 1. Select Reagent-Special reagent to unload the substrate.
2. Select Maintenance-Alignment-Hydro Unit and select Substrate Subsystem

Component Check and Tube Wash.
3. Remove the spike and use a waste container to hang the spikes above the
container. Select Continue.
4. Remove the substrate holder cover.
5. Remove the substrate bottle 1 and 2 to drain the substrate tube.
6. Select Start to prime for over 30 times (with substrate 1).

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
7. Select Turn off to switch to substrate bottle 2. Select Start to prime for 30 times
and empty the tubes.
8. Use gauze moistened with distilled water to clean the plate around the spikes as
designated by the red arrow in the figure.
9. Loosen the two countersunk head screws on the substrate holder, and then
remove the substrate holder assembly.
Note: Exercise caution to avoid breaking the tubes.
10. Rotate the spikes to remove them, and then unplug the tube connectors.
Note: Exercise caution to avoid contaminating the tube connectors and dropping the
sealing rings.
11. Connect the clean spikes with the tube connectors, and then screw the spikes
counterclockwise onto the substrate holder.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
12. Install the substrate holder assembly and cover in the reversed order.
Note: During installation, arrange the tubes to prevent them from being pressed or
damaged.
13. Repeat step 2 and 3.
14. Load acid wash solution (no less than 50ml for each bottle) in the positions of
substrate 1 and 2, and select Continue.
15. Select Start to prime for over 30 times (with substrate 1).
16. Select Turn off to switch to substrate bottle 2. Select Start to prime for 30
times.
17. Select OK to immerse the substrate tube for 5 minutes.
18. Select OK after immersion.
19. Replace the substrate wash solution bottles with empty substrate bottles.
Follow the above procedures to drain the tubes and select Continue.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
20. Install the substrate bottles with DI water to the substrate 1 and 2 positions.
Follow the above procedure to wash the substrate tubes.
21. Select Continue to exit the window.

22. Return to the alignment screen.
23. Select 5 Substrate Prime and click OK.
24. Select OK to skip the deionized water prime, which has been finished in the
previous steps.
25. Replace the substrate bottles with the DI water with empty substrate bottles.
Follow above procedure to drain the DI water.
26. Remove the empty substrate bottles and load two bottles of substrate. Perform
substrate prime according to the steps above.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
27.The fluidic prime procedure is complete.

28. Select Reagent-Special reagent to re-load the substrate.
Check Substrate prime can be successfully completed and the system can pass the effect
check.
Time required 30min
16.4.16 Check consumable status

Procedure Check consumable status
Object Consumable
Maintenance cause To check the consumable volume to prevent measurements from being
terminated.
Scheduled Maintenance Check if the consumables are sufficient.
Items

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps

System status Incubation or standby
How to do 1 Select Reagent-Special Reagent, or select Reagent-Reagent overview.
2 Check the volume status of the sample diluent, substrate, cuvette,
waste container, sample probe wash solution and wash buffer;
3 If certain consumable is insufficient, refill it.
4 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, and then select Scheduled
Maintenance -> Daily.
5 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Check Consumable Status.
6 Select OK to refresh the current date as the performance date.
7 Select Log, and then record commends and other important information for
the procedure.
8 Select OK to save your input information.
Check All the consumables are sufficient on the software screen.
Time required 5min
16.4.17 Clean Sample/Reagent Probes Exterior

Procedure Clean Sample/Reagent Probes Exterior
Object Sample probe and reagent probe
Maintenance cause The sample probe and reagent probe are often dirty on their surfaces, causing
carryover between samples or reagents and resulting in inaccurate results.
To clean the exterior of the sample probe and reagent probe to prevent
carryover.
Scheduled Maintenance Clean Sample/Reagent Probes Exterior
Items
Materials required 2 pieces of clean gauze, ethanol, deionized water(prepared by the user)
Precautions Wear gloves and lab coat.
Do not twist or damage the sample/reagent probe If the sample/reagent
probe is twisted or damaged, replace it.
How to do 1. Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby, and then open
the upper protective shield and back cover of the analyzer.
2. Enter maintenance command screen and select Clean Probe Exterior and
follow the software prompts to finish the procedures.
3. The probes return to their wash wells; the horizontal and vertical motors
are powered off.
4. Rotate the probe arm to move the probe to a position convenient for
cleaning,
5. Use gauze soaked with ethanol to gently wipe the probe exterior. Clean the
probe tip until it becomes clear without stain. Use gauze moistened with
deionized water to clear the ethanol on the probe.
Do not pull the probe vertically to prevent probe damage.
6. After wash, select Continue and the system starts to reset.
7. Close the upper and back cover of the analyzer.
8. After maintenance, open the logs and record related information.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Check Sample probe precision test and reagent probe precision test satisfy the
requirements.
Time required 5min
16.4.18 Check Sample/Reagent Probes

Procedure Check Sample/Reagent Probes
Object Sample probe and reagent probe
Maintenance cause Abnormal sample probe or reagent probe may influence the measurement
performance and result in inaccurate results. Prior to measurements every
day, check the sample probe and reagent probe for stains and crystals, and
check if the wash well is clogged. If the above-mentioned abnormities exist,
clean or adjust the probes immediately.
Scheduled Maintenance To check the sample probe and reagent probe for water dripping, stains and
Items liquid flow abnormities.
To check if the wash wells have a normal water flow.
Avoid being hurt by the sample/reagent probe.
Do not twist the sample/reagent probe
Keep away from the probes to avoid collision with them.
the upper protective shield and back cover of the analyzer.
2 Check the exterior of the probes for stains.
If stains exist, perform the Clean Sample/Reagent Probes Exterior procedure.
Enter maintenance command screen and select Clean Probe Interior and
select Continue. The probe moves to above the wash well and is washed for 3
three times 12 seconds in total.
3 Check the liquid flow of the sample probe and reagent probes.
If the liquid flow is sprayed out or does not come out vertically, the probe may
be clogged.
Perform the Daily Clean procedure, and then check them again. If the
abnormity remains, perform the Clean Sample Probe Interior or Clean Reagent
Probe Interior procedure. If the abnormity still remains, perform the
Clean/Replace Probe procedure.
Probe interior wash liquid flow

4. After the Probe Interior wash procedure is completed, the system starts
to reset.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
5. Close the upper and back cover of the analyzer;

6. Fill the maintenance log.
Check Repeat the above procedures to check the maintenance effect.
Time required 5min
16.4.19 Probe interior and exterior flow test

Procedure Probe interior and exterior flow test
Object Probe interior and exterior flow test
Maintenance cause The flow of the probe interior and exterior is not sufficient and the probes are
not well washed, which may cause carryover and wrong test results.
Scheduled Maintenance Test the probe interior and exterior flow
Items
Materials required cylinder and Deionized water
System status Shutdown
How to do 1 After the pump is changed, open the upper cover of the analyzer (at the
place of sample probe).
2 Power on the analyzer and enter fluidic alignment screen. Perform Probe
Wash Fluidic Prime 2 times.
3 Enter Flow test screen; select Sample Probe Interior Wash Flow or
Sample Probe Exterior Wash Flow test. Enter flow test screen.
4 For probe interior flow test, click Sample Probe Interior Wash Flow and
place an empty container under the sample probe. Click twice the Continue
button and the flow test window pops up.
5 Select Start button and sample probe dispenses the liquid for a while and
stops.
6 Pour the liquid in the container into the cylinder and read the value. Enter
the dispensing volume and click OK. Meanwhile, sample probe dispenses for
the second time and follow the same steps to get the dispensing volume. Click
OK to save the data.
If the flow measured twice is within 131-139ml/min, then click continue to
finish the test.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
If flow is out of this range, the software enters adjust pump voltage
process. Click continue to adjust the pump voltage and the flow check
window pops up. Follow the above stated steps to perform the sample
probe interior flow test until sample probe flow meets the requirement.
When the test is completed, return to flow test screen.
Sample Probe Interior Flow test window

7 For sample probe exterior flow test, click Sample Probe Exterior Wash Flow
to enter flow check screen. Follow the software steps and prompts and above
mentioned step 4 to finish the sample exterior flow test.
During this process, the container is placed under the bracket of the substrate
pump. Unplug the sample well exterior wash tube and place it into the
container (If necessary, fix it with tape.)
Sample probe exterior wash flow

Note: if the wash flow is insufficient, trouble shoot the hydro unit. If
necessary, refer to the chapter Hydro unit and perform Interior/Exterior
Wash Pump Calibration.
Check The precision test meets the requirements.
Time required 15min

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
16.4.20 Clean Vortexer Hole

Procedure Clean Vortexer Hole
Object Vortexer hole
Maintenance cause Dust in the vortexer hole will affect the mixing effect.
Scheduled Maintenance Clean Vortexer Hole

Items
Materials required Clean cotton swabs and ethanol
Precautions
System status Not running test
How to do 1. Make sure that the system status is Incubation or Standby.
2. Open the back cover of the analyzer.
3. Enter maintenance command screen and select Clean Vortexer Hole and
follow the software prompts to finish the procedure.
4 Wipe the vortexer hole gently with ethanol cotton swab;
5. Restore the back cover of the analyzer.
Check The Vortexer hole is clean.
Time required 5min
16.4.21 Replace/Clean Aspirate Probes

Procedure Replace/Clean Aspirate Probes
Object Dispersion Aspirate Probes(4 pcs)
Maintenance cause Aspirate probe contamination will result in carryover and aspirate probe
clogging will result in wash solution residue, which will affect the test result.
Scheduled Maintenance Remove the aspirating probes and replace them with new probes.
Items Clean the aspirating probes and store them for reuse next time.
Materials required 4 clean aspirate probes, cleaning tool for dispersion probes(Unclogging
device and syringe)
Remind the user not to be hurt by the probes.
Do not twist the probes.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
the back cover of the analyzer.
2 Access the Maintenance Command screen, click Clean Dispersion
Probes/Tubes , and then replace the desired dispersion aspirate probe
according to the screen prompts.
3 Unscrew counterclockwise the yellow round nut on the aspirate
plate, (the dispersion carousel includes the upper and lower plates, and the
aspirate plate is the upper one), pull the aspirate probe upwards from the
dispersion carousel. Pay attention not to bend or bump the probe.
4 Connect one end of the aspirate tube to the probe barb, and the other
end to the multi-way connector. Take out the aspirate tube from the groove
of the tube plate, and disconnect the probe from the multi-way connector.
Note: Do not attempt to disconnect the tube from the aspirate probe.
5 Install a new aspirate probe and tube back onto the aspirate plate.
While moving the bottom of the aspirate probe slowly, press it gently to
insert its bottom into the hole on the dispersion carousel cover, and then push
the aspirate probe vertically into the aspirate plate by force.
7 Lock the aspirate tube into the groove of the tube plate, and connect it
with the multi-way connector.
8 Repeat step 3-6 to replace other dispersion aspirating probe.
Clean the aspirate probes:

1. Use the unclogging device to unclog the removed aspirating probes.
2.Prepare a beaker full of CD80 wash solution, immerge the other end of the
probe into the beaker, and push/pull the syringe plunger for over 10 times.
Lift the probe tip above the liquid level and discharge the liquid in the tube.
3. Prepare another beaker filled with deionized water or distilled water,
immerge the probe tip into the liquid, pull the syringe plunger to aspirate
liquid, put the probe into another empty beaker and push the syringe plunger
to discharge the liquid. Repeat this action for at least 10 times to clean the
probe interior.
4. After cleaning, lift the probes from the DI water and pull the syringe 5
times to discharge the liquid in the probe.
5.After interior cleaning, disconnect the probe assembly from the syringe
connector, swing the probe and tube to remove the liquid leftover, and then
use clean gauze (without scraps) to dry the probe exterior. Please note that
the tube is connected tight during the cleaning process.
6. After finishing the cleaning procedure, please place the probes in a clean
and ventilated environment to dry them .
7. When the probes are dry, keep them in a clean sealed bag.
8. Use the same method to clean all the aspirate probes.
Check Use System check in system diagnosis and Dispersion Aspirating Flow Diagnosis
to check.
Time required 20min
16.4.22 Wipe Dispense Probes/Tubes

Procedure Clean dispersion dispensing probes and substrate tube
Object Dispersion dispensing probes and substrate tube

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Maintenance cause If crystallization occurs to dispersion dispensing probes, dispersion wash will
be insufficient and substrate dispensing volume will be inaccurate, which will
affect the test results. So it is required to check the dispersion dispensing
probes regularly.
Scheduled Maintenance Check the outer part of the bottom of dispensing probe especially near the
Items hole after removing the dispensing probe;
wipe the crystals if there are any.
Materials required Clean gauze
Remind the user not to be hurt by the probes.
Take caution and do not bent the dispersion dispensing probe and substrate
dispense tube.
the back cover of the analyzer.
2 Access the Maintenance Command screen, click Clean Dispersion
Probes/Tubes , and then replace the desired dispersion aspirate probe
according to the screen prompts.
3 Unscrew the circle nut on the dispensing plate counter-clockwise and lift
it upward, (dispersion carousel includes the upper and lower plates,
dispensing plate refers to the lower plate), pull the aspirate probe from the
dispensing plate. The soft tube and its connector should be connected tightly.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
4 Wipe the exterior of the aspirate probe with gauze moistened with
deionized water.
5 Install the aspirate back to the dispensing plate and tighten the nut,
check if the connection of the tube is loosen, tighten the connection if it is
loosen.
6 Repeat step 3-8 to clean other 3-step dispensing aspirate probe and
dispense tube of substrate.
7. After check, select Done.
8. Restore the back cover of the analyzer.
Check Dispersion dispensing probes and tubes can flow smoothly.
Time required 10min
16.4.23 Sensor Calibration

Procedure Sensor Calibration
Object Weighing sensor, Substrate Aspirating/dispensing Coupler, Wash Buffer Bubble

Detection Coupler
Maintenance cause To ensure correct detection of the wash buffer volume and eliminate system
error of the weighing sensor.
To eliminate system error of the Aspirating/dispensing Coupler, Wash Buffer
Bubble Detection Coupler
Scheduled Maintenance Calibrate the Weighing sensor, Substrate Aspirating/dispensing Coupler and
Items Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler
Materials required Weighing sensor calibration
How to do 1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, and then select Maintenance
command.
2. Select Sensor calibration and select Weighing sensor calibration, Auto
Adjustment of Substrate Aspirating and Dispensing Coupler Calibration or
Auto Adjustment of Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler Calibration. Select

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Continue.
3. Select weighing sensor calibration.
4. Select the to-be-calibrated wash buffer weighing sensor and then select
start.
5. Follow the software prompts to complete the following procedure.

6. Repeat the above procedure to compete the calibration of the other
weighing sensor.
7. Follow the software prompts to complete the calibration of the Substrate
Aspirating/dispensing Coupler and Wash Buffer Bubble Detection Coupler.
8. Select Done to exit the maintenance procedure.
9. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, and then select Scheduled
Maintenance -> Three-month.
10. Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Sensor Calibration.
11. When OK is clicked, the maintenance time of each maintenance item is
refreshed.
12. Select Log, and then record commends and other important information
for the procedure.
13. Select OK to save your input information.
Check No alarm is given during calibration. The analyzer can detect the wash buffer
and substrate normally.
Time required 5min
Note: After completing the 23 rd maintenance , follow step 2 of 16.3 Maintenance order
to prime the analyzer with wash buffer.
16.4.24 Daily Clean

Procedure Daily Clean
Object Sample probe , reagent probe and dispersion aspirate
Maintenance cause Daily clean function is used to clean the sample probe, reagent probe and
dispersion aspirate probe to keep good performance of them, avoid probe
clogging and reduce influence of the probe carryover on the test result.
Scheduled Maintenance This procedure is to clean the sample probe, reagent probe and dispersion
Items aspirate probes and check if they are clogged.
Materials required 3.6ml concentrated wash solution is consumed during Daily Clean process.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps

Keep away from the probes to avoid collision with them.
How to do 1. Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance,then select Maintenance
command.
2 Select Daily Clean.
3 Add sufficient concentrated wash solution into the 60ml reagent bottle,
and place it in the special wash position.
4. Select Execute.
To stop testing, click Stop.
5. After the daily clean is finished successfully, select Exit to exit the
window..
7. Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Daily Clean.
8. Select Ok to refresh the current date as the performance date.
9. Select Log, and then record commends and other important information for
the procedure.
10. Select OK to save your input information.
Check Repeat the above procedure to see if it can be completed normally.
Time required 15min
16.4.25 Run System Diagnosis

Procedure Run System Diagnosis
Object The performance of the analyzer
Maintenance cause Ensure the performance meets the requirement.
Scheduled Maintenance Background Test, Reagent Probe Test, and Sample Probe Test
Items
Materials required System Check solution
How to do 1. SelectUtility-Maintenance-Diagnosis,select M1 in the pop-up dialog
box and select OK.
2. Select System Diagnosis.
3. Select System Diagnosis.
4. Put a rack into the rack supply unit and dispense at least 1 ml system
check solution 1 at the sample position 1 (used for the precision test of the
sample and reagent probe) ; 2ml system check solution 2(used for cleaning
test).
5. Select the desired testing item;
6. Select Start.
7. After the diagnosis, select Exit to close the window.
Check All the selected items can pass the test.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
Time required 10min(no waiting time)/45min(Waiting time included)
16.4.26 Check Waste

Procedure Check Waste
Object Waste Tubes

Maintenance cause If the waste tube is not connected properly , overflow may be caused,
resulted in environmental contamination or cross contamination, or even
damaging the equipment.
Scheduled Maintenance Check if the waste tube connection is proper.
Items
Dispose of the waste in accordance with your local or national guidelines for
biohazard waste disposal.
How to do 1 Check that the waste tube is clear and not bent or folded. If it is, the
waste may run over the analyzers panel, or even damage the analyzer.
2 If leak remains after performing the above-stated steps, trouble shoot it.
3 If waste tank is used to hold the liquid waste, check the waste tank and
empty it.
4 Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance, and then select Scheduled
5 Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Check Waste Tank Connection.
6 Select OK to refresh the current date as the performance date.
7 Select Log and then record comments and other important information for
the procedure.
Check N/A
Time required 5min
16.4.27 Statistics of Component Service Life

Procedure Statistics of Component Service Life
Object The major components
Maintenance cause When the components are changed, their service life is cleared.
Scheduled Maintenance View or clear the service life of the components.
Items
Precautions N/A
How to do View the Component Service Life
1. Select Utility -> Maintenance -> Maintenance -Maintenance command.
Select Statistics of Component Service Life.

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
2. View the service life of the components.
Clear the Component Service Life

After the component is changed, select it and then click Clear to clear the
service life.
Check /
Time required 3 min

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps
16.4.28 Effect Check

Procedure Effect Check
Object Sample/regent probe, dispersion assembly and PMT module
Maintenance cause Effect check is used to avoid crystallization in probe washing tubes,
dispersion dispensing tubes and substrate dispensing tubes and monitor the
liquid contamination and the working status of the photometric system.
Scheduled Maintenance To monitor the liquid contamination and the working status of the and
Items photometric system
How to do 1. Select Utility-Maintenance-Maintenance,then select Maintenance
command.
2. Select Effect Check.
3. Enter Utility-System setup-Instrument F1- Auto Maintenance Setup. Set the
interval of effect check.
The default is 4 hours.
4. Select Execute.
5. After the procedure, the photon count of each cuvette position will be
displayed on the screen.
6.Select Exit to close the window.
8. Mark the Select checkbox to the right of Effect Check.
9. Select Ok to refresh the current date as the performance date.
10 Select Log and then record comments and other important information for
the procedure.
Check Effect check can be completed normally.
Time required 10min

16 Maintenance
16.4 Steps

17 Alarms and Troubleshooting

17.1 Overview
17.1 Overview
This chapter provides all foreseeable alarms of the CL-2000i/CL-2200i, as well as the
triggering mechanism, possible causes and corrective actions. However, the alarms may
not cover all failures, and the possible causes and corrective actions may not completely
comply with the actual failure mode. The maintenance suggestions provided in this
chapter are for reference only and cannot be taken as the final judgment criteria.

17.2 Flag
17.2 Flag
Result flags are saved in sample results, calibration results and QC results in order to
indicate abnormities happening in the test process. They may appear when certain
alarms occur or the original test results are processed. See the table below:
Flag Alarm Description Cause Corrective Actions
Type
< Result Exceeds Sample or control result is Take no actions, or rerun the
related linearity range lower than the low limit of the test for confirmation.
low linearity range.
> Result Exceeds Sample or control result Dilute and Rerun
related linearity range exceeds the low limit of the
high linearity range.
Result Exceeds The result exceeds the high No actions are required.
related reference range limit of the reference range.
high
! Result Exceeds critical The result exceeds the high No actions are required.
related range high limit of the critical range.
Result Exceeds The result is lower than the No actions are required.
related reference range low limit of the reference
low range.
! Result Exceeds critical The result is lower than the No actions are required.
related range low low limit of the critical range.
10x Result 10x Results of five runs (10 Check if the reagent is
related results), or 10 continuous qualified, control sample is
results of a control are on the normal, and the instrument is
same side. working correctly.
12S Result 12S The QC result is between 2 No actions are required.
related and 3 standard deviations
from the assigned mean
concentration.
13s Result 13s The current QC result is Check if the reagent is
related greater than 3 standard qualified, control sample is
deviations from the assigned normal, and the instrument is
mean concentration. working correctly.
22s Result 22s Results of two controls in the Check if the reagent is
related same run or two continuous qualified, control sample is
results of a control are on the normal, and the instrument is
same side and greater than working correctly.
2 standard deviations from the
assigned mean concentration.
41s Result 41s Results of two runs (4 results), Check if the reagent is
related or 4 continuous results of a qualified, control sample is
control are on the same side normal, and the instrument is
and greater than 1 standard working correctly.
deviation from the assigned
mean concentration.

17.2 Flag

Type
ABN Result Sample RLU out Sample RLU is lower than the Check the sample for foreign
related of range low absolute value or higher matters or interferents;
than the high absolute value. check if the reagent is
qualified and placed in the
correct position; check the
cuvette quality; check if the
photometric system is
working normally.
ADSE Calibration Sample RLU is When RLU is calculated, the No actions are required.
related abnormal slope is below 0.
CAL Result Corrected result The result is calculated based No actions are required.
related on the default calibration
factors. (manually or
automatically)
CALJ Result The calibration Use sample and control result No actions are required.
related factors are gained by the rejected
rejected. calibration factor
COV Calibration Calibration For nonlinear calibration, a Check that the reagent and
related curve is not satisfying base cannot be calibrator are normal, and
convergent. calculated and no calibration then recalibrate. If the error
curve is drawn. remains, contact our
customer service
department.
CSDB Result Calibration Air bubbles are detected After the substrate is primed,
related result error. Air during substrate dispensing rerun the test.
bubbles are process.
detected.
CSDB Calibration Calibration Air bubbles are detected After the substrate is primed,
related result error. Air during substrate dispensing recalibrate.
bubbles are process.
detected.
DCF Calibration Photometer DCF calibration failed during 1. Rerun the operating
related calibration calibration process. software.
failed. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
3. If the error remains,
contact our customer service
department or your local
distributor.
DEL Result Deleted QC The QC result has been No actions are required.
related result deleted.
DET Calibration Calibration The calculated fit of the Check if the acceptance limit
related determination calibration curve exceeds the is reasonable and the reagent
coefficient out specified limit. and calibrator are normal,
of range and then recalibrate.
DEV Calibration Calibrator RLU Calibrator RLU deviation out of Recalibrate.
related deviation out of range, the check fails.
range

17.2 Flag

Type
DUP Calibration Calibration CV is larger than the Check if the acceptance limit
related repeatability repeatability index obtained is reasonable, troubleshoot
error. from the reagent bar code. the error, and then
recalibrate.
EDT Result Edited result The result has been edited. No actions are required.
related
ERR Result The cuvette The cuvette positions are Home
related positions are disabled or the hole is dirty or
disabled or the the part is disabled.
hole is dirty or
the part is
disabled.
EXT Result Extending Use sample and control result Take no actions, or
related calibration time gained by the extended recalibrate.
calibration factor
ICA Result The RLU is Result cannot be calculated Result cannot be calculated
related normal, but due to no valid calibration due to no valid calibration
results cannot factors. factors. Rerun it after
be calculated. calibration.
INDE Result Infectious The result of the infectious Take no actions, or rerun the
related disease disease chemistry falls in the test.
chemistry gray gray area.
area flag
LVC Calibration The previous Calculate the calibrator 1. If maintenance is not
related valid calibration concentration with valid performed as required,
out of range calibration, which is out of recalibrate after the
range defined in the calibrator maintenance is completed.
barcode 2. Replace the calibrator and
recalibrate.
distributor.
MON Calibration Monotony check 1. 1. The actual tested CPSi 1. If the calibrators are
related failed does not meet the placed in the wrong order,
requirement of ascending place them in the right order
sequence of sandwich method and recalibrate.
and the descending sequence 2. If the error remains,
of competitive method. contact our customer service
2. The major calibration department or your local
adjustment CPSj after 2-3 distributor.
points adjustment does not
meet the requirement of
ascending sequence of
sandwich method and the
descending sequence of
competitive method.
NOID Result There are no Software error Contact our customer service
related sample ID in the department or your local
test result distributor.

17.2 Flag

Type
NREA Result Flag indicating The test result for infectious No actions are required.
related the test result disease chemistry is Negative.
for infectious
disease
chemistry is
Negative.
R Result Rerun result Retest the finished chemistry No actions are required.
related
R4S Result R4S One result of a run is greater Check if the reagent is
related than +2 standard deviations qualified, control sample is
from the assigned mean and normal, and the instrument is
the other greater than -2SDs. working correctly.
RAT Calibration Signal ratio of Signal ratio exceeds the Recalibrate.
related the calibrator fluctuation range defined in
out of range, the bar code.
the check failed
RCV Calibration The tropic Recovery regression check Recalibrate
related concentration of failed.
the calibrator
out of range
REAC Result Flag indicating The test result for infectious Take no actions, or rerun the
related the test result disease chemistry is Positive. test.
for infectious
disease
chemistry is
Positive.
REC Result Recalculate the The sample result is calculated No actions are required.
related sample results manually with the latest
manually. calibration factors.
RGTE Result The reagent is Sample and QC test result Replace the reagent.
related expired. gained by expired reagent
RGTL Result Insufficient Reagent probe aspirates Replace the reagent.
related reagent nothing
RGTL Calibration Insufficient The calibration result is based Replace the reagent.
related reagent on insufficient reagent.
RMXH Result Vortex speed of Vortex speed of reaction liquid 1. Rerun the operating
related reaction liquid is too high. software.
is too high. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
distributor.

17.2 Flag

Type
RMXH Calibration Vortex speed of Vortex speed of reaction liquid 1. Rerun the operating
related reaction liquid is too high. software.
is too high. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
distributor. Contact our
customer service department
or your local distributor.
RMXL Result Vortex speed of Vortex speed of dispersion 1. Rerun the operating
related reaction liquid wash buffer mixing is too low. software.
is too low. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
distributor.
RMXL Calibration Vortex speed of Vortex speed of dispersion 1. Rerun the operating
related reaction liquid wash buffer mixing is too low. software.
is too low. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
distributor.
RRN Result Sample RLU out Sample RLU is out of the range Dilute and Rerun
related of range of the maximum concentration
calibrators RLU check
SJAM Result Sample probe is Probe clogging is detected Sample treatment
related clogged. during sampling or the sample
probe is clogged during
sampling.
SLO Calibration Slope out of The slope exceeds the slope Recalibrate.
related range fluctuation range defined in
the bar code. Calibration slope
check failed.
SMPE Result Expired sample The sample is expired. Replace the sample.
related
SMPL Result Insufficient Sample probe aspirates Refill the sample.
related sample nothing or no liquid level is
detected.
SMPL Calibration Insufficient The sample is insufficient Refill the sample.
related sample during analysis.
SUBE Calibration Substrate is Expired substrate is used to Change the substrate.
related expired. analyze the sample or control.

17.2 Flag

Type
Srr System System error 1.hydropneumatic subsystem 1. Rerun the operating
related is abnormal. software.
2.Vortexer and dispersion 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
mixing are abnormal 3. If the error remains,
distributor.
TNN Result Temperature Temperature error of the 1.Rerun the operating
related error reaction carousel, dispersion software or restore the
carousel or substrate system.
preheating. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
distributor.
VAM Calibration Calibration data The calibration test is 1.Rerun the operating
related is lost unfinished during calibration software or restore the
process, causing the system.
calibration factor cannot be 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
calculated. 3. If the error remains,
distributor.
WMXH Result Vortex speed of Vortex speed is too high during 1. Rerun the operating
related dispersion wash dispersion wash buffer mixing software.
buffer mixing is process. 2. Reboot the analyzing unit.
too high. 3. If the error remains,
distributor.
WMXH Calibration Vortex speed of Vortex speed is too high during 1. Rerun the operating
too high. 3. If the error remains,
distributor.
WMXL Result Vortex speed of Vortex speed is too low during 1. Rerun the operating
too low. 3. If the error remains,
distributor.

17.2 Flag

Type
WMXL Calibration Vortex speed of Vortex speed is too low during 1. Rerun the operating
too low. 3. If the error remains,
distributor.

17.3 Error Code
17.3 Error Code

Error alarms are divided into prompts and pop-up messages. Prompts are displayed in
the prompt message area to indicate alarms. See the figure below:
Pop-up messages are shown on a dialog box displayed to remind the operator of an error
that is happening. See the figure below:
Both of the two types of error alarms are recorded in the error logs. The description of
alarms in prompts and popup messages is brief and are explained in detail in the error
logs. The error alarms listed below may appear in the error logs.
Table 17.1 Error Code

17.3 Error Code
Error Error Log Flag When to Trigger Probable Causes Corrective Actions
Code
C00007 CPU N/A Check the CPU The CPU is too busy. 1. Reboot and Rerun
performanc utilization. If CPU the operating software.
e low utilization is 2. Re-install the
continuously 90% Operating Software.
for 1 minute or 3. Re-install the
after 10 minutes, Operating system.
CPU utilization is
4. Check the computer.
still 90%, the system
gives out the
alarm"CPU
performance low."
C00008 Printer N/A The error is The printer is not Check the printer
cannot be detected during powered on; the connection; check if
connected printing. printer cable is not the printer is powered
connected; or no on and if the driver and
driver is installed. default printer have
been installed.
C00009 Printer N/A The error is Paper jam; No paper; Check for paper jam.
failure detected during No ink Check if printer is busy,
printing. and print tasks are too
many.
C00010 Print paper N/A The error is Paper jam; No paper; Check for paper jam.
running out detected during No ink Check if printer is busy,
printing. and print tasks are too
many.
C00012 Sound card N/A No sound card is No sound card is Reinstall sound card or
failure installed; Sound installed; Sound card sound card driver
card failure; failure; Incorrect
Incorrect sound sound card driver
card driver

17.3 Error Code
Code
C01001 Equipment N/A 1. The main control Serial cable is not 1. Query if the software
cannot be unit of the analyzer connected; Analyzing serial port is COM3(for
connected receives no unit Switch is main unit) and COM4
instructions from powered off for SDM.
the operating The track is powered 2. Check the serial port
software within 3 off. cables connecting the
seconds. computer to main unit,
2.Three continuous serial port conversion
instructions sent by board to SDM main
the operating control board and main
software are not control board to each
executed(No lower level unit are
response or invalid normal. Unplug and
response ). re-plug them.
3. The main control 3. Check if the analyzer
unit of the rack is powered on. Check
feeder system the indicator of the 5V
receives no power supply assembly.
instructions from 4. Turn on PC and the
the operating analyzer.
software within 3 5. Replace the main
seconds. control board.
Main control unit 6. Change the serial
shakes hands with port of the computer.
lower-level unit
when the analyzer
is not running test.
(shake hands every
5 seconds.)
C02005 Reading/Wr N/A SQL instruction Cannot read or write 1. Rerun the operating
iting execution failed. necessary software.
database information from or 2. Back up the current
failed into database database and then
clear the current
database. Rerun the
software.
3. Re-install the
Operating Software.
C03018 12s 12s N/A The QC result is No actions are
between 2 and required.
3 standard deviations
from the assigned
mean concentration.
C03019 13s 13s N/A The current QC result Check if the reagent is
is greater than 3 qualified, control
standard deviations sample is normal, and
from the assigned the instrument is
mean concentration. working correctly.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C03020 22s 22s N/A Results of two Check if the reagent is
controls or two qualified, control
results of one control sample is normal, and
within a run are the instrument is
simultaneously working correctly.
greater than +2 or -2
standard deviations
from the assigned
mean.
C03021 R4s R4s N/A One result of a run is Check if the reagent is
greater than +2 qualified, control
standard deviations sample is normal, and
from the assigned the instrument is
mean and the other working correctly.
greater than -2SDs.
C03022 41s 41s N/A Results of two runs (4 Check if the reagent is
results), or 4 qualified, control
continuous results of sample is normal, and
a control are on the the instrument is
same side and working correctly.
greater than 1
standard deviation
from the assigned
mean concentration.
C03023 10x 10x N/A Results of five runs Check if the reagent is
(10 results), or 10 qualified, control
continuous results of sample is normal, and
a control are on the the instrument is
same side. working correctly.
C04001 Sample bar N/A 1.Two or more Duplicate bar code is Replace the duplicate
code sample tubes on the used. sample bar code label.
already same rack have
exists. identical bar code.
2. In auto rerun
mode, a sample
with same bar code
is scanned when the
current sample on
the rack has not left
the buffer area.
3. In manual rerun
mode, a sample
with same bar code
is scanned when the
current sample on
the rack has not
entered the buffer
area.
4. During analysis,
samples with same
bar code are
scanned on rack.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C04002 Bar code N/A No sample The sample of the Program the sample of
has no information bar code has not the bar code.
correspondi corresponding to been programmed.
ng the bar code is
programmi found in the local
ng. database or the LIS
database.
C04006 Sample is SMPE The difference The sample is loaded The sample is expired.
expired. between the after its shelf life is Replace the sample and
collection time or exceeded. program it again.
programming time Reject the expired
and the scanning sample. If the sample
time of a sample shelf life is too short,
exceeds the set change it to a
validity period. reasonable one.
C04008 Sample bar N/A The length of the The bar code length Redefine the bar code
code too sample bar code is greater than the with no more than 27
long. exceeds 27 digits. maximum value of 27 digits.
digits.
C05001 Reagent of N/A Reagent with the Closed-reagent bar Closed-reagent bar
this bar same bar code has code is aligned with code is aligned with
code has already existed. closed reagents, and closed reagents, and
already cannot be used again cannot be used again
been for new reagent for new reagent when a
loaded. when a reagent is reagent is exhausted.
exhausted.
C05002 Reagent N/A No chemistries are Wrong reagent bar Replace reagent bottle,
bar code found by ID number code is used. The or contact reagent
information or name; the bottle reagent bar code supplier to replace.
error. type is invalid; or contains incomplete
the expiration date or incorrect reagent
is invalid. information, such as
expiration date, etc.
C05003 Reagent N/A The bar code length Wrong bar code is Replace reagent bottle,
bar code is is incorrect; or the used and the system or contact reagent
incorrect key of closed cannot analyze the supplier to replace.
and does reagent bar code is reagent information.
not meet incorrect and
the cannot be analyzed.
requiremen
ts.
C06001 LIS N/A The LIS version does Host file is damaged 1.Reboot operating
initializatio not match or does or does not exist. software; initialize LIS
n error not exist; or the module
TCP/IP protocol 2. Re-install the
stack is abnormal. Operating Software.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C06002 LIS N/A The IP address or Host parameters 1. Check system
communica port number of the error configuration
tion LIS, communication parameters; re-connect
parameter protocol, or delay LIS
error time are set 2. Rerun the operating
incorrectly. software.
3. Re-install the
Operating Software.
C06003 LIS N/A LIS communication Communication 1. Check LIS
communica error failure connection.
tion error 2. Analyze the log.
C06004 LIS host N/A Three attempts to Abnormal network 1.Check LIS connection
cannot be connect the LIS host connection, or the and network cable;
connected fail. LIS host is not Check if LIS host and
started. LIS station can start
normally.
2. Contact LIS supplier
to check LIS system.
3. If LIS supplier cannot
find the cause, request
the log.
C06005 The results N/A The computer Communication 1. Check LIS
of the succeeds in sending failure connection.
sample sample results to 2. Contact LIS supplier
cannot be the LIS host, but to check LIS system.
transferred receives no correct 3. Analyze the log.
to the LIS response when the
host. specified time is
reached.
C06006 Sending N/A When sample Communication 1. Check LIS
sample results are sent, no failure connection.
information response is received 2. Contact LIS supplier
failed. or response is time to check LIS system.
out. 3. Analyze the log.
C06007 Inquiring N/A When a sample LIS host failure. 1. Check LIS
sample query request is connection.
information sent successfully, no 2. Contact LIS supplier
failed correct response is to check LIS system.
received within 300 3. Analyze the log.
seconds.
C06008 Downloadin N/A The sample Incorrect channel 1. Check LIS
g sample information queried settings; or connection.
failed on the LIS does not insufficient or 2. Contact LIS supplier
include the redundant to check LIS system.
keywords, such as chemistries on the 3. Analyze the log.
sample ID, bar code LIS host.
and chemistries.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C07101 Reagent is N/A N/A All reagents of the Refill or replace the
exhausted. reagent type for the reagent.
chemistry are less
than the minimum
limit. All reagents of
the type are too little
to be detected.
C07102 Sample N/A N/A All sample diluent in Refill or replace the
diluent is the reagent bottles is reagent.
less than less than the
X%. minimum limit. Or
sample diluent is too
little to be detected.
C07103 Sample N/A N/A All sample diluent in Refill or replace the
diluent is the reagent bottles is sample diluent.
used up. less than the
minimum limit. Or
sample diluent is too
little to be detected.
C07104 Less N/A N/A All reagents of the Refill or replace the
than %s reagent type for the reagent.
tests are chemistry are less
left in than the minimum
immunologi limit. All reagents of
cal reagent the type are too little
Chemistry: to be detected.
%s
Position: %s
C07023 Calibration N/A Compared with the The calibration Recalibrate the
of one or Validity Period of factors are about to chemistries.
more Calibration be expired.
chemistries Parameters
will be periodically.
expired
C07027 Calibrator N/A Compared with the Calibrator is expired. Replace the calibrator.
%s has been expiration date of
expired Calibrators
periodically.
C07028 Chemistry: RGTE Compared with the The reagent is Replace the reagent.
%s, lot expiration date of expired.
number: %s reagents
, periodically.
position: %s
, has been
expired

17.3 Error Code
Code
C07029 Chemistry: RGTE Compared with the The uncapping time Replace the reagent.
%s, lot uncapping time of of the reagent pack is
number: %s reagents too long.
, periodically.
position: %s
, has
exceeded
the
uncapping
time
A00006 Main N/A N/A E2PROMread/write Switch off analyzing
control unit error. unit power and PC
E2PROM power and switch on
reading or again; Restore failure
writing on Utilities-->Daily
error. Maint page; If this
message appears for 3
times:
1. Burn again the main
control board program.
2. Replace the main
control board.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A01006 Sample N/A N/A Cause for Sample Corrective actions for
probe probe vertical Sample probe vertical
vertical movement error movement error
movement 1. The sample 1. Home the system.
error assembly is not reset 2. Check the cables and
1. The and normal signal of the home
component movement is not position sensor. Check
is not reset allowed currently. if the sensor and its
or 2. Before and after shield are loose, motor
calibrated. the movement, the is jammed and belt and
2. The zero software detects the its belt wheel are
position status of the sensor loose.
sensor is in and gives out the 3. Check the cables and
incorrect alarm. signal of the home
status. 3. During home position sensor. Check
3. The process, the signal of if the sensor and its
mechanical home position sensor shield are loose, motor
zero is not received and is jammed and belt and
position is mechanical zero its belt wheel are
not found point is not found. loose.
during The analyzer cannot 4. Check if the
calibration. be reset. mechanical positions
4. Vertical 4. Vertical bumping are correct, if probe is
bumping sensor is triggered bent bumping sensor.
occurs when the sample Check the cables and
when it probe is not signal of the home
does not aspirating sample. position sensor. Check
aspirate. 1) Bumping occurs. the sensor to see if its
5. Collision 2) Signal error. shield are loose.
error: 3) Jamming occurs. 5. Check the cables and
6. Moving signal of the anti-
5. Before resetting,
vertically is bumping sensor. Check
the system detects if
not allowed the sensor to see if its
bumping signal is
in current shield are loose.
received. After the
horizontal sample probe lift up 6. Related to the
position. 6mm, the system operation. Need no
7. finds bumping signal reparation.
Deviation is received. 7. Check the cables and
from the 6. In the signal of the home
mechanical non-defining position sensor. Check
zero horizontal positions, if the sensor and its
position is vertical movement is shield are loose, motor
out of allowed, otherwise is jammed and belt and
range. bumping with the its belt wheel are
Sample panel may occurs. loose.
probe 7. Losing step causes Corrective actions for
horizontal no sensor jump edge Sample probe
movement at the zero point is horizontal movement
error found. error
1. The Cause for Sample 1. Home the system.
component probe horizontal 2. Check the cables and
is not reset movement error signal of the home
or
1. The sample position sensor. Check
calibrated.
assembly is not reset if the sensor and its
2. The zero and normal shield are loose, motor
17-18 position movement is not is jammed
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence and belt
Immunoassay and
Analyzer
sensor is in allowed currently. its belt
Service wheel
Manual are
Version: 1.0
incorrect loose.
2. Before and after
status.
the movement, the 3. Check the cables and
17.3 Error Code
Code
A01007 Sample N/A N/A Cause for Sample Check if the
probe probe vertical mechanical positions
vertical movement error are correct, if probe is
movement Vertical bumping bent bumping sensor.
error sensor is triggered: Check the cables and
1. Collision 1) Bumping occurs.2) signal of the home
occurs signal error position sensor. Check
during 3)Jamming occurs the sensor to see if its
aspirating: shield are loose.
A01201 Clog N/A N/A Check if connection Check relevant cable
detection between clog for any signs of fray or
board detection board and loose cable, or
communica wash control is disconnection, or short
tion error normal; circuit;
Clog detection board 2. Check if the power
error. indication light for clog
detection board is on
properly; check if clog
detection board is
working correctly;
Replace clog detection
board if malfunction
has been identified.
A01202 Sample N/A Too much aspiration The aspirate volume Define the aspirate
syringe causes the syringe is beyond the range volume correctly.
aspirates exceed the forward of the syringe.
too much extreme position.
A01203 Sample N/A Too much The dispense volume Define the dispense
syringe dispensing causes is beyond the range volume correctly.
dispenses the syringe exceed of the syringe.
too much the home position.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A01204 Sample SMPL N/A 1.No sample is 1. Check if there is
probe fails loaded on the sufficient sample, and
to detect designated position; run the test again;
liquid level 2.Insufficient If there are level
when sample; detection error, check
aspirating 3.Sample probe level sample probe, level
1. Sample detection error. detection board and
probe fails connecting cable;
to detect replace if any
liquid level abnormity is identified.
in the
diluting
position.
2.No
special
wash
solution is
detected
during
aspirating.
3.The
sample
probe fails
to detect
liquid level
on sample
rack when
aspirating.
A01205 Sample N/A Dispense volume is Inner logic error of After the tests, home
probe greater than the the software the system.
dispenses aspirate volume!
insufficient
sample
A01206 Sample SMPL N/A 1. The sample is not 1. Check if there is
probe placed on the sufficient sample, and
aspirates to-be-tested sample run the test again;
nothing. position or sample If level detection error
volume is is identified, check
1. Special insufficient. sample probe, level
wash Sample probe level detection board and
solution is detection error. connecting cable;
aspirated. 3.Clog detection replace if any
2.Sample error. abnormity is identified.
probe If clog detection error
aspirates is identified, check if
sample on there is loose
the sample connection or liquid
rack. leakage in sample
probe hydro system.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A01207 Sample SMPL N/A Sample contains clots Check if sample has
probe is or insufficient been pre-processed
clogged sample; properly; check if
when Sample probe hydro sample contains foreign
aspirating error. matters such as clot;
1. Special Clog detection check if there is
wash system error. sufficient sample;
solution is 2. Clean the sample
aspirated. probe with diluted
2.Sample wash solution. If the
probe problem remains,
aspirates remove the sample
sample on probe and unclog it.
the sample Check if hydro is
rack. normal, especially if
there is any air bubbles
in clog detection
pressure sensor;
4. Check clog detection
board and clog
detection pressure
sensor, if previous two
possible causes have
been eliminated.
A01208 Sample N/A N/A 1.Sample probe is 1.Clean the sample
probe is clogged; probe with special
clogged 2.Sample probe wash solution. Remove
during hydro error. the sample probe and
cleaning unclog it.
2.Check if sample
probe tubing, pump
and valve for interior
wash is normal;
3.Check clog detection
board and clog
detection pressure
sensor.
A01209 Sample N/A N/A 1.Cable error for 1.Check relevant cable
probe level communication for any signs of fray or
detection between level loose cable, or
board data detection board and disconnection, or short
receiving smart modules circuit.
error 2. Change reagent
probe level sense
board.
3. Change reagent
control drive board.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A01210 Sample N/A N/A 1.Cable error for 1.Check relevant cable
board detection board and disconnection, or short
self-calibra smart modules; circuit;
ting failed 2.Sample probe 2.Check if sample
error, or connection probe is installed
error between correctly; check if
sample probe and sample probe is bent,
level detection cracked or loose;
board; Check if level detection
3. Sample probe level board is normal;
detection board replace it if not.
error. 4. Replace the sample
probe.
A01211 Sample N/A N/A 1.No sample or the 1. Check if the sample
probe fails sample volume is volume is sufficient.
to detect insufficient. After restoring the
liquid level 2.Sample probe level system, start the test
when detection error. again.
aspirating, 2.If level detection
causing the error is identified,
sample check sample probe,
probe is level detection board
forbidden. and connecting cable;
1.Sample replace if any
probe is abnormity is identified.
aspirating
in the
diluting
position.
2. Aspirate
special
wash
solution.
3. Sample
probe is
aspirating
on the
sample
rack.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A01212 Sample N/A N/A 1. The sample is not 1. Check if there is
probe placed on the sufficient sample, and
aspirates to-be-tested sample run the test again;
nothing, position or sample If level detection error
causing the volume is is identified, check
sample insufficient. sample probe, level
probe is Sample probe level detection board and
forbidden. detection error. connecting cable;
3.Clog detection replace if any
error. abnormity is identified.
If clog detection error
is identified, check if
there is loose
connection or liquid
leakage in sample
probe hydro system.
A01213 Sample N/A N/A Sample contains clots 1.Check if sample has
probe is or insufficient been pre-processed
clogged, sample; properly; check if
causing the Sample probe hydro sample contains foreign
sample error. matters such as clot;
probe is Clog detection check if there is
forbidden. system error. sufficient sample;
2. Clean the sample
probe with diluted
wash solution. If the
problem remains,
remove the sample
probe and unclog it.
3.Check if hydro is
normal, especially if
there is any air bubbles
in clog detection
pressure sensor;
Check clog detection
board and clog
detection pressure
sensor, if previous two
possible causes have
been eliminated.
clogged 2.Sample probe wash solution. Remove
during hydro error. the sample probe and
sample unclog it.
probe 2.Check clog detection
wash, board and clog
causing the detection pressure
sample sensor.
probe is
forbidden.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A30001 Reagent N/A N/A Reagent probe Reagent probe vertical
probe vertical movement movement error
vertical error 1. Home the system.
movement 1. The sample 2. Check the cables and
error assembly is not reset signal of the home
1. The and normal position sensor. Check
component movement is not if the sensor and its
is not reset allowed currently. shield are loose, motor
or 2. Before and after is jammed and belt and
calibrated. the movement, the its belt wheel are
2. The zero software detects the loose.
position status of the sensor 3. Check the cables and
sensor is in and gives out the signal of the home
incorrect alarm. position sensor. Check
status. 3. During home if the sensor and its
3. The process, the signal of shield are loose, motor
mechanical home position sensor is jammed and belt and
zero is not received and its belt wheel are
position is mechanical zero loose.
not found point is not found. 4. Check if the
during The analyzer cannot mechanical positions
calibration. be reset. are correct, if probe is
4. Vertical 4. Vertical bumping bent bumping sensor.
bumping sensor is triggered Check the cables and
occurs when the sample signal of the home
when it probe is not position sensor. Check
does not aspirating the sensor to see if its
aspirate. sample.1)Bumping shield are loose.
5. Collision occurs. 2) Signal 5. Check the cables and
error: error.3)Jamming signal of the anti-
6. Moving occurs. bumping sensor. Check
vertically is 5. Before resetting, the sensor to see if its
not allowed the system detects if shield are loose.
in current bumping signal is 6. Related to the
horizontal received. After the operation. Need no
position. sample probe lift up reparation.
7. 6mm, the system 7. Check the cables and
Deviation finds bumping signal signal of the home
from the is received. position sensor. Check
mechanical 6. In the if the sensor and its
zero non-defining shield are loose, motor
position is horizontal positions, is jammed and belt and
out of vertical movement is its belt wheel are
range. allowed,otherwise loose.
Reagent bumping with the Reagent probe
probe panel may occurs. horizontal movement
horizontal 7. Losing step causes error
movement no sensor jump edge 1. Home the system.
error at the zero point is
2. Check the cables and
1. The found.
signal of the home
component Reagent probe position sensor. Check
is not reset horizontal movement if the sensor and its
or error shield are loose, motor
calibrated. 1. The sample is jammed and belt and
2. The zero assembly is not reset its belt wheel are
17-24 position and
CL-2000i&CL-2200i normal loose.Immunoassay Analyzer
Chemiluminescence
sensor is in movement is not 3. Service
CheckManual Version:
the cables and1.0
incorrect allowed currently. signal of the home
status. 2. Before and after position sensor. Check
the movement, the
17.3 Error Code
Code
A30002 Reagent N/A N/A 4. Vertical bumping Check if the
probe sensor is triggered mechanical positions
vertical 1)Bumping occurs. 2) are correct, if probe is
movement Signal bent bumping sensor.
error error.3)Jamming Check the cables and
1. Collision occurs. signal of the home
occurs position sensor. Check
during the sensor to see if its
aspirating: shield are loose.
A30003 Reagent N/A Too much aspiration The aspirate volume Define the aspirate
syringe causes the syringe is beyond the range volume correctly.
aspirates exceed the forward of the syringe.
too much extreme position.
A30004 Reagent N/A Too much The dispense volume Define the dispense
syringe dispensing causes is beyond the range volume correctly.
dispenses the syringe to of the syringe.
too much exceed the home
position.
A30005 Insufficient RGTL Dispense volume is Inner logic error of After the tests, home
reagent greater than the the software the system.
dispensing aspirate volume!
volume
A30006 Reagent N/A N/A 1.Cable error for 1.Check relevant cable
board data detection board and disconnection, or short
receiving smart modules circuit;
error 2. Change reagent
probe level sense board
3. Change reagent
A30007 Reagent N/A N/A 1.Cable error for 1.Check relevant cable
board detection board and disconnection, or short
self-calibra smart modules; circuit;
ting failed 2.Reagent probe 2.Check if reagent
error or level probe is installed
detection board correctly; check if
connection error; reagent probe is bent,
3. Reagent probe cracked or loose;
level detection error. Check if level detection
board is normal;
replace it if not.
4. Replace the reagent
probe.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A30008 Reagent RGTL N/A 1. Reagent is not 1. Check if the reagent
probe loaded in the is sufficient, and then
aspirates to-be-tested reagent try again.
no reagent position or reagent 2. If level detection
on the volume is error is identified,
reagent insufficient. check reagent probe,
carousel. 2.Reagent probe level detection board
level detection error. and connecting cable;
replace if any
abnormity is identified.
A30009 Reagent RGTL N/A 1. Insufficient 1. Check if the reagent
probe fails reagent, or air is sufficient and the
to detect bubbles exist in the reagent bottle contains
liquid level reagent bottle. air bubbles, and then
after 2.Reagent probe try again.
dispensing. level detection error. 2. If level detection
error is identified,
check reagent probe,
level detection board
and connecting cable;
replace if any
A30010 Reagent N/A N/A 1. Insufficient 1. Check if the reagent
probe fails reagent, or air is sufficient and the
to detect bubbles exist in the reagent bottle contains
liquid level reagent bottle. air bubbles, and then
after 2.Reagent probe try again.
dispensing, level detection error. 2. If level detection
causing error is identified,
reagent check reagent probe,
probe is level detection board
forbidden. and connecting cable;
replace if any
A30011 Reagent N/A N/A 1. Reagent is not 1. Check if the reagent
probe loaded in the is sufficient, and then
aspirates to-be-tested reagent try again.
no reagent position or reagent 2. If level detection
on the volume is error is identified,
reagent insufficient. check reagent probe,
carousel 2.Reagent probe level detection board
several level detection error. and connecting cable;
times, replace if any
causing the abnormity is identified.
reagent
probe is
forbidden.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A31001 Reagent N/A N/A Carousel: 1. Check the cables and
carousel 1. Zero position signal of the zero
movement losing steps: Judging position sensor. Check
error the missed steps if the sensor and its
1. The after the carousel shield are loose, motor
reagent rotates one circle. is jammed and belt and
carousel The zero position its belt wheel are
missed sensor cannot find loose.
steps when the jump edge of the 2. Check the cables and
moving to sensor. signal of the coder
the zero 2. The coder losing sensor. Check if the
position. steps: Judging the sensor and its shield
2. The missed steps after are loose, motor is
coder the carousel rotates jammed and belt and
missed for one cuvette. The its belt wheel are
steps coder sensor cannot loose.
find the jump edge of
the sensor in the next
cuvette position.
A31002 Reagent N/A N/A 1. Reagent carousel 1. Restore the reagent
carousel is cover is opened carousel cover.
open forcibly. 2. Check if the cover
compulsivel 2. The cover sensor sensor is normal.
y while goes wrong.
reagent
carousel is
rotating.
A31003 Bar code N/A N/A Reagent bar code Recover the failure. If
reader does reader connection the error remains,
not work error due to system initialize the sample
normally. failure. If the error bar code reader. If
1. No bar repeats and cannot initialization cannot be
code be removed, then the performed, check if bar
received. bar code reader has code reader is
2. Received not performed the connected properly. If
bar code initialization the error remains, then
contains no normally or the replace the bar code
ending communication reader or the control
character. cables are drive board.
disconnected.
If bar code reader is
not available, please
try again.
A31004 Reagent N/A N/A The reagent carousel 1. Restore the reagent
carousel cover is not installed carousel cover.
cover is correctly. 2. Check if the cover
opened. 2. The cover sensor sensor is normal.
goes wrong.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A31005 Reagent N/A N/A The reagent carousel 1. Open the reagent
carousel cover is closed while carousel cover and
scanning the reagent carousel close it, and then try
failed. is rotating or it is scanning again.
opened while the 2. Check if the scanning
reagent carousel is window is dirty.
being scanned. 3. Check if there is
laser emitting. If there
is, adjust the scanning
position; if there is not,
restart the
initialization of the bar
code reader or replace
A06006 Reaction N/A N/A Carousel: 1. Check the cables and
error the missed steps if the sensor and its
1. Step after the carousel shield are loose, motor
missed rotates one circle. is jammed and belt and
when The zero position its belt wheel are
moving to sensor cannot find loose.
home the jump edge of the 2. Check the cables and
position. sensor. signal of the coder
2. The 2. The coder losing sensor. Check if the
coder steps: Judging the sensor and its shield
missed missed steps after are loose, motor is
steps the carousel rotates jammed and belt and
for one cuvette. The its belt wheel are
coder sensor cannot loose.
cuvette position.
A32001 The photon N/A N/A 1. The wires are not 1. Disconnect the
counting properly connected. relevant wires of the
board does 2. Communication photometer and
not error. connect them again.
respond. 3.The photon 2. Power off the
counting board is analyzer and restart
damaged or its logic the analyzer.
is corrupted. 3. Change the photon
counting board or
re-burn its logic
program .
A32002 Turning off N/A N/A 1. Communication 1. Power off the
PMT fails. error. analyzer and restart
the analyzer.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A32003 PMT is not N/A N/A 1. The wires are not 1. Disconnect the
turned on. properly connected. relevant wires of the
2. Communication photometer and
error. connect them again.
3.The photon 2. Power off the
counting board or
re-burn its logic
program .
A32004 Dark N/A N/A 1. The wires are not 1. Disconnect the
current properly connected. relevant wires of the
count is out 2. Communication photometer and
of range. error. connect them again.
3.The photon 2. Power off the
counting board or
re-burn its logic
program .
A32005 Failed to N/A N/A 1. The wires are not 1. Reconnect the LED
turn on the properly connected. wires.
LED. 2. Communication 2. Power off the
error. analyzer and restart
3. LED assembly is the analyzer.
damaged. 3. Change the LED
assembly.
A32006 Failed to N/A N/A 1. Communication 1. Power off the
turn off the error. analyzer and restart
LED. the analyzer.
A32007 DCF is out DCFF N/A 1. PMT assembly is 1. Adjust the sensitivity
of range. aged. of the high voltage
increase assembly
(configure the high
voltage parameter) and
execute the
initialization of the
photometer. Power off
the analyzer and then
power on again.
2. If the problem
remains, change the
whole photometer
assembly.
A32008 DCF is DCFF N/A 1. PMT assembly is 1. Replacing
violently aged. photometer assembly
fluctuating.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A32009 Dark N/A N/A 1.PD 1. Change PD
current is pre-amplification pre-amplification
too strong. board is aged. board.
A32010 Dark N/A N/A 2.PD 2. Change PD
current is pre-amplification pre-amplification
too weak. board is aged. board.
A33001 Dispersion N/A N/A Carousel: 1. Check the cables and
error. the missed steps if the sensor and its
1. Step after the carousel shield are loose, motor
missed rotates one circle. is jammed and belt and
when The zero position its belt wheel are
moving to sensor cannot find loose.
home the jump edge of the 2. Check the cables and
position. sensor. signal of the coder
2. The 2. The coder losing sensor. Check if the
coder steps: Judging the sensor and its shield
missed missed steps after are loose, motor is
steps the carousel rotates jammed and belt and
for one cuvette. The its belt wheel are
coder sensor cannot loose.
cuvette position.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A34001 Aspirate N/A N/A Aspirate station Aspirate station
station vertical movement vertical movement
vertical error. error.
error. assembly is not reset 2. Check the cables and
1. Aspirate and normal signal of the home
station is movement is not position sensor. Check
not allowed currently. if the sensor and its
calibrated. 2. Before and after shield are loose, motor
2. Sensor the movement, the is jammed and belt and
status error software detects the its belt wheel are
of the status of the sensor loose.
aspirate and gives out the 3. Check the cables and
station alarm. signal of the home
3. Aspirate 3. During home position sensor. Check
Station process, the signal of if the sensor and its
Calibration home position sensor shield are loose, motor
failed. is not received and is jammed and belt and
4. mechanical zero its belt wheel are
Deviation is point is not found. loose.
too big The analyzer cannot 4. Check the cables and
when be reset. signal of the home
aspirate 4. Losing step causes position sensor. Check
station no sensor jump edge if the sensor and its
moves to at the zero point is shield are loose, motor
the zero found. is jammed and belt and
position. its belt wheel are
loose.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A35001 Dispense N/A N/A Dispense station Dispense station
station vertical movement vertical movement
vertical error. error.
movement 1. Sensor status 1. Sensor status error.
error. error. Check if belt or belt
1. Dispense Belt or belt pulley is wheel is loose, tighten
station is loose. them if so;
not 2. Finding the zero 2. Finding the zero
calibrated. position failed or position failed or
2. Sensor passing zero position passing zero position
status error offset is too large. offset is too large.
of the 1) Assembly is 1) Remove obstacle
dispense jammed; or replace with a new
station assembly;
2) Driving circuit
3. Dispense error; 2) Replace PCB;
Station
3) Vertical motor 3) Replace motor;
Calibration
error; 4) Replace sensor;
failed.
4) Vertical sensor 5) Tighten properly;
4.
error; 6) Check the sensor
Deviation is
too big 5) Belt pulley is cable.
when loose;
dispense 6) Sensor cables
station fall off.
moves to
the zero
position.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A35002 Dispersion N/A N/A Dispense station Dispense station
syringe vertical movement vertical movement
movement error. error.
error. 1. The sample 1. Home the system.
1. assembly is not reset 2. Check the cables and
Dispersion and normal signal of the home
syringe is movement is not position sensor. Check
not allowed currently. if the sensor and its
calibrated. 2. Before and after shield are loose, motor
2. the movement, the is jammed and belt and
Dispersion software detects the its belt wheel are
syringe status of the sensor loose.
sensor and gives out the 3. Check the cables and
error. alarm. signal of the home
3. 3. During home position sensor. Check
Dispersion process, the signal of if the sensor and its
syringe home position sensor shield are loose, motor
calibration is not received and is jammed and belt and
fails. mechanical zero its belt wheel are
4. point is not found. loose.
Dispersion The analyzer cannot 4. Check the cables and
syringe be reset. signal of the home
passing 4. Losing step causes position sensor. Check
zero no sensor jump edge if the sensor and its
position at the zero point is shield are loose, motor
offset is too found. is jammed and belt and
large. its belt wheel are
loose.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A35003 Substrate N/A N/A Substrate syringe Substrate syringe
syringe movement error. movement error.
error. assembly is not reset 2. Check the cables and
1. and normal signal of the home
Substrate movement is not position sensor. Check
syringe is allowed currently. if the sensor and its
not 2. Before and after shield are loose, motor
calibrated. the movement, the is jammed and belt and
2. software detects the its belt wheel are
Substrate status of the sensor loose.
syringe and gives out the 3. Check the cables and
sensor alarm. signal of the home
error. 3. During home position sensor. Check
3. process, the signal of if the sensor and its
Substrate home position sensor shield are loose, motor
syringe is not received and is jammed and belt and
calibration mechanical zero its belt wheel are
fails. point is not found. loose.
4. The analyzer cannot 4. Check the cables and
Substrate be reset. signal of the home
syringe 4. Losing step causes position sensor. Check
passing no sensor jump edge if the sensor and its
zero at the zero point is shield are loose, motor
position found. is jammed and belt and
offset is too its belt wheel are
large. loose.
A35004 Vortex N/A N/A Vortex motor rotates Check the sensor cables
motor has along with the and the sensor and
too high synchronous belt and shield installation
rotation optical coupler status . Check if the
speed. sensor on the motor is rotating and if
pressure head is the belt and belt wheel
blocked each circle are loose.
to measure the Modify the PWM
speed. parameter of vortex
control.
motor has along with the and the sensor and
too low synchronous belt and shield installation
rotation optical coupler status . Check if the
speed. sensor on the motor is rotating and if
to measure the Modify the PWM
speed. parameter of vortex
control.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A35006 Air bubbles CSDB N/A Air bubbles are 1. Air bubbles are
are detected during detected during
detected substrate dispensing substrate dispensing
during process. process.
substrate 1. Air bubbles in the Check if there are
dispensing substrate dispensing bubbles in the tube, if
process. tubing. the tube are broken, if
2. Substrate tube connection is
dispensing tubing is normal. If it is normal,
damaged or the not perform substrate
properly connected. prime. If abnormal,
change or reconnect
the tube and then
perform substrate
prime.
2. Replace sensor;
3. Replace substrate air
bubble detection
board.
4. Replace dispersion

17.3 Error Code
Code
A12005 Reaction T1 N/A 1. The ambient 1. Reboot the analyzer.
carousel temperature is out of Observe ambient
temperatur range. temperature through
e is out of 2. The temperature the Status screen, to
range sensor goes wrong. check if temperature is
(component error, out of range.
cable error) 2. Check temperature
3. The temperature sensor(Normal
protection switch resistance 1140 ):
goes wrong. check for any signs of
(component error, short circuit or broken
cable error) circuit; check if
4.The heater goes connections are secure.
wrong. (component 3. Check temperature
error, cable error) protection switch:
5. PCB error check if protection
6. Parameters are switch is shut and
lost. connections are secure.
4. Heater error: check
7. Electromagnetic
if resistance under
interference exists.
normal temperature is
correct, and
connections are secure.
5. PCB error(fluidics
temperature control
board )
7. Parameters are lost:
check if temperature
control parameters are
correct.
8. Electromagnetic

17.3 Error Code
Code
A12101 Dispersion T2 N/A 1. The ambient Reproduce failure.
range. sensor goes wrong. check if temperature is
cable error) Temperature sensor
3. The temperature error: check for any
protection switch signs of short circuit or
goes wrong. broken circuit; check if
(component error, connections are secure.
cable error) Temperature
4.The heater goes protection switch
wrong. (component error: check if
error, cable error) protection switch is
5. PCB error shut and connections
6. Parameters are are secure.
lost. 5. Heater error: check
7. Electromagnetic if resistance under
interference exists. normal temperature is
correct, and
6. PCB error
correct.
8. Electromagnetic

17.3 Error Code
Code
A12102 Substrate T3 N/A 1. The ambient Reproduce failure.
preheating temperature is out of Observe ambient
range. sensor goes wrong. check if temperature is
cable error) Temperature sensor
3. The temperature error: check for any
protection switch signs of short circuit or
goes wrong. broken circuit; check if
(component error, connections are secure.
cable error) Temperature
4.The heater goes protection switch
wrong. (component error: check if
error, cable error) protection switch is
5. PCB error shut and connections
6. Parameters are are secure.
lost. 5. Heater error: check
7. Electromagnetic if resistance under
interference exists. normal temperature is
correct, and
6. PCB error
correct.
8. Electromagnetic

17.3 Error Code
Code
A14006 Reagent N/A N/A 1. The ambient 1. Reboot the analyzer.
refrigeratio temperature is out of Observe ambient
n range. temperature through
temperatur 2. The temperature the Status screen, to
e is out of sensor goes wrong. check if temperature is
range. (component error, out of range.
4. The radiator goes connections are secure.
5. The fan goes check if protection
wrong. (component switch is shut and
error, cable error) connections are secure.
6. PCB error 4.Check the current of
the radiator; check if
7. Parameters are
radiator is broken, and
lost.
8. Electromagnetic
5. Fan error: check if
fan is working normally,
and connections are
secure.
6. PCB error
reconfigure
parameters.
8. Electromagnetic
A14011 Reagent N/A N/A 1. The fan is blocked. Reproduce failure.
refrigeratin 2. The fan is Pull off and plug in fan
g fan 1 is damaged. socket.
abnormal. 3. The power supply Check if power supply
goes wrong. for fan is normal.
Clean dust off the fan.
Replace fan.
A14012 Reagent N/A N/A 1. The fan is blocked. Reproduce failure.
refrigeratin 2. The fan is Pull off and plug in fan
g fan 2 is damaged. socket.
abnormal. 3. The power supply Check if power supply
Replace fan.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A14014 Vacuum N/A N/A 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Reproduce failure.
pump fan is 2. The fan is Pull off and plug in fan
abnormal damaged. socket.
3. The power supply Check if power supply
Replace fan.
A12009 Internal N/A N/A 1. The ambient 1. Reboot the analyzer.
temperatur temperature is out of Observe ambient
e of the range. temperature through
whole unit 2.The cooling fan the Status screen, to
is out of goes wrong. check if temperature is
range 3.The dust screen is out of range.
blocked. 2. Check if cooling fan
4.The air vent is is OK.
blocked in the 3. Check if dust screen
specified range. is blocked and needs
5. Ambient cleaning.
temperature sensor 4. Check if air vent is
error. blocked within
specified distance.
5. Check if the senor is
normal(normal
resistance is 5K)

17.3 Error Code
Code
A36001 The first N/A N/A The first gripper The first gripper moves
gripper moves incorrectly in incorrectly in X
moves X direction. direction.
incorrectly 1. Before the first 1. Check the cables and
in X gripper is reset, X signal of the home
direction. axis moves to the position sensor. Check
1. Status of most distant position if the sensor and its
the home and the block signal shield are loose, motor
position of the home sensor is is jammed and belt and
sensor is not detected. its belt wheel are
not 2. During home loose.
correct.(fai process, the signal of 2. Check the cables and
ling to find calibration position signal of the zero
the home sensor is not received position sensor. Check
position) and mechanical zero if the sensor and its
2. point is not found. shield are loose, motor
calibration The analyzer cannot is jammed and belt and
failed. be reset. its belt wheel are
3. Moving in 3. The probe does loose.
X direction not lift up and 3. Misoperation. No
is not horizontal movement need to troubleshoot.
allowed in is not allowed. 4. Check the cables and
current 4. Losing step causes signal of the zero
vertical no sensor jump edge position sensor. Check
position. at the zero point is if the sensor and its
4. Error of found. shield are loose, motor
passing 5. Before and after is jammed and belt and
zero the movement, the its belt wheel are
position is software detects the loose.
great. status of the sensor 5. Check the cables and
5. The zero and gives out the signal of the zero
position alarm. position sensor. Check
sensor is in if the sensor and its
incorrect shield are loose, motor
status. is jammed and belt and
its belt wheel are
loose.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A36002 The first N/A N/A The first gripper The first gripper moves
gripper moves incorrectly in incorrectly in X
moves Y direction. direction.
incorrectly 1. During home 1. Check the cables and
in Y process, the signal of signal of the zero
direction. calibration position position sensor. Check
1. sensor is not received if the sensor and its
calibration and mechanical zero shield are loose, motor
failed. point is not found. is jammed and belt and
2. Moving in The analyzer cannot its belt wheel are
Y direction be reset. loose.
is not 2. The probe does 2. Misoperation. No
allowed in not lift up and need to troubleshoot.
current horizontal movement 3. Check the cables and
vertical is not allowed. signal of the zero
position. 3. Losing step causes position sensor. Check
3. Error of no sensor jump edge if the sensor and its
passing at the zero point is shield are loose, motor
zero found. is jammed and belt and
position is 4. Before and after its belt wheel are
great. the movement, the loose.
4. The zero software detects the 4. Check the cables and
position status of the sensor signal of the zero
sensor is in and gives out the position sensor. Check
incorrect alarm. if the sensor and its
status. shield are loose, motor
is jammed and belt and
its belt wheel are
loose.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A36003 First N/A N/A First gripper vertical First gripper vertical
gripper movement error. movement error.
vertical 1. Before and after 1. Check the cables and
movement the movement, the signal of the zero
error. software detects the position sensor. Check
1. The status of the sensor if the sensor and its
calibration and gives out the shield are loose, motor
position alarm. is jammed and belt and
sensor is in 2. During home its belt wheel are
incorrect process, the signal of loose.
status. calibration position 2. Check the cables and
2. sensor is not received signal of the zero
calibration and mechanical zero position sensor. Check
failed. point is not found. if the sensor and its
3. Vertical The analyzer cannot shield are loose, motor
collision be reset. is jammed and belt and
4. Collision 3. Vertical bumping its belt wheel are
error: sensor is triggered: loose.
5. Moving 1) Bumping occurs.2) 3. Check if the gripping
vertically is signal error mechanical position is
not allowed 3)Jamming occurs correct, if foreign
in current 4. Before resetting, substances are left in
horizontal the system detects if the holes, if the
position. bumping signal is cuvette is deformed.
received. After the Check the cables and
6. Error of
sample probe lift up signal of anti-bumping
passing
6mm, the system sensor. Check if the
zero
finds bumping signal sensor and its shield
position is
is received. are loose, if the motor
great.
is jammed and if the
7. The 5. When the
belt and the belt wheel
middle horizontal position is
are loose.
position not the defining
position. 4. Check the cables and
sensor is in
signal of the anti-
incorrect 6. Losing step causes
bumping sensor. Check
status. no zero position
the sensor to see if its
sensor jump edge at
shield are loose and
the zero point is
check if the assemblies
found.
are jammed.
7. Losing step causes
5. Related to the
middle position
operation. Need no
sensor jump edge at
reparation.
the middle point is
found. 6. Check the cables and
signal of the zero
position sensor. Check
if the sensor and its
shield are loose, motor
its belt wheel are
loose.
signal of the middle
its belt wheel 17-43 are
loose.
17.3 Error Code
Code
A36004 First N/A N/A First gripper First gripper movement
gripper movement error. error.
movement 1. During home 1. Check the cables and
error. process, the signal of signal of the home
1. home position sensor position sensor. Check
calibration is not received and if the sensor and its
failed. mechanical zero shield are loose, motor
2. The point is not found. is jammed and belt and
calibration The analyzer cannot its belt wheel are
position be reset. loose.
sensor is in 2. Before and after 2. Check the cables and
incorrect the movement, the signal of the home
status. software detects the position sensor. Check
3. Error of status of the home if the sensor and its
passing position sensor and shield are loose, motor
zero gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
position is 3. Losing step causes its belt wheel are
great. no home position loose.
sensor jump edge at 3. Check the cables and
the zero point is signal of the home
found. position sensor. Check
its belt wheel are
loose.
A36005 The first N/A N/A The following three 1. Check if the cuvettes
gripper conditions will lead are missing in the tray.
grips to the gripper 2. Check if the cuvettes
nothing. gripping nothing: are deformed or
1)No cuvette is damaged.
placed in the 3. Check if the gripper
gripping position. spring or other parts
2)The cuvette is fall off.
deformed or jammed 4. Check if there is dirt
in the gripping or liquid inside of the
position.3) gripping gripper or in the
position deviates, cuvette. If there is,
causing no cuvette clean it.
gripped.
5. Check the
mechanical gripping
and releasing position.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A37001 Second N/A N/A Second gripper Second gripper
gripper horizontal movement horizontal movement
horizontal error. error.
movement 1. Before and after 1. Check the cables and
error. the movement, the signal of the home
1.The home software detects the position sensor. Check
position status of the home if the sensor and its
sensor is in position sensor and shield are loose, motor
incorrect gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
status. 2. During home its belt wheel are
2. process, the signal of loose.
Horizontal home position sensor 2. Check the cables and
calibration is not received and signal of the home
failed. mechanical zero position sensor. Check
3. point is not found. if the sensor and its
Horizontal The analyzer cannot shield are loose, motor
collision be reset. is jammed and belt and
4. Moving 3. Horizontal sensor its belt wheel are
horizontall does not detect the loose.
y is not jump edge within 3. Check the cables and
allowed in certain steps and signal of the anti
current judges horizontal bumping sensor.
position bumping occurs. Check if the sensor and
5. Error of 4. The probe does its shield are loose,
passing not lift up and motor is jammed and
zero horizontal movement belt and its belt wheel
position is is not allowed. are loose.
great. 5. Losing step causes 4. Misoperation. No
no sensor jump edge need to troubleshoot.
at the zero point is 5. Check the cables and
found. signal of the home
its belt wheel are
loose.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A37002 Second N/A N/A Second gripper Second gripper vertical
gripper vertical movement movement error.
vertical error. 1. Check the cables and
movement 1. Before and after signal of the zero
error. the movement, the position sensor. Check
1.The home software detects the if the sensor and its
position status of the sensor shield are loose, motor
sensor is in and gives out the is jammed and belt and
incorrect alarm. its belt wheel are
status. 2. During home loose.
2. process, the signal of 2. Check the cables and
calibration calibration position signal of the zero
failed. sensor is not received position sensor. Check
3. Vertical and mechanical zero if the sensor and its
collision point is not found. shield are loose, motor
4. Collision The analyzer cannot is jammed and belt and
error: be reset. its belt wheel are
3. Vertical bumping loose.
5. Moving
vertically is sensor is triggered 3. Check if the gripping
not allowed 1)Bumping occurs. 2) mechanical position is
in current Signal correct, if foreign
horizontal error.3)Jamming substances are left in
position. occurs. the holes, if the
4. Before resetting, cuvette is deformed.
6. Error of
the system detects if Check the cables and
passing
bumping signal is signal of anti-bumping
zero
received. After the sensor. Check if the
position is
sample probe lift up sensor and its shield
great.
6mm, the system are loose, if the motor
7.The is jammed and if the
finds bumping signal
vertical belt and the belt wheel
is received.
middle are loose.
position 5. When the
horizontal position is 4. Check the cables and
sensor is in
not the defining signal of the anti-
incorrect
position. bumping sensor. Check
status.
6. Losing step causes the sensor to see if its
no zero position shield are loose and
sensor jump edge at check if the assemblies
the zero point is are jammed.
found. 5. Related to the
7. Losing step causes operation. Need no
middle position reparation.
the middle point is signal of the zero
its belt wheel are
loose.
signal of the middle
its belt wheel are
loose.
17.3 Error Code
Code
A37003 Second N/A N/A Second gripper Second gripper
gripper movement error. movement error.
movement 1. During home 1. Check the cables and
error. process, the signal of signal of the home
1. home position sensor position sensor. Check
calibration is not received and if the sensor and its
failed. mechanical zero shield are loose, motor
2. The point is not found. is jammed and belt and
calibration The analyzer cannot its belt wheel are
position be reset. loose.
sensor is in 2. Before and after 2. Check the cables and
incorrect the movement, the signal of the home
status. software detects the position sensor. Check
3. Error of status of the home if the sensor and its
passing position sensor and shield are loose, motor
zero gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
position is 3. Losing step causes its belt wheel are
great. no home position loose.
the zero point is signal of the home
its belt wheel are
loose.
A37004 The second N/A N/A The following three 1. Check if the cuvettes
gripper conditions will lead are deformed or
grips to the gripper damaged.
nothing. gripping nothing: 2. Check if the gripper
1) No cuvette is spring or other parts
placed in the fall off.
gripping position. 3. Check if there is dirt
2)The cuvette is or liquid inside of the
deformed or jammed gripper or in the
in the gripping cuvette. If there is,
position. clean it.
3) gripping position 4. Check the
deviates, causing no mechanical gripping
cuvette gripped. and releasing position.
speed of along with the and the sensor and
reaction synchronous belt and shield installation
liquid is too optical coupler status . Check if the
high. sensor on the motor is rotating and if
to measure the
speed.

17.3 Error Code
Code
speed of along with the and the sensor and
reaction synchronous belt and shield installation
liquid is too optical coupler status . Check if the
low. sensor on the motor is rotating and if
to measure the
speed.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A38001 Cuvette N/A N/A Cuvette feeder Cuvette feeder
feeder movement error. movement error.
movement 1. Before and after 1. Check the cables and
error. the movement, the signal of the home
1. The zero software detects the position sensor. Check
position status of the home if the sensor and its
sensor is in position sensor and shield are loose, motor
incorrect gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
status. 2. Losing step causes its belt wheel are
2. Losing no sensor jump edge loose.
steps when at the zero point is 2. Check the cables and
passing the found. signal of the home
zero 3. During home position sensor. Check
position. process, the signal of if the sensor and its
3. Failed to home position sensor shield are loose, motor
find the is not received and is jammed and belt and
mechanical mechanical zero its belt wheel are
zero point is not found. loose.
position. The analyzer cannot 3. Check the cables and
4. Cuvette be reset. signal of the home
feeding 4. Feeder is jammed position sensor. Check
failed. and the sensor for if the sensor and its
5. The the feeding position shield are loose, motor
feeding goes wrong. is jammed and belt and
sensor is in 5. The sensor for the its belt wheel are
incorrect feeding position is loose.
status. reflexive and it does 4. Check the cause for
6. When not detect if there is the feeder jamming: 1)
the cuvette cuvette tray. cuvette tray is
tray are 6. Remove the deformed. 2) Feeder
loaded, the cuvette tray and the finger is deformed.3)
number of sensor for counting Guide rail finger is
the tray is the trays goes wrong. deformed.4) The
incorrect. The feeder is drawer is not properly
jammed. closed.5) The sensor
7. No new
for the feeding position
tray is left 7. No cuvette tray is
goes wrong.
and the left or the sensor for
movement counting the trays 5. Check if the cuvette
of the auto goes wrong. The trays are fed in the
feeder is feeder is jammed. correct position and if
forbidden. they are taken out.
Check the cables of the
sensor for the feeding
position and its signal.
6. Check if the cuvette
trays are taken away
sensor for counting
trays and its signal.
7. Check if no cuvette
trays are left. Check
the cables of the sensor
for counting trays and
its signal.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A38002 The tray N/A N/A After loading the Check if the tray
feeder cuvette, the tray drawer is closed.
drawer is drawer is not closed. Check for the foreign
not closed. The drawer is substances or
jammed. mechanical distortion
The sensor of the and the holder
drawer goes wrong. installation position.
sensor and check the
signal of the sensor.
A38003 There are N/A N/A The cuvette tray is Load new trays and
no cuvette taken away. reset the analyzer.
trays in the The sensor for the Check the cables of the
feeding feeding position sensor and check the
area. goes wrong or no tray signal of the sensor.
is detected.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A38004 Unloader N/A N/A Unloader movement Unloader movement
error. 1. Before and after 1. Check the cables and
1. The zero the movement, the signal of the home
position software detects the position sensor. Check
sensor is in status of the home if the sensor and its
incorrect position sensor and shield are loose, motor
status. gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
2. Losing 2. Losing step causes its belt wheel are
steps when no sensor jump edge loose.
passing the at the zero point is 2. Check the cables and
zero found. signal of the home
position. 3. During home position sensor. Check
3. Failed to process, the signal of if the sensor and its
find the home position sensor shield are loose, motor
mechanical is not received and is jammed and belt and
zero mechanical zero its belt wheel are
position. point is not found. loose.
4. Waste The analyzer cannot 3. Check the cables and
tray be reset. signal of the home
counting 4. During unloading position sensor. Check
error. the trays, system if the sensor and its
5.The gives out the alarm shield are loose, motor
unloader is when the sensor is jammed and belt and
jammed. detects the trays are its belt wheel are
full. loose.
6. The
water trays 5. When unloading 4. Check if the
are full. the trays to reach unloader is jammed
The 100mm, the system and if trays are
movement gives out the alarm deformed. Check the
of the when the sensor in drawer position and
unloader is the working position cables of the sensor for
forbidden. detects there is tray detecting full trays
still on the panel. and check the sensor
6. If the waste trays signal.
are full and not 5. Check if the
cleared in time, the unloader is jammed
system gives out the and if trays are
alarm when new deformed. Check the
waste trays need to drawer position and
be unloaded. cables of the working
position sensor and
check the sensor signal.
6. Check if the waste
trays are taken away
sensor for detecting
full trays and its signal.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A38005 The N/A N/A Waste tray is full. Remove the waste
unloading The sensor for trays.
area is full detecting full waste Check the cables of the
of waste trays goes wrong. sensor for detecting
trays. full waste trays and
check the signal of the
sensor.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A38006 Pusher N/A N/A Pusher movement Pusher movement
1. The zero the movement, the signal of the home
position software detects the position sensor. Check
sensor is in status of the home if the sensor and its
incorrect position sensor and shield are loose, motor
status. gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
2. Losing 2. Losing step causes its belt wheel are
steps when no sensor jump edge loose.
passing the at the zero point is 2. Check the cables and
3. Failed to process, the signal of if the sensor and its
find the home position sensor shield are loose, motor
mechanical is not received and is jammed and belt and
zero mechanical zero its belt wheel are
position. point is not found. loose.
4. The The analyzer cannot 3. Check the cables and
feeding be reset. signal of the home
sensor is in 4. The system gives position sensor. Check
incorrect out the alarm after if the sensor and its
status. the loader sensor shield are loose, motor
5. Cuvettes detects the trays. is jammed and belt and
are not 5. After the trays are its belt wheel are
pushed in pushed, the working loose.
place. position sensor does 4. Check if the loader is
6. No tray not detect the jammed and if trays are
is found cuvette trays. deformed. Check the
in the 6. The sensor for the cables of the feeding
feeding feeding position does position sensor and
position not detect the check the sensor signal.
before cuvette trays before 5. Check if the pusher
pushing pushing the trays. is jammed and if trays
cuvette. The trays cannot be are deformed. Check
7. Trays are pushed. the cables of the
found in 7. The working working position sensor
the working position sensor does and check the sensor
positions not detect the signal.
before cuvette trays before 6. Check if the waste
pushing pushing the trays. trays are removed, if
cuvette The trays cannot be the loader is jammed
pushed. and if trays are
deformed. Check the
cables of the feeding
position sensor and
check the sensor signal.
7. Check the cables of
the working position
sensor and check the
signal of the sensor.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A38007 Guide rail N/A N/A Pusher movement Pusher movement
1. Losing the movement, the signal of the home
steps when software detects the position sensor. Check
passing the status of the home if the sensor and its
zero position sensor and shield are loose, motor
position. gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
2. Failed to 2. Losing step causes its belt wheel are
find the no sensor jump edge loose.
mechanical at the zero point is 2. Check the cables and
3. The zero process, the signal of if the sensor and its
position home position sensor shield are loose, motor
sensor is in is not received and is jammed and belt and
incorrect mechanical zero its belt wheel are
status. point is not found. loose.
The analyzer cannot 3. Check the cables and
be reset. signal of the home
its belt wheel are
loose.
A39001 Releasing N/A N/A 1. Solenoid Valve 1. Reboot the analyzer.
vacuum SV16,SV17 or SV10 2. Check valve
failed. error. SV16,SV17 and SV10. If
2. Vacuum pump or they are abnormal,
external vacuum change or repair them.
pump error. 3. Check the vacuum
3. The vacuum sensor pump or external
goes wrong. vacuum pump. Change
or repair them.
4. Check the vacuum
sensor. Repair it or
change the pressure
detection board.
A39019 Liquid N/A N/A 1. Valve 1. Check if valve
accumulate SV10/SV16/SV17/SV0 SV10/SV16/SV17/SV03
d in 3 error. Releasing can be turned on or off
primary vacuum fails or waste normally.
vacuum outlet valve cannot 2. Check if P07 can be
container be turned on. turned on normally.
2.The waste pump 3.Check if waste drain
P07 goes wrong. tube is smooth.
3.The waste drain 4. Change the failed
tube is bent or parts.
clogged.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A39009 The waste N/A N/A 1.The waste pump Check if waste pump
tank is full. P07 goes wrong. can be turned on and
2.The waste drain off normally.
tube is bent or 2.Check if waste drain
clogged. tube is smooth.
3. Liquid level sensor 3. Check if the status of
FS07 of the waste FS07 is correct.
tank goes wrong. 4. Change the failed
parts.
A39014 Insufficient N/A N/A 1.The primary 1.Check if primary
vacuum vacuum pump P08 vacuum pump can be
goes wrong. turned on normally.
2.The primary 2. Check the vacuum
vacuum sensor goes pressure sensor
wrong. (pressure detection
3. The connectors board.)
and tubes go wrong. 3.Check if connectors
4. The primary and tubing related to
vacuum container primary vacuum are
leaks. leaking air.
5.Solenoid Valve 4. Check if primary
SV03,SV10,SV16 , vacuum container is
SV17 or SV18 error. leaking air.
6.The primary 5. Check if valve
vacuum sensor goes SV03,SV10,SV16 , SV17
wrong. or SV18 can be turned
on/off normally.
6. Change the failed
parts.
A39015 Primary N/A N/A 1.The primary 1.Check if primary
vacuum vacuum pump P08 vacuum pump can be
pump goes wrong. turned on normally.
diagnosing 2.The primary 2. Check the vacuum
failed. vacuum sensor goes pressure sensor
wrong. Check if connectors and
3. The connectors tubing related to
and tubes go wrong. primary vacuum are
4. The primary leaking air.
vacuum container 4. Check if primary
goes wrong. vacuum container is
5.Solenoid Valve leaking air.
SV03,SV10,SV16 or 5. Check if valve
SV03 error. SV03,SV10,SV16 , SV17
6.The primary or SV18 can be turned
vacuum sensor goes on/off normally.
wrong. 6. Change the failed
parts.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A39016 External N/A N/A 1. The external 1.Check if primary
vacuum vacuum pump goes vacuum pump P08 and
pump wrong. the external vacuum
diagnosing 2.The primary pump can be turned on
failed. vacuum pump P08 normally.
goes wrong. 2. Check the vacuum
3.The primary pressure sensor
vacuum sensor goes Check if connectors and
wrong. tubing related to
4. The connectors primary vacuum are
and tubes go wrong. leaking air.
5. The primary 4. Check if primary
vacuum container vacuum container is
goes wrong. leaking air.
6.Solenoid Valve 5. Check if valve
SV03,SV10,SV16 or SV03,SV10,SV16 , SV17
SV03 error. or SV18 can be turned
7.The primary on/off normally.
vacuum sensor goes 6. Change the failed
wrong. parts.
A39017 Vacuum N/A N/A 1. The external 1.Check if primary
pump vacuum pump goes vacuum pump P08 and
diagnosing wrong. the external vacuum
failed. 2.The primary pump can be turned on
vacuum pump P08 normally.
goes wrong. 2. Check the vacuum
3.The primary pressure sensor
vacuum sensor goes Check if connectors and
wrong. tubing related to
4. The connectors primary vacuum are
and tubes go wrong. leaking air.
5. The primary 4. Check if primary
vacuum container vacuum container is
goes wrong. leaking air.
6.Solenoid Valve 5. Check if valve
SV03,SV10,SV16 or SV03,SV10,SV16 , SV17
SV03 error. or SV18 can be turned
7.The primary on/off normally.
vacuum sensor goes 6. Change the failed
wrong. parts.
C05101 Other N/A N/A Reagent is placed in Reposition the reagent,
reagents the wrong position. or remove it from the
are placed Reagents rather than fixed wash solution
in the fixed sample diluents are position.
reagent placed in the 35/36
position. position.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C05102 Sample N/A N/A Reagent is placed in Re-place the reagent,
diluent has the wrong position. or remove it from the
been Reagents rather than fixed sample diluent
placed in sample diluents are position.
another placed in the 35/36
position. position.
C04009 Sample bar N/A Sample bar code is The bar code length Redefine the bar code
code is shorter than 3 is less than the with no less than 3
shorter digits. minimum value of 3 digits.
than 3 digits.
digits.
C07038 Reagent lot N/A When the lot is Lot number of the Recalibrate the
number changed during reagent is changed. chemistry.
of %s test, the system
chemistry prompts the user.
is changed.
Please
recalibrate
C07039 The N/A N/A The calibration The calibration factors
calibration factors are expired. are expired.
factors are
expired.
C08001 1. Rack N/A N/A 1. The type of the 1. Sample rack type
type cannot sample rack cannot cannot be identified.1)
be be identified. Load the rack in the
identified. 1) The sample rack correct direction. 2).
2. is placed in the Remove the obstacle
Unidentifia wrong direction. 2). from the rack bottom
ble rack The magnet at the or replace the rack.
bar code bottom of the rack 2. Rack bar code
3. Rack goes wrong. 3). scanning error. 1). Load
type Sensor detection the rack in the correct
conflicts error. direction. 2). Clean the
with rack 2. Rack bar code rack bar code label or
bar code. scanning error. 1). replace it with a new
Rack has been loaded one. 3). Use ethanol to
in an incorrect clean the glass window
direction. 2). Rack on the rack bar code
bar code label is reader.
damaged or dirty.
3).The glass window
on the bar code
reader is dirty.
4).The bar code
reader goes wrong.
3. The information
obtained by the
magnet sensor and by
the rack bar code
reader does not
match.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C08002 A sample N/A N/A 1. The user does not 1. Restore the system
programme load the sample. and rerun the test.
d on the 2. Sensor detection
operating error.
software is
not found
on the set
position of
the current
rack.
C08003 A sample is N/A N/A 1. Samples have been 1. Restore the system
placed on loaded but not and rerun the test.
the set programmed or 2. Samples have been
position of analyzed. loaded but not
the current programmed or
rack but its analyzed.
test is not 3. Sensor detection
requested. error.
C08005 Rack bar N/A If a rack with same Replicate sample Use the rack with
code bar code is rack bar codes are different rack bar
already detected before the used. code.
exists. current rack that
has been scanned
successfully enters
the storage unit or
supply unit, it will
not be delivered.
C08007 Samples on N/A In sequential mode, Samples on the Check the samples on
rack have all samples on the current rack have no the current rack and
no program current normal or program information. confirm the program
information STAT rack have no information.
. program
information.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A35007 Air bubbles CSDB N/A Air bubbles are 1. Air bubbles are
are detected during detected during
detected substrate dispensing substrate dispensing
during process. process.
substrate 1. Air bubbles in the Check if there are
dispensing. substrate dispensing bubbles in the tube, if
tubing. the tube are broken, if
2. Substrate tube connection is
dispensing tubing is normal. If it is normal,
properly connected. prime. If abnormal,
change or reconnect
the tube and then
perform substrate
prime.
2. Replace sensor;
3. Replace substrate air
bubble detection
board.
4. Replace dispersion
A38008 Waste trays N/A N/A Waste trays are Remove the waste trays
in the tilting while being and check the close
unloading unloaded. position of the drawer
area are and the tray receiving
tilting. position.
A40001 Communica N/A N/A Serial cable is not 1. Check the serial port
tion with connected; Analyzing connection. Replug the
middle-/lo unit Switch is cable. Check if the
wer-layer powered off. analyzer and rack
units failed The main control feeder system are
in home board cannot be powered on. Start the
procedure. connected to the initialization again.
lower layer units. Restart the computer
and instrument.
2. Check the
connections of the
lower layer units.
3. Analyze the log.
A40002 Key N/A N/A Key parameters are 1. Reboot the analyzer.
parameters not configured. 2. Check the
are not parameters against the
configured Parameter List to see if
during the parameters are
home abnormal.
procedure. 3. If the parameter is
not correctly
configured, contact the
headquarter for the
password to configure
the parameters with
the parameter list.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40003 Fluidic N/A N/A Fluidic prime is not 1.Perform fluidic
prime is not performed. prime.
performed
during
home
procedure.
A40004 Downloadin N/A N/A E2PROMread/write Switch off analyzing
g key error. unit power and PC
parameters power and switch on
failed again; Restore failure
during on Utilities-->Daily
home Maint page; If this
procedure. message appears for 3
times:
1. Burn again the main
control board program.
2. Replace the main
control board.
A40005 Discharging N/A N/A 1.Solenoid Valve 1. Check SV16, SV17
primary SV16,SV17 or SV03 and SV03. If they are
vacuum error. abnormal, repair or
waste 2. The waste pump replace them.
failed error. 2. Check the waste
during 3. The vacuum sensor pump. If they are
home goes wrong. abnormal, repair or
procedure. replace them.
3. Check the vacuum
sensor(pressure
detection board).
Repair it or change it.
A40006 Establishing N/A N/A 1. Solenoid Valve 1. Check valve SV16
vacuum SV16 or SV17 error. and SV17. If they are
failed 2. Vacuum pump or abnormal, change or
during external vacuum repair them.
fluidic pump error. 2. Check the vacuum
initializatio 3. The vacuum sensor pump or external
n of home goes wrong. vacuum pump. If they
procedure. are abnormal, change
or repair them.
3. Check the vacuum
sensor. If they are
abnormal, repair it or
change it.
A40007 Floaters N/A N/A 1. High/low floater 1. Check the floater of
are found logic error of the the buffer tank of wash
abnormal buffer tank of wash buffer and check if the
during buffer. floater status is
fluidic 2. Floater of the normal. If it is
initializatio buffer tank of wash abnormal, repair or
n of home buffer is abnormal. replace it.
procedure.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40008 Releasing N/A N/A 1. Solenoid Valve 1. Check valve SV16
vacuum SV16 or SV17 error. and SV17. If they are
failed 2. Vacuum pump or abnormal, change or
during external vacuum repair them.
home pump error. 2. Check the vacuum
procedure. 3. The vacuum sensor pump or external
goes wrong. vacuum pump. Change
or repair them.
3. Check the vacuum
sensor. If it its
abnormal, repair it or
change it.
A40009 Executing N/A N/A Initializing reagent 1.Switch off the
reagent bar bar code reader analyzer power and
code failed. switch on it again.
scanning 2. Check if there is
failed laser emitting. If there
during is, adjust the scanning
home position; if there is not,
procedure. restart the
A40010 Executing N/A N/A The reagent carousel 1.Make sure the
reagent bar cover is closed while reagent carousel cover
code the reagent carousel is closed. Start the
scanning is rotating or it is initialization again or
failed opened while the restore the system.
during reagent carousel is 2.Switch off the
home being scanned. analyzer power and
procedure. switch on it again.
3. Check if there is
laser emitting. If there
is, adjust the scanning
position; if there is not,
restart the
A40011 Software N/A N/A 1. Executing version 1. Reinstall the
version query instruction operating software and
does not failed. control software
match 2. Returned control
during software version and
home that stored in the
procedure. operating software
does not match.
A40012 Mechanical N/A N/A Mechanical reset View the failure cause
reset fails failed. and find the failure
during assembly.
home
procedure.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40013 During N/A N/A 1.The photometer 1. Remove the cover
home wires are loose. above the photometer
process, 2. The assembly is and check the cables of
turning on damaged. the photometer.
photometer 2. Replacing
failed. photometer assembly
A40014 Pump and N/A N/A Resetting pumps and 1. Reboot the analyzer.
valve reset valves failed. 2. Rerun the software.
after power
off fails
during
home
procedure.
A40015 Auto liquid N/A N/A 1. The water unit 1. Check the water
inlet fails goes wrong. unit.
during 2. The water supply 2. Check if the water
home valve goes wrong. supply ball valve is
process. 3. The water supply opened and the handle
ball valve is not is horizontal.
opened. (The handle Check if the water
is horizontal when it supply ball valve is
is opened) blocked.
4. The water supply Check if water supply
ball valve goes valve can be turned on
wrong. and off normally.
5. The low-level Check if low-level
floater of the water floater signal is
tank goes wrong. correct.
6. The water supply 6. Check if the water
tube is bent. supply tube is smooth.
7. The outlet filter of Check if outlet filter of
the water supply water supply tube is
tube is clogged. clogged.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40016 Auto liquid N/A N/A 1. The solenoid valve Check solenoid valve
inlet fails V06 goes wrong. V06.
during 2. The restrictor ring Check restrictor ring.
home is clogged. Check if inlet filter at
process. 3. The inlet filter at the front panel is
the front panel is clogged.
clogged. 4. Check if DI water
4. The DI water pump is on and the
circulating pump pressure gauge reads
goes wrong. between 40kPa-50kPa.
5. The water tank is 5. Check the floater of
empty. the deionized water
6. The concentrated tank.
wash solution tank is 6. Check the floater of
empty. the concentrated wash
7. The concentrated solution tank.
wash solution pump Check concentrated
goes wrong. wash solution pump.
8. The low-level Check diluted wash
floater of the diluted solution low-level
wash solution tank floater.
goes wrong.
A40017 During N/A N/A Contact the service 1. Power off the
home department. analyzer and restart
process, the analyzer.
turning off
photometer
failed.
A40018 Waste N/A N/A 1. Waste container is 1. Check the loading of
container not prepared or is the waste Container.
fails during full Load a new waste
home 2. Sensor failure container if the waste
process. container is not
installed or if it is full.
Start the initialization
again. Restart the
computer and analyzing
unit.
2. Check if the sensor is
normal. If it is
abnormal, change it.
A40019 Current N/A N/A When the gripper The cuvette is
gripping gripping the consumed due to error.
position of continuous three Replace it with new
tray is not cuvetes but no cuvettes.
found. cuvette is found. The
cuvette tray is
changed
automatically.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40020 Auto N/A N/A Auto loading of Check if the drawer is
loading of cuvette tray failed. properly closed,if the
cuvette trays are jammed, if
tray failed cuvette tray is empty
during or waste trays are full.
home
process.
A40021 The system N/A N/A System resetting Start the initialization
reset failed failed. again. Reboot the
during computer and analyzing
home unit. If three
procedure. continuous attempts
are failed, contact our
Customer Service
Department or your
local distributor.
A40022 Photometer N/A N/A 1.Photometer 1. If photometer
calibration attenuates too large. attenuates too large,
failed 2.Photometer adjust voltage to higher
during fluctuates too much. value until DCF is
home within 0.6-1.7.The
process. typical value is 1.0.
2. If photometer
fluctuates too much,
change the photometer
assembly.
A40023 The count N/A N/A 1. Light leakage 1. Check if light leaks
of the occurs to the from the reaction
photometer assembly. carousel, photometer
is out of 2. PMT is aged. assembly and their
range joints.
during 2. Check if overflow
home occurs in the reaction
process. carousel. If so, clean
the reaction carousel.
3. Replacing
photometer assembly
A40025 Long mixing N/A N/A Reagent mixing failed 1. Check if the reagent
of the during the bottles are jammed on
reagent initialization or the reagent carousel.
carousel system restoring 2. Operation error.
failed process. 3. Check the home
during position and the coder
home sensor.
process.
4. Check the drive
motor assembly.
A40026 During N/A N/A 1. LED assembly 1. Check the wire of
home wires are loose, LED.
process, causing bad contact. 2. Change the LED
turning on 2. LED assembly is assembly.
LED failed. damaged.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40027 During N/A N/A Communication Restart the analyzer
home error. after powering it off.
process,
turning off
photometer
LED failed.
A40028 Water tank N/A N/A Water tank floater is Check if the water tank
floater abnormal. floater is abnormal. If
logic error so, change it.
during
home
process.
A40029 Diluted N/A N/A Floater of the buffer Check if the buffer tank
wash buffer tank of wash buffer is floater is abnormal. If
solution abnormal. so, change it.
tank floater
logic error
during
home
process.
C07105 Substrate 1 N/A N/A Substrate 1 is Replace substrate at
is exhausted. corresponding positions
exhausted.
C07106 Substrate 2 N/A N/A Substrate 1 is Replace substrate at
is exhausted. corresponding positions
exhausted.
C07107 Less than X N/A N/A Reagents left in Refill substrate
tests are substrate are less
left in than the minimum
substrate. limit.
C07108 Substrate is N/A N/A All substrate is Replace substrate at
exhausted. exhausted. corresponding positions
C07109 Substrate 1 SUBE N/A Substrate is expired. Replace substrate at
is expired. corresponding positions
is expired. corresponding positions
C07111 Wash N/A N/A Wash buffer Change and refill the
solution is inventory is less than wash buffer.
less than the reagent alarm
X %s. limit.
C07113 Solid waste N/A N/A Diluted wash buffer Replace corresponding
container 1 is full of cuvette waste
is full. waste
C07114 Solid waste N/A N/A Diluted wash buffer Replace corresponding
is full. waste

17.3 Error Code
Code
C07115 Remaining N/A N/A The number of Replace waste
space of cuvette waste in the container
solid waste solid waste container
container is is less than the alarm
less than X limit.
cuvettes.
C07043 The N/A The reagent The reagent carousel 1.Make sure the
reagent carousel is opened is not allowed to be reagent carousel cover
carousel is in the status which opened during test. is closed. Start the
not allowed the reagent initialization again or
to be carousel cover is restore the system.
opened in not allowed to be 2. Check the reagent
current opened. carousel cover
status. open-and-close sensor.
3. Check if the reagent
carousel cover can be
tightly closed. If not,
adjust the position of
reagent carousel cover
joint.
C06011 Inquiring N/A The sample ID has The sample ID has 1. Check LIS
sample existed on existed on operating connection.
information operating software software and cannot 2. Contact LIS supplier
failed and cannot be be downloaded from to check LIS system.
downloaded from LIS. 3. Analyze the log.
LIS.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C07116 Reaction N/A N/A 1. The ambient 1. Reboot the analyzer.
incubation range. temperature through
is 2. The temperature the Status screen, to
abnormal. sensor goes wrong. check if temperature is
7. Electromagnetic
if resistance under
correct, and
temperature control
board )
correct.
8. Electromagnetic

17.3 Error Code
Code
C07117 Dispersion N/A N/A 1. The ambient 1. Reboot the analyzer.
7. Electromagnetic
if resistance under
correct, and
temperature control
board )
correct.
8. Electromagnetic

17.3 Error Code
Code
C07118 Substrate N/A N/A 1. The ambient 1. Reboot the analyzer.
preheating temperature is out of Observe ambient
5. Check the heater :
7. Electromagnetic
check if resistance
under normal
temperature is correct,
and connections are
secure.
6. PCB error
correct.
8. Electromagnetic
A40030 Waste N/A N/A 1.Solid waste 1. Load the waste
container 1 container 1 is not container in the waste
is found to loaded. container 1 position.
be 2. Waste container 1 2. Check if the waste
unloaded loading sensor is container 1 loading
during abnormal. sensor works normally.
home If not, change or repair
process. it.
A40031 Waste N/A N/A 1.Solid waste 1. Load the waste
container 2 container 2 is not container in the waste
is found to loaded. container 2 position.
be 2. Waste container 2 2. Check if the waste
unloaded loading sensor is container 2 loading
during abnormal. sensor works normally.
home If not, change or repair
process. it.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40032 Waste N/A N/A Diluted wash buffer Replace corresponding
is found to waste
be full
during
home
process.
A40033 Waste N/A N/A Diluted wash buffer Replace corresponding
is found to waste
be full
during
home
process.
C07119 Immunologi N/A N/A Reagent exhausted Refill or replace the
cal reagent Reagent probe does reagent.
is not detect liquid
exhausted. level
C07120 Sample RGTE N/A Diluted reagent is Replace diluent at
diluent is exhausted. corresponding position
expiated.
C07121 The waste N/A N/A The waste container Load the waste
container is is removed during container again.
removed test.
during test.
C07122 Wash N/A N/A Wash Buffer is Replace wash buffer in
buffer 1 is expired. corresponding position.
expired.
C07123 Wash N/A N/A Wash Buffer is Replace wash buffer in
buffer 2 is expired. corresponding position.
expired.
C07125 Sample N/A N/A The volume of the Refill or replace the
diluent is diluent has not sample diluent.
used up. reached the set
lowest limit; or the
level of the reagent
cannot be detected;
C07126 Sample N/A N/A The inventory of Refill or replace the
probe wash sample probe special sample probe special
solution is wash solution is wash solution
insufficient below the alarm
. limit.
C07127 Sample N/A N/A Sample probe wash Refill or replace the
probe wash solution is sample probe special
solution is exhausted. or no wash solution
exhausted. reagent liquid level is
detected.

17.3 Error Code
Code
C07128 Sample N/A N/A Sample probe wash Replace the sample
probe solution is expired probe wash solution
special
wash
solution is
expired.
C07129 Cuvette is N/A N/A The cuvette Load new cuvette tray
insufficient inventory is less than
. the alarm limit.
C07130 Reaction N/A N/A Cuvettes are Load new cuvette tray
cuvettes exhausted.
are
exhausted.
C07012 Storage An error occurs No floppy disk or U Check if a USB drive or
device when reading data disk is inserted. No floppy disk is inserted
error; on a portable file is found in the or full. Check if the
Cannot storage device. floppy disk or U disk, storage device is
import data or file error, or file is damaged.
damaged. The floppy
disk or U disk is
locked or damaged.
A36006 There are N/A N/A 1. Some cuvettes are 1. Check the cuvette in
no cuvettes missing in the loaded the working area and
for the first tray. ensure the cuvettes are
gripper to 2.Finger sensor of the continuous and no
grip. first gripper is missing cuvete is
abnormal. found.
3. The finger is dirty 2. Check the first
or the sticky liquid is gripper sensor, its wires
in the cuvette, and their connections.
causing the cuvette is 3. Check if extra
adhered to the cuvette is in the
finger. working area, if there
is spilt liquid. If so,
clean the gripper.
A37007 There are N/A N/A 1.Finger sensor of the 1. Check the second
no cuvettes second gripper is gripper sensor, its wires
for the abnormal. and their connections.
second 2. The finger is dirty 2. Check if extra
gripper to or the sticky liquid is cuvette is in the
grip. in the cuvette, working area, if there
causing the cuvette is is spilt liquid. If so,
adhered to the clean the gripper.
finger.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40034 The system N/A N/A Hydropneumatics Perform
detects the subsystem Hydropneumatics
hydro unit adjustment has not subsystem alignment.
alignment been finished.
is not
performed
during
home
process.
A40035 Automatica N/A N/A Clearing the cuvette Check if the cuvette is
lly failed during pushed into the finger.
discarding initialization and If so, remove it.
cuvette system restoring Check if there is foreign
failed process. substances on the panel
during or in the carousel,
home deformed cuvette and
process. fallen cuvette. If so,
remove it.
Check the gripping
position and adjust the
deviation.
A01215 Interior N/A N/A 1. The interior wash 1. Check if the
wash tubing is clogged or sample/reagent probe
membrane leakage occurs. and their tubes are
pump 2.The interior wash clogged.
movement pump cable is not 2. Check if the rotation
error properly connected. speed parameter of the
3. Rotation speed interior wash pump is
parameter of the correct(compare it
interior wash pump is with the parameter
abnormal. configuration list.)
4. The pump is 3. Check if pump
damaged. inlet/outlet and
interior wash tube have
leak.
4. Check if the wire of
the pump is normal.
5. Change the pump
assembly.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A01216 Exterior N/A N/A 1. The exterior wash 1. The exterior wash
wash tubing is clogged or tubing is clogged or
membrane leakage occurs. leakage occurs.
pump 2.The exterior wash 2. Check if the rotation
movement pump cable is not speed parameter of the
error properly connected. interior wash pump is
3. Rotation speed correct(compare it
parameter of the with the parameter
exterior wash pump configuration list.)
is abnormal. 3. Check if pump
4. The pump is inlet/outlet and
damaged. interior wash tube have
leak.
4. Check if the wire of
the pump is normal.
5. Change the pump
assembly.
has corresponding positions
exceeded
the
uncapping
time.
has corresponding positions
exceeded
the
uncapping
time.
C07133 Substrate N/A check the substrate Substrate volume is Load substrate.
volume is volume before insufficient or
too little or effect check, If substrate is
substrate is substrate volume is unloaded.
unloaded. less than the
required volume for
effect check or the
substrate is not
loaded, the system
gives out the alarm.
A01217 Sample N/A N/A 1. The sample is not 1. Check if there is
probe fails placed on the sufficient sample, and
to detect to-be-tested sample run the test again;
liquid level position or sample 2. If level detection
in the volume is error is identified,
diluting insufficient. check sample probe,
position. Sample probe level level detection board
detection error. and connecting cable;
replace if any

17.3 Error Code
Code
A01218 Sample N/A N/A No liquid level is If level detection error
probe fails detected after the is identified, check
to sample probe sample probe, level
aspirate aspirates the sample. detection board and
the liquid connecting cable;
in the replace them if any
diluting abnormity is identified.
position. Check if there is loose
connection or liquid
leakage in sample
probe hydro system.
clogged in 2.Sample probe wash solution. Remove
the diluting hydro error. the sample probe and
position. unclog it.
2.Check clog detection
board and clog
detection pressure
sensor.
C07134 The system N/A All dispersion Dispersion Unclog or change the
detects the probes are detected Aspirating probes are aspirating probes.
dispersion for clog before daily clogged. Check if leak occurs to
aspirating clean. If any probe the connector of the
probes are is found to be aspirating probes.
clogged clogged, then the Check if the pump tube
during clog system gives out the is broken or clogged.
detection alarm after the
Execute Daily Clean.
in daily probe clog
clean. detection
procedure is
completed.
C07135 Auto Effect N/A Auto Effect Check 1. The substrate 1. Check the substrate
Check failed. volume is insufficient volume and the volume
failed. or the cuvette of the cuvettes. If they
volume is are insufficient, refill
insufficient. them.
2. Substrate goes 2. View the substrate
bad. RLU during effect
check. If it is out of
range, change the
substrate and perform
substrate prime.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A36007 First N/A N/A 1.The gripper loses 1. Check if the cuvette
Gripper the cuvette after falls off the finger.
loses gripping it. 2. Check if the rim of
cuvette. 2.Finger sensor of the the cuvette is
gripper is abnormal. damaged, causing the
cuvette falling off.
3. Check the
mechanical parts like
gripper spring,etc.
4. Check the wire of
the finger sensor and
its signal.
5. Check if the gripping
depth is too shallow.
A36008 Cuvette is N/A N/A 1.When the cuvette 1. Check if the cuvette
detected is gripped, it is is adhered to the finger
on First adhered to the or it falls off on the
Gripper finger. panel. If so ,remove the
2.Finger sensor of the cuvette.
gripper is abnormal. 2. If the finger is dirty
due to spilt liquid,
clean it.
3. Check the
gripper spring,etc.
its signal.
5. Check if the gripper
depth is too deep.
A37008 Second N/A N/A 1.The gripper loses 1. Check if the cuvette
Gripper the cuvette after falls off the finger.
loses gripping it. 2. Check if the rim of
cuvette. 2.Finger sensor of the the cuvette is
gripper is abnormal. damaged, causing the
cuvette falling off.
3. Check the
gripper spring,etc.
its signal.
5. Check if the gripping
depth is too shallow.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A37009 Cuvette is N/A N/A 1.When the cuvette 1. Check if the cuvette
detected is gripped, it is is adhered to the finger
on Second adhered to the or it falls off on the
Gripper finger. panel. If so ,remove the
2.Finger sensor of the cuvette.
gripper is abnormal. 2. If the finger is dirty
due to spilt liquid,
clean it.
3. Check the
gripper spring,etc.
its signal.
5. Check if the gripper
depth is too deep.
C07136 Auto Daily N/A Auto Daily clean 1. Sample probe Check sample probe
clean failed. wash solution is not wash solution and wash
failed. loaded or buffer . If they are
insufficient. insufficient, load them.
2. Wash buffer is Then restore the
exhausted during system and perform
Daily Clean process. Daily Clean. If this
problem appears for 3
times, contact our
customer service
department or your
local distributor.
A14105 Reagent N/A N/A 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Re-turn on the
refrigeratin 2. The fan is analyzer.
g fan 3 is damaged. 2. Pull off and plug in
abnormal. 3. The power supply fan socket.
goes wrong. 3. Check if power
supply for fan is
normal.
4. Clean dust off the
fan.
5. Replace fan.
A14106 Reagent N/A N/A 1. The fan is blocked. 1. Re-turn on the
refrigeratin 2. The fan is analyzer.
g fan 4 is damaged. 2. Pull off and plug in
abnormal. 3. The power supply fan socket.
goes wrong. 3. Check if power
supply for fan is
normal.
4. Clean dust off the
fan.
5. Replace fan.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A34002 Dispersion N/A N/A 1.Dispersion aspirate 1. Check if leakage
Aspirating pump P09 error occurs and the pump
Pump is 2. The sensor for and its tubing is
jammed. detecting pump damaged.
jamming failed. 2. Check if the pump
can be turned on.
3. Check if the pump
cables and sensor
cables are normal.
parts.
A36009 The target N/A N/A The waste container Load the corresponding
waste is taken out during waste container and
container cuvette discarding restart the test.
has been process.
unloaded
when the
first
gripper is
disposing
the
cuvettes.
C07137 The N/A The waste The capacity of the Empty the waste
capacity of container capacity waste container is container or Load the
the waste is checked before insufficient or the waste container again.
container is the Discard cuvette waste container is
insufficient maintenance and unloaded.
or the diagnosis. If the
waste volume is less than
container is the required volume
unloaded. or the waste
container is not
loaded, the alarm is
given out.
A01220 There are N/A N/A Hydropneumatic 1. Execute failure
air bubbles tubing has air restoration Instruction.
in sample bubbles or the 2. Check the level
probe concentration of detection board and
subsystem wash buffer is press the calibrate
or the abnormal. button.
concentrati 3. Change level sense
on of the board.
wash
4. Replace the sample
solution is
probe.
abnormal.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A30020 There are N/A N/A Hydropneumatic 1. Execute failure
air bubbles tubing has air restoration Instruction.
in reagent bubbles or the 2. Check the level
probe concentration of detection board and
subsystem wash buffer is press the calibrate
or the abnormal. button.
concentrati 3. Change level sense
on of the board.
wash
4. Replace the sample
solution is
probe.
abnormal.
A35008 Air bubbles N/A N/A Air bubbles are 1.Check if there are
are detected during bubbles in the tube, if
detected substrate aspirating the tube are broken, if
during process. tube connection is
substrate 1. Air bubble is in the normal. If it is normal,
aspirating substrate aspirating perform substrate
process. tube. prime. If abnormal,
2. Substrate change or reconnect
aspirating tubing is the tube and then
properly connected. prime.
2. Check if bubble
detection sensor is
normal.
A37010 Reaction N/A N/A 1. Before and after 1. Check the cables and
liquid the movement, the signal of the home
mixing software detects the position sensor. Check
error status of the home if the sensor and its
The position sensor and shield are loose, motor
calibration gives out the alarm. is jammed and belt and
position 2. Losing step causes its belt wheel are
sensor is in no home position loose. The stop position
incorrect sensor jump edge at parameter is incorrect.
status. the zero point is 2. Check the cables and
Error of found. signal of the home
passing position sensor. Check
zero if the sensor and its
position is shield are loose, motor
great. is jammed and belt and
its belt wheel are
loose.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40041 Filling the N/A N/A 1.Wash buffer 1 and 1. Check if the wash
buffer tank 2 container are buffer is loaded; If it is
of wash empty or exhausted. exhausted, load the
buffer 2. Wash buffer wash buffer.
solution is aspirating failure. 2. Check if the guide
too slow. Pump P01 or valve tube of the inlet pump
SV02/SV05 failure. is changed regularly
3. Liquid level sensor and if the guide tube
of the buffer tank of fails.
the wash buffer goes 3. Check if the liquid
wrong. level of the buffer tank
4. Sensor for is in low position. If it is
detecting wash at the low level, check
buffer goes wrong, according to step 1 and
causing empty 2. If it is not at the low
aspiration. level, change the
floater sensor.
4. Check the status of
the weighing sensor 1
and 2 for the wash
buffer 1 and 2 is
normal.
A40042 Wash N/A N/A 1. Wash buffer 1 tank 1. Check if the wash
buffer tank is empty. buffer 1 is exhausted
1 is empty. 2.The weighing and sensor status is
sensor wash buffer 1 empty or exhausted.
tank goes wrong. Load the wash buffer.
3.The bubble 1. Check if the
detection sensor for weighing sensor
wash buffer goes parameter is normal.
wrong. Check the status of the
weighing sensor 1 is
normal.
3. Check if bubble
detection sensor
parameter is correct
and the sensor is
normal.
4. Recalibrate the
weighing sensor.
parts.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40043 Wash N/A N/A 1. Wash buffer 1 tank 1. Check if the wash
buffer tank is empty. buffer 2 is exhausted
2 is empty. 2.The weighing and sensor status is
sensor of wash buffer empty or exhausted.
2 goes wrong or its Load the wash buffer.
parameter is 2. Check if the
incorrect. weighing sensor
3.The bubble parameter is normal.
detection sensor for Check the status of the
wash buffer goes weighing sensor 1 is
wrong or its normal.
parameter is 3. Check if bubble
incorrect. detection sensor
parameter is correct
and the sensor is
normal.
4. Recalibrate the
weighing sensor.
parts.
A40044 Wash N/A N/A 1. Wash buffer in 1. Check if the wash
buffer is tank 1 and 2 are buffer is exhausted and
exhausted. exhausted. sensor status is empty
2.The weighing or exhausted. Load the
sensor of wash buffer wash buffer.
2 goes wrong or its 1. Check if the
parameter is weighing sensor
incorrect. parameter is normal.
3.The bubble Check the status of the
detection sensor for weighing sensor is
wash buffer goes normal.
wrong or its 3. Check if bubble
parameter is detection sensor
incorrect. parameter is correct
and the sensor is
normal.
4. Recalibrate the
weighing sensor.
parts.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40046 Buffer tank N/A N/A 1. The wash buffer of 1. Check the status of
of wash the analyzer is the wash buffer.
buffer exhausted. 2.Check the status of
solution is 2. The aspirating liquid level sensor of
empty. pump and tubing of the buffer tank.
the wash buffer 3.Check if the wires of
failed. liquid level sensor of
3. The aspirating the buffer tank are
pump and valve go properly connected.
wrong. Aspiration 4. Check if Inlet Pump
failed. Tubing is normal and in
4. The wires of liquid service life.
level sensor of the 5. Change the failed
buffer tank are not parts.
properly connected.
5. Liquid level sensor
of the buffer tank of
the wash buffer goes
wrong.
A40047 Wash N/A N/A 1. The wires of liquid 1.Check if the wires of
buffer level floater sensor liquid level sensor of
solution of the buffer tank are the buffer tank are
buffer tank not properly properly connected.
floater connected. 2. Check if the Liquid
logic error. 2. Liquid level floater level floater sensor is
sensor of the buffer normal.
tank of the wash 3. Change the failed
buffer goes wrong. parts.
A40045 Weight N/A N/A Weight detection Check the connection
detection board of the weight detection
board communication error board and check if the
communica cable connection is
tion error loose. If the failure
remains, change the
weight detection
board.
A40040 Auto N/A N/A 1. Aspiration pump 1. Check if leakage
aspiration P01 failed. occurs and the pump
pump 2. The sensor for and its tubing is
jammed. detecting pump damaged.
jamming failed. 2. Check if the pump
can be turned on.
3. Check if the pump
cables and sensor
cables are normal.
parts.

17.3 Error Code
Code
A40049 Wash N/A N/A 1.The weighing 1. Check if it is an
buffer tank sensor wash buffer 1 occasional error.
1 logic tank goes wrong. Restore the system.
error. 2.The bubble 2. Calibrate wash
detection sensor for buffer weighing sensor.
wash buffer goes 3. Check if leak occurs
wrong. to the tube.
3. The tube leaks or 4. Check if leaks occurs
air bubbles exist. in the position of the
bubble detection
sensor.
parts.
A40050 Wash N/A N/A 1.The weighing 1. Check if it is an
buffer tank sensor wash buffer 2 occasional error.
2 logic tank goes wrong. Restore the system.
error. 2.The bubble 2. Calibrate wash
detection sensor for buffer weighing sensor.
wash buffer goes 3. Check if leak occurs
wrong. to the tube.
3. The tube leaks or 4. Check if leaks occurs
air bubbles exist. in the position of the
bubble detection
sensor.
parts.
E00001 Filling the N/A Filling the buffer 1.Wash buffer is 1. Check if wash buffer
buffer tank tank of wash exhausted. is loaded.
of wash buffer solution is 2. Inlet pump and 2. Check if the guide
buffer too slow. tube is aged and tube of the inlet pump
solution is unchanged. is changed regularly.
too slow. 3. Liquid level sensor 3.Check if the liquid
of the buffer tank of level sensor of the
the wash buffer goes buffer tank are normal
wrong. 4. Check if the inlet
4. Wash buffer inlet pump is turned on when
pump error. the wash buffer is
5. Wash buffer inlet aspirated.
valve error. 5. Check if the inlet
valve works normally
when the wash buffer is
aspirated.

17.3 Error Code
Code
E00002 Dispersion N/A Dispersion wash 1. Pump cables are 1. Check if the wire of
wash pump pump is jammed. not properly the pump is normal.
is jammed. connected. 2. Check if the pump
2. Pump sensor is not sensor cables are
properly connected. normal.
3. Pump head has 3. Check if leak occurs
leak and pump is to the pump, causing
blocked. the pump head is
4. The pump is jammed.
damaged. 4. Change the pump
assembly.
E00003 Wash N/A Wash buffer inlet 1. Pump cables are 1. Check if the wire of
buffer inlet pump is jammed. not properly the pump is normal.
pump is connected. 2. Check if the pump
jammed. 2. Pump sensor is not sensor cables are
properly connected. normal.
3. Pump head has 3. Check if leak occurs
leak and pump is to the pump, causing
blocked. the pump head is
4. The pump is jammed.
damaged. 4. Change the pump
assembly.
E00004 The waste N/A N/A 1. Waste tank is full. 1. Check if the waste
tank is full. 2. Waste tank sensor tank is full. Empty it.
goes wrong. 2. Change the failed
parts.

17.3 Error Code

18 Changeable Parts at the User End
This chapter introduces the parts which can be changed at the user end. Please request
the material according to the descriptions.

18.1 Changeable parts for main unit

Part No. Description Comment
801-BA40-00021-00 Communication conversion Used for BS-2000 and BS-800 as well. Located in
board the SDM back plate.
051-001413-00 BM10 Control Drive Board Mixed control drive board, reagent control drive
board, auto load control drive board and
dispersion control drive board are same except
the burnt program.
051-001374-00 BM10 empty gripping optical Empty gripping sensor of the second gripper
coupler conversion board of finger
the second gripper
051-001373-00 BM10 empty gripping optical Empty gripping sensor of the first gripper finger
coupler conversion board of
the first gripper
051-001092-00 Negative offset level sense Reagent probe and sample probe level
board detection board
051-001035-00 BM10double optical coupler Finger open-close optical coupler, vertical anti
butt joint conversion board bumping optical coupler for second gripper.
051-001034-00 BM10 optical coupler Z axis assembly of first gripper includes two
conversion board with socket optical coupler: home position and middle
position optical coupler. X axis home position
optical coupler of the pusher.
051-001023-00 BA2KAnalog power supply Compatible with BS-2000
conversion board
051-001001-00 BM10 double optical coupler First gripper vertical anti bumping optical
conversion board coupler, finger open-close optical coupler. The
two are same.
051-000860-00 BM10 gripper X-FPC board X direction connecting wire
051-000859-00 BM10 gripper Y-FPC board Y direction connecting wire
051-000858-00 BM10 gripper Z-FPC board Z direction connecting wire
051-000857-00 BM10 front panel indicator Use to indicate the status of the cuvette tray,
board wash buffer and waste container located
drawer panel.
801-BA80-00055-01 Temperature collection board N/A
051-000755-00 BM 10 DC power supply Located above the BA40 power supply and
conversion board under the main control board.
051-000747-00 BM10fluidics temperature Located above the BA40 power supply
control board
051-000744-00 BM10 High voltage board In PMT module
051-000743-00 BM10Photon Counting Board In PMT module
051-000742-00 BM10Main control board N/A
801-BA40-00031-00 Power supply conversion BA40 power supply assembly
board
801-BA40-00030-00 24V power supply board BA40 power supply assembly


801-BA40-00029-00 12V power supply board BA40 power supply assembly
051-001441-00 Clog detection board Not compatible with other analyzer.
801-BA80-00090-00 BA80 Pressure detection Compatible with BS-2000
board
801-BA80-00100-00 BA80 /Mixer conversion board Compatible with BS-2000
051-000207-00 BA80 Reagent refrigeration Compatible with BS-800
board
051-001269-00 PD pre-amplification board Located in PMT module. After it is changed,
perform the light calibration and all chemistries
should be re-calibrated.
801-BA80-00108-00 BA80 AC drive board N/A
051-001500-00 BM10 Weight detection board Located in the wash buffer drawer. used to
detect the weight of the wash buffer.
It is used to detect the air bubbles of the wash
buffer as well. After change it, recalibration is
required.
051-001403-00 Air bubble detection board Air bubble detection board for substrate. After
change it, recalibration is required.
115-017447-00 BM10 Vacuum pump assembly Located in vacuum waste pump. It is P08 in
fluidic diagram.
115-017231-00 Wash diaphragm pump Including 1 pump bracket, 1 pump. Refer to P04
assembly and P05 in fluidic diagram.
082-001193-00 Substrate pump Refer to SR30 in fluidic diagram; used for the
substrate injection.
115-012028-00 Pump bracket assembly including pump base, motor(oriental motor),
pump head and four tubes.
801-BA80-00083-00 Waste pump assembly Corresponding to P07 in fluidic diagram. Waste
pump has four barbed fitting.
115-020772-00 Single tube pump assembly The wash buffer aspiration pump including
pump head but tube excluded.
115-014450-00 Pushing motor assembly including the pusher motor, motor bracket and
belt.
115-014449-00 X-axis motor pulley assembly Including X axis motor and belt wheel.
115-014445-00 Sampling drive vertical motor including the vertical motors and belt wheels
pulley assembly for sample Probe Drive Assembly, reagent probe
drive assembly and second gripper drive
assembly
115-017927-00 Horizontal motor assembly Drive assembly horizontal motors including
motor and belt wheel(reagent probe, sample
probe and second gripper)
115-012009-00 Magnetic separation mixing Dispersion mixing motor and belt wheel
motor and belt wheel assembly
assembly
115-012004-00 Dispersion motor and belt Dispersion chamber drive motor and belt wheel.
wheel assembly
115-011997-00 Reaction carousel motor belt Reaction carousel motor belt wheel assembly
wheel assembly


115-011985-00 Feeding motor pulley Feeding motor pulley assembly
assembly
115-011981-00 Track open-close motor pulley Open-close structure motor and belt wheel
assembly
801-BA80-00076-00 Syringe 42 step motor Sample/reagent syringe motor and belt wheel.
assembly
024-000150-00 MOTORSTEP1.8 degrees; SDM stopper motor. BS-300 mechanical arm uses
3.7V1A157mNm 6 cables the same motor.
115-017459-00 DI water valve assembly with two-way valve corresponding to SV05 in fluidic
connector. diagram.
115-014545-00 The probe wash vacuum valve Refer to SV16 and SV17 in fluidic diagram .
assembly(with connector.) Located under the sample/reagent wash well
used to aspirate the waste liquid in the wash
well.
082-001165-00 Three-way valve Refer to SV30 in the fluidic diagram. Substrate
switching three way valves located under the
substrate bottles.
801-BA10-00024-00 Reagent valve Sample probe, reagent probe interior wash
valve. Refer to SV11 and SV12 in the fluidic
diagram.
115-016868-00 High-concentration waste Refer toSV03 in the fluidic diagram with valve
discharge valve assembly and the barbed fitting and seal ring.
082-001164-00 two-way Refer to SV31,SV32in the fluidic diagram.SV31is
valveDC12V-1~2barDiameter: used to control the substrate inlet and SV32is
1.5mm used to control the outlet of substrate from the
pump.
801-BA40-00214-00 Burkert6606Aelectromagnetic valve without connector; refer to
valve without connector SV14andSV15in fluidic diagram.
115-017443-00 BM10 dispersion valve Valve with connectors; refer to
assembly(with connector) SV20,SV21,SV22,SV23,SV24,SV25,SV26 and
SV27.
115-014546-00 Probe wash waste valve Refer to SV02vale andSV18 in the fluidic
diagram.
115-021413-00 Vacuum suction valve Refer toSV10 between the primary and
assembly secondary vacuum.
801-BA40-00210-00 Vacuum pump fan and Vacuum pump fan and refrigerating fan are
refrigerating fan located at the back of the analyzer.
801-BA20-00072-00 Power supply fan Power supply has2 fans.
024-000412-00 FAN24V119*119*25.5mm100CF Reagent refrigeration module fan located in the
M38.5dB,anti-jamming. reagent carousel to remove the condensate
water and balance the reagent carousel
temperature.
024-000411-00 FAN24V226CFM58dB172*450*5 The big fan of the reagent refrigeration module
0mm.Cable length 480mm is located at the lower side of the reagent
refrigeration module to blow the heat away.
115-012025-00 LED assembly LED in the photometer assembly. After changing
it, recalibration is required.


115-012018-00 Photometer assembly When being change, take caution to protect it
from the light. After it is changed, perform the
light calibration and all chemistries should be
re-calibrated.
801-BA38-00040-00 Syringe T piece White T piece for the syringe
0040-10-32305 Connector, P-200N, Flangeless used with LEE valve.
Ferrule, 1/16", ETFE
0040-10-32304 Connector, P-208, Flangeless used with LEE valve.

nut, 1/16", Black
801-BA20-00115-00 Connector, Barbed Adapt, used with LEE valve; see the figure.
1/4-28UNF, 1/8"ID, ETFE
M6Q-030042--- Connector.Straight,1/8"&1/16 Refer to T417,T418,T419 and T420 in the fluidic
"ID diagram.
M6Q-030043--- Connector.Y,200Barb,1/8"ID Y form connector in dispersion aspirating tubes
to converge the four ways waste to one. Refer
to T421,T422 and T423
M6Q-030061--- Connector .Straight,1/4"&1/8 Refer toT243 andT424 in fluidic diagram.
"ID,PP
M6Q-030096--- Connector, Y, 600Barbs, Refer to T751 in fluidic diagram.

1/2"ID, PP
M6Q-030064--- Connector, T piece, 6OD T form connector at the inlet/outlet of the
primary vacuum pump. Refer to T778 and T779.
082-000311-00 Connector, L, 200Barb, The corner connector for wash buffer to
1/4"ID, 1/8-27 NPT. collecting block; refer to T710 in fluidic
diagram.
082-001595-00 Connector.1/4-28UNF all connectors connected with1/16 soft tubes
1/16"barb are of this type. Refer to
T300,T310,T320,T330; and
T301,T311,T321,T331.
082-001134-00 Connector Substrate tube light yellow connector. Refer to
fluidic diagram T605 and T608
082-001528-00 Connector. Female socket, The connector of the cap of the Wash Buffer
non-stop type 1/8"ID tank , female, including retaining screw.
082-001529-00 Connector. Straight, non-stop The connector of the cap of the Wash Buffer
type. 1/8"ID tank, male, connecting with the tube.
082-000308-00 Connector.Straight,600Barb,1 Refer to T425 and T709.
/2"&1/4"ID
BA40-20-61345 Tube connector 25L waste tank cap connector.

041-006656-00 1/4 barbed fitting straight Connector used to connect the tube of the
bulkhead connector. buffer tank of the wash buffer.
115-014452-00 Reagent carousel cover including front cover, back cover, hinges and
assembly bolt.
115-014451-00 Front shielding cover Brown front track shield assembly.
assembly


043-002601-00 Long arm cover (for reagent Long arm cover, compatible with
probe) BS-2000,CL-2000ireagent probe arm cover
043-002209-00 Short arm cover (for sample Short arm cover for the sample probe
probe)
043-002134-00 Gripper arm cover Gripper arm cover for second gripper
043-001788-00 Dispersion carousel cover 2 Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001787-00 Dispersion carousel cover 1 Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001783-00 Lower left desk panel 2 Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001782-00 Lower left desk panel 1 Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001781-00 Reaction carousel panel Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001780-00 Right desk panel Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001779-00 Upper right desk panel Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001778-00 Middle upper desk panel Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001777-00 Upper left desk panel Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001776-00 Shielding cover Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001773-00 Lower right desk panel Please refer to the photo in Service manual
043-001771-00 Substrate holder cover Substrate holder upper cover
043-001768-00 Transparent shield on drawer Please refer to the photo in Service manual
door
042-005936-00 Track cover Please refer to the photo in Service manual
042-005929-00 Left panel Please refer to the photo in Service manual
042-005023-00 Right front door Please refer to the photo in Service manual
042-005019-00 Left front door Please refer to the photo in Service manual
042-004957-00 Back shielding cover Please refer to the photo in Service manual
034-000211-00 Horizontal dust screen Please refer to the photo in Service manual
034-000195-00 Dust screen Please refer to the photo in Service manual
042-004999-00 Front panel of CL-2000i Please refer to the photo in Service manual
042-008817-00 Front panel of CL-2200i Please refer to the photo in Service manual
M90-000001--- Jumper cap Jumper cap on the main board same as the that
on the main board of BS-200 and BS-300.
011-000091-00 Wash buffer indicator Indicator for wash buffer, which is not button.
801-BA80-00117-00 Button indicator Indicator for reagent carousel and substrate.
SDM button indicator.
801-BA40-00064-00 Lock catch, MC-37, white Installed on the door including male and female
048-002445-00 25L water tank 25Lwaste tank
115-021466-00 Waste sensor assembly Liquid level sensor for 25Lwaste tank
801-BA10-00029-00 Syringe optical coupler Sample/reagent syringe drive sensor with
cables(Not the optical coupler of the syringe for
Wash Buffer)
801-BA31-00020-00 Anti-collision spring Reagent carousel cover bolt spring
115-017460-00 BM10 sample syringe assembly Sample syringe drive assembly including syringe
motor and optical coupler(syringe not included)


115-017444-00 BM10 probe wash split flow including probe wash branch block and 6
block assembly connectors located beside the P04 and P05.
115-015130-00 BM10Clog detection T-piece On the left side of the sample syringe
assembly
115-014544-00 Probe wash vacuum container Probe wash secondary vacuum container with
assembly connector located at the upper end of the SV18.
115-014542-00 Wash buffer split flow block. including seven-way branch block and
connectors
115-014502-00 Dispersion aspiration including dispersion multiple way, supporter,
collecting assembly connectors and their corresponding labels
located at the back of the analyzer close to
SDM.
115-021418-00 Shielding cover hinge The hinge assembly connecting the front
assembly (BM10) shielding cover with the frame used only for the
front shielding cover.
082-001668-00 Dust-proof silicone strip Dust-proof silicone strip for the front shielding
cover.
082-001679-00 Rubber strip. Silicone Dust-proof silicone strip for the back shielding
strip(gray) cover.
082-001667-00 Sealing strip (white) Dust-proof sponge for the front and back
shielding cover.
041-012781-00 Weight used for weighing sensor calibration
115-012464-00 BM10 Primary vacuum including primary vacuum container, cap,
container assembly floater, connector and the waste discharge
valve assembly at the lower side.
115-012442-00 Dispersion syringe assembly including syringe bracket, drive
assembly(optical coupler and motor included)
and connector.
115-012030-00 Dispersion dispensing including dispersion dispensing multiple way,
collecting assembly supporter, connectors and their corresponding
labels located at the back of the analyzer close
to SDM.
115-012016-00 Second gripper drive assembly Only refer to the drive structure, finger and arm
excluded.
115-012014-00 Sample probe drive assembly Only refer to the drive structure, sample probe
excluded.
115-012013-00 Probe assembly Sample probe and reagent probe
115-012011-00 Reagent probe drive assembly Only refer to the drive structure, sample probe
excluded.
115-012010-00 Mixing presser assembly Dispersion dispensing probes pass through the
lower side of the dispersion dispensing pulley.
115-012006-00 Dispersion Aspirating Drive including motor, optical coupler, straight guide
Assembly track and their corresponding mounting base.
115-012000-00 Reaction liquid mixing Mixing assembly
assembly
115-011999-00 Wash well assembly Sample/reagent wash well with connector.


115-011992-00 Reagent carousel high-speed Reagent carousel drive assembly including
drive assembly vibration damper plate, synchronous belt,
motor assembly, sponge and the fixing plate for
the driving device.
115-011977-00 First Gripper Assembly Only including the finger
115-011974-00 BM10 Fluidic outlet assembly including Fluidic outlet bracket and waste
connector welds, DI water connector excluded.
801-BA80-00242-00 Long stroke reflective optical All the reflective optical couplers for the
coupler analyzer is the long stroke ones including the
optical coupler for the shielding cover
assembly.
801-BA80-00077-00 Pressure gauge assembly (with Mechanical pressure gauge with connector used
connector) to measure the negative pressure of the
primary vacuum container.
115-021471-00 Waste tank assembly including low concentration container, cap,
floater switch and 7barbed fittings and seal
ring; refer to Waste Tank in the fluidic
diagram.
801-BA80-00075-00 Reagent syringe drive module including reagent syringe drive motor, optical
coupler but syringe exclude.
041-005842-00 Discarding tube A Do not confuse Discarding tube A with B. Note
the A/B mark on the tube.
041-005843-00 Discarding tube B Do not confuse Discarding tube A with B. Note
the A/B mark on the tube.
801-BA80-00047-00 Syringe 1ml Sample/Reagent Syringes
801-BA80-00115-00 Sealing ring, O-shape, used for probe wash vacuum container assembly
36.52.65, EPDM, A70, black and photometer assembly, black,
36.5X2.65.Request PN including 5:
049-000273-00 Rubber cover screw rubber cover on the panel
043-002158-00 Spike Located at the lower side the substrate bottle
used to pierce the bottle.
043-001772-00 Substrate holder Used to hold the substrate bottles; the
substrate bottle retainer on the upper side is
not included.
115-021420-00 Substrate holder assembly Used to hold the substrate bottles including the
substrate bottle retainer on the upper side.
033-000287-00 Torsion spring The torsion spring of the substrate bottle
retainer on the upper side of the substrate
holder.
042-005018-00 Front door hinge2 Please refer to the photo in Service manual
042-005015-00 Front door hinge1 Please refer to the photo in Service manual
041-004693-00 Dispersion Aspirating probes Aspirating probes
041-004686-00 Dispersion Dispense probe Dispensing probe
041-004625-00 Spring guide rod Anti-bumping spring guide rod for
sample/reagent probe
033-000209-00 Air Used to support the front brown shielding cover.
spring.Q8/18-60-206B-B200N


033-000162-00 Vertical anti-collision spring Vertical anti-collision spring for the first and
second gripper
033-000161-00 Z-axis relieving spring Holding spring for the finger of the gripper to
prevent the first gripper from falling off after
the its motor stops due to power-failure.
033-000108-00 Anti-collision spring Anti-collision spring for the sample/reagent
probe
801-BA80-00218-00 Air Used to support the back shielding cover.
spring.YQ6/15-84-235(B-B)-80
N(10N)
024-000342-00 Electromagnet 25kgf Located in the drawer structure, used to draw
the drawer.
024-000111-00 Sensor Temperature 5Kohm Ambient temperature sensor
B3470K Cylindrical
801-BA30-00088-00 Sensor temperature 5Kohm Reagent refrigeration temperature sensor
B3470K with threads
009-002842-00 Air Bubble Detection Optical Located in the substrate preheating assembly to
Coupler detect if there are air bubbles when substrate is
injected. After changing it, perform air bubble
detection calibration.
009-002206-00 Correlative optical coupler (L) The home and middle position optical coupler
for X axis structure of the first gripper. 2 are
used for the cuvette loader unit. Note the mark
on the material:PHO (L)/C002206, which is
different from the reflective optical coupler
(S)mainly in 2~3times longer cable. .
801-BA80-00051-00 Correlative optical coupler (S) All the correlative optical coupler used in
several positions. Request according to the part
no. Please note the mark on the
material:PHO(S)/C002204 Its cable is shorter
than that of the reflective optical coupler(L).
801-BA10-00141-00 Kleohn14271Teflonwasher,142 The washer at the inlet/outlet of the Clog
71 washer detection T-piece assembly
115-012109-00 BM10Basic Accessory Different from the accessory kit for the newly
kit(domestic) installed analyzer: sample/reagent probe not
included.
023-000385-00 Computer Q67 i5-2400 4GB N/A
500GB Win 7-Pro. Serial port
card
023-000225-00 LCD Monitor, 17 1280*1024 N/A
with Touch screen.
023-000109-00 LCD 17" 1280*1024 N/A
801-BA10-00140-00 Round-head needle, Unclogging the probes

0.25+/-0.01mm*125mm
801-BA80-00234-00 DB44 Serial port cable Communication cable


BA31-20-41662 Buffer cushion used to buffer the force when the shielding
cover is closed for shielding cover and SDM rack
supply unit .
023-000332-00 Serial port card, 4 ports N/A
RS-232 serial port. PCI card
006-000217-00 Filter power 250Vac 16A Power supply filter located at the front end of
the AC drive board.
115-014446-00 Substrate mixing presser Substrate dispensing probe passes through it,
assembly used to mixing the substrate when it is
dispensed.
115-020808-00 Wash buffer tank cap including the straight connector and its lower
assembly part.
115-020748-00 Wash buffer bubble detection Wash buffer bubble detection optical coupler
optical coupler assembly Recalibrate it after changing it.
009-003310-00 Weighing sensor(with cable) Weighing sensor .Recalibrate it after changing
it.
009-001918-00 Weight detection board The wire for connecting Weight detection board
communication wire and weighing sensor.
801-BA80-00252-00 Rotation speed detection Auto rotation speed check for the brushless DC
optical coupler for dispersion motor is invalidated to solve the such errors as
dispensing and mixing belt rupture, wrong alarm. One optical
coupler is used to measure rotation speed.
031-000230-00 Synchronous belt. 290MXL025 New model with color: no crumbing, high
reliability.
115-020846-00 Diluted wash solution level Liquid level sensor assembly for 2L buffer tank
sensor assembly
082-000186-00 Sealing ring, O-shape Black seal ring at the lower side of the substrate
spike.
041-010074-00 BM Diluted Wash Solution Tank 2Lwash Buffer tank
082-001527-00 Single tube pump head, three Pump head of the single tube pump for
roller, single channel aspirating the wash buffer
115-012017-00 Second Gripper Assembly including the arm and gripper
509B-10-05996 Wire three core international N/A
power cord 10A 250V 1.6
meter
033-000151-00 The spring of the gripper Gripper open-close spring
041-001285-00 cap of the buffer tank cap connecting the tube of the buffer tank of
the wash buffer.
801-BA40-00171-00 Bar code scanning antifogging Reagent carousel Bar code scanning antifogging
heater heater
023-000738-00 built in laser beam scanner. Reagent bar code reader
023-000551-00 Hand held bar code N/A
reader(USB)
801-BA80-00128-00 External vacuum pump drive External vacuum pump drive board
board


082-000354-00 Vacuum pump vacuum 220V external vacuum pump
degree13.33Kpa.
Flow:100L/min220V
BX50-21-101112 Semi-conductive cooler Single cooler
801-BA40-00172-00 Bar code scanning antifogging Reagent carousel Bar code scanning antifogging
temperature protection temperature protection switch
switch
801-BA30-00089-00 Overheat protection switch Reaction carousel temperature protection
switch same as BS-300
115-014447-00 Substrate preheating including preheating module and bubble
assembly detection optical coupler. After change it,
recalibration is required.
115-012270-00 Reagent antifogging heating use for reagent barcode scanning with glass
assembly window, heater and temperature protection
switch.
115-012051-00 Substrate preheating module Substrate preheating module inside of the black
substrate preheating assembly.
115-012002-00 Dispersion assembly Dispersion assembly consists of dispersion
chamber and drive assembly, aspirating
assembly, dispensing assembly including
dispersion carousel, drive motor, dispensing
assembly, aspirating assembly and probes.
115-011996-00 Reaction carousel It consists of the reaction carousel and its
assembly(220V) bottom plate, including drive assembly, support
post, reaction carousel heater and carousel
body.
115-011990-00 Reagent carousel including peltiers, two fans, bracket and
refrigeration module radiators.
009-003077-00 Burkert valve cable Cable for Burkert valve SV30,SV31 and SV32.
The substrate valve requires high degree
cleanliness. The cable is separated from the
valve body.
009-001910-00 Gripper finger motor Cable for the second gripper motor connecting
connecting cable with motor at one end and with the
probe/mixer conversion board at the other end.
009-001909-00 Gripper optical coupler Connecting with the two optical coupler on the
connecting cable 1 arm at one end and with the probe/mixer
conversion board at the other end. Label
HAND-PHO-OPH and HAND-PHO-EMT are on the
cable.
009-001907-00 Gripper optical coupler Cable for the gripper vertical anti bumping
connecting cable 2 optional coupler connecting with the optical
coupler on the arm at one end and with the
probe/mixer conversion board at the other end.
Label HAND-PHO-V is on the cable.
009-001848-00 Conversion line of correlative Used for the correlative optical coupler on the
optical coupler tray bracket assembly included in the drag
chain and moving along with the tray bracket.


009-001869-00 Conversion line of reflective Used for the reflective optical coupler on the
optical coupler tray bracket assembly included in the drag
chain and moving along with the tray bracket.
801-BA40-00306-00 tube.PTFEID1.5mmXOD2.5mm inner diameter1.5mm, outer
X100M(5M) diameter2.5mm;milk white dispersion
aspirating tubes.
801-BA40-00261-00 Tube. precision soft Soft tube, inner diameter4mm,outer
PU(Polyether)tube 4mm*6mm diameter6mmused for the tubes of
transparent, 5m sample/reagent probe wash.
801-BA40-00272-00 Tube.1/16"X1/8"(16FT) Thin soft tube. used to connect the wash buffer
branch block to dispersion dispensing collecting
assembly; the tube from dispersion dispensing
collecting assembly to dispensing probes;
dispersion aspiration collecting assembly to
peristaltic pump.
082-001530-00 Single tube pump tube Wash buffer aspiration pump tube
082-001171-00 Substrate tube-connector refer to fluidic diagram DZ01 including tube and
assembly,DZ01(customized) the connectors at the two ends.
assembly,DZ07(customized) the connector at one end. Substrate is
discharged at the other end.
082-001324-00 Dispersion Pump Tubes Dispersion Pump Tubes includs6tubes.
105-004838-00 acid wash solution used to clean Substrate Tubes
105-004840-00 free enzyme solution Used for check dispersion wash effect.
B(3ug/ml)
105-004841-00 free enzyme solution Used for check initial position of photoelectric
C(0.02ug/ml) collection
105-004842-00 free enzyme solution Used for System Performance
D(0.0003ug/ml)
115-021938-00 Reaction liquid mixing motor Reaction liquid mixing motor plus belt wheel
and belt wheel assembly assembly
115-021939-00 Tube for connecting the N/A
reagent syringe to reagent
probe
115-021940-00 Tube for connecting the N/A
sample syringe to sample
probe
115-021941-00 Feeder Fingers assembly N/A


115-021945-00 6 months Maintenance kit N/A
(domestic)
115-021946-00 12 months Maintenance kit N/A
(domestic)
012-000015-00 Reagent carousel water proof Reagent carousel water proof optical coupler
optical coupler
009-001882-00 Dispersion carousel Dispersion carousel temperature sensor cable
temperature sensor cable
009-001883-00 Reaction carousel Reaction carousel temperature sensor cable
temperature sensor cable
115-022192-00 Tube connecting collecting Tube from collecting block to aspirating probe
block to aspirating and the connectors at the two ends. Refer to
probe1,380mm fluidic diagram CX01.

18.2 Changeable parts for SDM

051-001000-00 BA2K track control drive N/A
board PCBA
801-BA80-00098-00 Main control board (SDM) Main Control Board (SDM)
801-BA80-00241-00 On-line Conversion Board Two Pcs, one located at SDM marked
(SDM) with"CADB-LCB"; the other located at the front
track connecting PCBL2 and NL2.
801-BA80-00236-00 Network interface conversion Located at the rear of the SDM, providing serial
board ports to connect the computer.
801-BA80-00237-00 On-line Conversion Board Only one in SDM module marked with
(Rack Transfer Unit) "MCB-LCB(1)".
801-BA80-00238-00 Control Drive Board (SDM) Located in SDM
801-BA80-00066-00 Sample carousel motor Rerun buffer motor
assembly(with belt wheel)
801-BA80-00244-00 Track motor assembly with belt conveyer motor located at the front track
belt wheel for the six lanes
801-BA80-00245-00 Lane change part stop motor Lane change stopper station
with stop lever
801-BA80-00246-00 42motor assembly with belt Scanning push-out part, aspirate positioning
wheel station, return push-out part
801-BA80-00247-00 Lane change part motor
assembly with belt wheel
801-BA80-00249-00 Rack Supply Push-In Part Rack Supply Push-In Part, STAT Push-Back Part
motor assembly with belt
wheel
115-008445-01 Rack Storage Push-in Motor Rack Storage Push-In Part
Assembly with cam
801-BA80-00251-00 Retrieval channel push in Retrieval channel push in part and scanning
motor with belt wheel push-in part
801-BA80-00258-00 Stopper motor assembly of used for the three buffer stoppers.
normal lane
042-002124-01 SDM left panel N/A
042-006947-00 SDM rear panel N/A
042-006951-00 SDM front panel N/A
042-006955-00 SDM front panel assembly N/A
042-006958-00 SDM side panel N/A
042-006981-00 SDM rear panel assembly N/A
042-007159-00 SDM right panel weldment N/A
043-001766-00 Left transparent cover Without sampling hole located on the left of the
track
043-001838-00 Right transparent With sampling hole located on the right of the
cover(LUNA2000) track
043-000705-01 Rack Supply unit transparent N/A
cover


043-000706-01 Storage unit cover N/A
043-000707-00 Scanning area cover N/A
043-000708-01 Buffer unit cover N/A
115-008782-00 Supply unit cover N/A
010-000067-00 SWITCH cut-off device Power switch of the main unit located at the
250V30Ainstalled with screws. back of the SDM
801-BA40-00256-00 SWITCH cut-off device 250V Switch of SDM
13A installed with screws.
801-BA80-00243-00 BS-800Mmain switch(250V70A) Main switch on the back panel of SDM
115-014249-00 Ordinary stopper N/A
assembly(ba2k)
115-014250-00 STAT stopper assembly(ba2k) N/A
801-BA30-00128-00 Right pusher spring Rack Supply Push-In Part
801-BA30-00129-00 Left pusher spring Rack Supply Push-In Part
801-BA80-00230-00 Spring of track tensioning Used along with track motor assembly.
mechanism
801-BA80-00231-00 Reset spring of Lane Change
Part
801-BA80-00232-00 Magnetic sensor assembly Sensor for identifying sample rack type located
at the rack supply unit.
801-BA80-00233-00 Stroke switch Rack supply unit
801-BA80-00117-00 SWITCH, Button Compatible with BS-800. STAT and Run switch
switch16mm, with yellow on the SDM
light, AC/DC24V
801-BA80-00241-00 Short stroke reflective optical 1. Used in several positions. Request according
coupler to the PN.
2. The method to differentiate the long stroke
optical coupler from the short stroke one: The
short stroke optical coupler has a black dot on
its white bottom while long stoke optical
coupler has not; MY02 mark is printed on the
side of the short stroke optical coupler.
801-BA80-00242-00 Long stroke reflective optical 1. Used in several positions. Request according
coupler to the PN.
2. The method to differentiate the long stroke
optical coupler from the short stroke one: The
short stroke optical coupler has a black dot on
its white bottom while long stoke optical
coupler has not; MY02 mark is printed on the
side of the short stroke optical coupler.
801-BA80-00252-00 Conversion line of aspirate Used in several positions; request according to
positioning reflective optical the part no.
coupler
801-BA80-00253-00 Routine sample rack 5pcsper pack, compatible with BS-800M and
BS-2000.
801-BA80-00254-00 Control sample rack Compatible with BS-800M and BS-2000.
801-BA80-00255-00 Calibrator sample rack Compatible with BS-800M and BS-2000.


801-BA80-00256-00 STAT sample rack Compatible with BS-800M and BS-2000.
801-BA80-00257-00 Manual rerun sample rack Compatible with BS-800M and BS-2000.
801-BA80-00177-00 24V/6A power supply board Compatible with BS-800M and BS-2000.
PCBA
BA31-20-41662 Buffer cushion Used for the low-end BS series biochemistry
analyzers
043-000664-00 grid tooth chain of the rack 10 pcs per pack.
buffer unit(FRU,10 pcs)

A Hardware system wiring diagram
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer A-1

A Hardware system wiring diagram
BM10 Photon counting board

Serial port cable PCBA
COM3 SDM borrowed from J5
E BS-2000 051-000743-00 24
Serial port Communicat
x BM10Control drive board Motor
cable Ethernet ion Ethernet X-FPC Y-FPC Z-FPC V5 Optical
c J1 PCBA(vortexer control drive coupler
PC BA80 Port h cable conversion cable J7 V
conversion board Ethernet board J10 board) Second gripper step in motor
a Communicat Second gripper optical coupler
Ethernet cable 051-000376-00 cable J3 051-001413-00 conversion board
n Ethernet ion Ethernet 24V indicat BA80 Negative voltage Reagent
g J12 J4 BM10 control drive board Electro
cable conversion cable BM10 main controlJ6 24V or probe/mixer J2 probe level sense
e board
J1 PCBA(auto load control drive magnet board J3 board(sample)
board J10 ic lock
r J2 board) 051- 051-001092-00
Serial port cable J5 J10 Negative voltage Reagent
000210-00
COM4 051-001413-00 J2 probe level sense
BA2KAnalog power 5V/D12/E12 J1 BM10 control drive board J3 board(reagent)
D12/E1 PCBA(reagent control drive 051-001092-00
conversion board 2 J1 J3 Probe clogging detection board PCBA
051-001023-00 5V/C12 board ) 051-000218-00
Reagent
J10 051-001413-00 J7
bar code
Main power J14
BA40 power J2 J3 BM10 Control drive board
switch J15 J3
supply assembly J4 J6 J1 PCBAdispersion control
J7
SDM P P drive
J8J7 1 2 J3 J6
BM10 DC power conversion J1 J10 J4 24V
Bu Power switch J1 051-001413-00 J5 fan
12
A24
J10
V
L/N/PE
s- L N board PCBA cooler
ba BM10 051-000755-00 J11 J17
BA80 reagent refrigeration V
r Power switch board PCBA 24V valve
12 Pump/Ind
B12
J1 C24V J22(C24V) 051-000207-00

V
Power supply B12V connected to reagent B12

refrigeration board F12V/B12V V J2 V icator
L/N F12 External
J2 V J1 Air butt- 220V power
24 vacuum
joint pump socket
J1 V
BA80 pressure detection board
AC drive BM10 fluidic temperature 24 J1 051-000216-00
J17
board control board PCBA V Temperature Heater(substrate)
PE 051-000747-00 sensor
J30 J5 Temperature
earthing Temperature collection sensor
AC/DC Heater(reaction
board
insulating carousel/dispersion carousel)
220
parts
V
A-2 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

B Fluidic Diagram
CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer B-1

B Fluidic Diagram
branch block
CZ34 T337 T338 CZ35
4
T327 T328 tube ID <1/8"
SV2 CZ24 CZ25
3
T336 tube ID 1/8"&4mm Wash buffer
7 CZ14 T317 T318 CZ15 substrate
2
tube ID 1/4",3/8",7mm
T335 T326 SV26 T307 T308 CZ05
vacuum
tube ID 1/2"&1/2"+
1
waste
CZ04 T606
T605
T325 T316 SV25
SV11 Clogging detection T517 T607
T515 T516 Substrate
CZ33 ZQ11 T511 ZQ12 T513 T514 ZQ13
CX08 T412 T408 CX04 T608
4
T315 T306 SV24 T512 T309 T319 T329 T339 heating block
CZ23 CX07 DZ06
SR10 T411 T407
3
DZ07
CZ13 T305 SV12 T525
CX06
CX03
T523 T524 T410 SV32
2
T406
CZ03 T522 ZQ22 T609
ZQ21 T521 ZQ14 CX05
T334 T324 T314 T304 CX02
1
ZQ23 T409 T405
SR11
SR20 Dispersion aspiration
T333 T323 T313 T303 SV14 CX01 DZ05
T413 branch block
ZQ41 Dispersion Reagent
CZ32 T541 T542 ZQ42 carousel carousel T414 T401 T402 T403 T404
T526 T518
Reagent Sample T415 SR30
CZ12
T506 T507 T536 T537
SV15 probe probe T416
T332 SV23 CZ22 ZQ51
Probe wash branch ZQ52 T543
CZ02 T551 T552 T553 Sample CX09
T322 SV22 block Reagent probe T703 CX09 CX10 T417 Substrate
T331 T535 CX10 DZ04
T505 CX11 T418 CX14 pump
ZQ03 ZQ40 T555 ZQ53
wash well wash CX11 CX13
T556 CX12 T419
T321 T312 SV21 well F02 CX12
SV17 T554 T544 T420 CX15
ZQ43 T421 SV31
ZQ54 T704
T311 T302 SV20 ZQ44 T546 T545 Vacuum CX16
CZ31 F04 CX17
pressure P09 T422
SV16
CZ21 T557 T547 Vacuum sensor CX18
T301 P04 P05 pressure gauge ZK01 T423
CZ11 T734 DZ03
T736 ZK04 T732 F01 T781
Probe wash ZK02 T735
CZ01 vent CX19T424
vacuum SV10 T733 ZK03 T701 T702 T731
FS08 FS07 CX20 SV30
ZQ01 ZQ39
container F03 ZK10 T425
T571 ZQ32
T330 F21
T310 T300 T500 T530 T706 T708 F05 DZ02
T320
F20 Vacuum tank ZQ34
T573 T741 T779 Substrate Substrate
T244 T574
Wash buffer confluence tank F08 ZQ33
T775 T774 bottle 1 bottle 2
QH01 T572 T742 T705
SV18 SV03 F07 DZ01
T707 P08
T243 F22 T743 T721 T711
F10
SV02 SV05 F09 T751 Primary
T776 T777 ZQ36
F11 vacuum pump
T778 T601 T602
T752 ZQ35
T214 W74 ZQ37
T232 T233 T603 T604
W61
T224 T231 ZX05
ZX06 QH02 T771 Waste pump T770 T710
ZX02 ZX04 F06
T234 P01 P07 T709
T772 T773
ZX07
T235 ZX09 W75 W62
T212 T222
T236
graphic
T206 T242 T761 2 position two Floater
T211 T221 ZX08 F30 OUT IN way valve Pump heaed switch
ZX01 ZX03 T762
T237
ZX10
F31 2 position
FS02 T782
ZX11 T763 three way Syringe pump Peristaltic pump
NO
ZX21 COM NC
T201 T202 FS01 valve
Wash buffer tank 1 Wash buffer tank 2 T241
Buffer tank of Waste outlet
wash buffer (2L)
3.0
B-2 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

P/N: 046-005800-00(1.0)

CL 2000i 2200i

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CL 2000i 2200i

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CL-2000i/CL-2200i

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer i

, , , , , are the registered

ii CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer iii

This warranty shall not extend to:

iv CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Fax: +86 755 26582934 26582500

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer v

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Preface-1

Safety Information-2 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

When you Text Then

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-3

Electric Shock Hazards

Moving Parts Hazards

Safety Information-4 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Sample, Calibrator and Control Hazards

Reagent and Wash Solution Hazards

Environmental Biohazards -- Liquid Waste Disposal

Environmental Biohazards -- Instrument Disposal

Fire and Explosion Hazards

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-5

Removal of Analyzer from Use for Repair or Disposal

Safety Information-6 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Electromagnetic Noise Precautions

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-7

Maintenance and Servicing Precautions

Safety Information-8 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Reagent, Calibrator and Control Precautions

Sample Handling System

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-9

Data Archiving Precautions

External Equipment Precautions

External vacuum pump Module Precautions

Tube and Liquid Container Precautions

Safety Information-10 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Instrument Labels and Silkscreen

Non-Warning Labels and Silkscreen

In Vitro Diagnostic Equipment

Environment-friendly use period

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-11

Main Power Switch

Power Switch of Analyzing Unit

SDM Power Switch

Safety Information-12 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Dispersion Aspiration Tubing Collecting Block

Dispersion Dispensing Tubing Collecting Block

Interfaces for fluid connection

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-13

The fluidic interfaces for optional configuration are shown as follows:

Safety Information-14 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Moving Parts Warning

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer Safety Information-15

Probe Collision Warning

External Air Pump Connection

Shielding Cover Warning

Safety Information-16 CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer

Intellectual Property Statement............................................................................................................................................ ii

CL-2000i&CL-2200i Chemiluminescence Immunoassay Analyzer I

External vacuum pump Module Precautions ..............................................................................................10

1 System Description 1-1

1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................................................................. 1-2

2 Test Procedure 2-1